!!!catia V5R12 Mechanical Design Solutions 1

Part Design
Version 5 Release 12
Dassault Systmes. 1994-2003 All rights reserved.
Part Design
Preface Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions What's New? Getting Started Entering the Part Design Workbench Creating a Pad Drafting a Face Filleting an Edge Editing the Pad Mirroring the Part Sketching a Circle from a Face Creating a Pocket Shelling the Part Basic Tasks Opening a New CATPart Document Sketch-Based Features Pad Sub-Elements of a Sketch Up to Next Pads Up to Last Pad Up to Plane Pad Up to Surface Pad Pad from Surface Not Normal to Sketch Pad Multi- Pad Drafted Filleted Pad Pocket Multi-Length Pocket Drafted Filleted Pocket Thin Solids Shaft Groove
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/prtugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 5)10/18/2004 7:42:43 PM
Part Design
Hole Locating Holes Threaded Hole Rib More About Ribs Slot Stiffener Multi-sections Solid Removed Multi-sections Solid Solid Combine Dress-Up Features Edge Fillet Variable Radius Fillet Reshaping Corners Face-Face Fillet Tritangent Fillet Chamfer Basic Draft Advanced Draft Variable Angle Draft Draft with Parting Element Draft from Reflect Lines Shell Thickness Thread Remove Faces Replace Face Surface-Based Features Split Thick Surface Close Surface Sew Surface Transformation Features Translation Rotation Symmetry Mirror Rectangular Pattern Circular Pattern User Pattern Exploding Patterns Scaling Reference Elements Creating Points
Part Design
Creating Lines Creating Planes Using Surfaces and Curves Joining Surfaces or Curves Extrapolating Surfaces Extracting Geometry Creating Intersections Creating Projections Creating Boundary Curves Modifying Features Editing parts, bodies, features Reordering Features Updating Parts Deleting Features Constraints Setting 3D Constraints Setting constraints Modifying Constraints Mean Dimensions Replacing Elements Replacing a Surface Replacing a Body Moving Sketches Changing a Sketch Support Displaying and Editing Properties Part Properties Bodies Properties Features Properties Annotations Creating a Text With Leader Flag Notes Handling Parts in a Multi-Document Environment Advanced Tasks Associating Bodies Inserting a Body Inserting in a Body Assembling Bodies Intersecting Bodies Adding Bodies Removing Bodies Trimming Bodies Remove Lump Changing a Boolean Operation Into Another One
Part Design
Tools Editing a list of Elements Scanning the Part and Defining In Work Objects Performing a Draft Analysis Performing a Surfacic Curvature Analysis Tap-Thread Analysis Creating Datums Applying a Material Extracting Geometry Parents and Children Axis System Publishing Elements PowerCopy Creating PowerCopies Instantiating PowerCopies Saving PowerCopies into a Catalog Reusing your Design Cutting, Copying, Pasting Workbench Description Part Design Menu Bar Sketch-Based Features Toolbar Dress-Up Features Toolbar Surface-Based Features Toolbar Transformation Features Toolbar Reference Elements Toolbar Boolean Operations Toolbar Sketcher Toolbar Constraints Toolbar Analysis Toolbar Annotations Toolbar Tools Toolbar Insert Toolbar Miscellaneous Symbols Symbols Reflecting an Incident in the Geometry Building Specification Tree Customizing Tree and Geometry View General Settings Constraint Appearance CATPart Document Tolerancing Display
Part Design
Manipulators View/Annotation Plane Glossary Index
Preface
The Version 5 Part Design application makes it possible to design precise 3D mechanical parts with an intuitive and flexible user interface, from sketching in an assembly context to iterative detailed design. Version 5 Part Design application will enable you to accommodate design requirements for parts of various complexities, from simple to advanced. This application, which combines the power of feature-based design with the flexibility of a Boolean approach, offers a highly productive and intuitive design environment with multiple design methodologies, such as post-design and local 3D parameterization. As a scalable product, Part Design can be used in cooperation with other current or future companion products such as Assembly Design and Generative Drafting. The widest application portfolio in the industry is also accessible through interoperability with CATIA Solutions Version 4 to enable support of the full product development process from initial concept to product in operation. The Part Design User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create a part. There are several ways of creating a part and this book aims at illustrating the several stages of creation you may encounter.
Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions
Preface
Preface
The Version 5 Part Design application makes it possible to design precise 3D mechanical parts with an intuitive and flexible user interface, from sketching in an assembly context to iterative detailed design. Version 5 Part Design application will enable you to accommodate design requirements for parts of various complexities, from simple to advanced. This application, which combines the power of feature-based design with the flexibility of a Boolean approach, offers a highly productive and intuitive design environment with multiple design methodologies, such as post-design and local 3D parameterization. As a scalable product, Part Design can be used in cooperation with other current or future companion products such as Assembly Design and Generative Drafting. The widest application portfolio in the industry is also accessible through interoperability with CATIA Solutions Version 4 to enable support of the full product development process from initial concept to product in operation. The Part Design User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create a part. There are several ways of creating a part and this book aims at illustrating the several stages of creation you may encounter.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugpr01.htm10/18/2004 7:42:56 PM
Using This Guide
Using This Guide

This book is intended for the user who needs to become quickly familiar with Part Design product. The user should be familiar with basic Version 5 concepts such as document windows, standard and view toolbars. To get the most out of this guide, we suggest you start reading and performing the step-bystep tutorial Getting Started. This tutorial will show you how to create a basic part from scratch. Once you have finished, you should move on to the next sections dealing with the handling of CATPart data, then the creation and modification of various types of features you will need to construct parts. This guide also presents other Part Design capabilities allowing you to design complex parts. You can also take a look at the sections describing the Part Design Workbench at the end of the guide. To perform the scenarios, you will use sample documents contained in the C:\Program Files\Dassault Systmes\B12doc\online\prtug\samples folder. When samples belong to capabilities common to different products, those samples will be found in the C:\Program Files\Dassault Systmes\B12doc\online\cfyug\samples folder. [ Up ] [ Next ]
Where to Find More Information

Prior to reading this book, we recommend that you read the Infrastructure User's Guide and the Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide. Other complementary product guides such as the Assembly Design User's Guide, the Wireframe and Surface User's Guide, the Generative Drafting User's Guide and the Product Knowledge Template User's Guide can prove useful too. Click to find out more about the Conventions used in this guide. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Conventions
Conventions
Certain conventions are used in CATIA, ENOVIA & DELMIA documentation to help you recognize and understand important concepts and specifications. The following text conventions may be used: The titles of CATIA documents appear in this manner throughout the text. File -> New identifies the commands to be used. The use of the mouse differs according to the type of action you need to perform. Use this mouse button, whenever you read Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...) Click (icons, dialog box buttons, tabs, selection of a location in the document window, ...) Double-click Shift-click Ctrl-click Check (check boxes) Drag Drag and drop (icons onto objects, objects onto objects) Drag Move Right-click (to select contextual menu)
Graphic conventions are denoted as follows: indicates the estimated time to accomplish a task. indicates a target of a task. indicates the prerequisites. indicates the scenario of a task. indicates tips indicates a warning. indicates information.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/icons_C2/conventions.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 7:43:22 PM
Conventions
indicates basic concepts. indicates methodological information. indicates reference information. indicates information regarding settings, customization, etc. indicates the end of a task. indicates functionalities that are new or enhanced with this Release. Enhancements can also be identified by a blue-colored background in the lefthand margin or on the text itself. indicates functionalities that are P1-specific. indicates functionalities that are P2-specific. indicates functionalities that are P3-specific. allows you to switch back the full-window viewing mode.
These icons in the table of contents correspond to the entries or mode. "Site Map". "Split View" mode. "What's New". "Preface". "Getting Started". "Basic Tasks". "User Tasks" or the "Advanced Tasks". "Workbench Description". "Customizing". "Reference".
Conventions
"Methodology". "Glossary". "Index".
What's New?
What's New?
New Functionalities
Solid Combine This new command lets you create a solid by computing the intersection of two or more virtually extruded profiles. Remove Faces Faces of different types can be removed in order to make parts more simple prior to computing finite elements for example. Replace Face You can now reshape a part by extruding its faces onto external faces. List of Elements A generic mechanism available from any command allowing multi-selection for input elements lets you edit the list of these elements
Enhanced Functionalities
Sketch-Based Features
Shaft You can now revolve surfaces about axes using the Shaft command. Groove You can now revolve surfaces about axes using the Groove command. Hole Tolerancing dimensions can now be defined for hole diameters.
Dress-Up Features
Edge Fillet When the application detects that edges other than the edges you wish to fillet are affected by the operation, now it issues an error message asking you if you wish to select the edge as the "keep edge" or not. Edge Fillet When the update process detects that sharp edges interrupt fillet operations, it is possible to continue filleting just by selecting an edge adjacent to the edge you wish to fillet.
Tools
Publish
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwn.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:43:40 PM
What's New?
It is now possible to make all the features of a body or part body publicly available. Creation Contextual Commands Contextual commands for creating wireframe and surfacic elements, commands such as "Create Line", "Create Plane", but also "Create Join", "Create Extrapol" or "Create Extract", "Create Intersections", "Create Projections", "Create Boundary" are now available from diverse existing capabilities: r "Pad not normal to Sketch Plane", "Up to Plane Pad", "Up to Surface Pad"
r
"Pocket" "Shaft" "Groove" "Hole" "Rib" "Slot" "Edge Fillet", "Face-Face Fillet" (Limiting Elements), (Spine), (Hold Curve), "Variable Radius Fillet" (Points), (Limiting Elements), "Tritangent Fillet" "Draft Angle" (Pulling Directions), (Limiting Elements), "Variable Angle Draft" (Points), "Draft From Reflect Lines" (Pulling Direction), (Parting Elements), (Limiting Elements), "Advanced Draft" (Neutral Elements), (Pulling Direction) "Rectangular Pattern", "Circular Pattern", "User Pattern" "Split" "Mirror" "Thick Surface" "Close Surface"
Customizing
Customizing General Settings The "Delete Referenced Sketches" option has been renamed as "Delete exclusive parents". Now, when this option is checked, the Delete dialog box inherits this setting: the Delete exclusive parents option is active in the Delete dialog box as well. Customizing the Tree and the Geometry Views A new option lets you customize the display of the geometry of the current body only. A new option lets you define the size of axis systems in mm.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwn.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:43:40 PM
Getting Started
Getting Started
Before getting into the detailed instructions for using CATIA Version 5 parts, the following tutorial aims at giving you a feel as to what you can do with the product. It provides a stepby-step scenario showing you how to use key functionalities. The main tasks described in this section are: Entering the Part Design Workbench Creating a Pad Drafting a Face Filleting an Edge Editing the Pad Mirroring the Part Sketching a Circle from a Face Creating a Pocket Shelling the Part
All together, the tasks should take about ten minutes to complete. The final part will look like this:
Now, let's get to sketching the profile!
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs01.htm10/18/2004 7:43:56 PM
Entering the Part Design Workbench

This first task shows you how to enter the Part Design workbench.
1. Select the File -> New... commands (or click the New
icon).
The New dialog box is displayed, allowing you to choose the type of document you need. 2. Select Part in the List of Types field and click OK. The Part Design workbench is loaded and an empty CATPart document opens.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs02.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:07 PM
The commands for creating and editing features are available in the workbench toolbar. Now, let's perform the following task Creating a Pad.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating a Pad
Creating a Pad
This task will show you how to create a pad, that is extrude a profile sketched in the Sketcher workbench. For more about this workbench, please refer to Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide Version 5. Open the GettingStarted1_R04.CATPart document to open the required profile.
Your profile belongs to Sketch.1 and was created on plane xy. It looks like this:
1.
Select the profile if not already selected and click the Pad icon
The Pad Definition dialog box appears. Default options allow you to create a basic pad.
Creating a Pad
2.
As you prefer to create a larger pad, enter 60 mm in the Length field. The application previews the pad to be created.
3.
Click OK. The pad is created. The extrusion is performed in a direction which is normal to the sketch plane. The application displays this creation in the specification tree:
Creating a Pad
The application lets you control the display of some of the part components. To know more about the components you can display or hide, refer to Customizing the Tree and Geometry Views. For more about pads, refer to Pads, 'Up to Next' Pads, 'Up to Last' Pads, 'Up to Plane' Pads, 'Up to Surface' Pads, Pads not Normal to Sketch Plane.
[ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Drafting a Face
Drafting a Face
This task will show you how to draft a face. 1. Click the Draft Angle icon .
The Draft Definition dialog box appears. The application displays the default pulling direction on the part. 2. Select the face as shown by the arrow as the face to be drafted. The application detects all the faces to be drafted. The selected face is now in dark red whereas the other faces are in a lighter red.
3. Click the Selection field of the Neutral Element frame and select the upper face. The neutral element is now displayed in blue, the neutral curve in pink. 4. Enter 9 degrees in the Angle field.
Drafting a Face
5. Click OK. The part is drafted:
For more about drafts, please refer to Basic Draft, and to Draft with Parting Element.
Drafting a Face
Filleting an Edge
Filleting an Edge
In this task you will learn how to use one of the fillet commands designed to fillet edges.
1. Click the Edge Fillet icon
The Edge Fillet Definition dialog box appears. It contains default values.
2.
Select the edge to be filleted, that is, to be rounded.
Clicking Preview lets you see what the default fillet would look like. 3. Enter 7 mm as the new radius value and Click OK. Here is your part:
Filleting an Edge
For more about fillets, please refer to Edge Fillet, Face-Face Fillet, Tritangent Fillet , Variable Radius Fillet.
Editing the Pad
Editing the Pad

Actually, you would like the pad to be thicker. This task shows you how to edit the pad, then how to color the part. 1. Double-click Pad.1. You can do it in the specification tree if you wish.
2. In the Pad Definition dialog box that appears, enter 90 mm as the new length value. 3. Click OK. The part is modified accordingly.
4. Now select Part Body.
Editing the Pad
5. Select the Edit -> Properties command and click the Graphic tab to change the color of your part. 6. Set the color of your choice in the Color combo box and click OK. To have details about how to change graphic properties, please refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5. The part now looks like this:
Mirroring the Part
Mirroring the Part

Now, you are going to duplicate the part using the Mirror capability. This task will show you how easy it is. 1. Select the reference face you need to duplicate the part. Select the face as shown:
2. Click the Mirror icon
The name of this face appears in the Mirroring element field.
3. Click OK. The part is mirrored and the specification tree indicates this operation.
Mirroring the Part
For more about mirror, please refer to Mirror.
Sketching a Circle from a Face

In this task, you will learn how to: q sketch a circle on an existing face
q
use this circle in order to create a pocket
1. Select the upper face to define the working plane.
2. Click the Sketcher icon
to enter the Sketcher workbench. to create a basic circle.
3. Once in the Sketcher workbench, click this Circle icon
4. Click the circle center in the middle of the face and drag the cursor to sketch the circle.
5. Click once you are satisfied with the size of the circle.
6. Click the Exit Sketcher icon
to return to the 3D world. This is your part:
For more about Sketcher elements, please refer to Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide Version 5.
Creating a Pocket
Creating a Pocket
In this task, you will learn a method to create a pocket using the profile you have just created. 1. Select the circle you have just sketched, if it is not already selected. 2. Click the Pocket icon .
The Pocket Definition dialog box is displayed and the application previews a pocket with default parameters.
3. Set the Up to last option to define the limit of your pocket. The application will limit the pocket onto the last possible face, that is the pad bottom. 4. Click OK. This is your pocket:
Creating a Pocket
For more about pockets, please refer to Pocket.
Shelling the Part
Shelling the Part

To end the scenario, you will learn how to shell the part. 1. Select the bottom face of the part.
2. Click the Shell icon
The selected face turns purple and the Shell Definition dialog box appears.
3. Enter 5mm as the inner thickness value. 4. Click OK to shell the part. You have defined a positive value, which means that you are going to obtain a thin part thickness.
Shelling the Part
For more about shells, please refer to Shell. You have finished the scenario. Now, let's take a closer look at the application.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Basic Tasks
Basic Tasks
The basic tasks you will perform in the Part Design workbench are mainly the creation of features and surfaces you will use to create your part. To create features you will sometimes sketch profiles first or use existing features. This section will explain and illustrate how to create various kinds of features and surfaces. The table below lists the information you will find. Opening a New CATPart Document Sketch-Based Features Dress-Up Features Surface-Based Features Transformation Features Reference Elements Using Surfaces and Curves Modifying Features Constraints Replacing Elements Displaying and Editing Properties Annotations Handling Parts in a Multi-Document Environment
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugbt0000.htm10/18/2004 7:45:36 PM
Opening a New CATPart Document

This task shows you how to open a new CATPart document. 1. Select the File -> New commands (or click the New icon).
The New dialog box is displayed, allowing you to choose the type of document you need. 2. Select Part in the List of Types field and click OK. The Part Design workbench is loaded and a CATPart document opens.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugbt0100.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:46:07 PM
The Part Design workbench document is divided into: q the specification tree
q q
the geometry area specific toolbars : for information, please refer to Part Design Workbench
a number of contextual commands available in the specification tree and in the geometry. Remember that these commands can also be accessed from the menu bar. You will notice that the application provides three planes to let you start your design. Actually, designing a part from scratch will first require designing a sketch. Sketching profiles is performed in the Sketcher workbench which is fully integrated into Part Design. To open it, just click the Sketcher icon plane of your choice. and select the work
The Sketcher workbench then provides a large number of tools allowing you to sketch the profiles you need. For more information, refer to CATIA-Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide Version 5.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Features are entities you combine to make up your part. The features presented here are obtained by applying commands on initial profiles created in the Sketcher workbench (See CATIA-Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide Version 5 ) or in the Generative Shape Design workbench (See CATIA Generative Shape Design User's Guide Version 5) as well as surfaces.
Some operations consist in adding material, others in removing material. In this section, you will learn how to create the following features:
Create a Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded and enter the parameters you need in the dialog box. Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch: right-click the Selection field from the Pad or Pocket dialog box and select the Go to Profile Definition contextual command to display the Profile Definition dialog box. Create an 'Up to Next' Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, set the Type option to Ùp to next' and enter the parameters you need in the dialog box. Create an 'Up to Last' Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, set the Type option to Ùp to last' and enter the parameters you need in the dialog box. Create an 'Up to Plane' Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, enter the parameters you need, set the Type option to Ùp to plane' in the dialog box and select the required plane. Create an 'Up to Surface' Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, enter the parameters you need, set the Type option to Up to surface in the dialog box and select the required surface. Create a Pad from a Surface: Click this icon, select the surface to be extruded and enter the parameters you need.
Create a Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, expand the dialog box, enter the required parameters, define a new reference for the extrusion direction. Create a Multi-Pad: Click this icon, select the sketch to be extruded and specify a length value for each domain.
Create a Drafted Filleted Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded and enter the parameters you need in the dialog box. Create a Pocket: Click this icon, select the profile and enter the parameters you need in the dialog box. Create a Pocket from a Surface: Click this icon, select the surface to be extruded and enter the parameters you need.
Create a Multi-Pocket: Click this icon, select the sketch to be extruded and specify a length value for each domain.
Create a Drafted Filleted Pocket: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded and enter the parameters you need in the dialog box. Create a Thin Solid: Click one of these icons, check the option "Thick" and enter values to define the thickness. Create a Shaft: Click this icon, select the profile to be revolved about the axis and enter angle values. Create a Groove: Click this icon, select the profile to be revolved about the axis and enter angle values. Create a Hole: Click this icon, select the face to locate the hole to be created and enter the required parameters in the dialog box. Locating Holes
Create a Threaded Hole: Click this icon, select the face to locate the hole, define the hole shape, check Threaded, click Specifications and enter the required values in the Thread dialog box.. Create a Rib: Click this icon, select the profile to be swept along a center curve, select this center curve and set the position option in the dialog box. Trimming Ribs or Slots Create a Slot: Click this icon, select the profile to be swept along a center curve, select this center curve and set the position option in the dialog box. Create a Stiffener: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, and specify whether this extrusion is to be done in two or three directions. Create a Multi-sections Solid: Click this icon, select the section curves, the guide curves and if necessary the spine of your choice. Remove a Multi-sections Solid: Click this icon, select the section curves, the guide curves, the closing points and if necessary the spine of your choice. Create a Solid Combine: Click this icon, select the components which intersections you want to compute. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Pad
Pad
Creating a pad means extruding a profile or a surface in one or two directions. The application lets you choose the limits of creation as well as the direction of extrusion. This task shows you how to create a basic pad using a closed profile, the Dimension and Mirrored extent options. Open the Pad1_R08.CATPart document. 1. Select Sketch.1 as the profile to be extruded.
About Profiles
q
You can use profiles sketched in the Sketcher or planar geometrical elements created in the Generative Shape Design workbench (except for lines). You can also select diverse elements constituting a sketch. For more information, refer to Using the Sub-Elements of a Sketch. If you launch the Pad command with no profile previously defined, just access the Sketcher by clicking the icon profile you need. available in the dialog box and sketch the
You can select Generative Shape Design surfaces, non-planar faces and even CATIA V4 surfaces. For more information, pleaser refer to "Pads from Surfaces".
q
By default, if you extrude a profile, the application extrudes normal to the plane used to create the profile. To see how to change the extrusion direction, refer to Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane. If you extrude a geometrical element created in the Generative Shape Design workbench, you need to select an element defining the direction because there is no default direction.
Pad
2. Click the Pad icon
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews the pad to be created.
If you are not satisfied with the profile you selected, note that you can click the Selection field and select another sketch.
Limits
You will notice that by default, the application specifies the length of your pad (Type= Dimension option). But you can use the following options too: q Up to Next
q
Up to Last Up to Plane Up to Surface
Pad
q
If you set the "Up to Plane" or "Up to Surface" option, contextual commands creating new planes or surfaces you may need are then available from the Limit field: r Create Plane: see Create Planes
r
XY Plane: the XY plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the limit. YZ Plane: the YZ plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the limit. ZX Plane: the ZX plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the limit.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays a line or a plane in front of the Reference field as a reminder. r Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. See Joining Surfaces or Curves.
r
Create Extrapol: extrapolates surface boundaries. See Extrapolating Surfaces.
3. Enter 40 in the Length field to increase the length value. You can increase or decrease length values by dragging LIM1 or LIM2 manipulators. The length value cannot exceed 1 000 000 mm.
Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile. Once you have done your modifications, you just need to quit the Sketcher. The Pad dialog box then reappears to let you finish your design. To know how to use the Thick option, refer to "Thin Solids". The Reverse side button applies for open profiles only. This option lets you choose which side of the profile is to be extruded.
Pad
4. Click the Mirrored extent option to extrude the profile in the opposite direction using the same length value. If you wish to define another length for this direction, you do not have to click the Mirrored extent button. Just click the More button and define the second limit. 5. Click Preview to see the result.
6. Click OK. The pad is created. The specification tree indicates that it has been created.
A Few Notes About Pads
Pad
q
The application allows you to create pads from open profiles provided existing geometry can trim the pads. The pad below has been created from an open profile which both endpoints were stretched onto the inner vertical faces of the hexagon. The option used for Limit 1 is "Up to next". The inner bottom face of the hexagon then stops the extrusion. Conversely, the "Up to next" option could not be used for Limit2.
Preview
q
Result
Pads can also be created from sketches including several profiles. These profiles must not intersect. In the following example, the sketch to be extruded is defined by a square and a circle. Applying the Pad command on this sketch lets you obtain a cavity:
Preview
q
Result
Before clicking the Pad command, ensure that the profile to be used is not tangent with itself.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Sub-Elements of a Sketch
Using the Sub-Elements of a Sketch

This task shows you how to select different elements belonging to the same sketch for creating pads. The steps described here also apply for pockets, shafts, grooves, stiffeners, ribs and slots. Sketch three rectangles in a Sketcher session. 1. Click the Pad icon .
The Pad Definition dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Selection field from the dialog box. 3. Right-click and select the Go to Profile Definition contextual command. The Profile Definition dialog box is displayed.
4. You can define whether you need the Whole geometry, that is the whole sketch, or sub-elements only. For the purposes of our scenario, check Sub-elements if not already done. 5. Select an edge.
The sketch name as well as the edge name appear in the dialog box. The application also previews the pad. 6. Click Add to add another element.
Sub-Elements of a Sketch
7. Select an edge belonging to another profile. The application now previews this pad too. 8. Repeat steps 4 and 5 using an edge belonging to the third profile. 9. Select edge2 from the starting elements field and click Remove to remove the associated profile from the selection. 10. Click OK to validate your selection. The Pad Definition dialog box reopens. You then just have to enter the parameters of your choice to extrude two profiles. Optionally click Preview before confirming the creation.
If you encounter complex profiles causing ambiguity cases, the application lets you determine which lines you want to use as illustrated below:
The application detects an ambiguity as shown by the red symbol : the user can determine three different lines from this point.
The user has defined the line he needs to end the selection.
Up to Next Pads
'Up to Next' Pads

This task shows you how to create a pad using the 'Up to Next' option. This creation mode lets the application detect the existing material to be used for trimming the pad. Open the Pad2_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the profile to be extruded, that is the circle. 2. Click the Pad icon .
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews a pad with a default dimension value. 3. Click the arrow in the geometry area to reverse the extrusion direction (or click the Reverse Direction button).
4.
In the Type field, set the option to 'Up to next'.
Up to Next Pads
This option assumes an existing face can be used to limit the pad. The application previews the pad to be created. The already existing body is going to limit the extrusion.
Optionally, click Preview to see the result. 5. Click OK. The pad is created. The specification tree indicates this creation.
By default, the application extrudes normal to the plane used to create the profile. To learn how to change the direction, refer to Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane .
Up to Last Pad
'Up to Last' Pads

This task shows how to create pads using the Ùp to last' option. Open the Pad3_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the profile to be extruded, that is the circle.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews a pad with 10 mm as the default dimension value. 3. Click the arrow in the geometry area to reverse the extrusion direction (or click the Reverse Direction button). 4. In the Type field, set the option to 'Up to last'.
The last face encountered by the extrusion is going to limit the pad. Optionally, click Preview to see the result.
Up to Last Pad
5. Click OK. The pad is created. The specification tree indicates this creation.
By default, the application extrudes normal to the plane used to create the profile. To see how to change the direction, refer to Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane .
Up to Plane Pad
'Up to Plane' Pads

This task shows how to create pads using the Up to plane option.
Open the Pad4_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the profile to be extruded.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews a pad with 10 mm as the default dimension value. 3. In the Type field, set the Type option to 'Up to plane'. 4. Select Plane.1. The application previews the pad to be created. The plane is going to limit the extrusion. An Offset option is now displayed.
Up to Plane Pad
Contextual commands creating the planes you need are now available from the Limit field: r Create Plane: see Creating Planes
r
XY Plane: the XY plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the trimming element. YZ Plane: the YZ plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the trimming element. ZX Plane: the ZX plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the trimming element.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the plane icon in front of the Limit field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element. 5. Enter -20 as the offset value. This offset is the distance between the plane and the top face of the pad to be created. Optionally click Preview to see the result. 6. Click OK. The pad is created. The specification tree indicates this creation.
Up to Surface Pad
'Up to Surface' Pads

This task shows how to create pads using the 'Up to surface' option. Open the Pad5_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the profile to be extruded.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews a pad with a default dimension value. 3. In the Type field, set the Type option to 'Up to surface'.
4. Select the vertical circular face. This face belongs to the same body as the existing pad. Using the 'Up to surface' option, you can select a face belonging to the same body as the sketch or a face belonging to Part Body. The face is going to limit the extrusion.
Contextual commands creating the surfaces you need are now available from the Limit field: q Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. See Joining Surfaces or Curves.
q
Create Extrapol: extrapolates surface boundaries or curves. See Extrapolating Surfaces and Extrapolating Curves.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the join or the extrapol icon in front of the Limit field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
Up to Surface Pad
5. An Offset option is now available in the dialog box. Enter -30 as the offset value. This offset is the distance between the plane and the top face of the pad to be created. Optionally click Preview to see the result. 6. Click OK. The pad is created. The specification tree indicates this creation.
Pad from Surface
Pads or Pockets from Surfaces

This task explains how to extrude surfaces in any direction. The scenario below shows you how to create a pad, but the method and options described are also valid for creating pockets. Open the ThickSurface_R09.CATPart document. 1. Select Extrude.1 as the surface to be extruded. The different surfaces you can select are: surfaces created in the Generative Shape Design workbench, CATIA Version 4 surfaces and non-planar faces.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears. You need to define an extrusion direction. To do so, either you select a geometric element after expanding the dialog box or set the "Up to Plane" limit and select the plane of your choice. In that case, the direction will be given by the normal to that plane (for more, see pockets).
3. For the purposes of our scenario, click More to expand the dialog box.
4. Click the Reference field and select Plane.1 as the plane defining the extrusion direction. The direction is the normal to the plane.
Pad from Surface
Make sure that the surface to be extruded is not tangent to the extrusion direction nor to the plane.
For both limits to be defined, you can use all the options described in the tasks showing the pad creation: Dimension q
q
Up to Next Up to Last Up to Plane Up to Surface
5. Enter 21mm and 11mm as the first and second limit values respectively. 6. Click OK to confirm. The new element identified as Pad.XXX is added to the specification tree.
Pad from Surface
Non-planar faces
If you create a pad or a pocket from a non-planar face, that face is displayed as a datum in the specification tree.
Pockets
In the following example, two different types of limits are defined for trimming the material extruded then removed from each side of the surface. Initial part
Preview The option used to define the first limit "LIM 1" is "Up to plane" (the white arrow points to the selected plane). The extrusion direction is then defined by this plane. LIM2 is defined by a dimension type limit.
Pad from Surface
Result Material has been removed from each side of the surface.
The options for creating thin solids are not available when you select a surface as the element to be extruded.
Not Normal to Sketch Pad
Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane

This task shows how to create a pad using a direction that is not normal to the plane used to create the profile. Open the Pad6_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the profile you wish to extrude.
3. Set the Up to plane option and select plane yz. For more about this type of creation, refer to Up to Plane Pads. 4. Click the More button to display the whole dialog box.
5.
Uncheck the Normal to profile option and select the line as shown to use it as a reference.
The application previews the pad with the new creation direction.
Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from the Reference field: q Create Line: for more information, see Creating Lines
q
Create Plane: see Creating Planes X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the line or the plane icon in front of the Reference. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element. When copying and pasting a pad using the As specified in Part document option (for more, see Handling Parts in a Multi-Document Environment), please note that if the extrusion direction used does not belong to the same body as the pad, this direction is not taken into account by the Copy and Paste commands. 6. Click OK to confirm the creation. The pad is created. The specification tree indicates this creation.
Multi- Pad
Multi-Pad
This task shows you how to extrude multiple profiles belonging to a same sketch using different length values. The multi-pad capability lets you do this at one time. At the end of the task you will see how to edit the resulting feature. Open the Pad1_R08.CATPart document. 1. Click the Multi-Pad icon .
2. Select Sketch.2 that contains the profiles to be extruded. Note that all profiles must be closed and must not intersect. In case a profile would be open, the application would not take it into account. The Multi-Pad Definition dialog box appears and the profiles are highlighted in green. For each of them, you can drag associated manipulators to define the extrusion value.
The red arrow normal to the sketch indicates the proposed extrusion direction. To reverse it, you just need to click it. The Multi- Pad Definition dialog box displays the number of domains to be extruded. In our example, the application has detected seven extrusions to perform, as indicated in the Domains section.
Multi- Pad
3. Select Extrusion domain.1 from the dialog box. Extrusion domain.1 now appears in blue in the geometry area. 4. Specify the length by entering a value. For example, enter 10mm. 5. You need to repeat the operation for each extrusion domain by entering the value of your choice. For example, select Extrusion domain.2 and Extrusion domain.7 and enter 30mm and 40mm respectively.
For complex sketches, the Preview button proves to be quite useful.
Multi- Pad
6. Note that you can multi-select extrusion domains from the list before defining a common length: multiselect Extrusion domain.3, Extrusion domain.4, Extrusion domain.5 and Extrusion domain.6, then enter 50 as the common length value.
One length value is now defined for each profile of Sketch.2. 7. Click the More button to expand the dialog box.
8. In the Second Limit field, you can specify a length value for the opposite direction. For example, select Extrusion domain.1 and enter 40mm in the Length field. Note that the Thickness section displays the sum of the two lengths. Extrusion domain.1 's total length is 50 mm.
Multi- Pad
Unchecking the Normal to sketch option lets you specify a new extrusion direction. Just select the geometry of your choice to use it as a reference. 9. Click OK to create the multi-pad. The multi-pad (identified as Multi-Pad.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Editing the Multi-Pad

The rest of the scenario shows you what happens when : q Adding an Extrusion Domain
q
Deleting an Extrusion Domain
Adding an Extrusion Domain

Example 1: the new profile is sketched outside existing extrusion domains 10. Double-click Sketch.2 to edit it: for example, sketch a closed profile outside Extrusion domain.1.
Multi- Pad
Quit the Sketcher. A warning message informs you that the application has detected that the initial geometry has been modified. Close the window. Double-click MultiPad.1. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing the 12. details of the modification. 11.
13. Click OK to close the window. The Multi-Pocket Definition dialog box reappears. The new extrusion domain "Extrusion domain.8" is indicated. Select it and define the value of your choice. 14. Click OK to confirm. Multi-pad.1 is now composed of eight pads.
Multi- Pad
Example 2: the new profile is sketched inside an existing extrusion domain
Double-click sketch.2 and for 15. example, add a closed profile inside Extrusion domain.2.
16.
Quit the Sketcher. A warning message informs you that the application has detected that the initial sketch has been modified. Close this window. Double-click MultiPad.1. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing the details of the modification.
17.
Multi- Pad
When sketching a profile inside an existing extrusion domain, the application deletes that existing domain and replaces it with a new one. This is why the message window displays : q 1 extrusion domain deleted (Extrusion domain.2)
q
2 extrusion domains created (Extrusion domain.9, which replaces Extrusion domain.2 and Extrusion domain.10)
18. Click OK to close the window. The Multi-Pad Definition dialog box reappears. "Extrusion domain.2" is no more displayed. On the contrary, two new extrusion domains "Extrusion domain.9" "Extrusion domain.10" are indicated with 0mm as their default thickness. 19. Select "Extrusion domain.9" if not already done and define 30mm as the length value. 20. Select "Extrusion domain.10", that is the circle, and define 60mm as the length value. 21. Click OK to confirm. Multi-pad.1 is now composed of nine pads.
Multi- Pad
22.
Double-click Sketch.2 and for example, delete Extrusion Domain.6.
23.
Quit the Sketcher: the application has detected that the initial sketch has been modified:
24. To tackle the problem, you can: q edit or delete MultiPad.1.

q
or you can edit or delete Extrusion domain.6
Make sure that MultiPad.1 is selected and click the Edit button. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing the details of the modification.
Multi- Pad
25. Click OK to close the window. The Multi-Pad Definition dialog box reappears. Only eight extrusion domains are indicated in the Domains category.
26. Click OK to confirm. The new multi-pad feature is composed of eight pads.
Drafted Filleted Pad

This task shows you how to create a pad while drafting its faces and filleting its edges. We recommend you the use of this command to speed up your design. Open the Hole1_R04.CATPart document and sketch a profile similar to the one below. 1. Quit the Sketcher and select the profile to be extruded.
2. Click the Drafted Filleted Pad icon
3. Enter 30 as the length value. 4. Selecting a second limit is mandatory. Select Pad1 top face as the second limit.
Note that planes can define second limits too.
5. Let's go on with the draft definition. Enter 7 as the draft angle value. Drafting faces is optional. If you do not wish to use this capability, just uncheck the Angle option. 6. Check the Second limit option to define the neutral element. So, Pad1 top face is also used as the neutral element. 7. Enter a radius value for each edge type to define the three fillets.
q
Lateral radius: defines the fillets on vertical edges First limit radius: defines the round corner fillets Second limit radius: defines the filets on the edges of the second limit.
Filleting edges is optional too. If you do not wish to use this capability, just uncheck the options. Clicking Preview previews the pad, the draft and the fillets and display them in the specification tree. If you have deactivated the draft or fillet options, the draft or the fillets are then displayed as deactivated features in the tree, i.e. with red parentheses. 8. Click OK to create the features. If you look at the specification tree, you will note that you have created: q one pad
q q
one draft three fillets
This means that for edition purposes, you need to double-click the appropriate feature. This is your new part:
Pocket
Pocket
Creating a pocket consists in extruding a profile or a surface and removing the material resulting from the extrusion. The application lets you choose the limits of creation as well as the direction of extrusion. The limits you can use are the same as those available for creating pads. To know how to use them, see Up to Next Pads , Up to Last Pads, Up to Plane Pads, Up to Surface Pads. This task first shows you how to create a pocket, that is a cavity, in an already existing part, then you will edit this pocket to remove the material surrounding the initial profile. Open the Pocket1_R08.CATPart document. 1. Select the profile to extrude, that is Sketch.2.
About Profiles
q
You can use profiles sketched in the Sketcher workbench or planar geometrical elements created in the Generative Shape Design workbench (except for lines). You can create pockets from sketches including several closed profiles. These profiles must not intersect. You can select diverse elements constituting a sketch too. For more information, refer to Using the Sub-Elements of a Sketch.
Instead of selecting profiles, you can select surfaces created in the Generative Shape Design workbench, non-planar faces and even CATIA V4 . To know how to create a pocket from a surface, refer to Pads or Pockets from Surfaces. 2. Click the Pocket icon .
The Pocket Definition dialog box is displayed and the application previews a pocket.
Pocket
If you launch the Pocket command with no profile previously defined, just click the to access the Sketcher and sketch the profile you need. icon
You can define a specific depth for your pocket or set one of these options: q up to next
q q q
up to last up to plane up to surface
If you wish to use the Up to plane or Up to surface option, you can then define an offset between the limit plane (or surface) and the bottom of the pocket. For more information, refer to Up to Surface Pad. 3. To define a specific depth, set the Type parameter to Dimension, and enter 30mm. Alternatively, select LIM1 manipulator and drag it downwards to 30.
Pocket
If you are not satisfied with the profile you selected, note that you can click the Selection field and select another sketch. Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile to modify
your pocket. Once you have done your modifications, you just need to quit the Sketcher. The Pocket dialog box reappears to let you finish your design.
About Directions
q
By default, if you extrude a profile, the application extrudes normal to the plane used to create the profile. To specify another direction, click the More button to display the whole Pocket Definition dialog box, uncheck the Normal to sketch option and select a new creation direction in the geometry.
Limits
q
If you set the "Up to Plane" or "Up to Surface" option, contextual commands creating new planes or surfaces you may need are then available from the Limit field: r Create Plane: see Creating Planes
r
XY Plane: the XY plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the limit. YZ Plane: the YZ plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the limit. ZX Plane: the ZX plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the limit. Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. See Joining Surfaces or Curves. Create Extrapol: extrapolates surface boundaries. See Extrapolating Surfaces.
Pocket
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Reference field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
q
When copying and pasting a pocket using the As specified in Part document option (for more, see Handling Parts in a Multi-Document Environment), please note that if the extrusion direction used does not belong to the same body as the pocket, this direction is not taken into account by the Copy and Paste commands. If you extrude a geometrical element created in Generative Shape Design, you need to select a direction. To know how to use the Thick option, refer to "Thin Solids".
4. Optionally click Preview to see the result. Click OK to create the pocket. The specification tree indicates this creation. This is your pocket:
5. Double-click Pocket.1 to edit it. As the application now lets you choose the portion of material to be kept, you are going to remove all the material surrounding the initial profile. The Reverse side option lets you choose between removing the material defined within the profile, which is the application's default behavior, or the material surrounding the profile. 6. Click the Reverse side button or alternatively click the arrow as shown:
Pocket
7. The arrow now indicates the opposite direction. 8. Click OK to confirm. The application has removed the material around the profile.
A Few Notes About Pockets

q
The application allows you to create pockets from open profiles provided existing geometry can trim the pockets. If your insert a new body and create a pocket as the first feature of this body, the application creates material:
Pocket
Pockets can also be created from sketches including several profiles. These profiles must not intersect. In the following example, the initial sketch is made of eight profiles. Applying the Pocket command on this sketch lets you create eight pockets:
The Up to next limit is the first face the application detects while extruding the profile. This face must stops the whole extrusion, not only a portion of it, and the hole goes thru material, as shown in the figure below:
Pocket
Preview
Result
When using the Up to Surface option, remember that if the selected surface partly stops the extrusion, the application continues to extrude the profile until it meets a surface that can fully stop the operation.
Multi-Length Pocket
Multi-Pocket
This task shows you how to create a pocket feature from distinct profiles belonging to a same sketch and this, using different length values. The multi-pocket capability lets you do this at one time. At the end of the task, you will see how to edit the resulting multipocket. Open the Pocket1_R08.CATPart document. 1. Click the Multi-Pocket icon .
2. Select Sketch.4 that contains the profiles to be extruded. Note that all profiles must be closed and must not intersect. In case a profile would be open, the application would not take it into account. The Multi-Pocket Definition dialog box appears and the profiles are highlighted in green. For each of them, you can drag associated manipulators to define the extrusion value.
The red arrow normal to the sketch indicates the proposed extrusion direction. To reverse it, you just need to click it. The Multi-Pocket Definition dialog box displays the number of domains to be removed. In our example, the application has detected six domains, as indicated in the Domains section.
Multi-Length Pocket
3. Select Extrusion domain.1 from the dialog box. Extrusion domain.1 now appears in blue in the geometry area. 4. Specify the length by entering a value. For example, enter 10mm. 5. You need to repeat the operation for each extrusion domain by entering the value of your choice. For example, select Extrusion domain.2 and Extrusion domain.6 and enter 30mm and 40mm respectively. For complex sketches, the Preview button proves to be quite useful. 6. Note that you can multi-select extrusion domains from the list before defining a common length: multi-select Extrusion domain.3, Extrusion domain.4, and Extrusion domain.5, then enter 50 as the common length value.
7. Click the More button to expand the dialog box.
Multi-Length Pocket
In the Second Limit field, you can specify a length value for the direction opposite to the direction previously defined. Note that the Thickness section displays the sum of two lengths defined for a given extrusion domain. Unchecking the Normal to sketch option lets you specify a new extrusion direction. Just select the geometry of your choice to use it as a reference. 8. Click OK to create the multi-pocket. The multi-pocket (identified as Multi-Pocket.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Multi-Length Pocket
Editing the Multi-Pocket

The rest of the scenario shows you what happens when : q Adding an Extrusion Domain
q
Adding an Extrusion Domain

Example 1: the new profile is sketched outside existing extrusion domains 9. Double-click Sketch.4 to edit it: for example, sketch a closed profile outside Extrusion domain.1.
10. Quit the Sketcher. A warning message informs you that the application has detected that the initial geometry has been modified. Click OK to close the window.
Multi-Length Pocket
11. Double-click MultiPocket.1. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing the details of the modification.
12. Click OK to close the window. The MultiPocket Definition dialog box reappears. The new extrusion domain "Extrusion domain.7" is indicated. Select it and define the value of your choice.
13. Click OK to confirm. Multi-pocket.1 is now composed of seven pockets.
Example 2: the new profile is sketched inside an existing extrusion domain
Multi-Length Pocket
Double-click Sketch.2 to edit it: for 14. example, add a closed profile inside Extrusion domain.2.
15. Quit the Sketcher. A warning message informs you that the application has detected that the initial geometry has been modified. Close the window. 16. Double-click MultiPocket.1. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing the details of the modification:
When sketching a profile inside an existing extrusion domain, the application deletes that existing domain and replaces it with a new one. This is why the message window displays : q 1 extrusion domain deleted (Extrusion domain.2)
q
2 extrusion domains created (Extrusion domain.8 and Extrusion domain.9, that replaces Extrusion domain.2)
Multi-Length Pocket
17. Click OK to close the window. The MultiPocket Definition dialog box reappears. "Extrusion domain.2" is no more displayed. On the contrary, two new extrusion domains "Extrusion domain.8" "Extrusion domain.9" are indicated with 0mm as their default thickness. 18. Select "Extrusion domain.8" and define 40mm as the length value. 19. Select "Extrusion domain.9", that is the circle, and define 30mm as the length value. 20. Click OK to confirm. Multi-pocket.1 is now composed of eight pockets.
Multi-Length Pocket
21.
Double-click Sketch.4 and delete Extrusion Domain.5.
22.
Quit the Sketcher: the application has detected that the initial geometry has been modified:
23. To tackle the problem, you can: q edit, deactivate or even delete MultiPocket1.
q
or you can edit or delete Extrusion domain.5
Make sure that MultiPocket.1 is selected and click the Edit button. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing the details of the modification.
Multi-Length Pocket
24. Click OK to close the window. The MultiPocket Definition dialog box reappears. Only seven extrusion domains are indicated in the Domains category.
25. Click OK to confirm. The new multi-pocket feature is composed of seven pockets.
Drafted Filleted Pocket

This task shows you how to create a pocket while drafting its faces and filleting its edges. We recommend you the use of this new command to speed up your design.
Open the Pocket1_R08.CATPart document. 1. Select the profile to be extruded, that is Sketch.2.
2.
Click the Drafted Filleted Pocket icon
The Drafted Filleted Pocket Definition dialog box appears and the application previews the pocket to be created.
3. 4.
Enter 22 as the pocket depth value. Selecting a second limit is mandatory. Select Pad1 top face as the second limit. Your specifications for creating the pocket are now defined.
5.
Let's go on with the draft definition. Enter 7 as the draft angle value. Drafting faces is optional. If you do not wish to use this capability, just uncheck the Angle option.
6.
Check the Second limit option to define the neutral element. So, note that the pad top face is also used as the neutral element.
7.
Enter 4 as the radius value to define the three fillets.

q
Lateral radius: defines the fillets on vertical edges First limit radius: defines the round corner fillets Second limit radius: defines the filets on the edges of the second limit.
Filleting edges is optional too. If you do not wish to use this capability, just uncheck the options. Clicking Preview previews the pocket, the draft and the fillets and display them in the specification tree. If you have deactivated the draft or fillet options, the draft or the fillets are then displayed as deactivated features in the tree, i.e. with red parentheses. 8. click Preview to check if the application can compute the fillets properly. In the specification tree red parentheses appear on EdgeFillet.1, meaning that it cannot be computed by the application. Looking more closely at this fillet you can see that due to the shape of the initial sketch, it is effectively impossible to compute that fillet.
Note that there is a priority in the order of appearance of the fillets (from top to bottom) in the specification tree. The first fillet corresponds to the Lateral radius option in the dialog box, the second fillet to the First limit radius option and the last fillet to the Second limit radius option. 9. Click OK to create the features. If you look at the specification tree, you will note that you have created: one pocket q
q
one draft two fillets
This means that for edition purposes, you need to double-click the appropriate feature. This is your new part:
Thin Solids
Thin Solids
When creating pads, pockets and stiffeners, you can add thickness to both sides of their profiles. The resulting features are then called "thin solids". This task shows you how to add thickness to a pad. The method described here is also valid for pockets. To know how to obtain a thin solid from a stiffener, refer to the task Stiffener. You can create thin solids using the Shaft and Groove capabilities. Open the GettingStarted1_R04.CATPart document and quit the Sketcher. 1. Click the Pad icon .
2. Select Sketch.1 if not already done. 3. Check the Thick option. This opens the whole Pad Definition dialog box. You can now define your thin pad using the options available in the Thin Pad frame.
The options for creating thin solids are not available when you select a surface as the element to be extruded. 4. Enter 18mm as Thickness1 's value, and click Preview to see the result. A thickness has been added to the profile as it is extruded. The profile is previewed in dotted line.
Thin Solids
5. Enter 10mm as Thickness2 's value, and click Preview to see the result. Material has been added to the other side of the profile.
6. To add material equally to both sides of the profile, check Neutral fiber and click Preview to see the result. The thickness you defined for Thickness 1 is evenly distributed: a thickness of 9mm has been added to each side of the profile.
This capability can be applied to several profiles contained in the same sketch.
"Thin Pad" options let you extrude profiles from networks
Using the "Thin Pad" options you can extrude profiles from networks.
Thin Solids
Thickness 1 and Thickness 2 are defined.
Checking the Merge Ends option trims extrusions to existing material. Keep in mind that the creation order of the different elements constituting the profile never affects the resulting extrusion.
If you decide to use the options Up to Plane or Up to Surface, the Merge ends capability is not available.
How Extrusions are Trimmed

In the following example, the network goes beyond the edges of the part.
Initial profile is made of two intersecting lines The application trims extrusions to the faces of the pocket
Thin Solids
Shaft
Shaft
This task illustrates how to create a shaft, that is a revolved feature, by using an open profile. Open the Revolution_R09.CATPart document. 1. Select Sketch.2 as the profile to be extruded. For the purposes of our scenario, the profile and the axis belong to the same sketch. 2. Click the Shaft icon .
A message is issued warning you that the application the sum of the two angles must be less than 360degrees. This means that you need to edit one or both default angle values.
3. Click OK to close the warning message and display the Shaft Definition dialog box. The Shaft Definition dialog box is displayed.
Shaft
The application displays the name of the selected sketch in the Selection field from the Profile frame. In our scenario, the profile and the axis belong to the same sketch. Consequently, you do not have to select the axis.
About Profiles
q
You can create shafts from sketches including several closed profiles. These profiles must not intersect and they must be on the same side of the axis. Moreover, you can define whether you need the whole sketch, or sub-elements only. For more information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch. If needed, you can change the sketch by clicking the field and by selecting another sketch in the geometry or in the specification tree. But you can also edit your sketch by clicking the icon that opens the Sketcher. Once you have done your modifications, the Shaft Definition dialog box reappears to let you finish your design. If you launch the Shaft command with no profile previously defined, just click the icon need. and select a plane to access the Sketcher, then sketch the profile you
You can use wireframe geometry as your profile and axes created with the Local Axis capability.
Shaft
About Axes
q
the Selection field in the Axis frame is reserved for the axes you explicitly select. Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from the Selection field: r Create Line: see Creating Lines
r
Create Plane: see Creating Planes X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis. Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis. Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis. If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Selection. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
There are three ways of reversing the revolution direction: clicking the Reverse Direction button, or using the Reverse direction contextual command available on the arrow or just clicking the arrow. The application previews limits LIM1 that corresponds to the first angle value, and LIM2 that corresponds to the second angle value. The first angle value is by default 360 degrees. 4. The Reverse side option lets you choose between creating material between the axis and the profile or between the profile and existing material. You can apply this new option to open or closed profiles. In our scenario, as our open profile cannot be trimmed if we use the default direction, that is in the direction of the axis, click the Reverse Side button or alternatively click the arrow as shown:
Shaft
The application previews the new shaft: the extrusion will be done in the direction opposite to the the axis and it will be trimmed to existing material.
5. Enter the values of your choice in the fields First angle and Second angle. Alternatively, select the LIM1 or LIM2 manipulator and drag them onto the value of your choice. 6. Check the Thick Profile option and preview the result.
Shaft
7. Click OK to confirm. The shaft is created. The specification tree mentions it has been created.
You can now create shafts by selecting a surface as illustrated in this example:
Thin Solids
You can add thickness to both sides of the profile used to create the shaft. In the example below, the shaft is created using the option "Thick". Checking this option opens the whole Shaft Definition dialog box, which lets you then define Thickness 1 and Thickness 2. To perform the scenario, please use Sketch.6.
Shaft
Initial profile
Resulting shaft The profile is previewed in dotted line. Thickness has been added to both sides of the profile.
Additional Options
q
The 'Neutral Fiber' option adds material equally to both sides of the profile. The thickness defined for Thickness 1 is evenly distributed to each side of the profile. The Merge Ends option attaches the profile endpoints to adjacent geometry (axis or if possible to existing material) as illustrated below:
Shaft
Initial profile
Resulting shaft The profile has been attached to the axis.
The 'Thin Shaft' capability does not allow you to extrude networks.
Groove
Groove
Grooves are revolved features that remove material from existing features. This task shows you how to create a groove, that is how to revolve a profile about an axis (or construction line). Open the Revolution_R09.CATPart document. 1. Click the Groove icon .
2. Select Sketch.3 as the profile to be used. The Groove Definition dialog box is displayed
About Axes
The application displays the name of the selected sketch in the Selection field from the Profile frame. q the Selection field in the Axis frame is reserved for the axes you explicitly select. For the purposes of our scenario, the profile and the axis belong to the same sketch. Consequently, you do not have to select the axis.
Groove
q
Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from the Selection field: r Create Line: see Creating Lines
r
Create Plane: see Creating Planes X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis. Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis. Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis. If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Selection. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
The system previews a groove entirely revolving about the axis.
About Profiles
Groove
You can create grooves from sketches including several closed profiles. These profiles must not intersect and they must be on the same side of the axis. If needed, you can change the sketch by clicking the Selection field and by selecting another sketch in the geometry or in the specification tree. Moreover, you can define whether you need the whole sketch, or sub-elements only. For more information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch. Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile. Once you have done your modifications, the Groove Definition dialog box reappears to let you finish your design. You can use wireframe geometry as your profile and axes created with the Local Axis capability. If you launch the Groove command with no profile previously defined, just click the icon you need. and select a plane to access the Sketcher, then sketch the profile
3. The application previews the limits LIM1 and LIM2 of the groove to be created.
You can select these limits and drag them onto the desired value or enter angle values in the appropriate fields. For our scenario, select LIM1 and drag it onto 100, then enter 60 in the Second angle field. 4. Optionally click Preview to see the result. Just a portion of material is going to be removed now.
5. Click the Reverse Direction button to inverse the revolution direction, or use the Reverse direction contextual command available from the arrow. As an alternative, click the arrow to obtain the direction as shown:
Groove
6. Click OK to confirm the operation. The application removes material around the cylinder. The specification tree indicates the groove has been created. This is your groove:
6. The Reverse Side option lets you choose between creating material between the axis and the profile, which is the default direction, or between the profile and existing material. You can apply this option to open or closed profiles. Double-click the groove to edit it. Now, you are going to remove the material surrounding the profile.
7. Click the Reverse Side button or alternatively click the arrow in the geometry. 8. Enter 360 as the first angle value and 0 as the second angle value. The application previews the new groove. 9. Click OK to confirm. The material surrounding the profile has been removed.
Groove
You can now create grooves by selecting a surface as illustrated in this example:
Thin Solids
You can now add thickness to both sides of the profile to be used to create the groove. In the example below, the shaft is created using the Thick option. Checking this option opens the whole Groove Definition dialog box, which lets you then define Thickness 1 and Thickness 2. To perform the scenario, please use Sketch.8.
Groove
Initial profile
Resulting groove The profile is previewed in dotted line. Thickness has been added to both sides of the profile. The Merge Ends option is used: the application attaches the profile endpoints to adjacent geometry (axis or if possible to existing material).
Additional Option
q
The Neutral Fiber option adds material equally to both sides of the profile. The thickness defined for Thickness 1 is evenly distributed to each side of the profile.
The Thin Groove capability does not allow you to extrude networks.
Hole
Hole
Creating a hole consists in removing material from a body. Various shapes of standard holes can be created. These holes are:
Simple
Tapered
Counterbored
Countersunk
Counterdrilled
This task illustrates how to create a countersunk hole while constraining its location. Open the Hole1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Click the Hole icon .
2. Select the circular edge and upper face as shown. The application can now define one distance constraint to position the hole to be created. The hole will be concentric to the circular edge.
Clicking the icon
opens the Sketcher. You can then constrain the point defining the hole position. Once you
have quit the Sketcher, the Hole Definition dialog box reappears to let you define the hole feature. For more about locating holes, please refer to Locating a Hole. The Hole Definition dialog box appears and the application previews the hole to be created. The Sketcher grid is displayed to help you create the hole.
About Limits
Whatever hole you choose, you need to specify the limit you want. There is a variety of limits:
Blind
Up to Next
Up to Last
Hole
Up to Plane By default, the application previews a blind hole whose diameter is 10mm and depth 10mm. Keep the Blind option. q Contextual creation commands are available on the BOTTOM text: r Blind
r r r r r r
Up to Surface
Up to next Up to last Up to plane Up to surface Flat bottom V bottom
The Limit field is available if you set the Up to Plane or Up to Surface option. If you wish to use the Up to Plane or Up to Surface option , you can then define an offset between the limit plane (or surface) and the bottom of the hole. For more information, refer to Up to Surface Pad.
The Up to next limit is the first face the application detects while extruding the profile, but this face must stops the whole extrusion, not only a portion of it, and the hole goes thru material.
Preview
Result
Hole
The application always limits the top of the hole using the Up to Next option. In other words, the next face encountered by the hole limits the hole. In the following example, the hole encounters a fillet placed above the face initially selected. The application redefines the hole's top onto the fillet.
3. Now, define the hole you wish to create. Enter 24mm as the diameter value and 25mm as the depth value. You can now define a tolerancing dimension for the hole to the right of the diameter just by clicking the icon Diameter field. This capability displays the Limit of Size Definition dialog box that enables you to choose one method among three for defining your tolerance: q Checking the Numerical values option: uses the values you enter to define the Upper Limit and optionally, the value of the Lower Limit field if you unchecked the Symetric Lower Limit option.
q
Checking the Tabulated values option: uses normative references. Checking the Single limit option: just enter a minimum or maximum value. The Delta/nominal otions lets you enter a value in relation to the nominal diameter value. For example, if the nominal diameter value is 10 and if you enter 1, then the tolerance value will be 11.
The Options frame displays options directly linked to the standard used in the application. To know or change that normative reference, use the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Functional Tolerancing and Annotations, and in the Tolerancing Tab enter the new standard in the Default Standard at creation option. For more information, please refer to the 3D Tolerancing and Annotations User's Guide.
After you set a tolerancing dimension, the icon turns red:
Note that this capability is not available for countersunk holes and that a Functional Dimensioning and Tolerancing licence is required to be able to access this capability. 4. To define the shape of the end hole, you can choose between: q flat or
q
pointed.
Set the Bottom option to V-Bottom to create a pointed hole and enter 110 in the Angle field to define the bottom shape.
Hole
About Directions
By default, the application creates the hole normal to the sketch face. But you can also define a creation direction not normal to the face by unchecking the Normal to surface option and selecting an edge or a line.
q
Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from the Reference field: Create Line: for more information, see Creating Lines Create Plane: see Creating Planes X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis. Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis. Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis. If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the line or the plane icon in front of the Reference field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
r r r
Thread Definition
You can also define a threaded hole by checking the Thread Definition tab and click the Specifications button to access the parameters you need to define.
Hole Types
Hole
5. Now, click the Type tab to access the type of hole you wish to create. If you choose to create a... q Counterbored hole: the counterbore diameter must be greater than the hole diameter and the hole depth must be greater than the counterbore depth.
q
Countersunk hole: the countersink diameter must be greater than the hole diameter and the countersink angle must be greater than 0 and less than 180 degrees. Counterdrilled hole: the counterdrill diameter must be greater than the hole diameter, the hole depth must be greater than the counter drill depth and the counterdrill angle must be greater than 0 and less than 180 degrees.
6. You are going to create a countersunk hole. To create such a hole you need to choose two parameters among the following options: q Depth & Angle
q q
Depth & Diameter Angle & Diameter
Set the Angle & Diameter parameters in the Mode field.
You will notice that the glyph assists you in defining the desired hole.
7. 8.
Enter 80degrees in the Angle field. The preview lets you see the new angle. Enter 35mm in the Diameter field. The preview lets you see the new diameter.
9. Click OK. The hole is created. The specification tree indicates this creation. You will notice that the sketch used to create the hole also appears under the hole's name. This sketch consists of the point at the center of the hole.
Locating Holes
Locating a Hole
This task shows how to constrain the location of the hole to be created without using the Sketcher workbench`s tools. Open the Hole1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Multi-select both edges as shown and the upper face which is the face on which you wish to position the hole.
2. Click the Hole icon
The preview displays two constraints defining the distances between the hole's center and the edges. 3. Define the parameters in the dialog box to create the desired hole (see Creating a Hole). The application previews the constraints you are creating. 4. To access the constraint values, double-click the constraint of interest. This displays the Constraint Definition dialog box in which you can edit the value.. 5. Click OK to create the hole. The application positions the hole using constraints.
Locating Holes
The alternative way of accessing the constraints consists in double-clicking the sketch in the specification tree to enter the Sketcher workbench. You can then edit the constraints if you wish to reposition the hole.
Remember That...
q
The area you click determines the location of the hole, but you can drag the hole onto desired location during creation using the left mouse button. If the grid display option is activated, you can use its properties. Selecting a circular face makes the hole concentric with this face. However, the application creates no concentricity constraint.
Locating Holes
Multi-selecting a circular edge and a face makes the hole concentric to the circular edge. In this case, the application creates a concentricity constraint.
Remember that the Sketcher workbench provides commands to constrain the point used for locating the hole. See Setting Constraints. Selecting a line and a face positions the hole along the line.
Locating Holes
Editing the line modifies the hole accordingly.
Selecting an edge and a face allows the application to create one distance constraint. While creating the hole, you can double-click this constraint to edit its value.
Threaded Hole
Threaded Holes
The Thread capability removes material surrounding the hole. To define a thread, you can enter the values of your choice, but you can use standard values or personal values available in files too. This task shows you how to create a threaded hole using values previously defined in a file. Open the Hole1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Click the Hole icon .
2. Select the face on which you wish to create the hole.
3. In the Hole Definition dialog box that displays, define the hole shape and enter the parameters of your choice. For more information, refer to Hole. 4. Click the Thread tab. 5. Check Threaded to access the thread definition options.
Threaded Hole
In the Type field, you can choose among three different thread types: q No Standard: uses values entered by the user
q
Metric Thin Pitch: uses AFNOR standard values Metric Thick Pitch: uses AFNOR standard values
In addition to these three types, you can add your personal standards as described in Reusing Values Already Defined in a File
q
Metric Thin Pitch: AFNOR standard
Refer to (NF E03-053-1970). This normative reference is linked to NF E03-0511982) The application uses the minimum standard values.
Threaded Hole
Nominaldiam
8.0 9.1 10.0 12. 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 24.0 27.0 30.0 33.0 36.0 39.0
q
Pitch
1.0 1.0 1.25 1.25 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0
Minordiam
6.917 7.917 8.647 10.647 12.376 14.376 16.376 18.376 20.376 21.835 24.835 27.835 30.835 32.752 35.752
Metric Thick Pitch: AFNOR standard
Refer to (NF E03-053-1970). This normative reference is linked to NF E03-0511982) The application uses the minimum standard values.
Nominaldiam
1 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2
Pitch
0.25 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.35 0.4 0.45
Minordiam
0.729 0.829 0.829 1.075 1.221 1.221 1.567 1.713
Threaded Hole
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 24.0 27.0 30.0 33.0 36.0 39.0 42.0 45.0 48.0 52.0 56.0 60.0 64.0 68.0 72.0 76.0
0.45 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.75 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.25 1.25 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 4.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.5 5.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
2.013 2.459 2.850 3.242 3.688 4.134 4.917 5.917 6.647 7.647 8.376 10.106 11.835 13.835 15.294 17.294 19.294 20.752 23.752 26.211 29.211 31.670 34.670 37.129 40.129 42.587 46.587 50.046 54.046 57.505 61.505 65.505 69.505
Threaded Hole
80.0 85.0 90.0

q
6.0 6.0 6.0
73.505 78.505 83.505
No Standard
If you keep the No Standard option, the field available below is Thread Diameter. You just need to enter the values you need in this field as well as in the fields below. The Edit formula... contextual command is available from the Thread Diameter field, meaning that you can define formulas for managing diameters values.
Reusing Values Already Defined in a File
There are two ways of accessing values listed in a file: either by navigating to the file of interest or by making this data available prior to launching the Hole command. For more, see "the file is already available".
By navigating to the file you need

6. Simply click Add to access this file. A dialog box displays, in which you can navigate to reach the file containing your own values. This file may be of one of the following types:
q
Microsoft Excel files (general format) Lotus files tabulated files (in Unix environment)
The file types supported are the same as those used for design tables. The values defined in your file will apply specifically to the part of your CATPart document, not to other documents. 7. Navigate to StandardGaz.txt file and click Open to get the values it contains. The Hole Definition dialog box reappears. Your file looks like this:
Threaded Hole
The file was created as follows:
Nominal diameter
q q
Pitch
Minor Diameter Key
the first row contains no numerical values the other rows below are reserved for numerical values, except for the last column which contains descriptions very often represented by letters. the mandatory items are keys that define the names associated with the values.
Moreover, the name of the standard is the same as the name of the file without the extension. Please, remember these recommendations for creating your own personal files. 8. Set the Type option to 'StandardGaz'. 9. In the Thread Description field, set G7/8. The Edit formula... contextual command is now available from the Thread Description field, meaning that you can define formulas for managing diameters values. You can note that the values associated with the 'G7/8' key (see the contents of the StandardGaz file) appear in the Hole Diameter field as well as the Pitch field (distance between each crest) are provided in the corresponding fields.
Threaded Hole
You cannot edit these fields.
By selecting the file from the Type list: the file is already available
This behavior is made possible only if the administrator has performed these operations: The administrator first needs to locate in a directory the source files used for the standards. For example, he can select E:\user\standard as the directory containing the StandardGaz.txt file. Then, he has to concatenate this path with the official path in the CATReffilesPath environment variable as follows: Set CATReffilesPath=Officialpath;E:\user\standard The result is the following: whenever the Hole command is launched, the application identifies all standards provided by the administrator. The user does no need to navigate to the file any longer. Note: Using the Remove function, you cannot remove standard files defined by the administrator. 10.If necessary, edit the thread depth then the hole depth if you need to modify the value you had previously set in the Extension tab. This value must not exceed the thread diameter value. 11.Check the Left-Threaded option.
Threaded Hole
12.Click OK to confirm your operation and close the Hole Definition dialog box. The application displays the hole in the geometry area but not the thread. Note also that an icon specific to this feature is displayed in the specification tree.
A Few Words About Removing Files

The Remove button removes files containing user-defined values. You cannot remove files containing standard values. Clicking the Remove button displays the list of user-defined files. You then just need to select or multi-select (using ctrl key) the files and Click OK to confirm the operation.
Note also that you cannot remove a standard file if it is used for a hole created in the CATPart document.
More About Ribs
Trimming Ribs or Slots

This page illustrates two different cases of ribs obtained from open profiles, then the use of the Merge rib's ends and Merge Ends options available in the Rib Definition dialog box.
q
Open Profiles Trimmed by Existing Material
Initial Profile (in black) and Center Curve (in red)
Resulting Rib The rib is obtained just by extending its open profile onto existing material.
Open Profiles with No Trimming Material
If the rib cannot be trimmed by existing material, the only way of obtaining a rib is by using the Thick Profile option: To create this, thickness has been added to each side of the profile
Resulting Rib
More About Ribs
"Merge rib's ends" Option
The Merge rib'ends option extends and trims the center curve to existing material. Each extremity of the rib is then trimmed to existing material. The example below clearly shows how the blue rib is trimmed.
Without using the Merge rib's ends option

q
Using the Merge rib's ends option
"Merge Ends" Option
The Merge Ends option is to be used for thin ribs (or slots). It trims a set of profiles to themselves while trimming them to existing material too. If you consider this initial sketch composed of two curves :
More About Ribs
Without using the Merge Ends option, you obtain this result:
Using the Merge Ends option, you obtain this result:
Slot
Slot
This task shows you how to create a slot, that is how to sweep a profile along a center curve to remove material. To define a slot, you need a center curve, a planar profile, a reference element and optionally a pulling direction. To create slots you can combine the different elements as follows: Closed profile Open profile
Open center curve (Thick Profile Option) Closed planar center curve
Closed 3D center curve (Thick Profile Option)
Center Curves
Moreover, the following rules should be kept in mind: q 3D center curves must be continuous in tangency.
q q
if the center curve is planar, it can be discontinuous in tangency. center curves must not be composed of several geometric elements
Open the Slot1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Click the Slot icon .
The Slot Definition dialog box is displayed.
Slot
2. Select the profile, i.e. Sketch.2. The profile has been designed in a plane normal to the plane used to define the center curve. It is closed.
About Profiles
q q
You can use wireframe geometry as your profile too. In some cases, you need to define whether you need the whole sketch, or sub-elements only. For more information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch. Slots can also be created from sketches including several profiles. These profiles must be closed and must not intersect. If you launch the Slot command with no profile previously defined, just click the icon Sketcher and then sketch the profile you need. to access the
You can use an open profile provided existing material can trim the slot. For more information, please refer to Trimming Ribs or Slots. to open the Sketcher. This temporarily closes the dialog box.
3. Click the icon
4. Edit the profile. For example, enlarge it. 5. Quit the Sketcher. The Slot Definition dialog box reappears.
Slot
Profile Control
You can control the profile position by choosing one of the following options: q Keep angle: keeps the angle value between the sketch plane used for the profile and the tangent of the center curve.
q
Pulling direction: sweeps the profile with respect to a specified direction. For example, you need to use this option if your center curve is a helix. In this case, you will select the helix axis as the pulling direction. Reference surface: the angle value between axis h and the reference surface is constant. Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from the Selection field: Create Line: For more information, see Creating Lines Create Plane: see Creating Planes X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. See Joining Surfaces or Curves. Create Extrapol: extrapolates surface boundaries or curves. See Extrapolating Surfaces and Extrapolating Curves.
r r r r
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Selection field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element. 6. To go on with our scenario, let's maintain the Keep angle option. Now, select the center curve along which the application will sweep the profile. The center curve is open. To create a slot you can use open profiles and closed center curves too. Center curves can be discontinuous in tangency. The application previews the slot.
Clicking the icon
opens the Sketcher to let you edit the center curve.
The Merge slot's ends option is to be used in specific cases. It lets the application create material between the ends of the slot and existing material. For an example, please refer to Trimming Ribs or Slots.
Slot
7. Check the Thick Profile option to add thickness to both sides of Sketch.2. New options are then available:
8. Enter 2mm as Thickness1's value, and 5mm as Thickness2's value, then preview the result. Material is added to each side of the profile. Checking the Merge Ends option trims the rib to existing material. For an example, please refer to Trimming Ribs or Slots. 9. To add material equally to both sides of the profile, check Neutral fiber and preview the result. The thickness you defined for Thickness1 (2mm) is now evenly distributed: a thickness of 1mm has been added to each side of the profile.
10. Click OK. The slot is created. The specification tree indicates this creation.
Stiffener
Stiffener
This task shows you how to create a stiffener by specifying creation directions. Open the Stiffener1_R09.CATPart document. 1. Select the profile to be extruded, that is Sketch.6 (located in the Part Body entity). This open profile has been created in a plane normal to the face on which the stiffener will lie.
About Profiles
q q
You can use wireframe geometry as your profile. In some cases, you can define whether you need the whole profile, or subelements only. For more information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch. Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile. Once you have done your modifications, the Stiffener Definition dialog box reappears to let you finish your design.
If you need to use an open profile, make sure that existing material can fully limit the extrusion of this profile
Stiffener
2. Click the Stiffener icon
The Stiffener Definition dialog box is displayed. Two creation modes are available: q From side: the extrusion is performed in the profile's plane and the thickness is added normal to the plane.
q
From top: the extrusion is performed normal to the profile's plane and the thickness is added in the profile's plane.
The option From side is the default option. The application previews a stiffener which thickness is equal to 10mm. The extrusion will be made in three directions, two of which are opposite directions. Arrows point in these directions.
Stiffener
3. Uncheck the Neutral Fiber option. The extrusion will be made in two directions only. To obtain the directions you need, you can also click the arrows. Note that you can access contextual menu items on these arrows. These commands are the same as those available in the dialog box.
4. Check the Neutral Fiber option again. This option adds material equally to both sides of the profile. 5. Enter 12 as the thickness value. This thickness is now evenly distributed: a thickness of 6mm is added to each side of the profile. Optionally click Preview to see the result.
Stiffener
6. Click OK. The stiffener is created. The specification tree indicates it has been created.
If you click the Selection field and select another sketch, the application immediately creates the Stiffener. Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile to modify your stiffener. Once you have done your modifications, you just need to quit the Sketcher. The dialog box is closed and the icon is activated.
"From Top" Stiffeners

The From top option lets you create stiffeners from a network as illustrated below. You can, if you wish, create this stiffener by working on Body.2. Prior to doing so, ensure that Sketch.8 is the current object). Figure 1: Sketch.8 includes several lines.
Figure 2: With the From top option on, the extrusion is performed normal to the profile's plane and the thickness is added in the profile's plane. Note also that the resulting stiffener is always trimmed to existing material.
Stiffener
There are two ways of defining the thickness. q The Neutral fiber option adds the same thickness to both sides of the profile. You just need to specify the value of your choice in "Thickness 1" field and this thickness is evenly added to each side of the profile.
Conversely, if you wish to add different thicknesses on both sides of the profile, just uncheck the Neutral fiber option and then specify the value of your choice in Thickness 2 field.
The creation of "from top" stiffeners is never done with respect to the creation order of the profile.
Stiffener
Whatever the creation order of Line.1, Line.2 and Line.3....
....the stiffener looks like this:
Multi-sections Solid
This task shows how to create a multi-sections solid. You can generate it by sweeping one or more planar section curves along a computed or user-defined spine. The feature can be made to respect one or more guide curves. The resulting feature is a closed volume. Open the Multi-sections.CATPart document. 1. Click the Multi-sections Solid icon .
The Multi-sections Solid Definition dialog box appears.
2. Select the three section curves as shown: They are highlighted in the geometry area.
The Multi-sections Solid capability assumes that the section curves to be used do not intersect. In P1 mode, you can select two sections only. 3. Click Preview to preview the feature to be created. You can note that by default, tangency discontinuity points are coupled:
Several coupling types are available in the Coupling tab: q Ratio: the curves are coupled according to the curvilinear abscissa ratio.
q
Tangency: the curves are coupled according to their tangency discontinuity points. If they do not have the same number of points, they cannot be coupled using this option. Tangency then curvature: the curves are coupled according to their curvature discontinuity points. If they do not have the same number of points, they cannot be coupled using this option. Vertices: the curves are coupled according to their vertices. If they do not have the same number of vertices, they cannot be coupled using this option.
4. For the purpose of our scenario, you are going to use guide curves. Click the Guide field and select the four joins. The curves to be used must be joined. They are highlighted in the geometry area. It is possible to edit the multi-sections solid reference elements by first selecting a curve in the dialog box list then choosing a button to either:
q q q
Remove the selected curve Replace the selected curve by another curve. Add another curve.
By default, the application computes a spine, but if you wish to impose a curve as the spine to be used, you just need to click the Spine tab then the Spine field and select the spine of your choice in the geometry. The Relimitation tab lets you specify the feature relimitation type. You can choose to limit the multi-sections solid only on the Start section, only on the End section, on both, or on none. q when one or both are checked: the multi-sections solid is limited to corresponding section
q
when one or both are when unchecked: the multi-sections solid is swept along the spine: if the spine is a user spine, the multi-sections solid is limited by the spine extremities if the spine is an automatically computed spine, and no guide is selected: the feature is limited by the start and end sections if the spine is an automatically computed spine, and guides are selected, the feature is limited by the guides extremities.
5. Click OK to create the volume. The feature (identified as Multisections Solid.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Solid Combine
Solid Combine
This task shows you how to create a solid combine, that is a solid resulting from the intersection of two or more extruded profiles. Open the Solid_Combine.CATPart document. 1. Click the Solid Combine icon .
The Combine Definition dialog box appears.
2. Select Sketch.1 as the first component to be extruded. Sketches must contain closed profiles. Note that if you launch the Solid Combine command with no profile previously defined, just access the Sketcher by clicking the icon and sketch the profile you need. available in the dialog box
Components
The components you can select are: q Sketches
q q
Surfaces Sketches sub-elements (for more information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch) 3D planar curves
Solid Combine
3. Select Sketch.2 as the second component to be extruded. This sketch contains only one profile, namely a rectangle. The Solid Combine capability is going to compute the intersection between the profiles virtually extruded. By default, each component is extruded in a plane normal to its sketch plane. The application previews the result as soon as the second component has been selected.
Extrusion Directions
There are two types of directions you can specify to compute the intersection. For the first and the second components, you can choose: q The Normal to profile option: this is the default option
q
Another direction indicated by a geometrical element you select.
Note that 4. For the purposes of our scenario, uncheck the Normal to profile option for the first component and select the line created in Sketch.3 to indicate the extrusion direction.
Solid Combine
5. Click OK to confirm and create the solid combine feature. The new element (identified as Combine.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Dress-Up Features
Dress-Up Features
Dressing up features is done by applying commands to one or more supports. The application provides a large number of possibilities to achieve the features meeting your needs. The application lets you create the following dress-up features: Create an Edge Fillet: Click this icon, select the edge to be filleted, enter the radius value and set the propagation mode in the dialog box. Create a Variable Radius Fillet: Click this icon, select the edge to be filleted, enter new radius values for both of the detected vertices, click as many points as you wish on the edge and enter appropriate radius values for each of them. If needed, define a new variation mode. Create a Variable Radius Fillet Using a Spine: Click this icon, select the edges to be filleted, enter an angle value for both vertices at the corner, check the Circle Fillet option and select the spine. Reshaping Corners: click the More button in the Edge Fillet or in the Variable Radius Fillet dialog box, click the Blend corner(s) button to detect the corner to reshape. Create a Face-Face Fillet: Click this icon, select the faces to be filleted and enter the radius value in the dialog box. Create a Tritangent Fillet: Click this icon, select the faces to be filleted then the face to be removed. Create a Chamfer: Click this icon, select the edge to be chamfered, set the creation mode then define the parameters you have set. Create a Basic Draft : Click this icon, set the Selection by neutral face selection mode or select the face to be drafted, then enter the required parameters. Advanced Draft: Click this icon, specify the type of operation you wish to perform, then define the parameters you have set. Create a Draft with a Parting Element: Click this icon, set the Selection by neutral face selection mode or select the face to be drafted, expand the dialog box then enter the required parameters. Create a Draft from Reflect Lines: Click this icon, select the face to be drafted, then enter the required parameters.
Dress-Up Features
Create a Variable Angle Draft: Click this icon, select the face to be drafted, click as many points as you wish and then enter the required parameters. Create a Shell : Click this icon, select the faces to be shelled and enter the thickness values. Create a Thickness: Click this icon, select the faces to be shelled and enter the thickness value. Create a Thread/Tap: Click this icon, select the cylindrical surface you wish to thread, the planar limit face and enter the required values. Remove a Face: Click this icon, select the face to be removed and the faces to keep. Replace a Face: Click this icon, select the replacing face and the face to be removed. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Surface-Based Features
Surface-Based Features
Create a Split: Click this icon, select the body to be split then the splitting element. Create a Thick Surface: Click this icon, select the object to be thickened, define the offset directions and enter offset values. Create a Close Surface: Click this icon, select the body and select the object to be closed. Create a Sew Surface: Click this icon, select the body and the surface to be sewn. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Split
Split
You can split a body with a plane, face or surface. The purpose of this task is to show how to split a body by means of a surface. Open the Split1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the blue pad as the body to be split.
2. Click the Split icon
3. Select the splitting surface. The Split Definition dialog box is displayed, indicating the splitting element.
Contextual commands creating the limiting elements you need are now available from the Splitting Element field: r Create Plane: for more information, see Creating Planes
r
XY Plane: the XY plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the trimming element. YZ Plane: the YZ plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the trimming element. ZX Plane: the ZX plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the trimming element. Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. See Joining Surfaces or Curves. Create Extract: See Extracting Geometry.
Split
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Splitting Element field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element. An arrow appears indicating the portion of body that will be kept. If the arrow points in the wrong direction, you can click it to reverse the direction.
4. Click OK. The body is split. Material has been removed. The specification tree indicates you performed the operation.
Avoid using input elements that are tangent to each other since this may result in geometric instabilities in the tangency zone.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Thick Surface
Thick Surface
You can add material to a surface in two opposite directions by using the Thick Surface capability. This task shows you how to do so. Open the ThickSurface_R09.CATPart document. 1. Select the object you wish to thicken, that is the extrude element.
Two contextual commands creating the object you need are now available from the Object to offset field: r Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. For more information, see Joining Surfaces or Curves.
r
Create Extract: See Extracting Geometry.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Object to offset field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element. 2. Click the Thick Surface icon .
The Thick Surface Definition dialog box is displayed.
Thick Surface
In the geometry area, the arrow that appears on the extrude element indicates the first offset direction. If you need to reverse the arrow, just click it.
3. Enter 10mm as the first offset value and 6mm as the second offset value .
4. Click OK. The surface is thickened. The specification tree indicates you performed the operation. Note that the resulting feature does not keep the color of the original surface.
Extracting Geometry
Thick Surface
Sometimes, you will need to use the Extract command to be able to add thickness to a face. The Extract capability lets you generate separate elements from initial geometry, without deleting geometry. This command is available after clicking a dialog box prompting you to deactivate the thickness feature and extract the geometry. Once the operation has been done, a node "Extracted Geometry (ThickSurface.1)" is displayed in the tree. This category includes the elements created by the application. The Extract capability is available if only one face was selected to perform the thickness operation. Note also that if you have Generative Shape Design installed, the geometry resulting from the Extract operation is associative.
Close Surface
Close Surface
This task shows you to close surfaces.
Open the CloseSurface1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the surface to be closed, i.e. Trim.3.
2. Click the Close Surface icon
The Close Surface Definition dialog box is displayed.
Two contextual commands creating the object you need are now available from the Object to close field: r Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. See Joining Surfaces or Curves.
r
Create Extract: See Extracting Geometry.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Object to close field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element. 3. Click OK. The surface is closed. The specification tree indicates you performed the operation.
Sew Surface
Sew Surface
Sewing is a boolean operation combining a surface with a body. This capability adds or removes material by modifying the surface of the solid. You can sew all types of surfaces onto bodies. Depending on your geometry, two kinds of sewing operations can be performed: q If the surface has been designed so that its boundary entirely lays on the solid, you can sew it using the surface boundary projection onto the solid. In this case you can the option "Topology simplification" or not (unchecked option). Sewing features (in boundary projection mode) is more productive (CPU cost) and more stable (geometric tangency condition) than creating a solid using the Close Surface command (when possible) because no surface/surface intersections are computed. q If the surface crosses the solid, you can make the application compute the intersection of the surface with the solid prior to sewing the surface. In this case, you need to use the "Intersection" option. This task shows you both methods. Open the SewSurface_R10.CATPart document.
The surface boundary is laid on the solid.

1. Select "Join.1" as the surface you wish to sew onto the body.
Sew Surface
2.
Click the Sew Surface icon
The Sew Surface Definition dialog box is displayed:
With topology simplification
Keep the "Topology simplification" option active. Using this option, if in the resulting solid there are connected faces defined on the same geometric support (faces separated by smooth edges), these faces will be merged into one single face. 3. Arrows appear indicating the side where material will be added or kept. Note that clicking an arrow reverses the given direction. The arrows must point towards the solid. 4. Click OK. The surface is sewn onto the body. You may notice that the bottom of the solid is made of one single face. The specification tree indicates you performed the operation. 5. To see the simplification, just hide "Join.1".
Sew Surface
Without topology simplification
6. Double-click "SewSurface.1" in the specification tree to edit it and deactivate the "Topology simplification" option. 7. Click OK. The bottom of the solid is made of three connected faces. The smooth edges resulting from the sewing appear because no topological simplification has been performed.
Using the "Intersection" option

You will use this option when the surface straightly crosses the solid without being tangent. The application then needs to compute the intersection between the surface and the solid, the portions of surface with "free edges" being eventually removed. 1. In the following example, the application can compute the intersection:
Checking "Intersection" in the Sew Surface Definition dialog box automatically activates the "Topology simplification" option.
Sew Surface
2. The arrow indicates the portion of material that will be kept:
3. The surface is sewn onto the body. Some material has been removed.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Transformation Features
Transformation Features
Create a Translation: Click this icon, select the body to be translated, define the translation direction and enter the distance value. Create a Rotation: Click this icon, select the body to be rotated, define the rotation axis and enter the angle value. Create a Symmetry: Click this icon, select the body to be duplicated and define the symmetry reference. Create a Mirror: Click this icon, select the body to be mirrored and define the reference. Create a Rectangular Pattern: Click this icon, select the feature to be duplicated, define the creation directions, choose the parameters you wish to define and set these parameters. Create a Circular Pattern: Click this icon, select the feature to be duplicated, define the axial reference, the creation direction, choose the parameters you wish to define and set these parameters. Create a User Pattern: Click this icon, select the feature to be duplicated, set whether you keep the original specifications or not and define the positions. Exploding Patterns: Right-click the pattern you want to explode and select the RectPattern.1object -> Explode... contextual command. Create a Scaling: Click this icon, select the body to be scaled, define the reference and enter a factor value. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Translation
Translation
The Translate command applies to current bodies. This task shows you how to translate a body. To perform this task, open the CATPart of your choice.
1.
Click the Translate icon
The Translate Definition dialog box appears
2. Select a line to take its orientation as the translation direction or a plane to take its normal as the translation direction. For example, select zx plane. You can also specify the direction by means of X, Y, Z vector components by using the contextual menu on the Direction area.
3. Specify the translation distance by entering a value or using the Drag manipulator. For example, enter 100mm.
4. Click OK to create the translated element. The element (identified as Translat.xxx) is added to the specification tree
Translation
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Rotation
Rotation
This task shows you how to rotate geometry about an axis. The command applies to current bodies. Open the Rotate1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Click the Rotate icon .
The Rotate Definition dialog box appears.
2. Select an edge as the rotation axis.
3. Enter a value for the rotation angle. The element is rotated. You can drag it by using the graphic manipulator to adjust the rotation.
Rotation
4. Click OK to create the rotated element. The element (identified as Rotate.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Symmetry
Symmetry
This task shows how to transform geometry by means of a symmetry operation. The Symmetry command applies to current bodies. Open the Symmetry1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Click the Symmetry icon .
The Symmetry Definition dialog box appears.
2. Select a point, line or plane as reference element. For the purpose of our scenario, select plane zx. 3. Click OK to create the symmetrical element. The original element is no longer visible but remains in the specification tree. The new element (identified as Symmetry.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Symmetry
Mirror
Mirror
Mirroring a body or a list of features consists in duplicating these elements using a symmetry. You can select a face or a plane to define the mirror reference. This task shows how to mirror a list of features. Open the EdgeFillet3_R04.CATPart document. 1. Multi-select both pads as the features to be mirrored.
2. Click the Mirror icon
The Mirror Definition dialog box appears.
3. Select the lateral face to define the mirror reference. The application previews the material to be created. 4. Click OK to confirm the operation. The pads are mirrored. The specification tree mentions this creation.
A Few Notes about Mirror
Mirror
q
Using a plane to mirror a body lets you obtain two independent portions of material in a same body. The following mirror is obtained by using plane zx as the reference.
When editing a mirror feature, contextual commands creating the mirror references you need are now available from the Mirroring element field: r Create Plane: for more information, see Creating Planes
r
XY Plane: the XY plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the trimming element. YZ Plane: the YZ plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the trimming element. ZX Plane: the ZX plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the trimming element.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Mirroring element field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
Rectangular Pattern
Rectangular Pattern
You may need to duplicate the whole geometry of one or more features and to position this geometry on a part. Patterns let you do so. The application allows you to define three types of patterns: rectangular, circular and user patterns. These features accelerate the creation process. This task shows you how to duplicate the geometry of one pocket right away at the location of your choice using a rectangular pattern. Then, you will learn how to modify the location of the initial feature. Open the RectangularPattern1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the feature you wish to copy, that is the pocket as shown:
2.
Click the Rectangular Pattern icon
The Rectangular Pattern Definition dialog box that appears displays the name of the geometry to pattern.
q
If you click the Rectangular Pattern icon prior to selecting any geometry, by default, the object to be patterned is the current solid. For more information, refer to Patterning Current Solids.
Rectangular Pattern
If you change your mind and decide to pattern the current solid, click the Object field and use the Get current solid contextual command.
Each tab is dedicated to a direction you will use to define the location of the duplicated feature. In this task, you will first set your specifications for the first direction. Checking the Keep specifications option creates instances with the limit Up to Next ( Up to Last, Up to Plane or Up to Surface) defined for the original feature. In the example below, the limit defined for the pad, i.e. the "Up to surface" limit, applies to all instances. As the limiting surface is not planar, the instances have different lengths.
Rectangular Pattern
But for the purposes of our scenario, as the pocket's height is specified, activating the Keep specifications option is meaningless.
Reference Direction
3. Click the Reference element field and select the edge as shown below to specify the first direction of creation. An arrow is displayed on the pad. If needed, check the Reverse button or click the arrow to modify the direction.
To define a direction, you can select an edge or a planar face. Contextual commands creating the reference elements you need are now available from the Reference element field: r Create Line: For more information, see Creating Lines.
r
X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Create Plane: see Creating Planes.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Reference element field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
Rectangular Pattern
4.
Let the Instances & Spacing options to define the parameters you wish to specify. The parameters you can choose are:
q q q
Instances & Length Instances & Spacing Spacing & Length
Choosing Instances & Spacing dims the Length field because the application no longer needs this specification to space the instances. If you set Instances & Length or Spacing & Length parameters, note that you cannot define the length by using formulas. 5. Enter 3 as the number of instances you wish to obtain in the first direction. Deleting the instances of your choice is possible when creating the pattern. In the pattern preview, just select the points materializing instances. Conversely, selecting these points again will make the application create the corresponding instances. 6. Define the spacing along the grid: enter 14 mm.
Defining the spacing along the grid and length of your choice would make the application compute the number of possible instances and space them at equal distances. 7. Now, click the Second Direction tab to define other parameters. Note that defining a second direction is not compulsory. Creating a rectangular defining only one direction is possible.
Rectangular Pattern
8. 9.
Click the Reference element field and select the edge to the left to define the second direction. Check the Reverse option to make the arrow point in the opposite direction.
10. Let the Instances & Spacing option: enter 3 and 10 mm in the appropriate fields.
11. click Preview to make sure the pattern meets your needs. Additional pockets will be aligned along this second direction.
Rectangular Pattern
12. Click OK to repeat the pocket's geometry nine times. This is the resulting pattern. The feature "RectPattern.1" is displayed in the specification tree.
13. Let's now edit the pattern to make it more complex: double-click the pattern to display the dialog box. 14. Click the More button to display the whole dialog box. The options available makes it possible to position the pattern.
Rectangular Pattern
15. To modify the position of the pockets, enter -5 degrees as the rotation angle value. 16. click Preview. You will notice that all pockets have moved slightly:
Rectangular Pattern
17. Now, modify the location of the initial pocket. To do so, enter 2 in the Row in Direction 1 field. The application previews how the pattern will be moved. It will be moved along the direction as indicated:
18. Finally, enter 2 in the Row in Direction 2 field. The application previews how the pattern will be moved. It will be moved along these two directions defined in steps 17 and 18:
The Simplified representation option lightens the pattern's geometry. What you need to do is just check the option and double-click the instances you do not want to see. The instances are then represented in dashed lines during the pattern definition and then are no longer visible after validating the pattern creation. The specifications remain unchanged, whatever the number of instances you view. This option is particularly used for patterns including a large number of instances.
Rectangular Pattern
Remember that clicking an instance once removes the instance from the specifications. Clicking once or double-clicking an instance does not lead to the same result then. 19. Click OK. The application has changed the location of all pockets. Only four of them remain on the pad.
It is possible to create Cartesian patterns with variable steps. To do so, define formulas. More explicitly, act on parameters i and j. For more information, refer to CATIA- Knowledge Advisor User's Guide Version 5. During your design, you may need to rework instances specifically. You will then have to use the Explode contextual command to delete your pattern while keeping geometry. For more information, refer to Exploding Patterns.
Complex Patterns
You can pattern a list of Part Design features by proceeding as follows: 1. Multi-select the features to be duplicated. These features must belong to the same body. 2. Click the Rectangular Pattern icon The features are indicated in the Object field. .
Rectangular Pattern
3. Set the parameters you need as shown in the task above. These rules are to be kept in mind before patterning a list of features. q When multi-selecting, the first feature you select must not be a dress-up feature.
q
Your list of features cannot include any transformation features, nor shells, nor splits, nor associated bodies. Your list of features cannot include any body.
Editing a List of Features

Editing a list of features consists in adding or removing features from the list. To do so, you just have to click the Object field and select the feature of interest to add it or remove it from the list. Note however that adding a feature to a pattern is possible only if your pattern is already based on a feature list. In other words, you cannot add any feature to a basic pattern created using a single feature.
Patterning Current Solids
Rectangular Pattern
A current solid is composed of one or more features belonging to the same body. It is the result of the operations as mentioned in the specification tree, the last operation being the current one. For more about current features, see Scanning a part and defining local objects.
To pattern a current solid, just click the Rectangular Pattern icon . There is no need to select any geometry. By default, the object to pattern is the current solid. You then just have to enter your specifications in the dialog box. Note that if you change your mind and decide to pattern a feature, you just have to click the object field and select the feature of your choice. In the following example, the current solid is the result of one pad and one hole.
The instances created via the Pattern command are composed of pads and holes only. You cannot transform a patterned list of features into a patterned current solid and vice-versa.
Circular Pattern
Circular Pattern
This task will show you how to duplicate geometry of one or more features right away at the location of your choice using a circular pattern. Make sure the item you wish to duplicate is correctly located in relation to the circular rotation axis. Open the CircularPattern1_R04.CATPart document. 1. 2. Select the pad which geometry you wish to copy. Click the Circular Pattern icon . The Circular Pattern Definition dialog box is displayed and the feature's name appears in the Object field.
q
If you change your mind and decide to pattern the current solid, click the object field and use the Get current solid contextual menu item. For more information, refer to Patterning Current Solids.
Keeping Specifications
Checking the Keep specifications option creates instances with the limit Up to Next (Up to Last, Up to Plane or Up to Surface) defined for the original feature. The example below shows you that the limit defined for the pad, that is the Up to surface limit, applies to all instances. As the limiting surface is not planar, the instances have different lengths.
Circular Pattern
But for the purposes of our scenario, as the pad is going to be repeated on a planar surface, activating the Keep specifications option is meaningless. The Parameters field lets you choose the type of parameters you wish to specify so that the application will be able to compute the location of the items copied. These parameters are: q Instances & total angle
q q q
Instances & angular spacing Angular spacing & total angle Complete crown
If you set Instances & total angle or Angular spacing & total angle parameters, note that you cannot define the total angle when using formulas. 3. Set the Instances & Angular spacing options to define the parameters you wish to specify. Choosing Instances & Angular spacing dims the Total angle field because the application no longer needs this specification to space the instances. 4. 5. Enter 7 as the number of pads you wish to obtain. Enter 50 degrees as the angular spacing.
Reference Direction
6. Click the Reference element field and select the upper face to determine the rotation axis. This axis will be normal to the face. To define a direction, you can select an edge, a line, a planar face or a plane. After selecting an edge, a line or a planar face, if necessary, you can also select a point to define the rotation center. If you select a plane, selecting a point is mandatory. Clicking the Reverse button reverses the direction.
Circular Pattern
Two arrows are then displayed on the pad.
Contextual commands creating the reference elements you need are now available from the Reference element field: r Create Line: For more information, see Creating Lines.
r
X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction. Create Plane: see Creating Planes.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Reference element field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
Circular Pattern
If you modify the angular spacing, the application previews the result: arrows 1 and 2 are moved accordingly. 8. click Preview: the pad will be repeated seven times. The instances are green, just like the original feature.
9.
Now, you are going to add a crown to your part. To do so, click the Crown Definition tab. 10. Set the Circle & Circle spacing options to define the parameters you wish to specify. 11. Enter 2 in the Circle(s) field. 12. Enter -18 mm in the Circle spacing field. This figure may help you to define your parameters:
Circular Pattern
13. Click OK. These are your new instances:
14. Now, you are going to modify the position of the initial pad. Such a modification will affect all instances too. To do so, click the More button to display the whole dialog box.
15. Enter 20 in the Rotation angle field. The application previews the rotation.
Circular Pattern
Applying the Delete command on one instance deletes the whole pattern. However, deleting the instances of your choice is possible when creating or editing the pattern. To do so, just select the points materializing instances in the pattern preview. Selecting these points again will enable the application maintain the corresponding instances. The "Simplified representation" option lets you lighten the pattern geometry. What you need to do is just check the option and double-click the instances you do not want to see. The instances are then represented in dashed lines during the pattern definition and then are no longer visible after validating the pattern creation. The specifications remain unchanged, whatever the number of instances you view. This option is particularly used for patterns including a large number of instances. Remember then that clicking once or double-clicking an instance does not lead to the same result. 16. Click OK. All instances are moved accordingly.
The scenario above does not show the use of the "Radial alignment of instances" option. In addition to performing the steps described, you could have used this option that allows you to define the instance orientations.
The option is checked: all The option is unchecked: all instances are normal to instances have the same the lines tangent to the circle. orientation as the original feature.
Circular Pattern
The application offers the capability of creating polar patterns (for example, spiral patterns). To do so, define formulas using parameters i and j. For more information about formulas, refer to the CATIA- Knowledge Advisor User's Guide Version 5. During your design, you may need to rework instances specifically. You will then have to use the Explode contextual menu item to delete your pattern while keeping geometry. For more information, refer to Exploding Patterns.
Complex Patterns
You can pattern a list of Part Design features by proceeding as follows: 1. Multi-select the features to be duplicated. These features must belong to the same body. 2. Click the Circular Pattern icon . The features are indicated in the Object field. 3. Set the parameters you need as shown in the task above. These rules are to be kept in mind before patterning a list of features. q When multi-selecting, the first feature you select must not be a dress-up feature.
q
Your list of features cannot include any transformation feature, nor shell, nor split, nor associated bodies. Your list of features cannot include any body.
Circular Pattern

User Pattern
User Pattern
The User Pattern command lets you duplicate a feature, a list of features or a body resulting from an association of bodies. as many times as you wish at the locations of your choice. Locating instances consists in specifying anchor points. These points are created in the Sketcher. This task shows you how to duplicate a feature list including a pocket and a fillet at the points defined in a same sketch plane.
Open the UserPattern1_R06.CATPart document. 1. Select the filleted pocket you wish to duplicate. Note that whenever you are using a feature list, you need to multi-select the features in the order they were created.
2. Click the User Pattern icon
The User Pattern dialog box is displayed. The pocket and the fillet appear in the Object field.
q
If you click the User Pattern icon prior to selecting any geometry, by default, the object to be patterned is the current solid. For more information, refer to Patterning Current Solids.
User Pattern
If you change your mind and decide to pattern the current solid, click the Object field and use the Get current solid contextual menu item. Checking the Keep specifications option creates instances with the limit Up to Next ( Up to Last, Up to Plane or Up to Surface) defined for the original feature. In our scenario, the hole was created using the Up to Next option, but as the support for holes is a pad of an even thickness (20 mm), this makes the use of the option meaningless. The "Keep specifications" option is not available for feature lists.
3. Select 'Sketch 4' in the specification tree and click Preview. The sketch includes the nine points you need to locate the duplicated holes.
User Pattern
4.
As you just need eight points, click both points you do not need to unselect them.
Anchor
By default, the application positions each instance with respect to the center of gravity or the element to be duplicated. To change this position, use the anchor field: click the Anchor field and select a vertex or a point.
q
Contextual commands creating the anchors you need are now available from the Anchor field: r Create Point: for more information, see Creating Points
r r r
Create Midpoint: creates the midpoint of the line you select Create Endpoint: creates the endpoint of the line you select Create Intersection: see Creating Intersections Create Projection: see Creating Projections
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the Anchor field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element. 5. Click OK. The pockets and fillets are created at the points of the sketch. The specification tree indicates this creation.
User Pattern

Exploding Patterns
During your design, you may need to rework instances specifically. You will then have to use the Explode contextual menu item to delete your pattern while keeping geometry. For more information, refer to Exploding Patterns.
Exploding Patterns
Exploding Patterns
During your design you may decide to perform specific operations on a certain number of instances created via the Pattern command. Before performing such operations, you need to explode your pattern, which makes each instance independent. This task shows you how to delete a pattern while keeping geometry. The Explode command can be applied to patterns created with features and feature lists, not with bodies. This capability is available in P2 mode only. Open the RectangularPattern1_R04.CATPart document and perform a basic pattern. 1. Right-click the pattern you want to explode.
2.
Use the RectPattern.1object -> Explode... contextual command. You obtain as many features in the specification tree as there were instances. The geometry remains unchanged.
Exploding Patterns
Note that: q if the original element you patterned contains a dress-up feature, for instance a fillet, exploding the pattern does not delete the fillet defined on each instance.
q
However, if a dress-up feature has been defined on a pattern instance, exploding the pattern will delete this dress-up feature.
3.
You can now edit pockets individually. For example, you can move them to the location of your choice.
Exploding Patterns
Scaling
Scaling
Scaling geometry means resizing it to the dimension you specify, using points, planes or planar sufaces as scaling references. This task shows how to scale a body in relation to a point.
Open the Scaling1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the body to be scaled.
2. Click the Scaling icon
The Scaling Definition dialog box appears.
3. Select the reference point located on the body. A graphic manipulator is displayed on the body. 4. Enter a value in the Ratio field or select the manipulator and drag it. The ratio increases as you drag the manipulator in the direction pointed by the right end arrow.
Scaling
5. Click OK. The body is scaled. The specification tree indicates you performed this operation.
You can also resize a body in relation to a face or plane. In the example below, the plane zx is the reference element and the ratio is 1.6. You obtain then an affinity.
Scaling
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Reference Elements
Reference Elements
You can display the Reference Elements toolbar using the View -> Tool bars -> Reference Elements (extended/compact) command. Create Points: Click this icon, choose the creation method then define the required parameters. Create Lines: Click this icon, choose the creation method then define the required parameters. Create Planes: Click this icon, choose the creation method then define the required parameters.
Creating Points
Creating Points
This task shows the various methods for creating points: q by coordinates
q
on a curve on a plane on a surface at a circle center tangent point on a curve between
Open the Points3D-1.CATPart document. 1. Click the Point icon .
The Point Definition dialog box appears. 2. Use the combo to choose the desired point type.
Coordinates
q
Enter the X, Y, Z coordinates in the current axis-system. Optionally, select a reference point. The corresponding point is displayed.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugpoint3D.htm (1 of 8)10/18/2004 7:54:56 PM
Creating Points
When creating a point within a user-defined axis-system, note that the Coordinates in absolute axis-system check button is added to the dialog box, allowing you to be define, or simply find out, the point's coordinates within the document's default axissystem. If you create a point using the coordinates method and an axis system is already defined and set as current, the point's coordinates are defined according to current the axis system. As a consequence, the point's coordinates are not displayed in the specification tree. The axis system must be different from the absolute axis.
On curve
q
Select a curve Optionally, select a reference point. If this point is not on the curve, it is projected onto the curve. If no point is selected, the curve's extremity is used as reference.
Select an option point to determine whether the new point is to be created: r at a given distance along the curve from the reference point
r
a given ratio between the reference point and the curve's extremity.
Creating Points
q
Enter the distance or ratio value. If a distance is specified, it can be: r a geodesic distance: the distance is measured along the curve
r
an Euclidean distance: the distance is measured in relation to the reference point (absolute value).
The corresponding point is displayed. You can also: q click the Nearest extremity button to display the point at the nearest extremity of the curve.
q
click the Middle Point button to display the mid-point of the curve. use the Reverse Direction button to display: r the point on the other side of the reference point (if a point was selected originally)
r
the point from the other extremity (if no point was selected originally).
click the Repeat object after OK if you wish to create equidistant points on the curve, using the currently created point as the reference, as described in Creating Multiple Points in the Wireframe and Surface User's Guide . You will also be able to create planes normal to the curve at these points, by checking the Create normal planes also button, and to create all instances in a new Open Body by checking the Create in a new open body button. If the button is not checked the instances are created in the current Open Body.
Creating Points
q
If the curve is infinite and no reference point is explicitly given, by default, the reference point is the projection of the model's origin If the curve is a closed curve, either the system detects a vertex on the curve that can be used as a reference point, or it creates an extremum point, and highlights it (you can then select another one if you wish) or the system prompts you to manually select a reference point.
Extremum points created on a closed curve are now aggregated under their parent command and put in no show in the specification tree.
On plane
q
Select a plane. Optionally, select a point to define a reference for computing coordinates in the plane. If no point is selected, the projection of the model's origin on the plane is taken as reference.
Optionally, select a surface on which the point is projected normally to the plane. If no surface is selected, the behavior is the same.
Creating Points
Furthermore, the reference direction (H and V vectors) is computed as follows: With N the normal to the selected plane (reference plane), H results from the vectorial product of Z and N (H = Z^N). If the norm of H is strictly positive then V results from the vectorial product of N and H (V = N^H). Otherwise, V = N^X and H = V^N. Would the plane move, during an update for example, the reference direction would then be projected on the plane.
q
Click in the plane to display a point.
On surface
q
Select the surface where the point is to be created.
Creating Points
q
Optionally, select a reference point. By default, the surface's middle point is taken as reference. You can select an element to take its orientation as reference direction or a plane to take its normal as reference direction. You can also use the contextual menu to specify the X, Y, Z components of the reference direction. Enter a distance along the reference direction to display a point.
Circle center
q
Select a circle, circular arc, or ellipse.
A point is displayed at the center of the selected element.
Tangent on curve
q
Select a planar curve and a direction line. A point is displayed at each tangent.
Creating Points
The Multi-Result Management dialog box is displayed because several points are generated.
q
Click YES: you can then select a reference element, to which only the closest point is created. Click NO: all the points are created.
Between
q
Select any two points.
Enter the ratio, that is the percentage of the distance from the first selected point, at which the new point is to be. You can also click Middle Point button to create a point at the exact midpoint (ratio = 0.5).
Use the Reverse direction button to measure the ratio from the second selected point.
If the ratio value is greater than 1, the point is located on the virtual line beyond the selected points. 3. Click OK to create the point. The point (identified as Point.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Creating Points
Creating Lines
Creating Lines
This task shows the various methods for creating lines:
q
point to point point and direction angle or normal to curve tangent to curve normal to surface bisecting
Open the Lines1.CATPart document. 1. Click the Line icon .
The Line Definition dialog box appears. 2. Use the combo to choose the desired line type.
A line type will be proposed automatically in some cases depending on your first element selection.
Point - Point
This command is only available with the Generative Shape Design 2 product.
Select two points.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugline3D.htm (1 of 11)10/18/2004 7:55:27 PM
Creating Lines
A line is displayed between the two points. Proposed Start and End points of the new line are shown.
If needed, select a support surface. In this case a geodesic line is created, i.e. going from one point to the other according to the shortest distance along the surface geometry (blue line in the illustration below). If no surface is selected, the line is created between the two points based on the shortest distance.
If you select two points on closed surface (a cylinder for example), the result may be unstable. Therefore, it is advised to split the surface and only keep the part on which the geodesic line will lie. The geodesic line is not available with the Wireframe and Surface workbench.
Creating Lines
Specify the Start and End points of the new line, that is the line endpoint location in relation to the points initially selected. These Start and End points are necessarily beyond the selected points, meaning the line cannot be shorter than the distance between the initial points. Check the Mirrored extent option to create a line symmetrically in relation to the selected Start and End points.
The projections of the 3D point(s) must already exist on the selected support.
Point - Direction
q
Select a reference Point and a Direction line. A vector parallel to the direction line is displayed at the reference point. Proposed Start and End points of the new line are shown.
Creating Lines
Specify the Start and End points of the new line. The corresponding line is displayed.
The projections of the 3D point(s) must already exist on the selected support.
Angle or normal to curve

q
Select a reference Curve and a Support surface containing that curve.
Creating Lines
- If the selected curve is planar, then the Support is set to Default (Plane). - If an explicit Support has been defined, a contextual menu is available to clear the selection.
q q
Select a Point on the curve. Enter an Angle value.
A line is displayed at the given angle with respect to the tangent to the reference curve at the selected point. These elements are displayed in the plane tangent to the surface at the selected point. You can click on the Normal to Curve button to specify an angle of 90 degrees. Proposed Start and End points of the line are shown.
q
Specify the Start and End points of the new line. The corresponding line is displayed.
Creating Lines
Click the Repeat object after OK if you wish to create more lines with the same definition as the currently created line. In this case, the Object Repetition dialog box is displayed, and you key in the number of instances to be created before pressing OK.
As many lines as indicated in the dialog box are created, each separated from the initial line by a multiple of the angle value. You can select the Geometry on Support check box if you want to create a geodesic line onto a support surface. The figure below illustrates this case.
Geometry on support option not checked
Geometry on support option checked
Creating Lines
This line type enables to edit the line's parameters. Refer to Editing Parameters to find out how to display these parameters in the 3D geometry.
Tangent to curve
q
Select a reference Curve and a point or another Curve to define the tangency. r if a point is selected (monotangent mode): a vector tangent to the curve is displayed at the selected point.
r
If a second curve is selected (or a point in bi-tangent mode), you need to select a support plane. The line will be tangent to both curves. - If the selected curve is a line, then the Support is set to Default (Plane). - If an explicit Support has been defined, a contextual menu is available to clear the selection. When several solutions are possible, you can choose one (displayed in red) directly in the geometry, or using the Next Solution button.
Creating Lines
Line tangent to curve at a given point Line tangent to two curves

q
Specify Start and End points to define the new line. The corresponding line is displayed.
Normal to surface
q
Select a reference Surface and a Point. A vector normal to the surface is displayed at the reference point. Proposed Start and End points of the new line are shown.
Creating Lines
Specify Start and End points to define the new line. The corresponding line is displayed.
Bisecting
q
Select two lines. Their bisecting line is the line splitting in two equals parts the angle between these two lines. Select a point as the starting point for the line. By default it is the intersection of the bisecting line and the first selected line.
Creating Lines
Select the support surface onto which the bisecting line is to be projected, if needed. Specify the line's length in relation to its starting point (Start and End values for each side of the line in relation to the default end points). The corresponding bisecting line, is displayed. You can choose between two solutions, using the Next Solution button, or directly clicking the numbered arrows in the geometry.
3. Click OK to create the line. The line (identified as Line.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Creating Lines
q
Regardless of the line type, Start and End values are specified by entering distance values or by using the graphic manipulators. Start and End values should not be the same. Select the Length Type: r Length: the line will be defined according to the Start and End points values
r r r
Infinite: the line will be infinite Infinite Start Point: the line will be infinite from the Start point Infinite End Point: the line will be infinite from the End point
By default, the Length type is selected. The Start and/or the End points values will be greyed when one of the Infinite options is chosen.
q
Check the Mirrored extent option to create a line symmetrically in relation to the selected Start point. In most cases, you can select a support on which the line is to be created. In this case, the selected point(s) is projected onto this support. You can reverse the direction of the line by either clicking the displayed vector or selecting the Reverse Direction button (not available with the point-point line type).
Creating Planes
Creating Planes
This task shows the various methods for creating planes:
q
offset from a plane parallel through point q through a planar curve angle/normal to a q normal to a curve plane through three points through two lines through a point and a line
q
tangent to a surface from its equation mean through points
Open the Planes1.CATPart document. 1. Click the Plane icon .
The Plane Definition dialog box appears. 2. Use the combo to choose the desired Plane type. Once you have defined the plane, it is represented by a red square symbol, which you can move using the graphic manipulator.
Offset from plane

q
Select a reference Plane then enter an Offset value.
A plane is displayed offset from the reference plane.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugplane3D.htm (1 of 11)10/18/2004 7:58:14 PM
Creating Planes
Use the Reverse Direction button to reverse the change the offset direction, or simply click on the arrow in the geometry.
Click the Repeat object after OK if you wish to create more offset planes . In this case, the Object Repetition dialog box is displayed, and you key in the number of instances to be created before pressing OK. As many planes as indicated in the dialog box are created (including the one you were currently creating), each separated from the initial plane by a multiple of the Offset value.
Parallel through point

q
Select a reference Plane and a Point.
Creating Planes
A plane is displayed parallel to the reference plane and passing through the selected point.
Angle or normal to plane

q
Select a reference Plane and a Rotation axis. This axis can be any line or an implicit element, such as a cylinder axis for example. To select the latter press and hold the Shift key while moving the pointer over the element, then click it. Enter an Angle value.
Creating Planes
A plane is displayed passing through the rotation axis. It is oriented at the specified angle to the reference plane.
Click the Repeat object after OK if you wish to create more planes at an angle from the initial plane. In this case, the Object Repetition dialog box is displayed, and you key in the number of instances to be created before pressing OK. As many planes as indicated in the dialog box are created (including the one you were currently creating), each separated from the initial plane by a multiple of the Angle value. Here we created five planes at an angle of 20 degrees.
This plane type enables to edit the plane's parameters. Refer to Editing Parameters to find out how to display these parameters in the 3D geometry.
Through three points

q
Select three points.
Creating Planes
The plane passing through the three points is displayed. You can move it simply by dragging it to the desired location.
Through two lines

q
Select two lines.
The plane passing through the two line directions is displayed. When these two lines are not coplanar, the vector of the second line is moved to the first line location to define the plane's second direction.
Creating Planes
Check the Forbid non coplanar lines button to specify that both lines be in the same plane.
Through point and line

q
Select a Point and a Line.
The plane passing through the point and the line is displayed.
Creating Planes
Through planar curve

q
Select a planar Curve.
The plane containing the curve is displayed.
Tangent to surface
q
Select a reference Surface and a Point.
Creating Planes
A plane is displayed tangent to the surface at the specified point.
Normal to curve
q q
Select a reference Curve. You can select a Point. By default, the curve's middle point is selecte.
Creating Planes
A plane is displayed normal to the curve at the specified point.
Mean through points

q
Select three or more points to display the mean plane through these points.
It is possible to edit the plane by first selecting a point in the dialog box list then choosing an option to either: q Remove the selected point
q
Replace the selected point by another point.
Creating Planes
Equation
q
Enter the A, B, C, D components of the Ax + By + Cz = D plane equation.
Select a point to position the plane through this point, you are able to modify A, B, and C components, the D component becomes grayed.
Use the Normal to compass button to position the plane perpendicular to the compass direction.
Use the Parallel to screen button to parallel to the screen current view.
Creating Planes
3. Click OK to create the plane. The plane (identified as Plane.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Using Surfaces and Curves
Using Surfaces and Curves

Join Surfaces or Curves: select at least two curves or surfaces to be joined. Extrapolate Surfaces: select a surface boundary, specify the extrapolation type and value. Extract Geometry: select an edge or the face of a geometric element, and set the propagation type. Create Intersections: select the two elements to be intersected. Create Projections: select the element to be projected and its support, specify the projection direction. Create Boundary Curves: select a surface's edge, set the propagation type, and redefine the curve limits if needed.
Modifying Features
Modifying Parts
Redefine Feature Parameters Select the object to be edited, double-click it, then enter new parameters in the dialog box that is displayed.
Reorder Features: Select the feature to be reordered, the Edit -> xxx.object -> Reorder...command and the feature after which you wish to position your object.
Update Parts: Click this icon. To resolve possible difficulties, click the Edit, Deactivate or Delete button in the dialog box that appears.
Delete Features: Select the feature to be deleted and the Edit -> Delete... command. Optionally, delete its exclusive parents or its children by checking the corresponding options.
For reference information, please refer to Specification Tree. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Editing parts, bodies, features
Editing Parts, Bodies and Features

Editing a part may mean for example modifying the density of the part (See Displaying and Editing Properties ), but most often editing consists in modifying the features composing the part. This operation can be done at any time. There are several ways of editing a feature. If you modify the sketch used in the definition of a feature, the application will take this modification into account to compute the feature again: in other words, associativity is maintained. Now, you can also edit your features through definition dialog boxes in order to redefine the parameters of your choice.
Redefining Feature Parameters

This task shows how to edit a draft and a pad. The process described here is valid for any other feature to be edited. Open the Edit1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Double-click the draft to be edited (in the specification tree or in the geometry area). The Draft Definition dialog box appears and the application shows the current draft angle value. Generally speaking, the application always shows dimensional constraints related to the feature you are editing. Concerning sketch-based features, it also shows the sketches used for extrusion as well as the constraints defined for these sketches.
Instead of double-clicking the element you wish to edit, you can also click this element and select the XXX.object -> Definition... command which will display the edit dialog box.
2. Enter a new draft angle value. 3. Click OK. This is your new feature:
4. Now, double-click the pad. The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application shows the pad only, not the next operation. You will notice that the pad was created in symmetric extent mode and that the application displays information about the initial profile.
5. Enter a new length value. 6. Uncheck the Mirrored extent option. 7. Enter a length value for the second limit in the Length field. Optionally, click Preview to see the new pad to be created. 8. Click OK. The modifications are taken into account. Your part now looks like this:
1. You can also access the parameters you wish to edit in the following way: Select the feature in the specification tree and use the feature.n object -> Edit Parameters contextual command. You can now view the feature parameters in the geometry area.
2. Double-click the parameter of interest. A small dialog box appears displaying the parameter value:
3. Enter a new value and click OK. Note
If you wish to quit the Edit Parameters contextual command, just click the Select icon.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Reordering Features
Reordering Features
The Reorder capability allows you to rectify design mistakes. This task shows how to reorder, that is move a pad.
Open the Reorder1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Your initial data consists of a pad that was mirrored and a second pad created afterwards. As the order of creation is wrong, you are going to reorder the second pad so as to mirror the whole part. Position your cursor on Pad.2. and select Edit > Pad.2 object -> Reorder...
2. The Feature Reorder dialog box appears. Select Pad.1 to specify the new location of the feature. This name appears in the After field. 3. Click OK. The part rebuilds itself. The mirror feature appears after the creation of the second pad, which explains why this second pad is now mirrored.
Reordering Features
Updating Parts
Updating Parts
The point of updating a part is to make the application take your very last operation into account. Indeed some changes to a sketch, feature or constraint require the rebuild of the part. To warn you that an update is needed, the application displays the update symbol next to the part's name and displays the geometry in bright red. To update a part, the application provides two update modes: automatic update, available in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design . If checked, this option lets the application update the part when needed. manual update, available in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design: lets you control the updates of your part. What you have to do is just click the Update icon whenever you wish to integrate modifications. The Update capability is also available via Edit -> Update and the Update contextual menu item. A progression bar indicates the evolution of the operation. Note that you can cancel or interrupt updates.
What Happens When the Update Fails?

Sometimes, the update operation is not straightforward because for instance, you entered inappropriate edit values or because you deleted a useful geometrical element. In both cases, the application requires you to reconsider your design. The following scenario exemplifies what you can do in such circumstances. Open the Update3_R05.CATPart document. The part is shelled in this way:
Updating Parts
1. Enter the Sketcher to replace the circular edge of the initial sketch with a line, then return to Part Design. The application detects that this operation affects the shell. A yellow symbol displays on the feature causing trouble i.e. the shell in the specification tree. Moreover, a dialog box appears providing the diagnosis of your difficulties and the preview no longer shows the shell:
To resolve the problem, the dialog box provides the following options. If you wish to rework Shell.1, you can: q edit it
q
deactivate it (for more about deactivated features, refer to Feature Properties) isolate it delete it
q q
2. For the purposes of our scenario that is rather simple, click Shell.1 if not already done, then Edit. The Feature Definition Error window displays, prompting you to change specifications. Moreover, the old face you have just deleted is now displayed in yellow. The text "Removed Face" is displayed close to the face, thus giving you a better indication of the face that has been removed. Such a graphic text is now available for Thickness and Union Trim features too.
Updating Parts
3. Click OK to close the window. The Shell Definition dialog box appears.
Click the Faces to remove field if not 4. already done and select the replacing face.
Click OK to close the Shell Definition dialog box and obtain a correct part. The shell feature is rebuilt.
Cancelling Updates
You can cancel your updates by clicking the Cancel button available in the Updating...dialog box.
Interrupting Updates
Updating Parts
This scenario shows you how to update a part and interrupt the update operation on a given feature by means of a useful message you previously defined. Open the Update.CATPart document. Make sure that the Manual update option is active to be able to perform the scenario. 1. Right-click Hole.1 as the feature from which the update will be interrupted and select the Properties contextual menu item. The Properties dialog box is displayed. 2. Check the Associate stop update option. This option stops the update process and displays the memo you entered in the blank field. This capability is available in manual or automatic update mode.
3.
Enter any useful information you want in the blank field. For instance, enter "Fillet needs editing".
4. Click OK to confirm and close the dialog box. The entity Stop Update.1 is displayed in the specification tree, below Hole.1, indicating that the hole is the last feature that will be updated before the message window displays.
Updating Parts
5. Edit Sketch.1, which will invoke an update operation. When quitting the Sketcher, the part appears in bright red. 6. Run the Update operation by clicking the icon.
The Updating... as well as the Stop Update message windows are displayed. The Stop Update windows displays your memo and lets you decide whether you wish to stop the update operation or continue it.
7. Click Yes to finish. The part is updated. You can now edit the fillet if you consider it necessary.
Updating Parts
8. If you decide not to use this capability any longer, you can either: q right-click Hole.1, select the Properties contextual menu item and check the Deactivate stop update option: the update you will perform will be a basic one. To show that the capability is deactivated for this feature, red parentheses precede Hole.1 in the specification tree.
q
right-click Stop Update.1 and select the Delete contextual menu item to delete the capability.
Deleting Features
Deleting Features
Whenever you will have to delete geometry, you will not necessarily have to delete the elements used to create it. The application lets you define what you really want to delete. This task shows how to delete a sketch on which geometry has been defined and what this operation involves. Open the Delete1_R04.CATPart document. 1. Select the rectangle you wish to delete.
2.
Select the Edit -> Delete... commands. The Delete dialog box is displayed, showing the element to be deleted and two options. q Delete exclusive parents: deletes the geometry on which the element was created. This geometry can be deleted only if it is exclusively used for the selected element. This option is already checked if you previously checked the Delete exclusive parents option in the Options dialog box. For more information, refer to Customizing General Settings.
q
Delete all children: deletes the geometry based upon the element to be deleted, in other words, dependent elements.
Here, the first option cannot be used because the rectangle has no parents. 3. Click More. Additional options and the elements affected by the deletion are displayed. If you can delete the sketch, you can also replace it with another element. 4. Click ...PartBody\Sketch.2 to display Sketch.2 from the Replace section. Sketch.2 appears in the Replace field.
Deleting Features
5.
Select Sketch4, that is the hexagon to replace Sketch 2 . This operation is now displayed in the dialog box.
6.
Click OK. The sketch is deleted as well as its children: two pads one of which is filleted.
A Few Notes About Deletion
Deleting Features
Deleting Features Built upon Dress-up Features

If you delete a feature (dress-up or not) previously used to create a dress-up feature, the dressup feature is recomputed. In this example, thickness was added to the pad, then material was removed from the whole part using the shell capability. In other words, the existence of the shell depends upon the existence of the thickness.
You will notice that only the thickness has been deleted. The application keeps the shell feature.
Keep in mind you can apply the Undo command if you inadvertently deleted a feature. You are not allowed to delete a profile used to define a feature, unless you delete the profile to construct another one.
Patterns
Concerning patterns, applying the Delete command on one instance deletes the whole pattern.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Constraints
Setting Constraints
Set Constraints: Click this icon, select the elements to be constrained then click where you wish to position the constraint value. Set Constraints Defined in Dialog Box: Multi-select the elements to be constrained, click this icon and check the constraint type in the dialog box that appears.
Modify Constraints: Double-click the constraint to be modified and modify related data in the Constraint Definition dialog box that displays.
Rename Constraints: Select the constraint to be renamed, the xxx.n. object -> Rename contextual menu item.
()
Deactivate/Activate Constraints: Select the constraint to be (de)activated and the xxx.n.object -> Rename parameter contextual menu item and enter the desired name in the dialog box that appears.
Change Constraint Appearance: Select your constraint and choose one of the contextual menu items changing the display mode.
Mean Dimensions: Click this icon, then update the part.
Setting 3D Constraints
Setting Constraints
3D constraints are defined by means of one of the two constraint commands available in this workbench. Depending on the creation mode chosen for creating wireframe geometry and surfaces (see CATIA Wireframe and Surface User's Guide), constraints set on these elements may react in two ways. You create references if support elements were created with the Datum mode deactivated. Conversely, you create constraints if you constrain datums. For more about datums, please refer to Creating Datums. The constraints you can set in Part Design workbench are:
Distance
Length
Angle
Fix/Unfix
Tangency
Coincidence
Parallelism
Perpendicularity
This task shows you how to set a distance constraint between a face and a plane, then a reference between the face and another plane. Open the Constraint1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Select the face you wish to constrain and Plane.1. This plane is a datum (there are no links to the other entities that were used to create that plane).
2. Click the Constraint icon
The application detects the distance value between the face and the plane. Moving the cursor moves the graphic symbol representing the distance. 3. Click where you wish to position the constraint value. The constraint is created. The name of a constraint displays when passing the mouse over that constraint.
4. Now, set another constraint between the same face and Plane.2. Plane.2 is not a datum. Repeat the instructions described above using the face and Plane.2. The application creates a reference. Creating a reference means that each time the application integrates modifications to the geometry, this reference reflects the changes too. The reference is displayed in parentheses as shown below:
You cannot set a distance constraint between two faces belonging to Part Design features linked by their specifications. In the example below, the application creates a reference between the faces, not a driving constraint.
To know how to modify a constraint, refer to Modifying Constraints. Note You cannot view constraints if the plane in which they are located is normal to the screen. In that case, you just need to use the mouse, for example, to rotate the view and therefore make the constraints visible.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Setting constraints
Setting Constraints Defined in Dialog Box

This task shows you how to use this constraint command which detects possible constraints between selected elements and lets you choose the constraint you wish to create. You are going to constrain a hole. Open the Hole1_R04.CATPart document and create a hole anywhere on the pad top face. 1. Select the circular face and use the Other Selection... contextual menu item to select the hole axis.
2. Use the Ctrl button to select the face as shown:
3. Click the Constraint Defined in Dialog Box icon The Constraint Definition dialog box is displayed.
Setting constraints
The constraints you can set in Part Design workbench are: Distance
Length
Angle
Fix/Unfix
Tangency
Setting constraints
Coincidence
Parallelism
Perpendicularity
The application detects six possible constraints between the axis and the face: q Distance
q
Angle Fix/Unfix Coincidence Parallelism Perpendicularity
The other constraints are grayed out indicating that they cannot be set for the elements you have selected. 3. Check the Distance option. You can check only one constraint. 4. Click OK to confirm. The distance constraint is created.
Setting constraints
Modifying Constraints
Editing Constraints
You can edit constraints by: q double-clicking on desired constraints and modify related data in the Constraint Definition dialog box that displays.
selecting desired constraints and use the XXX.N.object -> Definition... contextual command.
...to display the Constraint Definition dialog box and modify related data.
Editing Constraints Set on Complex Elements

The term "complex element" refers to geometric elements made of several sub-elements. For example, joins are complex elements. For more about joins, please see the Generative Shape Design and Optimizer User's Guide.
The application can now resolve constraints defined on complex elements. For example, open the Constraint.CATPart document. The join that displays has been created using three splines as illustrated through three different colors.
If you edit the offset constraint set between Point.6 and Point.12 by entering 75mm, you will see that Point.11 is moved along Spline.3, and Point.13 along Spline.2. In a nutshell, the application now resolves constraints in relation to complex elements, here the join, and not to their sub-elements any longer.
About Diameter and Radius Constraints

q
You can obtain a radius constraint by editing a diameter constraint. You just need to double-click the diameter constraint and choose the radius option in the dialog box that displays.
If you need to create a formula remember that : the parameter corresponding to the radius or diameter constraint is referred to as "RadiusX. object" this parameter always contains the radius value.
For more about formulas, refer to CATIA-Knowledge Advisor User's Guide Version 5
Renaming Constraints
You can rename a constraint by selecting it and by using the XXX.N.object -> Rename parameter contextual command.... In the dialog box that appears, you just need to enter the name of your choice.
Deactivating or Activating Constraints

You can deactivate a constraint by selecting it and by using the XXX.N.object -> Deactivate contextual menu item. Deactivated constraints appear preceded by red parentheses ( ). Conversely, to activate a constraint, use the Activate contextual command.
Changing Constraint Appearance

Display mode
When setting constraints, four display mode are available as explained in Customizing Constraint Appearance. Later, you can change display modes by selecting the constraint of interest and choose one of the following contextual commands. - 'Value Display': only the constraint (or parameter) value is displayed. - 'Name Display': only the constraint (or parameter) name is displayed. - 'Name/Value Display': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are both displayed. - 'Name /Value/Formula': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are displayed as well as the possible formula defined for this constraint.
Permanent Display
It is possible to permanently display the parameters of Part Design features as well as the valued constraints of Sketcher elements by using the XXX.object ->Edit Parameters contextual command. Provided that the option "Parameters of features and constraints" has been previously checked in the Options dialog box, (for more see "Customizing the Tree and Geometry Views"), the following dialog box appears:
If you validate the option, parameters or constraints attached to the selected feature are permanently displayed in the 3D area.
Colors
To change the color of a given constraint, either you use the Properties contextual menu item or the Edit -> Properties -> Color (tab) command. You then just need to choose a color from the list (or you can define your own colors by selecting the More colors command at the bottom of the color list. To know more about defining personal colors, please refer CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide).
If you wish to change the color for a given status, use the Tools -> Options command. For more, see Customizing Constraint Appearance.
Mean Dimensions
Mean Dimensions
This task shows you how to compute the mean dimensions of a part. You must define the tolerances that you want before computing mean dimensions. For more about tolerances, refer to CATIA- Infrastructure User's guide Version 5. Open the Mean_Dimensions.CATPart document. 1. Before computing mean dimensions, apply the Edit Parameters contextual menu item to Pad.1 to display parameters, then take a look at the part you have just opened. The part includes three toleranced parameters as shown below.
Remember that to access tolerance values, you need to double-click the parameter of interest, then use the Tolerance -> Edit... contextual menu item. 2. Click the Mean Dimensions icon .
A dialog box appears informing you that the operation is performed. You then just need to update the part to observe the result.
Mean Dimensions
3.
Click the Update icon to integrate the modifications to the part. Note that the update options set for your session (for more see General Settings) do not affect the Mean Dimensions command behavior: you always have to explicitly update your part. Mean dimensions are displayed around the part.
Please bear in mind that if parameters are driven by formulas, the application deactivates these formulas to compute mean dimensions. 4. If you wish to go back to the previous state, click the Mean Dimensions icon again. A dialog box appears informing you that the part will be resized to nominal dimensions. 5. Click OK to confirm. An additional message appears to inform you that the operation is performed and prompts you to update the part. 6. Click OK to close the message window. 7. Click the Update icon
to resize the part to nominal dimensions.
Mean Dimensions
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Replacing Elements
Replacing or Moving Elements

Replace a Surface: Select the surface to be replaced and the Replace... contextual command. Select the replacing surface and optionally, check the Delete option to delete the replaced element as well as its exclusive parents.
Replace a Body: Select the attached body and the Replace... contextual command. Select the replacing body.
Change the Sketch Support: Select the Sketchx.object -> Change Sketch Support command then the replacing plane or face.
Move Sketches from a Body: Select the element to be moved then choose the xxx.object > Change Body contextual command.
Displaying and Editing Properties

Displaying and Editing Parts Properties: Select the part then the Edit -> Properties contextual menu item. Click the Mass tab, edit the density, click the Product tab and enter information describing the part.
Displaying and Editing Bodies Properties : Select the body then the Edit -> Properties contextual menu item. Click the Feature Properties tab, edit the name and click the Graphic tab to change the color of the body.
Displaying and Editing Features Properties : Select the feature then the Edit -> Properties contextual menu item. Check Deactivate to deactivate the feature and define the impacted elements to keep activated. Click the Feature Properties tab and edit the feature's name. Click the Graphic tab to change the color of the feature. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Annotations
Annotations
Creating Texts with Leaders: click this icon, select a face and enter your text in the dialog box. Creating Flag Notes with Leaders: click this icon, select the object you want to represent the hyperlink, enter a name for the hyperlink and the path to the destination file.
Creating a Text With Leader
Creating a Text with Leader

This task shows you how to create an annotation text with leader A text is assigned an unlimited width text frame. You can set graphic properties (anchor point, text size and justification) either before or after you create the free text. You can change any text to another kind at any time. Open the Common_Tolerancing_Annotations_01 CATPart document. To improve the highlight of the geometry selection, select the Tools->Options... command. In the General category, select the Display sub-category then the Navigation tab and check the option Highlight faces and edges.
1. Double-click the Projected View.1 annotation plane to activate it.
2. Click the Text with Leader icon:
3. Select the face as shown to define a location for the arrow end of the leader.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugfdt_C2/cfyugfdtbt0201.htm (1 of 4)10/18/2004 8:03:10 PM
If the active view is not valid, a message appears informing you that you cannot use the active view. Therefore, the application is going to display the annotation in an annotation plane normal to the selected face. For more information, see View/Annotation Planes. The Text Editor dialog box appears.
4. Enter your text, for example "New Annotation" in the dialog box.
5. Click OK to end the text creation. You can click anywhere in the geometry area too. The text appears in the geometry. The text (identified as Text.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
The leader is associated with the element you selected. If you move either the text or the element, the leader stretches to maintain its association with the element. Moreover, if you change the element associated with the leader, application keeps the associativity between the element and the leader. Note that using the Text Properties toolbar, you can define the anchor point, text size and justification.
You can move a text using either the drag capability. Note also that you can resize the manipulators For more information, refer to Customizing for 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotations.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Flag Notes
Creating Flag Notes

You can add hyperlinks to your document and then use them to jump to a variety of locations, for example to a marketing presentation, a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or a HTML page on the intranet. You can add hyperlinks to models, products and parts as well as to any constituent elements. This task shows you how to add hyperlinks. Open the WeldPlanner.CATProduct document (or GreenPartCATPart document) and prepare a document that you want to see displayed via a hyperlink.
1. 2.
Click the Flag Note with Leader icon
Select the object you want to represent the hyperlink. For the purposes of our example, select the face as shown:
The Manage Hyperlink dialog box appears.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugflagnote.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 8:03:18 PM
Flag Notes
3. 4.
Enter a name for your hyperlink. For example, "marketing presentation". Enter the path to the destination file in the URL field then press Enter. Or, Click Browse... and select the destination file in the Link to File dialog box. Note: You can add more than one link. Simply enter another path or click Browse... and select another file. All links created are listed in the Link to file or URL box. q Select a link then click Go to to follow the link to the destination file.
q
Select a link then click Remove to remove existing links.
5.
Click OK in the Manage Hyperlink dialog box when satisfied. The hyperlink is created and is identified as Flag Note.xxx (name of the document) in the specification tree.
Flag Notes
6.
If you wish to edit the display of the note, use the Properties contextual command.
Handling Parts in a Multi-Document Environment

In this task, you are going to copy a part body from one CATPart document to another, then edit the initial part body. This scenario shows you how the application harmonizes this type of ulterior modifications. Thanks to the underlying methodology, you can work in concurrent engineering. Open the MultiDocument1_R04.CATPart document. This scenario assumes there are two CATPart documents. Part3.CATPart is the target document, MultiDocument1_R04.CATPart contains the part body that will be copied, then edited in Part3. The part body to be copied looks like this:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select Part Body. Select the Edit -> Copy command to copy the part body. Open a new CATPart document 'Part3.CATPart' and position the cursor anywhere in the specification tree. Select the Edit -> Paste Special... command. The Paste Special dialog box appears. Three paste options are available: q As specified in Part document: the object is copied as well as its design specifications
q
As Result With Link: the object is copied without its design specifications and the link is maintained between the reference and the copy. As Result: the object is copied without its design specifications and there is no link between the reference and the copy.
5.
For our scenario, select the As Result With Link option if not already selected, and Click OK . Part Body is copied into the Part3.CATPart document. You will notice that the specification tree displays it under the name of `Solid.1'. A cube represents this solid.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugat0100.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 8:03:24 PM
6.
Now, if you wish, you can fillet four edges. You can actually perform any modification you need.
7. 8.
Return into the first document. Use the Remove command to remove material from the part body.
9.
In the Part3.CATPart document, the cube graphic symbol used for Solid.1 in the tree now contains a red point. This means that the initial Part Body underwent transformations.
You can also notice that the update symbol is displayed next to Part3.
10. What you need to do is update the copied object. Just click Solid.1 in the specification tree.
11. Select the Update command to update the whole part. The solid is updated to reflect the change: material is removed. The specification tree indicates that the part body has integrated the modifications made to the original part body.
Opening Pointed Documents

The Open Pointed Document contextual command is available for external references. If you apply it onto "Solid.1" for example, MultiDocument1_R04.CATPart opens (if closed of course) in your session.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Advanced Tasks
Advanced Tasks
This section will explain and illustrate how to perform operations on bodies and will provide recommendations about how to optimize the use of the application. The table below lists the information you will find. Associating Bodies Tools PowerCopy Reusing your Design Managing Part and Assembly Templates Managing User Defined Features
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugat0000.htm10/18/2004 8:05:38 PM
Associating Bodies
Associating Bodies
You must use bodies as entities you will eventually associate to the Part Body using the capabilities described below to finish the design of your part. Insert a New Body: Click the icon or select the Insert -> Body command. Insert Features into a New Body: Click the icon or select the Insert -> Body command. Assemble Bodies: Select the required body, the Insert -> Boolean Operations -> Assemble command and the target body. Intersect Bodies: Select the first body, the Insert -> Boolean Operations -> Intersect command and the second body. Add Bodies: Select the body to be added, the Insert -> Boolean Operations -> Add command and the target body. Remove Bodies: Select the body to be removed, the Insert -> Boolean Operations -> Remove command and the target body. Trim Bodies: Select the body to be trimmed and the Insert -> Body.1.object -> Union Trim... command. Click the Faces to remove field and select the desired faces. Click the Faces to keep field and select the desired faces. Remove Lumps: Select Part Body and Part Body object -> Remove Lump... contextual menu item. Click the Faces to remove field and select the desired faces. Change a Boolean Operation into Another One use the contextual menu item. [ Up ] [ Next ]
Inserting a Body
Inserting a New Body

This task shows you how to insert a new body into the part. When your part includes several bodies, you can then associate these bodies in different ways (see the Assemble, Add, Trim, Intersect, Remove and Remove Lump commands) to obtain the final shape of the part. For example, open the Add_R09.CATPart document. This is the initial part, composed of Part Body and two bodies:
1. If the icon is not visible in the application, you can display it by using the View > Toolbars -> Insert command. The result is immediate. the application displays this new body referred to as "Body.3" in the specification tree. It is underlined, indicating that it is the active body. Now, the image associated with bodies in the tree differs from the image representing the part body. A blue gear as well as a yellow plus or minus sign have been added to the green gear. These signs indicate the polarity of the body.
Inserting a Body
This new image lets you quickly tell a body from a part body especially if that one has been renamed.
Inserting a Body
You can construct this new body using the diverse commands available in this workbench or in other workbenches. You will notice that Part Body and Body.3 are autonomous. The operations you would accomplish on any of them would not affect the integrity of the other one. Now, if you wish to combine them, refer to the tasks showing the different ways of attaching bodies: Adding Bodies, Assembling Bodies, Intersecting Bodies, Removing Bodies, Trimming Bodies.
Showing or Hiding Bodies

To hide all the features, even the sketches, of a current or non-current body, simply use the Hide components contextual menu item. Conversely, use the Show components contextual menu item to restore the view.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Inserting in a Body
Inserting Features into a New Body

These tasks show you how to restructure your specifications tree by gathering two or more features into a new body. Depending on your geometry, this operation may affect the part's final shape or not. For example, open the Publish.CATPart document. 1. Multiselect Pad.1, Pad.2 and Draft.1 as the features you want to group in a new body. These features must belong to the same body or part body and they must be consecutive in the tree. The selection order does not matter.
2. Select the Insert->Insert in new body command. Lilkewise, you can use the Insert in new... contextual command or simply click the icon available in the Insert toolbar.
The new body is created at the location of the feature that was first on the list. You can edit the properties of this new body that behaves like any other body.
Inserting in a Body
A Few Recommendations
Contextual Features q Among the features you select, you cannot select a contextual feature as the first feature in the tree.
q
If your selection includes a contextual feature but not its parent (or 'support'), you cannot use the Assemble in New Body capability.
'Up to ...' Features

q
Among the features you select, you cannot select an 'up to ...' feature as the first feature in the tree. If your selection includes an 'up to ...' feature but not its parent, the application warns you that you can either quit the command or validate the selection bearing in mind that the capability can modify the geometry. To perform the scenario illustrating that, open the Insert_R11.CATPart document.
The part is composed of three pads, one of which 'Pad.3' was created using the Up to next option. 1. Multiselect Pad.2 and Pad.3.
Inserting in a Body
2. Select the Insert->Assemble in New Body command. A warning message is issued indicating that the operation may result in an update error or modifications to the geometry. 3. If you wish to give up, click 'No'. For the purposes of our scenario, click 'Yes'. You obtain a modified part.
Assembling Bodies
Assembling Bodies
Assembling is an operation integrating your part specifications. It allows you to create complex geometry. This task shows you two assemble operations. You will see then how the resulting parts look different depending on your specifications. When working in a CATProduct document, it is not necessary to copy and paste the bodies belonging to distinct parts before associating them. You can directly associate these bodies using the same steps as described in this task. Open the Assemble1_R04.CATPart document and make sure Part Body is the current body. First, you are going to assemble a pocket on Part Body. You will note that as this pocket is the first feature of the body, material has been added (see Pocket). 1. To assemble them, select Body 2 and click the Assemble...icon .
Assembling a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This capability will increase your productivity.
Assembling Bodies
The Assemble dialog box displays to let you determine the operation you wish to perform. By default, the application proposes to assemble the selected body to Part Body.
2. Click OK to confirm. During the operation, the application removes the material defined by the pocket from Part Body. This is your new Part Body:
3. Now delete the assemble operation to go back to the previous state. You are going to perform the second assemble operation. 4. Select Body.2 and the Edit -> Body2.object -> The Assemble dialog box displays again. Assemble command.
Assembling Bodies
5. Select Body.1 in the specification tree to edit the After: field. Body.1 appears in the field, indicating that you are going to assemble Body.2 on Body.1. 6. Click OK. The material defined by the pocket from Body1 has been removed during the operation.
You cannot re-apply the Assemble, Add, Trim, Intersect, Remove and Remove Lump commands to bodies already associated to other bodies. However, if you copy and paste the result of such operations elsewhere in the tree you can then use these commands. Avoid using input elements that are tangent to each other since this may result in geometric instabilities in the tangency zone.
Structuring Your Design

Generally speaking, using Boolean Operations is a good way of structuring your part. Prior to designing, you can actually define the part's structure by associating a body containing geometry with empty bodies. Once these specifications are done, you can then concentrate on the geometry.
Intersecting Bodies
Intersecting Bodies
The material resulting from an intersection operation between two bodies is the material shared by these bodies. This tasks illustrates how to compute two intersections. When working in a CATProduct document, it is no longer necessary to copy and paste the bodies belonging to distinct parts before associating them. You can directly associate these bodies using the same steps as described in this task. Open the Intersect1_R04.CATPart document. 1. The initial part is composed of three bodies. Each body contains one pad. To compute the intersection between the Part Body and Body 2, select Body.2. Intersecting a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This capability will increase your productivity.
Intersecting Bodies
2. Click the Intersect...
icon.
The Intersect dialog box displays to let you determine the second body you wish to use. By default, the application proposes to intersect the selected body to Part Body. 3. Click OK to confirm. The application computes the intersection between the two bodies.
Part Body now looks like this:
4. Now delete the intersection to go back to the previous state. You are going to create a new intersection.
Intersecting Bodies
5. Select Body 2 and right-click to select the Edit -> Body2.object -> Intersect contextual menu item. This displays the Intersect dialog box. 6. Select Body1 in the specification tree to edit the After field.
7. Click OK. Body1 now looks like this:
Intersecting Bodies

Adding Bodies
Adding Bodies
This task illustrates how to add a body to another body. Adding a body to another one means uniting them. When working in a CATProduct document, it is no longer necessary to copy and paste the bodies belonging to distinct parts before associating them. You can directly associate these bodies using the same steps as described in this task. Open the Add_R09.CATPart document and make sure Part Body is the current body. This is your initial data: the Add part is composed of three bodies. Each body includes a pad. These pads are therefore independent. 1. To add Body.1 to Part Body, select Body.1. Adding a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This capability will increase your productivity.
2.
Click the Add icon
Adding Bodies
The Add dialog box that appears displays the name of the selected body and the Part Body. By default, the application proposes to add the selected body to Part Body. For the purpose of our scenario, we keep this location. Note however that you could add Body.1 to Body.2 one just by selecting Body.2. 3. Click OK. The specification tree and Part Body now looks like this:
You will note that: q the material common to Part Body and Body.1 has been removed
q
both pads keep their original colors.
Adding Bodies

Removing Bodies
Removing Bodies
This tasks illustrates how to remove a body from another body. When working in a CATProduct document, it is no longer necessary to copy and paste the bodies belonging to distinct parts before associating them. You can directly associate these bodies using the same steps as described in this task. Open the Remove1_R04.CATPart document. 1. The part is composed of two bodies. To remove Body.1 from Part Body, select Body.1. Removing a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This capability will increase your productivity.
2. Click the Remove... icon
Removing a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This capability will increase your productivity.
Removing Bodies

Trimming Bodies
Trimming Bodies
Applying the Union Trim command on a body entails defining the elements to be kept or removed while performing the union operation. The following rules are to be kept in mind: Rule 1 REMOVE: Selected bodies ONLY are removed
Rule 2 KEEP: selected body is kept. All other bodies are removed
Trimming Bodies
Rule 3 REMOVE is not necessary if KEEP specification exists
Concretely speaking, you need to select the required bodies and specify the faces you wish to keep or remove.
This task illustrates how to use the Union Trim capability. When working in a CATProduct document, it is no longer necessary to copy and paste the bodies belonging to distinct parts before associating them. You can directly associate these bodies using the same steps as described in this task. Open the UnionTrim1_R07.CATPart document. 1. Select the body you wish to trim, i.e. Body.2.
2. Click the Union Trim icon
The Trim Definition dialog box is displayed. The faces you cannot select are displayed in red.
Trimming Bodies
3. Click the Faces to remove field and select Body.2 's inner face.
The selected face appears in pink, meaning that the application is going to remove it.
4. Click the Faces to keep field and select Part Body. 's inner face. This face becomes blue, meaning that the application is going to keep it.
Clicking the Preview button lets you check if your specifications meet your needs or not. 5. Click OK to confirm. The application computes the material to be removed. The operation (identified as Trim.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Trimming Bodies
You cannot re-apply the Assemble, Add, Trim, Intersect, Remove and Remove Lump commands to bodies already associated to other bodies. However, if you copy and paste the result of such operations elsewhere in the tree you can then use these commands. Avoid using input elements that are tangent to each other since this may result in geometric instabilities in the tangency zone. As much as possible, avoid selecting faces trimmed by the operation. In some cases, defined trimmed faces have the same logical name: the application then issues a warning message requiring a better selection.
Remove Lump
Keeping and Removing Faces

The Remove Lump command lets you reshape a body by removing material. To remove material, either you specify the faces you wish to remove or conversely, the faces you wish to keep. In some cases, you need to specify both the faces to remove and the faces to keep. Using this command is a good way to get rid of cavities you inadvertently created. This task illustrates how to reshape a body by removing the faces you do not need. Depending on the faces you select for removal, you will obtain two distinct bodies. Open the RemoveLump1_R04.CATPart document. 1. 2. Select the body you wish to reshape, that is Part Body. Click the Remove Lump icon .
The Remove Lump dialog box appears. The application prompts you to specify the faces you wish to remove as well as the faces you need to keep.
Remove Lump
3.
Click the Faces to remove field and select the colored face. The selected face appears in pink, meaning that it will be removed during the operation.
4.
Click OK. The new body looks like this :
5.
Now, delete Trim.1 in the specification tree and repeat steps 1 and 2. In the dialog box that appears, click the Faces to remove field and select the bottom face. This face appears in pink.
6.
The faces selected as the faces to be kept are displayed in blue. 7. Click OK. The new body looks like this :
Remove Lump
You cannot re-apply Assemble, Add, Trim, Intersect, Remove and Remove Lump commands to bodies already associated to other bodies. However, if you copy and paste the result of such operations elsewhere in the tree you can then use these commands.
Cavities
The Remove Lump command allows you to delete cavities, which is a good way to control the quality of the part. As shown in the example below, the initial part includes a cavity resulting from a shell operation.
Applying the Remove Lump command and selecting the face to be kept...
reshapes the part. The application has removed the faces that are not adjacent to the selected face.
Remove Lump
Changing a Boolean Operation Into Another One
Changing a Boolean Operation into Another One

This task shows you how to change a Boolean operation (Add, Assemble, Remove and even Union Trim) into another one and this, very quickly. This new capability largely increases your productivity, since it is no longer necessary to restructure your design from scratch. Open the Intersect1_R04.CATPart document. 1. The initial part is composed of three bodies. Assemble Body.1 to Part Body.
2. Remove Body.2 from Assemble.1.You obtain Remove.1:
3. Fillet Pad.3 's top edge.
4. Select Remove.1 and the Remove.1 object -> contextual command.
Change to Assemble...
The
Change to Add...contextual command is available too.
You obtain Assemble.2. Note that the fillet is still defined on Pad.3's top edge.
5. Select Assemble.2 and the Assemble.2 object -> contextual menu item.
Change to Union Trim...
The Change to Add... and are available too. You obtain Trim.1:
Change to Remove...contextual menu items
6. Double-click Trim.1 and select the cylinder's top face as the face to keep. You obtain this part :
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Tools
Tools
Scan the Part and Define Local Objects: Select the the Edit -> Scan or Define in Work Object... command, click the buttons to move from one local feature to the other, then the Exit button. Perform a Draft Analysis: Define a direction using the compass, click this icon, select the part, and enter the minimum draft angle value in the field below the green frame. Perform a Surfacic Curvature Analysis: Select a body, click this icon and enter new values in the color range.
Analyze Thread/Tap: Click this icon and check or uncheck display options. Create Datums: Click this icon to deactivate the History mode. Apply a Material: Select the element on which the material should be applied, click this icon, select any material and click Apply Material. Extract Geometry: the capability is proposed when an update operation detects difficulties in building the part. Display Parents and Children: Select the feature under study, the Tools -> Parent/Children... command and use the diverse contextual commands to display parents and children. Define an Axis System: Click this icon, enter coordinates or select geometry to define the three axes. Publish Elements: Select the Tools -> Publication command, select the element to be published then rename it.
Tools
Parents and Children

The Parent and Children command enables you to view the genealogical relationships between the different components of a part. It also shows links to external references and explicitly provides the name of the documents containing these references. If the specification tree already lets you see the operations you performed and respecify your design, the graph displayed by the Parent and Children capability proves to be a more accurate analysis tool. We recommend the use of this command before deleting any feature. Open the Parent_R9.CATPart document. 1. Select the feature of interest, that is Pad1.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugprt_C2/cfyugparent.htm (1 of 4)10/18/2004 8:10:23 PM
2. Select the Tools -> Parent/Children... command (or the Parent/Children... contextual command). A window appears containing a graph. This graph shows the relationships between the different elements constituting the pad previously selected.
If you cannot see the element of interest in the specification tree because you have created a large number of elements, right-click this element in the graph then select the Center Graph contextual command: the element will be more visible in the specification tree. 3. Position the cursor on Pad 1 and select the Show All Children contextual command. You can now see that Sketch 2 and Sketch 3 have been used to create two additional pads.
Here is the exhaustive list of the diverse contextual commands allowing you to hide parents and children. These commands may prove quite useful whenever the view is overcrowded. q Show Parents and Children
q q q q q q
Show Children Show All Children Hide Children Show Parents Show All Parents Hide Parents
4. Position the cursor on Sketch.1 and select the Show Parents and Children contextual command. We can see that Sketch.1 has been created on xy plane.
Moreover, you can see that it is a published element.
5. Now, select EdgeFillet1 in the graph. The application highlights the fillet in the specification tree, in the graph and in the geometry area.
6. Position the cursor on EdgeFillet1 and select the Show Parents and Children contextual command. The parent Pad.1 is displayed.
Double-clicking on the components alternately shows or hides parents and children.
The Edit contextual command can be accessed from any element. For example, rightclick EdgeFillet.1 and select Edit. The Edge Fillet dialog box appears. You can then modify the fillet. When done, the Edge Fillet dialog box closes as well as the Parents and Children window close and the fillet is updated. Close the window and select MeasureEdge3 from the specification tree.
7.
8. Select the Tools -> Parent/Children... command. The graph that displays shows Pad.2 as MeasureEdge3's parent.
9. Select the Show All Parents contextual command. Sketch.2 as Pad.2's parent is now displayed. In turn, Sketch.2's own parent Pad.1 is displayed and so on.
Axis System
Axis System
This task explains how to define a new three-axis system locally. There are two ways of defining it: either by selecting geometry or by entering coordinates. Open the AxisSystem.CATPart document.
1.
Select the Insert -> Axis System... command or click the Axis System icon . The Axis System Definition dialog box is displayed.
2.
An axis system is composed of an origin point and three orthogonal axes. For instance, you can start by selecting the vertex as shown to position the origin of the axis system you wish to create. The application then computes the remaining coordinates. Both computed axes are then parallel to those of the current system. The axis system looks like this:
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugprt_C2/cfyugaxis_system.htm (1 of 8)10/18/2004 8:10:38 PM
Axis System
Origin Instead of selecting the geometry to define the origin point, you can use one of the following contextual commands available from the Origin field: q Create Point: for more information, refer to Points
q
Coordinates: for more information, refer to Points Create Midpoint: the origin point is the midpoint detected by the application after selection of a geometrical element.
Create Endpoint: the origin point is the endpoint detected by the application after selection of a geometrical element
Axis System Type You can choose from different types of axis system:
q
Standard: defined by a point of origin and three orthogonal directions (by default the current directions of the compass). Here only the point was selected and nothing specified for the axes.
Axis System
q
Axis rotation: defined as a standard axis system and a angle computed from a selected reference. Here the Y axis was set to the standard axis system Y axis, and a 15 degrees angle was set in relation to an edge parallel to the X axis.
Euler angles: defined by three angle values as follows. Angle 1= (X, N) a rotation about Z transforming vector X into vector N. Angle 2= (Z, W) a rotation about vector N transforming vector Z into vector W. Angle 3= (N, U) a rotation about vector W.
3.
If you are not satisfied with x axis, for instance click the X axis field and select the edge as shown to define a new direction for x axis. The x axis becomes colinear with this edge.
Axis System
4.
Check the Reverse option to reverse the x axis direction. Clicking the axis reverses its direction too.
Note that there are two types of axis systems, right-handed and left-handed. The dialog box indicates the type close to the Current option. 5. The application also lets you define axes through coordinates. Right-click the Y Axis field and select the Coordinates... contextual command. The Y Axis dialog box appears.
6.
Keep X=0, Y=0 and enter Z= -1 as the coordinates of the Y axis. The axis system is modified accordingly. The application has computed the coordinates of the X axis.
Axis System
You can control coordinates by defining formulas. For more information, refer to CATIA Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. If needed, you can also define new points, lines or planes through contextual commands available in each field of the Axis System Definition dialog box.
q
Create Point: for more information, refer to Points

q
Create Midpoint:midpoint detected by the application after selection of a geometrical element. Create Endpoint: endpoint detected by the application after selection of a geometrical element Create Line: for more information, refer to Lines Create Plane: for more information, refer to Planes Rotation...the rotation is performed around the axis. The angle value you enter is not saved for ulterior rotations, meaning that if you reuse the command later, the rotation will be performed from the current location.
7.
Click OK to confirm the operation and close the dialog box.
Axis System
8.
Click More to expand the Axis System Definition dialog box. The first rows contains the coordinates of the origin point. The coordinates of X axis are displayed in the second row. The coordinates of Y axis are displayed in the third row. The coordinates of z axis are displayed in the fourth row.
As you are defining your axis system, the application detects if its axes are orthogonal or not. Inconsistencies are revealed via the Update diagnosis dialog box. 9. Uncheck the Current option if you do not want to set your axis as the reference. The absolute axis at the bottom right of the document then becomes the current three axis system.
10. Click OK. The axis system is created. It is displayed in the specification tree. When it is set as current, it is highlighted as shown below.
Local axes are fixed. If you wish to constrain them, you need to isolate them (using Isolate contextual command) before setting constraints otherwise you would obtain over-constrained systems.
Axis System
The display mode of the axes is different depending on whether the three-axis system is right-handed or left-handed and current or not.
THREE-AXIS SYSTEM
right-handed right-handed left-handed left-handed
CURRENT
yes no yes no
AXIS DISPLAY MODE

solid dashed dotted dot-dashed
11. Right-click Axis System.1 and select the Set as current contextual command. Axis System.1 is now current. You can then select plane xy for instance, to define a sketch plane.
Editing an Axis System You can edit your axis system by double-clicking it and entering new values in the dialog box that appears. You can also use the compass to edit your axis system. For more about the compass, refer to CATIA- Infrastructure User's guide Version 5. Note also that editing the geometrical elements selected for defining the axes or the origin point affects the definition of the axis system accordingly. Right-clicking Axis System.Xobject in the specification tree lets you access the following contextual commands: q Definition...:redefines the axis system
q q
Isolate: sets the axis system apart from the geometry Set as Current/Set as not Current: defines whether the axis system is the reference or not.
Creating an Axis System when Creating a New Part An option lets you create an axis system when you are creating a new part. To know how to access this option, refer to Customizing a CATPart document.
Axis System
Publication Axis systems can be published. For more about publication, please refer to Publishing Elements.
Publishing Elements
Publishing Elements
Publishing geometrical elements is the process of making geometrical features available to different users. This operation is useful when working in assembly design context This task shows you the method for making elements publicly available: you will publish a plane, a sketch then a parameter not visible in the specification tree. In this page, you will also find information about the following subjects: q Publishing Part Design Features
q
Assembly Constraints and Published Generative Shape Design Geometry Publishing in Assembly Design Replacing a Published Element Publishing Parameters Importing and Exporting Published Names What Happens When Deleting a Published Element?
Open the Publish.CATPart document or if you are working in Assembly Design, for example open the AssemblyTools01.CATProduct document, and ensure that the component containing the element you wish to publish is active. 1. Select Tools -> Publication. The Publication command lets you: q publish a geometric element
q q q q q
edit the default name given to the published element replace the geometric element associated with a name create a list of published elements import a list of published elements Delete a published element.
The Publication dialog box appears.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugprt_C2/cfyugpublish.htm (1 of 9)10/18/2004 8:10:53 PM
Publishing Elements
2.
Select the element to be published. For example, select Plane.1. You can publish the following elements:
q q q q q q
points, lines, curves, planes sketches bodies (selecting a feature selects the body it belongs to) Generative Shape Design features (Extrudes Surfaces, Offsets, Joins etc.) Free Style Features (Planar patches, curves etc.) parameters sub-elements of geometrical elements: when switched on, the option "Publish a face, edge, vertex or extremity" lets you directly select faces, edges, vertices. axes. extremities. Part Design features.
To select axes, select cylindrical faces and use the Other Selection contextual command. For more about this command, please refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide.
The dialog box displays the name and status of the selected element as well as "Plane.1", that is the default name given to the published element
Publishing Elements
3.
Click "Plane.1" in the dialog box. The plane is highlighted in the geometry.
4. Rename it as "New plane". The plane is published as "New plane". However, you can notice that the geometric element Open_body.1/Plane1 has not been renamed.
5. Before publishing another element, click Options to access rename options. When using the Publication command, you can actually decide to rename or not the elements you are publishing. Prior to renaming, you can set one of the three following work modes: q Never: the application will not allow you to rename the published element. This is the default option.
q q
Always: the application will always allow you to rename the published element Ask: the application will ask you what you decide to do, namely rename or not the published element
You can rename any elements except for axes, edges and faces.
Publishing Elements
6.Check "Ask" and click OK to exit. 7.Prior to selecting the element to be published, deselect "New plane" if not already done. 8.Select "Sketch.1" as the new element to be published. 9.Rename it as "New sketch". A message is issued asking you whether you wish to rename the published element "Sketch.1" as "New sketch". 10.Click Yes to confirm. The published element's name is "New sketch" and the geometric element is renamed too. Pointing at or selecting published elements simultaneously highlights the geometry, the element node and the publication node.
Publishing Part Design Features
Publishing Elements
Publishing Part Design Features requires that the Enable to publish the features of a body capability available in the Options dialog box is on. If your administrator did not lock the option, you can activate the option yourself.
Assembly Constraints and Published Generative Shape Design (GSD) Geometry

Depending on your geometry, there are cases where constraints pointing to a certain type of published GSD features do not reconnect if, for example, you replace constrained parts. What happens is that links between constraints and the geometry do not take advantage of the publication. You can notice this behavior even if you selected the geometry through the Publication node. GSD features concerned are those which geometrical results depend on the number and type of the parents used for the result. This is the case of features such as "Intersect" or "Project". The solution to this, is to publish the geometrical result, not the feature itself. In concrete terms, rather that publishing the Intersect feature, you recommend you publish the vertex, not the point.
Publishing in Assembly Design

When publishing geometry in the Assembly Design workbench, the Browse button is available in the Publication dialog box. Clicking the button launches the Component Publication dialog box that displays only the published elements belonging to the levels inferior to the active level. In the following example, the user is publishing an element of CRIC_BRANCH_1. When clicking the Browse button, the Component Publication dialog box displays published faces belonging to CRIC_BRANCH_3.
Publishing Elements
This capability works as a filter: it does not display the whole publications of the assembly. Thus, you will use it as an help for selecting already published elements whenever you wish to replace published elements.
Replacing a Published Element

11.Click "Open_body.1/Plane.1" to replace it with another geometric element.
Publishing Elements
12.Select "Plane.2" as the replacing element.
The orientation of both elements is displayed. The green arrow indicates the orientation for the new element, the red arrow indicates the orientation of the published element. A message is issued asking you to confirm the change. 13.Click Yes to confirm. Plane.2 has been published.Plane.1 is not published any more. The dialog now displays the following information:
Publishing Parameters
14.You can publish the parameters of a part that are not displayed in the specification tree. To do so, click the Parameter... button available in the Publication dialog box. This displays a new window listing all parameters defined for the feature previously selected in the specification tree.
Publishing Elements
15.If the list of parameters is too long, you can filter out the parameters by entering a character string in the Filter Name field. For example, enter "offset". The list now displays only the parameters including the string "offset". 16.Select the parameter of interest. You can also use one of the following filter types: q All
q q q q q q q q
Renamed parameters Hidden Visible User Boolean Length Angle String
17.Click OK when done. This closes the dialog box. The selected parameter is displayed in the Publication dialog box.
Importing and Exporting Published Names

Published names can be gathered in ASCII .txt files.
Publishing Elements
To export published names to an ASCII .txt file, q click the Export button.
q q
enter a name for the file you are creating in the Export dialog box that displays. click Save : the file is created: it contains the list of all published elements as specified in the Publication dialog box.
To import published names to an ASCII .txt file, q click the import button.
q q q
navigate to the file of interest in the Import dialog box that displays. select the file containing the list of published elements. click Open: the names are added to the list of the Publication dialog box
18.Click OK when satisfied. The entity "Publication" has been added to the specification tree. The three published elements are displayed below the node "Publication':
What Happens When Deleting a Published Element?

When deleting a published element, CATIA informs you that this element is published. What you need to do is confirm the deletion (Yes) or cancel it (No).
PowerCopy
Powercopy
Create Powercopies: Select the Insert ->Advanced Replication Tools -> Powercopy Creation command, select the elements making up the Powercopy from the specification tree, define a name for the Powercopy and its reference elements then choose an icon for identifying it.
Instantiate Powercopies: Select the Insert -> Instantiate From Document... command, select the document or catalog containing the powercopy, complete the Inputs within the dialog box selecting adequate elements in the geometric area.
Save Powercopies into a Catalog: Select the Powercopy from the specification tree, select the Insert -> Advanced Replication Tools -> Save In Catalog... command, enter the catalog name and click Open. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating PowerCopies
This task shows how to create PowerCopy elements, to be reused later. A PowerCopy is a set of features (geometric elements, formulas, constraints and so forth) that are grouped in order to be used in a different context, and presenting the ability to be completely redefined when pasted. This PowerCopy captures the design intent and know-how of the designer thus enabling greater reusability and efficiency. Open the PowerCopyStart.CATPart document. 1. Select the Insert ->Advanced Replication Tools -> PowerCopy Creation... menu item. The Powercopy Definition dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the elements making up the PowerCopy from the specification tree. For the purposes of our scenario, select "Part Body".
The dialog box is automatically filled with information about the selected elements.
3. Define the PowerCopy as you wish to create it: The Definition tab lets you assign a name to the powercopy and presents its components in the 3D viewer. For example, enter "Test" in the Name: field.
4. The Inputs tab lets you define the reference elements making up the PowerCopy. You can rename these elements for a clearer definition by selecting them in the viewer and entering a new name in the Name field. In parentheses you still can read the elements' default name based on its type. For example, select xy plane and rename it as "Plane1".
The Parameters tab lets you define which of the parameter values used in the PowerCopy you will be able to modify at instantiation time. This can be a value, or a formula for example. 5. Simply select the parameters and check the Published Name button. In case of a formula, you can set it to false or true. For example, select PartBody\Hole.1 \Diameter Use the Name field to give a more explicit name to this element. For example, enter "Hole.1".
The Documents tab shows the complete path and role of Design tables that are referenced by an element included in the Power Copy.
6. The Icon tab lets you modify the icon identifying the PowerCopy in the specifications tree. A subset of icons is available from the Icon choice button. If you click ... the Icon Browser opens, showing all icons loaded on your application ession. Click the envelope icon .
7.
The Grab screen button lets you capture an image of the PowerCopy to be stored with its definition. Click the Grab screen button. You can zoom in or out the image to adjust it.
8.
Click the Remove preview button if you do not need this image.
9. Click OK to create the PowerCopy. The PowerCopy is displayed close to the top of the specification tree.
Double-click "Test" in the specification tree to display the PowerCopy Definition dialog box and edit its contents. A formula is automatically included in a Power Copy definition when all its parameters are included. Otherwise, i.e. if at least one parameter is not selected as part of the Power Copy, you have to manually select the formula to make it part of the definition. If you do so, all the formula's parameters that have not been explicitly selected, are considered as inputs of the Power Copy.
A Few Recommendations
q q
As far as possible, minimize the number of elements making up the Powercopy. When defining Powercopies including sketches, use profiles constrained with respect to edges or faces rather than to planes. Additionally, set the option Create geometrical constraints off before sketching. Generally speaking, it is always preferable to use profiles both rigid and mobile. Avoid constraining your 2D elements with respect to HV absolute axis. The result you obtain after instanciating the powercopy could be unstable. Actually, you cannot control the position of the origin of the absolute axis nor its orientation.
It is preferable to constrain elements with respect to external references such as faces, edges, reference or explicit planes:
It is preferable not to use projections nor intersections in your sketch if you want to use your sketch in a Powercopy. Avoid constraints defined with respect to reference planes. Before creating your powercopies, make sure that your sketch is not over-constrained. Generally speaking, it is always preferable to use profiles both rigid and mobile. Make sure that your sketch is iso-constrained (green color). You can use non-iso-constrained sketches, but it will be more difficult to understand and control the result after instantiation. Avoid access to sub-elements Formulas are automatically included if you select all the parameters. For complex design, integrate knowledge rules.
q q q
q q q
Managing inputs
q q
Always rename your inputs to help the end user to understand what he needs to select. A formula is automatically included in a Power Copy definition when all its parameters are included. Otherwise, i.e. if at least one parameter is not selected as part of the Power Copy, you have to manually select the formula to make part of the definition. If you do so, all the formula parameters that have not been explicitly selected are considered as inputs of the Power Copy. Note that when including parameters sets containing hidden parameters in a PowerCopy, the hidden parameters are automatically instantiated when instantiating the PowerCopy.
Preview
q
In a CATPart document, create only one PowerCopy reference. It is not a technical restriction, but there are at least two reasons for this: the cost of an instantiation will be smaller in the document is smaller. The end user can more easily understand the feature to be instantiated. Put in 'show mode' only the input and the result (to help the end user to understand what he needs to select). Use colors to differentiate inputs (put transparency on results for example). Choose a pertinent viewpoint before saving the CATPart document reference, default viewpoint in preview during instantiation will be the same.
q q
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Instantiating PowerCopies
This task shows how to instantiate Power Copies once they have been created as described in Creating PowerCopies. There are two ways of doing this: q using the PowerCopy Instantiate From Document command
q
using a catalog
Open the PowerCopyDestination.CATPart document.
Using the PowerCopy Instantiate From Document command

1. Select the Insert -> Instantiate From Document... command. The Select PowerCopy dialog box is displayed allowing you to navigate to the document or catalog where the powercopy is stored. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B12doc\online\prtug\samples directory. 2. Select the document containing the Powercopy, i.e. PowerCopyResults.CATPart. The Insert Object dialog box is displayed. Use the Reference list to choose the correct PowerCopy when several have been defined in the document.
3. Complete the Inputs within the dialog box by selecting the adequate element in the geometric area: select Pad1's upper face as the planar element replacing Plane1.
4. Click on the Use identical name button to automatically select all the elements with the same name. This command searches for features, publications, subelements or parameters having the name of the input. If a feature, publication, subelement or parameter with the input name is found, this element is automatically used as input. Here, zx plane and yz plane are selected. This is especially useful when the input is the same one repeated several time.
5. Click on the Parameters button to display the Parameters dialog box.
6. Enter 18mm as the new diameter value. You can use the Create formulas button to automatically create a formula on every parameters with the same name provided there are any. 7. Click OK to confirm the operation and close the dialog box. The Documents button lets you access the list of documents (such as design tables) pointed by one of the elements making up the Power copy. If there are documents, the Documents dialog box opens and you can click the Replace button to display the File Selection dialog box and navigate to a new design table to replace the initial one. When no document is referenced, the Documents button is grayed within the Insert Object dialog box. 8. Click OK to create the PowerCopy instance. The PowerCopy is instantiated in context, meaning its limits are automatically redefined taking into account the elements on which it is instantiated.
Check the Repeat option to be able to repeat the instantiation. In this case, once you have clicked OK in the Insert Object dialog box, the latter remains open, the PowerCopy's Inputs are listed and ready to be replaced by new inputs, as described above. To exit the command, uncheck the Repeat button or click Cancel.
Once instantiated, powercopies are no more linked to the original PowerCopies used to define them.
Using a catalog
You need to have a catalog available, created either: q using the Catalog capability, see CATIA- Infrastructure User's guide Version 5
q
using the Insert -> Advanced Replication Tools -> Save In Catalog menu item. .
1.
Click the icon
If accessing a catalog for the first time, you need to navigate to the catalog location. This location is stored in the settings for faster access later on. 2. Select the catalog containing the PowerCopy you wish to instantiate. 3. Select the PowerCopy to be instantiated, then you can: q drag and drop it onto the reference element
q q
double-click the PowerCopy or right-click on the PowerCopy in the dialog box and use the Instantiate contextual menu.
From then on, you instantiate the PowerCopy as described above starting on step 3.
To know more about the Insert Object dialog box...

q
The Comments & URLs icon is available with user features and document templates only. It is always grayed out when instantiating Power Copies. If a URL was added to a user feature or a Document template, click this icon enables the user to access the URL. To know more about this function, see the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. The Name field enables the user to change the name of the user feature instance.
Saving PowerCopies into a Catalog
Saving Power Copies into a Catalog

This task shows you how to store Power Copy elements into a catalog, for later use as described in Instantiating a PowerCopy. Open the PowerCopyResults.CATPart document. 1. Select the PowerCopy from the specification tree for example. 2. Choose the Insert -> Advanced Replication Tools -> Save In Catalog... menu item. The Catalog Save dialog box is displayed:
When creating a catalog for the first time, click the ... button to display the Open dialog box, and navigate to the location where you wish to create a catalog. Then simply key in the catalog name and click Open. If you wish to add a PowerCopy to an existing catalog, simply activate the Update an existing catalog option in the Catalog Save dialog box. By default, the Catalog Save dialog box recalls the catalog accessed last. 3. Click OK. The PowerCopy has been stored in the catalog.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Reusing your Design
Reusing Your Design

Capabilities Purposes Provides a quick way of reusing simple features or bodies. This command is to be used when you need to rework one specification or no specifications at all. Provides a quick way of reusing simple features or bodies. This command is to be used when you need to rework one specification or no specifications at all. Provides a quick way of copying simple features or bodies at different locations. Reuses bodies with or without their specifications. If this option is used, only the geometry is copied, not the specifications. Pasted bodies reflect the changes to the initial bodies. This command is mostly used in a multi-model environment. If this option is used, bodies are pasted as well as their design specifications. The capability is the same as the commonly used Copy and Paste command Creates several identical features from one feature or more or even from bodies, and simultaneously positions them on an part. You position instances with respect to a rectangular or circular grid, or using sketched points. Creates a set of features (geometric elements, formulas, constraints and so on) that are grouped in order to be used in a different context. You can completely redefine these entities when you paste them. As it captures the design intent and know-how of the designer, it enables greater reusability and efficiency.We recommend you to use this command for bodies, features, sketches and design tables that require new specifications. To benefit from the best level of performance in the long term, use this capability to enrich your feature catalogs.
Copy and
Paste
Cut and Drag and Drop Paste Special

q
Paste
Paste as Result with Link
As specified in Part Document Rectangular Pattern Circular Pattern
User Pattern PowerCopy
Reusing your Design
User Defined Feature
Creates hybrid features, intended to be stored in catalogs and instantiated later on. For more information, please refer to CATIA-Product Knowledge Template User's Guide Version 5. [ Back ] [ Up ]
Workbench Description
The Part Design window looks like this: Click the sensitive areas to see the related documentation.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwd0000.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:12:29 PM
Symbols Used in the Specification Tree

Miscellaneous Symbols Symbols Reflecting an Incident in the Geometry Building Referenced Geometry Symbols
Part Design Menu Bar

This section presents the main menu bar tools and commands dedicated to Part Design. Start File Edit View Insert Tools Windows Help
Edit
For... See...
Update
Updating Parts
Cut Copy Paste
Cutting, Copying, Pasting
Paste Special...
Handling Parts in a Multi-Document Environment Specification Tree
Delete
Deleting Features
Properties
Scan or Define in Work Object... XXX object...
Scanning a Part and Defining in Work Objects Redefining Feature Parameters Displaying and Editing Properties Reordering Features
Insert
For... Body See... Inserting a New Body
Insert in new body Annotations Constraints Sketcher... Axis System... Sketch-Based Features
Inserting Features into a New Body Creating Annotations Setting Constraints Sketcher User's Guide Axis System Sketch-Based Features
Dress-Up Features Surface-Based Features Transformation Features Boolean Operations
Dress-Up Features Surface-Based Features Transformation Features Associating Bodies
Advanced Replication Tools
PowerCopy
User Feature Document Template Creation...
Managing User Features (UDFs) Managing Part and Assembly Templates
Instantiate From Document... Instantiating PowerCopies
Tools
For... See...
Parent/Children
Options...
Customizing
Publication... [ Up ] [ Next ]
Publishing Elements
Sketch-Based Features Toolbar
Sketch-Based Features Toolbar
The Sketch-Based features toolbar is available in extended or compact display mode. To choose your display mode, use the View -> Toolbars -> Sketch-Based Feature (Extended/Compact) command.
See Pad See Drafted Filleted Pad See Pocket See Drafted Filleted Pocket See Shaft See Multi-Pad
See Hole See Rib See Slot See Solid Combine See Stiffener See Multi-sections Solid
See Multi-Pocket
See Removed Multi-sections Solid
See Groove
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwd0201.htm10/18/2004 8:13:05 PM
Dress-Up Features Toolbar
Dress-Up Features Toolbar
See Edge Fillet See Variable Radius Fillet See Face-Face Fillet See Tritangent Fillet See Chamfer See Basic Draft See Draft from Reflect Lines
See Variable Angle Draft See Advanced Draft See Shell See Thickness See Thread See Replace Face See Remove Face [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Surface-Based Features Toolbar
Surface-Based Features Toolbar
This toolbar is available in extended or compact display mode. To choose your display mode, use the View -> Toolbars -> Surface-Based Feature (Extended/Compact) command. See Split See Close Surface
See Thick Surface
See Sew Surface
Transformation Features Toolbar
Transformation Features Toolbar
See Translation See Rotation See Symmetry See Mirror
See Rectangular Pattern See Circular Pattern See User Pattern See Scaling
Reference Elements Toolbar
Reference Elements Toolbar
You can display the Reference Elements toolbar using the View -> Tool bars -> Reference Elements (extended/compact) command. See Points See Lines See Planes
Boolean Operations Toolbar
Boolean Operations Toolbar
These toolbars are optional. You can display it using the View -> Toolbars commands.
See Assembling Bodies See Adding Bodies See Removing Bodies See Intersecting Bodies
See Trimming Bodies See Keeping and Removing Faces See Inserting a New Body
Sketcher Toolbar
Sketcher Toolbar
See CATIA-Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide Version 5. See Change the Sketch Support
Constraints Toolbar
Constraints Toolbar
See Setting Constraints See Setting Constraints Defined in Dialog Box [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Analysis Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar
See Performing a Draft Analysis See Performing a Surfacic Curvature Analysis See Tap-Thread Analysis [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Annotations Toolbar
Annotations Toolbar
See Creating Textual Annotations See Creating Flag Notes [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Tools Toolbar
Tools Toolbar
See Updating Parts See Axis System See Mean Dimensions
See Creating Datums
See Infrastructure User's guide Version 5 (Browsing a Catalog) [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Insert Toolbar
Insert Toolbar
See Inserting a New Body
See Inserting Features into a New Body [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Miscellaneous Symbols
Miscellaneous
PartBody
A part body. You have access to the part's features, the way it is organized (Pad, Pocket, Intersection, etc.). xy plane, yz plane or zx plane. You can click the desired reference plane either in the geometry area or in the specification tree.
xy plane
Formula defined for Point.1. For more about formulas, please refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5.
BODY1
A model with geometrical representation.
Sketch.1
Sketch. For more information about Sketcher Workbench, refer to : Entering the Sketcher Workbench in Sketcher User's Guide. Absolute Axis: contains information about Origin, HDirection and VDirection.
AbsoluteAxis
Origin
Origin.
HDirection
HDirection or VDirection.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugsymbol2.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 8:15:10 PM
Geometry
Geometry (Point, Line,...): Wireframe and Surfaces features.
Constraints
Constraints: Parallelism, Perpendicularity, etc. Publication : a CATPart or CATProduct element is published that is to say its geometrical data is exposed. For more information refer to Managing a Product Publication in Assembly User's Guide. Assembly hole. For more about Assembly features, please refer to CATIA Assembly Design User's Guide Version 5.
face
Open_body.1
External references branch of the part : external geometry (a face, a point or a line) is copied/imported from driving parts to contextual parts that are being driven (Design in context). You can customize External References in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Part Design, select the General tab and check the box Keep links with selected object.
A product in NO SHOW. By clicking in the CATProduct's contextual menu or by using the , you can put the product Hide/Show icon Product4 in the SHOW or NO SHOW area, the product's geometry is hidden. As a consequence, the documents under it, for instance the CATPart is in the NO SHOW space as well. For more information about the SHOW/NO SHOW modes, see Displaying Hidden Objects in CATIA - Infrastructure's User Guide.
Part5
A part in NO SHOW. The Sketcher symbol is by default in NO SHOW. By this means the geometry lighter. But you can reactivate the Sketcher representation by clicking in the contextual . By menu or by using the Hide/Show icon double-clicking on this symbol you can return into the Sketcher workbench.
Symbols Reflecting an Incident in the Geometry Building
Symbols reflecting an incident in the geometry building

Miscellaneous Incidents Incidents on Constraints
Miscellaneous Incidents
Part to be updated
Product5
No visualization of the product or the part. The product's reference cannot be found. The geometry of the component disappears.
PartBody
A broken link. The access to this product is impossible because the link with the root document has been lost.
A broken shaft.
The pocket's representation is deactivated.
Isolated plane (can no longer be edited)
Incidents on Constraints
Symbols Reflecting an Incident in the Geometry Building
Offset.1
A broken constraint. The access to this product and the information about its constraints cannot be retrieved.
Parallelism.1
A deactivated constraint (a parallelism constraint).
Perpendicularity.1
A constraint to be updated (a perpendicularity constraint).
Referenced Geometry
Referenced Geometry
Referenced Geometry
Geometry copied from a document different from the CATPart document in which it is pasted.
Initial geometry has undertaken modifications in the original CATPart document: solid to be synchronized. Initial geometry has been deleted in the original CATPart document or the original CATPart document has not been found Pointed document found but not loaded (use the Load contextual command or the Edit -> Links command)
External link deactivated so that geometry cannot be synchronized during the update of the part (even if the option "Synchronize all external references for update" is on). Geometry pasted (using the As Result with Link option) within the same CATPart document from which it is has been copied Point referenced in the CATPart document is a published element.
Referenced Geometry
Sketch referenced in the CATPart document is a published element. The published point has undertaken modifications so that a synchronization is required.
Customizing
Customizing
Tree and Geometry View General Settings Constraint Appearance CATPart Document Tolerancing Display Manipulators Tolerancing View/Annotation Plane
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugcu0000.htm10/18/2004 8:15:31 PM
Tree and Geometry View
Customizing the Tree and Geometry Views

This task shows you how to control the display of the elements you create in the specification tree. It also shows you how to control the display of features in the geometry area. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Click the Infrastructure category, then the Part Infrastructure subcategory, then the Display tab. The tab appears, containing three categories of options: q Display in Specification Tree
q
Display in Geometry Area Checking Operation When Renaming
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascuprt_C2/bascuprt0100.htm (1 of 4)10/18/2004 8:15:46 PM
Display in Specification Tree There are six options available for customizing the Specification tree display. q External References
q q
Constraints Parameters (created using the Knowledge Advisor capability. If you wish to know what parameters and relations are, refer to the CATIA Knowledge Advisor Users Guide Version 5 Relations Bodies under operations (operations attaching bodies in different ways (Add, Assemble, Remove, Intersect, Union Trim). This option is available only with Part Design application. For more, refer to "Associating Bodies" in the CATIA Part Design Users Guide Version 5. Sketches (If the Sketches option is checked, the sketches are displayed in the specification tree during creation. If unchecked, sketches are present in the tree but you need to use the expand capability)
q q
Display in Geometry Area There are four options available for customizing the geometry display. q The Only the current operated solid option is used when editing features belonging to attached bodies only. It lets you display only the features of the current body. This option is available only with Part Design application. Note: Instead of accessing this option via the Tools -> Options command, you can click this icon
q
available in the Tools toolbar.
The Only Current Body option displays the geometry of the current part body or open body only. By default, this option is no checked. The Axis system display size option lets you define the size of axis systems in mm.
The Parameters of features and constraints option permanently displays parameters attached to Part Design features and Sketcher constraints.
Checking Operation When Renaming
Three new options let you define rules for renaming geometric elements (using the Properties command). q Use the No name check option (default option) if you wish to allow all types of rename operations whatever the locations of the elements in the specification tree.
q
Check the Under the same tree node option to prevent two elements belonging to a common node from having the same name. If you are giving an identical name, a warning message is issued informing you that the element you are renaming will be suffixed as 'Renamed'.
The check operation in case-insensitive.
Check the In the main object option to prevent two elements belonging to the same main node from having the same name.
The check operation in case-insensitive.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
General Settings
Customizing General Settings

This task shows you how to set general settings. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click the Infrastructure category, then the Part Infrastructure subcategory. The General tab appears, containing three categories of options: q External References
q q
Update Delete Operation
External References
General Settings
Checking the Keep link with selected object option lets you maintain the links between external references, copied elements for example, and their origins when you are editing these elements. This option is used as you are editing parts included in assemblies. For more about designing parts in assembly context, refer to the CATIA Assembly Design Users Guide Version 5. If later you need to cut the link between external references and their origin, you just need to use the Isolate command. Check Create external references in Show mode to define the visualization mode for external references or imported elements only. Check Confirm when creating a link with selected object Check Use root context in assembly to ensure that the root of the assembly is the context used. Uncheck this option if you prefer to use the minimal context. For more about changing contexts, please refer to the task describing the Define Contextual Links command in the Product Structure User's Guide. Check Only use published elements for external selection if you want to make only published elements valid for selection. Check Publish a face, edge, vertex or extremity if you wish to be able to directly select faces, edges, vertices, axes extremities when using the Publication command.
q q
Update
Check Manual: you wish to control your update operations. Conversely, check Automatic if you want parts to be updated automatically Check Stop Update on first error: to stop the update process as soon as the application finds an error when building the geometry. Check Synchronize all external references for update to make sure that the application updates elements copied from other parts. Synchronizing assumes that all modifications to the other parts affect external references included in your part. If this option is deactivated, the application will update your part only. Check Activate local visualization : to visualize features as they are being rebuilt during the update process.
Delete Operation Check Display the Delete dialog box if you wish to access filters for deletion (see "Deleting Features" in the Part Design Users Guide Version 5).
General Settings
Check Delete exclusive parents if you wish to delete the parents of the features you are deleting. The parents will be deleted only if they are exclusive, which means that if they are shared by other features, they will not be deleted. When this setting is active, the option is checked in the Delete dialog box, but by default, the option is not checked.
Even if the option is checked in the Delete dialog box, you can uncheck it if you wish to. If the Display the Delete dialog box (see above) setting is not checked, this setting has no effect.
For more information, refer to Deleting Features in the Part Design Users Guide Version 5.
Constraint Appearance
Customizing Constraint Appearance

This task shows you how to customize the display and style of the constraints defined in your document. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Click General category, then the Parameters category, then click the Symbols tab. This tab lets you customize: q Constraint Style
q
Dimension Style Display at Creation
Note that a Preview glyph displays your preferences as you are specifying them.
Constraint Style 3. To set the colors where appropriate, click the arrow of the constraint type combo box. A list appears containing the current color and the colors available by default. 4. Choose any of these colors. You can define a personal color too by choosing "More Colors...". See CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide for more information.
Checking the "Status Color Visualization" option displays only the colors defined for the different constraint status. This means that if a personal color has been defined for a given constraint, that color is not visualized any longer. For more about personal colors, see CATIA Part Design User's Guide.
Filter 5. To choose between the constraints you wish to see or not in the geometry area, click the Filter button. The Constraint Filter dialog box contains filter options available for all the constraints that can be defined for the geometry.
The Filter frame contains three options: q Show all: shows all the constraints
q q
Hide all: hides all the constraints Conditional Filter: once activated, it makes the options of the Status Filter frame available. You can then decide whether you wish to display the constraint status or not, or display unverified or verified constraints. It also makes the Filter by Type options available. You can then decide the constraint types you wish to display by checking the appropriate options.
The Filter by Type option lets you filter out driving or driven constraints. The Product frame contains the Show on active product option. If activated, this option displays the constraints defined on the active product. This option is specific to Assembly Design workbench. 6. Uncheck the constraints you do not wish to display and click OK to confirm.
Dimension Style 7. Set the Scale option to Large. This defines the size of the symbols for tangency and parallelism constraints. You can set: q Small
q q
Medium Large
8. Check Displays iconified constraint elements. This option increases the number of graphic symbols you can see in the geometry area. For example, you can see symmetry axes. 9. Check Highlight pointed elements to make sure the application highlights the constrained elements when their constraints are pointed to. 10. Enter a value to define the gap between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 4mm.
The default gap is 2mm.
The glyph previews the new gap.
11. Enter a value to define the overrun between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 9mm.
The glyph previews the new overrun.
Display at Creation
12. The Display mode option lets you choose between four options:
q
'Value': only the constraint (or parameter) value is displayed.
'
'Name': only the constraint (or parameter) name is displayed.
q
'Name + Value': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are both displayed.
'Name + Value (formula)': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are displayed as well as the possible formula defined for this constraint.
Whatever mode you choose, it applies to all constraints you are creating. However, you can edit each constraint individually by using the contextual commands available (xxxobject -> Value Display or Name Display or Name/Value Display). 12. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the Options dialog box.
CATPart Document
Customizing a CATPart document

This task shows you how to set general settings. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click the Infrastructure category, the Part Infrastructure subcategory, then the Part Document tab. The tab appears, containing one options: New part.
New Part Check Create an Axis System when creating a new part if you wish to create a three-axis system which origin point is defined by the intersection of the three default planes that is plane xy, plane yz, and plane zx. When the CATPart is open, the axis system is displayed both in the geometry and in the specification tree. For more information about the Axis System capability, refer to CATIA - Part Design User's Guide.
Note: data contained in the CGR format are saved within the CATPart format when you are saving your part in order to improve performance when working in Assembly Design workbench.
CATPart Document
Tolerancing
Tolerancing
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure tolerancing settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Infrastructure category.
3. Click the 3D Annotations Infrastructure subcategory.
4. Click the Tolerancing tab. The Tolerancing tab appears, displaying two categories of options:
Tolerancing Standard
Default standard at creation Defines the default standard at creation. Provides four conventional standards: q ASME: American Society for Mechanical Engineers
q
ANSI: American National Standards Institute ISO: International Organization for Standardization JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard
Also provides three CATIA-CADAM standards: q CCDANSI: CATIA-CADAM American National Standards Institute
q
CCDISO: CATIA-CADAM International Organization for Standardization
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0100.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:16:40 PM
Tolerancing
q
CCDJIS: CATIA-CADAM Japanese Industrial Standard
Leader associativity to the geometry
Free Specifies that leader annotations are freely positioned relative to their geometrical elements. Perpendicular Specifies that leader annotations are positioned perpendicular to their geometrical elements.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Display
Display
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure display settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Infrastructure category.
4. Click the Display tab. The Display tab appears, displaying two categories of options:
Grid
Display Defines whether the grid is displayed. Snap to point Defines whether annotations are snapped to the grid's point. Allow Distortions Defines whether grid spacing and graduations are the same horizontally and vertically. H Primary spacing
Display
Defines the grid's horizontal spacing. H Graduations Defines the grid's horizontal graduations. V Primary spacing Defines the grid's vertical spacing (available only if Allow Distortions is checked). V Graduations Defines the grid's vertical graduations (available only if Allow Distortions is checked).
Annotations in Specification Tree
Under Geometric Feature nodes Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the geometric feature nodes in the specification tree. This lets you view 3D annotations under the Part Design or GSD feature nodes to which they are applied. Under View/Annotation Plane nodes Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the view/ annotation plane nodes in the specification tree. This lets you view 3D annotations under the view node to which they are linked. Under Annotations Set node Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the annotation set node in the specification tree.
Manipulators
Manipulators
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure manipulators settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Infrastructure category.
4. Click the Manipulators tab. The Manipulators tab appears, displaying one option:
Manipulators
Reference size Defines the annotation manipulator's size. Zoomable Defines whether the annotation manipulator is zoomable or not.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0300.htm10/18/2004 8:16:51 PM
View/Annotation Plane
This task will show you how to customize 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation view/annotation plane settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category.
3. Click the 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation subcategory.
4. Click the View/Annotation Plane tab. The View/Annotation Plane tab appears, displaying the following categories of options:
View/Annotation Plane Associativity
Create views associative to geometry Creates views associative to the geometry, so that views and their annotations are automatically updated when the geometry is modified.
View/Annotation Plane Display
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdt0800.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:16:55 PM
Current view axis display Defines whether the active annotation plane axis system is displayed. Zoomable Defines whether the annotation plane axis is zoomable. Visualization of the profile in the current view Defines whether the view/annotation plane profile on the part/product is displayed or not.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdt0800.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 8:16:55 PM
Glossary
Glossary A
absolute coordinates annotation associativity Coordinates that specify a location in relation to the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0). An entity that provides information for the drawing. Texts are annotation entities. The interdependent relationships between entities.
B
body See part body.
C
chamfer child A cut through the thickness of the feature at an angle, giving a sloping edge. A status defining the genealogical relationship between a feature or element and another feature or element. For instance, a pad is the child of a sketch. See also parent. A geometric or dimension relation between two elements. These relations are restrictions for these elements.
constraint
D
deactivate draft angle To suppresses the behavior of a feature, visually and geometrically. A feature provided with a face with an angle and a pulling direction.
F
feature A component of a part. For instance, shafts, fillets and drafts are features.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggl.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 8:17:07 PM
Glossary
fillet
A curved surface of a constant or variable radius that is tangent to, and that joins two surfaces. Together, these three surfaces form either an inside corner or an outside corner.
G
groove A feature corresponding to a cut in the shape of a revolved feature.
H
hole A feature corresponding to an opening through a feature. Holes can be simple, tapered, counterbored, countersunk, or counterdrilled.
M
mirror A feature created by duplicating an initial feature. The duplication is defined by symmetry.
O
origin The 3D point having the location 0,0,0 in any coordinate system.
P
pad parent A feature created by extruding a profile. A status defining the genealogical relationship between a feature or element and another feature or element. For instance, a pad is the parent of a draft. A 3D entity obtained by combining different features. A component of a part made of a combination of several features. A set of similar features repeated in the same feature or part. A feature corresponding to an opening through a feature. The shape of the opening corresponds to the extrusion of a profile. An open or closed shape including arcs and lines created by the profile command in the Sketcher workbench.
part part body pattern pocket profile
Glossary
reorder rib
An operation consisting in reorganizing the order of creation of the features. A feature obtained by sweeping a profile along a center curve.
S
scaling shaft shell sketch An operation that resizes features to a percentage of their initial sizes. A revolved feature A hollowed out feature A set of geometric elements created in the Sketcher workbench. For instance, a sketch may include a profile, construction lines and points. A feature consisting of a passage through a part obtained by sweeping a profile along a center curve. A feature created by cutting a part or feature into another part or feature using a plane or face. A feature used for reinforcing a feature or part.
slot split stiffener
Index
Index
A
absolute axis definition Activate contextual menu item Add command Advanced Draft command Analysis toolbars analyzing curvature draft Annotations toolbars annotations Apply Material command Apply Material command applying material Assemble command associating body axis Axis System command
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugix.htm (1 of 21)10/18/2004 8:17:23 PM
Index
B
bisecting lines blue body associating editing name Boolean operation Boolean Operations toolbars boundaries creating Boundary command
C
canceling Update catalog CATPart documents cavity Chamfer command Change Body contextual menu item Change to XXX contextual menu item changing a sketch support Circular Pattern command Clear selection contextual menu item
Index
Close Surface command command Add Advanced Draft Apply Material Assemble Axis System Boundary Chamfer Change a Sketch Support Circular Pattern Close Surface Constraint Constraint Defined in Dialog Box Copy Create Datum Cut Deactivate Draft Analysis Draft Angle Draft from Reflect Lines Drafted Filleted Pad Drafted Filleted Pocket Edge Fillet Extract Extrapolate Face-Face Fillet Flag Note Groove Hole Insert Body
Index
Intersect Intersection Join line Local Axis Mean Dimensions Mirror Multi-Pad Multi-Pocket Multi-sections Solid Pad Parent Children Paste plane Pocket point PowerCopy Creation PowerCopy Instantiate From Document PowerCopy Save in Catalog Projection Publication Rectangular Pattern Remove Remove Face Remove Lump Removed Multi-sections Replace Face Rib Rotate Scaling Scan or Define in Work Object Sew Surface
Index
Shaft Shell Slot Solid Combine Split Stiffener Surfacic Curvature Analysis Symmetry Tap/Thread Analysis Text with Leader Thick Surface Thickness Thread/Tap Translation Tritangent Fillet Union Trim Update User Pattern Variable Radius Fillet commands Apply Material Edit-Links complex profile Constraint command constraint deactivating/activating editing hole name reference renaming
Index
setting type Constraint Defined in Dialog Box command Constraints toolbars contextual command Show Parents and Children contextual menu item Activate Change Body Change to XXX Clear selection Deactivate Definition Delete... Edit Parameters Explode Pattern Go to Profile hide components open pointed document Paste Special Properties Reorder Replace Show All Children show components Tangency propagation controlled by reference Copy command corner reshaping
Index
corner counterbored Hole counterdrilled Hole countersunk Hole Create Datum command creating boundaries curves datum elements by intersection elements by projections feature cube curvature analyzing curves creating joining Cut command
D
datum datum creating Deactivate command contextual menu item deactivating/activating
Index
constraint Definition contextual menu item Delete... contextual menu item deleting feature pattern density part difficulties Draft Angle draft analyzing Draft Analysis command Draft Angle command difficulties neutral element parting element Draft from Reflect Lines command parting element Drafted Filleted Pad command drafting filleting neutral element Drafted Filleted Pocket command drafting filleting drafting
Index
Drafted Filleted Pad Drafted Filleted Pocket Dress-Up Features toolbars dress-up features
E
Edge Fillet command inside corner Edit Parameters contextual menu item editing body constraint feature part pattern Edit-Links command elements by intersection creating elements by projections creating entering Part Design workbench Explode Pattern contextual menu item exploding User Pattern external reference Extract command extracting
Index
faces propagation wireframe elements Extrapolate command extrapolating surfaces extrusion
F
Face-Face Fillet command face-face fillet spine faces extracting feature creating deleting editing parameter positioning feature list file filleting Drafted Filleted Pad Drafted Filleted Pocket filleting Flag Note command flat end Hole
Index
G
Go to Profile contextual menu item Groove command
H
helix hide components contextual menu item Hole command counterbored counterdrilled countersunk flat end locating pointed end simple tapered threading up to plane up to surface V-bottom hole constraint
I
Insert Body
Index
command inside corner Edge Fillet instance interrupting Update Intersect command intersecting Intersection command
J
Join command joining curves surfaces
L
limiting element line command creating lines bisecting link material Link to file option list of elements Local Axis command
Index
locating Hole
M
mapping material material applying link mapping positioning properties Mean Dimensions command Mirror command multi-document environment Multi-Pad command Multi-Pocket command Multi-sections Solid command
N
name body constraint part neutral element Draft Angle
Index
Drafted Filleted Pad nominal dimension not normal Pad
O
offset open pointed document contextual menu item
P
Pad command not normal up to last up to next up to plane up to surface parameter feature Parent Children command parentheses part density editing name Part Design workbench entering parting element Draft Angle
Index
Draft from Reflect Lines Paste command Paste Special contextual menu item pattern deleting editing permanent display pink plane command creating Pocket command up to last up to plane up to surface Pocket command point command creating pointed end Hole positioning feature material PowerCopy Creation command PowerCopy Instantiate From Document command PowerCopy Save in Catalog command profile
Index
projecting Projection command propagation extracting Properties contextual menu item properties material properties Publication command pulling direction purple
R
Rectangular Pattern command red reference constraint reference element Reference Elements toolbars Remove command Remove Face command Remove Lump command Removed Multi-sections command renaming
Index
constraint Reorder contextual menu item Replace contextual menu item Replace Face command reshaping corner Rib command Rotate command
S
Scaling command Scan or Define in Work Object command setting constraint Sew Surface command Shaft command sharp edges Shell command Show All Children contextual menu item show components contextual menu item Show Parents and Children contextual command
Index
simple Hole sketch sketch changing the support sketch-based features Sketched-Based Features toolbars Sketcher Sketcher toolbars Sketcher command Slot command solid Solid Combine command specification tree spine face-face fillet Variable Radius Fillet Split command standards Stiffener command surface Surface-Based Features toolbars surface-based features surfaces extrapolating joining Surfacic Curvature Analysis
Index
command symbols Symmetry command
T
Tangency propagation contextual menu item Tap/Thread Analysis command tapered Hole Thick Surface command Thickness command thin solids Thread/Tap command threading Hole tolerance toolbars Analysis Annotations Boolean Operations Constraints Dress-Up Features Reference Elements Sketched-Based Features Sketcher Surface-Based Features Tools
Index
Transformation Features Tools toolbars Tools Options Annotations in Specification Tree Display tab Grid Leader associativity to the geometry Manipulators Manipulators tab Tolerancing Standard Tolerancing tab View/Annotation Plane Associativity View/Annotation Plane Display View/Annotation Plane tab Transformation Features toolbars transformation features Translation command Tritangent Fillet command type constraint
U
Union Trim command up to last Pad Pocket up to next
Index
Pad up to plane Hole Pad Pocket up to surface Hole Pad Pocket Update canceling command interrupting User Pattern command exploding
V
Variable Radius Fillet command spine V-bottom Hole
W
wireframe elements extracting wireframe geometry
CATIA Version 5 Release 12 User's Documentation Home Page
CATIA Documentation
Infrastructure
Mechanical Design
Shape Design & Styling
Analysis
Equipment & Systems Engineering
NC Manufacturing
Product Synthesis
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIA_default.htm10/18/2004 8:19:47 PM
Circuit Board Design
The CATIA Version 5 Circuit Board Design is a new generation product which addresses circuit board design in a mechanical design context and interfaces with industry standard ECAD systems.
q q q
The CATIA - Circuit Board Design offers the following main functions: Data can be exchanged with ECAD Systems through IDF Files (import/export) Circuit board geometry is designed within the global assembly product definition taking into account the mechanical context Electronic properties such as top and bottom faces can be defined and edited on any parts and assemblies Spatial and technological constraint areas can be created and managed Circuit board definitions can be analyzed in the context of the full Digital Mock-Up Creation and management of electronic part catalogs are available Multi-representation of electronic components is managed Hole and cutout patterns are supported as well as pattern of pattern Report capabilities.
q q q q q q
As a scalable product, CATIA Version 5 Circuit Board Design can be used in cooperation with other current or future companion products of the next CATIA generation such as CATIA Version 5 Assembly Design and ENOVIA-DMU Navigator Version 5. Using This Guide More Information
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/cbdugCATIAfrs.htm (3 of 3)10/18/2004 8:22:43 PM
Sketcher
Sketcher
Preface Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions What's New Getting Started Entering the Sketcher Workbench Creating a Line Creating an Arc of a Circle Creating a Cylindrical Elongated Hole Creating a Complex Profile Trimming Profiles Generating a Pad User Tasks Before You Begin Using Tools Using Colors Cutting the Part by the Sketch Plane Converting Standard/Construction Elements Entering Sketcher Workbench Creating a Positioned Sketch Changing a Sketch Support Setting Constraints Before you Begin Quickly Creating Dimensional/Geometrical Constraints Defining Constraint Measure Direction Creating Constraints via a Dialog Box Modifying Constraints On/Between Elements Modifying Constraint Definition Auto-Constraining a Group of Elements Animating Constraints Analyzing and Resolving Over-Constrained or Inconsistent Sketches Performing Operations on Profiles Creating Corners
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/dysugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 4)10/18/2004 8:27:47 PM
Sketcher
Creating Chamfers Creating Chamfers with One Element Trimmed Creating Chamfers with No Element Trimmed Trimming Elements Breaking & Trimming Closing Elements Complementing an Arc Breaking Elements Breaking/Trimming Use-Edges Trimming Multiple Elements Creating Mirrored Elements Moving Element by Symmetry Translating Elements Rotating Elements Scaling Elements Offsetting Elements Creating Spline Offsets Projecting 3D Elements Projecting 3D Silhouette Edges Intersecting 3D Elements Copying/Pasting Elements Isolating Elements Performing a Quick Geometry Diagnosis Analyzing the Sketch Creating Output Features Editing Profiles Modifying Element Coordinates Performing Auto-Search on Profiles Transforming Profiles Editing Conic Curves Editing Connecting Curves Editing a Spline Editing Spline Offsets Editing Parents/Children and Constraints Editing Projection/Intersection marks Replacing Geometry Deleting Sketcher Elements Sketching Pre-Defined Profiles Creating Oriented Rectangles Creating Parallelograms Creating Elongated Holes Creating Cylindrical Elongated Holes Creating Keyhole profiles Creating Hexagons
Sketcher
Creating Centered Rectangles Creating Centered Parallelograms Sketching Simple Profiles Creating Profiles Creating Rectangles Creating Circles Creating Three Points Circles Creating Circles Using Coordinates Creating Tri-Tangent Circles Creating Arcs Creating Three Points Arcs Creating Three Points Arcs (Limits) Creating Splines Connecting Curves with a Spline Connecting Curves with an Arc Creating Ellipses Creating Parabola by Focus Creating Hyperbola by Focus Creating Conic Curves Creating Standard or Construction Elements Creating Lines Creating an Infinite Line Creating a Bi-Tangent Line Creating a Bisecting Line Creating a Line Normal to a Curve Creating Symmetrical Extensions Creating an Axis Creating Points Creating Points Using Coordinates Creating Equidistant Points Creating Points Using Intersection Creating Points Using Projection SmartPick Before You Begin SmartPicking ... Creating Geometry Using SmartPick Deactivating a Sketch Workbench Description Command Board Sketcher Menu Bar Sketcher Toolbars Sketch tools Sketcher
Sketcher
Constraints Profiles Operations Tools Toolbar Sketcher Specification Tree Icons Customizing for Sketcher Glossary Index
Preface
Sketcher application makes it possible for designers to sketch precise and rapid 2D profiles.
Preface
Preface
Sketcher application makes it possible for designers to sketch precise and rapid 2D profiles.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugpr01.htm10/18/2004 8:27:56 PM
Using This Guide
Using This Guide

This book is intended for the user who needs to become quickly familiar with Sketcher Version 5 product. The user should be familiar with basic Version 5 concepts such as document windows, standard and view toolbars. To get the most out of this guide, we suggest you start reading and performing the step-bystep tutorial Getting Started. This tutorial will show you how to create a basic profile using SmartPick. The next sections deal with various types of profiles and associated operations as well as more details on constraints that can be applied to these profiles. You may also want to take a look at the Workbench Description sections describing the Sketcher menus and toolbars at the end of the guide. To perform the scenarios, you will use sample documents contained in the C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bxxdoc\English\online\fdtug\samples folder (where xx in Bxxdoc stands for the current release number). For more information on accessing sample documents, refer to Accessing Sample Documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Prior to reading this book, we recommend that you read q the Infrastructure User's guide Version 5
q
the Conventions chapter [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
What's New
What's New?
New Functionalities
Output This new function enables the user to publish 2D geometry, construction geometry and axis within the 3D area. This feature can also be updated independently from the whole sketch. Symmetry This new function provides the capability to move geometry elements by symmetry, according to a given line. Conic Curves/Editing Curves It is now possible to manage curves that will be variational and associative with the input geometry elements. The conic can also be defined through a parameter. Trim/Break of Use Edge You can now trim or break an imported element (projection, intersection, offset) without modifying the original one. Spline Offset You can now create and edit an offset based on an existing spline by using the actual Offset command. This spline offset will be associative with the original spline.
Projection Point Creates a scheme of constraints and construction geometry which allow the user to keep the association between a point and its projected point. Chamfer/Corner Options Two new trim options have been added to the Chamfer/Corner commands, it is now possible to apply a Standard Trim option or a Construction Lines Trim. Centered Profiles It is now possible to create centered profiles such as rectangles and parallelograms.
Customizing Settings
Smart Pick Option (see also Customizing) The SmartPick constraints can now be specified separately from the parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency ones. Hiding Cursor Coordinates (see also Customizing) The cursor coordinates can now be hidden.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugwn.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:28:32 PM
What's New
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugwn.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 8:28:32 PM
Getting Started
Getting Started
The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for creating and modifying sketched elements. Note that you can apply constraints to the sketched elements.
Specification to be used
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysuggs01.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:28:39 PM
Getting Started
Final Pad
This is the part the pad comes from:
This tutorial should take about 40 minutes to complete.
Entering the Sketcher Workbench Creating a Line Creating an Arc of a Circle Creating a Cylindrical Elongated Hole Creating a Complex Profile Trimming Profiles Generating a Pad
Entering the Sketcher Workbench

This task lists the different ways of entering the Sketcher workbench. 1. Select Start -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher from the menu bar.
2. Click the chosen reference plane, either in the geometry area or in the specification tree.
The Sketcher workbench appears as follows:
Modify the Grid Spacing

1. Go to Tools->Options. 2. From the left-hand pane of the Options dialog box, click Mechanical Design->Sketcher. 3. Select the Sketcher tab. 4. Enter 10mm as Primary spacing. 5. If needed, disable the Snap to point mode. Click here for more information on Grid options. 6. Click OK in the Options dialog box. You can now start working in the Sketcher workbench.
HV plane calculation in relation to selected plane: q The normal of the working support is the same as the principal normal of the plane checked. You choose zx plane, the PRINCIPAL NORMAL is Y
q
The first vector H is defined as follow : H= Z x N ( x means vectorial product). N is the normal vector y in our case. H = -X. The second vector V is defined as V = N x H. Don't forget that H;V;N must make a direct trihedron. Since V5 R7 you can reorient the axis system in the work support but the axis system must be direct. So changing one vector H, change the other.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating a Line
Creating a Line
This task will show you how to create a line in order to define point C (line left extremity). The Sketch tools toolbar is displayed. As you will see all along this tutorial, the Sketch tools toolbar displays not only command options but also given fields and values that appear in accordance with the command you select. This toolbar is situated at the bottom right of the software screen. If you cannot see it properly, just undock it.
Snap to Point
Standard or Construction Elements
Geometrical Constraints (this icon is active, by default).
Dimensional Constraints (this icon is active, by default).
1. Activate the Construction Element icon
from the Sketch tools toolbar.
Construction lines are lines that are internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch. These lines are used as positioning reference. They are not used to create solid primitives. 2. Click the Line icon sub-toolbar). When the cursor goes over the axis origin, a blue symbol appears (coincidence between the axis origin point and the line start point). from the Profiles toolbar (Line
Creating a Line
3. Keep the coincidence symbol active and click the axis origin point. You created the first extremity point of the line.
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays the following fields and values:
The values that appear in the toolbar (H, V, L, A and so forth) are automatically updated as you move the cursor. The Sketch tools toolbar constantly provides the characteristics of the current element (First Point, as an example) as well as the position of this element. In addition to the toolbar and whenever possible, the element is dynamically displayed as it is created. As a result, you can choose more efficiently the optimum configuration for this element.
4. Press the TAB key as many times as necessary to position the cursor in the desired field of the Sketch tools toolbar. You can use the cursor to select the desired field. In this particular case, position the cursor in L field (length) and key in L: 20. The value you just keyed in automatically appears in the Sketch tools toolbar, as well as the corresponding unit.
5. Position the cursor in A field (angle) and key in 188.
Creating a Line
The values of the line second extremity point directly appear in the Sketch tools toolbar (L and A).
6. Press Enter. The angle value you keyed in is oriented. As a consequence, keying in -172 amounts to keying +188 degrees. The constraint is represented by a 172 angle value because constraint representation system does not manage angle symbols.
In fact, symbol representation is issued out by means of angle sector management that you can modify by double clicking angle constraint representation. Note that if the constraint representation overlays some of the geometry, you can move this constraint representation by dragging it with the cursor. The line is created. Constraints (Length: 20mm and Angle: 188 degrees) appear on the line.
Creating an Arc of a Circle

This task will show you how to create an arc of a circle (from point A to B). Make sure the Construction Element icon (Sketch tools toolbar) is active.
1. Click the Arc icon
from the Profiles
toolbar (Circle subtoolbar).
2. Click the arc center point. In this case, select the axis origin. A blue symbol appears to illustrate coincidence between
the axis origin and the arc center point to be created.
The Sketch tools toolbar values and fields appear. 3. Position the cursor in H field (horizontal) and key in -27. 4. Position the cursor in V field (vertical) field and key in -10.
The arc of circle will now appear according to the position you assigned to the cursor. In this particular case, the cursor position is at the top extremity of the arc. 5. Position the cursor in S field (angular sector) of the Sketch tools toolbar and key in -57.335.
6. Press Enter.
Creating a Cylindrical Elongated Hole

This task will show you how to create a curved oblong profile as part of the sketch to be created. This curved oblong profile will be created in accordance with previously positioned construction lines. In other words, the curved oblong profile is centered on point B, starts from point C and is assigned a 27 degree angular sector.
1. Click the Cylindrical Elongated Hole from the Profiles toolbar icon (Predefined Profile subtoolbar).
2. De-activate the Construction Element from the Sketch tools toolbar. icon 3. Make sure the Dimensional Constraint icon is still active.
4. Click point B (arc top extremity point) to define the curved oblong profile center. Before you click, a blue symbol appears to illustrate coincidence between the selected points and the profile angular sector to be created. Note that if you position the cursor outside the zone that is allowed for creating a given element, the symbol appears. In this particular case, trying to create a degenerated arc (0 deg sector) displays the symbol.
5. Click point C (extremity point of the construction line previously created).
New values and fields appear in the Sketch tools toolbar. 6. Position the cursor in Radius field, key in 1 and press Enter.
7. Position the cursor in S field (angular sector) and key in 27.
8. Press Enter.
This is the final cylindrical elongated hole:
As you could see above, geometrical elements are assigned given colors. This is to make the sketch geometrical configuration more easily understandable. Purple means that geometry is over-constrained. Green means that the geometry is isoconstrained (cannot be moved).
At this step, we strongly advise that you save the cylindrical elongated hole.
Creating a Complex Profile

This task shows how to create a more complex profile which is another part of the final sketch. You are going to create lines and arcs of circles one after the other.
In case you did not save the previously created sketch, you can open the GettingStarted_profile01.CATPart document.
If you are not satisfied with what you create, you can, at any time, use Undo Redo icons.
or
Specification:
1. Click on the Profile icon
from the Profiles toolbar.
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays the following option commands and values:
Line
Tangent Arc
Three Point Arc
Three Point Arc

2. Select the Three Point Arc option command from the Sketch tools toolbar.
3. Select a point on the curved oblong profile (arc D).
Coincidence ( ) is applied between arc D on the cylindrical elongated hole and the arc start point.
4. Click a point which the profile is going to go through (arc second point).
The Sketch tools toolbar displays values for defining the arc. 5. Position the cursor in R (arc radius) field of the Sketch tools toolbar and key in 2. 6. Press Enter.
You define the three point arc radius to which you impose the above values. In other words, at this very moment, whatever the new location you may give to the cursor, the three point arc will definitely go through the two points previously clicked and will definitely be assigned a 2 mm radius.
7. Drag the cursor and click a point in the free space to define the arc end point.
Tangent Line
Make sure the Line option command (Sketch tools toolbar) is now active.
8. Start dragging the line in order to make it tangent to the arc you just created.
To make this line tangent to the arc you just created, SmartPick automatically helps fixing the cursor position so that tangency may be kept. Autodetection displays the tangency symbol .
9. Press the Ctrl key to keep detected the tangency constraint, whatever the position of the cursor. In other words, you lock tangency whatever the position of the cursor. 10. Drag the line end point up to the desired position. Before pressing the Ctrl button, make sure you are detecting one and only one constraint on the current element. Otherwise, this constraint will not be locked, and not even created.
Tangent Arc
11. Press, hold down and drag the left mouse button to the arc end point. In other words, you are dragging the cursor so that you automatically activate the Tangent Arc mode. No sooner do you stop pressing the left mouse button that the arc appears on your sketch.
If you cannot manage creating the tangent arc using the left mouse button, what you in the Sketch tools toolbar. can do is select the Tangent Arc option command
12. Position the cursor in R field (radius) of the Sketch tools toolbar and key in 3.5.
13. Click the arc end point.
Tangent Line
14. Start dragging the line and press the Ctrl key to lock tangency detection. 15. Click a point on the sketch above OC construction line to create the line end point.
Ending Tangent Arc

16. Press the left mouse button and drag the cursor down on the sketch to create another tangent arc.
17. Key in 5 as tangent arc radius in the Sketch tools toolbar. As you can see above, in accordance with the specifications, to end the complex profile creation, you need to create a 5mm arc which cuts the cylindrical elongated hole at arc E. If the arc segment extremity results too far from arc E, it means that both these
conditions are not fulfilled. As a result the arc will not cut the cylindrical elongated hole. In this case, press the Undo command. 18. Double-click the point at which you want the complex profile to coincide with the curved oblong profile (see symbol).
Constraints (Tangency)
19. Multi-select the elements requested for creating tangency constraints .
Multi-selected elements
(Case 1) 20. Click the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box icon .
(Case 2)
21. Check the desired options in the Constraint Definition dialog box.
Resulting tangency constraints
(Case 1)
(Case 2)
Constraints (Coincidence)
Multi-selected elements
22. Multi-select the arc center point and the axis origin point for creating a coincidence constraint .
23. Click the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box icon and check the desired options in the Constraint Definition dialog box.
Resulting constraint
Final Complex Profile:
Final Specification Tree:
The specification tree is grouped in accordance with the elements. It can be ungrouped
as shown here:
Trimming Profiles
Trimming Profiles
This task shows how to relimit the profile you just created by trimming some elements in this profile. 1. Double-click the Quick Trim icon from the Operation subtoolbar (Relimitations subtoolbar). The possible trim option commands are displayed in the Sketch tools toolbar.
2. Click the Rubber In option command in the Sketch tools toolbar.
3. Select the elements to be trimmed, one after the other.
Trimming Profiles
These elements are automatically trimmed.
Generating a Pad
Generating a Pad
This task shows you how to create a pad from the profile previously created. For this, you will leave the Sketcher workbench and automatically enter Part Design workbench. 1. Click the Exit icon .
You are now in Part Design workbench. If this is not the case, select Start -> Mechanical Design -> Part Design from the menu bar. The sketched profile appears as follows:
The Pad Definition dialog box appears. 3. Enter 5mm as the pad Length. 4. Click OK.
Generating a Pad
The pad appears as shown here:
[ Back ] [ Up ]
User Tasks
User Tasks
The Sketcher workbench provides a simple method for creating and editing 2D geometry as well as creating relations between geometrical elements. Once created, you can set constraints between geometrical elements, if you need more complex sketches.
Before You Begin Entering Sketcher Workbench Creating a Positioned Sketch Changing a Sketch Support Setting Constraints Performing Operations on Profiles Editing Profiles Sketching Pre-Defined Profiles Sketching Simple Profiles SmartPick Deactivating a Sketch
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugbt0000.htm10/18/2004 8:30:36 PM
Before You Begin
Before You Begin

Before you begin, you should be familiar with the following tools and concepts that will help you in: q creating simple or predefined profile with or without using SmartPicking
q q
editing or performing operations on these profiles adding constraints on profiles
Using Tools Use the Sketch tools toolbar displayed in the bottom right part of the software screen which provides helpful options Using Colors Use colors to define either graphical properties or constraint diagnostics. Cutting the Part by the Sketch Plane Hide the portion of part you do not want to see in the Sketcher. Converting Standard into Construction Elements Assign a new type of a line to an element for differentiating construction from non construction elements.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Using Tools
Using Tools For Sketching

This task shows how the software can assist you when sketching elements.
The Sketch tools toolbar is displayed in the bottom right part of the software screen and provides the following options commands:
Snap to Point
Construction/Standard Element
Geometrical Constraints
Dimensional Constraints
toolbar)
Value fields (Sketch tools
You do not necessarily visualize the whole Sketch tools toolbar. Just undock it to display all the available options and fields.
Working with the Snap to Point option

If activated, this option makes your sketch begin or end on the points of the grid. As you are sketching the points are snapped to the intersection points of the grid. Note that this option is also available in the Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option at the left of the dialog box (Sketcher tab). For more information, see Infrastructure user's guide (Customization Settings).
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugbt0303.htm (1 of 5)10/18/2004 8:31:08 PM
Using Tools
In the following example, the white spline was created with Snap to Point on. The points are on the grid. Conversely, the here highlighted spline was created with the Snap to Point option deactivated.
Note that when you zoom in, snapping option remains active both on primary and secondary grids, even though the secondary grids are not visualized any more. When SmartPick is active, points may not snap at the intersection points of the grid. Care that they will necessarily snap on an horizontal or a vertical grid subdivision. The SmartPick capability works even if this option is on.
Creating Construction/Standard Elements

You can create two types of elements: standard elements and construction elements. Note that creating standard or construction elements is based upon the same methodology. If standard elements represent the most commonly created elements, on some occasions, you will have to create a geometry just to facilitate your design. Construction elements aim at helping you in sketching the required profile.
1. Click the Construction/Standard Element option command from the Sketch tools toolbar so that the elements you are now going to create be either standard or construction element.
Using Tools
As construction elements are not taken into account when creating features, note that they do not appear outside the Sketcher. When they are not used anymore, construction elements are automatically removed. Note that in the case of hexagons, construction element type is automatically used for secondary circles. This type of sketch is interesting in that it simplifies the creation and the ways in which it is constrained. Setting a radius constraint on the second circle is enough to constrain the whole hexagon. Just imagine what you would have to do to constrain hexagons sketched with no construction circles!
q q
Creating Geometrical Constraints

When selected, the Geometrical Constraint option command allows forcing a
limitation between one or more geometry elements.
Creating Dimensional Constraints

When selected, the Dimensional Constraint option command allows forcing a
dimensional limitation on one or more profile type elements provided you use the value fields in the Sketch tools toolbar for creating this profile.
Using Tools
To know more about sketcher constraints, please refer to Setting Constraints, and Infrastructure user's guide (Customization Settings).
Value Fields (Sketch tools toolbar)
The values of the elements you sketch appear in the Sketch tools toolbar as you move the cursor. In other words, as you are moving the cursor, the Horizontal (H), Vertical (V), Length (L) and Angle (A) fields display the coordinates corresponding to the cursor position. You can also use these fields for entering the values of your choice. In the following scenario, you are going to sketch a line by entering values in the appropriate fields. 1. Click the Line icon.
The Sketch tools toolbar displays information in the four value fields. 2. Enter the coordinates of the First Point. 3. Enter the coordinates of the Second Point. OR 2. Enter the length (L) of the line. 3. Enter the value of the angle (A) between the line to be created and the horizontal axis.
Using Tools
4. Click the first point on the line. The line is created. Depending on the number of fields available and the way you customize your toolbars, some fields may be truncated. What you need to do is just undock the Sketch tools toolbar.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Using Colors
Using Colors
Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond to colors illustrating: q Graphical properties Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the contextual menu (Properties option and Graphic tab). OR
q
Constraint diagnostics Colors that represent constraint diagnostics are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnostics. As a result, as soon as the diagnostic is solved, the element is assigned the color as defined in the Properties dialog box (Graphic tab).
COLORS and GRAPHICAL PROPERTIES
Grey: Construction Element

Elements that are internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch. These elements are used as positioning references. These elements cannot be visualized in the 3D and therefore cannot be used to generate solid primitives.
Yellow: Non Modifiable Element
Using Colors
For example, use edges. These elements cannot be modified, graphically speaking.
Red Orange: Selected Element

A subgroup of elements actually selected (the Select icon is similarly active).
COLORS and DIAGNOSTICS
SOLUTION:
White: Under-Constrained Element

The geometry has been constrained: all the relevant dimensions are satisfied but there are still some degrees of freedom remaining. Add constraints.
Using Colors
Brown: Element Not Changed Some geometrical elements are over-defined or notconsistent. As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated.
Remove one or more dimensional constraints.
Green: Fixed Element

The geometry has been fixed using the Constraint Definition dialog box or the contextual menu (right mouse button).
Using Colors
Green: Iso-Constrained Element

All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its geometrical support. Geometry before and after being moved:
Purple: Over-Constrained Element

The dimensioning scheme is overconstrained: too many dimensions were applied to the geometry. Remove one or more dimensional constraints.
Using Colors
Red: Inconsistent Element

At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also Add dimensions. Set the case when elements are underconstrained and the system dimension value(s) properly. proposes values by defaults that do not lead to a solution.
Inconsistent and Over-Constrained Elements: When leaving the sketcher, the software will only generate a warning for inconsistent and over-constrained elements if they belong to a sketch issued from the release 5 or releases before. Since release 6, the software generates an error.
Cutting the Part by the Sketch Plane

This task shows how to make some edges visible. In other words, you are going to simplify the sketch plane view by hiding the portion of material you do not need for sketching.
1. Select the plane on which you need to sketch a new profile and enter the Sketcher workbench.
Once in the Sketcher, you obtain this view, which does not show the edges generated by the shell feature.
2. Click the Cut Part by Sketch Plane icon on the Tools toolbar to hide the portion of part you do not want to see in the Sketcher.
You obtain this view without the material existing above the sketch plane. The edges corresponding to the shell are now visible. The edges resulting from the intersection are not visualized and therefore cannot be selected.
3. You can now sketch the required profile taking these edges into account.
Converting Standard/Construction Elements
Converting Standard into Construction Elements

This task shows how to convert standard elements into construction elements and vice versa. Open the Construction_Standard.CATPart document from the \online\samples \Sketcher directory. 1. Select the line (standard type) you wish to convert into a construction line.
2. Click the Construction/Standard Element option from the Sketch tools toolbar. command
The line you previously selected appears dashed to show it is a new type of line.
3. Click the Construction/Standard Element option command again. The construction line is converted into a standard line.
Converting Standard/Construction Elements
Double-clicking on the line displays the Line Definition dialog box in which you can un-check the Construction element option if you want to convert the construction line into a standard line. For more information, refer to Modifying Element Coordinates.
In certain cases, construction elements are automatically created (e.g. when offsetting canonical elements, or when creating lines normal to a curve). If you subsequently delete the constraint or one of the elements, the construction element will be automatically removed. Construction lines are not taken into account when entering another workbench. Applying the Construction/Standard Element option on axes has no effect.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Entering Sketcher Workbench

This task lists the different ways of entering the Sketcher workbench.
Creating a sketch
To create a sketch, you have several possibilities: q Select Start -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher from the menu bar.
Select the Sketch with Absolute Axis Definition icon and specify the reference plane, and the origin and orientation of the axis system. This enables you to create a positioned sketch. This is the recommended method for creating a sketch, as it enables you to define explicitly the position of the axis system and ensures associativity with the 3D geometry.
Select the Sketcher icon and click the desired reference plane either in the geometry area or in the specification tree, or select a planar surface. This creates a "nonpositioned" sketch (i.e. a sketch for which you do not specify the origin and orientation of the absolute axis, which are not associative with the 3D geometry). The sketch absolute axis may "slide" on the reference plane when the part is updated.
Select one plane of the local axis. h and v are aligned to the main axes of this selected plane. Associativity is kept between both the plane and the sketch.
The Sketcher workbench appears as follows:
Editing an existing sketch

To edit an existing sketch, you have several possibilities: q Double-click the sketch or an element of the sketch geometry, either in the geometry area or in the specification tree.
q
To do this from the 3D, right-click the sketch in the specification tree, point to [sketch name] object in the contextual menu, and then select Edit.
Adding a Grid
1. Go to Tools->Options. 2. Click Mechanical Design-> in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Sketcher tab.
4. Enter 10mm as Primary spacing. 5. If needed, deactivate the Snap to point mode. Click here for more information on Grid options.
6. Click OK in the dialog box. You can now start working in the Sketcher workbench. HV plane calculation in relation to selected plane: q The normal of the working support is the same as the principal normal of the plane checked. You choose zx plane, the PRINCIPAL NORMAL is Y
q
The first vector H is define as follow : H= Z x N ( x means vectorial product). N is the normal vector y in our case. H = -X. The second vector V is define as V = N x H Don't forget that H;V;N must make a direct trihedron. Since V5 R7 you can reorient the axis system in the work support but the axis system must be direct. So when changing one vector H, change the others too.
Creating a Positioned Sketch

In this task, you will learn how to create a positioned sketch, in which you specify the reference plane, and the origin and orientation of the absolute axis. Creating a positioned sketch enables you to define (and later change) explicitly the position of the sketch absolute axis. This offers the following advantages: q You can use the absolute axis directions like external references for the sketched profile geometry.
q
When the geometry of the part evolves and the associated position of the sketch changes, the shape of the sketched profile (2D geometry of the sketch) remains unchanged (even if the sketched profile is under-constrained).
Creating a positioned sketch also ensures associativity with the 3D geometry.
Open the Positioned_sketch.CATPart document.
You will now create a positioned sketch that will enable you to design the retaining bracket for this part. You will position the sketch absolute axis as follows: q its origin will be on the axis of revolution,
q
its horizontal (H) direction will be parallel to the root face, its vertical (V) direction will be normal to the root face.
1. From the Insert menu, select Sketcher and then select the Sketcher... option.
OR 1. Click the down arrow next to the Sketcher icon , and select the Sketch with Absolute Axis Definition icon .
The Sketch Positioning dialog box appears. In the Type field in the Sketch Support area, two options are available: q Positioned (pre-selected): creates a positioned sketch for which you specify the origin and orientation of the absolute axis.
q
Sliding: creates a "nonpositioned" sketch, i.e. a sketch for which you do not specify the origin and orientation of the absolute axis. This option is mainly used for compatibility with non-positioned sketches, and to enable you to turn them into positioned sketches. With the Sliding option, the sketch absolute axis may "slide" on the reference plane when the part is updated.
Keep the Positioned option selected.
2. You will now specify the reference plane for the sketch. To do this, make sure the Reference field is active, and select the blue surface (Shaft.1).
The Sketch Positioning dialog box is updated: the Reference field now indicates the reference plane. Also, the Type fields of the Origin and Orientation areas are activated and the Implicit mode is pre-selected. With the Implicit mode, the reference plane origin and orientation is positioned according to the geometry used for the sketch plane: q When the sketch support is a plane, the origin is a projection of the reference plane origin in the sketch plane, and the orientation is parallel to the reference plane directions. This is the case in our example; the reference plane does not appear on the surface because the part is out of line with the reference plane.
q
When the sketch support is defined by two secant lines, the origin is at the intersection of these. The H direction is colinear to the first line, and its
orientation directly depends on the orientation of this line. The V direction is deduced from the second line, which is not necessarily orthogonal to the first line. This second line simply defines, depending on its orientation, the side where the V direction will be positioned in relation to the H direction.
3. You will now specify the absolute axis origin so to make it coincident with the axis of revolution of the part. To do this, select Curve intersection in the Type field of the Origin area. The Reference field is activated.
4. Select the cylindrical surface to make its axis intersect with the absolute axis origin.
The absolute axis of the sketch is now positioned on this axis. Its orientation has not changed.
5. You will now specify the absolute axis orientation according to that of the root face. To do this, select Parallel to line in the Type field of the Orientation area. The Reference field is activated.
6. Select an edge of the root face.
The absolute axis of the sketch is now oriented like the selected edge.
7. You will now invert the H direction and make the V direction normal to the root face. To do this, start by selecting V Direction in the Orientation area to specify that you want the orientation to be defined according to the V direction. 8. Then, check the Reverse V box to revert the V direction. 9. Finally, check the Swap box to swap H and V directions.
The sketch is now positioned as wanted.
10. Click OK to validate and exit the Sketch Positioning dialog box. You are now ready to sketch a profile for the retaining bracket.
The absolute axis (its origin point, both its directions and the grid) can be used to specify the position and dimensions of the 2D geometry because it is associative with the part. With positioned sketches, the origin and directions of the absolute axis are similar to external references (Use-Edges) obtained using additional projections or intersections when creating non-positioned sketches. In this exercise, you did not create any constraints on 2D geometry: the geometry is under-constrained. Yet, if you move or resize the part (no matter how significantly), the profile you sketched will remain absolutely unchanged. Its shape will not be altered: thanks to the fact that the position of its absolute axis is explicitly defined, it is automatically pre-positioned in 3D before its 2D resolution. At any time after creating a positioned sketch, you can change the reference plane, the origin and the orientation of the absolute axis by specifying the new geometry in the associated Reference field. To do this from the 3D, right-click the positioned sketch in the specification tree, point to [sketch name] object in the contextual menu, and then select Change sketch support.
Changing a Sketch Support

This task shows you how to change the position of a sketch by changing its support. Changing a sketch support amounts to editing the absolute axis definition of the sketch.
Open the Change_Sketch_Support.CATPart document. In this scenario, you will edit the absolute axis definition of Pocket.2\Sketch.3 by making it associative to Pocket.1. This will ensure that, when moving Pocket.1, Pocket.2 follows Pocket.1 without requiring you to edit the geometry of Sketch.3.
1.
From the specification tree, right-click Sketch.3.
2. In the contextual menu which is displayed, select Sketch.3 object -> Change Sketch Support.... If a message appears, informing you that if you change its position, the sketch may become inconsistent or over-constrained, simply click OK. The Sketch Positioning dialog box appears.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugchangesketchsupport.htm (1 of 6)10/18/2004 8:32:17 PM
3.
If the Move Geometry option at the bottom of this dialog box is checked, uncheck it. This will prevent the geometry from moving when performing the next operation(s) in the dialog box.
In the Type field in the Sketch Support area, three options are available:
q
Positioned: positions the sketch using the origin and orientation of the absolute axis. Sliding: default type used for non-positioned sketches (i.e. when you edit a non-positioned sketch, this option will be selected by default, as is the case in our example). This option is mainly used for compatibility purposes, and to enable you to turn non-positioned sketches into positioned ones. With the Sliding option, the sketch is not positioned, i.e. the origin and orientation of the absolute axis is not specified. As a result, its absolute axis may "slide" on the reference plane when the part is updated. Isolated: isolates the sketch in order to break all absolute axis links (support, origin and orientation links) with the 3D or to solve update errors. Only the 3D position will be kept, to ensure that the sketch does not move. With the Isolated option, you cannot define the sketch support, origin and orientation.
4. Select the Positioned option, and make sure Pad.1\Face is selected as the reference element for the sketch support (Reference field).
5. At this point, check the Move Geometry option to specify that, from now on, the geometry should be moved when the sketch position is modified.
6. Check the Swap box to swap H and V directions. The new sketch position is previewed in the geometry area.
You are now going to make the absolute axis associative with Pocket.1.
7. Uncheck the Move Geometry option once again to ensure that the geometry does not move according to the newly defined axis.
8. In the Type field in the Origin area, select Intersection 2 lines. 9. You will now specify the reference element for the origin. To do this, make sure the Reference field is active, and select a horizontal edge of Pocket.1 as shown below.
10. Now, select a vertical edge of Pocket.1 as shown below.
11. In the Orientation areas, leave the Type field set to Implicit and the Reference field set to No Selection. For more information on the other options available in the Origin and in the Orientation areas, refer to Creating a Positioned Sketch in the Sketcher User's Guide. 12. Click OK. The absolute axis definition of Sketch.3 is modified and the position of the pocket is changed.
13. From the specification tree, double-click Sketch.2 to edit it.
14. On the sketch, double-click the value of Offset.57.
15. In the Constraint Definition dialog box which is displayed, enter a new value, 90 for example, and click OK. The constraint is updated, and Sketch.2 is moved accordingly.
16. Exit the Sketcher workbench. As you can see, Pocket.1 has been moved, and Pocket.2 is still positioned according to the absolute axis you defined for Sketch.3.
Setting Constraints
Setting Constraints
You can set geometrical and dimensional constraints on various types of elements.
Before you Begin You should be familiar with important concepts. Creating Quick Dimensional/Geometrical Constraints Set constraints on elements or between two or three elements. The constraints are in priority dimensional. Use the contextual menu to get other types of constraints and to position this constraint as desired. Defining Constraint Measure Direction Define the measure direction as you create a dimensional constraint. Creating Contact Constraints Apply a constraint with a relative positioning that can be compared to contact. You can either select the geometry or the command first. Use the contextual menu if you want to insert constraints that are not those created in priority. Modifying Constraint Definition Double-click a constraint and modify the definition using the Constraint Definition dialog box. Creating Constraints Using a Dialog Box Set various geometrical constraints between one or more elements using a dialog box and if needed, multi-selection. Modifying Constraints on/between Elements Edit geometrical constraints defined on elements or between elements either in the Sketcher or in the 3D area. Auto-Constraining a Group of Elements Detects possible constraints between selected elements and imposes these constraints once detected.
Setting Constraints
Animating Constraints Assign a set of values to the same angular constraint and examine how the whole system is affected. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Before you Begin
Before You Begin

What is SmartPick?
SmartPick is an intuitive, easy-to-use tool designed to make all your Sketcher creation and edition tasks as simple as possible. SmartPick dynamically detects the following geometrical constraints:
q q q q q q q q
support lines and circles alignment parallelism perpendicularity tangency concentricity horizontality and verticality midpoint
What are Constraints?

There are times when simple sketches are adequate for your design process, but you will often need to work on more complex sketches requiring a rich set of geometrical or dimensional constraints. The Sketcher workbench provides constraint commands which will allow you to fully sketch your profiles. When you apply constraint on curves, lines, circles and ellipses, the complete geometrical support is taken into account. As an example for this arc, the entire circle is taken into account when you apply constraints.
Before you Begin
The location you click when selecting the element(s) to constrain is taken into account to create the constraints (it is used to position the constraints accurately). Therefore, when selecting the element(s) to constrain, it is important that you click where you want the constraint to be positioned. The software will then position the constraint according to the area where you clicked. This is especially true when creating constraints on certain types of curves (complex curves like splines, for example). In some cases, if you don't click in the right place when selecting the curve to constrain, the constraint and the geometry will be inconsistent.
Geometrical Constraints
A geometrical constraint is a relationship that forces a limitation between one or more geometric elements. For example, a geometrical constraint might require that two lines be parallel. If you select three lines, or two lines and a point, these elements will automatically result parallel to each others, as illustrated in the table further down. You can set a constraint on one element or between two or more elements.
Number of Elements
Corresponding Geometrical Constraints Fix Horizontal Vertical
One Element
Two Elements
Coincidence Concentricity Tangency Parallelism Midpoint Perpendicularity
Three Elements
Symmetry Equidistant Point
When creating your constraint, remember that a green constraint is a valid constraint by default. Conversely, a yellow constraint indicates that the definition is not valid. The software lets you customize the colors and more generally the style of the constraints you use. To have details about these capabilities, see Infrastructure User's guide. When you position the cursor on constraint symbols, the software calls your attention on the elements involved in the constraint system. Here are two examples of what you may get.
Before you Begin
Dimensional Constraints
A dimensional constraint is a constraint whose value determines geometric object measurement. For example, it might control the length of a line, or the distance between two points.
You will use the Constraint command to finalize your profile. The Constraint command allows you to set dimensional or geometrical constraints but you will mainly use it to set dimensional constraints. You can combine dimensional constraints to constrain a feature or sketch. You can set a dimensional constraint on one element or between two elements.
Number of Elements
Corresponding Dimensional Constraints Length Radius/Diameter Semimajor axis Semiminor axis
One Element
Two Elements
Distance Angle
You can apply a diameter constraint between two lines provided one of these lines is an axis line.
What About Constraining While Sketching?

Provided you previously activated the Constraint command , sketching certain elements automatically generates constraints although you did not specify that you wanted these elements to be actually constrained.
Before you Begin
What About Constraint Visualization?
Symbol
Constraint Type Perpendicular Coincidence Vertical Horizontal Fix/Unfix Parallel
Radius/Diameter
What About Constraint Colors?

As soon as you detect a constraint problem, try to solve this problem. Otherwise, if you let the model be overloaded with diagnostics, it will soon become very hard for you to find the origin for each of these diagnostics. For more information about overdefined or inconsistent sketches, see Analyzing and Resolving overdefined or inconsistent Sketches
COLOR and DIAGNOSTIC
SOLUTION:
White: Under-Constrained Element

The geometry has been constrained: all the relevant dimensions are satisfied but there are still some degrees of freedom remaining. Add constraints.
Before you Begin
Brown: Element Not Changed

q q q
Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent, or the geometry is fixed, or there is either two free or one free and one fixed geometry in the same set. Remove one or more dimensional constraints, or, in the case of fixed geometry, unfix it.
As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated.
Green: Fixed Element

The geometry has been fixed using the Constraint Definition dialog box or the contextual menu (right mouse button).
Green: Iso-Constrained Element

All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its geometrical support. Geometry before and after being moved:
Before you Begin
Purple: Over-Constrained Element

The dimensioning scheme is overconstrained: too many dimensions were applied to the geometry. Remove one or more dimensional constraints.
Red: Inconsistent Element

At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when Add dimensions. Set elements are underconstrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to dimension value(s) properly. a solution.
Inconsistent and Over-Constrained Elements If a sketch contains inconsistent and over-constrained elements when leaving the Sketcher workbench: q For sketches created with versions starting from V5 R6: an error message will be displayed.
q
For sketches created with versions up to V5 R5 (included): only a warning will be generated .
Before you Begin
Creating a Constraint Between a 2D and a 3D Element

When you need to create a constraint between a 3D element and a line, for example, this creation may result impossible. This is the case when the projection or intersection resulting use-edge does not give a unique solution. In other words, the use-edge (projection of one side of a pad) corresponds to several limit edges of the side. As a result, you will not be able to select this 3D element when creating the constraint. You will therefore have to use manually the projection operators.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
SmartPick
Using SmartPick
SmartPick allows you working with a higher productivity by using the available Smart Pick cursor.
Before you Begin You should be familiar with important concepts. SmartPicking a Point Specify a location either for you to create geometry or for SmartPick to return information via symbols. Creating Geometry Using SmartPick Position geometry to be created according to existing geometry, if needed, and to internal parameters.
Quickly Creating Dimensional/Geometrical Constraints

This task shows you how to set dimensional or geometrical constraints between one, two or three elements. The constraints are in priority dimensional. Use the contextual menu to get other types of constraints and to position this constraint as desired. In this particular case, we will set constraints between two elements by selecting the command and then a line and a circle. But what you can also do is set dimensional constraints by multi-selecting the circle . At any time, you may move the and line, and then clicking the Constraint icon cursor: the distance value will vary accordingly. Click for positioning the newly created dimensional constraint.
1. Select the Constraint icon toolbar.
from the Constraint
2. Select a first element. For example, a circle. The circle diameter is computed.
3. Select a second element. For example, a line. The relation between the two elements is reconsidered. In other words, the diameter of the circle is no longer displayed.
The non-minimal distance between the two selected elements will be computed according to the point selected on the circle. 4. Use the contextual menu (Tangency) to set a tangency constraint between the line and the circle. The circle and the line are now tangent. 5. Select the Constraint icon .
6. Select the line and click the Fix contextual command to prevent the line from moving. The line is fixed and the anchor, that is the fix symbol, appears. To unfix the line, you can use the Unfix contextual menu item.
A Projection/Intersection edge created by a constraint is hidden till the software detects a problem with this constraint. In this case, it appears to indicate the error to the user. When creating a coincidence constraint between a point in the current sketch and a 3D element outside the sketch, by default the constraint is created on the projection of this 3D element whenever possible. (The constraint is created on the intersection of this 3D element with the sketch plane only when there is no projection for the 3D element.) So if you want to create a constraint on the intersection of the 3D element with the sketch plane, you need create an intersection between this 3D element and the sketch plane, and then create the coincidence constraint with the intersected point.
The Shift key lets you deactivate a constraint (auto-detected via SmartPick). The Ctrl key lets you lock the constraint currently created and lets you create others. Selecting one element lets you create a dimensional constraint. Selecting two elements lets you create a distance or an angle constraint. If you want to create a symmetry or equidistance constraints on three elements, you must select Allow symmetry line in the contextual menu after having selected the two first elements.
You can also define constraints using the Constraint Definition dialog box, the command, or by means of the contextual command (right-click).
Defining Constraint Measure Direction

This task shows you how to define the measure direction as you create a dimensional constraint. For example, you will assign the horizontal measure direction to a constraint to be created between two circles.
Create two circles and create a constraint between them via the (Constraint Constraint icon toolbar).
1. Right-click the displayed constraint and display the contextual menu. 2. Select the Horizontal Measure Direction. The constraint is now positioned according to the horizontal direction.
Via the contextual menu, you can also create a radius/diameter constraint on half a profile that will then be used as a revolution profile. The constraint diameter will correspond to the shaft diameter.
The constraint measure direction may also be defined, and in other words modified, after the constraint was created. You will then simply select the constraint before displaying the contextual menu.
Creating Constraints via a Dialog Box

This task shows you how to set various geometrical constraints using a dialog box. For example, you can use the Constraint command to finalize your profile and set constraints consecutively. You may define several constraints simultaneously using the Constraint Definition dialog box, or by means of the contextual command (right-click).
If you want the constraints to be created permanently, make sure you activate the Dimensional constraints icon and/or the Geometrical constraints icon (depending on the type of constraint you want to create) from the Sketch Tools toolbar. If you do not activate these icons, the constraints will only be created temporarily.
Open the Constraint_DialBox.CATPart document. 1. Multi-select the elements to be constrained. For example, two lines.
2. Click the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box from the Constraint toolbar. icon
The Constraint Definition dialog box appears, indicating the types of constraints you can set between the selected lines (selectable options).
These constraints may be constraints to be applied either one per element (Length, Fix, Horizontal, Vertical) or constraints between two selected elements (Distance, Angle, Coincidence, Parallelism or Perpendicular). Multi-selection is available. If constraints already exist, they are checked in the dialog box, by default.
q q
Note that, by default, a diameter constraint is created on closed circles when checking the Radius/Diameter option. If you need a radius constraint, you just have to convert this constraint into a radius constraint by double-clicking it and choosing the Radius option.
3. Check the Perpendicular option to specify that you want the lines to always remain perpendicular to each others, whatever ulterior modifications. 4. Click OK. The perpendicularity symbol appears.
5. Now, select the bottom line and click the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box icon.
The Constraint Definition dialog box indicates you can set the line as a reference. 6. Check the Fix option in the dialog box and click OK. The anchor symbol appears indicating that the line is defined as a reference.
7. Select the corner on the left of the profile and click the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box icon . The Constraint Definition dialog box indicates you can choose the Radius/Diameter or Fix option. 8. Check the Radius/Diameter option in the Constraint Definition dialog box and click OK.
The radius value appears.
9. Multi-select both vertical lines and click the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box icon.
10. Check the Distance option in the Constraint Definition dialog box and click OK. The distance between both lines appears.
At any time after the constraint was created, you can modify the constraint measure direction and/or reference. See Defining Constraint Measure Direction for more details.
Modifying Constraints On/Between Elements

This task shows you how to edit geometrical constraints defined in the Sketcher or in the 3D area. Open the Constraint_Definition.CATPart document and double-click Sketch1 in the specification tree.
1. Select the right vertical line and click the Constraint command from the Constraint toolbar.
The Constraint Definition dialog box appears. 2. Check Length and Verticality.
3. Click OK to apply the modification. The line is vertical.
4. Select the left vertical line and click the Constraint command . The Constraint Definition dialog box appears, indicating that a verticality constraint is already defined for the line. 5. Uncheck Verticality to remove the verticality constraint.
6. Click OK to apply the modification. The symbol for verticality is removed. The profile now looks like this:
Modifying Constraint Definition

This task shows you how to edit constraints defined in the Sketcher or in the 3D area.
Open the Constraint_Definition.CATPart document and double-click Sketch1 in the specification tree.
1. If needed, double-click the sketch to be edited. You are now in the Sketcher.
2. Double-click the constraint you wish to edit. In this example, double-click the radius value, that is 35. You could also use the ConstraintDYS.object -> Definition... contextual menu item. The Constraint Edition dialog box is displayed. 3. Check the Reference option to make the constraint a reference. The Radius field is deactivated, indicating that the value is now driven by modifications to the sketch.
The radius value is displayed in brackets in the geometry area.
If you drag the corner, you can check that the radius value is updated.
4. Double-click the angle value, that is 110. In the dialog box that appears, enter 125 and click OK. The new value is displayed in the geometry area. It affects the angle. The sketch shape is also modified due to the radius previously converted into a measure.
5. Now, double-click the offset value between the bottom construction line and the profile bottom line. 6. The Constraint Edition dialog box is displayed. Click the More button to access additional information.
Reference: when un-checked, means that the constraint is driving. 7. Click Line5. Line 5 is highlighted in the geometry area. 8. Click Reconnect to redefine the offset constraint. You are going to choose a new reference. You can reconnect constraints by means of elements such as planes, edges and so forth.
9. Select Line6, that is the other construction line in the geometry and enter 50 in the Value field. 10. Click OK to apply the modification. The position of the profile is modified.
11. Quit the Sketcher. The application has integrated the modifications to the sketch. The value of the 3D measured constraint is updated.
12. Double-click the value of the offset constraint, that is 50. The Constraint Edition dialog box is displayed.
13. Enter 30 mm in the Value field. 14. Click OK to edit the offset.
In the 3D area, if you select the blue pad, the Edit Parameters contextual command allows you to display all parameters and constraints defined for that pad.
When you are in the Repeat mode (you double-clicked on the command for creating a constraint), if you try to edit an existing constraint while creating another constraint, the edition modification will only be taken into account when you have finished creating this other constraint.
About Diameter and Radius Constraints

You can obtain a radius constraint by editing a diameter constraint. You just need to double-click the diameter constraint and choose the radius option in the dialog box that appears. If you need to create a formula remember that: - the parameter corresponding to the radius or diameter constraint is referred to as "RadiusX.object" - this parameter always contains the radius value. For more information about formulas, refer to Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.

You can deactivate a constraint by right-clicking it and selecting the XXX.N.object -> Deactivate option from the contextual menu. In other words, this constraint will still appear on the sketch but will not behave as such. Deactivated constraints appear preceded by red brackets ( ). Conversely, to activate a constraint, use the Activate option from the contextual menu.
Auto-Constraining a Group of Elements

The Auto Constraint command detects possible constraints between the selected elements and imposes these constraints once detected. This task shows you how to apply this command on a profile crossed by a vertical line. Open the Constraint_Contact.CATPart document. 1. Select the profile to be constrained.
2. Click the Auto Constraint icon the Constraint toolbar.
from
The Auto Constraint dialog box is displayed. The Elements to be constrained field indicates all the elements detected by the application.
3.Click the Symmetry lines field and select the vertical line in the geometry area. All the elements in the profile that are symmetrical to the Line will be detected.
The Reference Elements option allows you to select references to be used to detect possible constraints between these references and the elements selected. Once the profile is fully constrained, the application displays it in green. You can switch between stacked and chained constraint presentation. 4. Click OK to constrain the sketch including the profile and the vertical line and, if needed, modify the location of the constraints.
The constraints created are: q Angle (111.918 and 137.023).

q q q q q q
Radius (10.721). Length (53.35). Horizontality. Tangency. Concentricity. Symmetry
The sketch is not displayed in green because it is not constrained in relation to external elements (edges, planes and so on).
Animating Constraints
This task shows you how constrained sketched elements react when you decide to make one constraint vary. In other words, you will assign a set of values to the same angular constraint and examine how the whole system is affected. You will actually see the piston working. Open the Animating_Constraints.CATPart document.
1. Select the angular value, that is 75.
2. Click the Animate Constraints icon from the Constraint toolbar.
The Animate Constraint dialog box is displayed. The First value and Last value fields let you define the maximum and minimum values for the constraint. The Number of step field defines the number of values you wish to assign to the constraint between the first and last values. 3. For instance, enter 15 as Number of step value.
4. Enter 115 degrees for the First value. The line and the rectangle have been moved.
5. Enter 246 degrees for the Last value. The line and the rectangle have been moved.
5. Check the Hide constraints box for hiding constraints. This can be useful when there are a lot of elements in the sketch.
6. Click the Loop button
7. Click the Run animation button to see how the sketch is affected by the different values assigned to the constraint. The command induces a clockwise rotation while moving the rectangle up and down.
8. Uncheck the Hide constraints option to display the constraints again. Once the maximum value is reached, that is 360 degrees, the sketch looks like this:
Now, let's have a closer look at the dialog box.
ACTIONS:
q
run back: shows the different constraint values starting from the last value. In our scenario, we saw a counterclockwise rotation. pause: stops the animation on the current value stops: stops the animation and assigns the first value to the constraint run: starts the command using the option defined (see below)
OPTIONS:
q
one shot: shows
the animation only once
reverse: shows the animation from the first to the last value, then from the last to the first value loop: shows the animation from the first to the last value, then from the last to the first and so on repeat: repeats the animation many times from the beginning to the end
Analyzing and Resolving Over-Constrained or Inconsistent Sketches
In evaluating geometry, the system considers the degree of freedom that it has. In two dimensions, points and lines have two degrees of freedom, circles have three and ellipses have five degrees of freedom. Fixed geometry will never be moved by the system, and has no degree of freedom. If all of the degrees of freedom of a geometry have been taken up by a consistent combination of dimensions and fixed geometry, that geometry is said to be iso-constrained (also known as welldefined). Geometry that still has some degrees of freedom is said to be under-constrained (also known as under-defined). Besides Status codes are given through a graphical way (colors) during the Sketch edition. The update error panel when returning in 3D explicitly gives them (check visualization of diagnostic in Tools -> Options > Sketcher -> Colors). Note that: q The system will mark all entities that are relevant to a problem rather than just the first item encountered. So, for instance, in the case of an inconsistent triangle with sides 10, 10 and 50, all three dimensions would be marked as INCONSISTENT.
q
The order in which the codes are listed below is significant. The system will test to see whether a geometry should have the status OVER-CONSTRAINED before considering whether it should be INCONSISTENT.
This chapter describes the over-constrained and inconsistent status codes calculated by the system and explain methods for solving any underlying problems with a Sketch.
OVER-CONSTRAINED
In many sketches, the user will specify more than the minimum required number of dimensions or constraints. In certain cases the system will ignore redundant constraints and solve the Sketch. In other cases it will mark parts of the Sketch as over-constrained. The descriptions below refer to consistent constraints and dimensions. Dimensions are said to be consistent if their values are satisfied by the position of the geometries. Geometry will be marked as over-constrained when it cannot be solved because there are too many dimensions acting on it for the degrees of freedom available. A dimension will be marked as over-dimensioned if it conflicts with one or more other dimensions and it is not possible to vary the value of the dimension and still find a consistent solution. For example, the
geometry and dimensions in the figure below will be over-constrained because the dimension values cannot be varied independently, even though they can all be satisfied by appropriate geometry positions.
However, the system is able to cope with certain over-constrained situations involving logical constraints. This is important because logical constraints such as parallelism are likely to be over-specified when a design is being built up interactively. For example, if two lines are defined to be parallel and then a distance is subsequently given between them the parallelism is then specified twice. The following is a list of some of the over-constrained configurations that can be solved: Multiple constraints between the same geometries. For instance, two circles can have several tangent constraints between them. Multiple coincident constraints between geometries of the same type. For instance, three points can each be made coincident to the other two. Multiple coincident constraints between lines and points. For instance, two lines can be made coincident, and their endpoints can be made coincident with the other line. Parallel and perpendicular constraints. Any combination of parallel and perpendicular constraints will be reduced to the minimum set required, and any excess ones will be ignored. Note that a distance dimension between two lines is treated as a parallel constraint, except that it will never be one of the constraints that is ignored. Symmetric constraints . There are many configurations where symmetric constraints will make other constraints redundant. These are recognized by the system. For example, if two lines are made symmetric two of the coincidence constraints between the points and the lines are redundant.
Resolving over-constrained cases

Over-constrained entities occur in "loops" where all of the entities in a loop conflict with each other.
Over-constrained entities can also occur when there are too many fixed geometries. To resolve over-constrained problems, the user will need to: q Set as references dimensions,
q q
Deactivate or remove constraints, Unfix geometry.
Note that the system will evaluate as much of the geometry as possible. It determines exactly which dimensions are contributing to the situation.
INCONSISTENT
This section describes when the inconsistent status codes can occur and how a user can modify the Sketch to avoid them. In general, the inconsistent status shows that the user is attempting to make a change to the Sketch that is too large. In this context, "large" is relative to the size of the Sketch. Parts of a Sketch may become inconsistent as a result of a number of different operations. The most common of these are as follows: q The user changes the value of a dimension. This will normally occur for cases where there would be large changes to one or more geometries.
q q q
The user adds a dimension or constraint to a Sketch, in order to move geometry. When dragging geometries, the user attempts to input a large transformation. When the geometric type of a use-edge is changed (geometry coming from the projection or intersection of a 3D geometry) When there are use-edge large positions or orientations changes.
The geometry has not been solved because: q No solution exists for the current values of dimensions.
q
The system cannot find a solution, even though a solution may exist with the current values of dimensions. This occurs when trying to make large changes to under-constrained sketches or to parametric curves (See section Over-constrained and Inconsistent on Parametric Curves below for further details). The system has not find a solution that respects the previous chirality. Chirality determines the way that geometry is positioned relative to the geometries to which it is dimensioned. A dimensioning scheme can often be satisfied by a number of different configurations. The system will always evaluate a new configuration that has the same chirality as the original geometry. It is important to realize that geometry in the system always has an original configuration, which is used for deciding the chirality.
Resolving inconsistent cases

If the inconsistent status code was a result of changing a dimension value, the problem will be resolved by changing the dimension back to its old value. However, in some cases the user may want to modify other parts of the Sketch to allow the change to be made. The following sections describe different ways that can be tried. When attempting to solve a problem, the user should focus on the geometries and dimensions in the Sketch with the inconsistent status code. In order to decide how to avoid the status code it is useful to check first if the problem comes from inconsistent dimensions. An example of this is a triangle with sides of length 50, 50 and 120.
(a) Inconsistent, will not be changed (b) Can be evaluated, will be changed In this case, the problem may be solved through: q Changing a dimension value,
q q
Setting a dimension as a reference, Deactivating a dimension.
Other cases occur on sketches that are not fully dimensioned. The following techniques can be used to solve the problem by helping the system to converge and find a solution: q Moving geometry.
q q
Changing dimension values. Adding additional constraints to reduce the degrees of freedom.
NOT CHANGED
The not changed status is used in the following cases: q When geometry becomes over-constrained or inconsistent, the system will not be able to position any other geometries that depend on it. These dependent geometries and their associated dimensions (and any others that depend on them) will be marked not changed.
q
Dimensions between two fixed geometry will be given the status code not changed. Dimension between two free or one free and one fixed geometry in the same set will be given the status code not changed.
Parametric Curves
This section is an overview of specific over-constrained and inconsistent problems on parametric curves. The Sketcher can manipulate points, lines, circles and ellipses but can also manage splines and nurbs. These parametric curves can be created: q Through an Intersection or Projection of a 3D geometry in the Sketch. After isolating it, constraint can be used to change the position of the curve. The system is unable to directly modify the shape because the curve, which have no internal freedoms that the system can control, have only three degrees of freedom,
q
By the Spline command. The curve is defined from other geometries. The parametric curve is said dependent. It is constructed so it passes through a series of control points.
Constraints and dimensions can be added between a dependent parametric curve and other geometries in the sketch. Solving problems will occur: q If the position of the defining geometry depends upon the position of the parametric curve, either directly or indirectly,
q
When the other geometry of the constraint or dimension is an other parametric curve or dependent parametric curve.
Always use the Constraint command without panel to specify where the constraint must be created on the curve. Through the Constraint with panel command, the selection points are not taken into account. On fully under-constrained sketches, the system can have difficulty choosing between changing the shape and/or moving its defining geometry especially when it supposes to make large changes. Moving the geometry will help the system find a consistent solution in that case.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Performing Operations on Profiles

Before you begin, make sure you are familiar with Tools For Sketching. The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for performing operations on profiles. Note that you can either click on a profile or use the Sketch tools toolbar.
Creating Corners Creates a rounded corner (arc tangent to two curves) between two lines using trimming operation. Creating Chamfers Creates a chamfer between two lines using trimming operation. Trimming Elements Trims two lines (either one element or all the elements) Trimming Multiple Elements Trims a few elements using a curve type element. Breaking and Trimming Quickly deletes elements intersected by other Sketcher elements using breaking and trimming operation. Closing Elements Closes circles, ellipses or splines using relimiting operation. Complementing an Arc (circle or ellipse) Creates a complementary arc. Breaking Elements Breaks a line using a point on the line and then a point that does not belong to the line. Creating Mirrored Elements Duplicates existing Sketcher elements using a line, a construction line or an axis.
Moving elements by symmetry Moves existing Sketcher elements using a line, a construction line or an axis. Translating Elements Performs a translation on 2D elements by defining the duplicate mode and then selecting the element to be duplicated. Multi-selection is not available. Rotating Elements Rotates elements by defining the duplicate mode and then selecting the element to be duplicated. Scaling Elements Scales an entire profile. In other words, you are going to resize a profile to the dimension you specify. Offseting Elements Duplicates a line, arc or circle type element. Projecting 3D Elements onto the Sketch Plane Projects edges (elements you select in the Part Design workbench) onto the sketch plane. Creating Silhouette Edges Creates silhouette edges to be used in sketches as geometry or
reference elements.
Intersecting 3D Elements with the Sketch Plane Intersects a face and the sketch plane. Copying/pasting Elements Sees how sketched elements behave when copying/pasting elements that were created via projection or intersection. Isolating Projected/Intersected Elements Isolates the elements resulting from the use of the Project 3D Elements Intersect 3D Elements icons. or
Performing a Quick Geometry Diagnosis Displays a quick diagnosis of a sketch geometry. Analyzing the Sketch Displays a global or individual status on the sketch and correct any problem.
Creating Output Features Creates an output of a selected sketch which can be published and updated independently in the 3D area.
You can sketch pre-defined profiles either via corresponding icons or via the menu bar (Insert/Operation/Predefined Profiles).
Creating Corners
Creating Corners
This task shows how to create a rounded corner (arc tangent to two curves) between two lines using trimming operation. You can create rounded corners between curves.
Open the Move_Corner.CATPart document.
1. Click the Corner icon
from the Operations toolbar.
The possible corner options are displayed in the Sketch tools toolbar: the Trim All Elements option command is activated by default.
2. Keep the All Elements option command first line. The selected line is highlighted.
active and select the
3. Select the second line. The second line is also highlighted, and the two lines are joined by the rounded corner which moves as you move the cursor. This lets you vary the dimensions of the corner.
4. Enter the corner radius value in the Sketch tools toolbar.
You can also click when you are satisfied with the corner dimensions. Both lines are trimmed at the points of tangency with the corner.
Creating Corners
OR
5. Select the Trim First Element option command before selecting both lines one after the other. The first line is trimmed.
OR
5. Select the No trim option command before selecting both lines one after the other. The corner is created. No line is trimmed.
OR 5. Select the Standard Lines Trim option command before selecting one after the other both lines. The corner is created. The trimmed lines are set as standard lines.
OR 5. Select the Construction Lines Trim option command before selecting one after the other both lines. The corner is created. The trimmed lines are set as construction lines.
By default, centers are created but if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog box. for this, go to Tools -> Options-> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab).).
Multi-Selection
Creating Corners
You can create several corners just by multi-selecting for example, the rectangle endpoints and enter a radius value in the Radius field (Sketch tools toolbar). Four corners are created at the same time with the same radius value.
Clicking on the Formula icon displays the parameter driving the radius value of the corners you have just created.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating Chamfers
Creating Chamfers
This task shows how to create a chamfer between two lines trimming either all, the first or none of the elements, and more precisely using one of the following chamfer definitions:
q q q
Angle/Hypotenuse Length1/Length2 Length1/Angle
You can create chamfers between any type of curves (lines, splines, arcs and so forth). Even if the curves are not consecutive, the chamfer will be created.
Open the Chamfer.CATPart document. 1. Click the Chamfer icon from the Operation toolbar.
Creating Chamfers
The possible chamfer options are displayed in the Sketch tools toolbar.
Trim All / First / No element
Angle-Hypotenuse / Length1-Length2 / Angle-Length1 definition
2. Select the first line. The selected line is highlighted. 3. Select the second line.
The second line is also highlighted, and the two elements are connected by a line representing the chamfer which moves as you move the cursor. This lets you vary the dimensions of the chamfer whose values appear in the Sketch tools toolbar.
Creating Chamfers
4. Click when you are satisfied with the dimensions of the chamfer. The chamfer with both elements trimmed is created.
Provided the Dimensional Constraint option command is active, the constraints will be created between what we call in the scenarios below the old intersection point and new end points of the lines.
OR
5. Click the Trim The First Element toolbar.
option command from the Sketch tools
6. Select first the line you wish to be trimmed and then the second line. The chamfer with one element trimmed is created.
OR
5. Click the No Trim 6. Select both lines.
option command from the Sketch tools toolbar.
The chamfer with no element trimmed is created and the original lines are kept.
Creating Chamfers
OR 1. Click the Standard Lines Trim 2. Select both lines.

q q
option command from the Sketch tools toolbar.
The chamfer is created and the two lines are trimmed up to the two lines intersection. The two new lines are created between the intersection and the trimmed extremity of the lines. These lines are set as standard lines.
OR 1. Click the Construction Lines Trim toolbar. 2. Select both lines.

q q
option command from the Sketch tools
The chamfer is created and the two lines are trimmed. The two new lines are created between the intersection and the trimmed extremity of the lines. These lines are set as construction lines.
Dimensioning the Edge Intersection point

You can create several chamfers just by multi-selecting for example, the rectangle endpoints and entering the definition parameters in order to define these chamfers (Sketch tools toolbar). Four chamfers are created at the same time with the same parameter values.
Creating Chamfers
Using the Length1/Length2 Definition
... Between Perpendicular Lines
Creating Chamfers
... Between Non-Perpendicular Lines
... Between Crossing Lines
... Between Non-Intersecting Lines
Creating Chamfers
Note: if the lines are parallels, the extremity points are used to compute the lengths because the virtual intersecting point does not exist.
... Between Intersecting Curves
Creating Chamfers
... Between Non-Intersecting Curves
Using the Length1/Angle Definition
... Between Non-Perpendicular Lines
Creating Chamfers
... Between Non-Intersecting Curves
Creating Chamfers with One Element Trimmed
Creating Chamfers with One Element Trimmed

This task shows how to create a chamfer and trim one element only.
1. Click the Chamfer icon
2. Click the Trim First Element icon
3. First select the line you wish to be trimmed. The selected line is highlighted. 4. Select the second line. The second line is also highlighted, and the two elements are connected by a line representing the chamfer which moves as you move the cursor. This lets you vary the dimensions of the chamfer. 5. Click when you are satisfied with the dimensions of the chamfer. The chamfer is created.
Creating Chamfers with No Element Trimmed
Creating Chamfers with No Elements Trimmed

This task shows how to create a chamfer and trim no element.
1. Click the Chamfer icon
2. Click the No trim icon
3. First select the line. The selected line is highlighted. 4. Select the second line. The second line is also highlighted, and the two elements are connected by a line representing the chamfer which moves as you move the mouse. This lets you vary the dimensions of the chamfer. 5. Click when you are satisfied with the dimensions of the chamfer. The chamfer is created and the original lines are still displayed.
Trimming Elements
Trimming Elements
Trimming two elements
This task shows how to trim two lines (either one element or all the elements). You can create rounded corners between consecutive lines, arcs, circles and all types of curves. Create two intersecting lines.
1. Click the Trim icon toolbar.
from the Operations
The Trim toolbar options display in the Sketch tools toolbar. The Trim All option is the command activated by default.
2. Select the first line. The selected element is highlighted.
Trimming Elements
3. Position the cursor on the element to be trimmed. The second element is highlighted too, and both lines are trimmed. If you position the cursor on the same first element, it will be trimmed at the location of the second position. The location of the relimitation depends on the location of the cursor. 4. Click when you are satisfied with the relimitation of the two lines. First example
Second example
Third example
Trimming Elements
In multi-selection mode, no extrapolation is done by trimming command. If you trim an element created from a projection or an intersection, then this element's extremities are not constrained anymore to follow the extremities from the element they are issued from. If the extremity point of the trimmed line is constrained, or if the extremity point of the trimmed line is a geometrical element (not a construction element), then a coincidence constraint will be created between this point and the trimmed line.
Trimming one element

This task shows how to trim just one element. Create two intersecting lines. You can also create two intersecting circles. 1. Click the Trim icon toolbar. The Trim toolbar options display in the Sketch tools toolbar. from the Operations
2. Click the Trim One Element option 3. Select the first line or circle. The selected line or circle is highlighted.
Trimming Elements
4. Move the cursor to the second line or circle. The first line or circle selected is trimmed. If you select the same first element, it will be trimmed at the location of the second selection. The location of the trim depends on the location of the cursor: 5. Click when you are satisfied with the relimitation of the two lines.
First example
Second example
Breaking & Trimming
Breaking and Trimming

This task shows how to quickly delete elements intersected by other Sketcher elements using breaking and trimming operations.
Open the Quick_Trim.CATPart document.
1. Click the Quick Trim icon
from the
Operation toolbar (Relimitations subtoolbar).
The possible trim option commands are displayed in the Sketch tools toolbar.
2. Click the Rubber In option command in the Sketch tools toolbar. 3. Select the arc you wish to be deleted from the curve type element. In this case, select a circle.
Breaking & Trimming
The arc of circle is relimited as shown here.
4. Click the Rubber out option command in the Sketch tools toolbar. 5. Select the arc you wish not to be deleted. In this case, select a circle.
Breaking & Trimming
The arc of circle is deleted as shown here.
6. Click the Break option command the Tools toolbar.
in
7. Select the part of the element you wish to be broken (at the nearest intersecting point).
Breaking & Trimming
Now you can select and modify each broken part of the selected element as desired.
If you need to delete several elements, you can double-click the icon and delete the elements one after the other.
You cannot use the Quick Trim and/or the Break commands for composite curves (which are projected/intersected elements composed of several curves). However, you can work around this functional limitation by using the Trim command (this enables you to get the same results for composite curves than by performing the Quick Trim and the Break operations).
Closing Elements
Closing Elements
This task shows how to close circles, ellipses or splines using relimiting operation.
Create a three point arc.
1. Click the Close icon the Operation toolbar (Relimitations subtoolbar).
from
2. Select one or more elements to be relimited. For example, a three point arc.
The arc is now closed.
Closing Elements
In the case of a spline that was relimited by using the Trim icon to its original limitation.
, the spline is set
Spline after it was relimited
Spline after you clicked the Close icon
Complementing an Arc
Complementing an Arc (Circle or Ellipse)

This task shows how to complement an arc (circle or an ellipse).
Create a three points arc.
1. Click on the arc to be complemented to select it. For example, the three points arc.
2. To complement the arc you can either

q
Click the Complement icon from the Operation toolbar (Relimitations subtoolbar).
or right-click on the selected item and select Complement in the contextual menu > Circle.1 object. or go to Insert -> Operation -> Relimitations and select Complement.
Complementing an Arc
3. The complementary arc appears.
Breaking Elements
Breaking Elements
This task shows how to break a line using a point on the line and then a point that does not belong to the line. The Break command lets you break any type of curve, except composite curves (see note below). You can use any Sketcher element to break curves.
1. Click the Break icon toolbar.
from the Operations
2. Select the line to be broken.
3. Select the breaking element, that is a point.
The selected element is broken at the selection point. The line is now composed of two movable segments.
1. Click the Break icon Operations toolbar.
from the
Breaking Elements
2. Select the line to be broken. 3. Select the breaking point.
The application projects the point onto the line and creates another point.
The line is broken at the projected point. The line is now composed of two segments that can be moved.
Using the Break icon, you can also isolate points: q if you select a point that limits and is common to two elements, the point will be duplicated.
q
if you select a coincident point, this point becomes independent (is no more assigned a coincidence constraint).
You cannot break composite curves (which are projected/intersected elements composed of several curves). However, you can work around this functional limitation by projecting or intersecting the composite curve elements and break these items using one another.
Breaking/Trimming Use-Edges
This task shows you how to break or trim imported elements (projection, intersection, offset). The created use edge is only changed into construction mode but it is unchanged. For the purpose of this scenario an example of trimming element is used. 1. Create a conic. 2. Exit Sketcher. 3. In Part design workbench, create a new sketch based on the conic. 4. Project the conic. 5. Create two lines as shown here.
6. Click the Trim the Operations toolbar. icon from
7. Select the Use Edge between the two lines. 8. Select a first line. An arc is created based on the useedge and the original use-edge is put in construction mode as shown here.
9. Click the Trim icon. 10. Select the arc between the two lines. 11. Select the second line.
When trimming a curve the selected location on the curve is important as it determines the curve part that will be kept.
The mark, which is put in construction mode, and the arc are displayed in the specification tree.
When deleting the use edge (projection, intersection, etc...), all the arcs related to it are deleted too. The edition of an arc is only possible in the Sketcher workbench. After a trim operation, for instance, the diagnosis is not modified and if the sketch is isoconstraint, it will stay iso-constraint.
Trimming Multiple Elements

The purpose of this task is to trim a few elements using a curve type element. Multi-select the elements to be trimmed.
Click the Trim icon toolbar.
from the Operations
Select the trimming curve to be used.
Click to locate which parts of the elements will be kept and which parts of the elements will be trimmed.
If one element does not intersect the trimming curve, this element will be either totally deleted or kept (in accordance with the location of this element). For instance, on the example above, the line above the trimming curve is kept, the line below the trimming curve is deleted.
Creating Mirrored Elements

This task shows you how to repeat existing Sketcher elements using a line, a construction line or an axis. In this particular case, we will duplicate a circle.
1. Select the circle to be duplicated by symmetry.
2. Click the Mirror icon toolbar.
from the Operations
3. Select the axis you previously created.
The selected circle is duplicated and a symmetry constraint is created on the condition you previously activated the Dimensional Constraint option from the Sketch tools toolbar.
You can also use multi-selection. Drag the cursor and create a trap. Then select the symmetry axis.
Moving Element by Symmetry
Moving Elements by Symmetry

This task shows you how to move existing Sketcher elements using a line, a construction line or an axis. In this particular case we will move a rectangle by symmetry. The former functionality associated to this command is now available through the Mirror command, which duplicates elements by symmetry.
1. Create a rectangle and an axis.
2. Click the Symmetry icon from the Transformation sub-toolbar in the Operation toolbar. 3. Select the rectangle and the axis you have created.
The rectangle has been moved by symmetry according to the axis.
Two sides selection

1. Create an axis. 2. Create a rectangle on one side of the Axis and a circle on the other side.
3. Click the Symmetry icon from the Transformation sub-toolbar in the Operation toolbar.
4. Select the rectangle and the circle. 5. Select the axis. In order to be able to multiselect elements, the axis length must be quite important.
The symmetry is created and the two elements have been taken into account.
Applying constraints to symmetrical elements
1. Create a rectangle and an axis. 2. Select the icon Constraint from the Constraint toolbar. 3. Select one of the rectangle element and the axis. 4. Click to create the constraint. The constraint and its value are displayed in the geometry area.
5. Click the Symmetry icon from the Transformation sub-toolbar in the Operation toolbar. 6. Select the rectangle and the axis.
The rectangle has been moved by symmetry according to the axis. Note that: q As the constraint is applied on an axis, the constraint is kept after the symmetry.
q q
The constraint is also kept when it is applied to a fixed element. In the case of Use-Edges, the element becomes isolated.
Only internal constraints are kept after a symmetry operation.
Translating Elements
This task will show you how to perform a translation on 2D elements by defining the duplicate mode and then selecting the element to be duplicated. Multi-selection is not available. The application provides a powerful command for translating elements. You may either perform a simple translation (by moving elements) or create several copies of 2D elements.
Translating elements also means re-computing distance, angle and/or length constraint values, if needed. Be careful: only non-fixed elements are updated.
Open the Transform_replace01.CATPart document.
1. Click the Translation icon
from the Operation
toolbar (Transformation subtoolbar).
The Translation Definition dialog box appears and will remain displayed all along your translation creation. The Duplicate mode option is activated by default, which means that the 2D element(s) you select will be copied. If you uncheck the Duplicate mode box, the element will be moved.
2. For the purpose of this scenario, leave the Duplicate mode option activated, and leave the Instance(s) field set to 1 to indicate the number of copies you need.
3. Select the Keep internal constraints box to specify that you want to preserve in the translation the internal constraints applied to the selected elements. 4. Leave the Keep external constraints box unselected. Any external constraint existing between the selected elements and external elements will be disregarded in the translation.
5. Select the element(s) to translate. You may either select one 2D element, or multi-select the entire 2D geometry by trapping it with the mouse as shown below.
6. Click the translation vector start point or select an existing one.
7. You can define the translation length in the geometry area, using the mouse. For more precise results, enter a specific value for the translation length in the Translation Definition dialog box. For example, enter 30 mm. You can use SmartPick to keep lines horizontal.
Optionally, you can check Snap Mode in the dialog box and set the value to 30 mm: when you then drag the cursor to choose the position of the translated element, it will translated by 30 mm steps.
8. Click OK in the Translation Definition dialog box. The translation length is now set.
9. In the geometry area, drag the cursor to choose the translation position and then click.
The element is translated. You can notice that the internal constraints were preserved in the translated element (four tangency constraints, and a parallelism constraint), whereas the external constraint (an offset constraint) was not.
The Undo elements.
command is available from the toolbar, while you are translating
When translating external constraints: r geometrical constraints are killed.

r
dimensional constraints are preserved but revalued.
Rotating Elements
Rotating Elements
This task will show you how to rotate elements by defining the duplicate mode and then selecting the element to be duplicated. In this scenario, the geometry is simply moved. But note that, you can also duplicate elements with the Rotation command.
Rotating elements also means re-computing distance values into angle values, if needed. Be careful: only non-fixed elements are updated.
1. Click the Rotation icon
from the
Operations toolbar (Transformation subtoolbar).
The Rotation Definition dialog box appears and will remain displayed all along the rotation. 2. De-activate the Duplicate mode, if needed. If you keep it active, you will be allowed to define the number of the instances you wish to create in the meantime.
Rotating Elements
3. Select the geometry to be rotated. Here, multi-select the entire profile.
4. Select or click the rotation center point. You can also enter a value in the fields displayed (Sketch tools toolbar). 5. Select or click a point to define the reference line that will be used for computing the angle.
Rotating Elements
6. Select or click a point to define an angle.
If you have check snap mode in the dialog box and set the value to 5 degrees, then when you drag the cursor to rotate the element it rotates by 5 degrees steps. You can also enter a value for the rotation angle in the Rotation Definition dialog box
7. Click OK in the Rotation Definition dialog box to end the rotation. Rotating elements also means re-computing distance values into angle values, if needed. Be careful: only non-fixed elements are updated.
Internal constraints are preserved External constraints: r geometrical constraints are killed
r
dimensional constraints are modified and revalued.
Rotating Elements
Scaling Elements
Scaling Elements
This task will show you how to scale an entire profile. In other words, you are going to resize a profile to the dimension you specify. Scaling elements also means re-computing distance values, if needed. Note that angle values will not be modified. Be careful: only non-fixed elements are updated.
1. Click the Scale icon from the Operation toolbar (Transformation subtoolbar).
Note that you can first select either the geometry or the scaling icon. If you select the Scale icon first, you cannot multi-select elements. The Scale Definition dialog box appears and will remain displayed all along your operation. 2. Select the element(s) to be scaled.
Scaling Elements
The value fields appear in the Sketch tools toolbar.
3. Enter the center point value in the Sketch tools toolbar or click the center point on the geometry.
Scaling Elements
4. Enter 2 as Scale Value in the displayed Scale Definition dialog box.
5. Click OK to validate.
Scaling Elements
Internal constraints are preserved but revalued. External constraints: r geometrical constraints are killed
r
dimensional constraints are modified and revalued.
Offsetting Elements
Offsetting Elements
This task shows how to duplicate an element of the following type: line, arc or circle.
You can also duplicate by offset one of the following: an edge, a face (all the boundaries of this face are offset) or a geometrical feature (for example, by selecting a join or another sketch in the specification tree).
Select a topic: q Offset 2D geometry,

q
Use offset tools, Offset 3D geometry, Modify a 3D geometry offset.
Offsetting 2D Geometry
Create a line. 1. Click the Offset icon from the
Operations toolbar (Transformation subtoolbar). OR 1. Select the Insert->Operation>Transformation->Offset command from the menu bar.
2. There are two possibilities, depending on whether the line you want to duplicate by offset is already selected or not: q If the line is already selected, the line to be created appears immediately.
q
If the line is not already selected, select it. The line to be created appears.
Offsetting Elements
3. Select a point or click where you want the new element to be located. The selected line is duplicated. Both lines are parallel.
If you were offsetting circles or arcs, these two circles would be concentric. If the Geometrical Constraints icon is active in the Sketch tools toolbar when offsetting an element, constraints are automatically created, based on the type of element you are offsetting. Thus, if you move an element, or change its geometry, the other element will be moved or modified accordingly.
Using offset tools

You can also apply one or more offset instances to profiles made of several elements: q by using tangency propagation or point propagation,
q q
by creating an offset element that is tangent to the first one, by creating several offset instances.
This is not true for generated elements (Generative Drafting workbench). If the multi-selected elements do not make up a closed profile, the offset will be applied to the selected elements only. As a result, you will have as many offset elements as the first multi-selected elements. Previews are not available when creating several offset instances (i.e. when the value in the Instance(s) field of the Sketch tools toolbar is higher than one).
Open the Offset.CATPart document.
Offsetting Elements
1. Click the Offset icon
from the
Operations toolbar (Transformation subtoolbar).
2. Select the desired option from the displayed Sketch tools toolbar and if needed, enter the desired number of instances. (These options are described further down in this section). 3. Select the element you want to offset. The element to be created is previewed. 4. Select a point or click where you want the new element to be located.
To offset a single element: Activate the No Propagation icon.
To offset an element and elements which are tangent to it: Activate the Tangent Propagation icon.
Offsetting Elements
To offset an element using Point Propagation: Activate the Point Propagation icon.
To offset an element symmetrically to another: Activate the Both Side Offset icon.
To offset and duplicate multiple elements: Type the number of elements you want to create in the Instance(s) field.
Offsetting Elements
Note that if you position the cursor outside the zone that is allowed for creating a given element, the symbol appears.
You can create offset geometry using 2D component elements and dress-up elements (axis lines, center lines and threads). Note that by doing this, you will not create offset 2D components or dress-up elements, but you will create offset geometry.
q q q
You can offset them only element by element. You cannot offset complex curves. This will only work if you first select the command and then the element to offset.
Offsetting 3D Geometry
You can create an associative offset with a 3D element. Open the Offsetpad.CATPart document.
Offsetting Elements
1. Click the Offset icon
from the Operations toolbar (Transformation subtoolbar).
2. Select the 3D surface to offset. The profile to be created is previewed.
3. You can do one of the following: q specify the offset position and value in the Sketch tools toolbar and type Enter to validate.
drag the cursor till the correct offset appears in the sketch, then click to validate the position.
Offsetting Elements
The offset is created. It appears as Mark.1 in the specification tree:
The offset value is displayed.
If you want to edit the offset value, you can double-click it and enter a new value in the dialog box which is displayed.
When offsetting a face, if there is an intersection between the face and the sketch plane, by default, it is this intersection which is offset (rather than the projection of the face edges). In this case, if you want to offset the projection of the face edges, you can modify the offset as explained in the section below. You can offset the intersection between a face and a sketch plane without explicitly creating this intersection. lf you offset a multi-domain face, the face that is closer from the cursor is offset.
Offsetting Elements
If you isolate a composite mark, as many simple geometry elements as the mark was containing are created, and associativity will not be available anymore.
Modifying a 3D Geometry Offset

1. Double-click the offset in the specification tree or on the sketch. The Offset Definition dialog box is displayed.
In this dialog box, you can modify the offset definition. q Parallel corner type: specifies whether corners should be round or sharp (when applicable). Parameters These options let you specify the offset parameters. q Object to offset: indicates which 3D element is offset. To offset another element, select this field and then select the new element in the sketch.
q
Offset value: indicates the offset value. You can modify it by typing a new value in this field. Offset mode: when offsetting a face, specify whether you want to intersect and offset or to project and offset the face by selecting the appropriate option from the list.
Offsetting Elements
Propagation These options let you offset a 3D element using the propagation of an edge. q Type: specifies what type of offset propagation should be applied to the selected reference element: No propagation, Tangent propagation, or Point propagation. Click the appropriate icon.
q
Reference element: indicates which edge should be used as a reference for the propagation. Select this field and then select the reference edge in the sketch.
2. In the Offset value field, type 20mm.
3. Choose Project and offset from the Offset mode field. 4. Click OK to validate. The offset is modified.
q q q q
Only 3D elements can be offset with associativity. There is no propagation on 3D edges. Typing a negative offset value reverses the offset direction. Multi-domain elements cannot be offset in one shot.
Creating Spline Offsets

This task shows you how to create an associative offset based on an existing spline.
1. Create a spline.
2. Select the Offset command from the Transformation subtoolbar in the Operation toolbar
3. Click the spline. 4. Click in the geometry area to create the offset.
The offset is created as long as a new feature OffsetCurve which is visible in the specification tree. Note that: q The visualization of the offset implies an automatic creation of elements, which are automatically put in no show and construction
mode.
q
These elements are put in no show mode only if the Geometrical Constraint option in the Sketch tools toolbar is activated. These elements are also deleted if the offset or the original spline are deleted. The created offset will be associative with the original spline only if the Dimensional Constraint option in the Sketch tools toolbar is activated, see Editing Spline Offset.
When creating an offset of a spline, a constraint is automatically created and the offset cannot be deleted. Both the spline and the constraint can be edited.
Projecting 3D Elements
Projecting 3D Elements onto the Sketch Plane

This task shows how to project edges (elements you select in the Part Design workbench) onto the sketch plane. 1. Click the Project 3D Elements icon the Operations toolbar (3D Geometry subtoolbar). from
2. Multi-select the edges you wish to project onto the sketch plane.
The edges are projected onto the sketch plane. These projections are yellow (in others words, you cannot move them).
Projecting 3D Elements
You can apply the Relimitation and Chamfer
, Corner
commands on projections.
If you select a face, the edges are projected.
q q
Projected elements are associative except in the case of a multiple distinct marks. A mark composed of several associated elements is managed as a single curve (you can constraint it). If you isolate a composite mark, as many simple geometry elements as the mark was containing are created, associativity will not be available anymore. A multi-domain face projection does not create a single composite mark (in this case each edge is projected).
Projecting 3D Silhouette Edges

This task shows how to create silhouette edges to be used in sketches as geometry or reference elements. You can only create a silhouette edge from a canonical surface whose axis is parallel to the Sketch plane.
Open the Silhouette_Edge.CATPart document.
1. Select Plane1 and go into Sketcher workbench. 2. Click the 3D Silhouette Edges icon from the Operation toolbar (3D Geometry subtoolbar).
3. Select the canonical surface.
The silhouette edges are created onto the sketch plane. These silhouette edges are yellow if they are associative with the 3D. You cannot move or modify them but you can delete one of them which means deleting one trace independently from the other.
You can select one of the two
intersections and set it into the Construction mode: You can create geometry and constraints using this intersection:
You can re-limit this created silhouette edge using the geometry:
The silhouette command generated one or two marks (edges) if one mark is made of more that one curves. If those curves do not have the same geometrical support, the resulting silhouette edges will not be associative (as for Projection/Intersection commands).
q q
Silhouette edges are associative except in the case of a multiple distinct marks. A mark composed of several associated elements is managed as a single curve (you can constrain it).
Intersecting 3D Elements
Intersecting 3D Elements with the Sketch Plane

This task shows how to intersect a face and the sketch plane. Open the Intersection_Canonic.CATPart document.
1. Select the face of interest.
2. Click the Intersect 3D Elements icon
from
the Operations toolbar (3D Geometry subtoolbar).
The software computes and displays the intersection between the face and the sketch plane. The intersection is yellow (in others words, you cannot move it).
Intersecting 3D Elements
You can apply the Trim Chamfer
, Corner
and
commands on intersections.
q q
Intersected element are associative apart in the case of a multiple distinct marks. A mark composed of several associated elements is managed as a single curve (you can constraint it). If you isolate a composite mark, as many simple geometry elements as the mark was containing are created, associativity will not be available anymore. If the intersected geometry is a plane face and there is no intersection between this face and the sketcher plane, the resulting intersection is an infinite line.
Copying/Pasting Elements
This task shows how sketched elements behave when you copy and paste them. More specifically, you will learn about: q copying/pasting elements with H and V constraints on their absolute axis
q
copying/pasting projected or intersected elements
For general information on copy/paste, see the Infrastructure User's Guide.
Copying/pasting elements with H and V constraints on their absolute axis

This task shows how to copy/paste elements along with the horizontal and vertical constraints on their absolute axis. Open the Copy_paste_H_and_V.CATPart document.
1. You have several options: q To duplicate the rectangle and its H and V directions: multiselect the rectangle and its origin, and copy the selected elements.
To duplicate the rectangle, its H and V directions, and the distance constraints which exist between the rectangle and its origin: multi-select the rectangle and the distance constraints (do not select the origin), and copy the selected elements.
In other words, if you want to copy an element along with its H and V direction while keeping the constraints which exist between the copied element and its origin, you do not need to, and you should not, select the origin. Selecting the constraints is enough. If you select the origin, the constraints will not be kept.
2. Paste these elements. The elements are pasted over the elements you copied. You can move the pasted elements (if you want to view them, for example).
Copying/pasting projected or intersected elements

This task shows how sketched elements that were created via projection or intersection behave when copying/pasting them.
1. Copy the projected or the intersected element, using the method described above. 2. Paste this element. External references are deleted: q Constraints on external geometry are deleted.
q
Projections/Intersections are isolated: each trace is replaced with an equivalent geometrical element. You cannot project or intersect the pasted element. The pasted element is not associative.
q q
Isolating Elements
Isolating Projections and Intersections

This task shows how to isolate the elements resulting from the use of the Project 3D Elements or Intersect 3D Elements icons. 1. Select the 3D curve you wish to isolate. 2. Select Insert -> Operation -> 3D Geometry -> Isolate command from the menu bar.
The curve is no longer linked to the initial geometry, which means that you can edit it the way you wish. 3. For example, drag and drop the curve to the desired location.
Once isolated, the curve becomes white. You can edit the curve graphical properties using the Edit -> Properties command.
Performing a Quick Geometry Diagnosis

This task explains how to display a quick diagnosis of a sketch geometry. You will be provided an overall status of the sketch geometry as a whole, so that can correct any constraint-related problem accordingly. Open the Sketch_Analysis.CATPart document. 1. Click the Sketch Solving Status icon toolbar). in the Tools toolbar (2D Analysis Tools sub-
The Sketch Solving Status dialog box is displayed. It indicates the overall status of the sketch geometry. In this case, the sketch is under-constrained.
On the sketch as well as in the specification tree, under-constrained and overconstrained geometrical elements (lines, points, etc.) are highlighted, and isoconstrained elements are displayed in a different color. This enables you to see easily which items are under/ over-constrained, and which are iso-constrained. In our example, all geometrical items are under-constrained; they are therefore displayed in red. There is a tangency constraint which is iso-constrained; it is displayed in green. If you wish, you can click the Sketch Analysis icon in the dialog box to view a more in-depth diagnosis specifying which individual geometrical elements in the sketch are under-constrained (under-defined), over-constrained (over-defined) or iso-contrained (well defined).
2. Click the Close button to close the Sketch Solving Status dialog box. 3. From the specification tree, expand the Sketch.1 and then the Geometry nodes. 4. Multi-select all items under the Geometry node, and right-click them. 5. Select Selected objects > Fix from the contextual menu. All elements are now fixed.
6. Click the Sketch Solving Status icon again. The Sketch Solving Status dialog box now indicates that the sketch is iso-constrained.
Analyzing the Sketch

This task explains how to analyze sketched geometry as well as projections/ intersections, and how to diagnose geometry. You will be provided either a global or individual status and will be allowed to correct any problem stated in the status.
Analyzing sketched geometry

Open the Sketch_Analysis.CATPart document. 1. Select Tools -> Sketch Analysis from the menu bar. OR 1. Click the Sketch Analysis icon toolbar). in the Tools toolbar (2D Analysis Tools sub-
The Sketch Analysis dialog box appears. It contains three tabs: Geometry, Projections / Intersections and Diagnostic. Note that on the sketch itself, some geometrical items and constraints are highlighted so that you can see them easily.
2. Click the Geometry tab.
The information on this tab helps you to know whether the sketch geometry is valid. General Status: analyzes several elements globally. Detailed Information: provides a detailed status/comment on each geometrical element of the sketch. Corrective Actions: according to the analyzed element you select and which is not correct, you will be able to: q turn this element into a construction element,
q q
close a profile that is not, erase a disturbing element, hide all constraints on the sketch, hide all construction geometries on the sketch and in the detailed information area of the Geometry tab.
q q
3. In the Detailed Information table, select the Point.11 item and then click the Construction mode icon to turn the standard mode point into a construction mode point and solve the problem.
Diagnosing geometry
4. Click the Diagnostic tab.
The information on this tab displays a full diagnosis of a sketch geometry. It provides a global analysis of the sketch as a whole, and specifies whether individual geometrical elements in the sketch are under-constrained (under-defined), over-constrained (overdefined) or iso-contrained (well defined): Solving Status: provides a quick overall analysis of the sketch geometry. Detailed Information: provides a detailed status on each constraint and geometrical element of the sketch, and lets you know what type of element it is (geometry, constraint). Actions: according to the analyzed element you select, you will be able to: q hide all constraints on the sketch and in the detailed information area,
q
hide all construction geometries on the sketch and in the detailed information area of the Diagnostic tab.
If you select items from the Detailed Information table, they will be highlighted on the sketch, which enables you to identify them easily. To solve constraint-based problems in the sketch, you need to edit the sketch directly. 5. Close the Sketch Analysis dialog box. 6. Right-click the Point.3 item in the sketch or from the specification tree, and select Point.3 object > Fix from the contextual menu. 7. Repeat this operation for the Line.1, Circle.1, Line.2 and Point.8 items. 8. Re-open the Sketch Analysis dialog box and click the Diagnostic tab. You can notice that the items you fixed are now iso-constrained.
Analyzing projections/intersections
Open the Analyse.CATPart document.
9. Open the Sketch Analysis dialog box again. 10. Click the Projections / Intersections tab.
The information on this tab lets you know the status of all use-edges: projections (implicit or non-implicit), intersections, etc... Detailed Information: provides a detailed status/comment on each projection or intersection, on constraints and so forth. Corrective Actions: according to the analyzed element you select and which is not correct, you will be able to: q isolate geometry
q q q q q
activate/deactivate a constraint erase geometry replace 3D geometry hide all constraints on the sketch, hide all construction geometries on the sketch and in the detailed information area of the Projections/Intersections tab.
You can see that all construction and intersection elements for this part have a valid status so you don't have to do anything.
Creating Output Features

This task shows you how to create an Output Feature of a geometry sketch, which can be published and updated independently from the sketch within the 3D. Open the Output.CATPart document.
The part is displayed as shown here.
1. Double-click the Sketch.1 to edit it. 2. Click the Output icon from Feature the Tools toolbar. 3. Select the Spline.1.
q
The created feature will be integrated as an independent element both into the Parent/Children view and the specification tree.

q
Once the output is created the spline is automatically put in construction mode with a specific visualization. It is recommended to keep the output in construction mode to avoid confusion, in the 3D area, between the sketch and the output.
Applying graphic properties

1. Right-click the Spline from which you created the output. 2. Select Properties. The Properties dialog box is displayed. 3. Select the Graphic tab. 4. Change the color and the line thickness to distinguish the Spline from other elements. 5. Exit the Sketcher workbench. Unlike in the Sketcher, the Output can now be visualized with the Spline properties it has been applied to.
Multi-selecting elements
1. Go to the Generative Shape Design workbench. 2. Click the Multisections icon from Surface the Surfaces toolbar. The Multi-section Surface Definition dialog box is displayed. 3. Select Sketch 4 and Sketch 5. 4. Select the Spline tab. 5. Select the Output feature from the specification tree. 6. Click OK in the Multisection Surface Definition dialog box.
The surface is created.
Re-editing the sketch

q
Modify any of the Spline.2 control points.
The modifications applied to the spline have no repercussions on the surface which is based on the output.
q q q
You cannot apply an output feature from a degenerated element. You can only publish elements that belong to the same sketch. It is not possible to copy, cut or paste an output.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Editing Profiles
Editing Profiles
The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for editing 2D geometry. For information about applying constraints, refer to Setting Constraints.
Modifying Element Coordinates Double-click to modify the sketch coordinates and thereby modify the feature defined on this sketch. Editing a Spline: Double-click on the spline to edit it. Editing a Connecting Curve: Double-click on the connecting curve to edit it. Editing an element Parents/Children and Constraints Right-click on the element end select Parents/Children... option in the contextual menu. Editing Projection/Intersection Marks Edit Projection/Intersection Marks definition and modify their import properties. Transforming Profiles Use selection to edit the profile shape and size, modify the profile location (via external constraints). Performing Auto-Search on a Profile Use the menu bar to auto-search for the different elements of a profile.
Editing Profiles
Replacing Geometry Replace geometry in the 2D and visualize it in the 3D. Deleting Sketcher Elements Use selection to delete elements. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Modifying Element Coordinates
Modifying Element Coordinates

This task shows you how to modify a line. Modifying your sketch coordinates will affect the feature defined on this sketch. In other words, associativity remains valid. Create a line. Profiles are not considered as entities when it comes to editing them. To edit a profile, you will need to edit the sub-elements composing it. Multi-selection is not allowed for editing Sketcher elements.
1. Double-click the line you wish to edit. The Line Definition dialog box appears indicating the line end point coordinates.
2. Enter new coordinates for changing the end points and/or the length and angle. 3. Check the Construction Elements option, if you wish to change the line type. 4. Press OK.
Remember that the Edit -> Properties command, or Properties option in the contextual menu lets you access and edit sketch properties (properties dialog box)
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Performing Auto-Search on Profiles

This task shows how to auto-search for the different elements of a profile. Open the Auto_Search.CATPart document.
1. Select one element of the whole profile. 2. Select Edit -> Auto Search from the menu bar.
Element selected:
Resulting auto-searched profile:
The unambiguous part of the profile is highlighted.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugbt0106.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 5:23:40 AM
Transforming Profiles
This task shows you how to q transform profile shape and size using the Selection command.
q q
transform a profile position according to a pre-defined solving mode. transform a profile position using existing external constraints.
Transforming By Moving
Minimum Move
You will move as few elements as possible. Go to Tools -> Options > Sketcher (Solving mode switch button) and make sure you activated the Minimum move option from the Dragging of the element dialog box. 1. Click the Select icon .
2. Drag the right line of the profile anywhere to the right. The profile is stretched to the right if you stretch it to the right.
3. Click one corner of the profile and stretch this profile diagonally.
Standard Mode
You will move as many elements as possible. Go to Tools -> Options -> Sketcher (Solving mode switch button) and make sure you activated the Standard mode option from the Dragging of the element dialog box.
1. Click the Select icon
2. Drag the right line of the profile anywhere to the right. The profile is stretched both to the right and to the top even if you stretch it to the right.
Relaxation
Go to Tools -> Options -> Sketcher (Solving mode switch button) and make sure you activated the Relaxation option from the Dragging of the element dialog box.
You can also edit the profile shape and size using commands such as edit, trim If you want the profile to revert to its original shape, click the Undo command .
and break
If the Grid option is on (Tools -> Options -> Sketcher), you can also modify the profile using the grid. In this case, and for example if the Zoom is on, the point you select will be automatically repositioned at the closest grid intersection point. The profile new position may result awkward.
Transforming Using Constraints

1. Click the Select icon . 2. Double -click the dimensional constraint.
3. Enter 20mm as new value in the Constraint Definition dialog box that appears.
The external constraint is re-computed and the geometry is re-positioned.
Editing Conic Curves

This task shows how to edit Conic Curves.
1. Double-click the conic you want to edit.
Changing the conic parameters

The Conic Curve Definition dialog box is displayed. 2. Enter the new parameters you wish to apply to the conic curve. You can edit the following options as displayed in the dialog box.
Constraint Limits: q Start and End Points: the curve is defined from the start point to the end point.
q
Start and End Tangents: if needed the tangent at Start or End points can be defined by selecting a curve. Tangent intersection point: indicates the point used to define both Start and End tangents. These tangents are on construction lines passing through Start or End points and the selected point. Point: defines a point when checking the Tangent intersection point option.
Note that you will have to choose either a start and end tangents or a tangent intersection point. Intermediate Constraints: q Parameter: defines the value of the parameter. Ratio ranging from 0 to 1 (excluded), which value is used to define a passing point ( M in this figure) and corresponds to the OM distance/OT distance. If the parameter = 0.5, then the
resulting curve is a parabola. If 0 < parameter < 0.5, then the resulting curve is a an arc of ellipse. I 1 > parameter > 0.5, then the resulting curve is a hyperbola.
q
Points 1, Point 2, Point 3: defines the possible passing points of the conic. These point have to be selected in logical order after having define the Start an End points. Tangent 1, Tangent 2: defines the tangency when it is applied to one of the passing points.
Applying constraints between the conic and another geometrical element

1. For instance, create a conic and a circle. 2. Click the Constraint icon from the Constraint toolbar.
3. Select the two elements. 4. Right click the second element. 5. Select Tangency.
The tangency has been applied to the two selected elements.
Inconsistent conics
If an element that belongs to the conic is deleted, the conic becomes inconsistent (the conic color turns red). As a result, when you exit the Sketcher workbench the Update Diagnosis dialog box will be displayed and an error message will appear within the dialog box.
6.
Double-click the conic to re-edit it.
Editing Connecting Curves

This task shows you how to edit a curve which connects two elements of the curve type.
Open the Edit_Connecting_Curves.CATPart document.
1. Double-click the connecting curve you want to edit.
The Connect Curve Definition dialog box is displayed. For each support curve, you can edit the following options as appropriate: q Point: defines the extremity point (on the support curve) of the connecting curve.
q
Curve: defines the support curve for the connecting curve. Continuity: indicates whether the connecting curve is continuous in point, in curvature or in tangency with the support curves. Tension: when the connecting curve is continuous in curvature or in tangency, specifies the tension which is applied to it. Reverse Direction: when the connecting curve is continuous in curvature or in tangency, reverses its direction.
2. For the first support curve, select Tangency from the Continuity field, set the tension to 3 and click Reverse Direction. 3. For the second support curve, select another extremity point (CtrlPoint.4 for example).
4. When you are satisfied with your modifications, click OK to validate and exit the dialog box.
Editing a Spline
Editing a Spline
This task shows you how to edit spline properties and then modify, add or remove spline control points. Create a spline such as the one shown below.
Adding a point
To add a point, you have several possibilities, depending on whether you want to add an existing point, or create the point on the sketch while editing the spline. 1. Double-click on the spline, or go to Edit -> Spline.1 object -> Definition.... The Spline Definition dialog box appears.
Editing a Spline
To add an existing point (i.e. a point created prior to editing the spline):
1. In the dialog box, select the spline point after or before which you want to add a point. Select CtrlPoint.2 for example. 2. Then, choose Add Point After or Add Point Before (depending on whether you want to add a point after or before the selected point). Select Add Point After for example. 3. Finally, click on the existing point you want to add in the spline.
If you proceed as shown below, for example:
Editing a Spline
You will get this result:
To create the point on the sketch while editing the spline: 1. In the dialog box, select the spline point after or before which you want to add a point. Select CtrlPoint.2 for example. 2. Then, choose Add Point After or Add Point Before (depending on whether you want to add a point after or before the selected point). Select Add Point After for example. 3. Finally, click on the sketch, at the location where you want to add the new point. If you proceed as shown below, for example:
Editing a Spline
Replacing a point
2. To replace a point, select the spline point that you want to replace in the dialog box, then select the Replace Point option, and finally click on the sketch, at the location where you want to add the new point. If you proceed as shown below, for example:
Editing a Spline
Closing a spline
2. To close a spline, simply select the Close Spline option in the dialog box. The spline is closed in such a way that it is continuous in curvature at the closure point.
You can edit existing splines which are closed using a continuity in point at the closure point: selecting the Close spline option will make such splines continuous in curvature at the closure point.
Removing a point
1. Select the point that you want to remove in the dialog box. 2. Click the Remove Point button. 3. Click OK.
Editing a Spline
Defining a tangent
1. Select the point you want to add a tangent in the dialog box. 2. Check the Tangency option. A tangent appears, you can reverse it clicking on the Reverse Tangent button. 3. If needed, check the Curvature Radius option and key in the value.
Editing Spline Offsets

This task shows you how to edit an Offset based on an existing spline, or even the offset constraint.
1. Create a Spline Offset.
Editing the offset constraint

2. Double-click the constraint to change its value.
The Parameter Definition dialog box is displayed. 3. Enter the value you want to apply for instance, enter 20.004. 4. Click OK in the Parameter Definition dialog box.
The constraint value has been modified. The constraint cannot be deleted.
Editing the spline offset

1. Create a Spline Offset.
2. Double-click the spline offset. The Offset Definition dialog box is displayed. 3. Change to the parameter you want to apply.
The spline offset is associative to the original spline in such a way that for instance: q when deleting the spline, the offset spline is displayed in red to show that there is an update error.
q
when adding control point to the original spline, the offset spline is automatically updated.
Editing Parents/Children and Constraints

This task shows you how to edit an element Parents/Children and Constraints.
Open the Analyse.CATPart document.
1. Rightclick on the element you want to edit Parents, Children and Constraints. As an example, select the distance constraint.
2. Select Parents/ Children... in the contextual menu. The following dialog box
appears:
You can double-click to expand Parents or right-click and select the Parents/Children... option in the contextual menu on this dialog box elements to edit their Parents/Children and constraints .
Editing Projection/Intersection marks
Editing Projection/Intersection Marks

This task shows you how to edit an element Parents/Children and Constraints. Open the Analyse2.CATPart document.
1. In the Sketcher (choose the sketch.2), double-click on the mark (yellow line) you want to edit, or expand the tree, go to PartBody -> Sketch.2 -> Useedges -> Projection.4 and double-click on Mark.1.
2. The Import Definition dialog box that appears lets you change the element which is used as a reference for this mark. To do this, make sure the Reference Element field is active, and select your new reference element.
For example, choose an arc.
3. Click OK in the Import Definition dialog box. The mark reference and position are changed.
Replacing Geometry
Replacing Geometry
This task shows how to replace 2D geometry.
Note that: q You replace a geometrical element with another on the 2D (Sketcher workbench) but no modification occurs in the 2D.
q
Only the 3D geometrical elements which used the replaced 2D geometrical elements will be modified. You can visualize the modifications when entering Part Design workbench.
Open the Replace. CATPart document.
1. Enter Sketcher workbench. 2. Right-click the element to be replaced.
Replacing Geometry
3. Select the name. object -> Replace... option from the displayed contextual menu.
The Replace dialog box appears.
3. Select the element Line2 will be replaced with.
Replacing Geometry
The Replace dialog box now appears as shown here: Line2 will be replaced with Line1.
The geometry is unchanged and appears as shown here:
4. Click OK in the Replace dialog box. 5. Click the Exit icon . The pad (created via the 2D geometry) is modified.
Replacing Geometry
If you edit the sketch (which includes a fillet), you can also replace for instance a fillet on a line with a fillet on a circle arc.
Open the Replace. CATPart document.
6. Create a three points Arc on the sketch geometry. 7. Right-click the filleted edge (line) to be replaced and replace the circle arc with a fillet circle arc by defining it in the Replace dialog box.
Selected line and circle arc
Replacing Geometry
8. Check the Delete replaced elements and exclusive parents box in the Replace dialog box.
Resulting geometry
Replacing Geometry
3D resulting pad (Part Design workbench):
Deleting Sketcher Elements

This task shows how to delete sketched elements.
Create sketched elements.
Deleting sketched elements affects associated features. This what we call propagation: 1. If you delete a curve (assigned endpoints, by default), the endpoints will also be deleted on the condition they are not part of a constraint or common to another curve. Curves are assigned endpoints and circle or arcs are assigned center points, by default. 2. If you delete a curve and the endpoints/center point, these points will be actually deleted is they are not either part of a constraint or common to another element. 3. If you delete a point, the element (curve or circle) will be automatically deleted. 4. Propagation is not valid for constraints: if you delete a constraint, you will not delete the corresponding geometry.
1. Select the element you wish to delete.
2. Click the Edit -> Delete command. The element is deleted.
3. If you wish to delete a set of elements, just multi-select them and apply the Delete command.
You can also select the Delete command from the contextual menu. For this rightclick the element to be deleted. In case you created an element using the Sketch tools toolbar, a constraint is applied to this element. To delete this element, you need to delete the constraint first. To delete constraints, you will follow the same instruction.
You cannot delete elements that are not currently edited sketch elements. This is particularly true for the reference planes. You can multi-select these elements but they will not be deleted.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Sketching Pre-Defined Profiles
Sketching Pre-Defined Profiles

The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for creating 2D geometry and more precisely pre-defined profiles. Before you begin, make sure you are familiar with Tools For Sketching.
Creating Oriented Rectangles: Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define a first side for the rectangle and then a point corresponding to the rectangle length. Creating Parallelograms: Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define a first side for the parallelogram and then a point corresponding to the parallelogram length. Creating Elongated Hole: Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the center to center axis and then a point corresponding to the elongated hole length and angle. Creating Cylindrical Elongated Hole: Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the center to center circular axis and then a point corresponding to the cylindrical elongated hole length and angle. Creating Keyhole Profiles: Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the center to center axis and then both points corresponding to both radii. Creating Hexagons: Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the hexagon center and dimensions. Creating Centered Rectangles: Use the Sketch tools toolbar to define the rectangle center and dimensions. Creating centered Parallelograms: Use the Sketch tools toolbar to define a first side for the parallelogram and then a point corresponding to its length. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugbt0200.htm10/19/2004 8:07:10 AM
Creating Oriented Rectangles

This task shows how to create a rectangle in the direction of your choice by defining three extremity points of the rectangle. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this oriented rectangle manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Oriented Rectangle icon from the Profiles toolbar (Predefined Profile sub-toolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the first side of the oriented rectangle (both points) and then either one point on the second side or directly the oriented rectangle height. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values. First Corner
For example, key in the coordinates of the first point on the first rectangle side (H: 20mm and V: 20mm) or first corner.
Second Corner
For example, to define the second point, key the width of the rectangle first side (W: 20mm) and the radius of the first side relatively to the horizontal origin axis (A: 25deg) or second corner.
Third Corner
For example, key in the height of the rectangle (Height: -22mm) or third corner.
3. Click to create the oriented rectangle. The oriented rectangle and corresponding constraints appear as shown here.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating Parallelograms
This task shows how to create a parallelogram by clicking. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this parallelogram manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish. 1. Click the Parallelogram icon Profiles toolbar (Predefined Profile subtoolbar). from the
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the parallelogram. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values. First Point
For example, key in the coordinates of the first point on the parallelogram first side (H: 20mm and V: 20mm).
Second Point
For example, key in the coordinates of the second point on the parallelogram first side (H: 37mm and V: 10mm).
Third Point
For example, key in the coordinates of the third point on the parallelogram, in other words, on the second side of this parallelogram (H: 57mm and V: 10mm). 3. Click to create the parallelogram. The parallelogram and corresponding constraints appear as shown here.
Creating Elongated Holes

This task shows how to create an elongated hole by clicking. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this elongated hole manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Elongated Hole icon
from the Profiles
toolbar (Predefined Profile sub-toolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the elongated hole center to center axis (first and second center point) and then either the elongated hole radius or a point on this elongated hole. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values.
First Center
Second Center
For example, key in the coordinates of both center points of the elongated hole: a first point (H: 20mm and V: 18mm) and a second point (H: 50mm and V: 18mm). You just defined the profile major axis using points. What you can also do is enter both the length and angle of this axis.
Point on Oblong Profile
For example, key in the coordinates of a point on the elongated hole (H: 53mm and V: 10mm). In other words, you just defined the profile minor axis or the elongated hole width applying a given radius to the profile extremity. At this step, what you can also do is enter the elongated hole radius. The elongated hole appears as shown here.
Creating Cylindrical Elongated Holes

This task shows how to create a cylindrical elongated hole. A construction arc assists you in creating this element. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this cylindrical elongated hole manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Cylindrical Elongated Hole icon
from
the Profiles toolbar (Predefined Profile subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the cylindrical elongated hole. You are going to define the (i) circle center, (ii) arc extremities and the (iii) radius of the cylindrical elongated hole. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values.
Circle Center
For example, key in the coordinates (H: 20mm and V: 20mm) of the center point that will be used to create both the big radius (radius and angle of the cylindrical elongated hole) and the small radius (circular extremities used to define the cylindrical elongated hole).
Arc Start Point
For example, key in the coordinates of the arc start point (H: 30mm and V: 10mm). At this step, you may also define the arc big radius and angle. The arc appears as a construction arc.
Arc End Point
For example, key in the coordinates of the arc end point (H: 10mm and V: 30mm). At this step, you may also define the arc big radius (R) and angle (A).
Point on Cylindrical Elongated Hole
For example, key in the coordinates of a point on the cylindrical elongated hole (H: 20mm and V: 20mm). In other words, you are defining what we call the small radius (Radius: 14.142mm). This small radius corresponds to the width of the cylindrical elongated hole, relatively to the circle center.
Creating Keyhole profiles
Creating Keyhole Profiles

This task shows how to create a keyhole profile. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this keyhole manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Keyhole Profile icon
from the
Profiles icon (Predefined Profile sub-toolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the keyhole profile. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values. First Center
Second Center
For example, key in the coordinates that will allow to define the center to center axis (First center point: H: 20mm and V: 20mm, Second center point: H. 20mm and V: 40mm).
First radius
2. Click to define the first radius and then the second radius.
Second radius
The resulting keyhole is as shown here.
Creating Hexagons
Creating Hexagons
This task shows you how to create an hexagon. A construction circle assists you in creating this profile. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this hexagon manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish. 1. Click the Hexagon icon from the Profiles icon
(Predefined Profile subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the hexagon center and then either a point on this hexagon or the hexagon dimension and angle. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values. Hexagon Center
For example, key in the coordinates of the center of the hexagon (H: 25mm and V: 25mm).
Point on Hexagon
Creating Hexagons
For example, key in the dimension (35mm) and Angle (10deg) of the hexagon. The hexagon is created.
Be careful: if you fix one extremity of the hexagon and try to move the hexagon using another extremity point, this hexagon can result twisted. To avoid this, you must drag the hexagon step by step releasing the mouse button regularly.
Creating Centered Rectangles

This task shows you how to create a centered rectangle.
1. Click the Centered icon Rectangle from the Predefined Profile toolbar in the Profile toolbar.
2. Click a point in the geometry area or select an existing one.
3. Drag the cursor to create the centered rectangle.
Applying Constraints
4. Activate the Dimensional Constraints and the Geometrical Constraints from the Sketch Tools toolbar. 5. Click a point in the geometry. 6. Drag the cursor to specify the rectangle dimensions.
Equidistant constraints are applied automatically on the opposed lines accordingly to the center point. Dimensional and Geometrical constraints are activated by default.
Creating Centered Parallelograms

This task shows you how to create a centered parallelogram.
1. Create two lines. 2. Select the Centered Parallelogram command from the Predefined Profiles subtoolbar in the Profile toolbar.
Using two lines
3. Select a first line (or an axis). 4. Select a second line (or an axis). 5. Drag the cursor to specify the rectangle dimensions.
The parallelogram is created: q it is centered on the intersection point of the two lines.
q
its edges are parallel to the selected lines.
Applying Constraints
1. Activate the Dimensional Constraints and the Geometrical Constraints from the Sketch
Tools toolbar. 2. Select the two lines one after the other. 3. Drag the cursor to specify the rectangle dimensions.
Two parallelism constraints are created as long as two symmetrical constraints which are based on the two lines selected before the parallelogram creation. Dimensional and Geometrical constraints are activated by default.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Sketching Simple Profiles

The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for creating 2D geometry and more precisely pre-defined profiles.
Before you begin, make sure you are familiar with Tools For Sketching. As soon as a profile is created, it appears in the specification tree. Note that if you position the cursor outside the zone that is allowed for creating a given element, the symbol appears.
Creating a profile Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define lines and arcs which the profile may be made of. Creating a rectangle Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the rectangle extremity points one after the other. Creating a circle Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the circle center and then one point on the circle. Creating a three point circle Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the circle start point, second point and end point one after the other. Creating a circle using coordinates Use the Circle Definition dialog box to define the circle center point and radius. Creating a tri-tangent circle Click three elements one after the other to create a circle made of three tangent constraints.
Creating an arc Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the arc center and then the arc start point and end point. Creating a three point arc Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the arc start point, second point and end point one after the other. Creating a three point arc (using limits) Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the arc start point, end point and second point one after the other. Creating a spline Click the points through which the spline will go. Connecting curves with a spline Click the first, and then the second element to connect. Connecting curves with an arc Click the first, and then the second element to connect. Creating an ellipse Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the ellipse center, major semiaxis and minor semi-axis endpoints one after the other. Creating a parabola Click the focus, apex and then the parabola two extremity points. Creating a hyperbola Click the focus, center and apex, and then the hyperbola two extremity points. Creating a conic Click the desired points and excentricity for creating an ellipse, a circle, a parabola or a hyperbola, using tangents, if needed. Creating a line Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the line first and second points.
Creating an infinite line Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the infinite line first and second points. Creating a bi-tangent line Click two elements one after the other to create a line that is tangent to these two elements. Creating a bisecting line Click two lines. Creating a line normal to a curve Click a point and then the curve. Creating a symmetrical extension Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the center point and then the extremity point of a line that is a symmetrical extension to an existing one. Creating an axis Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the axis first and second points. Creating a point Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the point horizontal and vertical coordinates. Creating a point using coordinates Enter in the Point Definition dialog box cartesian or polar coordinates. Creating an equidistant point Enter in the Equidistant Point Definition dialog box the number and spacing of the points to be equidistantly created on a line or a curve-type element. Creating a point using intersection Create one or more points by intersecting curve type elements via selection. Creating a point using projection Create one or more points by projecting points onto curve type elements.
Creating Profiles
Creating Profiles
This task shows how to create a closed profile. A profile may also be open (if you click the profile end point in the free space). Profiles may be composed of lines and arcs which you create either by clicking or using the Sketch tools toolbar. 1. Click the Profile icon Profiles toolbar. from the
The Sketch tools toolbar appears with option commands and values:
Line (active
by default )
Tangent Arc
Three Point Arc
2. Enter the First Point values. For example, H: 30mm and V: 40mm.
3. Enter the Second Point values. For example, H: 70mm and V: 40mm.
Note that at this step, you may also enter Length and Angle values.
The line appears as shown here, with the constraints corresponding to the line created via the Sketch tools toolbar.
Creating Profiles
4. Press and hold the left mouse button down. Dragging the cursor allows you to activate the Tangent Arc mode automatically. A rubberbanding arc follows the cursor, showing the tangent arc to be created.
If you cannot manage creating the tangent arc using the left mouse button, what you can do is select the Tangent Arc option command in the Sketch tools toolbar. 5. Click the arc end point.
Creating Profiles
The Line switch
is set by default.
6. Start dragging another line and press the Ctrl key to lock tangency detection.
7. Click a point to end the line creation. 8. Select the Three Points Arc option command toolbar. from the Sketch tools
At this step, in order to have a clearer sketch, we decided not to visualize the constraints symbols temporarily (Tools->Options-> General->Parameters options at the left on the dialog box, Symbols tab, Filter switch button).
Tangent arcs are always positioned in the direction of the element previously created.
Creating Profiles
9. Click a point which the profile is going to go through (arc second point).
10. Click a point coincident to the start point of the line first created. You thus define the three point arc end point.
11. Activate the constraints symbols visualization again (Tools->Options> General->Parameters options at the left on the dialog box, Symbols tab, Filter switch button). The profile results as shown here:
Creating Profiles
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating Rectangles
Creating Rectangles
This task shows how to create a rectangle. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this rectangle manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Rectangle icon Profiles toolbar.
from the
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the rectangle. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values. First Point
For example, key in the coordinates of one corner of the rectangle (H: 20mm and V: 20mm).
Creating Rectangles
Second Point
For example, define the rectangle other end corner (second point) either according to the axis origin point (H and V) or to the first point previously selected (Width: 40mm and Height: 25mm).
When you create a rectangle using the Sketch tools toolbar, constraints are similarly assigned to this rectangle. As a result, to modify the position of this rectangle, you will perform as follows:
3. Double-click the constraint corresponding to the value to be modified. The Constraint Definition dialog box appears.
Creating Rectangles
4. Enter the new value. For example, key in 50mm. 5. Click OK.
Creating Circles
Creating Circles
This task shows how to create a circle. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this circle manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish. By default, circle centers appear on the sketch. In case you create circles by clicking, if you do not need them, you can specify this in the Options dialog box. For this, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab). Uncheck the Create circle and ellipse centers option.
1. Click the Circle icon
from the
Profiles toolbar (Circle sub-toolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the circle. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values. Circle Center
Creating Circles
For example, key in values of the point corresponding to the circle center (H: 30mm and V: 30mm).
Point on Circle
For example, define a point on the circle using keying in either coordinates or the circle radius (R: 20mm).
Creating Circles
When you create a circle using the Sketch tools toolbar, constraints are similarly assigned to this circle. As a result, to modify the position of this circle, you will either delete the constraints or perform as follows:
3. Double-click the constraint corresponding to the value to be modified. For example, double-click 20 radius value. The Constraint Definition dialog box appears. 4. Select the Diameter dimension type. 5. Click OK.
Copying the Circle Radius Parameters

Once you have created one circle, you can create any other and in the meantime use the radius parameter from the circle first created. To do this:
Creating Circles
6. Start creating a second circle. 7. Go over the circle first created with the cursor and right-click on the now highlighted circle. 8. Select the Parameter -> Copy Radius option displayed from the contextual menu.
The new circle is automatically created with the radius of the circle first created.
Changing the Circle Radius

Once you have created a circle, you can change its radius. To do this, you can either:
double-click the circle and modify the radius value in the Circle Definition dialog box that appears, or drag the circle until you are satisfied with its new radius.
If the circle center is fixed (or iso-constrained), you can change the circle radius by using one of the methods explained above.
Creating Three Points Circles

This task shows how to create a circle that goes through three points. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this circle manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
By default, circle centers appear on the sketch. In case you create circles by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog box.
For this, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Three Point Circle icon from the Profiles toolbar (Circle subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar will display one after the other the values for defining the three points of the circle: values for First Point (H: 10mm and V: 10mm) defining the horizontal (H) and vertical (V) values of a point Second Point (H: 50mm and V: 20mm) on the circle or else the radius of this circle. 2. Position the cursor in the desired fields and Last Point (H:30mm and V: 50mm) key in the desired values.
The three point circle appears as shown here:
Creating Circles Using Coordinates

This task shows how to create a circle using center point coordinates. In this particular case, we will use cartesian coordinates. Still, you can also use polar coordinates.
By default, circle centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you create circles by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog box.
For this, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Circle Using Coordinates icon from the Profiles toolbar (Circle subtoolbar). The Circle Definition dialog box is displayed. The default point coordinates that appear in the Circle Definition dialog box are the origin axis coordinates.
If, before clicking the Circle Using Coordinates icon, you select a point, this point will be used as a reference point and the coordinates of this point will appear in the Circle Definition dialog box.
2. Enter the coordinates of the center point. 3. Enter the desired circle radius value. 4. Press OK.
The circle and its center point are created.
Creating Tri-Tangent Circles
Creating a Tri-Tangent Circle

This task shows how to create a tri-tangent circle by creating three tangents. In this task, we will create this circle manually but, of course you can use the Sketch tools toolbar. Create two circles and a line. By default, circle centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you create circles by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog box. For this, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option at the left of the dialog box (Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Tri-Tangent Circle icon the Profiles toolbar (Circle subtoolbar).
from
2. Click a first element. For example, a circle. 3. Click a second element. For example, another circle.
4. Click a third element. For example, a line. The tri-tangent circle appears as well as the corresponding constraints provided you activated the Internal Constraints icon .
Tangents are created as close as possible to where you clicked on the circle.
Instead of clicking a line, you can create and click a point.
At any time, you can select a point type element. The circle will go through this point and a coincidence constraint is created on this point.
Creating Arcs
Creating Arcs
This task shows how to create an arc. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course, you can create this arc manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish. By default, arc centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you create arcs by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog box. For this, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option at the left of the dialog box (Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Arc icon
from the Profiles
toolbar (Circle subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining one after the other the arc center point, start point and end point. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values. Arc Center
Start Point
Creating Arcs
For example, enter H: 18mm and V: 30mm (Circle Center) and then H: 40mm and V: 40mm (Start Point). The arc center and start point appear.
The arc will now appear according to the position you assign to the cursor. In this particular case, the cursor position is at the bottom extremity of the arc. End Point
For example, enter S: -70deg (Angular Sector). The arc appears as shown here.
Creating Three Points Arcs

This task shows how to create an arc using three reference points in order to define the required size and radius. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this arc manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
By default, arc centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you create arcs by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Tools>Options dialog box. For this, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option at the left of the dialog box (Sketcher tab)
1. Click the Three Point Arc icon from the Profiles toolbar (Circle subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar will display one after the other values for defining the three points of the circle: defining the horizontal (H) and vertical (V) values of three points on the arc. 2. Position the cursor in the desired fields and key in the desired values. Start Point (H: 12mm and V: 32mm)
Second Point (H: 27mm and V: 17mm)
End Point (H: 12mm and V: 7mm)
The arc results as shown here.
Creating Splines
Creating Splines
This task shows you how to create a spline and then modify the spline control points (coordinates or clicking).
Creating a spline
1. Click the Spline icon Profiles toolbar. from the
2. Click in the geometry to indicate the points through which the spline goes. 3. Double-click the last point you have created to finish the spline creaton. (Clicking again on the Spline icon or another command also ends the spline creation.)
At any time when creating a spline, you can close it by right-clicking the last point and selecting Close spline from the contextual menu.
Creating Splines
The spline is closed in such a way that it is continuous in curvature.
Keep in mind that using the displayed Sketch tools toolbar also allows creating a spline. In addition, two constraints will be created (H and V).
Modifying the spline control points

1. Double-click the control point you wish to edit.
Creating Splines
The Control Point Definition dialog box appears. 2. Enter new coordinates. For example, v: 9mm (vertical). 3. Check the Tangency option to impose a tangency on this control point. You can invert the tangent direction clicking the Reverse tangent button. 4. Click OK.
The point is moved and an arrow appears on this point to indicate a tangency.
You can also check the Curvature option to activate the Curvature editor and impose a curvature on the previously selected control point.
Keep in mind that selecting a point then dragging it will modify the spline shape. Tangents can be constrained.
Creating Splines
Connecting Curves with a Spline

This task shows you how to connect two elements of the curve type, using a connecting curve (a spline) that goes through their end points. A connecting curve is associative, and it can be continuous in point, in curvature or in tangency with its support curves. You can define the tension value and the direction of the continuity at each connecting point, as well as add constraints to the connecting curve. Moving a connecting curve will change the shape of the support curves accordingly.
Open the Connect_Curves.CATPart document.
1. Click the Connect icon
from the
Profiles toolbar (Spline subtoolbar).
The connect options appear in the Sketch tools toolbar. By default, the Connect with options are active: the connecting a Spline and the Continuity in curvature element will be a spline, and it will be continuous in tangency with the support curves. By default, the tension that will be applied to the connecting curve is 1.
You can choose another type of continuity: Continuity in point tangency .
or Continuity in
For the continuity in tangency and continuity in curvature options, you can also modify the tension of the tangency or the tension of the curvature (a value of 0 corresponds to a continuity in point). For the purpose of this scenario, leave the default options as set.
2. Select the first and then the second element to connect.
The point on which you click to select the first and the second element is important: the closest point to where you click will be automatically used as the starting point and the end point of the connecting curve. Always click close to the point you want to connect, or click the point itself.
A connecting spline appears: it is continuous in curvature to both selected elements.
once again.
4. In the Sketch tools toolbar, choose the Continuity in point
option.
5. Select the first and then the second element to connect (this time, select the other extremity of the elements).
A connecting spline appears: it is continuous in point to both selected elements.
You can edit the connecting curve, as well as add constraints to it. You can also move the connecting curve: in this case, the shape of the support elements will change accordingly, as shown here for example. If you want to trim/break connecting curves you need to: r create exactly the same conic as the one you want to be trimmed.
r
Its extremity points must be coincident with the conic to be trimmed and its tangents must be tangent to the conic to be trimmed. If a parameter is applied to the first conic, then link it to the second
conic one using the Formula command and if a parameter is applied, then the second one must be coincident to the first one.
Connecting Curves with an Arc

This task shows you how to connect two elements of the curve type using an arc.
Open the Connect_Spline.CATPart document.
from the
Profiles toolbar (Spline subtoolbar).
The connect options appear in the Sketch tools toolbar. By default, the Connect with a Spline option is active, and its related options are displayed.
2. Click the Connect with an Arc option . 3. Select a first element to connect (starting point), and then a second element (ending point).
The point on which you click to select the first and the second element is important: the closest point to where you click will be used as the starting point and the end point of the connecting curve. Always click close to the point you want to connect, or click the point itself. A connecting arc appears, tangent to both selected elements.
Creating Ellipses
Creating Ellipses
This task shows how to create an ellipse (made of two infinite axes). In this task, we will use both the Sketch tools toolbar and clicking. In other words, you will move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish. 1. Click the Ellipse icon Profiles toolbar. from the
The Sketch tools toolbar displays values for defining the ellipse center point, major and then minor semi-axis endpoint. 2. Position the cursor in the desired fields and key in the desired values. Center
For example, enter H: 9mm and V: 8mm. Note that you can also click to create a first point that corresponds to the ellipse center.
Major Semi-Axis Endpoint
Creating Ellipses
For example, enter H: 65mm and V: 8mm. You just created a point on the ellipse. This point allows defining the major semi-axis.
By default, centers are created and associative but if you do not need them you can specify this in the Tools -> Options dialog box. For more information, see Base Infrastructure user's guide. 3. Move the cursor and click a point on the ellipse. You just created a point which allows defining both minor semi-axes.
Creating Parabola by Focus
Creating a Parabola by Focus

This task shows you how to create a Parabola by Focus by clicking the focus, apex and then the parabola two extremity points. 1. Click the Parabola by Focus icon from the Profiles toolbar (Conic subtoolbar).
Focus:
2. Click to define the parabola focus and apex.
Apex:
First Point:
3. Click two points that correspond to the parabola end points. Second Point:
The parabola results as shown here:
Creating Hyperbola by Focus
Creating a Hyperbola by Focus

This task shows you how to create a hyperbola by clicking the focus, center and apex, and then the hyperbola two extremity points. 1. Click the Hyperbola by Focus icon from the Profiles toolbar (Conic subtoolbar).
Focus: Once you click, the focus is symbolized by a cross ( ).
Center (asympote intersection): The center is not associative to the hyperbola.
2. Click to define the hyperbola focus, center and
apex.
Apex:
First Point:
3. Click two points that correspond to the hyperbola end points. Second Point:
The hyperbola results as shown here:
Note that, you can use the Sketch tools toolbar for defining the excentricity of the hyperbola.
Creating Conic Curves

This task shows the different methods you can apply to create conic curves which are either arcs of parabolas, hyperbolas or ellipses. According to the way you want to create the curve you will have to select one the following creation process, using:
q
Two points, start and end tangent, with either a parameter or a passing point. Two points, a tangent intersection point, with either a parameter or a passing point. Four points and one tangent direction for one of these points. Five points.
Using two points and start and end tangent...
1. Click the Conic icon from the Profile toolbar (Conic subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays.
Note that the Two Points as long as the Start and End Tangent options are activated by default. q While creating the conic, the Sketch tools toolbar will display one after the other the values to define the coordinates of the Start Point (H, V) followed by its Tangent Direction (H, V, A) and the coordinates of the End Point (H, V) followed by its Tangent Direction (H, V, A).
q r r
These fields are automatically updated according to the current position of the cursor; The H and V fields indicate points coordinates. The A field indicates the tangent direction through an angle value.
2. Click to define the Start Point of the conic. 3. Click again to select a point which will indicates the tangent direction of the Start Point.
4. Click to define the End Point of the conic. 5. Click again to select a point which will indicates the tangent direction of the End Point.
Once both Start Point and End Point are defined, the Sketch tools toolbar displays the Parameter field to define the parameter value.
...with a parameter...or
6. Enter the value you want to apply in the Parameter field in the sketch tools toolbar. The conic is created according to the parameter value you have set.
... with a passing point

7. Click a point on the conic to define the passing point. The conic is created with the passing point displayed on it. The H and V fields display the passing point coordinates.
Using two points and tangent intersection point...

Note that the Two Points as long as the Start and End Tangent options are activated by default. q While creating the conic, the Sketch tools toolbar will display one after the other the values to define the coordinates of the Start Point (H, V) followed by its Tangent Direction (H, V, A) and the coordinates of the End Point (H, V) followed by its Tangent Direction (H, V, A).
q
These fields are automatically updated according to the current position of the cursor; r The H and V fields indicate points coordinates.
r
The A field indicates the tangent direction through an angle value.
2. Click the Tangent Intersection Point option in the Sketch tools toolbar.
3. Click two points to define the start point and the end point of the conic. The tangent intersection point of the conic now must be defined. 4. Click a third point to define the Tangent Intersection Point.
The Sketch Tools toolbar expands to display the Parameter field.
... with a parameter...or

5. Enter the value you want to apply in the Parameter field in the sketch tools toolbar. The conic is created and it is tangent to the two construction lines which go through the intersection point and the start or end points.
... with a passing point

6. Click a point on the conic to define the passing point. The conic is created and the passing point is noticeable on the conic.
Using four points with a tangency at a passing points

Note that the Tangency at a Passing Point options is activated by default. You can deactivate it and only activated before the creation of the point on which you want to apply the command. If you keep this option activated, the direction will be asked for the start point otherwise, when it is deactivated the direction is automatically asked for the last point. 2. Select the Four Points option the Sketch tools toolbar. in
3. Click to define the start point and the end point. For instance, you can apply the tangency to the third point. 4. Activate the Tangency at a Passing Point option. 5. Click to define the third point. 6. Click again to select a point which will indicates the tangent direction of the third point.
7. Click to define the forth point. The conic is created and it is tangent to the construction line of the third point.
During the spline creation using two and four points, when selecting a point on a curve and then the tangency option, the curve tangency is used to define the one of the spline. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to select a direction for the tangency, as shown here.
Using five points

2. Select the Five Points option in the Sketch tools toolbar. 3. Click to define the start point and the end point. 4. Then select three other points to finish the creation of the conic.
Using the Nearest End Point mode

The Nearest End Point mode is activated by default in the Sketch tools toolbar.
1. For instance create a line.
2. Click a point on the line. If the mode is deactivated, the Start Point of the conic will be exactly the one you clicked on the line. You will get a result as shown here.
If the mode is activated, when selecting a point on the line, this last is highlighted.
The start point of the conic will be the nearest end one of the line, according to where you clicked on the line.
When defining the Start Point and the End Point, if the selected point belongs to a curve as above the tangent direction is directly read on the curve at the selected point or at the nearest end point if the Nearest end point option is activated. Therefore, the Start tangent direction and the End tangent direction won't be asked.
q q
A new conic feature will appear in the specification tree. The conic is variational and associative with the geometrical inputs, which means that it will be updated after every modification of a geometry input. You can also edit the curve or add constraints to it. If you want to trim/break conic curves you need to: create exactly the same conic as the one you want to be trimmed. Its extremity points must be coincident with the conic to be trimmed and its tangents must be tangent to the conic to be trimmed. If a parameter is applied to the first conic, then link it to the second conic one using the Formula command and if a parameter is applied, then the second one must be coincident to the first one.
r r
Creating Standard or Construction Elements

This task shows how to create standard elements or construction elements. Note that creating standard or construction elements is based upon the same methodology. If standard elements represent the most commonly created elements, on some occasions, you will have to create geometry just to facilitate your design. Indeed, construction elements aim at helping you in sketching the required profile. 1. Click the command from the Sketch tools toolbar so that the elements you are now going to create be either standard or construction element. In this task, you will transform the newly created elements into construction elements.
As construction elements are not taken into account when creating features, note that they do not appear outside the Sketcher.
Here is an example of the use of both types of elements. The hexagon was sketched using three construction circles:
This type of sketch is interesting in that it simplifies the creation and the ways in which it is constrained. Setting a radius constraint on the second circle is enough to constrain the whole hexagon. Just imagine what you would have to do to constrain hexagons sketched with no construction circles!
Creating Lines
Creating Lines
This task shows how to create a line. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this line manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish. 1. Click the Line icon Profiles toolbar. from the
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the rectangle.
Thanks to the Symmetrical Extension icon symmetrical to its origin. First Point
, you can create a line that is
2. Click the line first point (first point). 3. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values.
Second Point
Creating Lines
You can define the second point either according to the axis origin point (H and V) or to a given length (L) and angle (A). For example, key in L: 30mm and A: 45deg. 4. Press Enter.
When you create a line using the Sketch tools toolbar, constraints are similarly is active). As a assigned to this line (by default, the Internal Constraints icon result, to modify the position of this line, you will perform as follows:
5. Double-click the constraint corresponding to the value to be modified. The Constraint Definition dialog box appears. 6. Enter the new value. For example, use the spinner and assign a 30deg value to the line. 7. Click OK.
Creating Lines
Care when you assign graphical attributes to a line (for example, make it thick and red). When you turn this red thick line into a construction line (from the contextual menu: Object.Line -> Definition..., Construction line option in the Line Definition dialog box), the line will become a dotted gray line. Even though you then decide to make it a standard line back again (un-checking the Construction line option), the "red" and "thickness" attributes will not be assigned to the line. The line will be assigned its original attributes (white).
Defining Line Length/Angle Parameters

Once you have created one line, you can create any other and in the meantime use the length from the line first created or set this first line as an angle reference. For this:
8. Start creating a new line. 9. Go over the line first created with the cursor and right-click on the now highlighted line.
Creating Lines
10. Select the Parameters-> Copy Length option displayed in the contextual menu.
The new line is automatically created with the length of the line first created. 11. Start creating a new line. 12. Go over the line first created with the cursor and right-click on the now highlighted line. 13. Select the Set As Angle Reference option displayed in the contextual menu.
14. Enter the desired angle value in the Sketch tools toolbar. For example, 75 degrees. The new line is automatically created with an angle defined relatively to the line selected (in this particular case, the second line).
Before You Begin
Before You Begin

What is SmartPick ?
SmartPick is a smart and easy-to-use positioning tool which will assist you when using most of the commands for creating Sketcher geometrical elements. SmartPick will give you higher productivity by decreasing the number of the interactions necessary for positioning these geometrical elements. According to the various active options (Tools->Options->Sketcher from the menu bar), you can create the geometrical constraints that are equivalent to the snapping you performed. SmartPick will return information via symbols. To do this, SmartPick uses the four following sources of information:
3D graphic window and SmartPick cursor:
Sketch tools toolbar (Coordinates and parameters):
Contextual menu:
Ctrl or Shift keys.
Before You Begin
Specifying a Location
Using SmartPick, you will easily specify a location: q somewhere on the grid
q q q q q q q q q q
using coordinates on a point at the extremity point of a curve at the midpoint of a line at the center of a circle or an ellipse all over a curve at the intersection point of two curves aligned at a vertical/horizontal position on the fictitious perpendicular line through a line end point any of the above cases possibly combined together, whenever possible.
You will progessively specify this location by providing information using as above mentioned the blue cursor, coordinates, the contextual menu and Shift/Ctrl keys. Of course, as you will specify your needs, you will shorten the scope of the available possibilities for eventually locating the elements as desired. Note that if you position the cursor outside the zone that is allowed for creating a given element, symbol appears. the
[ Up ] [ Next ]
SmartPicking ...
SmartPicking...
This task shows you how to specify the location of given geometry thanks to information that SmartPick returns via symbols. In other words, SmartPick returns feedback information (highlighted geometry or symbols) which you will or will not validate. You will also learn how to progressively specify your needs using the blue cursor, the Sketch tools toolbar, the contextual menu, Shift key or Ctrl key.
When you move the cursor, H and V corresponding coordinates appear on the screen and also in the Sketch tools toolbar. Note that the coordinate at the top is H and the coordinate at the bottom is V.
... Somewhere On the Grid

Whatever the active command, SmartPick allows snapping SmartPick blue cursor, and thereby, the point to be created on the grid. You can activated or de-activate the Snap to Point option from the Sketch tools toolbar. You can also go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab) and . check or un-check the Snap to point option
SmartPick blue cursor is at the grid intersection point and far from the cursor
Snap to point "on":
SmartPicking ...
SmartPick blue cursor and the
Snap to point "off":
... Using Coordinates

As you move the and try to assign the desired position to the SmartPick cursor, the Sketch tools toolbar similarly displays the corresponding horizontal and vertical coordinates of SmartPick blue cursor .
You can use the Sketch tools toolbar fields for defining the point coordinates either independently from each others or not. For example, enter H: 2mm.
SmartPick is locked on this value. As you move the cursor the V coordinate appears in the Sketch tools toolbar.
SmartPicking ...
If you want to reset H or V coordinates you just entered in the Sketch tools toolbar, display the contextual menu (right-click on the background) and select the Reset option.
...Hiding Coordinates
1. Select Options from the Tools menu bar. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Select Mechanical Design -> Sketcher. 3. Uncheck the Visualization of the cursor coordinates option.
SmartPicking ...
The cursor coordinates are automatically hidden as you move the cursor within the geometry area.
This option is activated by default.
... On H and V Axes

As you move the and try to assign the desired position to the SmartPick cursor, a horizontal fictitious blue dotted line appears when h is equal to zero, a vertical fictitious blue dotted line appears when v is equal to zero.
... On a Point
SmartPicking ...
When a point is included in the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor, SmartPick first snaps to the point and the point-to-point coincidence symbol appears This symbol means that snapping suppresses both degrees of freedom available for a point.
... At a Curve Extremity Point

When a fictitious curve extremity point is included in the tolerance zone of smartPick cursor, SmartPick snaps to the extremity of this curve. The point-to-point coincidence symbol appears picked. once the point is
SmartPicking ...
Be careful: by default, all the curves are assigned fictitious extremity points. This is why, and as you will probably expect, SmartPick detects first point-to-point coincidence with the curve existing end point. Care that in this case only the extremity point is highlihted whereas in the previous case the whole line is highligthed.
You can also use the contextual menu (Nearest End Point option) while going over any curve type element with the cursor, and detect first pointto-point coincidence with the curve existing end point.
... At the Midpoint of a Line

When the midpoint of a line is included in the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor, SmartPick snaps to the midpoint of this line. The point-to-point coincidence symbol appears once the midpoint is picked and the line highlights.
SmartPicking ...
For this, you can also use the contextual menu (Midpoint option).
... At the Center of a Circle

When the fictitious center of a circle is included in the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor, SmartPick snaps at the center of this circle. The point-to-point coincidence symbol appears once the circle center is picked and the circle highlights. For this, you can also use the contextual menu (Concentric option).
Be careful: by default, circles are created with a center point, as defined in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab). As a result, SmartPick detects first pointto-point coincidence.
... All Over a Curve

When a curve is included in the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor, SmartPick automatically snaps to as you go all over the curve the curve which highlights. The curve coincidence symbol appears . This symbol means the point is snapped and that there is still one degree of with the cursor freedom left, except when two curves are detected at the same time. This is also true In the case of curves that can be extrapolated, (segments, arcs of circles, re-limited splines or conic curves). SmartPick will snap to these curves on the condition they are included in the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor.
SmartPicking ...
Make sure you checked the Support lines and circles option in the Options dialog box. For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab).
Any problem for detecting coincidence? Use the Ctrl key as is: 1. Go over the element to be made coincident. For example, a line. 2. Press and hold down the Ctrl key. SmartPick cursor remains positioned on the picked element. 3. Move the wherever you want. SmartPick cursor and coincidence symbol remain positioned on the line. For more details on the Ctrl key, click here.
... At the Intersection Point of Two Curves

When the intersection point of two curves is included in the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor, both curve-type elements highlight. The coincidence appears and symbol SmartPick cursor snaps to the intersection.
SmartPicking ...
This type of detection illustrates SmartPick main functionality: combined detection. In fact, when two snapping can possibly be performed, SmartPick aims at satisfying both of them by trying to snap them at the same time. This smart behavior is a global behavior and is valid for any kind of detection recognized by SmartPick.
Any problem for detecting intersection? Use the Ctrl key as is: 1. Go over one element to be intersected using the . For example, a line. The picked element highlights. The coincidence appears to symbol indicate that SmartPick snaps over the line.
SmartPicking ...
2. Press the Ctrl key. SmartPick automatically remains snapped whatever the position you assign to the cursor.
3. As you press the Ctrl key, go over the second element to be intersected with the element already picked using . When SmartPick detects that the second line can possibly be snapped to, SmartPick tries to combine both snappings detected thanks to the Ctrl key. In this particular case, SmartPick snaps at the intersection of both lines.
... on Fictitious Perpendicular Line Through Line End Point

If the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor goes over a fictitious perpendicular line that goes through the extremity point of a line, SmartPick snaps in order to remain on this fictitious perpendicular line. Make sure you checked the Alignment option in the Options dialog box. For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab) . You will thus automatically detect the different elements along which the sketch is aligned.
... At a Vertical/Horizontal Position
SmartPicking ...
If the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor crosses a fictitious horizontal line that would go through a point, SmartPick snaps in order to remain horizontal to this point.
In this case, no constraint is created.
Make sure you checked the Alignment option in the Options dialog box. For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab) . You will thus automatically detect the different elements along which the sketch is aligned.
Creating Geometry Using SmartPick

Using SmartPick, you will adapt the way you use the Sketcher so as to position geometry to be created according to existing geometry, if needed, and to internal parameters. As a result, you will use commands in accordance with the type of the element to be created: one command per element.
Unlike CATIA Version 4 (general 2D and 3D creation commands), to create one element, you no longer need to activate a group of specific commands (or creation scheme).
... From Scratch

You can create geometrical elements by progressively specifying a given number of characteristic points. These characteristic points can be specified whatever the active Sketcher command. Characteristic points are pre-determined fictitious points managed by SmartPick which allow creating and manipulating geometrical elements whatever the complexity of the latter. You will create some of these characteristic points with total freedom (both horizontal and vertical degrees of freedom are available ), and others with partial freedom (only one degree of freedom is available ). You will find here below a non-exhaustive list with Sketcher elementary geometrical elements and corresponding characteristic points. SmartPick lets you position these points using one of the following: the cursor, the Sketch tools toolbar, the contextual menu, Shift or Ctrl key.
A line
An arc (center radius)
An arc of a circle using three points
An oriented rectangle
A circle
A parabola
The order in which the above mentioned characteristic points (1, 2, 3, 4) will be specified cannot be modified. Still, you can choose the means to be used for positioning these points, as long as you exclusively take into account: q positioning specifications (SmartPick cursor)
q q q
external geometry (for example, two lines parallel to each others, or two coincident points) internal geometry characteristics (horizontal/vertical lines, quarter of arc of circles) the externalized parameters of a geometrical element (length, angle, excentricity and so forth)
... According to Existing Geometry

Reference Geometry
SmartPick finds out geometrical specifications according to geometrical elements that already exist in a sketch. You will only detect geometrical specifications according to the current sketch elements that are visible in the 3D window in which the cursor is positioned. You will not need to perform any interaction and you will be returned a visual feedback as shown below in a non exhaustive way:
parallel (two lines)
tangent (a line and a circle)
perpendicular (two lines)
tangent (two circles)
concentric (a circle and an arc)
coincident (curve through point on line)
Consequently, when detecting a constraint, detection can result ambiguous. To remove this ambiguity, you can try to move the viewpoint so that the elements that imply ambiguity would disappear. As you will see when using SmartPick, snapping ambiguities currently occur. Besides, the dimensional specifications of a part often depend on technological specifications. These dimensional specifications are defined as the part is being designed, they depend on the current application area and are, as a result, very hard to guess for SmartPick tool. In order to solve these ambiguities, SmartPick classifies possible snapping according to the geometrical constraints that are associated to these snapping. As such, a given cursor positioning will be only assigned one snapping. Unfortunately, this classification cannot be modified. It is provided in the table below.
Table1. Constraints Decreasing Priority Order 1. Point-to-point coincidence 2. Point-to-extremity point coincidence 3. Point-to-noticeable point coincidence (for example, the midpoint of a line) 4. Curve-to-curve tangency 5. Horizontal or vertical line, or else a quarter of an arc of a circle 6. Parallelism 7. Perpendicular curves 8. Point-to-curve coincidence 9. Curve-to-curve coincidence or point to curve support coincidence 10. Point on a perpendicular line through a line end point 11. Point at a vertical position 12. Point at a horizontal position
Also to remove ambiguity during elements creation, the three options which are parallelism, perpendicular and tangency can be activated independently from each other. This option is available through the SmartPick button in the Options dialog box which is displayed when selecting Tools -> Options.
In addition to this classification, when several snapping are possible for a given type of geometrical constraint, SmartPick takes into account the distance between the snapped cursor and the geometrical element according to which the snapping is possible. In this case, SmartPick snaps to the nearest element. Still, there are some cases when SmartPick does not allow dimensioning as desired without additional interactions. This is why SmartPick therefore manages two means for applying a particular snapping relatively to the geometrical elements.
Forcing the Snapping

SmartPick allows forcing the snapping on a given geometrical element using either the contextual menu or the Ctrl key.
Contextual Menu
SmartPick allows forcing the snapping on a given geometrical element using the contextual menu. You will avoid ambiguities linked to the automatic detection of elements in the current 3D viewpoint by forcing: q snapping detected at a distance: parallel, perpendicular, concentric, tangency and curve (line/circle) that goes through a point. At a distance means that these constraints are detected even though the cursor is not positioned on the reference element.
q
snapping at a given position that is relative to a geometrical element: line midpoint, circle center. At a given position means that both degrees of freedom are locked.
The contextual menu is therefore available when right-clicking most Sketcher geometrical elements. Of course, the contents of the contextual menu depends of the element that is being currently created. This contextual menu can be made of the below four sub-parts:
Option that belongs to the Base Infrastructure product. Snapping the characteristic point that is being manipulated (see From scratch paragraph and table2 below). Snapping the geometrical element that is being created (see table3 below). Managing the parameters that are associated to the geometrical element that is being sketched. Any snapping that is imposed via the contextual menu can be de-activated. For this, right-click in the 3D window background and select the Reset option from the displayed contextual menu.
The table below lists the constraints that can be detected when snapping characteristic points which are being manipulated, relatively to existing geometrical elements, and thanks to the contextual menu. Popped-up Geometry Available Snapping
Line Circle Ellipse Curve
Line midpoint Circle center Ellipse center Nearest end point
The table below indicates the possible snapping for geometrical element which are being created, relatively to existing geometry and thanks to the contextual menu. External Point Geometry Element currently created Point
Line
Circle
Ellipse
Conic
Spline
Midpoint Center Center Nearest end point Nearest end point Nearest end point
No
No
Line
Circle
No
No
No
Example of snapping possibilities

In the example below, you can see the various snapping possibilities for a line that is being created (dotted line (s) in the example) relatively to the existing spline: 3 tangency possibilities and 2 perpendicularity possibilities. The point you right-click to display the contextual menu is used to determine which option will be offered in the contextual menu. So depending on where you click, you will not be offered the same options. Note that the software takes into account what has already been specified (in this example, the first point of the line) to offer the various snapping options. For this reason, depending on the first point of the geometrical element that is being created, there may be cases in which no solution can be found or in which the solution offered does not correspond to what you want. In such a case, try to right-click before and/or after the point you want the software to choose. If you try both ways, one solution at least should be found.
Ctrl Key
SmartPick also allows forcing the current snapping on an element using the Ctrl key. q You can force SmartPick to remain snapped on an element whatever the position of the cursor. For this, you will press the Ctrl key while the geometrical snapping you want to force is active (the element may be highlighted and symbols may appear) and keep the Ctrl key pressed.
q
This functionality is efficient if once the Ctrl key is pressed you can still move the cursor. In other words, Ctrl has no effect if the current snapping inhibits both degrees of freedom. This is often the case when given snapping combinations are possible (for example at the intersection of two lines) or when the cursor is close to a given point (explicit or implicit as for example the midpoint of a segment). The Ctrl key is very useful when the sketch includes many geometrical elements because SmartPick takes into account the distance between the cursor and the geometrical element.
This is the zone in which the line-circle tangency snapping (due to the circle proximity) has the first priority. Apart from this zone, either the tangency snapping is meaningless or it interferes with closest geometries or still with possible constraints that are assigned higher priorities (see table 1).
Shift Key
If Smartpick cannot solve an ambiguity and returns a snapping that you are not satisfied with, you can deactivate SmartPick assistant by pressing the Shift key.
Be careful: it can happen that either the Shift or Ctrl key do not behave as specified in the paragraphs above. In fact, sometimes the viewer looses the focus (selection priority). You can then perform a local transformation to recover the focus: use the middle mouse button and manipulate the viewpoint. You will thus recover the focus.
Detecting Internal Geometry Characteristics

Certain geometrical elements are assigned internal peculiar geometrical characteristics. For example and as shown below, this is the case for horizontal/vertical lines and for quarters of arcs of circles. When such an internal specification is found out by SmartPick, the color of the currently created geometrical element becomes blue.
Managing Geometry Parameters
SmartPick also manages internal geometrical specifications such as a line length or a circle radius. Indeed, these specifications (further called parameters) decrease available degrees of freedom of a geometry characteristic point (refer to previous From Scratch paragraph). All these parameters are accessed through the Sketch tools toolbar which gathers all the available parameters that can be valuated for a given geometry creation command. Finally, while the SmartPick cursor moves, the Sketch tools toolbar displays the parameters value. Listed below is a non exhaustive list of the possible looks of Sketch tools toolbar parameter section :
Length and Angle to H axis are available for Line creation command. Radius, Start Angle to H Axis or Angular sector are available for Arc Circle creation command. Excentricity is available for Hyperbola creation command.
Note that it is always possible to reset a parameter that have been valuated in the Sketch tools toolbar. For this, use contextual sub-menu Reset option that is available on 3D viewer background.
SmartPick also manages internal geometrical specifications such as a line length or a circle radius. Indeed, these specifications (further called parameters) decrease available degrees of freedom of a geometry characteristic point (refer to previous From Scratch paragraph). All these parameters are accessed through the Sketch tools toolbar which gathers all the available parameters that can be valuated for a given geometry creation command. Finally, while the SmartPick cursor moves, the Sketch tools toolbar displays the parameters value. Listed below is a non exhaustive list of the possible looks of Sketch tools toolbar parameter section :
Length and Angle to H axis are available for Line creation command. Radius, Start Angle to H Axis or Angular sector are available for Arc Circle creation command. Excentricity is available for Hyperbola creation command.
Note that it is always possible to reset a parameter that have been valuated in the Sketch tools toolbar. For this, use contextual sub-menu Reset option that is available on 3D viewer background.
Relation Between Parameters and Characteristic Points

There exist a strong relation between the characteristic point of a geometrical element and some of the parameters it supports. In fact, if a parameter value is modified by moving the cursor, it means that the parameter is linked to the current characteristic point and consequently validating the point will modify the parameter status. Indeed, as when valuated a characteristic point can no longer be modified, associated parameters get frozen which is echoed by a grayed entry in the Sketch tools toolbar.
As an example, in Arc Circle creation command, when the arc start point is defined (at the sketch origin on this picture) both Radius and Start Angle to H Axis get frozen. Indeed, as the arc center is necessarily previously defined, to impose arc start point leaves no ambiguity on the radius and the start angle of the sector.
Specific Parameters
Some parameters have a specific behavior. This behavior is common to all geometry creation commands that use these parameters. This is the case for Angle and Sector parameters.
Sector Parameter
This parameter is oriented so that no ambiguity is possible when defining an angular sector. In the standard units system, an angle range is from -360 to 360deg. Any other value is recomputed to this range. Positive values are for direct sectors (you go from the start direction to the end one the same way you go from H axis to V axis). Negative values are on the other end for reverse arcs (you go from the start direction to the end one the same way you go from V axis to H axis).
A direct angular sector
A reverse angular sector
Note that an angular sector cannot be identically equal to zero.
Angle Parameter
This parameter is also oriented, its range is from 0 to 360 deg. As a consequence, a -10 deg value is identically equivalent to a 350 deg value and a 0 deg value is definitely not equal to a 180 deg value.
A fixed 30 deg angle value imposed to a line By default, angle value are computed relatively to H-Axis. This can be modified any time you want to define an angle value using the contextual menu Parameter section
Note that when this angle is fixed, the cursor position is restricted to the half of the sketch plane. Indeed, otherwise a 30 deg angle would be equal to a 210 deg one which is excluded.
When an angle value is available in the Sketch tools toolbar, any line that is contained in the current sketch can be defined as the angle computation basis. To issue out orientation, a red arrow is displayed to show the reference line orientation. In this example, a 25 deg angle is set relatively to an existing line
Copying Parameter Values

It is possible to copy some of parameters value from any existing geometrical element that can be defined with the same parameters. This functionality is available through the contextual menu "Parameter" section for length and radius parameters.
Length can be copied from a line while radius from a circle or an arc.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Creating an Infinite Line

This task shows how to create an infinite line either horizontal or vertical, or still according to two points you will specify using SmartPick.
1. Double-click the Infinite Line icon from the Profile toolbar (Line subtoolbar). The following options appear in the Sketch tools toolbar. The Horizontal Line option is the default option.
If you keep the Horizontal Line option active, as you go over the viewer with the cursor, an horizontal line automatically appears. 2. Click to position the line.
3. Activate the Vertical Line option from the Sketch tools toolbar.
As you go over the viewer with the mouse, a vertical line now automatically appears. 4. Click to position the line.
5. Activate the Line Through Two Points option from the Sketch tools toolbar. Note that the angle (A) now appears in the Sketch tools toolbar and can be valued at any time for defining the line.
6. Click to position a start point on the infinite line to be created.
7. Click to position an end point on the infinite line to be created.
Creating a Bi-Tangent Line

This task shows how to create a bi-tangent line by creating two tangents (on two different elements). Create two circles. 1. Click the Bi-Tangent Line icon the Profiles toolbar (Line subtoolbar). from
2. Click a first element (first tangent). For example, click a circle.
3. Click a second element (second tangent). For example, click another circle. The bi-tangent line appears between both selected elements. The bi-tangent line appears as well as the corresponding constraints provided you activated the Geometrical Constraints icon .
Tangents are created as close as possible to where you clicked on the circle.
At this step, create a point.
At any time, you can select a point type element. The line will go through this point and a coincidence constraint is created on this point.
Creating a Bisecting Line

This task shows how to create an infinite bisecting line by clicking two points on two existing lines.
Open the Line_Bisecting.CATPart document. 1. Double-click the Bisecting Line icon from the Profiles toolbar (Line subtoolbar).
2. Click two points on the two existing lines, one after the other.
The infinite bisecting line automatically appears, in accordance with both points previously clicked.
Note that this bisecting line corresponds to a line symmetrically constrained to two is lines (of course on the condition the Geometrical Constraint option command active in the Sketch tools toolbar). If both selected lines are parallel to each others, a new line will be created between these lines.
Creating a Line Normal to a Curve

This task shows how to create a line normal to a curve. As a perpendicularity constraint is created, the line remains perpendicular to the curve even when it is moved. Create a spline. 1. Click the Line Normal to Curve icon from the Profile toolbar (Line subtoolbar).
2. Click the line first point.
3. Click a point on the curve.
The line is created, as well as a perpendicularity constraint (between the line and the curve).
Lines normal to a curve are created as close as possible to where you clicked on the curve. You will get better results if, before clicking the curve, you try to position the line as perpendicular to the curve as possible.
Creating Symmetrical Extensions

This task shows how to create a symmetrical extension to a line. In other words, you are going to create a median to an existing line by clicking. Still, you can use the Sketch tools toolbar. Create a line. 1. Click the Line icon toolbar. 2. Click the Symmetrical Extension command option toolbar. that appears in the Sketch tools from the Profiles
3. Click the center point of the line which is to be assigned a symmetrical extension.
4. Drag the cursor to the desired location. The median appears. It is perpendicular to the line, at the line midpoint. 5. Click to locate the symmetrical extension.
The median is created. 6. If needed, move the symmetrical extension to a new position.
Creating an Axis
Creating an Axis
This task shows how to create an axis. You will need axis whenever creating shafts and grooves. Axis cannot be converted into construction elements. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this line manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish. 1. Click the Axis icon toolbar. from the Profiles
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the axis first and second point. 2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values. First Point
Second Point
Creating an Axis
For example, key in the coordinates of the first point (H: 20mm and V: 20mm) and then the coordinates of the second point (H: 10mm and V: 35mm). 3. Press Enter.
The axis results as shown here. If, before you select the Axis icon, you have already selected a line, this line will automatically be transformed into an axis. Note that you can create only one axis per sketch. If you try to create a second axis, the axis first created is automatically transformed into a line (construction type element).
Creating Points
Creating Points
This task shows you how to create a point. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this point manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Point icon from the Profiles toolbar. The Sketch tools toolbar displays values for defining the point coordinates: H (horizontal) and V (vertical). 2. Position the cursor in the desired field and key in the desired values. Point Coordinates
For example, key in H: 19.7mm and V: 19.5mm. The point appears.
Creating Points
When you create a point using the Sketch tools toolbar, constraints are similarly assigned to this point. As a result, to modify the position of this point, you will either delete the constraints or perform as follows: 3. Double-click the constraint corresponding to the value to be modified. For example,19.7. The Constraint Definition dialog box appears.
4. Modify the value in the Constraint Definition dialog box. In this case, enter Value: 20mm. 5. Right-click the point and select the Properties option from the contextual menu (Graphic tab). 6. If needed, click a new symbol.
Creating Points
For creating an isobarycenter, click (or multi-select) at least two points before clicking the Point command. Note that an isobarycenter can only be created between points. In other words, if you multi-select a rectangle, the four points of this rectangle, and only these four points, will be used for defining the isobarycenter. Associativity is no more valid.
Creating Points Using Coordinates

This task shows you how to create a point by indicating coordinates. In this task, we will use an existing point as reference for creating another point.
Create a point.
1. Click the Point by Using Coordinates icon from the Profiles toolbar (Point subtoolbar).
2. Select the reference point. This point will be used as a reference point. You can select this reference point either before or after you click the Point by Using Coordinates icon.
The Point Definition dialog box appears, which allows you to use either cartesian (h and v) or polar coordinates. The coordinates of the reference point will appear in the Point Definition dialog box.
3. Enter the desired new point definition in the dialog box. For example, select the Polar tab and enter Radius: 30mm. 4. Click OK. The point is created with a 30mm radius relatively to the reference point.
The symbol used for points in the geometry area can be customized. For this, right click and select the Properties option from the contextual menu (Graphic tab).
Creating Equidistant Points

This task shows how to create a set of equidistant points on a line. You can create equidistant points on curves. Open the Equidistant_Point.CATPart document. 1. Click the Equidistant Points icon the Profiles toolbar (Point subtoolbar). from
2. Select the curve type element on which you wish to create equidistant points. For example, select a line. The Equidistant Points Definition dialog box is displayed. By default in this particular case, 5 equidistant New Points are previewed and the default spacing is set at 8.333 mm.
If needed, click the Reverse Direction button to create these points in a reverse direction. In this particular case, we do not. 3. Select one origin point of the line to define the starting point. The Parameters field automatically becomes modifiable. By default, the Points & Spacing parameter appears. 4. Key in the desired number of spacing. For example, enter Spacing: 5mm. 5. Press Enter. The five points are created and distributed along the line.
At this step, you can click or select an ending point, if needed. In this particular case, we do not. 6. Select Points & Length as new Parameters field. 7. Enter 40mm as new Length value (length between the point first selected and the fifth point automatically created). 8. Press Enter. The five points are created and distributed along a 40mm distance on the line.
9. Select Spacing & Length as new Parameters field. 10. Enter 25mm as new Length value (length between the point first selected and the last point automatically created). 11. Press Enter. The number of the points is automatically updated (in this case, two points) in the dialog box and created on the line.
12. Select Spacing & Length as new Parameters field. 13. Enter 5mm as new Spacing value (spacing between each point of a distance defines as 25mm). 14. Press Enter. The number of the points is automatically updated (in this case, four points) in the dialog box and created on the line.
15. Click Ok to create the points (and the constraint, if needed).
Coincidence constraints will be created between each point and the line on the condition the Dimensional Constraints command is active. Offset constraints are created between the points. The offset between the origin point and the first point is a driving constraint. Note also that formulas are created. For more information about formulas, see Knowledge Advisor User's guide. You can edit points one after the other. For this, double click one point and redefine either the Cartesian or the polar coordinates from the Point Definition dialog box that appears. Modifications applied to the supporting element are not applied to points. The symbol used for points in the geometry area can be customized using the Edit -> Properties command (Graphic tab).
Creating Points Using Intersection

This task shows you how to create one or more points by intersecting curve type elements. Open the Intersection_Point.CATPart document.
1. Multi-select the elements to be used for intersecting.
2. Click the Intersection from the Point icon Profiles toolbar (Point subtoolbar).
3. Select one curve type element with which the elements first selected will intersect and on which intersection points will be created.
The intersecting points automatically appear on the curve type element last selected.
The constraints appear, of course on the condition the Geometrical Constraint option is active in the Sketch tools toolbar). command
Creating Points Using Projection
Creating a Point Using Projection

This task shows you how to create one or more points by projecting points onto curve type elements. Open the Projection_Point.CATPart document.
1. Multi-select the elements to be used for projection.
2. Click the Projection Point from the Profiles icon toolbar (Point subtoolbar).
3. Select one curve type element on which the element first selected will be projected and on which projection points will be created.
The projection points automatically appear on the curve type element last selected, as well as construction lines..
The constraints appear, of course on the condition the Geometrical Constraint option is active in the Sketch tools toolbar). command The points that are projected are perpendicular to the element last selected provided this element is a line. Note that both the selected points and the projected points are associative with the construction lines that are also created.
Creating Associative Projected Points using...

1. Create a spline and points.
2. Select the Projection Point icon from the Profiles toolbar (Point subtoolbar). To multi-select several elements you have two possibilities either:
q
use the control key before selecting the command. drag the cursor if the command is already activated.
The Sketch tools toolbar displays two new options:
Orthogonal projection
3. Keep the Orthogonal option Projection activated as it is so by default in the Sketch tools toolbar.
4. Select one or several points. 5. Select the spline.
All the selected points have been projected onto the curve according to a normal direction at this curve.
A construction line is created between the original points and the projected ones.
Projection Along a Direction

1. Select the Projection Along a Direction option from the Sketch tools toolbar. To multi-select several elements you have two possibilities either:
q
use the control key before selecting the command. drag the cursor if the command is already activated.
2. Select one or several points. 3. Select the spline.
The selected point is projected along the given direction.
A construction line is created between the original point and the projected one.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Deactivating a Sketch
This task shows you how to deactivate (and then reactivate) a sketch as well as its related features (in order to avoid update errors). You will also learn how formulas let you view all activities and their status, as well as activate/deactivate activities.
You can use the same method to deactivate absolute axes, projections, intersections.
Open the Pinmounting.CATPart document.
1. From the specification tree, right-click Sketch.5.
2. In the contextual menu which is displayed, select Sketch.5 object -> Deactivate.
The selected sketch, and the elements which are impacted by its deactivation, are highlighted in the specification tree and in the geometry area. The Deactivate dialog box is displayed, listing the elements which are impacted by the sketch deactivation.
3. Make sure that the Deactivate impacted elements option is checked in the dialog box: this ensures that there will be no update error when the sketch is deactivated. 4. Click OK to validate and close the dialog box. The selected sketch and the impacted elements are deactivated. Specific icons are displayed in the specification tree for deactivated element to indicate that they have been deactivated.
5. If you now click the Formula icon in the Knowledge toolbar to display the Formulas dialog box, you will be able to see that the Activity parameter corresponding to the selected item (Sketch.5, in this case) is set to "false" to indicate that this item is deactivated.
6. To reactivate the sketch, you have two possibilities: q In the Formulas dialog box, select the Activity parameter corresponding to the deactivated sketch (PartBody\Sketch.5\Activity), and select "true" from the Edit name or value of the current parameter drop-down list.
q
From the specification tree, right-click Sketch.5, and select Sketch.5 object -> Activate from the contextual menu. The Activate dialog box is then displayed. Make sure the Activate impacted elements is checked if you want to reactivate the related features, and then click OK.
You can use either method to reactivate the sketch and the elements that were impacted by its deactivation. In some cases, not all impacted elements will be reactivated when you use the second method. In this case, you will be able to reactivate impacted elements individually.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
This section contains the description of the workbench icons and menus. Many of these commands are discussed in greater details in other parts of the guide.
Command Board Sketcher Menu Bar Sketcher Toolbars Sketcher Specification Tree Icons
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugwd0000.htm10/19/2004 8:22:06 AM
Command Board
Command (and Option) Board

General and Sketch Tools
Create a Positioned Sketch Start a Sketch Leave Sketcher Workbench Ctrl Lock currently detected constraints Shift Deactivate a constraint Connecting Curves with an Arc Snap to Point Standard or Construction Elements Geometrical Constraints Dimensional Constraints Connecting Curves with a Spline
Sketched Geometry
Line Profile Tangent Arc Three Point Arc Axis
Predefined Profiles
Oriented Rectangle Elongated Hole
Cylindrical Elongated Hole Keyhole Hexagon

Centered rectangle Centered Parallelogram
Circle
Basic Circle Three Point Circle

Circle Using Coordinates
Basic Arc Arc Three Points Arc Three Point via Limits
Tri-Tangent Circle
Command Board
Line Bi-Tangent Line Bisecting Line

Spline
Infinite Line Line normal to curve
Spline
Conic
Connect
Point
Ellipse Parabola by Focus Hyperbola by Focus Conic
Point (Ctrl P) Point Using Coordinates Equidistant Point Intersection Point Projection Point
Operations on Sketched Geometry

Corners Trim Both Elem.
Trim One
No Trim
Standard Lines Trim
Construction Lines Trim
Command Board
Chamfers (Ctrl h)
Trim Both Elem.
Trim One
No Trim
Standard Lines Trim
Construction Lines Trim
Trim Elem.
Trim Both Elem.
Trim One
Close Elem.
Complement
Quick Trim Break Elements (Ctrl B)
Transformation
Mirrored Elements (Ctrl S) Translate Elements Rotate Elements

3D Geometry
Symmetrical Elements
Scale Elements Offset Elements
Command Board
Project 3D Elements Project 3D Silhouette Edges
Isolating Projections and Intersections Intersect 3D Elements with Sketch Plane
Constraints
Constraints (Dialog Box) (Ctrl o) Contact Constraints Dimensional/Geometrical (Ctrl C) Tools Cut Part by Sketch Plane Create Datum
Ouptut Features
Autoconstraining Animate Constraint
Sketch Solving Status Sketch Analysis
Element Colors
Element Current Selected Protected No changed
Color
Element Fixed Iso-constrained Over-constrained Inconsistent
Color
white red orange yellow brown
green green violet red
Constraint Visualization
Symbol Symbol
Type Perpendicular Coincident
Type Parallel Radius Distance Length
Command Board
Vertical Horizontal Fix customize

[ Up ] [ Next ]
Diameter Concentric all types
Sketcher Menu Bar
Sketcher Menu Bar

This section presents the main menu bar and commands dedicated to the Sketcher. Start File Edit View Insert Tools Windows Help
Edit
For... See...
Cut...
Copy Paste Delete... Deleting Sketcher Elements
xxx.object
Editing the Profile Shape and Size Editing Sketcher Elements
Insert
For... Constraint... Profile... Operation... See... Setting Constraints Sketching Profiles Performing Operations on Profiles
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugwd0301.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 8:23:28 AM
Sketcher Menu Bar
Tools
For... See...
Options...
Customizing
Sketch Analysis
Analyzing the sketch
Sketcher Toolbars
Sketcher Toolbars
The information you will find in this section are listed below: Sketch tools Sketcher Constraints Profiles Operations Tools Toolbar
Sketch tools
Sketch tools
See Snap to Point
See Creating Standard or Construction Elements
See Setting Constraints
See Setting Constraints
See Creating Corners
See Trimming Elements With Both Elements Trimmed See Trimming Elements With One Element Trimmed
See Creating Corners (One Element Trimmed)
See Creating Corners (No Element Trimmed)
See Trimming Multiple Elements
See Creating Corners (Standard Lines Trim)
See Closing Elements
See Creating Corners (Construction Lines Trim)
See Breaking and Trimming Elements
See Creating Chamfers with Both Elements Trimmed
See Creating Symmetrical Elements
See Creating chamfers with One Element Trimmed
Sketch tools
See Creating Chamfers with No Element Trimmed See Creating Chamfer with Standard Lines Trimmed
See Creating Chamfer with Construction Lines Trimmed
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Sketcher
Sketcher Toolbar
See Starting a Sketch See Starting a Sketch
See Creating a Pad from Part Design User's Guide
Constraints
Constraints Toolbar
See Creating Constraints via a Dialog Box
See Using the Auto-constraining a group of Elements
See Quickly Creating Dimensional/ Geometrical Constraints See Creating a Contact Constraint
See Animating Constraint
Profiles
Profiles Toolbar
See Profiles See Rectangles
See Parabola See Hyperbola See Conic
See Oriented Rectangles See Parallelograms See Oblong Profiles See Oblong Arcs See Keyhole See Hexagons See Lines See Infinite Line See Line Normal to a Curve See Axes See Basic Circles See Three Point Circles See Circles Using Coordinates See Tri-Tangent Circle See Ellipses
See Basic Arcs See Arc Arcs Three Point See Arcs Three Point via Limits See Splines See Connecting Curves with a Spline and Connecting Curves with an Arc
See Bi-Tangent Line See Bisecting Line See Centered Rectangle See Centered Parallelogram See Points See Points Using Coordinates See Equidistant Points See Intersection See Projection Point
Operations
Operations Toolbar
See Creating Corners (Both Elements Trimmed) See Creating Corners (One Element Trimmed) See Creating Corners (No Elements Trimmed) See Creating Chamfers with Both Elements Trimmed See Creating Chamfers with One Element Trimmed See Creating Chamfers with No Elements Trimmed See Trimming Elements See Breaking Elements See Breaking and Trimming
See Moving Element by Symmetry See Creating Mirrored Elements See Translating Elements See Rotating Elements See Scaling Elements See Offsetting Elements See Projecting 3D Elements onto the Sketch Plane See Intersecting 3D Elements with the Sketch Plane See Projecting 3D Silhouette Edges [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Tools Toolbar
Tools Toolbar
See Cutting the Part by the Sketch Plane See Creating Datums See Creating Output Features
See Performing a Light Sketch Analysis See Analyzing the Sketch
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Sketcher Specification Tree Icons

AbsoluteAxis Directions
HDirection VDirection Origin
Geometry
Circle Parabola Ellipse Curve Line Point Conic Connect Hyperbola
Constraints
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/basst_C2/basstsketcher.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:27:00 AM
Length, Radius, Semimajor and Semiminor constraints Fix Angle Symmetry Equidistance Perpendicularity Coincidence Parallelism Distance Midpoint, Concentricity Tangency
Use-Edges (imported elements)

3D Silhouette 3D Projection 3D Intersection
Marks
When importing geometry, if the Datum mode is activated then new marks are created.
q
Marks referencing splines: Envelope Mark
Created when imported geometry is composed if several sub-elements which are linked together.
Marks referencing other elements: Point Mark Circle Mark Line
Customizing for Sketcher

The Sketcher settings will help you sketch your profile with given options. For example, the grid will make it easier to sketch a profile requiring parallel lines.
1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Expand the Mechanical Design option, then click Sketcher. The Sketcher tab appears, containing the following set of options:
q
Grid Sketch Plane Geometry Constraint Colors
Grid
Display Check this option to display the grid in your session.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudys_C2/bascudys0000.htm (1 of 9)10/19/2004 8:27:14 AM
Snap to point Check the Snap to point option if your sketch needs to begin or end on the points of the grid. Allow Distortions Check this option to apply different graduations and spacing between H and V. H; V; Primary spacing; Graduations To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the H and V fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid. Note that in the Sketcher workbench you need to set 2D curves in NO Show mode to be able to visualize the part edges in the 3D area.
Sketch Plane
Shade sketch plane Check this option to view the sketch plane in the Sketcher workbench. Note that you also need to display the grid in order to be able to see the shaded plane. The sketch plane will be shaded in the Sketcher workbench:
Position sketch plane parallel to screen Check this option to ensure that the sketch plane will be positioned properly each time you enter the Sketcher workbench.
Visualization of the cursor coordinates Check this option to have the cursor coordinates displayed, near the cursor, within the geometry.
Geometry
Create circle and ellipse centers You can decide whether or not you want to create centers when sketching circles or ellipses. By default, this option is activated. Just uncheck it if you do not need to create centers when sketching. Allow direct manipulation Select this option to be able to move geometry using the mouse. When moving geometry, you can move either the minimum number of elements, the maximum number of elements, or still the minimum number by modifying the shape of elements, if needed. Click the Solving mode... button to configure manipulation.
The dialog box that appears offers the following options as regards the solving mode: Solving mode for moving elements Standard mode You move as many elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.
Minimum move You move as few elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.
Relaxation You move elements by re-distributing them over the sketch, globally speaking. This method solves element moving by minimizing energy cost. Drag elements end points included Furthermore, you can choose to drag elements along with their end points by checking this box.
Constraint
Creates the geometrical constraints Lets you specify whether or not you want to created the geometrical constraints detected by the SmartPick tool. Creates the dimensional constraints Lets you specify whether or not you want to created the dimensional constraints detected by the SmartPick tool. If both these detection options are unchecked, the Create detected constraints option will be inactive by default in the Tools toolbar. You will be able to activate it at any time. SmartPick... (switch button) As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities
as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired detections by clicking the SmartPick... button.
In the SmartPick dialog box that appears, the following options are available and selected by default: q Support lines and circles
q q q q q
Alignment Parallelism Perpendicularity Tangency Horizontal and vertical
Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect while sketching. Disabling SmartPick completely (i.e. unchecking all options in the SmartPick dialog box) is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable SmartPick to concentrate only on the geometry.
Colors
Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond to colors illustrating: q Graphical properties Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools>Options dialog box. OR
q
Constraint diagnosis Colors that represent constraint diagnoses are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnoses. As a result, as soon as the diagnosis is solved, the element is assigned the color as defined in the Tools->Options dialog box.
Default color of the elements From the list, choose the color that you want to use as the default for sketched elements. Visualization of diagnosis Select this option if you want over-constrained, inconsistent, not-changed or isoconstrained elements to be identified using specific colors. Then, click the Colors... button to configure these colors.
In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements: Over-constrained elements The dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied to the geometry. Inconsistent elements At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when elements are under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to a solution. Not-changed elements Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated. Iso-constrained elements All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its geometrical support. Other color of the elements Click the Colors... button to configure the colors of other elements.
In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements: Protected elements Non-modifiable elements. Construction elements A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch. This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives. SmartPick Colors used for SmartPick assistant elements and symbols.
3. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm your choices and to exit the Options dialog box.
Glossary
Glossary A
autoconstraint autodetection A constraint applied to an iso-element (a group of elements). An assistant for visualizing and, if needed, creating constraints between elements using the Sketcher.
C
Cartesian coordinate chamfer composite mark The coordinates of an element defined according to the horizontal and vertical position of this element. A cut through the thickness of the feature of an angle. This mark is the result of either the intersection of a 3D geometry component containing several sub-elements or of a face projection/ offset.
consecutive element An element that does not intersect with another element. constraint A geometric or dimension relation either on one element or between two or three elements. A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only construction element visualized by, the sketch. This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives. control point A control point is a point which a spline (tangent) passes through.
D
driving constraint A constraint that drives the behaviour of the corresponding geometry.
E
external constraints Constraints between a selected element and other elements in the sketch.
I
internal constraints Constraints on a selected element or between a group of selected elements.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysuggl.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:28:11 AM
Glossary
isobarycenter
A center of gravity created between previously selected elements.
O
offset A distance at which a duplicated line type element or curve type element can be positioned.
P
polar coordinate profile The coordinates of an element defined according to the radius and the angle of this element. An open or closed shape including arcs and lines created by the profile command in the Sketcher workbench.
R
rotation An operation for moving elements via duplication.
S
scaling sketch SmartPick standard element symmetry An operation that resizes features to a percentage of their initial sizes. A set of geometric elements created in the Sketcher workbench. For instance, a sketch may include a profile, construction lines and points. An assistant for visualizing and, if needed, creating constraints between elements using the Sketcher. Any type of element. An operation for repeating elements.
T
translation trace An operation for moving elements or creating several copies of twodimensional elements. A result from the intersection between an element and sketch face.
U
use edge A 2D trace resulting from a 3D projection or intersection.
Glossary
Index
Index
Numerics
3D elements intersecting projecting 3D silhouette edges creating projecting
A
absolute axis definition analyzing geometry sketch animating constraints arc of circle, creating arc, creating auto-constraint auto-search on a profile axis, creating
B
bisecting line, creating brackets breaking breaking elements
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugix.htm (1 of 12)10/19/2004 8:28:26 AM
Index
C
centered parallelogram applying constraints creating centered rectangle applying constraints creating chamfer with both elements trimmed with no element trimmed with one element trimmed changing a sketch support circle using coordinates, creating circle, creating closing elements colors brown green purple red white colors (settings) command 3D Silhouette Edges Animate Constraints Arc Auto Constraint Auto Search Axis Bisecting Line Break
Index
Centered Parallelogram Centered Rectangle Change a Sketch Support Circle Circle Using Coordinates Close Concentricity Conic Connect (with a spline) Connect (with an arc) Constraints Constraints (fixed / unfixed) Constraints (via a dialog box) Construction/Standard Element Construction/Standard Elements Cut Part by Sketch Plane Cylindrical Elongated Hole Dimensional Constraints Ellipse Elongated Hole Equidistant Points Geometrical Constraints Hexagon Hyperbola by Focus Infinite Line Intersect 3D Elements Intersection Point Isolate Keyhole Profile Line Line Normal to Curve Mirror
Index
Oriented Rectangle Output Feature Parabola by Focus Parallelogram Point Point Using Coordinates Profile Project 3D Elements Projection Point Quick Trim Rectangle Snap to Point Spline Symmetrical Extension Symmetry Three Point Arc Three Point Circle Three Points Arc Using Limits Translation Trim Trim All Elements Trim First Element Trim No Element Tri-Tangent Circle conic curves creating editing connecting curves editing with a spline with an arc constraint (settings)
Index
constraint definition, modifying constraint measure direction, defining constraints coincident colors concentric diameter dimensional fix geometrical horizontal parallel perpendicular radius vertical visualization while sketching constraints (via dialog box), creating constraints, editing construction element, creating construction elements, creating coordinates, modifying copying/pasting elements corner with both elements trimmed with construction lines trimmed with no element trimmed with one element trimmed with standard lines trimmed creating a point using projection a point using projection along a direction
Index
an arc axis bisecting line centered parallelogram centered rectangle chamfer with both elements trimmed chamfer with no element trimmed chamfer with one element trimmed circle circle using coordinates conic curves construction elements corner with both elements trimmed corner with no element trimmed corner with one element trimmed cylindrical elongated hole dimensional constraints ellipses equidistant points geometrical constraints hexagon hyperbola by focus infinite line mirrored elements oblong profile output features positioned sketch sketch spline offset standard elemetns three point circle curves
Index
connecting with a spline connecting with an arc customizing Sketcher cutting the part (by sketch plane) cylindrical elongated hole, creating
D
deactivating sketches dimensional constraint, creating dimensional constraints, creating
E
editing conic curves connecting curves intersection marks projection marks spline spline offset editing, profile elements trimming elements, closing ellipse, creating elongated hole, creating equidistant points, creating
G
geometrical constraint, creating
Index
geometrical constraints, creating geometry analyzing diagnosis geometry (settings) grid (settings)
H
hexagon hexagon, creating hyperbola by focus, creating
I
inconsistent, sketch infinite line, creating intersecting 3D elements intersection marks, editing intersections, isolating isolating intersections projections
K
keyhole profile, creating
L
lines normal to curves, creating
Index
lines, creating
M
menu bar mirrored element, creating modifying, constraint definition
O
offsetting operations on profiles, performing oriented rectangle, creating output features, creating over-constrained sketches, analyzing
P
pad, generating parabola by focus, creating parallelogram, creating parents/children, editing point using intersection, creating points using coordinates, creating points, creating positioned sketch, starting pre-defined profiles, sketching profile auto-search creating deleting
Index
editing transforming trimming projection marks, editing projections, isolating
Q
quickly analyzing, geometry
R
rectangle, creating replacing geometry
S
settings, customizing for Sketcher simple profiles, sketching sketch analyzing changing the support creating creating a positioned sketch deactivating inconsistent starting sketch plane (settings) sketch plane, cutting sketching, simple profiles smartpick, using
Index
smartpicking snap to point option, using spline creating editing spline offset creating editing standard element standard elements, creating symmetrical elements applying constraints moving symmetrical extension, creating
T
three point circle, creating three points arc using limits, creating three points arc, creating toolbar transforming, profile translating elements trimming trimming elements profile tri-tangent circle, creating
U
using
Index
snap to point option using smartpick using tools, sketching
W
workbench
Y
yellow, colors
Assembly Design
Assembly Design
Preface Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions What's New? Getting Started Entering Assembly Design Workbench and Opening a CATProduct Document Fixing a Component Inserting an Existing Component Setting Constraints Between Components Moving Constrained Components Using the Compass Adding and Renaming a New Component Designing a Part in an Assembly Context Editing a Parameter Replacing a Component Analyzing Assembly Constraints Reconnecting a Broken Constraint Detecting Clashes Editing a Component Displaying the Bill of Material Exploding the Assembly Basic Tasks Creating an Assembly Document Analyzing an Assembly Computing a Clash Computing a Clearance Analyzing Constraints Analyzing Dependencies Analyzing Updates Analyzing Degrees of Freedom Opening a CATIA Version 4 Assembly Document Defining a Multi-Instantiation Fast Multi-Instantiation Inserting an Existing Component with Positioning
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/asmugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 8:41:03 AM
Assembly Design
Assembly Constraints Creating a Coincidence Constraint Creating a Contact Constraint Creating an Offset Constraint Creating an Angle Constraint Fixing a Component Fixing Components Together Using the Quick Constraint Command Changing Constraints Deactivating or Activating Constraints Selecting the Constraints of Given Components Editing Constraints Updating an Assembly Updating One Constraint Only Modifying the Properties of a Constraint Using a Part Design Pattern Setting a Constraint Creation Mode Inconsistent or Overconstrained Assembly Searching for URLs Associated with Constraints Reordering Constraints in the Specification Tree Moving Components Translating Components Rotating Components Manipulating Components Snapping Components Smart Move Exploding a Constrained Assembly Stop Manipulation on Clash Using Assembly Tools Managing Products in an Assembly Publishing Elements Using a Standard Part Contained in a Parametric Catalog Modifying a Parametric Standard Part Contained in a Catalog Creating Annotations Creating Weld Features Creating Textual Annotations Flag Notes Detecting Clashes Detecting Interferences Reading Clash Command Results Viewing Results in a Dedicated Window Export Clash Results Sectioning About Sectioning
Assembly Design
Creating Section Planes Creating 3D Section Cuts Manipulating Planes Directly Positioning Planes On a Geometric Target Positioning Planes Using the Edit Position and Dimensions Command More About the Section Viewer Measuring Minimum Distances Improving Performances Advanced Tasks Modifying an Assembly Replacing Components Reconnecting a Replaced Representation Reconnecting Constraints Designing in Assembly Design Context About Design in Assembly Context Editing a CATPart in an Assembly Design Context Assembly Features Assembly Split Assembly Hole Using Hole Series Assembly Pocket Assembly Remove Assembly Add Assembly Symmetry Performing a Symmetry Modifying a Symmetry Rotating a Component by Using the Symmetry Command Flexible Sub-Assemblies Managing Part and Assembly Templates Introducing the Document Template Definition Window Creating a Part Template Instantiating a Part Template Adding an External Document to a Document Template Document Templates: Methodology To know more about Part and Assembly Templates... Scenes Creating Scenes Points Saving Viewpoints in a Scene Start Publish Editing a Scene Macro About Persistency in Scenes Applying a Scene to an Assembly
Assembly Design
Workbench Description Assembly Design Menu Bar Product Structure Toolbar Move Toolbar Constraints Toolbar Update Toolbar Constraint Creation Toolbar Assembly Features Toolbar Annotations Toolbar Space Analysis Toolbar Scene Toolbar Miscellaneous Symbols Specification Tree Symbols Reflecting an Incident in the Geometry Building Referenced Geometry Customizing Customizing for Assembly Design Assembly Settings Assembly Constraints Customizing for 3D Annotations Infrastructure Tolerancing Display Manipulators Annotation View/Annotation Plane Reference Information Constraints About Assembly Constraints Coincidence Constraints Contact Constraints Offset Constraints Angle Constraints Batches and Macros Data Upgrade for Large Assemblies Performances Glossary Index
Preface
Assembly Design
Assembly Design workbench allows the design of assemblies with an intuitive and flexible user interface. As a scalable workbench, Assembly Design Version 5 can be cooperatively used with other current companion products such as Part Design and Generative Drafting. The widest application portfolio in the industry is also accessible through interoperability with Solutions Version 4 to enable support of the full product development process from initial concept to product in operation. Digital Mock-Up (DMU) Navigator inspection capabilities can also be used to review and check your assemblies. Interactive, variable-speed techniques such as walk-through and fly as well as other viewing tools let you visually navigate through large assemblies. The Assembly Design User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create an assembly starting from scratch. This book aims at illustrating the several stages of creation you may encounter. Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions
Preface
Preface
Assembly Design workbench allows the design of assemblies with an intuitive and flexible user interface. As a scalable workbench, Assembly Design Version 5 can be cooperatively used with other current companion products such as Part Design and Generative Drafting. The widest application portfolio in the industry is also accessible through interoperability with Solutions Version 4 to enable support of the full product development process from initial concept to product in operation. Digital Mock-Up (DMU) Navigator inspection capabilities can also be used to review and check your assemblies. Interactive, variable-speed techniques such as walk-through and fly as well as other viewing tools let you visually navigate through large assemblies. The Assembly Design User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create an assembly starting from scratch. This book aims at illustrating the several stages of creation you may encounter. Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugpr01.htm10/19/2004 8:41:27 AM
Using This Guide
Using This Guide

This book is intended for the user who needs to become quickly familiar with the Assembly Design workbench. The user should be familiar with basic concepts such as document windows, standard and view toolbars. To get the most out of this guide, we suggest you start reading and performing the step-bystep tutorial Getting Started. This tutorial will show you how to create an assembly. For users who already know how to use the basic capabilities provided by the workbench, we recommend you read the Advanced User Tasks. For more information on accessing sample documents, refer to Accessing Sample Documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide. [ Next ]

Prior to reading this book, we recommend that you read Infrastructure User's Guide. Part Design User's Guide , Generative Drafting User's Guide, Product Structure Version 5 and V4 Integration User's Guide Version 5 may prove useful too. See also the Conventions used in this guide. [ Back ] [ Next ]
What's New?
What's New?
New Functionalities
Inserting an Existing Component with Positioning Insert a component and position it using the Smart Move. Data Upgrade for Large Assemblies Performances Tool to upgrade Assembly data to benefit from Releases 10-11-12 performances improvements.
Snapping Components The Snap will now work in full visualization mode. Coincidence Constraints Create a coincidence constraint between axis systems available.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugwn.htm10/19/2004 8:43:18 AM
Getting Started
Getting Started
If in Sketcher and Part Design you generated parts, now will learn how to finish your design by assembling parts in Assembly Design workbench. Before we discuss the detailed instructions for using the Assembly workbench, the following scenario aims at giving you a feel for what you can do with an Assembly document. You just need to follow the instructions as you progress. The Getting Started section is composed of the following tasks: Entering Assembly Design Workbench and Opening a CATProduct Document Fixing a Component Inserting an Existing Component Setting Constraints Between Components Moving Constrained Components Using the Compass Adding and Renaming a New Component Designing a Part in an Assembly Context Editing a Parameter Replacing a Component Analyzing Assembly Constraints Reconnecting a Broken Constraint Detecting Clashes Editing a Component Displaying the Bill of Material Exploding the Assembly This scenario should take about 15 minutes to complete. Eventually, the assembly will look like this:
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmuggs01.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 8:43:24 AM
Getting Started
Entering Assembly Design Workbench and Opening a CATProduct Document

This first task shows you how to enter Assembly Design workbench and how to open an existing product. 1. Select the Start -> Mechanical Design -> Assembly Design command to launch the required workbench. The workbench is opened. The commands for assembling parts are available in the toolbar to the right of the application window. For information on these commands, please refer to CATIAProduct Structure Version 5. You will notice that "Product1" is displayed in the specification tree, indicating the building block of the assembly to be created. To know how to use the commands available in the Standard and View toolbars located in the application window border, please refer to CATIA- Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5.
2. Before following the scenario, set the following options: make sure the option Work with the cache system is deactivated : use the Tools -> Options command, click Infrastructure -> Product Structure to the left of the dialog box that appears and uncheck the option "Work with the cache system". Do not forget to restart CATIA after turning off the cache. For more information, refer to Working with a Cache System. use the Tools -> Options command, click Infrastructure -> Product Structure to the left of the dialog box that appears, then click the Product Structure tab and uncheck the option "Manual Input". For more information, refer to Customizing Product Structure Settings.
use the Tools -> Options command, click Infrastructure ->Part Infrastructure to the left of the dialog box that appears, then check the option "Keep link with selected Object". For more information, refer to Customizing General Settings.
Note also that the default mode for the Update capability is "manual". For the purposes of this scenario, set the automatic mode. 3. Open GettingStarted.CATProduct. You will start the scenario with an existing assembly. Product1 is composed of three parts created in the Part Design Workbench: 1. CRIC_FRAME (in turquoise) 2. CRIC_BRANCH_3 (in blue) 3. CRIC_BRANCH_1 (in red) From now on, these parts will be referred to as 'components'.
Surface and Coincidence constraints have been defined for these parts in the Assembly workbench. 4. Select Edit -> Representations -> Design Mode. This mode lets you access technical data. 5. Click the + sign to the left of the Constraints text in the tree and apply the show mode on these constraints if you wish to view them in the geometry area.
[ Next ]
Fixing a Component
Fixing a Component
This task shows you how to set the first constraint. This operation consists in fixing the position of a component in space so as to use this component as the base of the assembly. 1. Select CRIC_FRAME in the specification tree or in the geometry area. 2. Click the Fix Component icon in the Constraints toolbar.
The component CRIC_FRAME is immediately fixed. The application indicates this by displaying a green anchor symbol on the component.
Note also that the Constraints branch now displays the new constraint. The anchor symbol is preceded by a lock symbol, to make a distinction between "fix in space" and "fix operations". For more information, pleaser refer to Fixing a Component.
Fixing a Component
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Inserting an Existing Component

This task shows you how to insert an existing component into the assembly.
1. Select Product1 in the specification tree. 2. Click the Existing Component icon The File Selection dialog box is displayed. 3. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B11doc\online\asmug\samples directory and select Sub_Product1.CATProduct in the Product Structure Tools toolbar.
4. Click Open. A new component is added to the specification tree. The assembly now includes four components: three parts and a sub-assembly.
This is the component you have just imported:
To know the different document types you can insert in a CATProduct document, refer to Product Structure Version 5. However, to know how to insert .asm documents properly, refer to Opening a .asm Document.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Setting Constraints Between Components

This task consists in setting a coincidence constraint, then a contact constraint between the component you have just inserted (Sub_Product1) and CRIC_BRANCH_1. 1. Click the Coincidence icon .
A message window appears, providing information on the coincidence constraint command. If you do not want to see this dialog box appear any more, check Do not prompt in the future. 2. Select Axis in the geometry area. The application detects it once selected. The axis is now highlighted in the geometry.
3. Select one of the two inner faces of CRIC_BRANCH_1 to select the associated axis.
As the coincidence constraint is created, CRIC_SCREW and CRIC_BRANCH_1 are aligned:
4. Now, you are going to set a contact constraint between CRIC_SCREW and a circular face of CRIC_BRANCH_1.
To do so, click the Contact Constraint icon
5. Select the face as shown in the geometry area.
6. Select the red circular face in the direction opposite to the published face.
As the contact constraint is created, the turquoise cylinder is located exactly on the red face.
The created constraints are automatically updated because the automatic update mode is activated. As the color defining valid constraints is green, our constraints are green. The application allows you to customize constraint colors as explained in Customizing Constraint Appearance.
The assembly now looks like this:
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Moving Constrained Components Using the Compass

This task consists in manipulating the assembly to check if the components react the way we want, i.e. according to the constraints we set in the previous task.
1. Select the red patch at the center of the compass and drag it onto CRIC_SCREW. For details about how to use the compass, please refer to CATIA- Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5. As the compass is snapped to the component, you can manipulate the component.
2. Now, if you press and hold down the Shift key, select v/z axis on the compass, then drag and drop the component up and down, you can see that three components are moving. This is an example of what we can get:
3. Repeat the operation as many times as you wish. The assembly reacts correctly. CRIC_FRAME does not move because it is fixed. The other three components can move.
4.
Release the left mouse button before releasing the Shift key.
5. Drag the compass away from the selected object and drop it.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Adding and Renaming a New Component

This task consists in adding a new component to the assembly. You will then rename this component. This component is a part created in the Part Design workbench. 1. Click Product1 and select the Part icon in the Product Structure Tools toolbar.
The New Part: Origin Point dialog box appears, presenting two possible options: Either you define the point of your choice to locate the new part, or you use the origin point of the assembly as the origin point to be used for the part. 2. Click No to use the origin point of the assembly. The new component "Part5 (Part5.1)" is now displayed in the specification tree:
If the Manual Input option is activated (see Defining the Default Part Number), the Part Number dialog box appears before the New Part: Origin Point dialog box and lets you enter the name of your choice. 3. Right-click Part5 (Part5.1) and select the Properties... contextual command. 4. In the Properties dialog box that appears. The options available in the Product tab let you enter the information you required.
5. Enter CRIC_JOIN.1 in the Instance name field and CRIC_JOIN in the Part Number field. 6. Click OK to validate the operation. The new names are now displayed in the specification tree:
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Designing a Part in an Assembly Context

This task consists in designing the part you have just added to the assembly. It shows you how easy it is to access the tools required for designing components in an assembly context. 1. Double-click CRIC_JOIN in the specification tree to access the Part Design workbench. Select the blue face as shown and click the Sketcher icon to access the Sketcher workbench.
2.
3.
Now that you are in the Sketcher, click the Normal View icon in the View toolbar and sketch a circle on the face using the Circle command . Do not bother about positioning the circle.
4.
Now to obtain the same radius value as the one used for CRIC_JOIN circular edge and to make sure that this circular edge and the circle share the same axis, use the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box command to create a coincidence constraint (select the circle -if not already done- and the circular edge, then click the Constraint Defined in Dialog Box command and check "Coincidence").
After validating the operation, the circle is coincident with the circular edge. You must obtain this:
5.
Exit the Sketcher and use the Pad command
with the "Up to Plane" option to
extrude the sketched circle. Select the blue face as shown to specify the limit of the pad.
After validating the operation, you should obtain this cylinder: The part is designed.
For information about Part Design and designing in context, refer to CATIA- Part Design User's Guide Version 5 and Designing in Assembly Context respectively.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Editing a Parameter
Editing a Parameter
In this task, you are going to edit the diameter of the pocket belonging to CRIC_BRANCH_3. You will see how this edition affects the part you created in the previous task. 1. Double-click CRIC_BRANCH_3 to access the Part Design workbench. 2. Select Pocket.2 and use the Pocket.2 object -> Edit Parameters contextual command to display the associated parameters.
3. Double-click D11 in the geometry area to display the Constraint Edition dialog box. 4. Enter 20 as the new diameter value and click OK to generate the new pocket.
Editing a Parameter
5. Update Product1 by double-clicking on Product1 in the specification tree. The pocket is modified accordingly. The coincidence previously set between the two parts is maintained. This result is made possible thanks to the option Keep link with selected Object you set at the very beginning of the scenario.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Replacing a Component
This task shows you how to replace Sub_Product1.CATProduct by another component.
1. Select Sub_Product1.CATProduct in the specification tree. 2. Click the Replace Component icon in the Product Structure Tools toolbar.
3. In the dialog box that appears, select Sub_Product2.CATProduct as the replacement component and click Open. The Impacts on Replace dialog box is displayed:
4. Check Yes to replace all instances of the selected element and click OK to confirm.
Sub_Product1.CATProduct is no longer visible. This is Sub_Product2.CATProduct:
If necessary update the document. Note that the coincidence constraint is maintained. This is due to the publication of the axis used in the constraint definition. As the axis is a published element, the application can reconnect the constraint. Conversely, the contact constraint is broken. You will know how to reconnect it later.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Analyzing Assembly Constraints

This task shows you how to analyze the status of all assembly constraints defined for Product1. 1. Select the Analyze -> Constraints... command. The Constraints Analysis dialog box that appears displays all the information you need. The Constraints tab contains a detailed status of the assembly: the number of non-constrained components and the status of the defined constraints.
2. Click the Broken tab to see the list of broken constraints. We have only one broken constraint, a contact constraint. 3. Click on the name of the constraint. The constraint is highlighted in the specification tree.
4. Click on OK to close the dialog box. Reconnecting this contact constraint is our next task.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Reconnecting a Broken Constraint

In this task, you will learn how to reconnect the broken constraint detected by the application. 1. Double-click the broken constraint in the specification tree. Note that this broken constraint is indicated by a yellow warning symbol.
2. In the Constraint Definition dialog box that appears, click More to access additional information. 3. Click Disconnected in the Status frame, then Reconnect...
4.
You are then prompted to select a component to rebuild the constraint. Select the same faces as the ones used for setting the first contact constraint. If you need some help, refer to Setting Constraints Between Components.
5. Click OK to validate the operation and update the document. The constraint is reconnected:
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Detecting Clashes
Detecting Clashes
In this task, you will learn how to detect possible clashes between two components. 1. Select CRIC_BRANCH_1.1 in the specification tree. Select the Analyze -> Compute Clash... command. 2. The Clash Detection dialog box appears. It displays the first component selected for computing possible clashes.
3. As you need another component, select SUB_PRODUCT2 using the Ctrl key. This component also appears in the dialog box.
4. Click Apply to compute clashes. The application detects a clash between the brown cylinder and the red face. This is indicated by two red circles in the geometry, as the arrow shows in the figure below:
Detecting Clashes
The result of the computation also appears in the dialog box.
5. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Well, now that you know that your assembly needs to be modified to work properly, let's edit the cylinder.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Editing a Component
Editing a Component
This task shows you how to edit the component causing the problem. 1. Double-click the brown cylinder to access the Part Design workbench.
2. Double-click the cylinder again to edit it. The Pad definition dialog box is displayed. 3. Enter 20mm to reduce the pad length and click OK.
4. The cylinder is updated and now looks like this:
Editing a Component
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Displaying the Bill of Material

This task shows you how to access all the information available about the structure of the assembly. 1. Return to Assembly Design workbench and select the Analyze -> Bill of Material... command. The Bill of Material is displayed.
It is composed of these sections: Bill of Material: lists all parts and sub-products one after the other Recapitulation: displays the total number of parts used in the product Define formats: customizes the display of the bill of material The Listing Report tab displays the tree of the product using indents 2. If you wish, you can save this document using the html format or the txt format. Just click the Save As... button, then give a name and the appropriate extension to your file. For more information about the bill of material, refer to Displaying the Bill of Material.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Exploding the Assembly

This last task illustrates the use of the Explode capability. Exploding the view of an assembly means separating the components of this assembly to see their relationships. 1. Make sure Product 1 is selected. 2. Click the Explode icon in the Move toolbar.
The Explode dialog box is displayed.
Product 1 is the assembly to be exploded. The Depth parameter lets you choose between a total (All levels) or partial (First level) exploded view. 3. Set All levels if not already set. 4. Set 3D to define the explode type. 5. Click Apply to perform the operation. The Scroll Explode field gradually displays the progress of the operation. The application assigns directions and distance. Once complete, the assembly looks like this:
The usefulness of this operation lies in the ability of viewing all components separately. Note that you can move products within the exploded view using the 3D compass.
6.
Click OK to validate the operation and then click Yes at the prompt or click Cancel to restore the original view. Well, you have done all the tasks of the Getting Started section. Why not consult the rest of the documentation?
[ Back ]
Basic Tasks
Basic Tasks
Here is the list of the tasks you will perform in this section: Creating an Assembly Document Analyzing an Assembly Opening a CATIA Version 4 Assembly Document Defining a Multi-Instantiation Fast Multi-Instantiation Inserting an Existing Component with Positioning Assembly Constraints Moving Components Using Assembly Tools Creating Annotations Detecting Clashes Sectioning Measuring Minimum Distances Improving Performances
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugbt0000.htm10/19/2004 8:45:24 AM
Creating an Assembly Document

This task will show you how to enter the Assembly Design workbench to create a new assembly from scratch. 1. Select the Start -> Mechanical Design -> Assembly Design command to launch the required workbench. The Assembly Design workbench is opened. You can see that "Product1" is displayed in the specification tree, indicating the building block of the assembly to be created. To create an assembly, you need products. The application uses the term "product" or "component" to indicate assemblies or parts. You can use parts to create products. Those products can in turn be used to create other products. The commands for assembling different products (or "components") are available in the toolbar "Product Structure Tools" to the right of the application window. For information on these commands, please refer to CATIA- Product Structure Version 5.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugbt0100.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 8:45:31 AM
The document contains: a specification tree to the left of the application window specific toolbars to the right of the application window a number of contextual commands available in the specification tree and in the geometry. Note that these commands can also be accessed from the menu bar.
[ Next ]
Analyzing an Assembly
Analyzing an Assembly
Compute a Clash: Select Analyze -> Compute Clash, multiselect the components and click Apply. Compute a Clearance: Select Analyze -> Compute Clash, multiselect the components, enter the clearance value and click OK. Analyze Constraints: Select Analyze -> Constraints, and select the constraints in the dialog box. Analyze Dependences: Select the component and the Analyze -> Dependency...command, check the display options of the dialog box or select elements and use the different contextual commands. Analyze Updates: Select the product or component of interest and select the Analyze -> Update command. Analyze Degrees of Freedom: Select the Analyze -> Degrees of Freedom command.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Computing a Clash
Computing a Clash Between Components

As assemblies may be very complex and are made up of a large number of components, you may find it difficult to see possible clashes. This task shows you how to analyze clashes or compute clearance between components. Open the AnalyzingAssembly01.CATProduct document. 1. Select Analyze -> Compute Clash... The Clash Detection dialog box is displayed. It lets you compute possible clashes or clearance. The default option is Clash. 2. Multiselect the components CRIC_FRAME1 and CRIC_BRANCH_3. The components are displayed in the Compute Clash dialog box.
3. Click Apply to compute a possible clash. The icon in the Result frame now flashes red indicating that an interference has been detected.
Computing a Clash
The application detects a clash between the components. This result is shown by two red areas as the arrow shows in the figure opposite:
4. Click Cancel. 5. Repeat the operation to compute a possible clash between CRIC_BRANCH1 and CRIC_BRANCH_3. The application detects a contact between the components. The icon in the Result frame now shows yellow indicating this.
Computing a Clash
6. Click Cancel to exit. 7. Repeat the operation to compute a possible clash between CRIC_JOIN1 and CRIC_BRANCH_1.1. The icon in the Result frame now shows green indicating that no interference has been detected.
Computing a Clash
[ Next ]
Computing a Clearance
Computing a Clearance Between Components

Once components have been added or constrained, you may need to analyze the clash or compute the clearance between components. This task shows you how to compute the clearance between two components of an assembly.
Open the AnalyzingAssembly01.CATProduct document. 1. Select Analyze -> Compute Clash.... The Clash Detection dialog box is displayed. 2. Select Clearance in the combo box. The Clash Detection dialog box displays a field where you specify the clearance value. 3. 4. 5. Enter the clearance value: 50 mm. Click the first component: CRIC_JOIN.1. Control-click the second component: CRIC_BRANCH_3.1. The components are displayed in the Clash Detection dialog box. 6. Click Apply to compute possible clearance. The application detects a clearance violation. The distance between the components is less than 50 mm. The status icon is yellow in the dialog box.
7. 8. 9.
Click Cancel to perform another operation. Now multiselect CRIC_BRANCH_3 and CRIC_BRANCH_1. Repeat steps from 1 to 3.
10. Click Apply. The application detects a contact between the components. The status icon in the dialog box has turned yellow.
11. Click Cancel to exit.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Analyzing Constraints
This task shows you how to analyze the constraints of an active component.
All the items displayed in the Constraint Analysis dialog box are editable according to their respective behavior (Copy, Cut, Paste, Delete, etc).
Open the AnalyzingAssembly02.CATProduct document. 1. Select Analyze -> Constraints. The Constraint Analysis dialog box is displayed. The Constraints tab displays the status of the constraints of the selected component: Active Component displays the name of the active component. Component displays the number of child components contained in the active component. Not constrained displays the number of child components not constrained in the active component. Status displays the status of the constraints: Verified displays the number of verified constraints Impossible displays the number of impossible constraints. "Impossible" means that the geometry is not compatible with the constraint. For example, a contact constraint between two cylinders whose diameter is different is impossible. The yellow unresolved symbol is displayed in the specification tree on the constraint type icon: . Not updated displays the number of constraints to be updated. The application has integrated new specifications, which affect constraints. The update symbol is displayed in the specification tree on the constraint type icon: . Broken displays the number of broken constraints. A reference element is missing in the definition of these constraints. It may have been deleted for example. You can then reconnect this constraint (see Reconnecting Constraints). The yellow unresolved symbol is displayed in the specification tree on the constraint type icon: . Deactivated displays the number of deactivated constraints (see Deactivating or Activating Constraints). The deactivated symbol is displayed in the specification tree. It precedes the constraint type icon: . Measure Mode displays the number of constraints in measure mode. Fixed Together displays the number of fix together operations Total displays the total number of constraints of the active component. In our scenario, the command displays the status of all constraints defined in AnalyzingAssembly product. Since CATIA V5R6, the command Analyze -> Constraints. displays the status of constraints defined for sub-assemblies too. What you have to do is set the combo box on top of the dialog box to the sub-assembly name of your choice.
In addition to the Constraints tab, the Broken tab and the Deactivated tab provide the name of the broken and deactivated constraints already indicated in the Broken and Deactivated fields. The constraints are clearly identified in these tabs and you can select them. Once selected, they are highlighted both in the tree and in the geometry area.
Additional tabs may be displayed if one of these constraint status exists: Impossible Not updated Measure Mode The tab Degrees of freedom also displays if all constraints of a given component are valid. To redefine the colors of the different type of constraints, see Customizing Constraint Appearance. This capability does not show overconstrained systems. The application detects them when performing update operations. For more information, see Inconsistent or Over-constrained Assemblies. You can also use the command Analyze -> Dependence. 2. Quit OK to exit and delete the following constraints to perform the rest of the scenario: Coincidence.12, Parallelism.15 and Line Contact.16. The document now contains only seven constraints. They all are verified. 3. 4. Select Analyze -> Constraints again. The Constraints Analysis dialog box no longer contains the tabs Broken and Deactivated. Click Degrees of freedom tab. The application displays this tab only if all constraints are verified. The tab displays the components affected by constraints and the number of degrees of freedom remaining for each of them.
5.
Double-click CRIC_TOP.1. The Degrees of Freedom Analysis dialog box displays.
One rotation as well as one translation remain possible for CRIC_TOP.1. For more information, please refer to Analyzing Degrees of Freedom.
6.
Click Close then OK to exit.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Analyzing Dependencies
Analyzing Dependences
This task shows you how to see the relationships between components using a tree.
Open the AnalyzingAssembly03.CATProduct document. 1. Select the component CRIC_BRANCH_3.1.
You can analyze the dependencies of your assembly by selecting the root of the tree too. 2. Select Analyze -> Dependencies.... The following dialog box is displayed:
3.
Right-click CRIC_BRANCH3.1 and select the Expand node contextual command. The constraints defined for this component then appear:
4.
Right-click CRIC_BRANCH3.1 again and select the Expand all contextual command. Now, the constraints and components related to the component you have selected are displayed:
You can notice that there are: - a coincidence constraint between CRIC_BRANCH_3.1 and CRIC_BRANCH_.1.1 . - a surface contact constraint between CRIC_BRANCH_3.1 and CRIC_FRAME_1.1. - a surface contact constraint - a coincidence constraint - a surface contact 5. Checking the different options available in the Elements frame, you can display the following: Constraints: by default, this option is activated. Associativity: shows components edited in Assembly Design context. Contextual components are linked to support components by green lines in the graph, as illustrated in the example below:
CRIC_AXIS.1 has been designed in Assembly Design context. Its geometry lies on CRIC_BRANCH_1.1 and CRIC_BRANCH_3.1 Relations: shows formulas. For more information, please refer to CATIA- Knowledge Advisor User's Guide Version 5.
6.
You can also display the relationships by filtering the components you wish to see. Either check the Child option to take the children of the component into account or check Leaf to hide them. Contextual commands are available: Expand all: lets you see the whole relationship. Note that double-clicking produces the same result. Show children: displays all children of the component Set as new root: sets the selected component as the component whose relationships are to be examined. Zooming in and zooming out in the tree is allowed.
7.
8.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Analyzing Updates
Analyzing Updates
Operations such as moving components or editing constraints sometimes affect the integrity of the whole assembly. You then need to know what to do to restore a correct product. The application provides a tool for detecting if your assembly requires updates. This tool is particularly useful when working with large assemblies. You can update a part or a product without updating the whole assembly, using the Analyze Update command. Open the AnalyzingAssembly04.CATProduct document. This scenario assumes that the Manual update option is on. For more about this option, refer to Update. 1. Select Analysis in the specification tree.
2.
Select the Analyze -> Update command. The Update Analysis dialog box is displayed.
Analyzing Updates
In our example, it provides the name of the entities to be updated, i.e: name of the product or component under study name of the constraints defined on this product or component name of the children of this product or component name of the constraints defined on the children In some cases, it also displays the name of the representations associated to parts. 3. Select Concidence.4 from the Constraints field. The application highlights this constraint both in the specification tree and in the geometry area. 4. Set the Components to be analyzed to Analysis/Product2. Two constraints need updating.
Analyzing Updates
5. 6.
Set the Components to be analyzed to Analysis. Click the Update tab and multi-select Analysis/Product2.
7.
Click the Update The part is updated:
icon to the right of the dialog box.
Analyzing Updates
8.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Analyzing Degrees of Freedom

This task explains how to see if you need to set additional constraints to the components making up your assembly. The analysis is performed from the active component and its child components set, but you must know that: Selecting of any sub-component of a child component returns the analysis of this child component relative to its active parent component only. If you want to analyze the sub-component relative to a child component, activate the child component before. Flexible child components (and their flexible sub-components) of the active component are not taken into account for the analysis. In this case, the analysis is performed from the first rigid subcomponent found in the selection, under the active component. Translations can be performed in a plane is represented by two vectors. These vectors define the translation plane but depending on the geometry, they can constitute an orthonormal system or not. In other words, a planar translation which normal to the plane has the coordinates (x=0, y=1, z=0) can sometimes be represented by: These two vectors: vector 1: x=0, 707107, y=0, z=0,707107 vector 2: x=-0, 707107, y=0, z=-0, 707107 or by these ones: vector 1: x=1, y=0, z=0 vector 2: x=-0, y=0, z=1 Open the AnalyzingAssembly04 CATProduct document.
1. Click the Update icon to update the assembly:
2. Right-click CRIC_SCREW (CRIC_SCREW.1) and select the Analyze -> Degrees of Freedom command command from the contextual menu.
The Degrees of Freedom Analysis dialog box is displayed.
The dialog box displays all rotations and translations that remain possible for the selected component. In our scenario, you can rotate CRIC_SCREW (CRIC_SCREW.1) in two ways or translate it in one way. If you look at the geometry, you can notice that these rotations and translations are represented in yellow. 3. Click the Rotation_2 button. The graphic element representing this possible rotation is now highlighted in the geometry for easy identification.
As detailed in the dialog box, you can perform a rotation around the vector which coordinates are x=1, y=0 and z=0 and using the point with coordinates x=0, y=-23.4839 and z=-151.254 as the rotation center. 4. Click the Translation_2 button. The graphic element representing this possible rotation is now highlighted too.
As detailed in the dialog box, you can perform a translation along the vector which coordinates are x=0, y=0.984808 and z=-0.173648. 5. Click Close to exit the command.
[ Back ]
Opening a CATIA Version 4 Assembly Document

This task will show you how to open a .asm document, that is a CATIA V4 assembly into Assembly Design Product. 1. 1. Click the Open icon or select the File->Open... command.
The File Selection dialog box appears. 2. 3. 4. In the File Selection box, select the file location. Select the .asm document of interest. Click Open. The application converts the .asm document into a .CATProduct document. The new document has the same properties as the V4 document. However, if the name of the V4 document includes special characters, CATIA converts these characters into new ones according to the characters equivalence table. For more about this table, please refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide.
In our example, the CRIC product normally includes three sub-products (BRANCH, CRIC_SCREW and CRIC_FRAME), but the application informs us that these components could not be retrieved. As a consequence, geometry is not available and constraints appear as broken in the specification tree:
3.
What you need to do is resolve the links to these documents. To do so, use the "Linked Document Localization" capability. To access it, select the Tools>Options... command then in the General category, click the Document tab. Proceed as explained in CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide. Once the operation is done, you can reopen your .asm document and note that the links are resolved. You can then perform any operation you want. When saving this CATProduct document, you will not alter the original .asm document.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Defining a Multi-Instantiation
This task shows you how to repeat components as many times as you wish in the direction of your choice. The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" is now available for this command. For more about this option, refer to Access to geometry. Open the Multi_Instantiation.CATProduct document. 1. Select the component you wish to instantiate, that is CRIC_BRANCH_3.
2.
Click the Define Multi-Instantiation icon
The Multi-Instantiation dialog box is displayed, indicating the name of the component to be instantiated. The shortcut Ctrl + E calls the command too.
3.
The Parameters option lets you choose between the following categories of parameters to define: Instances & Spacing Instances & Length Spacing & Length Keep the Instances & Spacing parameters option and enter 3 as the number of instances and 90mm as the value for the spacing between each component.
4.
To define the direction of creation, check x axis. There is another way of defining a direction. You can select a line, axis or edge in the geometry. In this case, the coordinates of these elements appear in the Result field. Clicking the Reverse button reverses the direction.
The application previews the location of the new components:
5.
Make sure the option Define as Default is on. If it is so, the parameters you have just defined are saved and will be reused by the Fast Multi-Instantiation command. Click OK to create the components. Three additional components are created in the x direction. The tree displays them as well.
6.
The Apply button executes the command but the dialog box remains open so as to let you repeat the operation as may times as you wish.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Fast Multi-Instantiation
This task shows you how to repeat components using the parameters previously set in the Define Multi_Instantiation command. You will use the Fast Multi-Instantiation command to quickly repeat the component of your choice. The operation is very simple. Make sure the option Work with the cache system is deactivated (for more refer to Working with a Cache System) and open the Fast_Multi_Instantiation.CATProduct document. 1. Select the component you wish to instantiate, that is CRIC_BRANCH_3.
2.
Click the Fast Multi-Instantiation icon The shortcut Ctrl + D calls the command too.
The result is immediate. Three components are created according to the parameters defined in the Multi-Instantiation dialog box.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Inserting an Existing Component with Positioning

This task will show you how to insert and position a component as the same operation. This functionality is an enhancement of the Insert Existing Component command for Assembly Design workbench. The Smart Move interface will enable the easy positioning of inserted components in the assembly, at the very moment of their insertion. It will also enable the positioning by creation of constraints. If there is no geometry to position when the component is inserted, this functionality has the same behavior as the Insert Existing Component command plus a visualization. See Smart Move. Open the MovingComponents01 CATProduct document.
1. Click the Existing Component with Positioning icon:
2. Select the CRIC_JOIN CATPart document. The Smart Move dialog box appears. 3. In this dialog box, select the axis of the part.
4. In this geometry window, select the axis of the CRIC_BRANCH_3 part.
CRIC_JOIN is snapped with CRIC_BRANCH_3 part.
5. Click OK in the Smart Move dialog box.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Assembly Constraints
Using Assembly Constraints

This section describes the notions and operating modes you will need to set and use constraints in your assembly structure. Constraints allow you to position mechanical components correctly in relation to the other components of the assembly. You just need to specify the type of constraints you wish to set up between two components, and the system will place the components exactly the way you want. You can also use constraints to indicate the mechanical relationships between components. In this case, constraints are included in the specifications of your assembly. Create a Coincidence Constraint: Click this icon, select the faces to be constrained and enter the properties of the constraint in the dialog box. Create a Contact Constraint: Click this icon and select the faces to be constrained. Create an Offset Constraint: Click this icon, select the faces to be constrained and enter the properties of the constraint in the dialog box. Create an Angle Constraint: Click this icon, select the faces to be constrained and enter the properties of the constraint in the dialog box. Fix a Component: Click this icon and select component to be fixed. Fix Components Together: Click this icon, select the components to be fixed and enter a name for this group in the dialog box. Quick Constraint: Check the list of constraint creation, click the icon and select the elements to be constrained. Change Constraint: Select the constraint to be changed, click this icon and select the new type of constraint in the dialog box. Deactivate or Activate Constraints: Select the constraint to be (de)activated and use the Deactivate or Activate contextual command.
Select the Constraints of Given Components: Select the components, right-click and select xxx object -> Component Constraints contextual command.
Editing Constraints: you can cut and paste , copy and paste and even delete constraints. Update an Assembly: constraints displayed in black indicate they need an update. Just click this icon. Update One Constraint Only: Right-click the constraint to be updated and select the Update contextual command. Modify the Properties of a Constraint: Double-click the constraint and enter new properties in the dialog box. Use a Part Design Pattern: Select the pattern, select the component to be repeated, click this icon and enter the specifications in the dialog box.
Set a Constraint Creation Mode: Click any of these three constraint creation mode icons
Inconsistent or Over-constrained Assembly Search for URLs Associated with Constraints: Click this icon and select the constraint of interest.
Reordering Constraints in the Specification Tree
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Creating a Coincidence Constraint

This task consists in applying a constraint between two faces. See Coincidence Constraints reference. Before constraining the desired components, make sure it belongs to a component defined as active (the active component is blue-framed and underlined). Open the Constraint1.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Coincidence Constraint icon:
2. Select the face to be constrained, that is the red face as shown.
3. Select the second face to be constrained, that is the blue circular face in the direction opposite to the red face. Green arrows appear on the selected faces, indicating orientations.
4. The Constraint Properties dialog box that appears displays the properties of the constraint. The components involved and their status are indicated. You can define the orientation of the faces to be constrained by choosing one of these options: Undefined (the application finds the best solution) Same Opposite Note that when changing a 'Same' orientation into an 'Opposite' orientation or vice-versa, the application may sometimes positions the parts in an unexpected way especially if your system is under-constrained. For the purposes of our scenario, set the Opposite option.
5. Click OK to create the coincidence constraint. The application chooses which component is to be moved to adopt its new position. As the assembly is not iso-constrained, any component can be moved. In other words, you cannot control which component(s) will be moved. Green graphic symbols are displayed in the geometry area to indicate that this constraint has been defined. This constraint is added to the specification tree too.
Graphic symbols used for constraints can be customized. For more information, refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance.
[ Next ]
Creating a Contact Constraint

This task consists in applying a constraint between two faces. See Contact Constraints reference. Before constraining the desired components, make sure it belongs to a component defined as active (the active component is blue framed and underlined). Open the Constraint7.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Contact Constraint icon:
2. Select the face to be constrained, that is the red face as shown.
3. Select the second face to be constrained, that is the blue inner face in the direction opposite to the red face. As the contact constraint is created, the red component is moved so as to adopt its new position. Green graphic symbols are displayed in the geometry area to indicate that this constraint has been defined. This constraint is added to the specification tree too.
Graphic symbols used for constraints can be customized. For more information, refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance .
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Creating an Offset Constraint

This task consists in applying an offset constraint between two faces. See Offset Constraints reference. Before constraining the desired components, make sure it belongs to a component defined as active (the active component is blue-framed and underlined). Open the AssemblyConstraint02.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Offset Constraint icon:
2. Select the face to be constrained, that is the yellow face as shown.
3. Select the second face to be constrained, that is the blue face in the direction opposite to the yellow face.
Green arrows appear on the selected faces, indicating the orientations.
The Constraint Properties dialog box that appears displays the properties of the constraint. The components involved and their status are indicated. You can define the orientation of the faces to be constrained by choosing one of these options: Undefined (the application finds the best solution) Same Opposite Note that when changing a Same orientation into an Opposite orientation or viceversa, the application may sometimes positions the parts in an unexpected way especially if your system is under-constrained. For the purposes of our scenario, keep the Opposite option.
4. Enter 38 mm in the Offset field.
5. Click OK to create the offset constraint. A green arrow is displayed in the geometry area to indicate that this constraint has been defined. The offset value is displayed too. This constraint is added to the specification tree too.
Graphic symbols used for constraints can be customized. For more information, refer to Constraint Creation .
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Creating an Angle Constraint

This task consists in setting an angle constraint between two planes. See Angle Constraints reference. Before constraining the desired components, make sure it belongs to a component defined as active (the active component is blue-framed and underlined). Open the AssemblyConstraint03.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Angle Constraint icon:
2. Select the face to be constrained, that is the blue face as shown.
3. Select the second face to be constrained, that is the red face in the same direction of the blue face.
The Constraint Properties dialog box is displayed with the properties of the selected constraint and the list of available constraints: Perpendicularity
Parallelism (you then need to define the orientation of the faces. You can choose between Undefined, Same, Opposite options) Angle Planar angle (an axis is to be selected. This axis must belong to both planes) Note that when changing a Same orientation into an Opposite orientation or vice-versa, the application may sometimes positions the parts in an unexpected way especially if your system is under-constrained.
4. Keep the Angle option.
5. Enter 40 deg in the Angle field and keep Sector 1.
Note that four sectors are available: 6. Click OK to create the angle constraint. As the angle constraint is created, the red component is moved so as to adopt its new position. A green arrow is displayed in the geometry area to indicate that this constraint has been defined. The angle value is displayed too. This constraint is added to the specification tree too.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Fixing a Component
Fixing a Component
Fixing a component means preventing this component from moving from its parents during the update operation. There are two ways of fixing a component: by fixing its position according to the geometrical origin of the assembly, which means setting an absolute position. This operation is referred to as "Fix in space". by fixing its position according to other components, which means setting a relative position. This operation is referred to as "Fix". This scenario first shows you how to fix a component in space, then how to fix it. Before fixing the desired component, make sure it belongs to a component defined as active. Open the Fix.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Fix icon .
Fix in Space
This command is also available from the Insert menu. By default, the Fix command fixes components in space. 2. Select the component to be fixed, that is the light blue component. The constraint is created. A green anchor is displayed in the geometry area to indicate that this constraint has been defined.
A lock symbol preceding the anchor is displayed in the specification tree too:
Fixing a Component
Graphic symbols used for constraints can be customized. For more information, refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance. 3. Move the fixed component using the compass.
4.
Update the assembly to see which component is moved: the fixed component returns to its previous location:
Fixing a Component
Fix
5. 6. 7. Double-click the fix constraint you have just created to edit it. In the dialog box that appears, click More to expand the dialog box. Uncheck the Fix in space option to the left of the dialog box. The lock symbol is no longer displayed in the specification tree, meaning that the component is positioned according to the other components only. Move the fixed component using the compass. Click OK to confirm.
8. 9.
10. Update the assembly: now the component remains at its location. Conversely, the dark blue component is moved to the fixed component.
Fixing a Component
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Fixing Components Together

This task consists in fixing two components together. The Fix Together command attaches selected elements together. You can select as many components as you wish, but they must belong to the active component. Open the Fix.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Fix Together icon .
This command is also available from the Insert menu and works both in design and visualization mode. 2. 3. Select CRIC_FRAME. Select CRIC_BRANCH_3. You can select the components in the specification tree or in the geometry area.
4.
The Fix Together dialog box appears, displaying the list of selected components. To remove a component from the list, just click it.
5. 6.
In the Name field, enter a new name for the group of components you want to create. For instance, enter FT1. Click OK. The components are attached to each other. Note Moving one of them (using the compass combined with the Shift key or using the option "With respect to constraints" in the Manipulate dialog box) moves the other one too. The specification tree displays this operation.
Because you can inadvertently move these components, the application displays a warning message to remind you that you are moving components fixed together. If you prefer not to see such a message, just deactivate the display option. To know more about this option, refer to Move Components.
A Few Notes about Fix Together

You can select a set of attached components to apply the Fix Together command between this set and other components. You can set constraints between components belonging to a set of components fixed together. If you set a constraint between a component and a set of attached components, the whole set is affected by the constraint. You can deactivate or activate a set of attached components by using the Deactivate/ Activate contextual command available in the specification tree. Red parentheses preceding the graphic symbol indicate deactivated sets.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Using the Quick Constraint Command

The Quick Constraint command creates the first possible constraint as specified in the priority list. This task consists in using this command to create two constraints. Open the QuickConstraint.CATProduct document. 1. Make sure the list specifying the order of constraint creation is composed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Surface contact Coincidence Offset Angle Parallelism
For more about this list, please refer to Quick Constraint. 2. Double-click the Quick Constraint icon Select the axis as shown. .
3. Select the axis of AXIS_BRANCH_3. As the application cannot set a surface contact due to the type of selected elements, it creates the second optional constraint mentioned in the list, that is a coincidence constraint.
4.
Now select the faces as shown:
The first constraint in the list can now be set. A surface contact constraint is created.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Changing Constraints
Changing a constraint means replacing the type of this constraint by another type. This operation is possible depending on the supporting elements. You can select any constraints, not necessarily in the active component. This task consists in changing the parallelism constraint into an offset constraint. Open the AssemblyConstraint05.CATProduct document. 1. Select the constraint to be changed.
2.
Click the Change Constraint icon
The Change Type dialog box that appears, displays all possible constraints.
3. 4. 5.
Select the new type of constraint. For the purposes of our scenario, select Offset. Click Apply to preview the constraint in the specification tree and the geometry. Click OK to validate the operation.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Deactivating or activating constraints means specifying if these constraints must be taken into account during updates or not. This task consists in deactivating then activating a constraint. Open the AnalyzingAssembly04.CATProduct document and make sure the Design Mode is on. 1. Select any activated constraint. For example, select Coincidence.3.
2.
Right-click and select the Deactivate contextual command. The constraint is deactivated. The graphic symbol representing the deactivated constraint is now displayed in white. Red parentheses precede the constraint in the specification tree.
3.
Repeat step 1 and right-click to select the Activate contextual command to activate the selected constraint.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Selecting the Constraints of Given Components

This task consists in selecting all the constraints defined for a component. You can only select child components of the active component. The Component Constraints command allows you to select the constraints linked to one or more selected components. These components are child components of the active component. Open the GettingStarted.CATProduct document, use the Show capability if the constraints are not visible, and ensure the design mode is on. 1. Select the component whose constraints are to be selected. Multiselection is also possible.
2.
Right-click and select CRIC_FRAME.1 object -> Component Constraints contextual command. The application highlights two constraints, both in the specification tree and the geometry area.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Editing Constraints
Editing Constraints
In the following paragraphs, you will learn how to edit but also cut and paste, copy and paste and even delete constraints. Concerning angle and offset constraints, you can copy or cut then paste their values. To edit a constraint: 1. Click the constraint of interest. You can select the constraint in the specification tree or in the geometry. 2. Double-click the constraint to be edited to display the related dialog box: in which you can modify its properties:
Tips
Note that selecting a component's name displays the component's path as a tooltip in a small box.
Two contextual commands improving display are available in the Supporting Elements field: - "Reframe on" views the constraint of the selected component at the center of the CATIA window - "Center Graph" zooms in the selected component in the specification tree.
Cutting and Pasting a Constraint
Editing Constraints
To cut a constraint: 1. Click the constraint of interest. You can select the constraint in the specification tree or in the geometry. 2. Then click the Cut icon .
This command is also available from the Edit menu or contextual menu. The constraint is cut. You can now paste it. 3. Click the Paste icon The constraint is pasted.
Copying and Pasting a Constraint

To copy and paste a constraint:: 1. Click a constraint. You can select the constraint in the specification tree or in the geometry. 2. Then click the Copy icon .
This command is also available from the Edit menu or contextual menu. 3. Click the Paste icon The constraint is copied.
Deleting Constraints
To delete a constraint: 1. Right-click the constraint to be deleted. You can select the constraint in the specification tree or in the geometry. 2. Then select Delete from the contextual menu. This command is also available from the Edit menu. Pressing the Delete key deletes the constraint too. The constraint is deleted.
Editing Constraints
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Updating an Assembly
This section describes how to update the whole assembly. Updating an assembly means updating its components as well as its constraints. The application lets you choose between updating the whole assembly or the components of your choice. The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" is available for this command. For more about this option, refer to Access to geometry.
The constraints are in black, indicating they need an update. The default color is black, but the application allows you to redefine the colors you want. To do so, refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance.
1. Select the Tools -> Options command, then expand the Mechanical Design section to the left to access Assembly Design options. You can choose between two update modes within the Assembly Design workbench: Automatic Manual Note that this is a way of enhancing productivity: for instance, you can now use the automatic update mode when designing your parts in Assembly context, while having the Manual update mode activated for your assembly. You can also define whether you need to update the active level or all the levels.
2. Check the Manual option in the Update frame.
3. Click OK to confirm and close the dialog box. 4. Click the Update icon to update the whole assembly.
The assembly is updated. Graphic symbols are green, indicating that the constraints are valid.
To update only some components, select the components of interest and use the Update contextual command. Note however that applying the contextual command to a component may sometimes induce a general update if the assembly is a complex one made up of several components.
To see what happens when an update operation fails, refer to Over-constrained Assemblies. See also Analyzing Updates.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Updating One Constraint Only

When you need to update your constraints, either you update all the constraints of the active component or update one or more constraints of the active component. By default, constraints needing an update are displayed in black. To redefine the colors of the constraints, please refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance. This task consists in updating the constraints you explicitly specify.
1. Right-click the constraint to be updated. Constraints needing an update are displayed with specific graphic properties. The Properties dialog box indicates too if constraints need updates or not. For more information, please refer to Modifying the Properties of a Constraint. You can select the constraint in the specification tree or in the geometry. 2. Select Update from the contextual menu. The selected constraint is updated. 3. Click the second constraint to be updated. 4. Control-right-click the third constraint to be updated. 5. Select the Update contextual command. The two selected constraints are updated too. Remember, valid constraints are green by default.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Modifying the Properties of a Constraint

This task consists in modifying the mechanical properties and attributes of a constraint.
Open the AssemblyConstraint02.CATProduct document and create an offset constraint. 1. Right-click the offset constraint to be modified. You can select the constraint in the specification tree or in the geometry.
2. Select Properties from the contextual menu. The Properties dialog box that appears displays four tabs.
Constraint tab
The Constraint tab displays the name of the constraint as well as the name and type of the supporting components. You can rename the constraint if desired. The constraint status is also indicated. In our scenario, the constraint is connected. To find out how to reconnect broken or misconnected constraints, please refer to Reconnecting Constraints. 3. Enter a new value in the Offset field. For example, enter 75 mm. 4. Set the Orientation option to Same so as to reverse the blue component. Instead of using the Properties contextual command to edit the properties as described above, you can double-click the constraint to be edited to display the related dialog box: in which you can modify the same properties:
Mechanical tab
5. Click the Mechanical tab. 6. Three attributes characterize constraints: Deactivated: deactivated constraints are not taken into account when updating the assembly To update: the constraint does not reflect the latest changes to the assembly Unresolved: the application detects problems 7. Check Deactivated. The constraint is modified accordingly.
Note that parentheses precede the constraint value, indicating that the constraint is deactivated. These parentheses precede the name of the constraint in the specification tree too. The color of the graphic symbol is modified.
Feature Properties tab

8. Click the Feature Properties tab. This tab displays the constraint's name as well as its creation and last modification date. You can edit the constraint's name.
Graphic tab
9. Click the Graphic tab. The Graphic tab lets you define the graphic properties of your constraint. Color Line type (Dotted, Small dotted etc.) Thickness (Different values) Select the color of your choice from the list. You can also define your own colors by selecting the More Colors... command at the bottom of the list. To know more about defining personal colors, please refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide. You cannot define a new color for deactivated constraints. For the purposes of our scenario, you need to reactivate the constraint.
If you wish to change the color for a given status (resolved, unresolved, over-contrained, invalid geometry) use the Tools -> Options command. For more, see Customizing Constraint Appearance.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Using a Part Design Pattern

This task shows you how to repeat a component using a pattern created in Part Design. Three types of patterns are available: Rectangular pattern Circular pattern User pattern You can now use Generative Shape Design patterns. The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" is available for the Reuse Pattern command. For more about this option, refer to Access to geometry. Open the Pattern.CATProduct document. 1. Select the rectangular pattern in the tree or in the geometry.
2.
Control-click to select the component to be repeated, that is Part2. Selecting a constraint linking a pattern to a component selects both the pattern and the component.
3.
Click the Reuse Pattern icon
The Instantiation on a pattern dialog box is displayed, indicating the name of the pattern, the number of instances to be created (for information only) and the name of the component to be repeated.
There are two work modes: Using associativity with the geometry: the option "Keep link with the pattern" is on Using no associativity: the option is off.
Working with associativity, you can decide whether you need to make instances associative with the pattern or generated constraints. 4. For the purposes of our scenario, ensure that the option "Keep link with the pattern" is on and check "pattern's definition" to make instances associative with the pattern's geometry. To know more about associativity with constraints, refer to "Re-using constraints".
5.
To define the first instance of the component to be duplicated, three options are available. reuse the original component: the original component is located on the pattern, but remains at the same location in the tree. create a new instance: the original component does not move and a new one is created on the pattern. cut & paste the original component: the original component is located on the pattern and moved in the tree. For our scenario, make sure the option "re-use the original component" is on.
6.
To control the location of the components in the tree, two options are available: You can check the option "Put new instances in a flexible component" to gather all instances in the same component, or conversely uncheck the option to create as many components as there are generated instances. Check the option "Put new instances in a flexible component".
7.
Click OK to repeat the screw. 31 instances are created on the pattern.
The new component "Gathered Part2 on RectPattern.1" is displayed in the tree. An entity "Assembly features" has been created in the tree. "Reused Rectangular Pattern.1" is displayed below this entity.
The Apply button executes the command but the dialog box remains open so as to let you repeat the operation as may times as you wish. 8. Double-click RectPattern.1 to edit it. For example, enter 5 instances for both directions.
9. Return to Assembly Design and make sure that the assembly is updated. You can notice that associativity between the pattern and the instances of Part2 has been maintained since the option "Keep link with pattern" and "Pattern's definition" were switched on. Only 17 instances have been generated.
Re-using Constraints
If you use the option "generated constraints", the Reuse Constraints section displays the constraints detected for the component and makes all original constraints available for selection: You can define whether you wish to reproduce one or more original constraints when instantiating the component.
To remove a constraint from the list, click on that constraint. To remove all constraints from the list, click "Clear". Conversely, Click "All" to include all constraints in the selection.
Contextual Commands
The following contextual commands are available for Reused Rectangular Pattern.1: Definition: displays information on the pattern. If constraints are not verified, you can select them and apply a local update.
Deactivate/Activate: deactivates or activates the constraints defined on the instances
More about Patterns

This task you have just performed shows you that you can reuse constraints set between the part to be duplicated and the pattern: the generated instances are constrained too. You can reuse constraints set between the part to be patterned and other parts. In the following example, two constraints are set between screw.1 to be patterned and Tray.1 (green part) and two other constraints are set between the screw.1 and Bracket.1 (blue part).
After applying the Reuse Pattern command to the screw, generated instances are constrained too:
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Setting a Constraint Creation Mode
This task shows you how to set one of the three modes available to create constraints. These modes are: Default mode Chain mode Stack mode Open the Constraint_Creation.CATProduct document. Default mode 1. Click the Default mode icon if not already activated.
This mode lets you create as many constraints as you wish by explicitly selecting two geometrical elements. In our example, you can set an offset constraint between the highlighted face and the face of another geometrical element. For the purposes of this scenario, double-click the offset constraint icon to make it permanently active.
The offset constraint
icon still active, you can then set another offset
constraint between two other faces.
2.
For the purposes of our scenario, delete these constraints.
Chain mode 1. Click the Chain icon.
This mode lets you create as many constraints as you wish by always reusing the last face you selected.
2.
constraint between the second face you selected and any other face.
3.
constraint between the third face you selected and any other face.
And so on... 4. For the purposes of our scenario, delete these constraints.
Stack mode 1. Click the Stack icon.
This mode lets you create as many constraints as you wish by reusing the very first face you selected to create the first constraint.
2.
constraint between the first face you selected and any other face.
3.
constraint between the first face you selected and any other face.
4.
And so on...
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Inconsistent or Overconstrained Assembly
Inconsistent or Over-constrained Assemblies

This task shows you what happens when the application detects an over-constrained assembly. Open the AssemblyConstraint02.CATProduct document. 1. Set an offset constraint to obtain this:
2. Set a second offset constraint as shown below.
3. Update the assembly. The update operation detects difficulties to obtain a valid constrained system: a dialog box appears providing the diagnosis of the problem.
The constraints involved in the inconsistent or over-constrained system are displayed. The application indicates the constraint causing trouble (Offset.8) constraint Offset.6, which is valid but involved in the inconsistent or overconstrained system 4. To resolve the problem, you can edit deactivate isolate delete Offset.8 or even Offset.6: you just need to decide the constraint you wish to modify. 5. Select Offset.6 and click the Deactivate button. 6. Close the dialog box and update the assembly. The system is now consistent.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Searching for URLs Associated with Constraints

This task shows you how to check that a constraint has been assigned URLs (Universal Resource Locators), then how to search for a given URL. Open the MovingComponents02. CATProduct document that contains URLs created in the Knowledge Advisor workbench. 1. Click the Comment and URLs icon . The URLs and Comment dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the constraint "Surface contact.18". The URL field indicates that this constraint has been assigned two URLs: "Dassault Systmes" and "Delmia".
3.
Click "Delmia". The associated URL is displayed in the URL field. You just need to click the Go button to access the corresponding web site.
Searching for a URL

4. Click the Explore tab. The list of all the URLs assigned to all the constraints defined in this CATProduct document is displayed. 5. Enter the name of the URL to be searched for in the Search field. For example, enter "Delmia".
6. Click Search. If the specified URL is found, "yes" is displayed in the Found column. In the Edit tab, the URL is highlighted.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task shows you how to modify the location of assembly constraints in the specification tree to classify them the way you want. The application lets you reorder constraints but also gather them in sets. You can perform these operations within the Constraints node. You can move all types of constraints. What is more, the application does not take their status into account: if they are deactivated or even broken, you can relocate them. Whatever operation you perform for modifying their locations in the tree, it never affects the geometry of your assembly. Reordering Constraints Gathering Constraints in a Set Creating a Set Before Gathering Constraints Handling Sets Open the AnalyzingAssembly02. CATProduct document.
Reordering Constraints
1. Select 'Coincidence.4' as the constraint to be moved and right-click the Coincidence.4 object-> Reorder constraints contextual command.
2.
Select 'Coincidence.10' as the constraint below which 'Coincidence.4' is to be located. 'Coincidence.4" has been moved:
Gathering Constraints in a Set
3. To group 'Surface contact.5' and 'Surface contact.6' constraints, multi-select them and use the Selected objects -> Group in new set contextual command. The application has created 'Set.1' containing both surface constraints. 4. Select 'Set.1' and right-click to use the Properties contextual command. 5. Rename 'Set.1' as 'Surface Contact Constraints' in the Feature Name field of the Properties dialog box that appears.
6. Expand this node. You must obtain this:
Creating a Set Before Gathering Constraints

7. Select the node 'Constraints' and right-click to use the Constraints object->Add Set contextual command. A new set, 'Set.2', appears in the tree, at the same level as 'Surface Contact Constraints' set. It has been created at the first level of the Constraints node.
8. Multiselect 'Coincidence.7', 'Coincidence.10' and 'Coincidence.4' and right-click to use the Selected objects -> Reorder constraints contextual commands. 9. Select Set.2 as the new location for these constraints. 10. Expand the new node to check that Set.2 contains the three constraints:
Handling Sets
11.Right-click 'Set.2' and select 'Set.2 object' to display the contextual menu available for this node. The following contextual commands are available: Add set: creates a set at the level below (in our example, 'Set.3' would be created below 'Set.2') Remove set: deletes the set, not the constraints it contained Group in new set: locates the selected set within a new set Move Set after: moves the set after the set you select Move Set inside: moves the set within the set you select
If you multi-select a 'fix together' entity and any constraint, you cannot apply these contextual commands.
[ Back ]
Moving Components
Moving Components
Translate Components: Click this icon, select the component to be translated and enter the offset values. Rotate Components: Click this icon, click the Rotation tab, select the component to be rotated, choose an axis and enter the angle values. Manipulate Components: Click this icon, click the parameters you wish, select the component to be moved and drag this component . Snap Components: Click this icon and select both elements. Smart Move: Click this icon, check the Automatic constraint creation option and select the components to be moved and constrained. Explode a Constrained Assembly: Click this icon, select the parameters you need and select the assembly to be exploded. Stop Manipulation on Clash [ Back ] [ Next ]
Translating Components
This task will show you two ways to translate a component: by entering translation values by selecting geometrical elements to define a translation direction. If you are working in Assembly Design workbench, this task is P1-only. Using P2 configuration, you can rotate constrained components by means of the Shift key and the compass. The element to be translated must belong to the active component. The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" is available for this command. For more about this option, refer to Access to geometry in the Infrastructure User's Guide. Open the MovingComponents01.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Translate or Rotation icon: The Move dialog box is displayed. Either you specify an offset value between the element and x, y or z axis, or you select a geometric element to define the direction you need.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugtranslate.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 8:50:46 AM
2. Select the component to be translated, that is CRIC_BRANCH_3.
By Entering Values
3. Enter 50 mm as the offset value, in the Offset X field. The component will be translated along x axis.
4. Click Apply. The selected component is translated accordingly.
5. Click the Invert button to reverse the previous operation and translate the component in the opposite direction. The component is translated in the opposite direction. You can click Apply as many times as you wish to translate the component to the desired position.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box.
7. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
By Selecting Geometric Elements

8. Click the Selection button to define a new translation with respect to a geometric element.
The Translation tab contents is grayed out. If you select a line or a plane you need to enter a distance value. The translation is then done along the selected line or normal to the selected plane. Selecting two faces or planes assumes these elements are parallel. 9. Select the red and blue faces as shown. These faces are parallel.
The application computes the distance between these faces. The Offset field then displays this distance value: Offset X: 20mm Offset Y: 0mm Offset Z: 0mm 10. Click Apply to translate the blue component.
You can apply this translation to any other components. You just need to select it and click the Apply button. 11. Click OK to exit.
Rotating Components
Rotating Components
This task will show you the two ways of rotating a component: by entering the rotation angle and specifying the rotation axis by selecting a geometric element as the rotation axis and entering the angle value If you are working in Assembly Design workbench, this task is P1-only. Using P2 configuration, you can rotate constrained components by means of the Shift key and the compass. The element to be rotated must belong to the active component. The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" is available for this command. For more about this option, refer to Access to geometry in the Infrastructure User's Guide. Open the MovingComponents01.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Translate or Rotation icon: The Move dialog box is displayed. Translation options are available. To find out how to translate components, refer to Translating a Component. 2. Click the Rotation tab.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugrotate.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 8:50:54 AM
Rotating Components
3. Select the component you wish to rotate, that is CRIC_BRANCH_1.
Entering a Rotation Angle

4. For example, check the Axis Y option to specify the axis of rotation.
5. Enter 90 as the angle value in the Angle field. The selected component is rotated accordingly.
Rotating Components
7. Click OK to close the dialog box.
8. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3.
Selecting Geometry to Define the Axis of Rotation

9. Click the Selection button to define a new rotation with respect to a geometrical element.
10. Select the edge as shown to specify the new rotation axis.
11. Enter 90 in the Angle field.
12. Click Apply to rotate the red component.
Rotating Components
You can apply this rotation to any other components. You just need to select it and click the Apply button. 13. Click OK to exit.
Manipulating Components
This task will show you how to manipulate a component. The Manipulate command lets you move a component freehand with the mouse. It is less constraining than the Translate and Rotate commands. The element to be manipulated must belong to the active component. Open the MovingComponents02.CATProductdocument. 1. Click the Manipulate icon: The Manipulation Parameters dialog box appears. You can translate or rotate components using one of the following options: The first and second horizontal rows are reserved for translations. You can move your component along the x, y or z-axis as well as in the xy, yz and xz planes. The third row is reserved for rotations. You can rotate your component around the x, y or z-axis. The fourth column lets you specify the direction of your choice by selecting a geometric element. This element defines the direction of the move or the axis of rotation.
2. Click the Drag along Y axis icon:
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugmanipulate.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:51:01 AM
3. Select Set1 as the component to be translated.
4. Drag Set1. The component is translated in the Y axis direction.
5. Now select CRIC_FRAME and click Drag around Y axis icon:
6. Drag the component. You are rotating it around the Y axis.
7. Check the option With respect to constraints. If you repeat the previous operation, you will notice that you are not allowed to do it. The existing parallelism constraint prevents you from moving the component.
8. Click OK to exit. Use the Shift key and the compass to manipulate constrained components. Flexible components cannot be moved via the Manipulate command.
Snapping Components
Snapping Components
The Snap command projects the geometric element of a component onto another geometric element belonging to the same or to a different component. Using this command is a convenient way to translate or rotate components. The Snap will now work in full visualization mode, which means the positioned component and the positioning parts will no longer need to be switched into design mode. However, in order to select points, you must be working in Design mode. For DMU Navigator, this task is P1-only. The element to be snapped must belong to the active component. Open the MovingComponents01.CATProduct document. Depending on the selected elements, you will obtain different results. This table indicates what you can do: First Element Selected point point point line line line plane plane plane Last Element Selected point line plane point line plane point line plane
Result Identical points. The point is projected onto the line. The point is projected onto the plane. The line passes through the point. Both lines become collinear. The line is projected onto the plane. The plane passes through the point. The plane passes through the line. Both planes become parallel.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugsnap.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 8:51:07 AM
Snapping Components
Make sure you work in Design mode (use Edit->Representations->Design Mode) 1. Click the Snap icon:
2. Select the red face as shown.
The element selected first is always the element that will move. 3. Select the blue face as shown.
Snapping Components
The red face is projected onto the plane defined by the blue face. A green arrow is displayed on the first face you selected.
3. Click this arrow to reverse the orientation of the face.
Snapping Components
Smart Move
Smart Move
The Smart Move command combines the Manipulate and Snap capabilities. Optionally, it creates constraints. This task illustrates how to move a component and create a coincidence constraint between two axes. Open the MovingComponents01.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Smart Move icon appears. The Quick Constraint frame contains the list of the constraints that can be set. This list displays these constraints in a hierarchical order and can be edited by using both arrows to right of the dialog box. and expand the Smart Move dialog box that
2.
Check the Automatic constraint creation option. The application creates the first possible constraint as specified in the list of constraints having priority. For more about this list, please refer to Quick Constraint..
3.
Select the axis of CRIC_BRANCH_1 as shown:
Smart Move
4.
Select the axis of CRIC_BRANCH_3. Instead of explicitly selecting both axes, you can select the axis of CRIC_BRANCH_1 and then drop it onto the blue inner cylinder face when your cursor points to this face. The application detects a possible constraint between the axes. As the option Create constraint is on, the application can set a coincidence constraint between both axes.
5.
Click the green arrow to reverse the direction of the component.
Smart Move
6.
Click OK to confirm and quit the command. The coincidence constraint is created.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Exploding a Constrained Assembly

This task shows how to explode an assembly taking into account the assembly constraints. This Explode type is applicable only to specific cases: when the assembly is assigned coincidence constraints: 1. axis/axis 2. plane/plane Open the EXPLODE_CONSTRAINED_ASSEMBLY.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Explode icon . The Explode dialog box is displayed. 2. Wheel Assembly is selected by default, keep the selection as it is. You can also use the drag and drop capability (drag the explode icon and drop it onto the required product in the specification tree. The Depth parameter lets you choose between a total (All levels) or partial (First level) exploded view. 3. Keep All levels set by default. 4. Set the explode type. 3D is the default type. Keep it. 5. Click Apply to perform the operation.
Note: you can move products within the exploded view using the 3D compass.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugexplode01.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 8:51:32 AM
In DMU Fitting Simulator only:

The manipulation toolbar is also available once you move an object with the 3D Compass. The Scroll Explode field gradually displays the progression of the operation. The application assigns directions and distance. Once complete, the resulting exploded view looks like this:
You are not satisfied with this result as the nuts are not correctly positioned. The constraints are not respected. Replay the scenario selecting the constrained type. 6. Still in the Explode dialog box, set the constrained type. 7. Define a fixed product: in our example select the Rim1 either in the specification tree or in the geometry area
8. Click Apply to perform the operation.
Once complete, the resulting exploded view looks like this
The nuts are correctly positioned, the exploded view corresponds more to the reality and to a technical documentation. 9. Click OK to validate the operation or click Cancel to restore the original view. Note: If you click Ok, the following warning message is displayed as the exploded view is kept when exiting the command. In this case, if you need to restore the initial view click the Reset icon .
The explode functionality aims at understanding better how the assembly is structured. You can use it for further purposes: creating scenes, print, keep the exploded view as archive document or generate a drawing (please refer to Create Scenes in the DMU Navigator User's Guide)
Stop Manipulation on Clash

When moving assemblies (using the compass along with the Shift key or the Manipulation command), components may sometimes clash. This task shows you how to view the minimum distance between these components to avoid a clash. A clash is detected only when the With respect to constraints option is checked in the Manipulation parameters dialog box:
Open the GettingStarted.CATProduct document and perform all the tasks of the Getting Started section until "Moving Components". 1. Drag the compass onto CRIC_SCREW.
2. Press and hold down the Shift key, select v/z axis on the compass, then drag and drop the component so as to obtain this clash: The components involved in the clash are now highlighted to facilitate your work.
3. Click the Manipulation on Clash icon:
4. Move the component slowly from right to left, then from left to right to repeat the clash. The application stops the move operation just before the clash occurs.
5. Repeat the operation more quickly: the operation is stopped earlier, which makes the gap larger between both components.
What you need to know is that the more slowly you handle the mouse, the smaller the distance between the components will be. 6. To quit the command, simply click the Manipulation on Clash icon again:
You can compute clashes again.
[ Back ]
Using Assembly Tools
Using Assembly Tools

Manage Products in an Assembly: Select Tools -> Product Management...,modify the part number in the New part number field and replace the associated representation in the New representation field.
Publish a Geometric Element: Select Tools -> Publication...,select the element to be published then rename this element.
Use a Part Contained in a Parametric Standard Part Catalog: Open the catalog of your choice, navigate through the catalog, select the desired part, use the Copy then Paste commands.
Modify a Parametric Standard Part Catalog
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Managing Products in an Assembly

This task consists in managing products in an assembly. Open the AssemblyTools01.CATProduct document. 1. Select Tools -> Product Management... The Product Management dialog box is displayed.
The following is displayed for each components contained in the assembly: part Number document source file status of the component associated representation. You can modify the part number in the New part number field and replace the associated representation in the New representation field of the selected product. 2. 3. Click the ... button to open the Replace Representation dialog box. Click OK to validate.
[ Next ]
Using a Standard Part Contained in a Parametric Catalog
Using a Standard Part Contained in a Parametric Standard Part Catalog

This task explains how to use mechanical parts contained in catalogs delivered with the product. These parts are standard parts. Dassault Systmes does not warrant that provided data are compliant with the ISO or EN standards. For further information, please contact the AFNOR organization for ISO or EN standards (www.afnor.fr) or the ISO organization for ISO standards (www.iso.org). Catalogs containing a limited number of parts compliant with JIS and ANSI standards are available too. 1. Select the Tools -> Mechanical Standard Parts -> XX catalogs command to access the catalog of interest. You can choose between the following caralogs: EN catalogs ISO catalogs JIS catalogs US catalogs The Catalog Browser dialog box displays:
Using a Standard Part Contained in a Parametric Catalog
For your information, catalogs are located in these directories: ISO:../$OS/Startup/Components/MechanicalStandardParts/ISO_Standards EN: ../$OS/Startup/Components/MechanicalStandardParts/EN_Standards 2. 3. Navigate through the chosen catalog. Select the desired family and within this family the part you need. For example, you can instantiate in an assembly: screws bolts nuts washers pins keys This list is not exhaustive. 4. 5. 6. Right-click to select the Copy contextual command. Select the base of your assembly. Right-click to select the Paste contextual command. The part is copied into your assembly. Note that this part is no longer linked to the catalog. 7. Using the Save As capability, you can save this part in the directory of your choice.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Modifying a Parametric Standard Part Contained in a Catalog
Modifying a Parametric Standard Part Catalog

This task explains how to modify a catalog containing parametric parts delivered with the product. Since Release 5 Service Pack 3, we no more use CSV files to create the EndChapters of the MechanicalStandardParts Catalogs. To complete or modify an existing parts family: 1. Complete or modify an existing DesignTable (located in the sub-directory Design_Tables).
2. Launch an application session.
3. Select the Tools-> Macro command to run the macro EN_EndChapters. CATScript (for EN) located in the sub-directory VBScript. The dialog box that appears displays the following: Path of the models directory: path of the sub-directory Models. Path of the catalog output directory: path of the directory where the catalog documents will be created. You can modify the default paths in the CATScript document according to you install. To add a new family: 1. Create the parametric CATPart.
2. Create the design table as follows: PartNumber in the first column, PartName in the second column
Modifying a Parametric Standard Part Contained in a Catalog
3. Complete the script EN_EndChapters.CATScript (for EN) with your family, remove the others and run the macro.
4. Complete the main chapters description of you catalog. Edit an existing CSV file (located in the sub-directory CSV) or create a new one. Edit the script EN.CATScript, complete it with your new Chapter and run it. For more about catalogs, refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide.
[ Back ]
Creating Annotations
Annotations
See Creating Weld Features
Creating Textual Annotations: click this icon, select a face and enter your text in the dialog box. Creating Flag Notes: click this icon, select the object you want to represent the hyperlink, enter a name for the hyperlink and the path to the destination file.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Creating Weld Features

This task shows you how to set welding specifications on components. These specifications will be used later on to weld these components.
Open the WeldPlanner.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Weld Feature icon.
2. Select the edge between Green Part and Blue Part.
The Welding creation dialog box appears.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugat0400.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 8:53:14 AM
3. Enter your specifications in the Welding Creation dialog box. In the first entry field to the left, enter 70 as the weld length. 4. For example, set the angle symbol. The symbols available are:
5.
Choose among the three weld types available to set your weld type:
6. Enter 2.5 as the weld length. 7. Enter Weld 2 in the Reference entry field. This field is reserved for your own specifications or codes.
You can also import a file by clicking the Import file button. The contents of this file is then displayed in the geometry.
Note also that you can click: the field-weld symbol (flag symbol): reserved for welds not made at the location of the initial part construction. the weld-all-around symbol (circle circle): reserved for welds made all around the contour of the part the "up" option: a display option. You can display the symbols and values above or below the welding symbol. It is a quick way of transferring the data from the first row to the row below and vice versa. the indent line side the weld tail symbol
8. Click OK to confirm. The annotation is created in the geometry. 9. Drag and drop the annotation to move it. You can obtain this result:
Contextual Commands
A certain number of contextual commands are available on specifications: 'Associated Geometry': manages annotation connections 'Select Views/Annotation Plane': selects the annotations of an annotation plane and the annotation plane of an annotation 'Transfer to View/Annotation Plane': transfers specifications from one view to another 'Add Leader' adds a leader to the selected specification (Right-click the specification to which you want to add a leader, select the Add Leader contextual command and click where you want to begin the leader). 'Annotation Links': creates or deletes positional or orientation links
Contextual commands are also available on the yellow manipulator at the extremity of the arrow end: 'Add a Breakpoint': adds a breakpoint on the leader line 'Add an Interruption': adds an interruption on the leader line 'Remove a Breakpoint': removes a breakpoint on the leader line 'Remove Leader/Extremity': removes a leader line or an extremity 'All Around': adds the All Around symbol 'Switch to perpendicular leader': sets the leader perpendicular to the annotation For more information about those commands, please refer to the 3D Functional Tolerancing and Annotations User's Guide.
'Symbol shape': edits the shape of the manipulator pointed at by the arrow
At any time, you can modify the welding symbol. For this, double-click the welding symbol to be modified and enter the modifications in the displayed dialog box.
[ Next ]
Creating Textual Annotations

This task shows you how to create a text with a leader line. This text is assigned an unlimited width text frame. You can set graphic properties (anchor point, text size and justification) either before or after you create the text. Open the WeldPlanner.CATProduct document. 1. 2. Click the Text icon .
Select the face (or a set of faces) with which you want to associate a text. Clicking the face defines a location for the arrow end of the leader.
If the active view is not valid, a message appears informing you that you cannot use the active view. Therefore, the application is going to display the annotation in an annotation plane normal to the selected face. 3. Click OK to close the message window. The Text Editor dialog box is now displayed.
4. 5.
Enter your text, for example "Surface 1" in the dialog box. Click OK to end the text creation. You can click anywhere in the geometry area too. The leader is associated with the element you selected. If you move either the text or the element, the leader stretches to maintain its association with the element.
Moreover, if you change the element associated with the leader, CATIA keeps the associativity between the element and the leader. Note that using the Text Properties toolbar, you can define the anchor point, text size and justification.
You can move a text using either the drag capability. See Moving Annotations. Note also that you can resize the manipulators. For more information, refer to Customizing Functional Tolerancing and Annotations Workbench.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Detecting Clashes
Detecting Clashes
Detect interferences: Click the Clash icon, define the type in the Check Clash dialog box, then select the product and click Apply. Read Clash command results: Run a check for interferences and read the global results in the Check Clash dialog box and Preview window. View results in a dedicated window: Run a check for interferences then click the Results window icon. Export clash results: To save results in text and XML format, click the Export As icon.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Detecting Interferences
This task explains how to use the Clash command to check for interferences in your document. Checking for interferences is done in two steps: Initial computation: detects and identifies the different types of interference. Detailed computation: computes the graphics representation of interferences as well as the minimum distance. Open the AnalyzingAssembly01.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Clash icon.
The Check Clash dialog box and the dedicated Clash Tools toolbar appear.
The default interference analysis is detecting clashes and contacts between all components in the document. Two interference types are available: Contact + Clash: checks whether two products occupy the same space zone as well as whether two products are in contact (the minimum distance is less than the total sag). Clearance + Contact + Clash: In addition to the above, checks whether two products are separated by less than the pre-defined clearance distance. Results differ depending on the interference type selected for the analysis. See figure. 2. Set the interference type to Clearance + Contact + Clash.
3.
Enter the desired clearance value in the field that becomes active next to the interference type. For example, enter 25mm.
4.
Activate the second Type drop-down list box and select the computation type. Four computation types are available: Between all components (default option): tests each product in the document against all other products. Inside one selection: within any one selection, tests each product of the selection against all other products in the same selection. Selection against all: tests each product in the defined selection against all other products in the document. Between two selections: tests each product in the first selection against all products in the second selection.
5.
Select the computation type to Between all components. If you set the computation type to Between two selections, define the first selection then click to activate the second selection field (Selection 2) and select desired products. Notes: Any sub-assembly in the specification tree is considered a valid selection. Continue clicking to select as many products as you want. Products are placed in the active selection. To de-select products, reselect them in the specification tree or in the geometry area. Click in selection fields (fields turn black) to view your selections and be certain that you have selected the products you intended: selected products are highlighted.
6.
Click Apply to check for interferences. A progress bar is displayed letting you monitor and, if necessary, interrupt (Cancel option) the calculation. The Check Clash dialog box expands to show the results.
Notes: To run another interference analysis, simply change the calculation parameters (interference type and selection) and click Apply. To know more about Clash command results, refer to Reading Interference Results.
[ Next ]
Reading Clash Command Results

Interference results differ depending on the interference type selected for the analysis. The following illustrates expected results for the different analysis combinations.
Clash
Given for information only. This option is not available.
Contact + Clash
If red zones overlap, a clash is detected. If yellow zones only overlap, a contact is detected.
Note: sag (yellow zone) is offset from the skin inwards. If the minimum distance between the yellow zones is less than the total sag (sag1 + sag2), a contact is detected.
Clearance + Contact + Clash
Sag
The sag corresponds to the fixed sag value for calculating tessellation on objects (3D fixed accuracy) set in the Performances tab of Tools -> Options -> General -> Display. By default, this value is set to 0.2 mm. The sag value set in this tab is offset from the skin inwards on both selection 1 and selection 2, . This value is valid for both the Part to Part Clash and the Clash commands.
This task explains how to read the global results in the Check Clash dialog box and browse through them in the Preview window. Open the AnalyzingAssembly01.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Clash icon and run a check of type Clearance (25mm) + Contact + Clash
between all components. For more information, refer to Detecting Interferences. The Check Clash dialog box expands to show the results.
The dialog box identifies the number of interferences detected along with the type: 4 interferences have been detected. Status lights are color-coded as follows: red: at least one conflict is relevant orange: no relevant conflicts, at least one conflict is Not inspected green: all conflicts are Irrelevant. Interference results are presented in two different ways in the dialog box: List by Conflict tab: lists results by conflict with one conflict per line. List by Product tab: lists results by product. There may be more than one conflict per product.
2.
Select the first conflict in the list, that is a clash, to run a detailed computation. A Preview window appears showing the products in conflict only.
The minimum distance is specified in the dialog box and both the minimum distance and red intersection curves identify clashing products separated by less than the specified clearance distance of 25mm are displayed in the geometry area.
Color Coding for Conflicts

Clash: red intersection curves identify clashing products. Contact: yellow triangles identify products in contact. Clearance: green triangles identify products separated by less than the specified clearance distance. If necessary, pan, zoom and/or rotate in the Preview window to visualize the interference better. 3. Select contact and clearances in turn in the List by Conflict tab to run a detailed computation. As you select them, the Value and Status columns in the Check Clash dialog box, and the Preview window are updated. 4. You can also view the selected interference in a dedicated viewer. To do so, click the icon in the Clash Tools toolbar. Results window
Filtering the Display in the Dialog Box

You can filter the display of results in tabs by: All types Type of interference: clash, contact or clearance Value: no filter, increasing value or decreasing value. Status: all, not inspected, relevant, irrelevant. Until selected, all interferences are reported not inspected. Inspected interferences can be relevant or irrelevant 5. 6. 7. Set Clearance as the filter type. Click Apply filters to update the display. To change the status of an inspected conflict, click the status field of the appropriate conflict. The conflict status changes from relevant to irrelevant and vice-versa depending on the initial value.
8.
You can also add comments to selected conflicts: Click the Comment field. The Comment dialog box appears.
9.
Enter your comment, for example "Test" and click OK.
10. Click the List by Product tab to display conflicts associated with products.
Results are organized by product in the List by Product tab. There may be more than one conflict per product.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Viewing Results in a Dedicated Window

This task explains how to view selected interferences in a separate viewer. Open the AnalyzingAssembly01.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Clash icon and run a check of type Clearance (25mm) + Contact
+ Clash between all components. For more information, refer to Detecting Interferences. The Check Clash dialog box expands to show the results of the initial computation. The first interference is selected by default and a detailed computation has been run. 2. 3. Close the Preview window. Click the Results window icon in the Clash Tools toolbar to view the
selected interference in a dedicated viewer. The Interference Results.1 window opens.
Color Coding for Conflicts

Clash: red intersection curves identify clashing products. Contact: yellow triangles identify products in contact. Clearance: green triangles identify products separated by less than the specified clearance distance. Object viewing commands and commands in the Window menu are available in this window. You can, for example, tile the Interference results window and the original document window vertically or horizontally. 4. 5. For example, select Window -> Tile Vertically from the menu bar to organize the open windows vertically. Click OK in the Check Clash dialog box to exit when done.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Export Clash Results
Exporting Clash Results

This task explains how to export clash results to a text file and publish clash results to an XML file. Open the AnalyzingAssembly01.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Clash icon and run a check of type Clearance (25mm) + Contact + Clash
between all components. For more information, refer to Detecting Interferences. The Check Clash dialog box expands to show the results of the initial computation.
2.
Browse through results using the Results viewer.
3.
To publish results to an XML file, click the Export As
icon in the Clash Tools toolbar:
The Export As dialog box is displayed: Set Type to XML (Extensible Markup Language): a standard format that can be used as a simple way to exchange data. Identify the folder in which you want to save the file. Enter a file name. Click Save to publish the results. Note: Each time you export results, a folder containing all necessary files and images is created. 4. Open your browser and read the results.
5.
Click the interference (computation result table) in the browser to jump to the part of the page displaying the selected interference and appropriate results.
Notes: The viewpoints set when visualizing the interferences in the Results window are saved and exported along with the clash results. Any filters applied to the results in the dialog box are taken into account so you can use the filters to export only pertinent results. 6. To write results to a text file, click the Export As icon in the Clash Tools toolbar:
The Export As dialog box is displayed. Set Type to *.txt Identify the folder in which you want to save the file. Enter a file name. Click Save to save the results in a text file. 7. Click OK to exit when done.
[ Back ]
Sectioning
Sectioning
About Sectioning Creating Section Planes: Click the icon. Creating 3D Section Cuts: Create a section plane then click the icon. Manipulating Section Planes Directly: Create a section plane, drag plane edges to redimension, drag plane to move it along the normal vector, press and hold left and middle mouse buttons down to move plane in U, V plane or local axis system or drag plane axis to rotate plane. Positioning Planes on a Geometric Target: Create a section plane, click the icon then point to the target of interest. Positioning Planes Using the Edit Position and Dimensions Command: Create a section plane, click the icon and enter parameters defining the plane position in the dialog box. More About the Section Viewer: Create a section plane then click the icon. [ Back ] [ Next ]
About Sectioning
About Sectioning
Using cutting planes, you can create sections, section slices, section boxes as well as 3D section cuts of your products automatically. Creating section slices and section boxes are DMU-P2 functionalities.
The Section Plane

The section plane is created parallel to absolute coordinates Y, Z. The center of the plane is located at the center of the bounding sphere around the products in the selection you defined. Line segments visualized represent the intersection of the plane with all products in the selection. By default, line segments are the same color as the products sectioned. If no selection is made before entering the command, the plane sections all products. In DMU-P1, you cannot select products to be sectioned: the plane sections all products. A plane has limits and its own local axis system. The letters U, V and W represent the axes. The W-axis is the normal vector of the plane.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugspa_C2/cfyugspabt0209.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:54:23 AM
About Sectioning
You can customize settings to locate the center and orient the normal vector of the plane. This is done using the Tools ->Options..., Digital Mockup ->DMU Space Analysis command (DMU Sectioning tab).
Manipulating the Plane

Sectioning is dynamic (moving the plane gives immediate results). You can manipulate the cutting plane in a variety of ways: q Directly
q
Position it with respect to a geometrical target, by selecting points and/or lines Change its current position, move and rotate it using the Edit Position and Dimensions command.
Section Results
Results differ depending on the sag value used. Using default value (0.2mm): Using a higher value:
Sag corresponds to the fixed sag value for calculating tessellation on objects (3D fixed accuracy) set in the Performance tab of Tools -> Options -> General -> Display. By default, this value is set to 0.2 mm. In Visualization mode, you can dynamically change the sag value for selected objects using the Tools -> Modify SAG command.
About Sectioning
The 3D Section Cut

3D section cuts cut away the material from the cutting plane to expose the cavity within the product, beyond the slice or outside the box.
Combining Sectioning with other DMU Space Analysis toolbar commands

In DMU-P2, you can, for example, use sections to check minimum distances or to identify conflicts between products. To do so, section distance or clash results directly in the Distance or Interference Results window. The plane is created parallel to the direction of the minimum distance or penetration depth, and the center of the plane is placed on the center of the measured distance or, in the case of a contact result on the center of the bounding sphere around products selected. All section plane manipulations, geometrical target and volume cut commands are available. You can measure the minimum distance in the section viewer between element sections or between edge primitives using the Measure Between command. Measure Between and Measure Item commands can also be used to annotate a generated section.
Creating Groups of Products

In DMU-P2, prior to creating your section plane, you can create a group containing the product(s) of interest using the Group Insert -> Group... in the menu bar. icon in the DMU Space Analysis toolbar or
Groups created are identified in the specification tree and can be selected from there for sectioning. Only one group per selection can be defined.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating Section Planes

This task shows how to create section planes and orient the normal vector of the plane. It also shows how to access and change section properties. Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr, NOZZLE1.cgr, NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER. cgr and VALVE.cgr. They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities sample folder cfysa/samples. 1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning icon in the DMU Space Analysis toolbar to generate a section plane. The section plane is automatically created. If no selection is made before entering the command, the plane sections all products. If products are selected, the plane sections selected products.
P1 Functionality
In DMU-P1, you cannot select products to be sectioned: the plane sections all products.
The Section Plane

The plane is created parallel to absolute coordinates Y,Z. The center of the plane is located at the center of the bounding sphere around the products in the selection you defined. Line segments visualized represent the intersection of the plane with all products in the selection. By default, line segments are the same color as the products sectioned. A section plane has limits and its own local axis system. U, V and W represent the axes. The W-axis is the normal vector of the plane. The contour of the plane is red. You can dynamically re-dimension and reposition the section plane. For more
information, see Manipulating Section Planes Directly. Using the Tools ->Options... command (DMU Sectioning tab under Digital Mockup ->DMU Space Analysis, you can change the following default settings: q Location of the center of the plane
q
Orientation of the normal vector of the plane.
P2 Functionalities
In DMU-P2, you can create as many independent section planes as you like.
Results Window
A Section viewer is automatically tiled vertically alongside the document window. It displays a front view of the generated section and is by default, locked in a 2D view. Notice that the section view is a filled view. This is the default option. The fill capability generates surfaces for display and measurement purposes (area, center of gravity, etc.).
Sectioning Definition Dialog Box

The Sectioning Definition dialog box appears. This dialog box contains a wide variety of tools letting you position, move and rotate the section plane as well as create slices, boxes and section cuts. For more information, see Positioning Planes with respect to a Geometrical Target, Positioning Planes Using the Edit Position Command, Creating Section Slices, Creating Section Boxes and Creating 3D Section Cuts.
P2 Functionalities
Creating section slices and section boxes are DMU-P2 functionalities. 2. Click the Selection box to activate it. 3. Click products of interest to make your selection, for example the TRIGGER and BODY1. Products selected are highlighted in the specification tree and geometry area. Note: Simply continue clicking to select as many products as you want. Products will be placed in the active selection. To de-select products, reselect them in the specification tree or in the geometry area. The plane now sections only selected products.
You can change the current position of the section plane with respect to the absolute axis system of the document: 4. Click the Positioning tab in the Sectioning Definition dialog box.
5. Select X, Y or Z radio buttons to position the normal vector (W-axis) of the plane along the selected absolute system axis. Select Z for example. The plane is positioned perpendicular to the Z-axis.
6. Double-click the normal vector of the plane (W-axis) or click the Invert Normal icon to invert it.
7. Click OK when done. The section plane definition and results are kept as a specification tree feature. By default, the plane is hidden when exiting the command. Use the Tools>Options, Digital Mockup-> DMU Space Analysis command (DMU Sectioning tab) to change this setting. To show and edit the plane again, double-click the specification tree feature or select Hide/Show the plane representation in the contextual menu.
Changing the Color, Linetype and Thickness of Section Line Segments

To make it easier to read your result, you can specify different properties (color, linetype and thickness) for section line segments. By default line segments are the same color as the products sectioned. q Right-click the section in the geometry area and select Properties
q q
In the dialog box, click the Graphic tab (Under Lines and Curves), change line segment color, linetype and thickness.
The Properties command also lets you change the plane color (Fill Color in Graphics tab) as well as plane dimensions (Plane Dimensions tab) of the current feature. q Right-click the specification tree feature and select Properties
q
In the dialog box, click the Graphic tab or the More option then the Plane Dimensions tab.
You can also change the linetype and thickness of line segments as well as the color of section planes via the Graphic Properties toolbar. To return to the initial colors, select No color.
Creating 3D Section Cuts

3D section cuts cut away the material from the plane, beyond the slice or outside the box to expose the cavity within the product. This task explains how to create 3D section cuts. Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr, NOZZLE1. cgr, NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER.cgr and VALVE.cgr. They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities sample folder cfysa/samples. 1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning DMU Space Analysis toolbar and create a section plane. The Sectioning Definition dialog box appears. icon in the
2. In the Definition tab, click the Volume Cut icon to obtain a section cut: The material in the negative direction along the normal vector of the plane (W-axis) is cut away exposing the cavity within the product. Note: In some cases, the normal vector of the plane is inverted to give you the best view of the cut.
Double-click the normal vector of the plane to invert it, or click the Invert Normal icon in the Positioning tab of the Sectioning Definition dialog box.
3. Re-click the icon to restore the material cut away. 4. Click OK when done.
When the Sectioning Tool is a Slice:
When the Sectioning Tool is a Box:
P2 Functionality
In DMU-P2, you can turn up to six independent section planes into clipping planes using the Volume Cut command to focus on the part of the product that interests you most.
Manipulating Planes Directly

You can re-dimension, move and rotate section planes, or the master plane in the case of section slices and boxes, directly. As you move the cursor over the plane, the plane edge or the local axis system, its appearance changes and arrows appear to help you. Moving along the Moving in the x,y normal vector plane of the Re-dimensioning: Rotating: of the plane: local axis system:
Sectioning results are updated in the Section viewer as you manipulate the plane. To change this setting and have results updated when you release the mouse button only, deactivate the appropriate setting in the DMU Sectioning tab (Tools ->Options..., Digital Mockup >DMU Space Analysis). This task illustrates how to manipulate section planes directly. Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr, NOZZLE1.cgr, NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER.cgr and VALVE.cgr. They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities sample folder cfysa/samples. 1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning Space Analysis toolbar and create a section plane. A Section viewer showing the generated section is automatically tiled vertically alongside the document window. The generated section is automatically updated to reflect any changes made to the section plane. You can re-dimension the section plane: 2. Click and drag plane edges to re-dimension plane: Note: A dynamic plane dimension is indicated as you drag the plane edge. icon in the DMU
3. 4.
You can view and edit plane dimensions in the Edit Position and Dimensions command. The plane height corresponds to its dimension along the local U-axis and the width to its dimension along the local V-axis. You can move the section plane along the normal vector of the plane: Move the cursor over the plane, click and drag to move the plane to the desired location. You can move the section plane in the U,V plane of the local axis system: Press and hold down the left mouse button, then the middle mouse button and drag (still holding both buttons down) to move the plane to the desired location. You can rotate the section plane around its axes:
5.
Move the cursor over the desired plane axis system axis, click and drag to rotate the plane around the selected axis.
6. 7.
(Optional) Click the Reset Position
icon in the Positioning tab of the Sectioning Definition
dialog box to restore the center of the plane to its original position. Click OK in the Sectioning Definition dialog box when done.
Positioning Planes On a Geometric Target

You can position section planes, section slices and section boxes with respect to a geometrical target (a face, edge, reference plane or cylinder axis). In the case of section slices and boxes, it is the master plane that controls how the slice or box will be positioned. This task illustrates how to position a section plane with respect to a geometrical target. Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr, NOZZLE1.cgr, NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER.cgr and VALVE.cgr. They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities sample folder cfysa/samples. 1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning Analysis toolbar and create a section plane. The Sectioning Definition dialog box appears. A Section viewer showing the generated section is automatically tiled vertically alongside the document window. The generated section is automatically updated to reflect any changes made to the section plane. 2. Click the Positioning tab in the Sectioning Definition dialog box. icon in the DMU Space
3. Click the Geometrical Target
icon to position the
plane with respect to a geometrical target.
4. Point to the target of interest: A rectangle and vector representing the plane and the normal vector of the plane appear in the geometry area to assist you position the section plane. It moves as you move the cursor.
5. When satisfied, click to position the section plane on the target.
Notes: q To position planes orthogonal to edges, simply click the desired edge.
q
A smart mode recognizes cylinders and snaps the plane directly to the cylinder axis. This lets you, for example, make a section cut normal to a hole centerline. To de-activate this mode, use the Ctrl key.
P2 Functionality
In DMU-P2, you can move the plane along a curve, edge or surface: q Point to the target of interest
q q
Press and hold down the Ctrl key Still holding down the Ctrl key, move the cursor along the target. The plane is positioned tangent to the small target plane. As you move the cursor, the plane moves along the curve or edge. icon to restore the center of the plane to its original position.
6. (Optional) Click the Reset Position
7. Click OK in the Sectioning Definition dialog box when done.
Positioning Planes Using the Edit Position and Dimensions Command

In addition to manipulating the plane directly in the geometry area, you can position the section plane more precisely using the Edit Position and Dimensions command. You can move the plane to a new location as well as rotate the plane. You can also redimension the section plane. In the case of section slices and boxes, it is the master plane that controls how the slice or box will be positioned. This task illustrates how to position and re-dimension the section plane using the Edit Position and Dimensions command. Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr, NOZZLE1.cgr, NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER. cgr and VALVE.cgr. They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities sample folder cfysa/samples. 1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning the DMU Space Analysis toolbar and create a section plane. A Section viewer showing the generated section is automatically tiled vertically alongside the document window. The generated section is automatically updated to reflect any changes made to the section plane. The Sectioning Definition dialog box is also displayed. 2. Click the Positioning tab in the Sectioning Definition dialog box. icon in
3. Click the Edit Position and Dimensions icon to enter parameters defining the position of the plane: The Edit Position and Dimensions dialog box appears.
4. Enter values in Origin X, Y or Z boxes to position the center of the plane with respect to the absolute system coordinates entered. By default, the center of the plane coincides with the center of the bounding sphere around the products in the current selection. Using the Tools -> Options... command (DMU Sectioning tab under Digital Mockup ->DMU Space Analysis), you can customize settings for both the normal vector and the origin of the plane. You can move the section plane to a new location. Translations are made with respect to the local plane axis system. 5. Enter the translation step directly in the Translation spin box or use spin box arrows to scroll to a new value, then click -Tu, +Tu, -Tv, +Tv, -Tw, +Tw, to move the plane along the selected axis by the defined step. Note: Units are current units set using Tools-> Options (Units tab under General> Parameters and Measure). Change the translation step to 25mm and click +Tw for example. The plane is translated 25 mm in the positive direction along the local W-axis.
You can rotate the section plane. Rotations are made with respect to the local plane axis system. 6. Enter the rotation step directly in the Rotation spin box or use spin box arrows to scroll to a new value, then click -Ru, +Ru, -Rv, +Rv, -Rw, +Rw, to rotate the plane around the selected axis by the defined step. Note: Units are current units set using Tools -> Options. With a rotation step of 45 degrees, click +Rv for example to rotate the plane by the specified amount in the positive direction around the local V-axis.
You can edit plane dimensions. The plane height corresponds to its dimension along the local U-axis and the width to its dimension along the local V-axis. You can also edit slice or box thickness. 7. Enter new width, height and/or thickness values in the Dimensions box to redimension the plane. The plane is re-sized accordingly.
q
Use Undo and Redo icons in the Edit Position and Dimensions dialog box to cancel the last action or recover the last action undone respectively. Use the Reset Position icon in the Positioning tab of the Sectioning Definition dialog box to restore the section plane to its original position.
You can also view and edit plane dimensions in the Properties dialog box (Edit -> Properties or via the contextual menu). This command is not available when using the sectioning command.
8. Click Close in the Edit Position and Dimensions dialog box when satisfied. 9. Click OK in the Sectioning Definition dialog box when done.
More About the Section Viewer

This task illustrates how to make the most of section viewer capabilities. Most of the commands described in this task are to be found in the Result tab of the Sectioning Definition dialog box. Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr, NOZZLE1.cgr, NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER. cgr and VALVE.cgr. They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities sample folder cfysa/samples. 1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning icon in the DMU Space Analysis toolbar and create the desired section plane, slice or box and corresponding section. The Section viewer is automatically tiled vertically alongside the document window. It displays a front view of the section and is by default, locked in a 2D view. To obtain a 3D view and access 3D viewing tools, right-click in the window and select the 2D Lock command from the contextual menu. Notice that the section view is a filled view. This is the default option. The fill capability generates surfaces for display and measurement purposes (area, center of gravity, etc.). To obtain an unfilled view, de-activate the Section Fill icon in the Result tab of the Sectioning Definition dialog box.
In the Section viewer, the appearance of the cursor changes to attract your attention to the existence of the contextual menu. You can change the default settings for this window using Tools >Options... command (DMU Sectioning tab under Digital Mockup ->DMU Space Analysis).
2.
Orient the generated section. Flip and Rotate commands are to be found in the contextual menu. Right-click in the Section viewer and:
q
Select the Flip Vertical
or
icon to the Flip Horizontal flip the section vertically or horizontally 180 degrees.
q
Select the Rotate Right
or
the Rotate Left icon to rotate the section right or left
90 degrees.
Working with the 2D Grid

3. Click the Result tab in the Sectioning Definition dialog box, icon then select the Grid under Options to display a 2D grid. Grid dimensions are those of the generated section. Moving the section plane re-sizes the grid to results. You can edit the grid step, style and mode using the Edit Grid command.
4.
Select the Edit Grid adjust grid parameters:
icon to
The Edit Grid dialog box appears: In the above example, the grid mode is absolute and the style is set to lines.
In the absolute mode, grid coordinates are set with respect to the absolute axis system of the document. The grid step is set to the default value of 100. The arrows let you scroll through a discrete set of logarithmically calculated values. You can also enter a grid step manually. Units are current units set using Tools-> Options (Units tab under General-> Parameters and Measure). 5. Scroll through grid width and height and set the grid step to 10 x 10. Click the Relative mode radio button: In the relative mode, the center of the grid is placed on the center of section plane.
6.
7.
Click the Crosses style radio button.
Grid parameters are persistent: any changes to default parameters are kept and applied next time you open the viewer or re-edit the section.
8. 9.
Click the Automatic filtering checkbox to adjust the level of detail of grid display when you zoom in and out. Right-click the grid then select Coordinates to display the coordinates at selected intersections of grid lines. The Clean All command removes displayed grid coordinates.
10.
Note: You can customize both grid and Section viewer settings using the Tools > Options... command (DMU Sectioning tab under Digital Mockup ->DMU Space Analysis). Select Analyze ->Graphic Messages ->Coordinate to display the coordinates of points, and/or Name to identify products as your cursor moves over them. Clicking turns the temporary markers into 3D annotations.
11.
Click OK in the Edit Grid dialog box when done.
P2 Functionality - Detecting Collisions

In DMU-P2, You can detect collisions between 2D sections. To do so, click the Clash Detection icon in the Result tab of the Sectioning Definition dialog box. Clashes detected are highlighted in the Section viewer.
Collision detection is dynamic: move the section plane and watch the Section viewer display being updated.
Annotating
q
You can measure minimum distances and angles as well as other properties on generated sections and keep these measures as annotations. To do so, enter a measure command and select items in the section viewer. For more information, see tasks on Measuring Distances and Angles on Geometrical Entities and Measuring Properties. Note: The Measure Between result is different depending on whether or not the section view is a filled view. If the section view is filled, the result obtained is the minimum distance between sections of selected elements (solid of a model, body of a CATPart). If the section view is unfilled, the result obtained is the minimum distance between edge primitives. In DMU Space Analysis, click the 3D Annotation section views. icon to add 3D text to
In DMU Space Analysis, click the Creating Annotated Views icon to create and annotate a 2D view of your section using arrows, lines, text, etc. provided in the DMU 2D Marker toolbar. 2D views are identified in the specification tree and can be recovered using the Managing Annotated Views icon. For more information on 2D and 3D annotation, see the DMU Navigator User's Guide.
Saving Sectioning Results

You can also save sectioning results in a variety of different formats using the Export As command in the Result tab of the Sectioning Definition dialog box or the Capture command (Tools ->Image ->Capture). 12. Click OK in the Sectioning Definition dialog box when done. If you exit the Sectioning command with the Section viewer still active, this window is not closed and filled sections remain visible.
Measuring Minimum Distances

This task explains how to measure minimum distance between products. Open the AnalyzingAssembly01.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Distance and Band Analysis icon to calculate distances.
The Edit Distance and Band Analysis dialog box appears.
Three computation types are available: inside one selection: (default type): within any one selection, tests each product of the selection against all other products in the same selection. Between two selections: tests each product in the first selection against all products in the second selection. Selection against all: tests each product in the defined selection against all other products in the document. 2. 3. Select Between two selections. Select CRIC_TOP (CRIC_TOP.1) to define Selection 1.
4.
Click Selection 2 field and multi-select CRIC_BRANCH_3 (CRIC_BRANCH_3.1) and CRIC_JOIN (CRIC_JOIN.1)
You can select as many products as you want. Products will be placed in the active selection. To de-select products, reselect them in the specification tree or the geometry area.
5.
Click Apply to calculate the distance. A Preview window appears visualizing selected products and the minimum distance (represented by a line, two arrows and a value). The Edit Distance dialog box expands to show the results.
If necessary, pan, zoom and/or rotate in the Preview window to visualize the results better.
Minimum distance and other information identifying all distance components is given in the expanded dialog box. X, Y, Z coordinates of start and end points on products selected for the distance calculation as well as products themselves are identified. 6. Click OK to close the dialog boxes.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Improving Performances
As you know, you can set two different work modes prior to performing tasks in this workbench: The Design Mode changes the cgr format of the component into the original component document. In other words, geometric data is available. All workbench commands are available if this mode is activated. The Visualization Mode uses documents in cgr format. Only the external appearance of the component is visualized. The geometry is not available, which may be useful when you deal with sophisticated assemblies with large amounts of date but only need a few components to work on. This task illustrates the use of the Visualization mode and more precisely one way of improving the performances of the product.
1.
Make sure that the "Work with the cache system" is on (by default, the cache is not activated). Otherwise, select the Tools -> Options command, click Infrastructure -> Product Structure to the left of the dialog box that appears and check the option. Do not forget to restart your session after turning on the cache. Activating this option sets the visualization mode as the work mode.
2.
Open the AssemblyConstraint07.CATProduct document. Notes Using a cache system considerably reduces the time required to load your data. When opening assembly documents in visualization mode, the update icon is always active, because the application cannot identify whether the assembly is up-to-date or not. Looking closer at the specification tree, you can notice that the nodes are not expandable. This indicates that you are working in visualization mode.
3.
Click the Offset Constraint icon Part.5 and Blue_Part.
to define an offset constraint between
As you are moving your cursor onto any of the parts, you can notice that an eye symbol is located next to your arrow. This indicates that you are allowed to set constraints even if you are working in visualization mode. Once the constraint is set, take a look at the tree. Now, the nodes are expandable. 4.
The fact that the application resolves constraints while working in visualization mode is possible only if your document contains data created using Release 10, and not using previous releases. The application resolves constraints set from published elements. Contextual parts in visualization mode remain in this mode if they are up-todate.
Setting the Design or Visualization Mode

To define a mode specific to a component, you simply need to select your component and then use the Representations -> Visualization (or Design) Mode contextual command.
[ Back ]
Advanced Tasks
Advanced Tasks
Here is the list of the tasks you will perform in this section: Modifying an Assembly Designing in Assembly Design Context Assembly Features Flexible Sub-Assemblies Managing Part and Assembly Templates Scenes To know how to handle different aspects of Assembly/ENOVIA interoperability, please refer to the following tasks described in the CATIA/ENOVIA Interoperability User's Guide:
CATIA V5 / ENOVIAVPM via PORTAL 3d com on Windows Load an Assembly into VPM CATIA V5/VPM on UNIX
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugat0000.htm10/19/2004 8:55:55 AM
Modifying an Assembly
Modifying an Assembly
Replace Components: click this icon and select a component. Reconnect a Replaced Representation: Right-click a component and select Representations -> Manage Representations from the contextual menu. Reconnect Constraints: Double-click a constraint to edit it, [ Next ]
Replacing Components
Replacing Components
This task shows you how to replace components into an assembly. In an assembly you may replace: A component by a component completely different (a jack by a wheel for example). A component by a component from the same family (a gearbox by another for example). Both cases the constraints reconnection is only warranted either: Component's product structure is the same. Instance's names of products in the replacing component are the same. Constraints reference the same published elements. See Reconnecting Constraints. 1. Select a component in the specifications tree.
2. Click the Replace Component icon toolbar.
in the Product Structure Tools
[ Next ]
Reconnecting a Replaced Representation

This task first consists in replacing a representation then in reconnecting geometrical elements.
Open the Reconnect01.CATProduct document.
1. Right-click on SCREW in the specifications tree.
2. Select Representations -> Manage Representations from the contextual menu. The Manage Representation dialog box is displayed.
3. Click on CRIC_SCREW.model in the Source field. 4. Click Replace... The Associate Representation dialog box is displayed. 5. Navigate to open the CRIC_SCREW_NEW.model. 6. The Reconnect Representation dialog box is displayed.
A window containing the assembly with the old representation is displayed in the window to the left of the dialog box. A window containing only the new representation is displayed to the right of the dialog box. You are going to reconnect the geometrical elements in this window.
5. To reconnect the highlighted geometric element of the old representation, that is a line, select the axis of the new representation. 6. Select Plane and select the circular face as shown to reconnect the plane.
Two "Yes" are now displayed in the Reconnect field. 6. Click OK to validate. 7. Click Close to close the Manage Representation dialog box. The representation is replaced and constraints are valid.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Reconnecting Constraints
Reconnecting constraints means defining new supporting elements for these constraints. You perform this operation to correct mistakes you made while assembling components or the mistakes detected by updates. This task shows you how to reconnect two constraints.
Open the AssemblyConstraint06.CATProduct document. 1. The assembly contains a contact and a coincidence constraint that need to be reconnected. Double-click the contact constraint to be reconnected.
2.
In the Constraint Edition dialog box that appears, click More to access additional information. The names of supporting elements are now displayed.
3. Click CRIC_BRANCH_3 then Reconnect.
4. Select the blue face as shown to specify the new supporting face.
5.
Click OK. The contact constraint is reconnected:
6. 7.
Now select the coincidence constraint in the geometry or in the specification tree. Select the Properties contextual command.
8. 9.
In the Properties dialog box that appears, click CRIC_BRANCH_3. Click Reconnect...
The window that appears displays the components.
10. Select the axis passing through the circular faces.
11. Click OK to close the window. 12. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. Because they are only two constraints defined on this product, the application can compute several results. This is an example of what you can obtain:
[ Back ]
Designing in Assembly Design Context
Designing in Assembly Design Context

About Design in Assembly Context Editing a Part in an Assembly Design Context Publishing Elements
[ Back ] [ Next ]
About Design in Assembly Context

Assembly Design can be cooperatively used with Part Design in many ways. If in a CATProduct document you can design parts from scratch or reshape them, you can also create associative links between several parts. These links can be geometrical and are then referred to as "External references" or parametrical then referred to as "External parameters" in the specification tree. Assembly Design provides a large range of commands or options to manage those links. These capabilities are: "Keep link with selected object". lets you maintain the links between external references, copied elements for example, and their origins when you are editing these elements. For more information, see Customizing General Settings, External References.
"Isolate" contextual command: cuts the link between external references and their origins, Management of both assembly constraints and design in context: it is possible to set constraints between published geometrical elements. See Customizing Assembly Constraints, Constraint Creation
"Edit Links", see Displaying Document Links and Editing Documents Links in CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide. Copy of external elements to update parts outside assembly context Automatic synchronization during update operations, or manual synchronization "Activate/Deactivate link" "Publication:" to reuse existing designs and manage links. For more information, see Customizing General Settings, External References.
"Copy Break/Link/New From to quickly reuse a part
[ Next ]
Editing a CATPart in an Assembly Design Context
Editing a Part in an Assembly Design Context

This task shows you how to edit a CATPart in CATIA - Assembly Design context.
Open the ManagingComponents01.CATProduct document. 1. Click on the + sign to the left of the CRIC_SCREW component in the tree. The Product document is identified by the Product document icon. 2. Double-click on the part CRIC_SCREW to open CATIA - Part Design workbench. Do not mistake the CATProduct document for the Part Design document:
The Part Design document is identified by the Part Design document icon.
3. CATIA - Part Design workbench is displayed. Click on the + sign to the left of Part Body. 4. Double-click the feature you need to edit. For example, double-click on Pad2 to display the Pad Definition dialog box. You can then enter the parameters of your choice. For information about Part Design and the Sketcher , please refer to CATIA- Part Design User's Guide Version 5 and CATIA- Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide Version 5 respectively.
5. Once you have edited the part, double-click on ManagingComponents01 to return into CATIA - Assembly Design workbench. The specification tree remains unchanged. 6. Double-click on the part CRIC_SCREW to open CATIA - Part Design workbench again. 7. Select any circular face of CRIC_BRANCH1 and enter the Sketcher workbench.
8. Create a circle and set a coincidence constraint for example:
9. Exit from the Sketcher and double-click on ManagingComponents01 to return into CATIA - Assembly Design workbench.
CATIA - Assembly Design workbench is then displayed and a green wheel is added to CRIC_SCREW in the tree to represent the contextual nature of the component: . Note however that this symbol is displayed only if the option Keep link with selected object is selected. For more information, please refer to CATIA- Part Design User's Guide Version 5.
Contextual components are considered as the children of the components used for their creation. This means that if you delete these support components, you will need to consider if you wish to delete contextual components or not. Remember, you can choose to delete affected elements by checking the Delete all children option in the Delete dialog box.
"Copy/Paste As Special" command

If you wish to apply the Copy -> Paste As Special command to parts included into your assembly, remember the following: if you have already used the As Result With Link option when pasting Part.1 onto Part.2, you then cannot paste Part.2 onto Part.1 using the As Result With Link option. An error message is issued informing you that a cycle has been detected. For more about Copy -> Paste As Special command, please refer to Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5.
[ Back ]
Assembly Features
Assembly Features
Prior to creating assembly features, keep in mind the following: You can create assembly features only between the child components of the active product. The active product at least must include two components which in turn must contain one part at least.
You cannot create assembly features between two geometric elements belonging to the same component.
The different assembly features you can create are:
Split: click this icon, select the splitting face or surface, define the parts you need to split and define the portion of material to keep. Hole: click this icon, select a face to define the hole location, define the parts on which you need to make the hole and define your hole. Hole Series: in the Assembly Features Definition dialog bow, click the Series tab and select the parts of interest prior to defining holes. Pocket: click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, define the parts from which you need to remove material and define the pocket. Remove: click this icon, select the body to removed and define the parts from which you need to remove material. Add: click this icon, select the body to be added and define the parts to which you need to add material. Perform a Symmetry: click this icon, select the reference plane and the component, then check required options. Modify a Symmetry
Assembly Features
Move a Component by Using the Symmetry Command
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Assembly Split
Assembly Split
The Assembly Split command splits parts rapidly and very productively. You could actually split each part in the Part Design workbench, but the Assembly Split command is more productive since it requires only one interaction. This task shows you how to split a product including four parts. You will actually split three of these parts by using a surface. Open the AssemblySplit.CATProduct document. Ensure the design mode is on. 1. Click the Split icon .
2. Select the splitting surface, that is Loft.1.
The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts that may be affected by the split action. The assembly feature's name now appears in the top left corner of the dialog box. If desired, you can edit this name.
Assembly Split
3. The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use. For the purposes of our scenario, you are going to split Bulkhead A.1, Bulkhead A.2 and Bulkhead B. Note that Bulkhead A.2 and Bulkhead A.1 are two instances of Bulkhead A. Move the parts to the list 'Affected parts". To do so, select Bulkhead A.1 and click the button.
Assembly Split
4. Repeat the operation for the other two parts. Alternatively, double-click each part. The other three buttons let you move the names of the parts from one list to another too: moves all selected parts to the list 'Affected parts' moves all selected parts to the list 'Parts possibly affected' moves the selected part to the list 'Parts possibly affected'
The Split Definition dialog box that has appeared, indicates the splitting element.
5. Arrows in the geometry indicate the portion of parts that will be kept. If the arrows point in the wrong direction, click them to reverse the direction.
6. Check the option Highlight affected parts to clearly identify the parts to split.
Assembly Split
7. Click OK to confirm. The parts are split. Material has been removed from Bulkhead A.1, Bulkhead A.2 and Bulkhead B. Conversely, Bulkhead C is intact.
A new entity 'Assembly Features' appears in the specification tree. It contains the assembly split referred to as 'Assembly Split.1" and the name of affected parts. Moreover, this feature has generated a split feature in Bulkhead B and two split features in Bulkhead A.1 and Bulkhead A.2, these parts being instances of a same original part. An arrow symbol identifies these splits a link exists between Assembly Split.1and them. in the tree, meaning that
Assembly Split
Editing an Assembly Split
Assembly Split
To edit an assembly split, double-click 'Assembly Split.X' entity then you can either: modify the list of the parts you wish to split change the splitting surface redefine the portions of material to keep
If you need to cut the link between a generated split and Assembly Split.X, just use the Isolate contextual command. You will then obtain a 'traditional' split feature as if you had designed it in Part Design and you will be able to edit it in Part Design.
Reusing Part Design Splits
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly splits from existing Part Design splits, or more precisely by reusing the specifications you entered for designing Part Design splits. To do so, just proceed as follows: 1. Click the Split icon .
2. Select the Part Design split of interest. 3. Both the Split Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes display. You then just need to specify the parts to split. The assembly split inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part Design Split Definition dialog box. You can edit these specifications at any time. Editing an Assembly feature created in this way does not affect the specifications used for the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Splits
The application also lets you reuse Assembly Splits specifications to accelerate the design process. In this case, you just need to select the existing assembly split, click the Assembly Split icon and then select a face. Only the Assembly Features Definition dialog box appears to let you determine the parts of interest.
Assembly Split
[ Next ]
Assembly Hole
Assembly Hole
The Assembly Hole command lets you create holes going thru different parts. You could actually create holes for each part in the Part Design workbench, but the Assembly Hole command available in Assembly Design workbench creates holes more rapidly and more productively: the command creates a hole going thru several parts in only one interaction. You can create distinct shapes of holes going thru the individual parts of an assembly and this, in one shot. To know how to do this, please refer to Using Hole Series. This task shows you how to create a hole on a product including three parts, but you will create the hole on two parts only.
Open the AssemblyHole.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Hole icon .
2. Select the purple face as shown to define the location of the hole:
The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts that may be affected by the hole creation. The assembly feature's name now appears in the top left corner of the dialog box. If desired, you can edit this name. The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use. Purple Part is displayed in this frame.
Assembly Hole
Note that now the Hole Definition dialog box is displayed. 3. As you wish to create a hole between Part5 and Purple Part, move Part5 to the list 'Affected parts". The other three buttons lets you move the names of the parts from one list to another too: moves all selected parts to the list 'Affected parts' moves all selected parts to the list 'Parts possibly affected' moves the selected part to the list 'Parts possibly affected'
4. Check the option Highlight affected parts to clearly identify the parts. At this point, you can now define the hole you wish.
Assembly Hole
Whatever hole you choose, you need to specify the limit you want. If you do not specify a depth value, four types of limits are available:
Blind
Up to Last
Up to Plane
Up to Surface
5.
Set the Up to Last option. The application will extend the hole from the sketch plane to the last face encountered.
6. Enter 25mm as the diameter value. By default, the application creates the hole normal to the sketch face. But you can also define a creation direction not normal to the face by unchecking the Normal to surface option and selecting an edge or a line. If you are designing a blind hole, you can set the Bottom option to V-Bottom to create a pointed hole and then enter the angle value of your choice. Clicking the Type tab lets you create the following holes:
Assembly Hole
Simple
Tapered
Counterbored
Countersunk
Counterdrilled
Make sure the option Simple is set. Clicking the Thread Definition tab lets you access to the options defining threads. For more information about threads and holes, please refer to Part Design User's Guide. 7. Click OK to confirm. The hole is created on Part 5 and Purple Part. Conversely, CRIC_FRAME is intact.
A new entity 'Assembly features' appears in the specification tree. It contains the assembly hole referred to as 'Assembly Hole.1" and the affected parts. Moreover, this feature has generated a hole in each part. An arrow symbol identifies these holes in the tree, meaning that a link exists between Assembly Hole.1and them.
Editing an Assembly Hole
Assembly Hole
To edit an assembly hole, double-click 'Assembly Hole.X' entity then you can either: modify the list of affected parts edit the hole If you need to cut the link between a generated hole and Assembly Hole.1, just use the Isolate contextual command. You will then obtain a 'traditional' hole as if you had designed it in Part Design and you will be able to edit it in Part Design.
Reusing Part Design Holes
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly holes from existing Part Design holes, or more precisely by reusing the specifications you entered for designing Part Design holes. To do so, just proceed as follows: 1. Click the Hole icon .
2. Select the Part Design hole of interest. 3. Both the Hole Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes display. You then just need to specify the parts to pierce. The assembly hole inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part Design Hole Definition dialog box. You can edit these specifications at any time. Editing an Assembly feature created in this way does not affect the specifications used for the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Holes
The application also lets you reuse Assembly Holes' specifications to accelerate the design process. In this case, you just need to select the existing assembly hole, click the Assembly hole icon and then select a face. Only the Assembly Features Definition dialog box appears to let you determine the parts to pierce.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Using Hole Series
Using Hole Series

The new concept of "hole series" lets you create different holes cutting the individual parts of an assembly. The "series" option, available in the Hole command lets you determine the parts that are to be cut or not, and the hole types to define for these parts. In this task, you will create one assembly hole feature composed of three different holes cutting four parts.
Open the AssemblyHole2.CATProduct document. 1. 2. Click the Hole icon .
Select the upper purple face to define the location of the hole: The Hole Definition and Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes appear. The Assembly Features Definition dialog box displays the names as well as the paths of the parts that may be affected by the hole creation. For more details, refer to the task "Assembly Hole".
3. 4.
Click the button
to move all parts to the list 'Affected parts'.
To define the hole cutting the assembly, set these parameters: " Up to Last", 10 mm as the diameter value, "Counterbored", 18 mm as the diameter option. The application previews the counterbored hole.
Creating Series
A hole series gathers one or more assembly parts that must be cut by a hole different from the hole previously defined. 5. Click the button "Add Series". A new tab "Series 1" displays, containing all parts selected in the "affected parts" field of the Default tab.
Using Hole Series
6.
To identify the parts you wish to include in Series 1, multi-select Part5 and Part6 then click the Select button. The mention "Yes" now displayed in the Selected field, confirms that Series 1 includes these parts that will be cut by a hole which parameters are still to be defined.
Series 1 then includes two parts through which the hole will pass. On the contrary, Part7 and Purple part are excluded from the series as indicated by the mention "No".
Using Hole Series
7.
To define the hole you need for Series 1, enter these parameters: "Up to Last", 12 mm as diameter value and "Simple" in the Hole Definition dialog box.
The application previews this hole type on the purple face.
8. Click the button "Add Series" again to create another series. A new tab "Series 2" displays, containing all parts selected in the "affected parts" field of the Default tab.. 9. Select Part 7 then click the Select button to set this part as the only part composing the series. The mention "Yes" confirms that this part will be cut by a new hole which parameters are still to be defined. Another way of selecting the part is to double-click its name. 10. To define the hole you need for Series 2, enter these parameters: "Blind", 10 mm as diameter value, 160mm as depth value, "V-Bottom", "Simple", "Threaded" and the thread values of your choice in the Hole Definition dialog box.
The application previews this hole type on the purple face.
Using Hole Series
Note that the Default button removes one part from a series. 11. Click OK to confirm. The hole defined through three series cuts the assembly.
In the specification tree, the Assembly Hole node displays the different parts cut by the Hole feature. Note that the icon identifying the threaded hole differs from the other icons.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Assembly Pocket
Assembly Pocket
Creating a pocket consists in extruding a profile and removing the material resulting from the extrusion. You could actually create pockets for each part in the Part Design workbench, but the Assembly Pocket command available in Assembly Design workbench creates pockets more rapidly and more productively: the command creates a pocket on several parts in only one interaction. This task shows you how to create a pocket by removing material from two parts.
Open the AssemblyHole.CATProduct document and sketch a rectangle on the purple face. 1. Click the Pocket icon 2. .
Select the profile you created. You can use profiles sketched in the Sketcher workbench, sub-elements of sketches or planar geometrical elements created in the Generative Shape Design workbench.
The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts that may be affected by the extrusion. The assembly feature's name now appears in the top left corner of the dialog box. If desired, you can edit this name.
Assembly Pocket
3. The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use. As you wish to create a pocket between Part5 and Purple Part, move them to the list 'Affected parts". To do so, click the button. Alternatively, double-click each part.
The other three buttons lets you move the names of the parts from one list to another too: moves the selected part to the list 'Affected parts' moves all selected parts to the list 'Parts possibly affected' moves the selected part to the list 'Parts possibly affected'
4. Check the option Highlight Impacted Parts to clearly identify the affected parts.
The Pocket Definition dialog box has appeared, indicating the sketch used for extrusion.
Assembly Pocket
5. You can define a specific depth for your pocket (using the Dimension and Depth entry fields) or set one of these options to define the pocket type: up to last up to plane up to surface If you wish to use the Up to plane or Up to surface option, you can then define an offset between the limit plane (or surface) and the bottom of the pocket. The other options available are: Mirrored extent: mirrors the extrusion using the specifications defined for Limit 1. Reverse Direction: inverts the extrusion direction. Additional options appear if you click the More button. You can define 'Limit2' as the second limit by using the same options as for Limit 1 (Dimension, Up to last, up to plane, up to surface). You can choose between a direction normal to the sketch or define a new direction by selecting geometry.
6.
For the purposes of our scenario, enter 110mm as the depth value and click OK to confirm. For more information about pockets, please refer to Part Design User's Guide. The pocket is created on both parts.
Assembly Pocket
A new entity 'Assembly features' appears in the specification tree. It contains the assembly pocket referred to as 'Assembly Pocket.1" and the affected parts. Moreover, this feature has generated a pocket in each part. An arrow symbol identifies these pockets
in the tree, meaning that a link exists between Assembly Pocket.1and them.
Assembly Pocket
Editing an Assembly Pocket
To edit an assembly pocket, double-click 'Assembly Pocket.X' entity then you can either: modify the list of affected parts edit the pocket If you need to cut the link between a generated pocket and Assembly Pocket.1, just use the Isolate contextual command. You will then obtain a 'traditional' pocket as if you had designed it in Part Design and you will be able to edit it in Part Design.
Reusing Part Design Pockets
Assembly Pocket
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly pockets from existing Part Design pockets, or more precisely by reusing the specifications you entered for designing Part Design pockets. To do so, just proceed as follows: 1. Click the Pocket icon .
2. Select the Part Design pocket of interest. 3. Both the Pocket Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes display. You then just need to specify the parts to extrude. The assembly pocket inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part Design Pocket Definition dialog box. You can edit these specifications at any time. Editing an Assembly feature created in this way does not affect the specifications used for the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Pockets

The application also lets you reuse Assembly Pockets' specifications to accelerate the design process. In this case, you just need to select the existing assembly pocket, click the Assembly pocket icon and then select a face. Only the Assembly Features Definition dialog box appears to let you determine the parts to pierce.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Assembly Remove
Assembly Remove
This task shows you how to remove a body from two parts.
Open the AssemblyRemove_Add.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Remove icon .
2. Select Body.1 from MoldedPart as the body to be removed.
3. The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts that may be affected by the removal. The assembly feature's name now appears in the top left corner of the dialog box. If desired, you can edit this name.
Assembly Remove
s The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use. For the purposes of our scenario, you are going to remove material from Part2 and Part3. Move these parts to the list 'Affected parts". To do so, select Part2 and click the button. Repeat the operation for Part3. Alternatively, double-click each part. The other three buttons lets you move the names of the parts from one list to another too: moves all selected parts to the list 'Affected parts' moves all selected parts to the list 'Parts possibly affected' moves the selected part to the list 'Parts possibly affected'
Assembly Remove
The Remove dialog box that has appeared, indicates the part to be removed.
4. Check the option Highlight affected parts to clearly identify the parts affected by the operation.
5. Click OK to confirm. Material is removed from Part 2 and Part3. 6. To better visualize the result, put Part 5 and Body.5 in no show mode. You can see the portion of material that has been removed.
Assembly Remove
A new entity 'Assembly Features' appears in the specification tree. It contains the assembly removal referred to as 'Assembly Remove.1" and the name of affected parts. Moreover, this feature has generated a remove feature in Part2 and a remove in the tree, feature in Part 3. An arrow symbol identifies these removals meaning that a link exists between Assembly Remove.1and them.
Assembly Remove
Editing an Assembly Remove
To edit an assembly remove operation, double-click 'Assembly Remove.X' entity. You can then modify the list of the parts possibly affected by the removal.
Reusing Part Design Remove Features
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly Remove Features from existing Part Design Remove features, or more precisely by reusing the specifications you entered for designing Part Design remove features. To do so, just proceed as follows: 1. Click the Remove icon .
2. Select the Part Design Remove feature of interest. 3. Both the Remove Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes display. You then just need to specify the parts of interest. The assembly remove feature inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part Design Remove Definition dialog box. You can edit these specifications at any time. Editing an Assembly feature created in this way does not affect the specifications used for the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Remove Features
Assembly Remove
The application also lets you reuse Assembly Remove Features' specifications to accelerate the design process. In this case, you just need to select the existing assembly remove feature, click the Assembly remove icon and then select a face. Only the Assembly Features Definition dialog box appears to let you determine the parts of interest.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Assembly Add
Assembly Add
This task shows you how to add several parts belonging to a same product.
Open the AssemblyRemove_Add.CATProduct document, perform the Asssembly Remove as explained in the documentation and put Part5 and Body.5 in show mode. 1. Click the Add icon .
2. Select Body.5 as the body to be added.
The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts that may be affected by the add operation. The assembly feature's name now appears in the top left corner of the dialog box. If desired, you can edit this name.
Assembly Add
3. The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use. For the purposes of our scenario, you are going to add Body.5 to Part5.
Move Part5 to the list 'Affected parts". To do so, select Part5 and click the button. The other three buttons lets you move the names of the parts from one list to another too: moves all selected parts to the list 'Affected parts' moves all selected parts to the list 'Parts possibly affected' moves the selected part to the list 'Parts possibly affected'
The Add dialog box that has appeared, indicates the part to be added.
Assembly Add
4. Check the option Highlight Impacted Parts to clearly identify the parts affected by the operation.
5. Click OK to confirm.
6.
To better visualize the result, put Part2 and Part3 in no show mode. You can see the portion of material that has been removed.
A new entity 'Assembly Features' appears in the specification tree. It contains the assembly removal referred to as 'Assembly Add.1" and the name of affected parts. Moreover, this feature has generated a remove feature in Part5. An arrow symbol in the tree, meaning that a link exists between identifies this addition Assembly Add.1and this remove feature.
Assembly Add
Editing an Assembly Add

To edit an assembly add operation, double-click 'Assembly Add.X' entity. You can then modify the list of the parts possibly affected by the addition.
Reusing Part Design Add Features
Assembly Add
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly Add Features from existing Part Design Add features, or more precisely by reusing the specifications you entered for designing Part Design Add features. To do so, just proceed as follows: 1. Click the Add icon .
2. Select the Part Design add feature of interest. 3. Both the Add Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes display. You then just need to specify the parts of interest. The assembly add feature inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part Design add Definition dialog box. You can edit these specifications at any time. Editing an Assembly feature created in this way does not affect the specifications used for the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Add Features

The application also lets you reuse Assembly Add Features' specifications to accelerate the design process. In this case, you just need to select the existing assembly add feature, click the Assembly add icon and then select a face. Only the Assembly Features Definition dialog box appears to let you determine the parts of interest.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Assembly Symmetry
Assembly Symmetry
Performing a Symmetry Modifying a Symmetry Rotating a Component by Using the Symmetry Command
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugasm_C2/cfyugasmut0100.htm10/19/2004 8:58:03 AM
Performing a Symmetry
Performing a Symmetry on a Component

This task teaches you how to obtain new parts, products or instances by means of symmetry operations. The Symmetry command also lets you obtain new instances by translation as explained at the end of the task. If you do not have a Part Design license (PD1 or GSD), the options Keep link in position and Keep link with geometry will be grayed out in the Assembly Wizard dialog box. If you do not have an Assembly Design license (ASD), Assembly features will not appear in the Specification Tree.
Open the Symmetry1.CATProduct document. 1. Click the Symmetry icon . The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box displays, prompting you to select the reference plane.
2. Select the element used as the reference of the symmetry. This element can be a plane or any planar face that the system recognizes as a plane. select Plane.1.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugasm_C2/cfyugasmut0101.htm (1 of 12)10/19/2004 8:58:17 AM
Components chosen for duplication

The component you select for duplication must be the child of the active product.
Example 1: the element to duplicate is not a symmetrical element In this case, the symmetrical element will be a new component 3. Select NewDoor (NewDoor.1) as the product to be duplicated. NewDoor (NewDoor.1) is highlighted and the symmetry is previewed.
The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box appears. It displays the list of all elements that will be duplicated, that is all components composing NewDoor product: Door.1 and Pane.1. The three icons to the left of the window represent symmetries as well as the creation of new components.
The option "Rotation, same instance" moves the selected geometry symmetrically in relation to a plane. It does not create any new geometry. In short, the Bill of Material is not affected by the resulting geometry. For an example, please refer to Rotating a Component by Using the Symmetry Command.
Notes
If you wish to preview the symmetry of the door only, select Symmetry of Door (Door.1). Likewise, if you prefer to preview the symmetry of the pane, simply select Symmetry of Pane (Pane.1). Instead of new components, you can also create new instances for Symmetry of Door (Door.1) or Symmetry of Pane (Pane.1). To do so, select them and check the option "Rotation (new instance)". For more about this option, refer to Example 2. If the product to duplicate includes a part composed of several bodies, only the part body of this part is taken into account by the Symmetry command.
4.
Click Finish to confirm the operation. A window appears, displaying results:
5.
Click Close. You obtain a second door:
The new component "Symmetry of NewDoor (Symmetry of Door.1)" is displayed as well as the parts it contains (Symmetry of Door and Symmetry of Pane). A new entity 'Assembly features' also appears in the specification tree. It contains the symmetry referred to as 'Assembly Symmetry.1" which in turn contains the symmetry plane and the affected component.
Example 2: the element to duplicate is a symmetrical element itself In this case, the symmetrical element will be a new instance.
6.
Click the Symmetry icon
The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box displays. 7. 8. Select the element used as the reference of the symmetry: select Plane.1. Select Wheel (Wheel.2).
The wheel is highlighted and the symmetry is previewed.
The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box appears. It displays the list of all elements that will be duplicated: all components composing Wheel Assembly product.
9. Select Symmetry of jantes from the list. Only the symmetry of that component is now previewed in the geometry area.
10. Check the option "Rotation, new instance". A new icon reflects this change in the list.
11. The object is positioned with respect to Plane.1. Now, as it is intrinsically symmetrical, you need to define which of its three reference planes must be symmetrical with respect to Plane.1. For example, check XZ plane option. It is moved accordingly.
12. Check XY plane option. It is re-positioned.
13. Eventually, the first option is the right one. Check YZ plane. The symmetry is performed.
14. Click Finish to confirm the operation. A window appears, displaying results. Two new components and one instance have been created.
15. Click Close. The new component Symmetry of Wheel (Symmetry of Wheel.2.1) is displayed in the specification tree. It contains one new instance (jantes (symmetry of jantes.1.1) and one new component (Symmetry of pneu (Symmetry of pneu.1.1). The entity 'Assembly features' contains the new symmetry referred to as 'Assembly Symmetry.2" which in turn contains the symmetry plane and the affected component.
Translation 16. Click the Symmetry icon . The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box displays. 17. Select Plane.1 as the reference to compute the translation. 18. Select the Wheel (Wheel.1) as the component to be translated. 19. Check the option "Translation, new instance".
A new icon
reflects this change.
To calculate the translation, the application projects the center of the axis system onto the plane you selected. The distance between the center and the plane is repeated twice.
20. Click Finish to confirm the operation. A window appears, displaying results:
21. Click Close. The wheel is translated:
Keep Link Options

The option "Keep link in position" guarantees associativity with the initial part or product: if you edit their positions, symmetrical elements inherit these modifications and are therefore repositioned accordingly. The option "Keep link with geometry" guarantees associativity with the geometry of the initial part: if you edit its shape, symmetrical elements inherit these modifications. However this type of associativity is restricted to elements made visible via the External View... command or to Part Bodies. For more information, refer to Generative Shape Design User's Guide and Part Design User's Guide respectively.
Parts Including Surfacic Elements
If you need to perform a symmetry on a part including surfacic elements, the application creates the corresponding symmetry provided that an external view of these elements has been previously specified. Conversely, if these elements have not been specified as such, the symmetry cannot be performed. For more about the External View command, please refer to the Generative Shape Design User's Guide. In the Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box, the External View or Part Body options inform you about the result you will obtain. For example, if the option Part Body is checked, the Symmetry command will affect the Part Body, not the surfacic elements.
New Components or New Instances?

If you compare the symmetry obtained by using the "Mirror, new component" option...
... to the symmetry obtained first using the "Mirror, new component" option, then the "Rotation, new instance" option, then reusing "Mirror, new component", both results are different as indicated by the icons:
The behavior is the following: after changing the symmetry type, that is "Rotation, new instance", to reuse the "Mirror, new component" option, the children of the product to be mirrored remain as new instances whereas the product is assigned the "new component" definition.
What you need to do

To make sure that you obtain the same results for both operations, you need to use the Mirror, new component, all children contextual command available in the dialog box instead of checking "Mirror, new component".
Result:
For more information about the Symmetry command, refer to Modifying a Symmetry.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Modifying a Symmetry
This task shows you how to edit a symmetry and what happens when you replace or delete the original component. Open the Symmetry1.CATProduct document and perform the steps from 1 to 5 of the scenario described in Performing a Symmetry. This scenario assumes that the automatic update mode is on. 1. Double-click Assembly Symmetry.1 in the specification tree. The Assembly Symmetry Wizard displays. Two new fields are available at the top right corner of the dialog box.
2. Enter a new name in the Name field. For example, "New Symmetry". 3. Click the arrow to change the symmetry plane. The <None> term appears in the field. Select, for example a door's face as the new symmetry plane. The field now contains "Door.1/Face".
4.
5.
Click Finish to confirm and close the dialog box. Once updated, the symmetry looks like this:
Replacing the initial component

6. 7. Select Door (Door.1) and use the Components -> Replace Component... contextual command. From the cfyug/samples directory select Door.2. CATPart as the replacing component.
The symmetry is no longer valid. You need to be redefine it as indicated in the specification tree.
8.
Double-click New Symmetry. The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box displays. Select Door.2 (Door.1) and check the option "Mirror, new component".
9.
10. Click Finish to confirm. The new door is obtained by symmetry.
Deleting the original component

11. Delete Pane (Pane.1). Its symmetrical element is deleted too. The assembly and the specification tree now look like this:
Rotating a Component by Using the Symmetry Command

This task shows you how to rotate a component by using the new option "Rotation, same instance". Notes this command is the only one you will use to save transformations within the Enovia database. The positioning matrix will be saved in the Enovia database. Open the Symmetry2.CATProduct document. This scenario assumes that the automatic update mode is on. 1. Click the Symmetry icon to move LeftDoor. The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box displays, prompting you to select the mirror plane. 2. Select the element used as the reference of the symmetry: select Plane.1. This plane is used to position the assembly. Note that the local axes of the two products are superimposed, in our example, to make sure that the final products will be in front of each other.
3. Select LeftDoor (LeftDoor.1) as the component to be moved. LeftDoor (LeftDoor.1) is highlighted and the symmetry is previewed.
4. Check the option "Rotation, same instance" and "XZ plane". This plane is specific to LeftDoor and is used to define the axis for the rotation. The axis is the intersection between this plane and the first plane you selected (see step1). When using the "Rotation, same instance" option, the associativity options "Keep link in position " and "Keep link with geometry" are not available. For more information, see Performing a Symmetry. 5. Click Finish to confirm the operation. The Assembly Symmetry Result window appears, indicating that no component, nor any instance have been created. 6. Click Close. LeftDoor (LeftDoor.1) has been moved in relation to the selected plane. No geometry has been created so that the bill of material remains unchanged.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Flexible Sub-Assemblies
In the product structure from earlier versions you could only move rigid components in the parent assembly. Now, in addition to this behavior, you can dissociate the mechanical structure of an assembly from the product structure, and this within the same CATProduct document. As a consequence, you can move the components of a sub-assembly in the parent assembly. In a first time, this task recalls the behavior of rigid assemblies, then illustrates how to make subassemblies flexible and how constraints defined in the reference document affect them. Eventually you learn how to analyze the mechanical definition of an assembly whenever this assembly includes flexible sub-assemblies (and components attached together).
Open the Articulation.CATProduct and chain.CATProduct documents. 1. The product "Articulation" includes one CATProduct and two CATPart documents as follows:
2. Drag and drop the compass onto link (link.1), then select link (link.1) and drag it. The whole chain -and not link.1 only- is moved.
3. Undo this action to return to the initial state. 4. To make chain (chain.1) flexible, right-click it and select the chain.1 object -> Flexible/Rigid SubAssembly contextual command. Alternatively, click the Flexible Sub-Assembly icon . You can notice that the little wheel to the left corner of the chain icon has turned purple. This identifies a flexible sub-assembly.
5. You can now move link (link.1) independently from link (link.2). For example drag and drop the compass onto link (link.1) and move it in the direction of your choice.
When a sub-assembly is flexible, you can apply updates to it, move it when constrained and set constraints to it. 6. Copy and paste chain (chain.1) within Articulation.CATProduct. You can notice that the property "flexible" is copied too.
7. To make chain (chain.2) rigid, right-click it and select the chain.2 object -> Flexible/Rigid SubAssembly contextual command. A message window appears. 8. Drag and drop chain (chain.2) to clearly see both instances of chain.CATProduct.
9. In chain.CATProduct, move link (link.1) using the compass.
You can notice that because chain (chain.2) is rigid, it inherits the new position of the original chain.CATProduct. Conversely, chain (chain.1) remains unchanged.
What you need to keep in mind is that rigid sub-assemblies are always synchronous with the original product, whatever mechanical modification you perform. Flexible sub-assemblies can be moved individually, without considering the position in the original product.
Since CATIA Version Release 7, you can edit the constraints defined for flexible sub-assemblies. The changes made to these constraints do not affect the constraints defined for the original product contained in the reference document. You can edit the following attributes: values orientation driving/driven properties
10.Set an angular constraint between Link 1 and Link 2 in chain.CATProduct. For example, set 80 as the angle value.
You can notice that both instances, chain (chain.2) and chain (chain.1) inherit this constraint.
11.Edit the value of the angle constraint for chain (chain.1). Enter 100 for example. This new value is specific to chain (chain.1). Because chain (chain.1) is a flexible sub-assembly, this value can no longer be affected by changes to the value set in the reference document.
12.Edit the value of the angle constraint set in chain.CATProduct. For example, enter 50 as the new value: because chain (chain.2) is a rigid sub-assembly, and as the constraint value for chain (chain.1) has been already redefined, chain (chain.2) is the only sub-assembly to inherit this new value.
Mechanical Structure
13.Select the Analyze -> Mechanical Structure... command to display the mechanical structure of Articulation.CATProduct. This mechanical structure looks different from the product structure. In Mechanical Structure Tree dialog box, chain.2 is displayed because it is a rigid sub-assembly. Conversely, chain.1 is not displayed since it is a flexible sub-assembly.
This display is merely informative. Note that you can use the Reframe graph contextual command and the zoom capability to improve the visualization, but also the Print whole contextual command to obtain a paper document. For information on printing, please refer to Printing Documents.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Managing Part and Assembly Templates
Managing Part and Assembly Templates

Refer to the Quick Reference topic for a comprehensive list of interactions to be carried out on part and assembly templates. Refer to To know more about Part and Assembly Templates to know more about these features.
Creates a Document Template: Select the Insert -> Document Template Creation ... command, select the elements making up the document template from the specification tree, define a name for the document template and its reference elements then choose an icon for identifying it. Introducing the Document Template Definition Window Creating a Part Template Instantiating a Part Template Adding an External Document to a Document Template Document Templates: Useful Tips To Know More About Part And Assembly Templates
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugpkt_C2/cfyugdoctemplate0000.htm10/19/2004 8:59:09 AM
Introducing the Document Template Definition Window

The Document Template Definition window can be accessed by selecting the Insert>Document Template Creation... command from the following workbenches:
q
Product Structure Part Design Assembly Design Generative Shape Design Wireframe and Surface Design
The user can access the Product Knowledge Template workbench from the Part Design and the Product Structure workbenches.
The Documents tab

The Documents tab shows the complete path and Action of the files referenced in the Template. The Action status can be either: q Same Document or
q
New Document.
If the document is seen as New Document, it is then duplicated and does not have any link with the original component (equivalent of the New from... command.) If the document is seen as Same Document, a link is maintained with the original file. The modify the Action of the components. button enables you to
The buttons of the External documents sections enable you to select external documents and insert them into the template.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugpkt_C2/cfyugattemplate0046.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:59:19 AM
The Inputs tab

The Inputs tab enables you to define the reference elements making up the Template by selecting them in the geometry or in the specification tree. The Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled option enables users to determine if the template can be instantiated even if not all inputs are valuated. If all inputs are not valuated, old inputs will be kept and isolated at instantiation. This option can be useful if there is more than one way to position the template in context, if you want all these combinations to be available but you want to use only one of them at the same time. To see an example, see Creating a Part Template and lnstantiating a Part Template. For a clearer definition, you can select these items in the viewer and enter a new name in the Role field. The Role field enables you to select one of the items displayed in the window and to rename it. It is used at instantiation through the Use identical name button in the Insert object panel. The Type column indicates if the input is manual or automatic. The inputs are considered as
q
Manual if they are added manually Automatic if they are external references that point an object defined outside the template.
The Published Parameters tab
The Published Parameters tab enables you to define which parameter value used in the Template you will be able to modify when instantiating it. The Edit List... button enables you to access the list of parameters, and to select those you want to publish. These parameters are displayed in the Part Numbers viewer. The Auto modify part numbers with suffix check box, if checked, automatically modifies the part numbers at instantiation if the part numbers already exist.
q
Note that if the user wants to manage the way part numbers are modified at instantiation, he just needs to uncheck this option and click, at instantiation, the Parameters button in the Insert Object dialog box. This way he can access the part numbers that he wants to modify. The unicity of part numbers is now ensured when instantiating document templates into different documents or when the document template is used by different users. When the part numbers renaming mode is set to automatic, a suffix parameter is automatically published by the document template. At instantiation, after valuating the inputs of the document template, suffixes can be changed by clicking the Parameters button in the Insert Object window. Note that it is not possible to "unpublish" the suffix or to change its role.
The Icon tab

The Icon tab enables you to modify the icon identifying the Template in the specifications tree. A subset of icons is available when clicking the Icon choice button. Clicking ... displays the Icon Browser, showing all icons loaded in your CATIA session. The Grab screen button enables you to capture an image of the template to be stored along with its definition. The Remove preview button enables you to remove the image if you do not need it. [ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating a Part Template

This scenario explains how to create a part template containing a keypad that will be instantiated into a CATProduct document. In this scenario, the user: q Creates 2 document templates. When creating the first document template, he does not check the Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled option (Steps 1 to 4). When creating the second document template, he checks the Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled option (Steps 5 to 8). To know more about this option, see Introducing the Document Template Definition Window.
q
Saves both document templates in a catalog.
1. Open the PktMobilePhoneKeypad. CATPart file. The following image displays.
2. From the Insert menu, select the Document Template Creation ... command (in the Part Design workbench) or, if in the Product Knowledge Template workbench, click the Create a Document Template icon ( window displays. ). The Document Template Definition
3. In the Document Template Definition window, click the Inputs tab to select the inputs. To do so, proceed as follows:
In the geometry, select the following features: Curve.8 Sharp_Sketch.3 Arrow_down_Sketch.6 Ok_Sketch.7 - Arrow_up_Sketch.8 - Cancel_Sketch.9 - Surface.3
In the Inputs tab, select the Curve.8 feature and assign it a role in the Role field. Repeat the same operation for the features you selected. The final Inputs tab should look like the picture below.
4. Click the Published Parameters tab to publish parameters. To do so, proceed as follows:
r
Click the button. The Select parameters to insert window displays. Use the arrow to select the Button_Offset and the Button_top_angle parameters in the Parameters to publish column.
Click OK twice. The Document template is added to the KnowledgeTemplates node. Right-click DocumentTemplate.1 and select the Properties command to rename the document template. In the Feature Name field, enter Keypad1. Click OK to validate.
5. From the Insert menu, select the Document Template Creation ... command (in the Part Design workbench) or, if in the Product Knowledge Template workbench, click the Create a Document Template icon ( window displays. ). The Document Template Definition
6. In the Document Template Definition window, click the Inputs tab and select the following inputs in the specification tree:
r
Curve.8
Arrow_up_Sketch.8 Cancel_Sketch.9 Surface.3
Sharp_Sketch.3 Arrow_down_Sketch.6 Ok_Sketch.7
7. Check the Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled check box. 8. Click the Published Parameters tab to publish parameters. To do so, proceed as follows:
r
Click the button. The Select parameters to insert window displays. In the Parameters to publish column, click the Button_Offset and the Button_top_angle parameters and use the arrow to select them.
Click OK twice. The Document template is added to the KnowledgeTemplates node. Right-click DocumentTemplate.2 and select the Properties command to rename the document template. In the Feature Name field, enter Keypad2. Click OK to validate. Save your file.
9. Store the document template in a catalog. To do so, proceed as follows:

r
If not already in the Product Knowledge Template workbench, from the Start->Knowledgeware menu, access the Product Knowledge Template workbench.
Click the Save in catalog icon (
). The Catalog save dialog box displays.
Click OK to create a new catalog or the ... button to change the name of the catalog. The catalog is created. Click here to display the result catalog file. Click here to display the result . CATPart file.
10. Close your file and proceed to the next task: lnstantiating a Part Template.
Refer to the Quick Reference topic for a comprehensive list of the interactions that can be carried on Document Templates.
Instantiating a Part Template
lnstantiating a Part Template
This scenario explains how to instantiate a template into a CATProduct file. It is divided into 2 different parts: q The user instantiates Keypad1, a document template saved in the PktKeypadscatalog.catalog.
q
The user instantiates Keypad2, a document template saved in the PktKeypadscatalog.catalog.
To carry out this scenario, you need the following files: q PktMobilePhoneSupport.CATProduct
q
PktKeypadscatalog.catalog: This catalog contains 2 document templates: Keypad1 and Keypad2. When creating Keypad1, the Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled option was unchecked. When creating Keypad2, the Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled option was checked.
Instantiating Keypad1
1. Open the PktMobilePhoneSupport.CATProduct file.
2. Click the Open Catalog icon ( )and select the PktKeypadscatalog.catalog that you created in the Creating a Part Template topic. The Catalog Browser opens. 3. Double-click DocumentTemplate, 7 inputs and Keypad1. The Insert Object window opens. (Click the graphic opposite to enlarge it).
To know more about the Insert Object dialog box, click here.
4. Value the Inputs by selecting the publications located below the Industrial Design node in the specification tree or click the Use Identical Name button in the Insert Object window.
5. Make the appropriate selections in the Replace Viewer window (see picture below) and click OK when done.
6. Click OK in the Check warning box, then Close. The keypad is instantiated (see picture below.) Click here to see the resulting CATProduct file. 7. Close your file.
Instantiating Keypad2
1. Open the PktMobilePhoneSupport.CATProduct file. 2. Click the Open Catalog icon and select the PktKeypadscatalog.catalog that you created in the Creating a Part Template topic. The Catalog Browser opens. 3. Double-click Document Template, 7 inputs and Keypad2. The Insert Object window opens. 4. Click OK in the Insert Object window. The keypad is instantiated. Note that you do not have to value the inputs since the Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled option was checked when creating the Keypad2 part template.
Refer to the Quick Reference topic for a comprehensive list of the interactions that can be carried on Part Templates.
Adding an External Document to a Document Template
This task shows how to insert a drawing into a part template and how it is updated at instantiation. The scenario is divided into the following steps: q Creating a drawing from an existing part
q
Creating the part template Instantiating the part template and updates the generated drawing.
Note that the document(s) that can be added to part and assembly templates must belong to one of the following types: q .CATDrawing
q
.CATProcess .CATAnalysis
Prior to carrying out this scenario, make sure that the Keep link with selected object is checked (Tools->Options...->Infrastructure->Part Infrastructure>General).
1. Open the PktPadtoInstantiate.CATPart file. The following image displays.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugpkt_C2/cfyugdoctemplate0004.htm (1 of 6)10/19/2004 9:00:23 AM
2. From the Start->Mechanical Design menu, access the Drafting workbench. The New Drawing Creation Window displays. Click OK to select the default layout. 3. The drawing corresponding to the pad is generated.
4. Save your drawing and close the file. Click here to see the generated drawing. 5. Go back to the PktPadtoInstantiate.CATPart file to create a part template. To do so, proceed as follows:
r
Select the Insert->Document Template Creation ... command. The Document Template Definition window displays. Click the Add... button in the External documents field and select the . CATDrawing file you have just created in the File Selection window (or use the PktPadDrawing.CATDrawing). Click Open. Click the Inputs tab and select Sketch.1 and Sketch.2 in the geometry or in the specification tree.
Click the Published Parameters tab and click the Edit List... button. The Select parameters to insert window displays. Select the following parameters using the arrow button:
r
PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length PartBody\Pad.2\FirstLimit\Length
In the Published Parameters tab, select PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit \Length and rename it to Pad_Width in the Name: field, then select PartBody\Pad.2\FirstLimit\Length and rename it to Pad_Length. Click OK to validate. Save your file and close it.
6. Open the PktProduct.CATProduct file. 7. From the Start->Knowledgeware menu, access the Product Knowledge Template workbench (if need be). 8. Click the Instantiate an element stored in a document icon ( ) and select the PktPadtoInstantiate_result.CATPart containing the document template. Click Open. The Insert Object dialog box displays. 9. Click the Use identical name button in the Insert Object dialog box and make the appropriate selection in the Replace Viewer window (see graphic below). Click Close when done.
10. Select Sketch.2 in the geometry or in the specification tree. 11. Click the Parameters button and enter 10mm in the Pad_Width field and 90 in the Pad_Length field.
12. Click Close and OK to validate. A message is fired indicating that the external document was regenerated. Click OK. The document template was instantiated. (see picture below).
13. From the Window menu, access the generated .CATDrawing file. Right-click CATDrawing2 in the left part of the window and select the Update Selection command. The drawing is updated and matches the new product.
Refer to the Quick Reference topic for a comprehensive list of the interactions that can be carried out on document templates.
Document Templates: Methodology
Document Templates: Methodology
It is possible for the user to define document templates based on contextual products and parts or on isolated parts and products. It is highly recommended to work with isolated documents: not so many documents will be instantiated (when working with contextual products, the context products are needed for instantiation). [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugpkt_C2/cfyugdoctemplate0005.htm10/19/2004 9:00:30 AM
To know more about Part and Assembly Templates...
Part and Assembly Templates are templates that work at the part or at the assembly level. The Document Template Definition window can be accessed by selecting the Insert>Document Template Creation... command from the following workbenches:
q
Part Design Generative Shape Design Wireframe and Surface Design Assembly Design Product Structure
Working with Part Templates

A part created in Catia may contain user parameters and geometry data. It is not a contextual part. The user can create a part template that references that part. This template is a feature that is created in the CATPart document itself (very similar to the PowerCopy definition) and stored in a catalog. Several part templates may be defined in the same CATPart document. To create a part template, the user:
q
selects parameters and geometry data that will be considered as the template inputs (he can assign a role and a comment to each input). publishes some internal parameters (name and comment). The part number is automatically published. gives a name, comment, URL, icon to this template.
In product structure context, the part is inserted as a component of the current product.
Working with Assembly Templates

A user creates an assembly interactively. Then, he wants to create an assembly template that references the root product of this assembly. To create an assembly template, the user:

q
selects parameters and geometry data that will be considered as the template inputs (he can assign a name to each input). publishes some internal parameters (name and comment). chooses if: the part numbers of replicated components are automatically published. for each part or each sub-assembly, this sub-component will be replicated at instantiation or if only a reference to this sub-component will be created (a standard component). he wants to select external documents (Drawings / Analysis) that references elements of the product structure. Those elements will be replicated at instantiation. assigns a name, comment, URL, icon to this template. The template definition is a feature located in the CATProduct document itself. Several assembly templates may be defined in the same CATProduct document. [ Back ] [ Up ]
Scenes
Scenes
Create scenes: Click the Create Scene icon then OK in the Edit Scene dialog box. Set scene properties then click the Exit from Scene icon to return to the initial document window. Reset and Check Component Positioning: Double-click the scene representation then select Tools ->Checking Positioning... to highlight items moved. Click the Reset Selected Products icon and exit the scene.
Using the Explode command in a scene: Once in the scene of interest, select your product, click the Explode icon and use the options of the Explode dialog box as described in Exploding a Constrained Assembly. Save viewpoints : Click the Create Scene icon then OK. Modify viewpoints then click the Save viewpoints icon. Click the Exit from Scene icon to return to the initial document window. Start Publish: Click this icon, save the report then click the Save button.
Editing a Scene Macro : You create a scene through a macro and edit specific parameters.
About Persistency in Scenes: Deactivate a node in an existing scene. Exit scene the node in the product is still activated and deactivated in the scene. Apply a Scene to an Assembly:Select Scene.1object ->Apply scene on Assembly, in the Assembly dialog box click All if you want all your modifications to be taken into account and applied on the assembly .
[ Back ]
Points
Using Reset Selected Products

This task shows you how to use the Reset Selected Products command. Please refer to Creating Scenes. Insert the following sample model files in the samples folder: ATOMIZER BODY1 BODY2 LOCK REGULATOR TRIGGER VALVE REGULATION_COMMAND
You created Scene.1. 1. Double-click the scene representation to enter the scene.
In this scene you moved various components using the 3D compass capability. Please refer to Moving Objects Using the 3D compass in the Infrastructure User's Guide
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugscene03.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 9:01:08 AM
Points
2. Select Tools->Check Positioning... from the menu bar to find out the items you moved. The moved items are highlighted in the specification tree.
3. Click the Reset Selected Products icon
and exit the scene.
The items are repositioned in the scene as they were in the initial product.
Points
Saving Viewpoints in a Scene

This task shows you how to save viewpoints in a scene. It can be very useful to save specific viewpoints in a scene different from the initial product viewpoint. Insert the following sample model files in the samples folder: ATOMIZER BODY1 BODY2 LOCK NOZZLE1 NOZZLE2 REGULATOR TRIGGER VALVE REGULATION_COMMAND 1. Click the Create Scene icon .
The Edit Scene dialog box and a scene representation in the document window are displayed: 2. Click Ok to end the scene creation. You are now in a scene window: 1. The background color turns to green. 2. Scene 1 is identified in the specification tree. 3. The default viewpoint is the initial product viewpoint.
3. Modify the viewpoint.
4. Click the Save Viewpoints icon
from the DMU Select toolbar.
5. Click the Exit From Scene icon
to return to the initial document window.
The initial product viewpoint is displayed.
6. Double-click Scene1 either in the specification tree or in the geometry area to swap to the scene window.
The viewpoint saved is taken into account in the scene. If you did not use the save viewpoint command, the default viewpoint is used.
Start Publish
Publishing
A number of tools let you prepare html reports that you can publish on the enterprise intranet or the Internet for collaborative communication. You can for example take a snapshot of an assembly, add appropriate comments or annotations and even select parts to insert as a VRML link. This task explains how to publish reports. You can access this command only if DMU products are installed. Enter the scene of your choice. 1. Click the Start Publish icon in the Scenes toolbar.
The Select Publish File dialog box appears. 2. Identify the path where you want to save the report as well as the report name then click the Save button Reports are published in html format. The date created and the person who created the report are indicated. The Publishing Tools toolbar appears.
3. Click the Feature Publish icon specification tree.
, then select the feature you want to publish in the
The features you can publish are the following: simulations, interferences, URL. When done, click the Stop Publish icon 4. Click the Snapshot icon 5. Click the Text icon in the Publishing Tools toolbar. You can use
other Publishing Tools commands to add a comment or take snapshots for example to insert a screen capture into your report.
to add a comment:
The Publish Text dialog box appears.
Start Publish
6. Enter your comments, for example "You can also add comments to your report or a VRML link" then click OK. 7. Select one or more products then click the VRML icon to insert selected components as a VRML link. 8. When done, click the Stop Publish icon and read the published report.
Start Publish
Clicking the images in the html page enlarges them.
Editing a Scene Macro

If you perform a task repeatedly, you can take advantage of a macro to automate it. A macro is a series of functions, written in a scripting language, that you group in a single command to perform the requested task automatically. This task will show you how to edit a scene macro created in the DMU Navigator workbench. You stored your recorded macros in a text format file. For more detailed information about macros, read Recording, Running and editing Macros in the Infrastructure User's Guide 1. You can easily modify the macro instructions specific to DMU Navigator (strings of characters put in bold). Here is a scene macro example: (you create a scene through the macro process) SCENE MACRO
Language="VBSCRIPT" '********************************************************* ' Purpose: This macro can be used interactively to create a scene and move products within. ' ' Returns: None '********************************************************* Sub CATMain()
'Deactivate file alert (to avoid interactive message during write of files if any) Dim FileAlertSave As Boolean FileAlertSave = CATIA.DisplayFileAlerts CATIA.DisplayFileAlerts = False
'Find the root of the CATProduct Dim RootProduct As AnyObject Set RootProduct = CATIA.ActiveDocument.Product 'Create the scene Dim TheSceneWorkbench As Workbench Set TheSceneWorkbench = CATIA.ActiveDocument.GetWorkbench ( "SceneWorkbench" ) Dim Ascene As Scene Set Scene = TheSceneWorkbench.WorkScenes.AddNewScene ("Scene1", RootProduct) End Sub
EXPLANATIONS
Create the scene launches the scene creation "Scene1 corresponds to the to be created scene RootProduct: corresponds to Product1
Please refer to Creating Scenes.
About Persistency in Scenes

The activation or deactivation of a product is persistent in scene context. This task will show you how the activation or deactivation is persistent in Scene context. For this: you are going to deactivate a node in the scene specification tree Insert the following sample model files in the samples folder: ATOMIZER BODY1 BODY2 LOCK NOZZLE1 NOZZLE2 REGULATOR TRIGGER VALVE REGULATION_COMMAND 1. Click the Create Scene icon .
The Edit Scene dialog box and a scene representation in the document window are displayed.
2. Click Ok to end the scene creation. 3. Right-click REGULATION_COMMAND.1 in the specification tree.
4. Select Representations->Deactivate Node from the contextual menu displayed 5. Click the Exit From Scene icon to swap to the initial window.
The REGULATION_COMMAND.1 representation is activated in the Product1 The scene is updated: The node REGULATION_COMMAND.1 is deactivated in the scene. The deactivation is persistent within the scene context.
Applying a Scene to an Assembly

This task consists in snapping components in scene context. Insert the following sample model files in the samples folder: ATOMIZER BODY1 BODY2 LOCK NOZZLE1 NOZZLE2 REGULATOR TRIGGER VALVE REGULATION_COMMAND 1. Make sure you work in Design mode (Select Poduct.1 and use Edit>Representations->Design Mode menu) Click the Create Scene icon .
The Edit Scene dialog box and a scene representation in the document window are displayed.
2. Click Ok to end the scene creation. 3. Right-click VALVE (VALVE.1)in the specification tree. 4. Select Representations->Deactivate Node from the contextual menu displayed. 5. Right-click NOZZLE1 (NOZZLE1.1) in the geometry area and change the color using the Properties item from the contextual menu displayed. 6. Hide REGULATION_COMMAND (REGULATION_COMMAND.1) using the Hide/show icon from the View toolbar.
7. Move TRIGGER (TRIGGER.1) using the 3D compass.
8. Click the Exit From Scene icon
to swap to the initial window.
9. Right-click Scene.1in the geometry area and select Scene.1object ->Apply scene on Assembly.
The Apply Scene.1 to Assembly dialog box is displayed.
10. Click All if you want all your modifications to be taken into account and applied on the assembly. Note: you can select the required modification by clicking the red symbol (swaps to green) 11. Click Ok if you are satisfied with your selection
Your assembly reflects the scene created. All your modifications performed ( Graphic Properties, Position, show/Hide..) are taken into account.
The Assembly Design application window looks like this: Click the sensitive areas to see the related documentation.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugwd0000.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:02:11 AM
Assembly Design Menu Bar Product Structure Toolbar Move Toolbar Constraints Toolbar Update Toolbar Constraint Creation Toolbar Assembly Features Toolbar Annotations Toolbar Space Analysis Toolbar Scene Toolbar Miscellaneous Symbols Specification Tree Symbols Reflecting an Incident in the Geometry Building Specification Tree
Symbols Used in the Specification Tree

Miscellaneous Symbols Product Structure Symbols Reflecting an Incident in the Geometry Referenced Geometry Symbols
Assembly Design Menu Bar

This section presents the main menu bar available when you run the application and before creating or opening a document: File Edit View Insert Tools Analyze Window Help
File
For See
New
Creating a New Assembly Document
Edit
For See
Component Constraints
Using Assembly Constraints
Properties
Update
Updating Assembly Constraints
Move
Moving Components
Component Constraints
Selecting Constraints of Given Components
Insert
For See
Coincidence...
Creating a Coincidence Constraint Creating a Contact Constraint Creating an Offset Constraint Creating an Angle Constraint Fixing Components Together Fixing a Component Quick Constraint Using a Part Design Pattern Working with Interactive Templates
Contact...
Offset...
Angle...
Fix Together...
Fix Quick Constraint Reuse Pattern...
Document Template Creation...
Create Scene Fast MultiInstantiation
Scenes Fast MultiInstantiation
Define MultiInstantiation Views
Defining a MultiInstantiation Creating a Projection View, Creating a Section View, Creating a Section Cut Annotations Assembly Features
Annotations Assembly Features
Tools
For Options... Product Management... See Customizing Managing Products in an Assembly Managing a Product Publication Using a Standard Part Contained in a Parametric Standard Part Catalog
Publication...
Mechanical Standard Parts
Analyze
For See
Update...
Analyzing Updates Analyzing Constraints Analyzing Degrees of Freedom
Constraints... Degrees of freedom
Dependences...
Analyzing Dependences Flexible SubAssemblies
Mechanical Structure...
Compute Clash...
Computing Clash between Components Measure Minimum Distances and Angles Measure Elements Measure Inertia Detecting Interferences Sectioning Distance
Measure Item...
Measure Between... Measure Inertia... Clash... Sectioning... Distance and Band Analysis... [ Next ]
Product Structure Toolbar
Product Structure Toolbar
The following commands are documented in Product Structure User's Guide. See Inserting a New Component See Inserting a New Product See Inserting a New Part See Inserting Existing Components See Replacing Components See Reordering the Tree See Generating Numbers See Product Initialization See Managing Representations The commands below are documented in this user's guide. See Fast Multi-Instantiation See Defining a Multi-Instantiation See Inserting an Existing Component with Positioning [ Back ] [ Next ]
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugwd1100.htm10/19/2004 9:02:32 AM
Move Toolbar
Move Toolbar
See Translating or Rotating Components (P1 configuration) See Manipulating Components See Snapping Components See Smart Move See Exploding a Constrained Assembly See Stop manipulation on Clash [ Back ] [ Next ]
Constraints Toolbar
Constraints Toolbar
See Creating a Coincidence Constraint See Creating a Contact Constraint See Creating an Offset Constraint See Creating an Angle Constraint See Fixing a Component See Fixing Components Together See Using the Quick Constraint Command See Flexible Sub-Assemblies See Changing Constraints See Using a Part Design Pattern [ Back ] [ Next ]
Update Toolbar
Update Toolbar
See Updating an Assembly [ Back ] [ Next ]
Constraint Creation Toolbar
Constraint Creation Mode Toolbar
See Setting a Constraint Creation Mode See Setting a Constraint Creation Mode See Setting a Constraint Creation Mode [ Back ] [ Next ]
Assembly Features Toolbar
Assembly Features Toolbar
See Assembly Split See Assembly Hole and Using Hole Series See Assembly Pocket See Assembly Add See Assembly Remove See Performing a Symmetry on a Component [ Back ] [ Next ]
Annotations Toolbar
Annotations Toolbar
See Creating Weld Features See Creating Annotations See Creating Flag Notes [ Back ] [ Next ]
Space Analysis Toolbar
Space Analysis Toolbar
See Detecting Interferences See Sectioning See Measuring Minimum Distances [ Back ] [ Next ]
Scene Toolbar
Scenes Toolbars
See Creating Scenes See CATIA- Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5 See Using the Explode command in a scene See Publishing (the command is available if DMU products are installed) See Publishing (the command is available if DMU products are installed) See Publishing (the command is available if DMU products are installed) See Publishing (the command is available if DMU products are installed) See Publishing (the command is available if DMU products are installed) See Publishing (the command is available if DMU products are installed) See CATIA- Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5 See Creating Scenes See Reset & Check Component Positioning See Saving Viewpoints in a scene
Specification Tree
Product Structure Symbols
Product Structure
Product1 A product. For more information, refer to Insert a New Product in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.
Product2
A component or sub-product. For more information, refer to Insert a New Component in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.
Flexible_product
The purple little wheel to the left corner of the CATProduct icon and identify a flexible sub-assembly. For more the light bar information, refer to Soft Sub-Assemblies in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.
Part.1
Instance of a part. This symbol
means that there is a
geometrical representation of the part and that it is activated.
Part_with_DeactivatedRepresentation
The representation of this part is deactivated. This symbol means the geometric representation is deactivated. Before opening a document, you choose the activate or deactivate Shape representation in Tools->Options->Infrastructure, select the Product Structure tab and check the box entitled Do not activate default shapes on open. For a particular instance in the document, you can deactivate or activate it by selecting the Representations -> Deactivate Node / Activate Node contextual commands.
Component_with_DeactivatedRepresentation
The representation of this component is deactivated.
Contextual parts: For contextual parts, the reference keeps a link with the definition instance. For each parts, every instance keeps a link with its reference. But their first reference has only one link, with a single instance which is contextual. This unique link allows you to know the name of the document (CATProduct) on which the part 's external geometry rests. Three types of contextual parts exists:
Definition Instance
This is a contextual part and more precisely a Definition Instance. The green gear and the blue chain signify the "original" instance of a part that is contextual (driven by another part, built with another part's data) in a CATProduct.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugsymbol3.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:04:42 AM
Specification Tree
Instance of the Definition Instance
This contextual part is the Instance of the Definition Instance represented by the white gear and the green arrow. The geometry of this instance is connected with the Definition Instance (contextual link). You can edit this contextual part. The brown gear and the red flash signify the second or subsequent instance of a part that is contextual. There is a distinction between the "original" and subsequent instances of contextual parts because the geometrical definition of contextual parts (Skillets) is dependant upon neighboring components (support) in the Assembly. The geometry of this contextual part depends upon another instance. This symbol can appear when you import this part into another CATProduct. Reference of a part. For more information, refer to Insert a New Part in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide. A deactivated component. The shape representation is deactivated; its geometry is not visible. This functionality can occur simultaneously on several CATIA documents containing this component, especially when this component is the instance of a reference. This operation is equivalent to the Delete operation because the reference of the component no longer exists within the Bill Of Material. A deactivated product.
Other Instance of the Contextual Part
Part1
Deactivated_Component
Deactivated_Product
Unloaded_Product
The geometry of the component disappears. The product is downloaded, its references are missing but the user is able to find them back.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugsymbol3.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 9:04:42 AM
Customizing
Customizing
Find here all options that will affected the Assembly Design workbench. Customizing for Assembly Design Customizing for 3D Annotations Infrastructure
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugcu0000.htm10/19/2004 9:07:32 AM
Customizing for Assembly Design
Customizing for Assembly Design

This section describes the different types of setting customization you can perform in Assembly Design using the Tools -> Options command. All tasks described here deal with permanent setting customization. Assembly Settings Assembly Constraints
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascuasm_C2/bascuasm0000.htm10/19/2004 9:07:42 AM
Assembly Settings
Customizing Assembly Design Settings

This task will show you how to customize Assembly Design settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options.... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Assembly Design subcategory. The General tab appears, displaying the following options: Update
You can set an automatic or a manual update. The "Manual" option lets you decide when you need to update your design. It is the default mode. You can also update only the active level of the active component or all the levels of the active component. "All levels' allows you to update all the constraints defined on all the levels of the active component. Access to geometry
The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" ensures that the application will automatically launch the Design mode when using the following commands:
- Constraint (clicking on any constraint icon, the application launches the Design mode, the cursor changes to an eye symbol, meaning that the Design mode is then active, you can then you set your constraint) - Snap - Publication Management - Reuse Pattern
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascuasm_C2/bascuasm0100.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:07:49 AM
Assembly Settings
- Define Multi-Instantiation - Manipulate - Translate - Rotate - Update

Move components
The option available controls the display of a warning message that appears when moving components. If you want to see a message indicating that you are moving components attached together, check the option "Display warning when moving a component involved in a Fix Together". The message will appear whenever you will apply the following commands to components fixed together : compass, snap manipulate . , translation or rotation and
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Customizing Assembly Constraints

This task will show you how to customize Assembly Design constraints. 1. Select Tools -> Options.... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Assembly Design subcategory. 3. Click the Constraints tab. The following options are available: Paste Components
You can paste one or several components without the assembly constraints applying to them. You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to them, only after the Copy command. You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to them, only after the Cut command. You can paste one or several components always with the assembly constraints applying to them. Constraint Creation
These three options let you define the way of setting constraints: - Use any geometry: you can select any geometrical element - Use published geometry of child components only: you can select any published element belonging to child components - Use published geometry of any level: you can select any published element For more information about publication, refer to "Managing a Product Publication" in the CATIA Assembly Design Users Guide Version 5. Quick Constraint
The Quick Constraint command is based on a ordered list of constraints to be created by the application. The setting available here lets you reorder the list of constraints having priority when applying the Quick Constraint command to the selected geometrical elements. What you need to do is select the constraint type you wish to reorder and click the arrows to the right of the selection to reorder the selected constraint. Additionally, you can create verified constraints if the option Creation verified constraints first is on.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Customizing for 3D Annotations Infrastructure
Customizing for 3D Annotations Infrastructure

This section describes the different types of setting customization you can perform in 3D Annotations Infrastructure using the Tools -> Options command. All tasks described here deal with permanent setting customization.
Tolerancing Display Manipulators Annotation View/Annotation Plane
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0000.htm10/19/2004 9:08:01 AM
Annotation
Annotation
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure annotation settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Infrastructure category.
4. Click the Annotation tab. The Annotation tab appears, displaying one category of options:
Annotation Creation
Annotation following the mouse (Ctrl toggles) Defines whether the annotation is positioned according to the cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process or not.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0400.htm10/19/2004 9:08:22 AM
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure view/ annotation plane settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Infrastructure category.
4. Click the View/Annotation Plane tab. The View/Annotation Plane tab appears, displaying two categories of options:
View/Annotation Plane Associativity
Create views associative to geometry Creates views associative to the geometry, so that views and their annotations are automatically updated when the geometry is modified.
View/Annotation Plane Display
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0500.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:08:28 AM
Current view axis display Defines whether the active annotation plane axis system is displayed. Zoomable Defines whether the annotation plane axis is zoomable. Visualization of the profile in the current view Defines whether the view/annotation plane profile on the part/product is displayed or not.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0500.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 9:08:28 AM
Reference Information
Reference Information
This section contains reference information about the Assembly design workbench. Constraints Batches and Macros
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugrf0000.htm10/19/2004 9:08:33 AM
Constraints
Constraints
This reference will describe assembly's constraints. About Assembly Constraints Coincidence Constraints Contact Constraints Offset Constraints Angle Constraints [ Next ]
About Assembly Constraints

Setting constraints is rather an easy task. However, you should keep in mind the following: You can apply constraints only between the child components of the active component. Do not mistake the active component for the selected component: The active component is blue framed (default color) and underlined. It is activated by double-clicking.
The selected component is orange framed (default color). It is selected by clicking.
You cannot define constraints between two geometric elements belonging to the same component. You cannot apply a constraint between two components belonging to the same subassembly if this subassembly is not the active component.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugrf0201.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 9:08:59 AM
The following example illustrates what you are allowed to do:
(1) The constraint cannot be applied because Product K does not belong to the active component Product B. To define this constraint, Product A must be made active. (2) The constraint cannot be applied because Product E and Product F both belong to a component other than the active component Product B. To define this constraint, Product D must be made active. (3) The constraint can be applied since Product C belongs to the active component Product B and also Product E is contained within Product D which is contained within the active component Product B. When you set a constraint, there are no rules to define the fixed and the movable component during the selection. If you want to fix a component, use the Fix command. See Fixing a Component .
Symbols
The following table lists the symbols used to represent the constraints you can set between your components:
Constraints
Symbol used in the geometry area
Symbol displayed in the specification tree
Coincidence
Contact Contact (point) Contact (line)
Offset
Angle Planar Angle
Parallelism
Perpendicularity
Fix
Note also that deactivated constraints are preceded by the symbol specification tree.
( ) in the
Tip
The name of a constraint displays when passing the mouse over that constraint.
Geometry
To set constraints it is possible to select the geometry (plane, line or point) resulting from intersections, projections or offsets from the specification tree. For more about these operations, please refer to Generative Shape Design User's Guide.
Customizing Constraints
The application lets you customize the creation and the display of constraints. For more information, please refer to Customizing Assembly Constraint and Customizing Constraint Appearance. [ Next ]
Coincidence Constraints
Coincidence-type constraints are used to align elements. Depending on the selected elements, you may obtain concentricity, coaxiality or coplanarity. The tolerance i.e. the smallest distance that can be used to differentiate two elements is set at 10 -3 millimeters. The following table shows the elements you can select for a coincidence constraint. Planar Face Sphere (point) Cylinder (axis) Axis System
Point Point Line Plane Planar Face Sphere (point) Cylinder (axis) Curve Axis System
Line
Plane
Curve
To create a coincidence constraint between axis systems, they must have the same direction and the same orientation in the product. You can also create coincidence between an axis system and components of another axis system: Origin point. Reference plane, in this case the reference plane must be parallel to the axis system.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Contact Constraints
Contact Constraints
Contact-type constraints can be created between two planar faces (directed planes). The common area between the two planar faces can be a plane (plane contact), a line (line contact) or a point (point contact). The following table shows the elements you can select for a contact constraint. Planar Face Planar Face Sphere Cylinder Cone Circle [ Back ] [ Next ]
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Circle
Offset Constraints
Offset Constraints
When defining an offset-type constraint between planar elements, you need to specify how faces should be oriented. The offset value is always displayed next to the offset constraint. The unit used is the unit displayed in the Units tab of the Tools -> Options dialog box. If you wish, you can customize it. The following table shows the elements you can select for an offset constraint. Planar Face
Point Point Line Plane Planar Face
Line
Plane
Positive and Negative Offsets

When setting an offset constraint, you can define positive or negative offset values. For this, remember that: At least one of the components to be constrained must be a planar element, otherwise you cannot set positive nor negative offset values. The vector normal to the planar element indicates the positive offset value. If the planar element is an oriented plane, the normal vector pointing to the side opposite to material indicates the positive value. If the planar element is a wireframe plane, the application automatically deduces the positive or negative value. Green arrows show the positive value.
If both components are planar elements, the selection order of the elements affects the result when using the orientation option (Same, Opposite, Undefined). The normal to the first selected element gives the positive value.
Offset Constraints
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Angle Constraints
Angle Constraints
Angle-type constraints fall into three categories. When defining an offset constraint between planar elements, you need to specify how faces should be oriented. The offset value is always displayed next to the offset constraint. Angle Parallelism (when angle value equals zero),when setting a parallelism constraint, green arrows appear on the selected faces to indicate the orientations. Perpendicularity (angle value equals 90 degrees) When setting an angle constraint, you will have to define an angle value. Note that this angle value must not exceed 90 degrees. The tolerance i.e. the smallest angle that can be used to differentiate two elements is set at 10 -6 radians. The following table shows the elements you can select for an offset constraint. Planar Face Cylinder (axis) Cone (axis)
Line Line Plane Planar Face Cylinder (axis) Cone (axis)
Plane
[ Back ]
Batches and Macros
Batches and Macros

This reference will describe batches and macros dedicated for Assembly Design workbench. Data Upgrade for Large Assemblies Performances: Tool to upgrade Assembly data to benefit from V5R10-11 performances improvements. [ Back ]
Data Upgrade for Large Assemblies Performances

In Releases 10, 11 and 12, several projects have been conducted to reduce the amount of memory required for an assembly in specific scenarios. All those scenarios start with loading the assembly in visualization mode, and allow the user: To stay in visualization mode (actually product mode, typically from 10% to 15% more than visualization mode) and to get the up-to-date status of the assembly, with constraints, design in context or knowledgeware relations. To switch to Brep mode for assembly constraint creation, for drawing update The major benefit of those enhancements is to lower the required amount of memory used in those typical scenarios. The drafting creation can start at a much lower memory point, leaving enough memory for the necessary processing to generate the drawing. Yet, the benefit of those enhancements is only available with newly created data. This means that all our current customers, using Releases 8 or 9, will not benefit from them, unless they recreate their data... or migrate it, thanks to this new development.
Needed Options
Cache Management on Select Tools -> Options... item: in Infrastructure category -> Product Structure subcategory, Cache Management tab -> Cache Activation frame -> check the Work with the cache system option. Load Reference documents Select Tools -> Options... item: in General category -> General tab -> Referenced Documents frame -> check the Load the referenced documents option.
Macro Usage
The macro is delivered in the application runtime view (./operating_system/ VBScript) Launch the application
Open the assembly to be upgraded (CATProduct document) SendTo if you want to keep the original data Close the original assembly Open the copy Launch Macro (Alt-F8 + UpgradeActiveDocumentMacro.CATScript) Save Management. Close the application
Batch Usage
The batch is delivered in the CATIA runtime view (./operating_system/code/bin) The syntax of the command is as follows: CATAsmUpgrade [-c|--check] [-f|--force] [-h|--help] [-n|--no-copy] [-o|-output-dir TargetDirectory] [-p|--path ConcatenationPath] [-s|--stats] [-v|-verbose] DocumentList -c or --check: print for each document its upgrade status. -f or --force: force CATPart documents upgrade to take benefit of Semantic Unstreaming. -h or --help: help. -n or --no-copy: do not copy data, overwrite input data. -o or --output-dir TargetDirectory: target directory for upgraded documents. -p or --path ConcatenationPath: source concatenation path for documents and dependencies. -s or --stats: print some statistics at the end of upgrade. -v or --verbose: verbose output. DocumentList: the CATProduct documents to be upgraded. The result file location is available on: Windows in: C:\temp\upgrade.log
Unix in: /tmp/upgrade.log
Example
Run the batch or the macro with the following Articulation CATProduct document. The result file displays the following result: [I] CATAsmProxyUpgrader Reporting: Number of Constraint: 8 Number of tried upgraded Constraint: 7 Number of successfully upgraded Constraint: 7 Number of unsuccessfully upgraded Constraint: 0 Number of Publication: 0 Number of tried upgraded Publication: 0 Number of successfully upgraded Publication: 0 Number of unsuccessfully upgraded Publication: 0 Number of Context: 0 Number of tried upgraded Context: 0 Number of successfully upgraded Context: 0 Number of unsuccessfully upgraded Context: 0 [I] CATKweProxyUpgrader Reporting: Number of Relation: 0 Number of tried upgraded Relation: 0 Number of successfully upgraded Relation: 0 Number of unsuccessfully upgraded Relation: 0
Glossary
Glossary A
active component active object angle constraint assembly A selected component currently being edited. This component is underlined in the specification tree. An object currently being edited. A constraint used to define an angle or parallelism between two geometric elements. An entity composed of various components which have been positioned relative to each other.
B
bill of material A list of data about the properties of the components contained in the active component.
C
child component coincidence constraint component One or more components originating from a single component. Compare parent component. A constraint used to align two geometric elements, or get them to coincide. A reference integrated in an assembly. A component possesses characteristics related to how it is integrated in an assembly (for example, its relative location in an assembly). A geometrical or dimensional relation between several geometric elements of different components. It may be used to define the positioning of components. A hierarchical design of an assembly in a specific context (for example: engineering or manufacturing).
constraint
context-specific representation
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmuggl.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 9:09:57 AM
Glossary
contact constraint
A constraint used to define a contact area between two elements (tangent or coincident).
F
fixed component A component for which all degrees of freedom are locked, in relation to the parent component.
G
geometric element The geometric elements which can be constrained in the Assembly workbench are: point line plane (or plane surface from a model) sphere cone cylinder
L
leaf component The last component at the end of each branch of the specification tree.
M
manipulation model A freehand translation or rotation of a component with the mouse. A CATIA Version 4 model.
O
offset constraint A constraint used to define a distance or an offset between two geometric elements.
P
Glossary
parent component part primary child component product
A component that is hierarchically just above one or more components. Compare child component Within the Assembly workbench, it is either a part of the Part Design workbench, or a 3D entity whose geometry is contained in a model. One or more components originating from the first level under the active component. A 3D entity which contains several components.
R
reference representation A product or part with its own characteristics. Compare component. See context specific representation.
S
search order A hierarchical set of paths used when searching for the files included in the assembly. The search begins with the first path, and stops when the file is found. Projects a geometric element onto another one. An assembly contained within another assembly.
snap subassembly
U
update In the Assembly workbench, updates the position of the constrained components so as to satisfy the constraint requirements.
Index
Index
Symbols
.asm
A
Activate contextual command activating constraints active component Add command Analyze command analyzing constraints dependences update annotating annotation creating textual Annotations toolbar ANSI standard Apply Scene to an Assembly contextual command assembly
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugix.htm (1 of 17)10/19/2004 9:10:08 AM
Index
modify Assembly Design workbench creating entering Assembly Features toolbar assembly features Assembly Hole command Assembly Pocket command Assembly Remove command Assembly Split command associating URLs constarints associativity Auto modify part numbers with suffix option automatic update
B
bill of material black broken constraints broken constraint
C
catalog CATProduct
Index
document Chain Mode command Change Constraint command changing position section plane(s) children clash color coding clash clearance clearance color coding color coding clash clearance contact interference(s) command Add Analyze Angle Constraint Assembly Hole Assembly Pocket Assembly Remove Assembly Split Chain Mode Change Constraint Clash Detection Coincidence Constraint Compute Clash Contact Constraint
Index
Create Scene Default Mode Define Multi-instantiation Degrees of Freedom Drag along Y axis Drag around Y axis Edit Grid Edit Position and Dimensions Existing Component with Positioning Fast Multi-instantiation Feature Publish Fix Fix Together Flexible/Rigid Sub-Assembly Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical Geometrical Target Grid Invert Normal Manipulate Manipulation on Clash Offset Constraint Product Management Publication Quick Constraint Reset Position Reset Selected Products Results Window Reuse Pattern Rotate Left Rotate Right Save Viewpoints
Index
Section Fill Sectioning Smart Move Snap Snapshot Stack Mode Start Publish Stop Manipulation on Clash Stop Publish Text Translate or Rotation Volume Cut VRML Weld Feature compass component active deleting editing fixing moving new part repeating replacing Component Constraints contextual command components replacing Compute Clash command constarints associating URLs
Index
Constrained Assembly Exploding Constraint Creation Mode toolbar Constraints toolbar constraints about activating analyzing angle broken coincidence contact creation mode customizing deactivating deleting editing name negative offset offset parallelism pasting pattern perpendicularity positive offset properties sector for angle status tolerance for angle contact color coding
Index
contextual command Apply Scene to an Assembly Component Constraints Copy Deactivate constraint Expand all Expand node Paste Set as new root Show children contextual part Copy contextual command Create Scene command creating annotation Assembly Design workbench section cut(s) section plane(s) creating a part template creation mode constraints customizing constraints
D
Deactivate constraint contextual command deactivating constraints Default Mode command
Index
Define Multi-instantiation command degrees of freedom deleting component constraints dependences analyzing design in Assembly context detecting collisions between 2D sections document CATProduct non-retrieved document template external document methodology part template window document template window auto modify part numbers with suffix option automatic input edit list button manual input new document button same document button
E
Edit Grid command Edit List... button Edit Position and Dimensions command editing
Index
component constraints EN standard entering Assembly Design workbench Expand all contextual command Expand node contextual command Exploding Constrained Assembly external document external reference
F
family Fast Multi-instantiation command Feature Publish command Fix command Fix in Space command Fix Together command fixing component flexible flexible sub-assemblies Flexible/Rigid Sub-Assembly command Flip Horizontal command Flip Vertical command
Index
freedom (degrees of)
G
Geometrical Target command graphic properties green Grid command
H
html format
I
initial computation mode interference(s) instance interference(s) color coding initial computation mode interoperability Invert Normal command ISO standard
J
JIS standard
L
Index
leader line link listing report lock symbol
M
macro macro scene manipulating section plane(s) manual update measure mode modes update modify assembly Move toolbar moving component section plane(s)
N
name constraints new component New Document non-retrieved document
Index
O
Offset Constraint command overconstrained assembly
P
parentheses part component part Part Design part template creating instantiating Paste contextual command pasting constraints pattern pattern constraints persistency pocket positioning section planes along a curve or edge section planes on geometrical target section planes using the Edit Position and Dimensions command product Product Management command Product Structure
Index
properties constraints section published element
Q
Quick Constraint command
R
re-dimensioning section plane(s) relationship repeating component replacing component components Reset Position command Reset Selected Products command results window sectioning Results Window command Reuse Pattern command rigid Rotate Left command Rotate Right command rotating section plane(s)
Index
S
Same Document Save Viewpoints command Scene toolbar scene macro section properties section cut(s) creating section plane(s) along a curve or edge changing position creating manipulating moving on geometrical target re-dimensioning rotating using the Edit Position and Dimensions command sectioning about collision detection creating section planes results window Sectioning command Set as new root contextual command shortcut Show children
Index
contextual command Smart Move command Snapshot command specification tree Stack Mode command standard part Start Publish command status constraints Stop Manipulation on Clash command Stop Publish command sub-assembly symbol
T
Text command textual annotation textual annotation toolbar Annotations Assembly Features Constraint Creation Mode Constraints Move Scene
Index
Update Tools Options 3D Annotations Infrastructure Annotation Creation Annotation tab Annotations in Specification Tree Display tab Grid Leader associativity to the geometry Manipulators Manipulators tab Tolerancing Standard Tolerancing tab View/Annotation Plane Associativity View/Annotation Plane Display View/Annotation Plane tab tree txt format
U
Update toolbar update update analyzing modes Update contextual command URLs
V
Index
viewer sectioning viewpoint Volume Cut command VRML command
W
Weld Feature command
Interactive Drafting
Preface Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions What's New Getting Started Entering the Interactive Drafting Workbench Creating a New View Creating a Rectangle Creating Corners Creating Lines Translating Lines Creating Circles Creating Dimensions Creating Annotations Basic Tasks Using Tools Copying and Pasting Elements Styles and Default Values Using Standard-Defined Styles Setting Properties As Default in Pre-R11 Drawings Using Properties Set as Default in Pre-R11 Drawings Migrating Pre-R11 Drawings to Drawings Using Standard-Defined Styles Sheets Defining a Sheet Modifying a Sheet Deleting a Sheet Updating the Standard of a Drawing Switching a Drawing to Another Standard Creating a Frame and a Title Block
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/driugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 9)10/19/2004 9:13:21 AM
Views Creating Views Defining the View Plane Creating Views Using Folding Lines Creating a Multiple View Projection Reframing a View 2D Components Before You Begin Creating a 2D Component Re-Using a 2D Component Creating a Component Catalog Re-Using a 2D Component from a Catalog Exploding a 2D Component Exposing a 2D Component from a Catalog Dimensions Before You Begin Creating Dimensions Creating Half-Dimensions Creating Cumulated Dimensions Creating Stacked Dimensions Creating Explicit Dimensions Creating/Modifying Angle Dimensions Creating Chamfer Dimensions Creating Associative Thread Dimensions Creating/Modifying Coordinate Dimensions Creating a Holes Dimensions Table Creating a Points Coordinates Table Creating/Modifying Radius Curvature Dimensions Creating Overall Curve Dimensions Creating Curvilinear Length Dimensions Creating Dimensions along a Reference Direction Creating Dimensions between Intersection Points Creating Dimensions for Technological Features Creating Dimensions between an Element and a View Axis Re-routing Dimensions Modifying the Dimension Type Interrupting Extension Lines Modifying the Dimension Value Text Position
Modifying the Dimension Line Location Specifying the Dimension Value Position Adding Text Before/After the Dimension Value Modifying the Dimensions Overrun/Blanking Lining up Dimensions (Free Space) Lining up Dimensions (Reference) Creating a Datum Feature Modifying a Datum Feature Creating a Geometrical Tolerance Modifying Geometrical Tolerances Copying Geometrical Tolerances Creating Driving Dimensions Constraints Before you Begin Creating Quick Constraints Creating Constraints via a Dialog Box Creating Constraints Between 2D and Generated Elements Annotations Before You Begin Creating a Free Text Creating an Associated Text Making an Existing Annotation Associative Creating a Text With a Leader Adding a Leader to an Existing Annotation Handling Annotation Leaders Adding Frames or Sub-Frames Replicating Text and Attribute Copying Graphic Properties Creating a Datum Target Modifying a Datum Target Creating a Balloon Creating Associative Balloons on Generated Product Views Modifying a Balloon Creating a Roughness Symbol Creating a Welding Symbol Creating a Geometry Weld Modifying Annotation Positioning Creating/Modifying a Table
Finding and Replacing Text Performing an Advanced Search Querying Object Links Dress-Up Elements Creating Center Lines (No Reference) Creating Center Lines (Reference) Modifying Center Lines Creating Threads (No Reference) Creating Threads (Reference) Creating Axis Lines Creating Axis Lines and Center Lines Creating an Area Fill Creating Arrows 2D Geometry Creating Profiles Creating Rectangles Creating Circles Creating Three Points Circles Creating Circles Using Coordinates Creating Tri-Tangent Circles Creating Arcs Creating Three Points Arcs Creating Three Points Arcs (Limits) Creating Splines Connecting Curves with a Spline Connecting Curves with an Arc Creating Ellipses Creating Parabola by Focus Creating Hyperbola by Focus Creating Conic Curves Creating Standard or Construction Elements Creating Lines Creating an Infinite Line Creating a Bi-Tangent Line Creating a Bisecting Line Creating a Line Normal to a Curve Creating Symmetrical Extensions Creating an Axis
Creating Points Creating Points Using Coordinates Creating Equidistant Points Creating Points Using Intersection Creating Points Using Projection 2D Geometry Operations Creating Corners Creating Chamfers Creating Chamfers with One Element Trimmed Creating Chamfers with No Element Trimmed Trimming Elements Breaking & Trimming Closing Elements Complementing an Arc Breaking Elements Breaking/Trimming Use-Edges Trimming Multiple Elements Creating Mirrored Elements Moving Element by Symmetry Translating Elements Rotating Elements Scaling Elements Offsetting Elements Creating Spline Offsets Projecting 3D Elements Projecting 3D Silhouette Edges Intersecting 3D Elements Copying/Pasting Elements Isolating Elements Performing a Quick Geometry Diagnosis Analyzing the Sketch Creating Output Features Properties Editing View Properties Editing 2D Geometry Feature Properties Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties Editing Pattern Properties Editing Annotation Font Properties
Editing Text Properties Editing Dimension Text Properties Editing Dimension Value Properties Editing Dimension Tolerance Properties Editing Dimension Extension Line Properties Editing Dimension Line Properties Editing 2D Component Instance Properties SmartPick Creating Constraints via SmartPick SmartPick Before You Begin SmartPicking ... Creating Geometry Using SmartPick Images Inserting Images (Raster or Vector) Editing Raster Images Data Exchange DXF/DWG: Import DXF/DWG: Export DXF/DWG: Report File DXF/DWG: Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG: Best Practices DXF/DWG: FAQ DXF/DWG: VBScript Macros CGM: Insertion CGM: Export Print Printing a Document Quickly Printing a Document After Modifying Current Display Settings Printing using a Clipping Operator Advanced Tasks Deactivating Annotations Deactivating Table Rows Adding Attribute Links to Text Setting Relations Between Dimensional Constraints Text Templates Creating Text Templates Storing Text Templates in a Catalog
Annotating Drawings Using Text Templates Administration Tasks Before You Begin Administering Standards and Generative View Styles Upgrading Standard Files from Previous Releases Setting Standard Parameters and Styles Before You Begin Setting Standard Parameters About Standard Parameters General Parameters Dress-Up parameters Dimension Parameters Dimension Tolerance Formats Dimension Value Formats Pre-defined Formats for Tolerance and Dimension Values Pre-defined Styles Definition Annotation Parameters Frame Definition View Generation Definition Line Thickness Definition Linetype Definition Pattern Definition Setting Standard Styles About Styles Sheet Styles Geometry Styles Annotation Styles Dimension Styles Dress-up and Dress-up Symbols Styles View Callout Styles Workbench Description Command Board Interactive Drafting Menu Bar Interactive Drafting Toolbars Geometry Creation Geometry Modification Annotations Dress-Up
Dimensioning Text Properties Graphic Properties Dimension Properties Tools Style Drawing Tools Palette Customizing for Drafting General Settings View and Sheet Layout Settings View Generation Settings Generation Geometry Creation Settings Dimension Creation Manipulators Settings Annotation and Dress-up Settings Administration Toolbars Glossary Index
Preface
Version 5 Interactive Drafting is a new generation product that addresses 2D design and drawing production requirements. Interactive Drafting is a highly productive, intuitive drafting system that can be used in a standalone 2D CAD environment within a backbone system. It also expands the Generative Drafting product with both integrated 2D interactive functionality and an advanced production environment for the dress-up and annotation of drawings. This provides an easy and smooth evolution from 2D to 3D-based design methodologies. Complementing an existing Version 4 installation, Interactive Drafting benefits from upward compatibility with Version 4, making it possible to browse or complete in Version 5 drawings started with Version 4.
The Interactive Drafting User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create drawings from various complexities. There are several ways of creating a drawing and this documentation aims at illustrating the several stages of creation you may encounter. Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions
Preface
Preface
Version 5 Interactive Drafting is a new generation product that addresses 2D design and drawing production requirements. Interactive Drafting is a highly productive, intuitive drafting system that can be used in a standalone 2D CAD environment within a backbone system. It also expands the Generative Drafting product with both integrated 2D interactive functionality and an advanced production environment for the dress-up and annotation of drawings. This provides an easy and smooth evolution from 2D to 3D-based design methodologies. Complementing an existing Version 4 installation, Interactive Drafting benefits from upward compatibility with Version 4, making it possible to browse or complete in Version 5 drawings started with Version 4. The Interactive Drafting User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create drawings from various complexities. There are several ways of creating a drawing and this documentation aims at illustrating the several stages of creation you may encounter. Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugpr01.htm10/19/2004 9:13:33 AM
Using This Guide
Using This Guide

This User's Guide is intended for users who needs to become quickly familiar with the Interactive Drafting Version 5 product. Before reading it, the user should be familiar with basic Version 5 concepts such as document windows, standard and view toolbars. To get the most out of this guide, we suggest that you start reading and performing the step-by-step tutorial Getting Started. This tutorial will show you how to create a basic drawing from scratch. Once you have finished, you should move on to the next sections, which deal with the handling of drawings and sheets, then the creation and modification of various types of features you will need to create a complex drawing. You can also take a look at the Workbench Description section describing the Interactive Drafting workbench. To perform the scenarios, you will use sample documents contained in the C:\Program Files \Dassault Systemes\Bxxdoc\English\online\cfysa\samples\Drafting folder (where xx in Bxxdoc stands for the current release number). For more information on accessing sample documents, refer to Accessing Sample Documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide. [ Up ] [ Next ]

Prior to reading this book, we recommend that you read q Infrastructure User's guide that describes generic capabilities common to all Version 5 products. It also describes the general layout of V5 and the interoperability between workbenches.
q
V4 Integration User's Guide that presents interfaces with standard exchange formats and most of all with V4 data. the Conventions chapter.
What's New
What's New?
New Functionalities
Dimensions
Dimensions along a reference direction You can now create dimensions along a direction of measure. In other words, you can measure the projection of a segment/distance onto a direction. This direction is determined using either a linear element, a fixed angle in the view or a combination of both. If an element was selected to define the direction, then the dimension remains associative to this element. Curvilinear length dimensions You can now create dimensions for the curvilinear length of any curve. A curvilinear length dimension measures the overall length of a curve. Intersection point dimensions You can now dimension a distance between an intersection point and an element or between two intersection points. Technological feature dimensions (Electrical Harness, Piping, Tubing) You can now gain in efficiency when dimensioning technological features such as electrical harness. Technological feature dimensioning relies on the fact that technological features can specify the way they should be dimensioned, which allows you to create only realistic and customized dimensions, based on the know-how of a given field.
Annotations
Text templates You can now gain in productivity by defining and storing text templates to be used when creating texts associated to features.
Miscellaneous
Batch migration of existing CATDrawing documents containing properties set as default to the V5 R12 XML standard format A new batch utility lets you migrate CATDrawing documents created with versions up to V5 R10 (which use properties "set as default"), to V5 R12 CATDrawing documents (which use standard-defined styles). For each object which uses properties "set as default", a new style will be created in the standard file, with the same specifications as the default object. DXF import and export New and enhanced functionalities are available regarding DXF import and export.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugwn.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:14:41 AM
What's New
These functionalities are documented in the Data Exchange Interface User's Guide.
Annotations
New text frame A new text frame is now available: parallelogram. Roughness symbol enhancements You can now position the extension line for roughness symbols out of the geometry. Furthermore, roughness symbol capabilities have been extended in order to support the latest evolutions in the JIS and ISO standards.
Standards
Upgrading XML standard files from previous releases to the current level If you have customized or defined an XML standard file in a previous release (i.e. a release from V5R9 to V5R11), and wish to re-use this customization in the current level, you need to upgrade your XML file using the upgrade batch utility. Multi-tolerance with associative numerical value A new standard parameter now specifies whether the numerical definition of a multitolerance, H7 (+0.2 -0.1) for example, is associative to the dimension value, in which case it will be automatically updated when the dimension value is changed. Curvilinear length symbol You can customize the symbol that should be used for curvilinear length dimensions. Intersection point You can customize the display of intersection points. Roughness symbol styles Roughness symbol style parameters have been modified in order to support the latest evolutions in the JIS and ISO standards. Roughness symbol annotation parameters Roughness symbol annotation parameters have been added in order to support the latest evolutions in the JIS, ISO, ANSI and ASME standards. Blanking for text, table, balloon and tolerance styles Blanking can now be used for text, table, balloon and tolerance styles. Parallelogram frame definition You can define the fixed-size frame parallelogram in the standards.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugwn.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 9:14:41 AM
Getting Started
Getting Started
Before getting into the detailed instructions for using Interactive Drafting workbench, the following tutorial aims at giving you a feel of what you can do with the product. It provides a step-by-step scenario showing you how to use key functionalities. You just need to follow the instructions as you progress along. The main tasks described in this section are the following: Entering the Interactive Drafting Workbench Creating a New View Creating a Rectangle Creating Corners Creating Lines Translating Lines Creating Circles Creating Dimensions Creating Annotations
Before discovering this scenario, you should be familiar with the basic commands common to all workbenches. These are described in the Infrastructure User's Guide. All together, the tasks should take about 30 minutes to complete. The final drawing will look like this:
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driuggs01.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:14:53 AM
Getting Started
Setting the options in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting is recommended to improve the software performances. For more information, refer to the Customizing section.
Entering the Interactive Drafting Workbench

This first task shows you how to enter the Drafting workbench and start a new drawing. 1. Select the File -> New command (or click the New icon).
The New dialog box is displayed, allowing you to choose the type of the document you need. 2. Select Drawing in the List of Types field and click OK.
OR 1. Select the Start -> Mechanical Design commands from the menu bar. 2. Select the Drafting workbench.
OR 1. Select the Tools -> Customize commands (Start Menu tab) and define the Favorites (Drafting) and Accelerator (F12) options as shown below and click the Close switch button.
2. Press F12 key or select the Start -> Drafting F12 commands from the menu bar.
Whatever the dialog you used for entering the Drafting workbench you used, the New Drawing dialog box is displayed, allowing you choosing the type of Standard, Format, Orientation and scale you need.
3. Select the ISO standard and click the Landscape option. If you activate the Hide when starting workbench option, the next time you enter the Drafting workbench via Start -> Drafting F12 or by pressing F12 key, the New Drawing dialog box will not appear any more. Still, you will always be able to access this dialog box by selecting File -> New Drawing command from the menu bar. 4. Click OK.
You can add an unlimited number of customized standards using Standard files that you will create and/or, if needed, modify. Once created, this standard will appear in the New Drawing dialog box. For more details on standards, see the Standards Administration section. Care that any user-defined standard is based on one of the four international standards (ANSI, ISO,ASME or JIS) as far as basic parameters are concerned. You can create your own Format: r key in the format name in the Format field,
r
use the tab key to access to the Width and Height fields and sets their values.
The Drafting workbench is loaded and an empty Drawing sheet opens:
Make sure you customized the units accordingly. For this: 1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box. 2. Click General in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Units tab and set Length to Inch and then click OK. To visualize better your drawing, tile the windows horizontally from the menu bar.
The commands for creating and editing features are available in the workbench toolbar. Now to fully discover the Interactive Drafting workbench, let's perform the following tasks.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating a New View
Creating a New View

In this task you will learn how to create a new view in the empty drawing you just opened using the Drafting Interactive workbench. 1. Click the New View icon and click the Drawing sheet.
2. Click to position the new view. By default, this new view will be a front view.
In the following tasks, you will learn how to draw geometry in the empty view displayed which is by default a front view. In other words, you will draw geometry in this empty view and create both annotations and dimensions on this geometry.
Creating a New View
Creating a Rectangle
This task shows you how to define geometry in the newly created empty view which is by default, the front view. In this particular case, let's create a rectangle. 1. Click the Rectangle icon from the
Geometry creation toolbar (Profiles sub-toolbar).
The Tools Palette automatically appears, displaying two value fields: horizontal value (H) and vertical value (V). The Tools Palette appears whenever you select a command for which specific options or value fields are available. This enables you to know immediately when tools are available for a command. 2. Enter the First Point coordinates. For example, H: 0in and V: 0in. 3. Press Enter.
At this step, you can either enter the rectangle second point or width and height values. 4. Enter the Second Point coordinates. For example, H: 3.5in and V: 2.5in. 5. Press Enter to end the rectangle creation.
The rectangle appears in the empty view.
You can also move the cursor for directly positioning the second point. The corresponding values similarly appear on the Tools Palette. Note that the grid is not necessarily displayed throughout this documentation. Still, in the Generative Drafting workbench, the grid is set by default. If you need to hide or display the grid, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> General tab and check the Display option.
Creating Corners
Creating Corners
This task shows you how to create corners on an existing rectangle by multi-selecting points. 1. Multi-select the rectangle endpoints.
2. Click the Corner icon from the Geometry Modification toolbar (Relimitations sub-toolbar).
The Tools Palette is displayed with a Radius field:
3. Enter a radius value in the Tools Palette. For example, Radius: 0.25in. 4. The four corners are automatically created with the same radius value.
If you want to create the corners one after the other, you can also select the Corner icon first and then click the geometry.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driuggs05.htm10/19/2004 9:16:05 AM
Creating Lines
Creating Lines
In this task you will learn how to create a line. 1. Click the Line icon from the
Geometry creation toolbar. The Tools toolbar displays with the Start Point value fields:
2. Enter the line Start Point coordinates. For example, H: 1.625in and V: 0in. 3. Press Enter. 4. Drag the cursor to the desired location for creating the second line point. For example, drag the line end point to the top rectangle horizontal line.
In this particular case, smartpicking is used for creating the line. In other words, you want the line to be parallel with one of the rectangle lines.
The parallelism symbol shown here.
appears as
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driuggs06.htm10/19/2004 9:16:14 AM
SmartPick
SmartPick
Information regarding SmartPick is documented in Sketcher User's Guide. As such, the information detailed in this section is presented in a Sketcher context. You should note that the Sketcher User's Guide contains images that correspond to the Sketcher workbench and therefore illustrate geometry in an environment that is different from the Drafting environment (symbols, background color, for example). SmartPick is an easy-to-use tool designed to make all your geometry creation as simple as possible. SmartPick dynamically detects the following geometrical constraints:
q q q q q q q q q
support lines and circles alignment parallelism perpendicularity tangency concentricity horizontality verticality middle point
Note that when you use SmartPick, you do NOT necessarily create constraints.
Creating Constraints via SmartPick Using SmartPick
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt1300.htm10/19/2004 9:16:32 AM
Creating Constraints via SmartPick

This task shows you how to detect, create and visualize constraints. For example, let's create two constrained parrallel lines. 1. Click the Create Detected Constraints icon from the Tools toolbar.
2. Create a first line. 3. Create a second line. SmartPick can be used to create certain elements on the drawing. More precisely, only the elements which the cursor last went over will be used to apply SmartPick constraints. In other words, you simply need to move the cursor over the element you want to use as reference for a constraint. No element is picked:
To detect parallelism constraints, go over the line to be used as reference.
As a result, a parallelism constraint is detected and created.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt1103.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:16:52 AM
To visualize detected and created constraints, make sure the Show Constraints command
is
on, or that the Create detected and feature-based constraints setting is active in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Geometry tab.
When a constraint is detected by smartpicking, you can temporarily deactivate this constraint by maintaining the Shift key pressed. When a constraint is detected by smartpicking, you can temporarily lock this constraint by maintaining the Ctrl key pressed.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Translating Lines
Translating Lines
This task shows you how to translate a line. In this particular case, we will also duplicate the line to be translated. 1. Select an element. For example, a line.
2. Click the Translate icon from the Geometry Modification toolbar (Transformations sub-toolbar).
The Translation Definition dialog box appears and the Start Point value fields (H and V) appear in the Tools Palette.
3. The Duplicate mode option (Translation Definition dialog box) is activated, by default. If not, activate this mode.
4. Enter the duplicated line Start Point coordinates in the Tools Palette. For example, H: 1.7in and V:0in.
5. Press Enter. 6. Enter the duplicated line End Point coordinates in the Tools Palette. For example, H: 2in and V:0in.
Translating Lines
OR
5. Enter a length for the line in the Value field. For example, 0.3in. The Snap Mode is automatically deactivated. 6. Click OK to validate. 7. Once you are satisfied with your operation, click on the view. The second line is created.
This is the resulting translated line.
A new line is created and translated according to the existing one. Proceed in the same manner to create the third, fourth, fifth and sixth lines. The process described above is valid for any other line to be created with the Translation command in our context.
Select two lines at a time to perform your translation, it is time-saving.
Translating Lines
Your final drawing will look like this:
You can also select the Translate icon
first and then the geometry to be translated.
Creating Circles
Creating Circles
This task shows you how to create circles and circle centers using coordinates. 1. Select the Circle icon from the Geometry creation toolbar.
The Tools Palette appears, displaying circle value fields.
2. Enter the Circle Center coordinates. For example, H: 0.75in and V: 2in. 3. Press Enter.
4. Enter the circle radius. For example, R: 0.375in. 5. Press Enter.
Creating Circles
6. Repeat the scenario to create the second circle using the same circle radius values.
Now, let's create inner circles. For this:
7. Click again the Circle icon
8. Select the existing circle center.
Creating Circles
9. Enter the center circle radius.
10. Press Enter.
11. Repeat the scenario to create the second inner circle. This is what you obtain:
You can also select the geometry to be translated first and then the Translate command .
Creating Circles
You can then translate the circles newly created and get the following result:
Creating Dimensions
Creating Dimensions
This task shows you how to add dimensions to the geometry you previously created.
1. Click the Dimension icon
from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Click a first element in the view. For example, the rectangle top line.
At this step, a dimension appears (length dimension). This dimension is defined according to the element first selected. You can either accept the dimension (click in the free space) or select another element (for creating a distance dimension). 3. Click a second element in the view. For example, the rectangle bottom line.
Creating Dimensions
4. If needed, drag the dimension to the desired location.
At this step, you can apply various modifications to the dimension you are creating. You can: q modify the dimension overrun/blanking using manipulators or the Ctrl key to modify only one extension line.
q
add text before or after by double-clicking the dimension redefine the dimension properties using the required toolbar:
This task shows you how to add annotations on your drawing. In this particular case, we will add text to existing 2D elements. 1. Click on an icon from the Annotations toolbar.
For example, click the Text icon
2. Click an element. The text will be positioned according to this element.
3. Enter the required text in the Text Editor dialog box.
As you type in, the text appears in the graphic Text Editor window.
4. If needed, drag the text to the desired location.
The annotation will now remain associated to the selected 2D element. In other words, each time you move the 2D element, the associated annotation moves accordingly.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Basic Tasks
Basic Tasks
The basic tasks you will perform in the Interactive Drafting workbench mainly deal with creating and modifying 2D elements and their related attributes on a predefined sheet. The tasks documented in this section explain and illustrate how to create various kinds of features to obtain a complete CATDrawing document. The information you will find in this section is listed below: Using Tools Copying and Pasting Elements Default Values Sheets Views 2D Components Dimensions Constraints Annotations Dress-Up Elements 2D Geometry 2D Geometry Operations Properties SmartPick Images Data Exchange Print
Using Tools
Using Tools
You will find here below information on helpful tools for creating any interactive elements. Multi-selection can also be very useful.
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar displays a number of options. This toolbar is situated at the bottom right of screen. If you cannot see it properly, just undock it.
The Tools toolbar provides the following options:

q
Grid Snap to Point Analysis Display Mode Create Constraints (See chapter on Constraints) Create Detected Constraints (See chapter on Constraints) Filter Generated Elements
Grid
The grid will help you draw geometry in given circumstances. For example, the grid will make it easier to draw profiles requiring parallel lines.
Using Tools
Snap to Point
If activated, this option makes your geometry begin or end on the points of the grid. As you are creating 2D geometry, points are forced to the intersection points of the grid. Note that this option is also available using Tools ->Options ->Drafting (General tab). 1. Create a spline. In this example, the black spline was created with the Snap to Point option activated. The points are on the grid. Conversely, the highlighted spline was created with the option deactivated. You can use autodetection even if this option is activated. In the case of dimensions and annotations, even though the Snap to Point option remains on (red-colored), you can temporarily de-activate the functionality. For this, press the Shift button while you move the dimension or annotation.
Analysis Display Mode

This option allows visualizing the colors assigned to the different types of dimensions. These displayed colors correspond to the colors customized in the Options dialog box. To modify these colors, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting (Dimension tab). Then check Activate analysis display mode and, if needed, click the Types and colors switch button to assign the desired color(s) to the desired dimension types.
Using Tools
Differentiating Between 2D Elements and Elements Generated from the 3D

You can differentiate 2D elements (Interactive Drafting workbench) from generated elements (Generative Drafting workbench) within the same view. This can prove very helpful when you need to add purely interactive elements onto generated views. Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document. Create a text with a leader on an active view. 1. Click the Filter Generated Elements icon from the Tools toolbar. The generated elements appear in grey. 2. Create a 2D element. For example, create a text with leader. The 2D elements appear in black. This command is active provided you installed a Generative Drafting license.
Tools Palette
The Tools palette appears whenever you select a command for which specific options or value fields are available. This enables you to know immediately when tools are available for a command.
Using Tools
The options or fields available in the Tools Palette depend on the command you selected. Only a few examples are provided here.
Example when creating dimensions

For example, if you select the Dimensions command, the Tools Palette may provide the following options:
Dimension
(according to the cursor position)
Projected/Forced/True Length
Force Dimension on Element
Projected Dimension
Using Tools
Force Horizontal Dimension in View
Force Vertical Dimension in View
True Length Dimensions
Remember that as you create the dimension in one mode, you can use the contextual menu and select another mode.
Using Tools
Example when creating geometry

Another example would be when creating a line. The values of the elements you are sketching appear in the Tools Palette as you move the cursor. In other words, as you are moving the cursor, the Length (L) and Angle (A) fields display the coordinates corresponding to the cursor position. The Horizontal (H) and Vertical (V) fields are optionally displayed, depending on whether the Show H and V fields in the Tools Palette option is selected in Tools > Options > Mechanical Design > Drafting > Geometry tab.
You can also use these fields for entering the values of your choice. In the following scenario, you are going to sketch a line by entering values in the appropriate fields. 1. Click the Line icon from the Geometry creation toolbar.
The Tools Palette displays information on value fields.
2. Enter the length (L) of the line and press enter. 3. Enter the value of the angle (A) between the line to be created and the horizontal axis and press enter. The line is created.
Make the Most of Multi-selection

When you need to create and/or modify an element, you can either select the element or the command first. Multi-selection can only be used for given commands. You are therefore allowed to select element(s) before these given commands. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document.
Using Tools
1. Multi-select 2D elements. For example, four circles.
2. Click the desired command. For example, the Threads icon . Four threads are automatically applied to the selected circles.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Copying and Pasting Elements
Copying and Pasting Elements

This task will show you how to copy and paste drafting elements. 1. Select the element you want to cut or copy.
2. To copy, you can either:

q q q
click the Copy icon select the Edit->Copy command select the Copy command in the contextual menu
This places what you copy in the clipboard. 3. To paste, you can either:
q q q
click the Paste icon select the Edit->Paste command select the Paste command in the contextual menu
If you delete an element after copying it, you will not be able to paste it anymore. When copying and pasting views, positioning links between the views (i.e. links which exist between a parent view and its child view, for example) will not be kept. The only way you can keep positioning links between views is by copying and pasting the sheet. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Styles and Default Values
Styles & Default Values

The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you use and modify the default values of element properties. Note that there are two different behaviors, depending on the versions with which the drawing was created: q Drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, or pre-R11 drawings whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. These drawings use the styles which are defined in the standard used by the drawing.
q
Pre-R11 drawings, i.e. drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 included whose standard has not been updated in version V5 R11 and later.
Use standard-defined styles Use and modify styles in drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, or pre-R11 drawings whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. Styles are defined in the standard used by the drawing. Standards are managed by the administrator. Set properties as default in pre-R11 drawings Set graphical properties to elements to be created in drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has not been updated in version V5 R11 and later. Use properties set as default in pre-R11 drawings Use properties set as default in drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has NOT been updated in version V5 R11 and later. Migrate pre-r11 drawings to drawings using standard-defined styles Using a batch utility, migrate CATDrawing documents created with versions up to V5 R10 (which use properties "set as default"), to V5 R12 CATDrawing documents using standard-defined styles. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Using Standard-Defined Styles

This task will show you how to use styles in drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, or pre-R11 drawings whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. Styles are defined in the standard used by the drawing. Standards are managed by the administrator.
Create a new drawing. Don't forget to specify the standard that you want to use. 1. Start creating a circle, for example. In the Style toolbar, the styles available for the type of element you are creating are displayed. In our example, two Default styles are available: one, the current style, is to be used for curves and the other one is to be used for construction curves.
The styles available in the toolbar depend on what your administrator specified in the standards. 2. If you want to apply the current style to the circle, you don't need to do anything. If you want to apply the other style, you can select it from the Styles toolbar. 3. Click to validate and end the circle creation. The circle is created with the selected style, as defined in the standard used by the drawing. (Consequently, you may obtain a different result than the one shown here).
4. Now, start creating a radius dimension for this circle. Once again, the Style toolbar displays the styles available for radius dimensions. In our example, only one style is available, therefore it will be used by default (you don't need to select it).
5. In the Graphic Properties toolbar, select another color, red, for example.
In the Style toolbar, an asterisk appears in front of the selected style: this asterisk indicates that the style of the element you are creating has changed compared to the style which is defined in the standards.
Depending on the type of style selected (curve, dimension, etc.), only the relevant fields are available in the various properties toolbars. For example, if you select a curve style, text and dimension properties will be disabled from the associated toolbars.
6. At this point, you have two options:

q
You can either revert to the standard-defined values (i.e. reset the toolbar properties to their original values) by re-selecting this style from the Styles toolbar, and then clicking to validate and end the dimension creation. The asterisk will disappear. Or you can apply the modified style by clicking to validate and end the dimension creation. For the purpose of this scenario, do this. The dimension is created with the selected style, as defined in the standard and overloaded by the properties you changed. (Once again, as the result depends on the parameters defined in your standard, you may obtain a different result than the one shown here.)
Styles are used as default values when creating elements. However, after an element has been created, no link remains between this element and the style used to create it.
When you select an element, no style is displayed in the Style toolbar. However, if you expand the list, you will see the list of styles that you can apply to this element (according to the styles that your administrator defined in the standard for this type of element). You can change the properties of the element by selecting another style from the list.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Setting Properties As Default in Pre-R11 Drawings

This functionality is only available with drawings created with versions up to V5 R10. This functionality is not available with drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, nor with drawings created with older versions and whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. These drawings use the styles which are defined in the standard used by the drawing. Standards are managed by the administrator.
This task shows you how to set graphical properties to elements to be created. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click the element to be set as default when creating other elements of the same kind. For example, Text01. 2. Select the Set as default option from the contextual menu.
The options displayed in the Properties toolbars (top of the screen) are automatically updated and display the properties corresponding to the selected element.
3. Select the Only User Default Properties option from the style toolbar to specify that from now on, you do not want to use the options in the Properties toolbar as defaults.
The fields in the Properties toolbars are deactivated and therefore cannot be modified. 4. Create a new text. For example, Text02. The new text is automatically assigned the same graphical properties as the text set as default. At any time, you can edit (double-clicking) and modify one element that was applied graphical properties. There are no links between the default element and the elements that are applied graphical defaults.
You can reset all the values assigned to all the elements via the Reset All Defaults command. For this, select Tools -> Reset All Defaults from the menu bar.
Only one text color can be taken into account when setting a text as default. For this reason, if you set as default a text which includes strings in different colors, only the global color will be taken into account. The global color is the color defined when selecting the text (without editing it) and applied via the toolbar or via Edit -> Properties.
Be careful: you can apply graphical properties only to dimensions/annotations which are of the same type. For example, properties set as default for angle dimensions will only apply to angle dimensions. q Dimensions: chamfer, thread, angle, cumulate angle, diameter (all types), distance (length included), cumulate distance (cumulate length included), radius.
q
Annotations: text, text with leader, balloon, datum target, datum feature, geometrical tolerances.
Creating a Free Text

This task explains how to create a text, with possible line wrapping. This text is assigned a frame of unlimited width, even though it may reach the frame boundary. You can set the properties of a text (anchor point, font size, justification, etc.) either before or after creating it. You will learn how to perform the following operations: q Creating a Free Text
q
Specifying Text Orientation

Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Text icon from the Annotations toolbar.
2. Click where you want to insert the free text on the drawing. A green frame appears, as well as the Text Editor dialog box.
3. If you want to specify the horizontal boundary of the text, drag the frame to where you want to place the boundary. If you want the horizontal boundary to adjust to your text, proceed with the following step.
4. Type your text in the Text Editor dialog box.
The drawing is automatically updated with the text you are typing in the Text Editor dialog box.
You can copy and paste text from another application. Its layout and properties will not be preserved. You cannot copy complex objects (such as tables) from another application.
5. When you are done typing your text, click OK in the Text Editor dialog box, click anywhere on the drawing, or click any command. You can also click the Select icon : in this case, the text will remain selected so you can change its properties for example. You can now start setting the properties of the text you just created using the Text Properties toolbar. Although you can create a text in a view that is not up-to-date, you cannot associate it to geometry. If you try to do so, the following message will appear:
You can associate the text to an element and make it parallel to it. To do this, you can do the following: q Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Annotations tab and check Text in Annotation Creation -> Apply snapping to. From then on, any text you create after having selected an element will be automatically associated to this element. OR q When the above option is not activated, you can specify when you want to associate a text to an element. To do so, click the Text icon and then press the shift key while selecting the element you want the text to be associated to. You can then type your text. You can also make the text vertical. To do this, click the Text icon and then press the ctrl key while clicking in the drawing where you want to create your free text.
Using Properties Set as Default in Pre-R11 Drawings

This functionality is only available with drawings created with versions up to V5 R10. This functionality is not available with drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, nor with drawings created with older versions and whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. These drawings use the styles which are defined in the standard used by the drawing. Standards are managed by the administrator.
This task shows you how to use default values. To understand how to set as default an element properties, see Setting As Default Properties. 1. Create the following text, see Creating a Free Text
2. Select Properties in the contextual menu (right-click). In font tab, select the bold italic style and in text tab increase the line spacing to 5 mm.
Click ok. The text looks like this
3. Select the Set as default option from the contextual menu.
The values you set are stored. Click in the drawing to finish the creation. 4. Select the font SSS1 in the Text Properties Toolbar. 5. Select the Original Properties option from the style toolbar to specify that from now, you want to use the software default options apart from the Text Properties toolbar settings.
6. Create a new text.
The line spacing is equal to 0 mm and the font is regular. Original Properties (that is to say the settings defined in the Text Properties toolbar) are taken into account. 7. Select the User Default Properties option from the style toolbar to specify that you want to use the options set by default (see step 2) apart from options set in the Text Properties toolbar.
In this example you have modified the font in the Text Properties toolbar, the new text will be created with default settings (see step 2.) apart from the font. User Default Properties (that is to say the settings set as default, apart from those defined in the Text Properties toolbar) are taken into account. 9. Select the Only User Default Properties option from the style toolbar to specify that you want to use only the options set by default (see step 2).
Only User Default Properties (that is to say only the settings set as default) are taken into account.
If you selected the Lock "Only User Default" style in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, then using Only User Default Properties is compulsory (the Styles drop-down list is set to Only User Defaults and is deactivated so that Original Defaults or User Defaults cannot be selected). In this case, when creating new elements, all properties toolbars are deactivated to indicate that toolbar values will not be taken into account. If you select an element after its creation, the toolbars are activated to let you change its properties. If you don't want the properties toolbars to be deactivated when creating new elements, simply uncheck the Lock "Only User Default" style option.

q
When creating elements, the values of properties toolbars are taken into account only when the Original Properties or the User Default Properties style is selected. In this case, you can reset the Font Name, Font Size, Tolerance Format and Numerical Display Format toolbar properties to the values which are defined in the standard of the drawing. To do this: 1- Make sure that Original Properties or User Default Properties is activated in the Style toolbar. 2- Make sure that no element is currently selected. 3- Right-click the Style toolbar and scroll down the contextual menu if necessary. 4- Select Reset with standard properties. The current values of the Font Name, Font Size, Tolerance Format and Numerical Display Format toolbar properties are immediately reset to the values which are defined in the standard of the drawing. Note that if Only User Default Properties is activated in the Style toolbar, or if an element is selected, you will not be able to use the Reset with standard properties command.
The table below lists all the objects that can be taken into account when using the Painter or copying the object format from one object to another.
Are these taken into account? Painter Object Properties Original Properties User Default Properties Only User Default Properties
Spline
Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable
n y y y n n y y y n
Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties
Line
Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable
End Point 1
Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates
n n n n n n n n n n n y y n
Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Original properties -
End Point 2
Length Angle Construction element Point Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates Construction element Name Color Symbol Pickable Circle Center Point Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates Radius Construction Element Name Color Linetype
n n n n n y y
Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Toolbar
Thickness Pickable Ellipse Center Point Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates Major Radius Minor Radius Angle Construction element Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Hyperbol Focus Point Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates Center Point Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates Excentricity Construction Element Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable
y n n
Toolbar Original properties -
n n n n n n y y y n n n n n n n n y y y n
Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties
Parabola
Focus Point
n n n n n n y y y n
Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default
Apex Point
Construction Element Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Conic Center Point Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates Major Radius Minor Radius Angle Construction element Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Text String Name Font Font Style Size UnderLine
n n n n n n n y y y n n n y y y y
Color Ratio Strikethrough Superscript Subscript Overline Text Frame Color Thickness Line Type Anchor point X Y Anchor Line Line Spacing Line Spacing Mode Justification Word wrap Reference Orientation Angle Mirroring Auto flip Graphic Thickness Linetype Color Pickable Text with leader String Name Font Font Style Size UnderLine Color Ratio
y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y n n n y y y y y y
Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties
Toolbar User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties User-Default User-Default Toolbar Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default
Strikethrough Superscript Subscript Overline Text Frame Color Thickness Line Type Anchor point Anchor Line Line Spacing Line Spacing Mode Justification Word wrap Reference Orientation Angle Mirroring Auto flip Graphic Color Linetype Thickness Pickable View Scale Rotation View Name Prefix Ident Suffix Dressup Hidden Lines Axis Center Line Thread Boundary fillet Uncut spec
y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y n n n n n n n n n n n
Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties
Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties
User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties
3D Wireframe Visualization and Behaviour Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Sheet Name Global Scale Projection method first angle standard second angle standard Drawing Axis Line Name Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Center Line Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Thread Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Dimension Drive Geometry Value Value Driving Display View Frame Lock View n n y y y n n y y y n n y y y n n y y y n n n n
Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties
Original properties User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Original properties Original properties Toolbar Original properties Original properties Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties
Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties
Value Orientation
Reference Orientation Angle Show dual value Main Value Dual Value
y y y y n n n n y y y y n n n n y y y y y y
Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties
User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties Original properties
User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties Original properties
Dual Value Format Fake Dimension Tolerance Main value
Numerical Alphanumerical Upper Value Lower Value First Value Second Value
Dual value
Upper Value Lower Value First Value Second Value
Dimension Line
Representation Orientation Reference Angle Thickness Color Symbol 1 Shape Color Thickness Symbol 2 Shape Color Thickness Reversal Foreshortened Text Position Orientation Angle
y y y y y y y n n n
Ratio Point scale Extension Line Extremities Overrun Blanking Color Thickness Display first extension line Display second extension line Funnel Height Angle Width Funnel mode Funnel side Dimension Text Prefix - Sufix Symbol Main Value Associated texts Dimension score options Dimension frame options Font Font Style Size UnderLine Color Strikethrough Overline Text Frame Color
n n n n y y y y n n n n n y y y n y y y y n y y n y n n y y
Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar
Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default
Main Value Dual Value Main Dual Element Group
Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default
Thickness Line Type Graphic Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Area Fill Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Type Dotting Pitch Zigzag Color Coloring Hatching Color Number of hatching n-th hatching properties 2D Component Name Color Linetype Thickness Pickable Angle Scale X Y Roughness Symbol Font Font Style Size Color Text Color Thickness Line Type Anchor Point
y y y y y y n n y y y y y y n y y y n n n n y y y n n n
Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Toolbar Toolbar User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default
User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties
Anchor Line Reference Orientation Angle Graphic Color Line Type Thickness Rugosity type Contact rugosity Rugosity mode Name Welding Symbol Length of weld side 1 size of weld side 1 weld type side 1 Length of weld side 2 size of weld side 2 weld type side 2 field weld symbol weld-allaround symbol Font Font Style Size Color Text Frame color Frame Thickness
n n n y y y n n n n n n n n n n n n y y y y
Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default
Toolbar
Frame Line Type Reference Orientation Angle Graphic Color Line Type Thickness Name Balloon String Font Font Style Size Color Text Frame color Thickness Frame Line Type Anchor Point Anchor Line Reference Orientation Angle Graphic Color Line Type Thickness Name Datum Feature String Name Font Font Style Size Color Text Frame color Thickness
y n n y y y n n n n n n y y y n n n n n y y y n n n n n n n y y
Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Toolbar
Toolbar User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar User-Default Toolbar
User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default
Frame Line Type Anchor Point Anchor Line Reference Orientation Angle Graphic Color Line Type Thickness Datum Target String Diameter Name Font Font Style Size Color Text Frame color Thickness Frame Line Type Anchor Point Anchor Line Reference Orientation Angle Graphic Color Line Type Thickness Geometrical Name Tolerance Primary Geometric Characteristic Diameter Zone Tolerance Value
y n n n n n y y y n y n y y y y y y y y n n n n y y y n n n n
Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties -
Toolbar Toolbar Original properties User-Default Original properties Original properties User-Default Toolbar Toolbar Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties User-Default Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default -
User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default User-Default Toolbar Original properties User-Default Original properties Original properties User-Default User-Default User-Default -
tolerance Feature Modifier Primary Datum Text Primary Datum Feature Modifier Secondary Datum Text Secondary Datum Feature Modifier Tertiary Datum Text Tertiary Datum Feature Modifier Font Font Style Size Color Text Frame color Thickness Frame Line Type Anchor Point Anchor Line Reference Orientation Angle Graphic Color Line Type Thickness
n n
n n n n n y y y n n n n n y y y
Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties Original properties
Migrating Pre-R11 Drawings to Drawings Using Standard-Defined Styles

This task will show you how to migrate CATDrawing documents created with versions up to V5 R10 (which use properties "set as default"), to V5 R12 CATDrawing documents using standard-defined styles. The migration is performed using a batch utility. For each object which uses properties "set as default" (i.e. each default object created using the Set as Default contextual command), a new style will be created in the standard file, with the same specifications as the default object. For more information on styles, refer to Setting Standard Styles and Using Standard-Defined Styles.
The version of a drawing that is taken into account for the migration is the version of the embedded standard. For example, if you created a drawing in V5 R7, and modified and saved it in V5 R10, the version of the embedded standard is V5 R7. On the other hand, if you created a drawing in V5 R7, and updated its standard in V5 R10 (using the Update button in the Page Setup dialog box), then the version of the embedded standard is V5 R10. The migration is handled differently, depending on the version of the standard embedded in the CATDrawing document: up to V5 R8, or V5 R9 to V5 R10.
Migration process for drawings with an embedded standard up to V5 R8

If you want to keep your customized parameters, you must provide the CATDrwStandard file associated to the drawing. Otherwise, you can provide a customized XML file (from V5 R9), which will be updated and used in the updated drawing.
Migration process for drawings with a V5 R9 to V5 R10 embedded standard

Standard output values are the values of the old drawing (except for new V5R12 standard values). This is available only for V5 R9 or V5 R10 drawings, which contain standards parameters.
1. Operate as described below, depending on whether you are on Windows or on UNIX:

q
On Windows: open an MS-DOS Window. Change to the folder in which you installed the product. The default folder is C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes \B_XX\intel_a\code\bin where B_XX is B followed by the release number (e.g. B12 in the case of V5R12). On UNIX: open a shell command window. Change to the directory in which you installed the product. The default directory is /usr/DassaultSystemes/B_xx/OS_a/ code/command/ where B_XX is B followed by the release number (e.g. B12 in the case of V5R12) and where OS_a is: - aix_a - hpux_a - irix_a - solaris_a
2. Run the following command: CATAnnDefaultStyleMigration [-h] DrawingName.CATDrawing [-X] [-d OutputDirectory] [-n NewName] [-STDFile StandardFile]
q q q
DrawingName.CATDrawing: Specifies the name of the drawing to migrate -h: Displays online help -d OutputDirectory: Indicates the directory where the new migrated drawing is saved. If not specified, the new migrated drawing will be saved in the DrawingName.CATDrawing directory. -n NewName: Specifies the name of the migrated drawing. If not specified, the new migrated drawing will use the same name as the old drawing prefixed by STD_. Example: DrawingName.CATDrawing will become STD_DrawingName. CATDrawing. -X: Generates the XML file associated to the upgraded drawing. The XML file is put in the same directory as the output drawing. Its name is composed of the standard name and the drawing name with the .XML extension, e.g. ISO_DrawingName.XML. -STDFile StandardFile: Specifies the external standard file to use. This file can either be a CATDrwStandard or an XML file. This step is mandatory for drawings created with versions up to V5 R8 (as they contain an embedded standard); this step is optional in other cases. If a file is specified, the embedded standard will be ignored whatever the drawing version is.
3. Wait until a message indicates that the migration process is finished and that the new CATDrawing and XML file have been generated.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Sheets
Sheets
The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to manipulate a sheet. A sheet contains: q a main view: a view which supports the geometry directly created in the sheet
q q
a background view: a view dedicated to frames and title blocks interactive or generated views
Define the sheet Define the sheet using commands and dialog boxes. Modify the sheet Modify the sheet orientation using the Page Setup dialog box. Delete the sheet Create a background sheet and insert a frame and a title block into it using the Frame and Title Block dialog box. Switch a drawing to another standard Switch a drawing to another standard when several standards have been defined by an administrator. Update the standard of a drawing Update the standard used by a drawing. Create a frame title block Insert a .gif image into a title block. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Defining a Sheet
Defining a Sheet
This task will show you how to define a sheet. For more information about drafting workbench access, see Entering the Interactive Drafting Workbench. 1. Click the New icon or select File -> New.
2. Select the Drawing workbench, and click OK.
3. From the New Drawing dialog box, select the ISO standard, and the A0 ISO format. 4. Select the Landscape orientation. 5. Select the 1:1 scale, and then click OK.
You can create your own format: r key in the format name in the Format field,
r
use the tab key to access to the Width and Height fields and sets their values.
You can add an unlimited number of customized standards using the Standards Editor. Once created, this standard will appear in the New Drawing dialog box. For more details on standards, see the Standards Administration section. Care that any user-defined standard is based on one of the four international standards (ANSI, ISO,ASME or JIS) as far as basic parameters are concerned.
Defining a Sheet
The sheet scale is a scaling factor which applies to all views in a given sheet. It does not determine the position of the views (or any other object) contained in the sheet. When the grid is displayed, the position of the view in the sheet is not determined by the grid, which only deals with what is drawn directly in the sheet. To see the real position of a given view in a sheet, you need to use the ruler. It is the only way to see the real coordinates in a sheet referential. At any time, you can change the standard (which you can update), sheet format, orientation and/or scale. To do this, select File->Page Setup from the menu bar. If you select a new standard, the value in the Apply on field becomes All sheets and the new standard is applied to all drawing sheets annotations.
. The sheet size depends on the standard type. For example, if you choose the ISO standard, the sheet will automatically be assigned the A0 format type. You can choose another format if you want.
Defining a Sheet
To add a new sheet, click the New Sheet icon appears as follows:
. The new sheet automatically
The Insert Elements into a Sheet dialog box appears. For more details, see Managing a Background View in the Generative Drafting User's Guide.
Once you have created more than one sheet, to activate one of the sheets, select this sheet from the dialog window.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Modifying a Sheet
Modifying a Sheet
This task will show you how to modify the standard, format, orientation and/or scale of a sheet. Doing this amounts to modifying the options you selected in the New Drawing dialog box when defining the sheet. Create a sheet using the ISO standard, the A0 ISO format, and the Landscape orientation in the New Drawing dialog box. 1. Select File -> Page Setup from the menu bar. The Page Setup dialog box appears. 2. From the Page Setup dialog box, select the ANSI standard, and the A ANSI format.
You can update the current standards by clicking the Update button. This copies the most recent version of the standard file in the drawing, thus reflecting the latest changes an administrator or user may have performed in the standard file.
3. Select the Portrait orientation, and then click OK. The sheet is modified.
Modifying a Sheet
Deleting a Sheet
Deleting a Sheet
This task will show you how to delete a sheet. When a CATDrawing document is opened, one sheet is necessarily displayed. You created more than one sheet. 1. Select the sheet from the specification tree. For example, Sheet 2. 2. Right-click the selected sheet and display the contextual menu. 3. Select the Delete option from the contextual menu.
Sheet 2 is deleted.
Updating the Standard of a Drawing

When a standard file is modified, there is no automatic update of the drawings which use this standard. Each drawing contains a copy of the standard it uses, and retains this version until you explicitly update this copy.
In this task, you will learn how to update the standard used by a drawing.
Open any existing CATDrawing file. 1. Select File -> Page Setup from the menu bar. The Page Setup dialog box opens, displaying the standard currently used by the drawing. 2. Click the Update button to update the current standard.
The most recent version of the updated standard is copied into the drawing and the previous standard parameter values are replaced by the latest ones, reflecting the latest changes an administrator or user may have performed in the standard file. This may have an immediate impact on the appearance of the elements inside the drawing. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Since there is no automatic update of drawings when a standard file is modified, you need to update the standard of drawings created before V5 R9 if you want them to benefit from the new parameters.
Switching a Drawing to Another Standard

In this task, you will learn how to switch a drawing to another standard when several standards have been defined by an administrator.
Open any existing CATDrawing file. 1. Select File -> Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box opens, displaying the standard currently used by the drawing. 2. From the Standard drop-down list, choose another standard.
3. Click OK.
The parameters of the chosen standard are copied into the drawing and replace the previous parameters. This may have an immediate impact on the appearance of the elements inside the drawing.
Creating a Frame and a Title Block

This task shows you how to insert a frame and a title block on the background sheet. This operation is performed using a macro. A few macros are provided by default. You can customize frames and title blocks by either modifying the default macros (to add actions) or creating your own macros (to add specific formats). Open a CATDrawing document. 1. Select Edit -> Background from the menu bar.
2. Click the Frame Creation from the Drawing toolbar.
icon
The Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box is displayed. 3. Choose a macro from the Style of Titleblock drop-down list. For the purpose of this exercise, choose Drawing_Titleblock_Sample1. A preview of the frame and title block is displayed.
4. Indicate the action you want to perform in the Action list. q Creation: creates the frame and the title block
q q
Deletion: deletes the frame and the title block Resizing: resizes the frame and the title block (if you change the page format in File -> Page Setup) Update: updates the frame and title block if the part has been modified CheckedBy: completes the "Checked by" field and automatically update the verification date AddRevisionBlock: adds a revision block
q q
Information which is not available in the part will be substituted by "XXX" in the drawing. 5. Click OK in the Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box.
About customizing frames and title blocks using macros
To customize frames and title blocks using macros, you must be familiar with Visual Basic. Refer to the Automation Documentation for more information.
Specifying the location of frame and title block macros

To know where frame and title block macros are located, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab. The field available in the Background View section indicates the path to the directory containing these macros. You can add new macros in the specified directory, and/or you can change this location by editing the field.
Creating preview images

You can create a preview image of the frame and title block that will be displayed in the Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box. When saving this preview image this, make sure you do the following:
q
Save the preview image as a bitmap file (.bmp extension) bearing the same name as the macro. For example, if your macro is called CustomMacro.CATScript, then the preview image should be named CustomMacro.bmp (or CustomMacro.jpg, etc.) Save the image in the directory which contains the macros. For example, if your macro CustomMacro.CATScript is located in the CustomMacros directory, then the preview image CustomMacro.bmp must also be located in the CustomMacros directory.
Adding new actions

Available actions for a given macro are listed in the Action list in the Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box. You can add new actions by defining new Sub procedures. There are a couple of things you need to remember when doing this:
q
All Sub procedures must be prefixed using CATDrw_: for example, Sub CATDrw_CustomProcedure(). Do not pass any argument to this new procedure.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Views
Views
Interactive Drafting elements necessarily need to be positioned in a view. In other words, you will first create a view on a sheet and then add 2D geometry, dimensions, annotations and/or dress-up elements in this view.
Create views Create a front view and then projection views. Define the view plane Define the plane of a view (a front view, an isometric view or an auxiliary view). Create views using folding lines Add geometry in views using folding lines as an assistant. Create a multiple view projection Generate geometry in a view by projecting geometry from previously defined views. Reframe a view Reframe a view so as to display only part of it.
Creating Views
Creating Views
This task will show you how to create views. If the sheet is active, the first view you create is by default a front view. 1. Click the New View icon . 2. Click the Drawing window. A blue axis displays in a red frame. The front view created displays in the specification tree. You can now create 2D geometry in this view.
3. Click the New View icon views.
again and select a projection direction to create more
The views created are projection views as they are linked to the front view. From an active front view, you can create:
q q q q
a top view a bottom view a left view a right view
Creating Views
If you need to switch to the Third angle projection method, specify it via the Sheet Properties option. 4. Activate one of the projection views by double-clicking it. For example, double-click the contour of a bottom view.
5. Click the New View icon
for creating the rear
view. The following table shows the possibilities of view creation according to the active view. Active View Resulting Projection Views (linked to the active view) Bottom view Top view Right view Left view
Front view
Creating Views
Left view Right view Rear view
Rear views or Auxiliary views Auxiliary view [ Up ] [ Next ]
Defining the View Plane

This task will show you how to define the plane of a view (a front view, an isometric view or an auxiliary view). Any created view lies on a 3D plane. In other words, a view lies on some kind of a 3D plane whose definition can be accessed using the Plane Definition dialog box. The view plane can be defined and if needed, modified in this dialog box. The view plane will be defined in accordance with two vectors and an origin point. This view plane definition functionality will be used, via the Plane Definition dialog box for acknowledging the 3D relationship between views. This will be the case when creating a multiple view projection or when creating views using folding lines.
q
Define the front view plane Define the auxiliary view plane Define the isometric view plane
Define the front view plane:

Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane_Front.CATDrawing document. Activate the view in which you want to change the plane definition, by double-clicking on this view.
1. Click the View Plane Definition icon from the Multi View toolbar (not displayed by default). OR
1. Select the Tools -> Multi View -> View Plane Definition command from the menu bar. The View Plane Definition dialog box appears with options on the view plane definitions for front views, auxiliary views and isometric views.
2. Select the desired options from the View Plane Definition dialog box. In this case, enter 1 as the Y value for Vector1 and 1 as the Z value for Vector2.
3. Press OK.
Define the auxiliary view plane:

Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane.CATDrawing document. For creating an auxiliary view, you need to create any view first and then modify the view plane you want. In this case, we created an auxiliary view. Activate the view in which you want to change the plane definition, by double-clicking on this view.
1. Click the View Plane Definition icon from the Multi View toolbar (not displayed by default). OR 1. Select the Tools -> Multi View -> View Plane Definition command from the menu bar. The View Plane Definition dialog box appears.
2. Click in another orthogonal view one line that will be used to define the auxiliary view plane.
The Plane Definition dialog box automatically displays the corresponding vectors and origin point. The Rotate Auxiliary View Axis option is activate, by default.
3. Press OK. The axis automatically rotates in accordance with the dialog box values applied to the selected plane.
Define the isometric view plane:

Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane_Isom.CATDrawing document.
in order to create an empty view. In this case, position
the cursor so as to create an isometric view. Make sure the view in which you want to change the plane definition is active. For this, double-click on this isometric view.
2. Click the View Plane Definition icon from the Multi View toolbar (not displayed by default). OR 2. Select the Tools -> Multi View -> View Plane Definition command from the menu bar. The Plane Definition dialog box appears.
3. Enter the desired options from the dialog box (Isometric). OR 3. Select the desired pre-defined isometric view vectors. In this case, select YZX.
4. Press OK.
Creating Views Using Folding Lines

This task will show you how to add geometry in views using folding lines as an assistant. This is true for any kind of view, as long as the planes they correspond to are not parallel. For example, you cannot have folding lines between a front view and a rear view. Open the IntDrafting_Views_FoldingLines.CATDrawing document. Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting (General tab) and deactivate the Grid display option from the dialog box.
Make sure the view in which you are going to create geometry using folding lines is active.
1. Right-click the view to used as reference. In this particular case, right-click the bottom view (which is not active and therefore squared in blue). 2. Select the object ->Show folding Lines option from the displayed contextual menu.
In the case of more complex geometry, you can select one or more element(s) in the reference view and display the corresponding folding lines. As a result, the views are not overloaded with folding lines. This is also true in the case of 2D components. The folding lines appear.
At any time, you can right-click the view and suppress these folding line using the option (contextual menu).
3. Click the Profile icon on folding lines.
and create geometry in the top view using autodetection
What you are now going to do is create geometry in the left view, of course using folding lines.
4. Right-click the left view in which you are going to create geometry and select option the from the contextual menu.
The folding lines disappear. 5. Right-click both non active views one after the other and select the views. option from the displayed contextual menu on each of these
The folding lines now appear as shown here:
6. Click the Profile icon and create geometry in the left view using autodetection on folding lines.
7. Click a view and move it. Even when views are not aligned, folding lines remain associative.
All the above described functionalities are also true in the case of views with a different scale.
Creating a Multiple View Projection

This task will show you how to generate geometry in a view by projecting geometry from previously defined views. Selected objects are projected onto a plane or ruled surface defined by the user, and then transformed into the receiving view. Projected geometry retains the same attributes it had in the original multi-view. 1. You will first add elements to an existing view, using the Action-Object mode. 2. You will then create an isometric view from scratch, using the Object-Action mode.
Open the Combivu_views01_CATDrawing document. Activate the view you want to create the new geometry in.
MAKE SURE THE PLANES WERE PROPERLY INITIALIZED.
Add elements to an existing view, using the Action-Object mode

1. Click the Multiple View Projection icon from the Multi View toolbar (not displayed by default). OR Select the Tools -> Multi View -> Multiple View Projection command from the menu bar.
2. Select the object defining the target plane or surface to be used. This element can be any mono-parametered elements (line, circle, ellipse, parabola, hyperbola, curve). In this case, select an arc of a circle in the front view. 3. Select, in another view, the object to be projected. In this case, select a circle in the top view. 4. Select more elements to be projected, if needed, or click in the open space or still another command if you want to terminate this command.
Create an isometric view from scratch, using the Object-Action mode

1. Make the isometric view active (double-click). 2. Multi-select the elements to be projected into the isometric empty view. In this case, select the whole front view. 3. Click the Multiple View Projection icon from the Multi View toolbar.
4. Select the object defining the view to be created.
All the elements are automatically projected onto the active view.
5. Repeat the steps above (Object-Action) with the various elements to be projected that will allow generating the isometric view.
The projected element keep the same graphical attributes as the selected element to be projected.
Reframing a View
Reframing a View
In this task, you will learn how to reframe a view so as to display only part of it. Open the Visual_clipping.CATDrawing document. 1. Select the view and right-click the view frame. 2. In the contextual menu, choose Properties. 3. Click the View tab. 4. In the Visualization and Behaviour area, select the Visual Clipping check box.
5. Click OK. The new frame appears as a rectangle in the view. You can now define the position and size of your frame on the view.
6. Click on the frame to select it.
Reframing a View
7. Drag the manipulators to resize the frame as you want. For example, resize the frame so as to display about a quarter of the view.
8. Now, drag one of the boundaries of the frame to specify its position on the view. For example, move the frame so as to display only the upper left area of the view.
Reframing a View
The frame is now displayed in the view as you defined it.
q q
The frame can only be rectangular. You can reframe any type of view: front views, isometric views, details views, clipping views, etc. To remove the frame and display the view as it was originally before you reframed it, simply unselect the Visual Clipping check box.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
2D Components
2D Components
At any time, you can create a component or a component catalog. You will then instantiate this component, or detail, on a detail sheet (be this component from a catalog or not).
Before you Begin You should be familiar with important concepts. Create a 2D component Create a detail sheet and then create and position a detail on this sheet (local). Re-use a 2D component Instantiate 2D components from a detail previously created on a detail sheet (local). Explode a 2D component Individually explode an 2D component that you will then possibly modify. Create a component catalog Create a catalog referencing 2D components from a drawing (external). Re-use a 2D component from a catalog Instantiate a 2D component previously referenced in a catalog (external). Expose a 2D component from a catalog Expose a 2D component to cut any existing link between this 2D component and its reference in a catalo.
Before You Begin
Before You Begin

What's a 2D Component?
A 2D component is a re-usable set of geometry and annotations. This component is located in a sheet and can be edited like a view. This is why we call this component a detail view. The 2D component can be instantiated several times, each instance providing a component with a specific orientation, position and scale. The detail view can be either in the same drawing as the CATDrawing of the corresponding instances or in a separate CATDrawing.
What's a Component Catalog?

The catalog is a separate file which references the detail views, enabling to group the components, to classify them and to add information and attributes to these components. This allows overall management of the components. Moreover, the catalog browser can be used to choose a component and instantiate it in a drawing document.
You can synchronize external catalog components. In other words, you may update a component (or ditto) that is external to the 2D. Note that associativity is kept. For this, go to Edit->Link (menu bar) and select the Synchronize switch from the displayed dialog box. You can prevent manipulating a 2D component (the whole 2D component). For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Geometry tab and de-activate the Allow Direct Manipulation option.
General Concepts For Using Catalogs

Creating a 2D component in a detail sheet
You will find below a reminder on how to instantiate a component from a reference element that is internal to the document.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt1208.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 12:13:08 PM
Before You Begin
1:
reference component
2:
instantiated component
Saving a 2D Component in a Catalog

You will find below how to instantiate a component from a reference element that is external to the document.
Before You Begin
1: 2: 3: 4:
local copy of reference component instantiated components catalog entry external reference component
When you create a 2D component in a detail sheet, store this component into a catalog and you can perform modifications to this component on the detail sheet. There are two ways for updating the catalog file: - you can make a Save As Catalog on the same catalog. Be careful: in this case, the catalog is re-generated not updated. In other words, any modification applied to the catalog will be lost. - you can manually modify the catalog using the catalog editor. For more information, refer to the Component Catalog Editor User's Guide. When you instantiate a component from a catalog, this component appears on the sheet. In addition, this component definition is locally copied but you cannot visualize this copy. In that
Before You Begin
way, the instantiated component becomes a component which references this locally copied component. As a result, if the origin component disappears, the link between the locally copied component and the origin component is broken BUT the component can still be used. If the image of the component in the catalog is modified and therefore different from the instantiated component, you can go to Edit->Links option from the menu bar and click the Synchronize switch (Links of Document dialog box).
q
The Links of Document dialog box shows all the local copies and the states of the copies links. So, synchronizing amounts to updating the local copy based on the origin component modifications. Once the local copy is synchronized, all the instantiated components referencing this local copy are simultaneously updated. When you save a component in a catalog, you actually make a photo of the image of this component and also create a link which allows to find the origin component. As a result, if you modified the origin component and now try to instantiate this component from the catalog, the instantiated component will result different from what you expected.
You will find here two possible scenarios which will help you get what you expected: Scenario 1: if a component in a detail sheet and in a catalog are different from each others and if you update the catalog (Save As from the detail sheet), be careful: you will loose the catalog modifications. Scenario 2: suppose both the detail sheet and the catalog are similar (Save As from the detail sheet). When you instantiate the component from the catalog into the drawing, if the instantiated component is different from the component that was saved in the catalog, please go to Edit>Links command from the menu bar and click the Synchronize switch button. In fact, the origin reference component was locally copied and can only be updated using the Links of Document dialog box.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating a 2D Component
This task will show you how to create a detail sheet and then position a 2D component on this sheet. This 2D component will then be instantiated on a design drawing sheet. Differentiating the design sheet from the detail sheet allows assigning a structure to the document. This means separating the drawing elements from the re-usable components.
1. Click the New Detail Sheet icon from the Drawing toolbar (Sheets sub-toolbar).
The newly created detail sheet automatically appears. A view is automatically created at the bottom left corner of the sheet. If you need to create another new view, click the New View icon from the Drawing toolbar. A new view appears on the sheet.
3. Create a 2D component inside this new view. For example, create two circles on the detail sheet.
Note that you can customize both the design and the detail sheet background colors. For more information, see Infrastructure User's Guide.
Re-Using a 2D Component
Re-using a 2D Component
This task shows you how to re-use a 2D component. In this particular case, we will instantiate a 2D component previously created on a detail sheet. Select a task:
q
Creating a 2D Component instance Positioning a 2D Component instance during creation Adding a leader to a 2D Component Automating 2D Component instance creation with VB script Modifying text in 2D Component instances Replacing the reference of a 2D Component instance Specifying annotation orientation in 2D Component instances
Open the Position_Component.CATDrawing document.
Creating a 2D Component instance

1. Double-click the view in which you want to instantiate the 2D component. This view is now active.
2. Click the Instantiate 2D Component icon . Note that to position several 2D components on the sheet and keep the scale and angle properties for all these components, you need to double- click the Instantiate 2D Component icon .
3. Go to the detail sheet Sheet2(Detail) and click the component.
You can select the 2D component from the design tree. You can also select a component that already exists on the drawing sheet.
The drawing sheet automatically displays the sheet containing the starting view. 4. Position the component using the picking assistant. You can use the Tools toolbar for positioning the component either before or after you instantiate the 2D component.
5. If needed, select the component and use the displayed manipulators to modify the component. You can also modify a group of objects including a 2D component. For this, multi-select the group of object and perform the desired modification(s).
To find easily and edit the reference 2D Component, double-click or right-click on the 2D component you have instantiated, and choose Edit 2D reference option in the contextual menu.
Positioning a 2D Component instance during creation

Open the Position_Component02.CATDrawing document. 1. At any time as you instantiate a component, you can re-position it using the Position dialog box that appears.
2. Click the Change the component origin option
from the Position dialog box.
3. On the component, click the point which you want to use as the component origin: this makes it easier to position this component.
4. Click the Change the component angle option from the Position dialog box. 5. Click in the view once the component angle axis corresponds to the position you want to assign to the component.
You can also flip the component according to either the x axis or the y axis. If you click the Flip component horizontally option , the component flips on the horizontal axis of the detail. If you , the component flips on the vertical axis of its
click the Flip component vertically option reference .
Adding a leader to a 2D component

Create a 2D component following the scenario Creating 2D component instance. 1. Right-click the 2D component and select Add Leader. 2. Select the element you want to associate to the 2D component, or click in empty space.
Automating 2D component instance creation with VB script

Open the Position_Component.CATDrawing document. 1. Go to Tools -> Macro and select Start recording.
2. Key in the macro name and click on start button.
3. Create a 2D component instance using the Instantiate Detail icon 4. Stop the recording clicking the following icon
or go to Tools -> Macro and select Stop
Recording. Now you can create this 2D component instance automatically. 5. Delete the previous 2D Component instance. Go to Tools -> Macro -> Macros, select the macro and click the run button
This macro will be available only in this drawing. 6. A 2D component instance will be created at the same place as the previous one.
Modifying text in 2D Component Instances

This functionality allows you to modify 2D component texts. Open the Position_Component.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the detail sheet tab, activate the 2D component view (double-click this view), insert a text in the 2D component and create a 2D component instance.
2. Right-click on the 2D component reference text:
3. Check Modifiable in instance. The text will be modifiable in existing instances as well as in newly-created instances. 4. Once again, create a 2D component instance. 5. In Sheet.1, double-click on the first 2D component instance text you have created, modify it and click to validate. Then, double-click on the second text, modify it and click to validate. Both texts are modifiable.
q q q
Attribute links may be added in the text content. Once a text becomes modifiable, it is not possible to make it non-modifiable. When a 2D component text becomes modifiable, texts can be modified in new instances as well as in existing instances. For 2D component instances created with a catalog, if a text becomes modifiable in the catalog, you have to synchronize the external reference to make the 2D component instance text modifiable too (see Creating a catalog in the Infrastructure User's Guide). If you create a 2D component reference (called MYREF for example) containing a 2D component instance with a modifiable text, the text will not be modifiable in instances of MYREF. If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the Apply Scale property for the text (in Edit -> Properties) and the Create with a constant size setting (in Tools -> Options > Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab): the size of both the 2D component and its text will then be independent from the view scale.
Replacing the Reference of a 2D Component Instance

Create a 2D component instance. 1. Right-click on an instance, and from the contextual menu, select Replace Reference for this instance.
2. Select another instance (this instance reference will be taken into account) or a 2D component in a local sheet of detail. The 2D component instance reference is replaced.
You cannot use a catalog to replace a 2D component instance reference. To bypass this, use an instance created with this catalog.
When replacing the reference of a 2D component instance, any existing text in the original 2D component instance is also replaced, even if this existing text had been previously modified (see Modifying text in 2D Component instances for more information on this point).
Specifying annotation orientation in 2D Component Instances

This functionality allows you to fix the text orientation in the 2D Component. In the 2D Component Instances, the text will keep the same orientation even if the 2D component instance is rotated or flipped.
Open the Position_Component04.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click on the text. Select Properties and Text tab. Choose to orientate the text horizontally relating to the sheet.
2. Create two 2D Component Instances, one without modifying the orientation and one orienting a 2D Component instance during creation. For the second instance, set the angle with the sheet to: 130.
The 2D Component Text orientation in relation to the sheet is kept. Not available for tables. Text oriented view, summary table: Original Horizontal orientation Text rotate with 2D component instance Flip Horizontal
Vertical
Flip Vertical
Rotate
Text orientation is fixed and independent from 2D component instance orientation
Creating a Component Catalog

This task will show you how to create 2D components in a drawing repository. In this particular case, we will create a component from re-usable geometry that exist in a design sample CATDrawing document into a drawing repository. Note that what you can do is create the desired geometry from scratch as you create the catalog component. For this, you may, for example, copy the geometry, use Sketcher commands or insert a DXF/DWG file. You will thus be able to start creating a catalog (pointing the newly created component). In this catalog, component descriptions will be sorted identically to the drawing and sheet structure.
We strongly advise that in a catalog you instantiate one part per sheet (multirepresentation part) or one part family per sheet (mono-representation part).
Add a Detail View in a Detail Sheet Add Existing Geometry to the Detail View Create the Component Catalog
Open the DesignSample.CATDrawing document.
Add a Detail View in a Detail Sheet

1. Open the BoldSample.CATDrawing document. 2. Click Bolds sheet (detail sheet in which the component is to be created).
from the Drawing toolbar and position it on the sheet.
Add Existing Geometry to the Detail View

Design Sample:
4. Select the geometry to be copied from the Design Sample CATDrawing. 5. Select Edit->Copy from the menu bar. 6. Go back to the Bold Sample CATDrawing and select Edit->Paste from the menu bar.
The geometry is copied with the same coordinates as in the design sample.
2D Component Repository:
If needed, re-position the component geometry using the Translate command and make sure you deactivate the Duplicate option in the Translation Definition dialog box.
7. Select File->Save from the menu bar and save the BoldSample.CATDrawing document (repository document).
The catalog does not include the geometrical definition of the 2D component. This definition is included in the CATDrawing document. This is why you absolutely need to save this CATDrawing document.
Create the Component Catalog

8. Select File->Save As from the menu bar and generate the component catalog pointing the newly positioned component. The Save as type "catalog" functionality is a simple way for creating a catalog. If you want to edit the component, select File -> Open from the menu bar and open the component. See Infrastructure User's guide for more details on this functionality.
Re-Using a 2D Component from a Catalog
Re-using a 2D Component from a Catalog

This task shows you how to re-use a 2D component you previously referenced in a catalog. Create a component catalog and enter a new CATDrawing in which you want to insert one or more 2D components. 1. Click the Catalog Browser icon from the Catalog toolbar.
The Catalog Browser dialog box appears with the following information:
q
the name of the currently opened catalog. the catalog chapter tree. a preview of the selected component. the possibility to perform a query on available components (see Knowledge Advisor User's Guide for more details on formulas).
2. Click the Browse another catalog option from the Catalog Browser dialog box and open the BoldSample. catalog document from the \online\driug \samples directory. 3. Double-click the Bolds chapter from the chapter tree. The list with the components included in the Bolds chapter appears in the dialog box.
Re-Using a 2D Component from a Catalog
4. Click Detail.7 from the list available. You now have a preview of the component you just selected. 5. Drag the detail from the list and position this detail onto the desired CATDrawing. (at this step, the dialog is the same as when you re-use a 2D component). 6 Click to end detail location. What you can also do is display the contextual menu on the selected component and select the Instantiate option. You will then position the component on the CATDrawing. If you double-click the component from the Catalog Browser, the following dialog box appears which allows modifying the 2D component origin or angle. q The CATDrawing in which you locally instantiated a catalog component is autonomous. In other words, you do not necessarily need the catalog to be able to read the CATDrawing.
q
There is a link that exists between the CATDrawing and the catalog.
Exploding a 2D Component
This task shows you how to individually explode an 2D component that was instantiated from a detail sheet. You will then modify as desired this component.
Open the Explode_Component.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click the component that was previously instantiated from the detail sheet and select the Explode 2D Component option from the contextual menu.
The component is now exploded. You can therefore modify the geometry and/or graphical properties on one or more elements of this component. 2. Click the text and re-position it. 3. Select one line on the top of the hexagon and use the Graphical Properties toolbar to change the color into red.
The component now appears as desired:
Exposing a 2D Component from a Catalog

In this task, you will learn how to expose a 2D component. Exposing a 2D component lets you cut any existing link between a 2D component instance and its reference in a catalog. This will also allow you to modify the 2D component locally (without modifying the 2D component catalog reference). Exposing a 2D component amounts to creating a 2D component reference (a detail). In a given document, all 2D component instances that pointed the former 2D component catalog reference will then point the exposed 2D component reference.
Open the Expose_2D_Component.CATDrawing document. The frame and title block contained in this drawing is a 2D component that was instantiated from a catalog.
1. Right-click the 2D component (i.e. the frame and title block) to display the contextual menu. 2. Select 2D Component (Instance).2 object -> Expose 2D Component. A message appears, informing you that, as no detail sheet exists in this drawing, a detail sheet was created for the 2D component. In the case of a drawing with an existing detail sheet, the 2D component will be created on this detail sheet. 3. Click OK. All links are now cut between the 2D component instance and its catalog reference. 4. In the detail sheet, you can now modify the 2D component reference. For example, enter your company name.
In this scenario, we are modifying text as an example of 2D component reference modification. However, the Modifiable in instance contextual command is specifically intended for modifying texts in 2D component instances. See Re-Using a 2D Component for more information on modifying text in 2D component instances.
5. In the sheet, notice that the 2D component has been modified. On the other hand, the 2D component reference in the catalog is left unchanged.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Dimensions
Dimensions
The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create and modify given types of dimensions using the Dimensions toolbar:
Before You Begin: You should be familiar with basic concepts. Create dimensions: Create dimensions by clicking elements. Create half-dimensions: Create half dimensions on distance, angle, diameter, cylinders, diameter edges and diameter tangents but not on cumulate dimensions. Create cumulated dimensions: Create cumulated dimensions on a view using selection. Create stacked dimensions: Create stacked dimensions using selection.
Create explicit dimensions: Create dimensions using explicit selection both of the desired icon and of the required geometrical elements.
Create/modify angle dimensions: Create an angle dimension and perform the following kinds of modifications: new angle sector or turn an angle sector into a supplementary sector. Create chamfer dimensions: Create a chamfer dimension using selection.
Dimensions
Create associative thread dimensions: Create associative thread dimensions. Create/modify coordinate dimensions: Automatically create coordinate dimensions on elements. Create a holes dimensions table: Create a table containing holes dimensions (diameter and center coordinates). Create points coordinates table: Create a table containing 2D and 3D points coordinates. Create/modify radius curvature dimensions: Create and modify a radius curvature dimension. This lets you know the curvature radius at a given point on a curve (spline, ellipse, etc.). Create overall curve dimensions: You can create dimensions on the overall size of any kind of curve, whether it is canonical or not (e.g.: line, circle, ellipse, spline, etc.). You can also create dimensions on the overall size between 2 curves, or between a curve and a line, for example. Create curvilinear length dimensions: You can create dimensions for the curvilinear length of a curve, i.e. measure the overall length of a curve. Create dimensions along a reference direction: You can create dimensions along a direction of measure. In other words, you can measure the projection of a segment/distance onto a direction. Create dimensions between intersection points You can create dimensions between an intersection point and an element or between two intersection points. Create dimensions for technological features You can create dimensions for technological features such as electrical harness. As technological features can specify the way they should be dimensioned, technological feature dimensioning allows you to create only realistic and customized dimensions, based on the know-how of a given field.
Dimensions
Create dimensions between an element and a view axis: Create dimensions between an element and a view axis (one of the two axes or the origin). Modify the dimension type: Modify the dimension type as you create a dimension. On other words, you modify the dimension attributes. Re-route dimensions: Re-route dimensions, i.e. recalculate dimensions taking into account new geometry elements. Interrupt one or more extension lines: Interrupt manually one or more extension lines of one or more dimensions, either using the contextual menu or the Insert menu bar option. Modify the dimension line location: Use the mouse to modify dimension line location either before or after creating dimensions. Modify the dimension value text position: Use the cursor to modify dimension value text position. Specify the dimension value position: Automatically or explicitly position the dimension value inside or outside the area between extremity symbols. Add text before/after the dimension value: Insert text before or after the dimension value. Modify the dimension overrun/blanking: Use the Blanking Edition dialog box to modify dimension overrun or blanking. Line up dimensions (free space): Line up dimensions relatively to a point in the free space. Line up dimensions (reference): Line up dimensions according to a given reference. Create a datum feature: Use the Datum Feature Creation dialog box to create a datum feature.
Dimensions
Modify a datum feature: Modify a datum feature by editing it. Create a geometrical tolerance: Use the Geometric Dimensioning And Tolerancing Parameters dialog box to create geometrical tolerances. Modify a geometrical tolerance: Use the Geometric Dimensioning And Tolerancing Parameters dialog box to modify geometrical tolerances. Copy a geometrical tolerance: Copy an existing geometrical tolerance and then edit the content for creating a new one. Create driving dimensions Create dimensions that will drive associated constrained geometry. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Before You Begin
Before You Begin

You should be familiar with the following concepts:
Creating Dimensions
You can create (and therefore modify) the following types of dimensions:
Dimensions created on one element:

q
Length dimensions Diameter dimensions Radius dimensions Radius curvature dimensions
Dimensions created on two elements:

q
Distance dimensions Angle dimensions Diameter/Radius Cylinder dimensions
Note that you can create half-dimensions on distance, angle, diameter cylinder, diameter edge and diameter tangent dimensions but not on cumulate dimensions.
Modifying the Dimension Attributes

You can modify the following attributes at any time before you click to validate the dimension creation:
Modify while creating:

q
Type Measure direction Angle sector One symbol Diameter/Radius center
Modify while or just after creating:

q
Value position
Before You Begin
Extension line overrun/blanking (either one or both) Text before/after Properties (see further down) Swap to diameter/radius
Manipulating Dimensions
By default, when manipulating dimensions, you will use the following functionalities: q dimension following the cursor: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, to use automatic positioning
q
global move: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, to move precisely dimension line, dimension value, secondary part of a dimension line. blanking manipulators (available when modifying a dimension): go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, not to visualize blanking manipulators or to visualize other manipulators either when creating or when modifying a dimension (Overrun, Blanking, Insert text before, Insert text after, Move value, Move dimension line, Move DimLine Secondary Part). value snapped between the dimension lines symbols: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, if you do not want to have the possibility to snap the dimension value between both symbols of the dimension line and/or you want to snap the dimension position on the grid. during creation: to switch temporarily the Dimension following the cursor option, hold on the ctrl key. during creation and edition: to switch temporarily the Activate Snapping option, hold on the shift key. Clicking on the dimension symbols will invert them. during angle dimension creation: if the Dimension following the cursor option is activated, you can swap the angle sector according to the mouse position holding on the ctrl and shift keys. If the Dimension following the cursor option is not activated, you can swap to the complementary angle sector holding on the ctrl key and clicking on the dimension line.
Dimension Properties
You can apply given properties to all the dimensions you are going to create. For this, use the Dimension Properties toolbar.
Before You Begin
q q q q q
Line type (regular, two parts, one part leader, or two parts leader) Tolerance type Tolerance value Numerical Display Format Precision.
For the ISOCOMB combined tolerance, use the following type of syntax in the tolerance value field: H6 (+0.5 / -0.3)
When creating a new drawing, the Unit field (here: NUM.DIMM) drives the unit of the dimensions to be created. The value which is used by default in this field is usually defined in the standards (Tools -> Standards -> [StandardName] -> General -> DefaultNumericalFormatLength or DefaultNumericalFormatAngle). However, if no value is defined in the standards, the one which will be used by default is that defined as your default unit choice in Tools -> Options -> Parameters and Measure -> Units tab. When editing an existing drawing, if you change your default unit choice in Tools -> Options -> Parameters and Measure -> Units tab, then the numerical display format which best corresponds to the selected unit is automatically selected in the toolbar instead of the current default value.
Before You Begin
Using Styles
You can use styles (i.e. a set of default values for each kind of element) when creating dimensions in drawings created with version V5 R11 and later (or pre-R11 drawings whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later). Styles are defined in the standard used by the drawing and managed by the administrator. When creating a dimension, the Style toolbar displays the styles available for this type of dimension. (By default, the Style toolbar is situated at the top left of screen.) If only one style is available, it will be used by default.
If several styles are available for this type of dimension, you can choose the style that you want to use to create this dimension by selecting it from the Style toolbar. Refer to Using Styles for more information.
In drawings created with versions up to V5 R10, you can create dimensions using default values. Refer to Setting Properties As Default in Pre-R11 Drawings and to Using Properties Set as Default in Pre-R11 Drawings for more information.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating Half-Dimensions
Half-Dimensions are useful in the case of revolved features or elements using a plane symmetry. Actually it allows to create the dimensions only on half the geometry.
This task will show you how to create a half-dimension. You can create halfdimensions on distance, angle, diameter, cylinders, diameter edges and diameter tangents but not on cumulate dimensions.
Open the Brackets_views05.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Dimensions icon Dimensioning toolbar.
from the
2. Click a first element in the view. For example, an edge. 3. If needed, click a second element in the view. For example, another edge. 4. Right-click the dimension and select the Half Dimension option from the contextual menu.
The half-dimension appears. Only one extension line is displayed. The dimension line is shortened with specific overrun, gap and length. The value is not centered on the dimension line. The attributes mentioned in Dimension parameters drive the dimension graphic display.
Once you select the half-dimension option from the contextual menu, all the following dimensions you create will be assigned the half-dimension mode. If you want to create dimensions in the standard mode, go back to the contextual menu and de-activate the Half Dimension option. You can create a half-dimension directly by selecting first an axis line and then an other element (which is not an axis). The half-dimension value will be the double of the measured value between the elements. If you don't want a half-dimension to be created when selecting such elements, uncheck Half Dimensions from the contextual menu (right-click) when creating the dimension.
Associativity in the case of half-dimensions is different from associativity in the case of standard dimensions. For example, the half diameter dimension below is associated to the axis and the element, whereas a standard diameter is associated to both symmetrical elements.
Standard diameter edge:
Half diameter edge:
Creating Cumulated Dimensions

This task will show you how to create cumulated dimensions on a view. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Go to Tools->Options->Drafting->Dimensions->Line-up and uncheck Align cumulated dimension values. 1. Click the Cumulated Dimensions icon (Dimensions sub-toolbar). from the Dimensioning toolbar
2. Click a first point on the view. 3. Click a second point on the view. You just created a first dimension within the cumulated dimension system.
4. Click a third point on the view. You now created a second cumulated dimension in the system. You can create as many cumulated dimensions as desired.
Note that if you move one dimension line as you create a cumulated dimension, all the lines will move accordingly. 5. Click in the free space to end the cumulated dimension system creation.
If the cumulated dimensions are set with value oriented along dimension line, set the CUMLTxtReference dimension parameter in the standards. 6. Go to Tools->Options->Drafting->Dimensions->Line-up and check Align cumulated dimension values.
7. Create the same dimensions as previously, this time positioning them below the
drawing.
This time, dimensions are centered. This functionality does not work for radius/diameter dimensions. By default, the Align cumulated dimension values option is active. This aligns cumulated dimensions by centering them. If you switch to another standard, all dimension values will be repositioned according to the new standard (even if you specified their position manually before switching standards).
Creating Stacked Dimensions

This task will show you how to create stacked dimensions on a view. Stacked dimensions are parallel lines with a common extension line.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting->Dimension->Line-Up and uncheck Align stacked dimension values. 1. Click the Stacked Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
2. Click a first point on the view. 3. Click a second point on the view. You just created a first dimension within the stacked dimension system.
4. Click a third point on the view. You now created a second stacked dimension in the system.
5. Click a fourth point on the view. You now created a third stacked dimension in the system. Note that this stacked dimension inserted properly into the system. You can create as many stacked dimensions as desired.
6. Click in the free space to end the stacked dimension creation. 7. Go to Tools->Options->Drafting->Dimensions->Line-up and check Align stacked dimension values. 8. Create the same dimensions as previously, this time positioning them below the drawing.
This time, dimensions are aligned. This functionality does not work for radius/diameter dimensions.
When you add a dimension into the cumulated dimension system, in order to have this system properly displayed (dimensions positioned relatively to one another), the position of the smallest dimension (i.e. the one that is the closest from the geometry), is not modified. The value of the spacing between the system dimensions is defined in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Line-Up section.

q
As you create the dimensions in the system, you can move the whole system. Still, you actually move the smallest dimension: all the other dimensions in the system are automatically aligned to this smallest dimension.
Creating Explicit Dimensions

This task will show you how to create a dimension you explicitly decide to be: q a length/distance dimension
q q q
an angle dimension a radius dimension a diameter dimension
You will select the required elements. Note that when entering the command dedicated to the creation of a given type of dimension, the default orientation will be the orientation most adequate.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the desired icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
length/distance dimension angle dimension radius dimension diameter dimension 2. Click as many elements as required in the view. The Tools Palette automatically appears, displaying dimension modes, except in the case of angle dimensions.
3. If needed, define the dimension mode in the Tools Palette (
) using one of the modes below: Projected, Forced or True Length modes. These options are also available in the contextual menu.
Length/Distance
Angle
Radius
Diameter
For radius dimensions, you can activate the Foreshortened option in the contextual menu Properties -> Dimension Line.
It allows you to transform a radius dimension line into a foreshortened radius dimension line. Then you can choose the text position (on long segment or short segment), the dimension text orientation according to the dimension line ( parallel or convergent), the angle value, the ratio value (short segment/long segment), and the point scale value. You can also specify whether you want to unfix the extremity point of the foreshortened dimension line, which will let you move the extremity point using a yellow manipulator.
Creating/Modifying Angle Dimensions

This task will show you how to create an angle dimension and perform the following kinds of modifications: new angle sector or turn an angle sector into a supplementary sector. Create two lines.
1. Select the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar. 2. Select both lines to be dimensioned, one after the other. The angle dimension appears in the sector associated to both selected lines.
3. Drag the angle dimension line to the desired quadrant (or sector).
You can move the dimension to a new sector by using the contextual menu:
Right-click the angle dimension and select from the contextual menu either a given Angle sector or the Complementary Angle sector. You can also CTRLclick the dimension line.
Creating Chamfer Dimensions

This task will show you how to create a chamfer dimension. You can use two different methods: q create chamfer dimensions manually,
q
create chamfer dimensions using chamfer detection.
Creating chamfer dimensions manually

Open the IntDrafting_Dim_Chamfer.CATDrawing document. 1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimensions tab and make sure the Detect chamfer option is not selected.
2. Click the Chamfer Dimensions icon (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
from the Dimensioning toolbar
3. In the Tools Palette which is displayed, you can choose: q The format of the dimension: r Length x Length (19,1 x 19,1 in our example)
r r r
Length x Angle (19.1 x - 4684'8" in our example) Angle x Length (- 4684'8" x 19.1 in our example) Length 19,1.
The representation mode:

r
One symbol Two symbols
Choose the Length x Length format and the One symbol mode
You can also access these options using the contextual menu: at any time during the chamfer dimension creation, you can right-click to display the contextual menu.
4. Select the element to be dimensioned.
5. Select a reference line or surface.
6. You have two options: q Click on the sheet to end the dimension creation. The chamfer dimension is computed with an implicit second reference line that is perpendicular to the first one.
OR q Select a second reference line or surface. In this case, the chamfer dimension is computed according to both reference lines you selected.
In a Generative Drafting context (i.e. in the case of a generative view), you must do this, i.e. you must explicitly select the second reference line.
In any case, the dimension is associated to all the elements you selected.
Creating chamfer dimensions using chamfer detection

Open the IntDrafting_Dim_Chamfer.CATDrawing document. 1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimensions tab and make sure the Detect chamfer option is selected.
2. Click the Chamfer Dimensions icon (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
from the Dimensioning toolbar
3. In the Tools Palette which is displayed (as well as in the contextual menu), you can choose the format of the dimension and the representation mode. For more information, refer to Step 2 in Creating chamfer dimensions manually.
Choose the Length x Length format and the One symbol mode
4. Fly the mouse over the element to be dimensioned. You can notice that, depending on where you position the cursor, the auto-detection agent indicates a different order for taking elements into account when creating the chamfer dimension: q 1 indicates the element to be dimensioned,
q q
2 indicates the line which will be used as the first reference, 3 indicates the line which will be used as the second reference.
5. Click when you are satisfied with the order offered by the auto-detection agent. For example, click to accept the 3 - 1 - 2 order. The chamfer dimension is computed according to the first and the second auto-detected reference lines.
At this stage, if you are not satisfied with the order you just accepted, you can still click to select the first reference line, and, optionally, the second reference line. This amounts to creating the chamfer dimension manually.
6. Click to end the chamfer dimension creation.
The dimension is associated to all auto-detected elements.
Remarks about chamfer dimensions

In a Generative Drafting context, you can create chamfer dimensions for the following types of cylindrical shapes: cylinder/cone/cylinder, plane/cone/cone, plane/cone/cylinder, plane/plane/plane.
When creating chamfer dimension on cylindrical shapes in a Generative Drafting context, remember that: r in the case of projection views, the projection plane needs to be parallel to the cylinder axis.
r
in the case of section views or section cuts, the section plane needs to to be parallel to, and to go through, the cylinder axis. the sketched profile on which the cylinder (or the cone) is based must be a circle.
All settings defined in Tools->Option->Mechanical Design->Drafting (Dimensions and Manipulators tabs) are taken into account when creating chamfer dimensions. When editing chamfer dimension text properties (Edit > Properties command, Dimension Texts tab), if you assign any kind or prefix or suffix to the main value (e.g. associated text, fake dimension, tolerance, text before/after, etc.), the text will actually be placed after the first value, as shown here.
Creating Associative Thread Dimensions

This task will show you how to create associative thread dimensions. Open the intthread.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Thread Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
2. Select the thread to be dimensioned in the front view. The diameter dimension appears.
3.
Click the Thread Dimension icon
4. Select the two lines representing the thread to be dimensioned in the section view.
Two dimensions appear: q the thread diameter,

q
the thread depth.
The dimension prefix (M in this example) is issued from the thread standard defined when creating the hole in the 3D Part. In the top views you can modify threads dimensions orientation.
Creating/Modifying Coordinate Dimensions

This task will show you how to automatically create 2D or 3D coordinate dimensions on elements. Coordinate dimensions allow you to define the coordinates of a point relative to the X, Y, and possibly Z, axes.
Open the PointSketch.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Coordinate Dimension icon sub-toolbar).
from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions
The Tools palette appears with two options: 2D Coordinates
lets you create 2D (x, lets you create
y) coordinate dimensions for interactive geometry, 3D Coordinates 3D (x, y, z) coordinate dimensions for generative geometry. q These options are also available via the contextual menu.
q
This choice of options is valid for generative geometry only. In the case of a generative drawing, or in the case of a drawing containing a mix of generative and interactive elements, both options will be available, but if you select sketched (i.e. interactive) geometry, the 2D Coordinates option will be applied automatically (even if you selected the 3D Coordinates option). In the case of a purely interactive drawing, the options will not be displayed at all, and only the 2D Coordinates option will be applied.
2. Select the 3D Coordinates
option in the Tools Palette, as you will be
dimensioning elements generated from the 3D.
3. Select the element for which you want to create the 3D coordinate dimension. The coordinate dimension is created immediately.
At this point, you can right-click to display the contextual menu, which allows you add a breakpoint to the leader, or to choose the leader symbol. You can also select a set of elements by trapping them with the mouse, to create several coordinate dimensions in one shot.
4. Click in the free space to end the dimension creation. 5. Select the coordinate dimension to modify its position. The dimension is highlighted and its anchor point appears in yellow. 6. Drag the dimension to a new position.
Coordinates are relative to the absolute axis system except for views created by selecting a 3D local axis system. The yellow anchor point is associative and is linked to the element you dimensioned.
Creating a Holes Dimensions Table
Creating a Hole Dimension Table

This task will show you how to create a Hole and Center Line Dimension Table (containing diameter and center coordinates).
Open the alesage.CATDrawing document. 1. Select one or more holes and center lines (only center lines not associated with a hole) in the drawing.
2. Click the Hole Dimension Table icon the table creation command.
on the Dimensioning toolbar to launch
3. The Axis System and Table Parameters dialog box is displayed. Axis system: Indicate the holes coordinates 2D reference axis system. In this example, click on the view origin (you can also select two lines or click anywhere in the drawing, or enter the origin coordinate). Two reference axis appear:
You can rotate or flip the axis using the Flip horizontally and Flip vertically icons and choose to represent the axis system by checking the Create representation box. Title: Type the table title. Columns: q Choose a label (A, B, C... or 1, 2, 3...). If you want column numbering to start with values other than A or 1, click the icon
q
and specify the start value.
Select and name the column to display.
Table format: q Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows.

q q
Check Sort table content to sort the table elements. Check Split table to split the table into several tables. For more information on splitting tables, see Creating/Modifying a table.
4. Choose 2D reference axis system for the axis system from the associated drop-down list. 5. Type the table name in the Title field. 6. Select Label: A, B, C from the Column drop-down list (you can also choose the Index naming mode) to give a label to the selected points in the drawing. 7. Check X, Y and Diameter to have four columns corresponding to the hole labels and to the Cartesian coordinates. Then enter a title for each column. 8. Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows in the table.
9. Check Sort table content and then click to define the sorting the icon parameters. 10. To sort the table by descending X coordinates, choose X in the Sort by combo box, and select Descending. Then, click Close.
11. Click OK to validate your settings and then click in the drawing to define the location of the table. The table is generated.
Creating a Points Coordinates Table

This task will show you how to create a table containing coordinates of points from 2D and 3D. Open the PointSketch.CATDrawing document. 1. Multi-select the points on one of the views or on all views.
2. Click the Coordinate Dimension Table icon launch the table creation command.
on the Dimensioning toolbar to
3. The Axis system and table parameters dialog box is displayed. Axis system: You can choose to use the 2D axis system. It can be either the one of the view or userdefined. In this case, it can be defined interactively by either: q indicating a point by clicking in the view,
q q
selecting a point, selecting two lines.
Or it can be defined by typing the origin coordinates in the X and Y fields. You can rotate or flip the axis using the Flip horizontally and Flip vertically icons and choose to represent the axis system by checking the Create representation box. Or you can choose to use the 3D axis system. In this case, it is the absolute axis of the 3D model, or, if the model is a single part, a local axis. Title: Type the table title. Columns: q Choose a label (A, B, C... or 1, 2, 3...). If you want column numbering to start with values other than A or 1, click the icon and specify the start value.
q
Select and name the column to display,
Table format: q Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows.

q q
Check Sort table content to sort the table elements. Check Split table to split the table into several tables. For more information on splitting tables, see Creating/Modifying a table.
4. Choose Axis system.1 for the axis system from the associated drop-down list. 5. Type the table name in the Title field. 6. Select Label: A, B, C from the Column drop-down list (you can also choose the Index naming mode) to give a label to the selected points in the drawing. 7. Check X, Y and Z to create four columns corresponding to the points labels and to the Cartesian coordinates. Then enter a title for each column in the associated field. 8. Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows in the table.
9. Check Sort table content and click the to define the sorting parameters. icon 10. To sort the table by descending X coordinates, choose X in the Sort by combo box, and select Descending. Then, click Close.
11. Click OK to validate your settings and then click in the drawing to define the location of the table. The table is generated.
Creating/Modifying Radius Curvature Dimensions
Creating Radius Curvature Dimensions

This task will show you how to create and modify a radius curvature dimension. A radius curvature dimension lets you know the curvature radius at a given point on a curve (spline, ellipse, etc.).
Create a spline.
1. Select the Dimension icon
2. Move the cursor over the spline. You can notice that the cursor changes to indicate that you are going to create a dimension on a spline.
3. On the spline, click the point where you want to create the radius curvature dimension. A preview of the radius curvature dimension is displayed. 4. Click to validate the dimension creation.
Creating/Modifying Radius Curvature Dimensions
5. Move the dimension over the spline to modify the dimension.
Creating Overall Curve Dimensions

This task will show you how to create overall dimensions on curves. You can create dimensions on the overall horizontal or vertical size of any kind of curve, whether it is canonical or not (e.g.: ellipse, spline, etc.). You can also create dimensions on the overall size between 2 curves, or between a curve and a line, for example. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting. On the Dimension tab, uncheck Dimension following the cursor (CTRL toggles). Open the Dimension_Spline.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. In the Tools Palette, click the Force horizontal dimension in view icon to specify that you want to create the dimension based on the horizontal direction. The direction of overall curve dimensions can only be horizontal or vertical. 3. Select a spline. A preview of the dimension is displayed.
If the preview shows a curvilinear length dimension instead of an overall curve dimension, right-click to display the contextual menu and select Overall instead of Curvilinear Length. 4. Click elsewhere in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The dimension you created indicates the overall horizontal size of the spline. 5. Again, click the Dimension icon .
6. In the Tools Palette, click the Force vertical dimension in view icon to specify that you want to create the dimension based on the vertical direction. 7. Select the bottom line and the other spline. A preview is displayed. Yellow manipulators and point indicators appear: these let you select precisely the points that you want the dimension to take into account.
8. Move the spline dimension manipulator to point 7 on the spline, for example.
The preview is updated.
9. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The dimension you created indicates the overall vertical distance between the bottom line and point 7 of the spline.
Creating Curvilinear Length Dimensions

This task will show you how to create dimensions for the curvilinear length of a curve, i.e. to measure the overall length of a curve. Open the CurvilinearDimension.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Select a curve. A preview of the dimension is displayed. By default, this preview shows an overall curve dimension.
3. Right-click the preview to display the contextual menu and select Curvilinear Length instead of Overall. 4. Still in the contextual menu, select a representation mode for the dimension line:
q
Offset displays the dimension line as an offset of the measured curve. Parallel displays the dimension line as a translation of the measured curve. Linear displays the dimension line as linear.
Select Parallel, for example. 5. Optionally drag the dimension line and/or the dimension value to position them as
wanted. 6. Click elsewhere in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The semi-arc symbol displayed over the dimension value symbolizes a curvilinear length dimension. You can now handle the dimension just like any other dimension.
7. Again, click the Dimension icon
8. Select another curve. This time, the preview of the dimension shows a curvilinear length dimension (your previous selection was memorized). 9. Once again, right-click to display the contextual menu and select Offset as the representation mode for the dimension line. 10. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation.
11. Repeat steps 7 to 9, this time selecting Linear as the representation mode for the dimension line. 12. Still in the contextual menu, select Dimension Representation -> Force Horizontal Dimension in View to specify the dimension line orientation. 13. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation.
More About Curvilinear Length Dimensions

General remarks
q
Curvilinear length dimensions can be created using the Dimensions, Length/Distance Dimensions and Technological Feature Dimensions commands; they cannot be created using the Stacked Dimensions and Cumulated Dimensions commands. You can create curvilinear length dimensions for all types of curves: splines, circles, arcs of circle, conics, etc. Note that in the case of circles and arcs of circle, they will be called circular length dimensions. The curvilinear length symbol is defined by the administrator in the standards. The linear representation mode for the dimension line is: r forbidden in the case of closed curves.
r
the only authorized representation mode for True Length dimensions.
Limitations
q
You cannot change the dimension line representation mode or orientation after the
dimension has been created.

q
In the case of the parallel and offset representation modes, the dimension value cannot be moved out of the curve limits. As a result, you cannot specify the dimension value position (Inside, Outside, Auto). In some cases, depending on the curve and on the offset value, the offset representation mode cannot be computed: r In certain cases, when switching from another representation mode to the offset mode, the dimension will be previewed as being not-up-to-date (i.e. using the color configured in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis Display Mode): try to move the cursor closer to the dimension.
In other cases, you will not be able to position the dimension further than a certain limit. The examples below show the limits for positioning a curvilinear length dimension in offset mode for a spline.
In the case of curvilinear length dimensions in offset mode, it is recommended to activate the Constant offset between dimension line and geometry setting in Tools > Options > Mechanical Design > Drafting > Dimension tab. This will ensure that the dimension remains associative if the geometry is moved. When dimensioning a 3D curve that is not planar, the extension line of the curve will extend to the projection of the endpoints of the curve in the view plane of the dimension. As a result, the dimension may seem to point nowhere. Partial curvilinear length dimensions are not supported. Curvilinear dimensions cannot be measured along a direction. Curvilinear dimensions cannot be driving dimensions.
q q q
Creating Dimensions along a Reference Direction

This task will show you how to create dimensions along a reference direction, i.e. measure the projection of a segment/distance onto a direction. This direction is determined using either a linear element, a fixed angle in the view or a combination of both. Dimensions along a reference direction can be created for length, distance, diameter tangent, radius tangent, and overall curve dimensions, as well as on linear (i.e. not angular) cumulated or stacked dimensions. Open the GEAR-REDUCER2.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. In the Tools Palette, click the Intersection Point Detection icon . Refer to Creating dimensions between intersection points for more information about this functionality. 3. Click the first element, in this case, an intersection point.
4. Click the second element.
The dimension to be created is previewed. In the Tools Palette, click the Force dimension along a direction icon:
Several options are then displayed in the Tools Palette:
Dimension along a direction creates the dimension using a linear element (line, axis line, center line) as the reference direction, or using an angle to define the reference direction relatively to a linear element. In the latter case, key in a value in the Angle field. Dimension perpendicular to a direction creates the dimension perpendicularly to a linear element. Dimension along a fixed angle in view creates the dimension using a fixed angle in the view. In this case, key in a value in the Angle field. Note that such a dimension follows the view rotation. Thus, a dimension line with a 30 deg angle in a view which is set at 45 deg (relatively to the sheet) will be equivalent to a dimension line with a 75 deg angle relatively to the sheet.
These options are also available in the contextual menu that you can display during the dimension creation.
5. Click the Dimension along a direction icon scenario, leave the Angle field set to 0 deg.
. For the purpose of this
6. Select a linear element to use as the reference direction. Once created, the dimension will be associative to this element.
The dimension is updated so as to measure the distance between the selected points once projected onto the reference direction.
7. Drag the mouse to position the dimension as wanted. 8. Click to validate the dimension creation.
More About Dimensions Along a Reference Direction

q
In the case of a dimension along or perpendicular to a direction, if you delete the linear element used as the reference direction, the dimension will be automatically converted into a dimension along a fixed angle in view (the angle being that of the reference element in the view before its deletion). The behavior of a dimension along or perpendicular to a direction will actually depend on whether the Only create non-associative dimensions option is activated in Tools > Options > Mechanical Design > Drafting > Dimension tab, Associativity on 3D button:
r
If it is activated, then the dimension will actually be a dimension along a fixed angle in the view (the angle being that of the reference element in the view). If it is not activated, then the dimension will always match the direction of the element defining the reference direction.
Once a dimension along a reference direction has been created, you cannot modify the elements that define the direction of measure, i.e. either the linear element used as the reference direction or the fixed angle in view. The reference direction will not be taken into account when re-routing dimensions (Re-route Dimension command). Dimensions along a reference direction cannot be driving dimensions. So, if the Create driving dimension option is activated in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, you will not be able to drive dimensions when dimensioning along a direction. Dimensions created in a shot (i.e. cumulated/stacked dimensions, or dimensions sharing the same type as the first one) all have the same reference direction.
Creating Dimensions between Intersection Points

This task will show you how to create dimensions between an intersection point and an element or between two intersection points. Open the GEAR-REDUCER2.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. In the Tools Palette, click the Intersection Point Detection icon
3. Position the mouse over the first intersection point. An intersection point is the meeting point of:
q q q
2 extensions lines (as shown in this example) 2 lines a line and an extension line
A preview of the intersection point is displayed.
In the case of drawings with many elements displayed on screen, intersection points may sometimes be difficult to detect. If this happens (i. e. if the intersection point is not previewed or if the previewed intersection point is not the one you want), simply position the mouse over the first and then the second reference element. The proper intersection point will then be previewed.
4. Click to create the intersection point. The point is created, as well as construction lines and coincidence constraints between the point and its reference elements. The display and behavior of intersection points is defined by the administrator in the standards. Indeed, the administrator can specify the style that should be applied to the intersection point and construction line, whether the intersection point can be printed or not, and whether construction lines should be displayed and/or printable.
5. Now, position the mouse over the second intersection point.
6. Click to create the intersection point. A preview of the dimension is displayed. By default, this dimension is a distance dimension.
At this point, if you want to create a diameter dimension or a radius dimension rather than a distance dimension, you can right-click to display a contextual menu in which you will be able to change the dimension type from the default Distance to Diameter Edge or Radius Edge.
For the purpose of this scenario, leave the default option, Distance, selected. 7. Using the mouse, position the dimension as wanted. 8. Click to validate and end the dimension creation.
Creating Dimensions for Technological Features

This task will show you how to create dimensions for technological features such as electrical harness. Technological feature dimensioning relies on the fact that technological features can specify the way they should be dimensioned, which allows you to create only realistic and customized dimensions, based on the know-how of a given field. You need an Electrical Harness Assembly license for the purpose of this scenario as we will be dimensioning Electrical Harness Assembly features. Technological feature dimensioning is also available for other applications such as Piping and Tubing. For more information on the availability of technological feature dimensioning for a given workbench, refer to the related documentation. Open the ElectricalAssembly.CATProduct document and make sure it is loaded in the Electrical Harness Assembly workbench (if necessary, select Start -> Equipment & Systems -> Electrical Harness Assembly to launch the workbench). Open the ElectricalAssembly.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Technological Feature Dimensions icon toolbar. from the Dimensioning
2. Select the feature that you want to dimension. Note that the name of a feature is displayed as a help as you fly the cursor over it.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugdr_C2/cfyugfeatdim.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 12:22:20 PM
The dimension is created as specified by the feature. In this specific example, the bundle segment specifies that the dimension should provide its overall length. The feature also specifies whether the dimension should be created along a direction of measure. The Technological Feature Dimensions command remains active.
3. Repeat step 2 for each additional feature that you want to dimension. 4. End the dimension creation by clicking anywhere in the drawing (except on a technological feature) or by lining-up the dimension. You can now handle the dimension(s) just like any other dimension.
More About Technological Feature Dimensions

Action/object and Object/action Mode
Technological feature dimensioning is available in action/object mode (i.e. selecting the command first and then the feature to dimension, as illustrated above) and in object/ action mode (i.e. selecting or multi-selecting the feature(s) to dimension and the selecting the command).
Technological Feature Dimensions icons

Several Technological Feature Dimensions icons are available from the Dimensioning toolbar.
q
Technological Feature Dimensions creates either the dimension type specified by the feature when only one is specified, or the preferential dimension type specified by the feature when several are specified. Length Technological Feature Dimensions Dimensions , Angle Technological Feature and Diameter
, Radius Technological Feature Dimensions
Technological Feature Dimensions create a specific dimension type when the feature specifies several dimension types. Using one of these options is particularly useful when you want to create a dimension type other than the preferential type specified by the feature.
Contextual menu
At any time during the dimension creation, you can right-click a technological feature to display a contextual menu. This contextual menu is particularly useful when several dimension types can be created for a given feature (which is not the case in our example). This depends on what is specified by the feature.
In this menu, the Show Panel option lets you display the Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection dialog box. r From the list area, you can select the types of dimension that you want to create for a given feature or de-select those that you want to delete. In our example, only one type (length) can be created for each selected part.
r
You can also use the Create drop-down list. The default option, (Selected), creates the dimension types selected from the list area above. The All option creates all available dimensions for all selected features. The other options, such as All Lengths or All Diameters for example, create a specific dimension type for all selected features. The Hide button lets you hide the Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection dialog box.
You can also show or hide the Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection dialog box available in the Tools Palette. using the Show Panel icon
In the contextual menu, the other options available let you create a given dimension type for all selected dimensions.
Limitations
You cannot create coordinate dimensions for technological features.
Creating Dimensions between an Element and a View Axis

In this task, you will learn how to create dimensions between an element and a view axis (one of the two axes or the origin).
Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane_Front.CATDrawing document. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> General and check Display in the current view to display the view axis.
1. Click the Dimensions icon
2. Click a first element in the view.
3. Select one of the two view axes or the origin.
4. Click anywhere in the drawing window to confirm the dimension creation.
The dimension is created.
Re-routing Dimensions
This task will show you how to re-route dimensions, i.e. to recalculate dimensions taking into account new geometry elements which are compatible with the re-routed dimension type.
Re-routing dimensions can be particularly useful in the case of isolated dimensions resulting from V4 to V5 migration. Indeed, re-routing isolated dimensions to the geometry enables you make them associative.
Open the Reroute_Dimensions.CATDrawing document. You can notice that the dimension properties are customized.
1. Select the Re-route Dimension icon Interruptions sub-toolbar).
from the Dimensioning toolbar (Extension Line
2. Select the angle dimension. You can notice that the cursor indicates the type of dimension you are selecting.
3. Select the first element you want to take into account for the dimension re-routing, and then the second element.
Select the first element.
Then, select the second element.
During this operation, the cursor gives a graphic preview of what type of element you are selecting (in this case, lines).
A preview of the re-routed angle dimension is displayed.
4. Click to validate the dimension creation.
5. You can proceed in the same manner to re-route the other dimension types available on the drawing.
Always make sure that the element(s) to which you are re-routing dimensions are compatible with the re-routed dimension type. For example, when re-routing a radius dimension, you need to select a curved element. You cannot re-route chamfer dimensions. In a Generative Drafting context, you cannot re-route dimensions generated via the Generate Dimensions command. Re-routing dimensions preserves dimension properties when you customized them.
Modifying the Dimension Type

This task will show you how to modify the dimension type as you create a dimension. In other words, you modify the dimension attributes. In this particular example, we will apply a Radius Center dimension type to a hole. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. 1. Start creating a diameter dimension, for example. If needed, modify the dimensions location by dragging it with the cursor. 2. Right-click the dimension. 3. Select the required dimension type from the displayed contextual menu. For example, Radius Center.
The diameter dimension is automatically turned into a radius dimension. 4. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. If needed, you can modify the dimension location.
When you display the contextual menu, you can decide that you want to restore the dimension value to its original position. For this, select the Restore Value Position option from the contextual menu. When you display the contextual menu, you can define the value orientation with the screen, view or dimension line as reference, or still horizontal, vertical or according to a fixed angle. These options are available in the Value Orientation dialog box.
Interrupting Extension Lines

This task will show you how to interrupt manually one or more extension lines of one or more dimensions.
Open the Interruption_ExtLine01.CATDrawing document.
1. You have several possibilities: q Right-click a dimension and select the Dimension.1 Object -> Create Interruption(s) option from the contextual menu.
q
Select a dimension and click Insert -> Dimensioning -> Dimension Edition -> Create Interruption(s) from the menu bar. Select a dimension and click on the Create Interruption(s) icon Dimensioning toolbar (Dimension Edition sub-toolbar). in the
q q
You can also select the interruption command first, and then the dimension. You can multi-select several dimensions either using the Ctrl key or by trap.
2. In the Tools Palette, indicate if you want to create the interruption on one extension line or on both extension lines.
3. Click to indicate the first point defining the interruption to be created. 4. Click to indicate the second point defining the interruption to be created.
If you have chosen to create the interruption on one extension line, the interruption is automatically created on the extension line which is closest to where you click.
5. To remove the interruption you created, you have several possibilities: q Right-click the dimension and select Dimension.1 Object -> Remove Interruption (s) from the contextual menu.
q
Select the dimension and click Insert -> Dimensioning -> Dimension Edition -> Remove Interruption(s) from the menu bar. Select the dimension and click on the Remove Interruption(s) icon Dimensioning toolbar (Dimension Edition sub-toolbar). in the
6. In the Tools Palette, indicate if you want to remove a single interruption on an extension line, all interruptions on an extension line, or all interruptions on both extension lines. In this case, leave the Remove One Interruption icon selected.
7. Click to indicate the extension line from which you want to remove the interruption. The interruption is removed from the extension line which is closest to where you click.
When creating or removing interruptions, you can select the dimension either before or after selecting the appropriate command. If you move the dimension, the interruption will remain as you created it. If you modify either the overrun and / or the blanking, the interruption also remains the same. You can apply a maximum of eight interruptions to an extension line. Extension lines with funnels cannot be interrupted. Likewise, you cannot add funnels to extension lines with interruptions.
q q
q q
Modifying the Dimension Value Text Position

This task will show you how to modify the position of the dimension value text using the mouse. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example.
1. Click the Select icon , if needed.
2. Select the dimension value text.
3. Drag the value text to the new position. 4. Click to validate the position. Note that as a useful help, you can press the Shift key and switch to the Snap to Point on or off mode. The mode is temporarily changed (as long as you keep the button pressed). When the
Snap to Point mode is on, as you select and drag the dimension value, an anchor appears to help you locate the middle of the dimension.
At any time, you can restore the original value text position. To do this, right-click the dimension you positioned and select Restore Value Position from the contextual menu.
Modifying the Dimension Line Location
Modifying the Dimension Line Location

This task will show you how to modify dimension line location either as you create or after creating dimensions. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example.
1. Click the Select icon needed.
, if
2. Select the dimension to be modified. For example, a distance dimension. The distance dimension is highlighted.
3. Select the dimension line. 4. Drag the dimension line to the new position.
You can also modify the dimension line location using the extension line. Note that as a useful help, you can press the Shift button and switch to the Snap to Point on or off mode. The mode is temporarily changed (as long as you keep the button pressed).
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt0603.htm10/19/2004 12:23:40 PM
Specifying the Dimension Value Position

In this task, you will learn how to place automatically the value outside the area between extremity symbols when this area is too small, or how to explicitly position the value inside or outside the area between extremity symbols. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example.
1. Click the Select , if needed. icon 2. Right-click the dimension to be modified.
3. In the contextual menu, select Properties. The Properties dialog box is displayed. 4. Click on the Value tab.
5. In the Value Orientation area, there are three options in the Position field.
Auto: positions the value inside the area between extremity symbols whenever this is possible; otherwise, positions it outside. Inside: positions the value inside the area between extremity symbols. Outside: positions the value outside the area between extremity symbols.
q q
6. Select Auto. If you change the dimension from now on, and the value does not fit inside the area between extremity symbols, the value will be automatically positioned outside. Try it by reducing the dimension as shown in our example.
q
The Auto position of the dimension value will be disabled if you modify the position of the dimension value text using the mouse (i.e. if you manually move it). You can restore the original position of the dimension value by right-clicking the dimension and selecting Restore Value Position from the contextual menu. If you switch between Auto, Inside, and Outside, make sure the dimension value is properly positioned by restoring the original position of the dimension value (use the Restore Value Position option from the contextual menu).
Adding Text Before/After the Dimension Value

This task will show you how to insert text before or after the dimension value. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, and check the Modification box for the Insert text before and the Insert text after options.
, if needed.
2. Click the dimension to be modified. The dimension is highlighted and two manipulators appear, both before and after the dimension value. 3. Click the manipulator before the dimension value, for example.
The Insert Text Before dialog box is displayed. 4. Enter the text that you want to add before the dimension value, L= for instance.
5. Click OK. The text is automatically inserted before the dimension value.
Note that any created Text Before is automatically added to the dropdown list in the dialog box and can therefore be selected again from this list. 6. Click in the free space.
Modifying the Dimensions Overrun/Blanking
Modifying the Dimension Overrun/Blanking

This task shows how to modify dimensions extension line overrun and/or blanking either together or separately. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, and check the Modification box for the Modify overrun and the Modify blanking options.
, if needed.
2. Drag the overrun manipulator(s) to a new position, as shown below:
If you want to modify one extension line only, press the Ctrl key and drag the desired manipulator. 3. Drag the blanking manipulator(s) to a new position, as shown below:
4. If you need to be more precise, double-click the manipulator. The Blanking Edition dialog box is displayed. 5. Enter the desired value to modify the blanking. You can also modify the overrun/ blanking of only one extension line of the dimension. 6. Double-click the overrun manipulator(s).
The Overrun Edition dialog box appears. 7. Enter the desired overrun value and un-check the Apply to both sides option from the Overrun Edition dialog box.
Note that you can also right-click the dimension and select the Edit -> Properties option from the displayed contextual menu. The Properties dialog box appears. Select the Extension Line tab and modify the desired value(s) of the Overrun / Blanking Extremities option(s).
Overrun is the overrun minimum value. As an example, for a cumulated dimension (for ISO Standard):
You can increase the overrun size.
You cannot decrease it below the minimum value.
To set Cumulate dimension extension line length and text position, customize the following parameter in the standards: CUMLExtMode in Dimension parameters.
Lining up Dimensions (Free Space)

This task will show you how to line up the following dimensions relative to a point in the free space: q Length dimensions
q q q q
Distance dimensions Radius dimensions Diameter dimensions Angle dimensions
In other words, you are going to organize dimensions into a system with a linear offset. The offset will align the dimensions to each others as well as the smallest dimension to the reference element. Open the LineUp_Dimensions01.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the dimensions to be lined up. 2. Right click and select Line-up option from the contextual menu
or click on the Line-Up icon
You can also select Tools->Positioning->Line-up item from the menu bar.
3. Click anywhere on the drawing.
The Line Up dialog box appears: 4. Enter the desired Linear offset value. For example, 20 mm. 5. Click the Only organize into systems option. 6. Click OK to validate. The position of the smallest system dimension will not be modified. The stacked system dimensions will be aligned to this smallest dimension.
The dimensions are now aligned:
When you click in the free space, the linear offset between the smallest dimension and the reference is automatically set to 0 value. The space between two dimensions will be the space defined in the Options dialog box (Tools->Options, Mechanical Design ->Drafting at the left of the dialog box, Dimension tab, Line Up paragraph). See Dimension Creation for more details.
Lining up Dimensions (Reference)

This task will show you how to line up the following dimensions according to a given reference: q Length dimensions
q q q q
Distance dimensions Radius dimensions Diameter dimensions Angle dimensions
Open the LineUp_Dimensions02.CATDrawing document. 1. Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting->Dimensions tab.
The offset you can set in this dialog box corresponds to:
2. Select the dimensions to be lined-up. 3. Right click and select Line-up item from the contextual menu.
You can also select the Tools -> Positioning -> Line-up item from the menu bar.
4. Select the element that will be used as reference for positioning dimensions. See the example above. The Line Up dialog box appears. You can see that the default values are the ones set in Tools Options menu (see step 1).
5. Enter the required offset values in the Line Up dialog box and, if needed, deactivate the Only organize into systems option.
The smallest dimension positions with respect to the element selected and offsets by 20 mm. And offset between dimension is equal to 30mm.
Creating a Datum Feature

This task will show you how to create a datum feature. Open the Brackets_views08.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Datum from the Feature icon Dimensioning toolbar. 2. Select the point at which you want the datum feature to be attached (attachment point). 3. Select the point at which you want the datum feature to be anchored (anchor point).
The Datum Feature Creation dialog box is displayed with A as default value (incremental value). 4. Enter the desired character string, if needed.
5. Click OK. The datum feature is created. An extension line is automatically created on the datum feature.
The character string that is edited in the Datum Feature Creation dialog box is simultaneously previewed on the drawing. When you create more than one datum feature, the character string of this datum feature is automatically incremented. To change Datum Feature ANSI representation into ASME representation, change the TXTDatumMode parameter of your standard file (see Dimension parameters): ASME
TXTDatumMode = 1 (Normal)
ANSI
TXTDatumMode = 2 (Flag)
Modifying a Datum Feature

This task shows you how to modify a datum feature by editing it. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a datum feature.
1. Double-click the datum feature you want to modify.
The Datum Feature Modification dialog box is displayed. 2. Modify the datum feature value. For example, enter B instead of A. 3. Click OK.
4. Click in the free space or select another icon. The datum feature is modified.
Creating a Geometrical Tolerance

This task shows you how to create a geometrical tolerance (annotation). You can also copy an existing geometric tolerance. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text. q Creating a geometrical tolerance
q
Leader orientation Geometrical tolerance orientation

Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Geometric Tolerance icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Tolerancing sub-toolbar).
2. Select an element (geometry, dimension, text or point) or click in the free space to position the anchor point of the geometrical tolerance.
If you select an element, the anchor point will be an arrow. Note that you can modify this symbol by editing the annotation leader.
If you select a point in the free space, the anchor point will be a small balloon.
If you select a dimension or a text, no leader will be created. The geometric tolerance will be displayed just below the element you selected.
3. Move the cursor to position the geometrical tolerance and then click at the chosen location. The Geometrical Tolerance dialog box appears.
At this step, you can apply the parameter values of an existing geometric tolerance to the tolerance you are creating: to do this, simply select the existing geometric tolerance. If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is prefilled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are disabled during the creation of the geometrical tolerance. On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is pre-filled with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active during the creation of the of the geometrical tolerance. You can reset the current style values in the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box at any time using the Reset button.
4. Select the Filter Symbol option to filter the available tolerance symbols according to the type of geometrical element you selected (if any). If you did not select any geometrical element, the tolerance symbols will not filtered. 5. Specify the tolerance type by clicking the Tolerance Symbol button and selecting the appropriate symbol. 6. Type the tolerance value in the Tolerance value field, adding symbols as needed. To do this, position the cursor at the proper location in the field, and click the Insert Symbol button to choose the appropriate symbol.
You can add symbols to the tolerance and reference value as well as to the upper and lower text. 7. Type the reference values in the Reference value fields, adding symbols as needed. 8. To add a new geometrical tolerance, click the Next line arrow button and repeat steps 4 to 5. 9. Type the upper and lower texts in the appropriate fields. You may also add symbols if you want to.
The geometric tolerance is updated as you define values for each field. 10. Click OK when you're done. The geometrical tolerance is created.
11. You can add an all-around symbol to the leader. To do this, select the geometrical tolerance, right-click the yellow manipulator on the arrow and select All Around from the contextual menu.
Specifying Leader Orientation

You can orient the geometrical tolerance leader perpendicularly to the element to which it is associated (for example, if the leader is associated to a dimension, you can position the leader parallel to the dimension line and orthogonal to the extension line). For this, you have two different possibilities: q Either go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Activate snapping (SHIFT toggles). Then, click the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both. To orient directly the geometrical tolerance leader perpendicularly to the associated element, press the Shift key before clicking in the drawing to position the tolerance (see previous scenario, step 3).
q
Or go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Geometrical tolerance in Annotation Creation -> Apply snapping to. The leader will be oriented perpendicularly to the geometry by default. In this case, pressing the Shift key will let you orient it differently.
Specifying Geometrical Tolerance Orientation

To make the tolerance vertical, hold the ctrl key before clicking in the drawing to position the tolerance (previous scenario, step 3).
Modifying Geometrical Tolerances

This task shows you how to modify a geometrical tolerance. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a geometrical tolerance.
1. Double-click the geometrical tolerance you want to modify.
The Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is displayed.
You can reset the current style values in the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box at any time using the Reset button.
2. Modify any desired value from the dialog box. 3. Click OK.
4. Click in the free space to validate the geometrical dimension modification.
Copying Geometrical Tolerances
Copying Geometrical Tolerances

This task will show you how to copy an existing geometrical tolerance and then edit the content for creating a new one. 1. Click on the geometrical tolerance you want to copy. 2. Right-click and select the Copy option from the contextual menu. 3. Select the element to which you want the geometrical tolerance to be associated. 4. Right-click and select the Paste option on the contextual menu. 5. Move the copied geometrical tolerance to position it as desired. 6. Double-click the copied geometrical tolerance. 7. In the filter Symbols box, make sure that the desired option is activated. Select to display only those tolerance symbols generally considered appropriate for the type of geometrical element selected. Unselect it to display all symbols, regardless of the selected type of element. 8. Modify any of the values. After you enter a value, press Enter or Tab to move to the next field. The geometrical tolerance is updated as you define values for each field. 9. Click OK to confirm your operation and close the dialog box.
Creating Driving Dimensions

This task shows you how to create dimensions that will drive associated constrained geometry. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension and select Activate analysis display mode. Then, click the Types and colors button to define the characteristics that will be assigned to constrained geometry.
The Types and colors of dimensions dialog box lets you select the color you want to assign to driving dimensions. Select the color shown below, for example.
Click the Dimensions
icon from
the Dimensioning toolbar and create a dimension on the geometry previously selected. In this example, create a length dimension on a line.
1. Double-click the dimension.
2. Modify the dimension via the displayed Dimension Value dialog box. For example, enter 40 millimeter as the new length. This dimension will now drive the geometry.
If the Drive geometry option is selected, the double-clicked dimension becomes a constraint and behaves as a dimension constraint.
The geometry is updated in order to reflect the new driving dimension. Let's call it driven geometry. In addition, this geometry is assigned the characteristics previously defined in the Types and colors of dimensions dialog box via Tools -> Options. In this particular case, the driving dimension is visualized as follows:
You cannot create driving dimensions in the following cases: q Between a generated element and an interactive element, horizontal and vertical dimensions are not available. If you double-click on the dimension, the Drive geometry option is deactivated.
q
Between an interactive element and a generated circle center, no type of dimensions is available. If you double-click on the dimension, Drive geometry option is deactivated: To bypass this problem, create a point that is concentric with the center of the circle and create the dimension between this new point and the other element. Between two elements (a generative one and an interactive one) that are not parallel, no type of dimensions is available. If you double-click on the dimension, Drive geometry option is deactivated:
To bypass this problem, create a point that will be coincident with line A and line B at the same time and create the dimension between this new point and the other element.
q
Between two semicircles (apart from dimensions between the semicircles centers). If you double-click on the dimension, the Drive geometry option is deactivated:
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Constraints
Constraints
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you create geometrical constraints, which specify explicitly how the geometry should behave. A constraint applies to up to three elements. In the Interactive Drafting workbench, constraints are created either through the constraints creation command or via SmartPick. Note that when you use SmartPick, you detect geometric constraints dynamically. But SmartPick can simply be used to automatically detect constraints without necessarily creating them. For information on creating constraints using SmartPick, see Creating Constraints via SmartPick in the SmartPick chapter.
In the Interactive Drafting workbench, dimensional constraints do not exist as such. It is by creating driving dimensions that you can drive constrained geometry.
If you want constraints to be created, make sure the Show Constraints command, and optionally the Create Detected Constraints command, are active in the Tools toolbar, before you start creating constraints.
Before you begin You should be familiar with important concepts. Creating quick constraints Quickly set geometrical constraints. Create constraints via a dialog box Set geometrical constraints via a dialog box. Create constraints between 2D and generated elements Create associative constraints between 2D elements and generated elements (Generative Drafting workbench).
Constraints
Before you Begin
Before you Begin

What Is a Constraint?
A constraint is a kind of relationship that lets you specify explicitly how the geometry should behave. In other words, if you modify the geometry afterwards via the geometry itself, these relations will be taken into account. In the Interactive Drafting workbench, you can create geometrical constraints. Geometrical constraints set a relationship that forces a limitation between one or more geometrical elements. The various geometrical constraints are the following: q support lines and circles
q q q q q q q q q q q
alignment parallelism perpendicularity tangency concentricity horizontality verticality fix middle point equidistant point symmetrical
In the Interactive Drafting workbench, dimensional constraints do not exist as such. It is by creating driving dimensions that you can drive constrained geometry.
Before you Begin
What Does Creating Constraints Mean?

You can create constraints using the Tools toolbar:
Explicitly, via the existing Show Constraints command
(detected constraints). to
Via Autodetection, if you activate the Create Detected Constraints command automatically create detected constraints. [ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating Quick Constraints

This task shows you how to create geometrical constraints quickly. Create two lines.
Make sure the Show Constraints option
is active in the Tools toolbar.
For the purpose of this scenario, also make sure that the Create Detected Constraints is active in the Tools toolbar: this option creates lasting constraints (if you option do not activate this option, the constraints you create are temporary: the geometry is only temporarily constrained, which means that it can subsequently be moved without being constrained.).
1. Select the geometrical elements to be constrained to each other. For the purpose of our scenario, select the two lines you created.
2. Click the Geometrical Constraint icon
from the Geometry Modification toolbar.
Based on the elements you selected, the software automatically offers to create a parallelism constraint, as shown at the tip of the cursor.
3. At this time, you can right-click on the drawing, to display a contextual menu offering the other types of constraints available for the selected elements.
For the purpose of the scenario, simply click on the drawing to accept the parallelism constraint. Both lines are now constrained as parallel to each other.
4. Modify the position of one of the lines, by moving one of its end points, for example.
As you can see, the lines are constrained so as to remain parallel to each other, whatever the new position and/or length you assign to one of them.
Even though you set a constraint relation between two elements, constraints are not necessarily visualized. If you cannot visualize constraints even though the Show option is active in the Tools toolbar, go to Tools -> Options -> Constraints Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Geometry tab and select Display Constraints. (You can also modify the constraint color and/or width.)

This task shows you how to set geometrical constraints via a dialog box. Create two lines.
Make sure the Show Constraints option
is active in the Tools toolbar.
For the purpose of this scenario, also make sure that the Create Detected Constraints is active in the Tools toolbar: this option creates lasting constraints (if you option do not activate this option, the constraints you create are temporary: the geometry is only temporarily constrained, which means that it can subsequently be moved without being constrained.).
1. Select the geometrical elements to be constrained to each other. For the purpose of our scenario, select the two lines you created.
2. Click the Constraint with Dialog Box icon toolbar.
from the Geometry Modification
The Constraint Definition dialog box appears. The options corresponding to the various types of constraints you can create for the selected elements are active. 3. Select the Parallelism option to specify that the selected lines should be parallel.
You can preview the result.
4. At this time, you can still select another option from the dialog box if you decide to apply another type of constraint. For the purpose of the scenario, simply click OK to validate. Both lines are now constrained as parallel to each other. 5. Modify the position of one of the lines, by moving one of its end points, for example.
As you can see, the lines are constrained so as to remain parallel to each other, whatever the new position and/or length you assign to one of them.
It is impossible to create constraints between 2D and generated elements via the Constraint Definition dialog box. In the Constraint Definition dialog box, you can only create constraints between similar elements. In other words, you can create constraints either between 2D elements, or between generated elements, but not between a mix of these. Even though you set a constraint relation between two elements, constraints are not necessarily visualized. If you cannot visualize constraints even though the Show option is active in the Tools toolbar, go to Tools -> Options -> Constraints Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Geometry tab and select Display Constraints. (You can also modify the constraint color and/or width.)
Creating Constraints Between 2D and Generated Elements

This task shows you how to create associative constraints between 2D elements and generated elements (Generative Drafting workbench). q Create an associative point between the 2D and the generated view
q
Create a constraint between 2D and generated elements
Make sure the constraint creation option command is active in the Tools toolbar.
Create an Associative Point Between the 2D and the Generated View

Open the Constraints_2D_GeneratedElem.CATDrawing document. 1. Activate the Grid option command.
2. Click the Point icon
and create a point using SmartPick.
The point you just created is associative between the 2D and the generated view. In others words, even if you assign a new value to the angle, this point will remain at the intersection of both line. Be careful: when you modify the position of these elements, only the 2D elements move. The generated elements remain fixed.
Create a Constraint Between 2D and Generated Elements

In the Tools toolbar, activate Create Detected Constraints . Open the GenDrafting_part_Broken_View.CATDrawing document.
It is impossible to create constraints between 2D and generated elements via the Constraint Definition dialog box. In the Constraint Definition dialog box, you can only create constraints between similar elements (either between 2D elements, or between generated elements, but not between a mix of these).
1. Create a line in the opened drawing.
2. Click the geometrical constraints command icon and select the line.
The most logical constraint is automatically offered (if you want to apply this constraint, click in the drawing). Select an edge from the drawing you have opened.
The software offers to create a parallelism constraint by default. If you choose this constraint, click in the drawing, otherwise... 3. ...right-click and select Perpendicularity in the contextual menu.
A constraint is created between a generated element and a sketched element. 4. You can delete this constraint: right-click on the created constraint and select Delete in the contextual menu.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Annotations
Annotations
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you manipulate annotations. In order to be consistent with the way commands have been grouped in toolbars and sub-toolbars, the following tasks are documented in the Manipulating Dimensions chapter: q Datum Feature Creation and Modification
q
Geometrical Tolerance Creation, Modification and Copy
See Before You Begin to learn about important concepts, including setting text properties.
Before You Begin You should be familiar with basic concepts such as setting the properties of a text (font style, size, justification, etc.), using default values, and specifying the position and/ or orientation of a text. Create a free text Create a text that either wraps or not, that is assigned an unlimited width text frame, even though this text may reach the frame boundary. Create an associated text Create a text which you want to be and remain associated to an existing element. Make an existing annotation associative At any time and once an annotation has been created, you can add a link between an annotation and another element. Create a text with a leader Create a text with a leader either in the free space or associated with an element. Add a leader to an existing annotation Add a leader to an annotation that was previously created. Handle annotation leaders Add or remove breakpoints, extremity or interruptions. Move and position leader breakpoints.
Annotations
Add frames and sub-frames to existing text Add a frame or a sub-frame to a text that was previously created. Replicate a text and attribute: Replicate text as well as the corresponding text attribute. Copy text graphical properties: Copy the text graphical properties of an annotation or element to other elements. Create a datum target: Create a datum target on a view. Modify a datum target: Modify a datum target by editing it in a dialog box. Create a balloon: Create a balloon using a dialog box. Creating an associative balloon on a generated product view Create associative balloons on views generated from a product. Modify a balloon Modify a balloon using a dialog box. Create a roughness symbol Create a roughness using a dialog box. Create a welding symbol Create a welding symbol using a dialog box. Create a geometry weld Create a geometry weld symbol. Modify annotation positioning Assign new positioning to existing annotations. Create/modify a table Create, edit and modify a table.
Annotations
Find/replace text Locate and then, if needed, replace strings of characters. Perform an advanced search Use the advanced search command. Query object links Query object links in a drawing.
Before You Begin
Before You Begin

Setting Text Properties
This task explains how to set the properties of a text, such as font style, size, justification, etc. Text properties can be applied to text, dimension text, text with leader, balloon and datum target, as well as to text included in datum features and geometrical tolerances. You can set the properties of a text either before or after creating it. Create a text. 1. Choose View -> Toolbars, and select Text Properties. toolbar is displayed. The Text Properties
2. Select the text.
3. Choose the properties you want to apply to this text from the Text Properties toolbar. For instance, select Italic and Bold. The properties you chose are applied to the selected text. The options available in the Text properties toolbar are listed in the table below:
Option
Name Font Name Font Size Bold Italic Underline Strike Thru Overline Superscript Subscript Left Justify
Description Changes the style of the text. Changes the size of the text. Note that this size cannot be inferior to 0.2 mm. Changes the weight of the text. Toggles between normal and heavy (bold). Changes the angle of the text. Toggles between normal and slanted (italic) Adds a line under the text. Adds a line through the center of the text. Adds a line above the text. Raises the text above the normal text line. Lowers the text below the normal text line. Aligns multiple lines of text to the left edge of the text frame.
Before You Begin
Centers multiple lines of text within the text frame. Aligns multiple lines of text to Right Justify the right edge of the text frame. Anchor point Changes the position of the point that connects the text to the drawing or to an element. Choices are as follows: q Along the top of the text: left, center or right Center Justify
q
Along the vertical center of text: left, center or right Along the bottom of the text: left, center or right
Frame
Draws a single-line frame around the text. A variety of different shapes is available. You can choose to create each frame with either a variable or a fixed size. For a rectangular frame, for example, the icon represents the variablesize frame, and the icon (with the padlock) represents the fixed-size frame.
Specifying the Position and Orientation of a Text

You can specify the position (x, y) and/ or orientation (angle) of a text. Create a text. 1. Choose View -> Toolbars, and select the Position and Orientation command. The Position and Orientation toolbar is displayed.
Before You Begin
2. Select the text for which you want to specify the position and/or orientation. 3. Enter the required values in the Position and Orientation toolbar. q X: sets the horizontal position.
q q
Y: sets the vertical position. A: sets the orientation.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating an Associated Text

This task shows you how to create a text which you want to be associated to an existing element. This text will remain associated with this element. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create two diameter dimensions, for example. 1. Click the Text icon Annotations toolbar. 2. Select the element to which you want to associate a text. Here, we will use a dimension. You can associate the text either to the dimension line or to the extension line by clicking the appropriate element. Click the dimension line as in our example. The green text frame is displayed as well as the Text Editor dialog box. 3. Enter the text to be created in the Text Editor dialog box or directly on the drawing. For example, enter "diameter". from the
4. Click in the free space or click the Select icon to end the text creation.
5. If needed, select the dimension and move it to the desired location. The text remains associated to the dimension.
Note that the text is associative to the whole selected element. In other words, in the case of a dimension, if you move the dimension text exclusively, the associated text will not move accordingly.
When creating associated texts, pressing the SHIFT key lets you change the orientation of the text as regards the element to which it is associated.
r
You can associate text to the following elements: Annotations: text, datum feature, datum target, balloon, GD&T, roughness symbol, weld symbols. Dimensions 2D elements: point, circle, ellipse, parabola, hyperbola. Generative edges [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
r r r
Making an Existing Annotation Associative

This task explains how, at any time and once an annotation has been created, you can add a link between an annotation and another element. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text.
Positional link
Available for every annotation. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a text. 1. Click the Select icon .
2. Select any part of the text (text itself, frame or leader). 3. Right click and select Positional Link->Create from the contextual menu.
4. Select the element to which you want the text to be linked. 5. Select the associated element and drag it in the drawing, the text follows the element. 6. Delete existing associativity using the same dialog but selecting the Delete option (Positional Link contextual menu).
Orientation link
This functionality is available for text, text with leader and roughness symbol. 7. Right click on the text and select Orientation Link->Create from the contextual menu.
8. Select the element to which you want the text to be linked. 9. Select the linked element and modify its orientation, the text orientation is simultaneously modified.
Elements that are Text Associative

q
Annotations r text
r r r r r r
datum feature datum target balloon GD&T roughness symbols weld symbols
q q
Dimensions 2D elements r points

r r r r
circles ellipse parabola hyperbola
Generative edges
Creating a Text With a Leader

This task shows you how to create a text with a leader either in the free space or associated with an element. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text.
Creating a Text with a Leader Specifying Leader Orientation Specifying Text Orientation Elements that can be Assigned Text with a Leader

Create a rectangle. Note that leader lines are displayed in either of the following ways based on the standard currently set in defining the sheet.
1. Click the Text With Leader icon toolbar).
from the Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-
2. Click the point on the element you want the leader to begin (arrow end). A red frame appears. 3. Click in the free space to define a location for the text.
Both the red frame and the arrow end of the leader are now assigned white and yellow manipulators. 4. If needed, drag the frame and/or arrow to a new location. For example, drag the arrow to the right. At this step, you can also decide that you want the text to be wrapped (like when creating a free text).
The Text Editor dialog box is displayed. 5. Enter the text in the Text Editor dialog box or directly on the drawing.
6. If needed, re-position or modify the text.
7. To end the text creation, click again in free space or select a command icon.
The leader is associated with the element you selected. If you move either the text or the element, the leader stretches to maintain its association with the element.
If you change the element that is associated with the leader, between both the new element and the text with leader remains associative to each others. 8. Create a circle. 9. Move the text with a leader.
You can create a text in a view which is not up-to-date, but you cannot associate it to geometry or the following panel appears:
Specifying Leader Orientation
When creating a text with leader, you can orient the leader perpendicularly to the element to which it is associated. To do this, you have two different possibilities: q Either go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Activate snapping (SHIFT toggles). Then, click the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both. To orient directly the leader perpendicularly to the associated element, press the Shift key while clicking on the element to which you want to associate the text with leader (previous scenario, step 3).
q
Or go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation tab, and in Annotation Creation -> Apply snapping to, check Text with leader. The leader will be oriented perpendicularly to the geometry by default. In this case, pressing the Shift key will let you orient it differently.

When creating a text with leader, you can make the text vertical. To do this, hold the Ctrl key while clicking in the drawing to position the text (previous scenario, step 3).
q
You can also add a leader to existing text. To learn how to do this, refer to Adding a Leader to Existing Text. You can perform a number of operations on a leader. To learn more, refer to Editing Annotation Leaders.
Elements that can be Assigned Text with a Leader

q
2D elements: r lines
r r r
points circles curves
Generative Edges
Adding a Leader to an Existing Annotation

This task shows you how to add a leader to an annotation that was previously created. Leaders can be positioned freely, or using snapping (the leader is oriented perpendicular to the reference element). For the purpose of this scenario, you will learn how to add a leader to an existing text, but this functionality is available with other annotation types as well.
Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Mechanical Design -> Annotation tab . Make sure the Activate snapping (Shift toggles) option is selected. Then, click on the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both. Create a hexagon. Create an annotation, a free text for example.
1. Right-click the annotation to which you want to add a leader.
2. Select the Add Leader command that appears in the contextual menu.
3. You have two possibilities:
If you want to position the leader freely: Click where you want to position the leader head. The leader is created. You can then move it to the desired location using the mouse. You can position the leader breakpoint anywhere on the reference element, and snapping is not used.
If you want the leader to be oriented perpendicular to the reference element: Press the Shift key while clicking where you want to position the leader head. The leader is created: it is snapped, and oriented perpendicular to the element to which it is attached. Release the Shift key and the mouse.
To create as many leaders as required for an existing text, go to Tools -> Customize and create the Add Leader command in a separate toolbar. You will then be able to double-click the Add Leader command and click to locate the leader(s) to be created.
If several text elements are selected as you activate the Add Leader command, the selection is cleared and a message prompts you to select an annotation. If you modify the text associated with the leader, associativity between the text and the leader is kept.
Handling Annotation Leaders

This task shows you how to handle annotation leaders, by performing such operations as adding or removing a breakpoint, an extremity or an interruption. You will also learn how to move and position leader breakpoints.
Depending on the type of annotation the leader is associated with, not all operations described in this section will be available.
Handling Leaders
Create a text with a leader.
1. Right-click the yellow control point at the end of the leader. The leader's contextual menu is displayed.
2. Choose from the available options.
To add a breakpoint, select Add a Breakpoint.
Then, to remove this breakpoint, right-click on the breakpoint and select Remove a Breakpoint.
To add an extremity to an existing breakpoint, rightclick on the breakpoint, select Add an extremity, and then click where you want to position the extremity.
Then, to remove this extremity, right-click on the additional extremity and select Remove Leader/ Extremity.
You can add an extremity only in the case of a text or a welding symbol.
Clicking on the main leader extremity will remove the leader.
To add an interruption, select Add an Interruption and Then, to remove this interruption, right-click on then, on the leader, click the two points between the leader yellow control which you want to add the interruption. point and select Remove Interruptions.
Any existing interruption will be removed from the leader if you subsequently add or remove a breakpoint.
To remove the leader, select Remove Leader/Extremity.
To add an all around symbol, select All Around.
To modify the leader symbol shape, point to Symbol Shape. Then, select No Symbol if you do not want a symbol for the leader, or select the symbol you want from the available symbols.
You can remove the leader extremity symbol for all annotations.
3. You can also move the leader or any existing breakpoints by clicking a yellow control point and moving it using the mouse.

q
To move the annotation but not the leader, click the annotation and move it using the mouse.
To move the leader along with the annotation while making sure the leader keeps its original shape, select Rigid and then move the annotation.
This functionality is available for texts, welding symbols, 2D components, tables and geometrical tolerances, but not for other annotation types. This functionality also applies when rotating the annotation text using the Free Rotation icon .
Moving and Positioning Leader Breakpoints

You can move and position leaders breakpoints easily, for all types of annotations. Leader breakpoints are moved and positioned using snapping (the leader is oriented perpendicular to the reference element).
Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Mechanical Design -> Annotation tab . Make sure the Activate snapping (Shift toggles) option is selected. Then, click on the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both. Open the Move_Leaders.CATDrawing document. This document contains a text with leader and a balloon. Add a breakpoint to both annotations, as explained in the previous section.
1. Move the text leader breakpoint with the mouse. You can position the leader breakpoint anywhere, and snapping is not used.
2. Now, press the Shift key while moving the leader breakpoint with the mouse. The leader is snapped, and is positioned vertically or horizontally, or with the same orientation as the element to which it is attached.
3. Release the Shift key and the mouse when you are satisfied with the position of the leader. 4. Move the balloon leader breakpoint with the mouse. You can position the leader breakpoint anywhere, and snapping is not used.
5. Now, press the Shift key while moving the leader breakpoint with the mouse. The leader is snapped, and is positioned vertically or horizontally, which happens to be the same orientation as the element to which the leader is attached.
6. Release the Shift key and the mouse when you are satisfied with the position of the leader. Both leaders are now positioned properly.
Adding Frames or Sub-Frames

This function allows you to add frames and sub-frames to texts and texts with leader.
Create a free text.
1. Select the text you have created and click the Frame icon menu is displayed.
in the Text Properties Toolbar. The Frames sub-
You can choose to create each frame with either a variable or a fixed size. For a rectangular frame, for example, the icon represents the variable-size frame, and the icon (with the padlock) represents the fixed-size frame.
Variable-size frames adapt to the text length, whereas fixed-size frames always remain as is, no matter what the text length is. So if you choose a fixed-size frame and the length of you text exceeds the frame size, then the text will extend beyond the frame.
Fixed frame sizes are defined in the standards.
2. Choose a frame in the menu.
3. Click on the frame to select it
4. Right-click on the text and in the contextual menu choose the add leader command and click in the free space to end the leader creation.
Zoom to move the leader round the text. 5. Right-click on the hanged point and select a mode in the contextual menu. The anchor points available will be dependent on your choice. Set the Standard Behavior Off. These anchor points allow you to move a leader around the text.
Standard Behavior is the default mode. Automatic Mode corresponds to the point 1 of Standard Behavior. Frames Anchors Table:
Type of frame Rectangle
Square Circle Scored Circle Set Fixed Support Sym Part Sym Set
Standard Behavior OFF 1 2 3 o-------o-------o / \ 4 o o 5 \ / o-------o-------o 3 __o__ 2 o | 1 o | 8 o --o-7 3 o / \ o 4 | o 5 | o 6
Standard Behavior ON o-------o-------o / 1 o \ o-------o-------o / \ o 2
__o__ / | 1 o | \ --o-/ \ | o 2 |
o / \ o 4 \ o 5 / o 6 o / 1 o \ o \ / o o / o \ o 2
Diamond
2 o / 1 o \ 8 o \ / o 7 3 o / \
Nota
o / \ o o / \ 1 o---------o 2
Triangle
2 o o 4 / \ 1 o----o----o 5 6 1 2 3 o-------o-------o | \ 4 o o 5 | / o-------o-------o 6 7 8 1 2 3 o-------o-------o / | 4 o o 5 \ | o-------o-------o 6 7 8 1 2 3 o-------o-------o / \ o 5 \ o-------o-------o 6 7 8 /
Right Flag
Right Oblong
o-------o-------o | \ 1 o o 2 | / o-------o-------o
Left Flag
Left Oblong
o-------o-------o | 1 o o 2 \ | o-------o-------o /
Both Flag Oblong Ellipse 4 o
o-------o-------o / 1 o \ o-------o-------o / \ o 2
Sticking
1 o---------o 2
1 o---------o 2
Parallelogram
4 5 o-------o-------o / / 2 o o 6 / / o-------o-------o 1 8 7
o-------o-------o / o o / / o-------o-------o 1 2 /
6. Drag the leader hanged point to move it to the anchor number 8 (see the previous table, circle, Standard Behavior Off). 7. Select a part of the text, as an example "Te", for this: q Double-click on the text to edit it, the Text Editor appears.
q
Select "Te" in the Text Editor or in the drawing.
8. Apply the Both Flag frame to the text.
You cannot use Sticking and Nota frames as sub-frames.
Replicating Text and Attribute

This task shows you how to replicate text as well as the corresponding text attribute. Open the GenDrafting_part_02.CATPart document. Open the GenDrafting_part_03. CATDrawing document.
1. Click the hole to be assigned text on the part. For example, on GenDrafting_part_02. CATPart, select Hole.1. 2. Click the CATDrawing (GenDrafting_part_03. CATDrawing) and click the Replicate icon from the Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).
3. Select the text to be replicated. The new replicated text automatically appears under the cursor. 4. Click where you want the new text to be positioned. The hole diameter automatically corresponds to the diameter of Hole1 you selected on the part.
5. If needed, add a text leader to the new text.
Copying Graphic Properties

This task shows you how to copy the graphic properties of a text element to existing texts. This is true for any type of Interactive Drafting element. In this task, we will take free text as an example. Create free texts. 1. Multi-select the free texts to be modified graphically speaking.
2. Click the Copy Object Format icon
from the Graphic Properties toolbar.
3. Select the text to be used as a graphical reference for selected texts.
The graphical properties assigned to the text used as a reference are now copied onto the multi-selected free texts to be modified.
Creating a Datum Target

This task will show you how to create a datum target on a right projection view. You can set text properties either before or after you create the datum target. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Datum Target icon from the Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).
2. Select the attachment point of the datum target leader. 3. Select a point to be used to position the datum target (anchor point).
The Datum Target Creation dialog box is displayed. 4. Enter the required field. For example, 1 and A.
click this button to define that the datum target informs on the
diameter of the selected element. 5. Click OK. The datum target is created.
The character string that is edited in the Datum Target Creation dialog box is simultaneously previewed on the drawing.
Modifying a Datum Target

This task shows you how to modify a datum target by editing it. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a datum target.
1. Double-click the datum target you want to modify.
The Datum Target Modification dialog box is displayed. 2. Modify any of the datum target values. For example, enter B instead of A. 3. Click OK.
4. Click in the free space or select another icon. The datum target is modified.
creatingdatumtarget02NLS.gif (3790 bytes)
Creating a Balloon
Creating a Balloon
This task will show you how to create a balloon. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Balloon icon
from the
Annotations toolbar (Text sub-toolbar).
2. Select an element. For example, select the bottom line of the rectangle. 3. Click to define the balloon anchor point.
The Balloon Creation dialog box appears, with the value 1 is pre-entered in the field.
4. You can enter another string or value as needed. For the purpose of this exercise, leave the pre-entered value as is.
5. Click OK.
The value that is edited in the Balloon Creation dialog box is simultaneously previewed on the drawing. When you create more than one balloon, the value of this balloon is automatically incremented.
Creating a Balloon
Creating Associative Balloons on Generated Product Views

This task will show you how to create associative balloons on views generated from a product. Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document. On this CATProduct document, Product Structure subproducts have already been assigned numbers (Generate Numbering icon). For more details, see the Product Structure User's Guide.
1. Go to the Generative Drafting workbench by opening Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document.
2. Click the Balloon icon toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).
from the Annotations
3. Go over one of the part with your cursor. All the edges on all the views extracted from the part are highlighted.
4. Create a balloon by selecting an edge. The number of the balloon corresponds to the number of the sub-product created in the product which the views were generated from. In this particular example, even though the balloon you are creating is the first one, it is assigned number four as it is applied to sub-product number four.
Note that if you modify the numbering in the product and then regenerate the product, the balloon modification will be applied to the generated views only after you perform a view update.
Modifying a Balloon
Modifying a Balloon
This task shows you how to modify a balloon. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a balloon.
1. Right-click the balloon you want to modify.
2. From the contextual menu, select Properties. 3. In the Properties dialog box, click the Text tab.
4. You will now define the balloon frame properties from the Frame drop-down list. By default, balloons are assigned a variable-size circle text length. You have other options:
q q
which adapts to the balloon
You can display the balloon without a frame by selecting the None icon
You can assign a fixed-size frame to the balloon by selecting the fixed-size Circle icon .
For more information about fixed-sized frames, refer to Adding frames or sub-frames. For the purpose of this exercise, select the fixed-size Circle icon .
Modifying a Balloon
5. Click OK to validate and close the Properties dialog box. The balloon size is modified.
6. Now, double-click the balloon. The Balloon Modification dialog box is displayed. The Autofit option is active when the size of the balloon frame is fixed.
7. Modify the balloon value. 8. Select the Autofit option to adapt the size of the text to that of the balloon frame.
Modifying a Balloon
9. Click OK. The text is enlarged to fit within the balloon frame.
In the case of large texts, the Autofit option reduces the text size. 10. You can also modify the anchor point and thereby the position of the balloon.
Creating a Roughness Symbol

This task will show you how to create a roughness symbol. Open the Roughness.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Roughness Symbol icon from the Annotations toolbar.
2. Select the attachment point of the roughness symbol. The roughness symbol position and orientation will be associative to this point.
The Roughness Symbol dialog box is displayed. The fields available in the Roughness Symbol dialog box depend on the standard used by the drawing, as defined by the administrator.
Symbols Definition Surface texture Surface texture and all surfaces around Basic All surfaces around Lay approximately parallel to the line representing the surface Lay approximately perpendicular to the line representing the surface Lay angular in both directions Lay multidirectional. Lay approximately circular Lay approximately radial Lay particulate, non-directional, or protuberant Basic surface texture
Material removal by machining is required
Material removal by machining is prohibited.
3. Enter the required values in the various field(s). 4. Click OK. The roughness symbol is created.
5. If needed, modify the roughness symbol position by dragging it to the required location.
If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Roughness Symbol dialog box is pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are disabled during the creation of the roughness symbol. On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Roughness Symbol dialog box is pre-filled with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active during the creation of the of the roughness symbol. If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option, you can reset the current style values in the Roughness Symbol Editor dialog box at any time using the Reset button. At any time, you can modify the roughness symbol. For this, double-click the roughness symbol to be modified and enter the desired modifications in the displayed Roughness Symbol dialog box (for orientation modification, use the Invert switch button). When this is not already the case, you can link roughness symbol position and orientation to another element, see Making an Existing Annotation Associative.
Creating a Welding Symbol

This task will show you how to create a welding symbol. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text. Welding symbols Square butt weld Singe V butt weld Single bevel butt weld Flare V butt weld Flare bevel butt weld Single U butt weld Single J butt weld Fillet weld Spot weld Back weld Steep-flanked single-bevel butt weld Steep-flanked single-V weld Plug weld Removable backing strip used Permanent backing strip used Surfacing weld V flare weld Spot weld
Complementary symbols Weld with flat face Weld with convex face Weld with concave face Flush finished weld Fillet weld with smooth blended face Finish symbols C finish symbol F finish symbol G finish symbol H finish symbol M finish symbol R finish symbol Complementary indications Field weld Weld-all-around Weld text side (up or down) Indent line side (up or down) Weld tail Reference Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Welding Symbol icon from
the Annotations toolbar (Symbols subtoolbar).
2. Select an element or click in the free space to position the anchor point of the welding symbol, and then click to validate. The welding leader will appear. 3. Move the cursor to position the welding symbol and then click at the chosen location. The Welding creation dialog box is displayed.
4. Type the desired values in the upper and/or lower field(s). 5. Click the symbol buttons to choose the welding symbol, complementary symbols and/or finish symbols. The welding symbols available depend on your standard. 6. If you want to add complementary indications like a field weld or a weld tail, for example, click the appropriate button.
7. Click OK. The welding symbol is created.
8. If needed, modify the welding symbol position by dragging it to the required location. 9. Double-click on the welding symbol to edit it, and change the weld text side for example by clicking the Up/Down switch button.
If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools > Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Welding creation dialog box is pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are disabled during the creation of the welding symbol. On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Welding creation dialog box is pre-filled with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active during the creation of the of the welding symbol. You can reset the current style values in the Welding creation dialog box at any time using the Reset button. You can close the tail (reference) using a rectangle variable-size frame .
At any time, you can modify the welding symbol. To do this, double-click the welding symbol to be modified and enter the modifications in the displayed dialog box. You can import a plain text file (.txt) to use as a reference (specification, process or other) by clicking the Import File button.
Creating a Geometry Weld

This task will show you how to create a geometry weld. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Weld icon from the Annotations toolbar (Symbols sub-toolbar).
2. Select a first element. For example, a line. 3. Select a second element. For example, another line. The geometry default weld symbol automatically appears on the drawing.
The Welding Editor dialog box is displayed. 4. If needed, modify the geometry welding symbol. For example, modify the thickness from ten to five millimeters.
5. If needed, modify the type of the geometry welding symbol by selecting the Change Type option from the Welding Editor dialog box.
6. Click OK.
The geometry welding symbol is created.
The area fill corresponding to the geometry weld cannot be modified.
Modifying Annotation Positioning

This task will show you how to assign new positioning to existing annotations. You can also modify the position of the views using the same dialog. Open the IntDrafting_Annotations_Positioning.CATDrawing document. 1. Multi-select the annotations to be newly positioned. In this example, multi-select text. 2. Select the Tools -> Positioning -> Element Positioning command from the menu bar. The Positioning dialog box appears:
3. Select the Align to top option
Align to the left

The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the left. The text anchor point is moved to the left (for example, from the bottom center to the bottom left). The texts are aligned vertically relatively to the reference text origin point (same x abscissa as for the reference text).
Align to the center

The reference text is positioned at the middle of both left and right extremity points. The text anchor point is moved to the center (for example, from the top left to the top center). The texts are aligned vertically relatively to the reference text origin point (same x abscissa as for the reference text).
Align to the right

The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the right. The text anchor point is moved to the right (for example, from the middle center to the middle right). The texts are aligned vertically relatively to the reference text origin point (same x abscissa as for the reference text).
Align to the top

The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the top. The text anchor point is moved to the top (for example, from the bottom left to the top left). The texts are aligned horizontally relatively to the reference text origin point (same y coordinate as for the reference text).
Align to the middle

The reference text is positioned at the middle of both top and bottom extremity points. The selected texts are assigned the middle attribute as text origin (for example, from the
top left to the middle left). The texts are aligned horizontally relatively to the reference text origin point (same y coordinate as for the reference text).
Align to the bottom

The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the bottom. The text anchor point is moved to the bottom (for example, from the top left to the bottom left). The texts are aligned horizontally relatively to the reference text origin point (same y coordinate as for the reference text).
4. Select the Space from left to right option
and set the Space value to 30mm.
Note that when you select a Space option, the modification does not appear similarly on the drawing. This modification only appears when you enter the new Space value in the Positioning dialog box or when you select a Space value.
5. Select the Distribute horizontally option
6. Select the Move vertically to top option
and set the Move value to -10mm.
Note that when you select a Move option, the modification does not appear similarly on the drawing. This is only the case once you enter the new Move value in the Positioning dialog box or when you select a spacing option.
Creating/Modifying a Table
This task shows you how to create and edit a table. In this table, you can add text, insert columns, rows, merges cells, invert lines, invert columns, switch lines and columns, and insert views. You can also split a table, import a table, and insert a view in a table. Choose a task: q creating a table,
q
editing and modifying a table, splitting a table, importing a table, inserting a view in table.
Creating a table
Create a new sheet and a new view. 1. Click the Table icon to launch the command.
2. Click a point in the drawing to choose the table position. The table cannot be associative, do not select an element in the drawing to make the table associative. 3. The following panel allows you to set the number of columns and rows you want for the table.
q q
The line height corresponds to the height of a string. The line width corresponds to 5 times a string height.
4. Click ok to validate the creation.
Editing and modifying a table

5. Click on the table to select it and drag it to another position. 6. Double-click the table to edit it:
To select a column, click just above the column when the symbol To select a line, click on the left of the row To leave edition, click outside the table. .
appears.
When the table is in edition mode, you cannot move it anymore. 7. Right-click on the corner of the frame around the table to access the general contextual menu.
This contextual menu allows you to: q invert columns,

q q q q
invert rows, turn rows into columns and columns into rows, fit the text in the cells by automatically defining the optimal cell size, extend the table by adding columns and/or rows to it.
8. Choose Invert rows in the contextual menu. Rows are inverted, i.e., the last row becomes the first one, the first row becomes the last one, etc.
9. Choose Invert Columns in the contextual menu. Columns are inverted.
10. Select Invert Columns / Rows in the contextual menu. Rows and Columns are inverted:
11. Select a column and right-click to get the contextual menu, it allows you to: q Insert a column,
q q q
Delete a column, Clear the content of a column, Modify the size of a column: r either set a new column size,
r
or autofit the size, i.e. fit the text in the cells by automatically defining the optimal cell size.
Choose to autofit the column size, the following dialog box appears:
Set the column width to a new value value and click OK to validate. The same functionalities are available for rows. 12. Select two cells and right-click them, then choose Merge in the contextual menu. 13. Then select the new cell formed by the two cells you have merged and choose Unmerge to split them in two cells again. 14. Double-click on the text of a cell. The Text Editor appears: modify the text and click OK to validate.
15. To choose vertical and horizontal text alignment, use the Anchor point tool Align the text of a cell on the right using .
Splitting a table
Open the Split_tables.CATDrawing document. It contains a table that you will split into several tables.
1. Right-click the table and choose Split Table from the contextual menu. The Table Split dialog box appears.
It contains the following options: q Max. number of rows: if you want to split the table so that each new table contains a maximum number of rows, select this option and enter the wanted number of rows in the associated field.
q
Max. height: if you want to split the table so that each new table has a maximum height, select this option and enter the wanted height in the associated field. Vertical: check this option to create the new tables one below the other. Horizontal: check this option to position the new tables one next to the other. Distance: indicate the distance you want between each new table. Duplicate first row: check this option if you want to duplicate the first row in each new table.
q q q q
2. Select Max. number of rows, and enter 5 in the corresponding field. 3. Select Vertical. 4. In the Distance field, type 5 mm. 5. Select Duplicate first line. 6. Click OK. The table is split into several tables, according to the criteria you specified.
Importing a table
You can import a table (only .csv). 1. Click the Import Table icon and select the table you want to import.
Inserting a view a in table

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing file. Create a table in the front views.
1. Double-click on the table to edit it and right-click in the cell you want to fill. Select Insert Object.
2. Choose the view you want to insert by clicking the view in the drawing or in the tree. Choose the Top view:
The top view is inserted in the table, and it is resized so as to fit the cell. You can resize the cell if you want to enlarge the view in the table.
q q q
You cannot select the view containing the table, The view must be in the same drawing. If you modify the 3D part and update the drawing, the view in the table will be updated as well.
Finding and Replacing Text
Finding And Replacing Text

This task explains first how to locate a string of characters and then how to replace it. Strings can be found and replaced in the following elements: q balloons
q q q q
datum features datum targets dimensions texts
Open the IntDrafting_Text_Replace.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the Edit->Find item from the menu bar. The Find dialog box appears. 2. Select any of the optional settings. For example, enter First as the Find what text. 3. Select .
The following message appears in the dialog box: Searching All Current Sheet Views. If you previously selected a given number of sheets or elements in the document, the message will be Searching All Current Elements. The first instance found is red colored.
4. If needed, select for other instances.
to search
5. Select
The Replace dialog box now appears. 6. Enter the text you want to use as replacement text and select again. For example, enter Second as the Replace with text. To replace all instances of the text, select . You can also match case, find whole words only or re-frame the window. 7. Select .
Note that you can directly access the Replace dialog box by selecting the Edit>Replace item from the menu bar.
Performing an Advanced Search

This task will show you how to use the advanced search command in the Drafting workbench. First, refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide to learn more about advanced search. 1. Select the Edit->Search... command then click the Advanced tab:
2. Choose Drafting as the workbench. Any element type has the following attributes: q Name: indicate the name of the searched element
q q
Color: select a color from the color chooser or use the color of an existing element Set: a selection set indicating a numeric value with the corresponding unit of measure.
Some elements have additional types:
Type Balloon Datum Feature Datum Target Dimension
Additional attributes Part name Reference name Reference name Size Type value
Value to select or to key in name of the searched element name of the searched element name of the searched element size indicated in the searched element type of dimension (angle, diameter, radius, length, etc.) searched dimension value searched
Not associative on 3D Yes/No Not updateable Fake Driving dimension True Geometrical tolerance value type Text having attribute links text string Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No tolerance value searched tolerance type (circularity, concentricity, flatness, parallelism, etc.) searched Yes/No text string searched
3. Select an operating sign in the first combo box. 4. Select (if there is a combo box) or key in the value you are looking for.
Querying Object Links
Querying Annotation Links

This task explains how to query annotation links in a drawing (this lets you know what object an annotation is linked to) and how to zoom on the linked object. Open the query_link.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click on the text "Front view Scale: 1:1" and select Query Object Links in the contextual menu.
2. The Query Link Panel appears:
Querying Object Links
It displays the linked objects name and specifications. In our example, the view name and scale are linked to the front view.
Zoom on the linked object

3. In the Panel, check Re-frame the window and select the linked object you want to zoom. As an example, select ViewMakeUp.3
The object is zoomed.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Dress-Up Elements
Dress-Up Elements
The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create the following view dress up elements on existing 2D elements.
Create center lines (no reference): Apply a center line to one or more circles. Create center lines (reference): Apply a center line to one or more circles with respect to a reference (linear or circular). Modify center lines: Modify one or more center lines at one or more ends of this/these center lines. Create threads (no reference): Create a thread without a reference. Create threads (reference): Create a thread with a reference, either circular (circle or point) or linear (line). Create axis lines: Create an axis line by selecting lines. Create axis lines and center lines: Create an axis line by selecting lines. Create an area fill: Create an area fill, i.e. a closed area on which you will then apply graphical dressup elements called patterns (these can be hatching, dotting or coloring). Patterns can be applied to area fills created from both sketched and generated elements. Create arrows: Create an arrow.
Creating Center Lines (No Reference)
Creating Center Lines (No Reference)

This task will show you how to apply a pair of center lines to a circle or an ellipse. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Center Line icon toolbar). from the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-
2. Select a circle. Center lines are automatically applied to the circle
. 3. Click in the drawing to confirm the creation and select the center lines. 4. Use manipulators to modify center lines size.
q
You can apply this scenario to an ellipse. When creating a center line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the center line cannot be associative to the 3D.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating Center Lines (Reference)

This task will show you how to apply a pair of center lines to a circle or an ellipse with respect to a reference (linear or circular). Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Center Line with Reference icon from
the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar). You can multi-select circles before you enter the command to create center lines for all selected circles.
2. Select the circle to be applied a pair of center lines. 3. Select the reference line. The center line created is associative with the reference line.
You can create a pair of center lines according to a circular reference (a point or a circle): 4. Click the Center Line with Reference icon from
the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar). You can multi-select circles before you enter the command and thereby apply center lines to the selected circles.
5. Select the circle to be applied a pair of center lines. 6. Select the reference circle. The pair of center lines created is associative with the reference circle type element.
You cannot apply this scenario to an ellipse.
When creating a center line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the center line cannot be associative to the 3D. In this case, the center line is neither linked to the 3D nor to 2D drawing elements. For example, a non-associative center line with a reference line will not be updated when the reference line is moved.
Modifying Center Lines

This task will show you how to modify a pair of center lines at one or more end(s) of this/these center lines. The same method applies to axis lines. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the center line. Red end points appear.
2. Select any end point and drag to move all the center line extremities to a new position.
3. Press the Ctrl key while selecting any end point and drag the selected extremity to a new position.
Multi-selection can be performed to modify center lines. You can also modify the center line using the contextual menu (Properties) and displayed Properties dialog box (Graphic tab).
Creating Threads (No Reference)

This task will show you how to create a thread without a reference. In this particular case, you will apply a thread to a hole. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Thread icon (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar). from the Dress-up toolbar
You can also multi-select holes before clicking the Thread icon
Activating this command displays two options in the Tools Palette which is automatically displayed:
q
The Tap type option The Thread type option
, which is activated by default. .
2. Select the Thread type option
3. Select the hole (or circle) to which you want to apply a thread. The thread is created.
4. Select an axis line manipulator and drag it along a direction. Thread axis lines are modified symmetrically. If you want to move only one axis line, hold on the Ctrl key while you are dragging the manipulator.
q
The thread that appears on the hole is assigned a standard radius and representation (compliant with the selected standard). When creating a thread on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the thread cannot be associative to the 3D.
Creating Threads (Reference)

This task shows you how to create a thread with a reference, either circular (circle or point) or linear (line). In this particular case, you will apply a thread to a hole with a line as reference. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Thread with Reference icon from the Dress-up toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar). You can multi-select holes before you enter the command and then apply center lines to the selected holes. Activating this command displays two options in the Tools Palette:
q
The Reference Tap type option activated by default. The Reference Thread type option
, which is
. .
2. Select the Reference Thread type option
3. Select a reference line. The thread is created according to this reference.
4. Select a manipulator and drag it along a direction. Thread axis lines are modified symmetrically. If you want to move only one axis line, hold on the Ctrl key while you are dragging the manipulator.
When creating a thread on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the center line cannot be associative to the 3D. In this case, the thread is neither linked to the 3D nor to 2D drawing elements. For example, a non-associative thread with a reference line will not be updated when the reference line is moved.
Creating Axis Lines
Creating Axis Lines

This task will show you how to create an axis line. Open the Brackets_views07.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Axis Line icon toolbar (Axis and Threads toolbar). from the Dressup
2. Select two lines.
The axis line is created
q q
If needed, you can select two non-parallel lines that are not colinear. Both in the case of center lines and axis lines, a default overrun is created.
Creating Axis Lines
When creating an axis line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the axis line cannot be associative to the 3D. You can create axis lines between symbolic fillet edges or fillet representation on generative views. Note that these axis lines will not be associative (a message will be displayed).
If you need to modify an axis line, please refer to Modifying a center line as the method is similar. Note that multi-selection can be performed when modifying axis lines.
Creating Axis Lines and Center Lines

This task will show you how to create simultaneously axis and center lines on several circles. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Axis Line and Center Line icon the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads toolbar). from
2. Select two circles.
The axes and center lines are created.
4. Select an axis line manipulator and drag it along a direction. Thread axis lines are modified symmetrically. If you want to move only one axis line, hold on the Ctrl key while you are dragging the manipulator.
When creating axes and center lines on a generative view, a message will be displayed if axes and center line cannot be associative to the 3D.
Creating an Area Fill

An area fill is a closed area on which you then apply graphical dress-up element called patterns (these can be hatching, dotting or coloring). You can create area fills on the following elements:
q q q
sketched elements, generated elements part-sketched, part-generated elements
In this task, you will learn how to create an area fill on a drawing containing a mix of sketched and generated elements. Open the GenDrafting_Area_Fill.CATDrawing document. This drawing is a generated one.
Define your area fill profile by creating lines so that your drawing looks like the figure shown here. In this example, sketched elements (the ones you create) are selected (they are shown in red), and generated elements are shown in black. The area fill profile will therefore consist of both sketched and generated elements. You do not need to activate the view in which you are going to create an area fill.
1. In the Graphic Properties toolbar, click the down arrow besides the Pattern
icon.
2. In the Pattern dialog box, select a pattern for your area fill and click OK. 3. Click Insert -> Dress Up -> Area Fill. OR
Click the Area Fill icon
from the Dress Up toolbar.
The Area Detection dialog box appears.
4. Click the Automatic option (the other option is described in the remarks section below) and then click inside the area for which you just defined the profile, under the line which represents the fillet edge.
The software automatically detects the area to fill based on where you clicked and fills this area with the selected pattern. The Areas to Fill dialog box disappears.
A few remarks
Area to Fill dialog box
The two options available in the Area to Fill dialog box are described below. You can specify the area you want to fill before or after choosing the option in the Area to Fill dialog box. For each option, examples illustrate what kind of area fill you will get depending on where you click. Note where the cursor is located on the figures. q Automatic automatically detects the area to fill based on where you click: just click inside the area you want to fill.
If you click in this area:
You get this area fill:
With profile selection lets you specify the area to fill: select all the 2D elements that make up the boundary of the area you want to fill, and then click inside this area. As you select elements on a view, intersection symbols (stars) appear where elements intersect. This enables you to know where the profile is open: in this case, intersection symbols do not appear. As you cannot apply an area fill to an open profile, make sure all elements intersect.
If you select these elements:
You get this area fill:
Miscellaneous remarks about applying area fills

q
Whichever option you choose in the Areas to Fill dialog box, make sure the profile you select is closed, i. e. that all elements that make up its boundary intersect. An error message will appear if you select a profile which is not closed. When you create an area fill on sketched elements, or on part-sketched, part-generated elements, extra sketched elements are added over the generated elements which make up the boundaries of the area fill. Also, coincidence constraints are created between the original generated elements and the added sketched elements. On generated drawings, the area fill is not associative with the 3D part. If you modify the original 3D part and then update the generated drawing, the area fill will not be changed. Select elements carefully: the area will be filled according to the elements you selected. If you apply modifications to the filled area, the pattern will be modified accordingly. If you create text in a filled area, the background of the text will be blanked as shown here. With hatching or dotting patterns, the spacing between each hatch or dot is sometimes larger than the area to fill. This makes it impossible to display the pattern properly. In such a case, the area fill contour is made bold and is turned into the same color as the pattern color. This enables you to identify items with area fills even if the pattern is not visible. The figures below illustrate what the sketched element will look like in such a case.
q q
q q
What you have before applying the pattern:
What you get if the pattern cannot be displayed:
Creating Arrows
Creating Arrows
This task will show you how to create an arrow. For the purpose of this exercise, you will use an arrow to illustrate the kind of hole you want to apply to a circle. Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Drawing window, and select Insert->Dress Up->Arrow from the menu bar.
2. Click a point or select an object to define the arrow starting point (the tail). For example, select a circle. 3. Click another point or select another object to define the arrow extremity (the head). The arrow is created.
The arrow and the selected object are associative.
Creating Arrows
To modify the position of the arrow, click the arrow and use the yellow manipulators to drag it to its new location.
To modify the general appearance of the arrow, either click the arrow and then use the Graphic Properties toolbar, or right-click the arrow and then use the Properties dialog box (select Properties and click the Graphic tab).
4. You will now add a breakpoint to the arrow. Select it and right-click on a yellow manipulator. A contextual menu appears.
Creating Arrows
5. Select Add a Breakpoint. A breakpoint is added to the arrow; you can drag it to change the arrow path.
Creating Arrows
6. You will now choose a symbol for the arrow tail. To do this, right-click on the yellow tail manipulator. 7. In the contextual menu, point to Symbol Shape and select a symbol, Filled Circle for example.
The symbol you choose now appears on the arrow tail. You can also change the symbol used for the arrow head by repeating steps 6 and 7.
Creating Arrows
8. You will now create an interruption on the arrow tail. Right-click on the yellow tail manipulator again. 9. In the contextual menu, select Add an Interruption. An interruption is added to the arrow.
q q
You cannot add another extremity to an arrow. Arrow angle and length are defined by standards. For more information, see Dimension Parameters.
Creating Arrows
[ Back ] [ Up ]
2D Geometry
2D Geometry
2D geometry commands are documented in Sketcher User's Guide. As such, the information detailed in this section is presented in a Sketcher context. You should note that the Sketcher User's Guide contains images that correspond to the Sketcher workbench and therefore illustrate geometry in an environment that is different from the Drafting environment (symbols, background color, for example). These commands allow you to create 2D geometry. Note also that SmartPick is an easy-to-use tool designed to make all your geometry creation as simple as possible.
Before you begin creating 2D geometry, make sure you are familiar with concepts such as: q Tools Palette
q
Multi-selection
In order to help ensure that 2D geometry is not altered once it has been created, geometry edition is only allowed in the active view. Therefore, if you want to edit or move 2D geometry, you need to activate the view which contains the geometry. You can prevent 2D geometry from being inopportunely moved (and distorted) in active views by unselecting Allow direct manipulation from Tools -> Options > Mechanical Design -> Drafting - > Geometry tab.
You can create as many 2D geometry elements of a given type as needed by double-clicking the appropriate icon (instead of single-clicking it).
Create a point: Use the Tools Palette or click the point horizontal and vertical coordinates. Create a points using coordinates: Enter in the Point Definition dialog box cartesian or polar coordinates.
2D Geometry
Create an equidistant point: Enter in the Equidistant Point Definition dialog box the number and spacing of the points to be equidistantly created on a line or a curve-type element. Create a point using intersection Create one or more points by intersecting curve type elements via selection. Create a point using projection Create one or more points by projecting points onto curve type elements. Create a line: Use the Tools Palette or click the line first and second points. Create an infinite line Use the Profile toolbar or click the infinite line first and second points. Create a bi-tangent line: Click two elements one after the other to create a line that is tangent to these two elements. Create a bisecting line Click two lines. Create a circle: Use the Tools Palette or click to define the circle center and then one point on the circle. Create a three point circle: Use the Tools Palette or click to define the circle start point, second point and end point one after the other. Create a circle using coordinates: Use the Circle Definition dialog box to define the circle center point and radius. Create a tri-tangent circle: Click three elements one after the other to create a circle made of three tangent constraints.
2D Geometry
Create an ellipse: Use the Tools Palette or click to define the ellipse center, major semi-axis and minor semi-axis endpoints one after the other. Create an arc: Use the Tools Palette or click to define the arc center and then the arc start point and end point. Create a three point arc: Use the Tools Palette or click to define the arc start point, end point and second point one after the other. Create a three point arc (via limits): Use the Tools Palette or click to define the arc start point, end point and second point one after the other. Create a profile: Use the Tools Palette or click to define lines and arcs which the profile may be made of. Connect elements: Click the points through which the spline will go. Create a parabola by focus: Click the focus, apex and then the parabola two extremity points. Create a hyperbola by focus: Click the focus, center and apex, and then the hyperbola two extremity points. Create a conic: Click the desired points and excentricity for creating an ellipse, a circle, a parabola or a hyperbola, using tangents, if needed. Create a spline: Click the points through which the spline will go.
2D Geometry
Create a rectangle: Use the Tools Palette or click the rectangle extremity points one after the other. Create an oriented rectangle: Use the Tools Palette or click to define a first side for the rectangle and then a point corresponding to the rectangle length. Create a parallelogram: Use the Tools Palette or click to define a first side for the parallelogram and then a point corresponding to the parallelogram length. Create an hexagon: Use the Tools Palette or click to define the hexagon center and dimension. Create an elongated hole: Use the Tools Palette or click to define the center to center axis and then a point corresponding to the curved oblong profile length and angle. Create a cylindrical elongated hole: Use the Tools Palette or click to define the center to center circular axis and then a point corresponding to the curved oblong profile length and angle. Create a keyhole profile: Use the Tools Palette or click to define the center to center axis and then both points corresponding to both radii. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Creating Three Points Arcs (Limits)
Creating Three Points Arcs Using Limits

This task shows how to create a three point arc by starting creating the arc limits first. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this arc manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
By default, arc centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you create arcs by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog box. To do so, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option at the left of the dialog box (Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Three Point Arc Starting with Limits icon from the Profiles toolbar (Circle subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar will display one after the other values for defining the three points of the circle: values for defining the horizontal (H) and vertical (V), values for defining the arc start, end or second points or else the radius of this arc.
2. Position the Start Point (H: 25mm and V: 37mm) cursor in the desired fields and key in the desired values. End Point (H: 25mm and V: 7mm)
Second Point (R: 15.5mm)
3. Drag the cursor and click to create the arc intermediate point (the point which the arc will go through).
The three point arc appears as shown here:
2D Geometry Operations
2D geometry operations commands are documented in Sketcher User's Guide. As such, the information detailed in this section is presented in a Sketcher context. You should note that the Sketcher User's Guide contains images that correspond to the Sketcher workbench and therefore illustrate geometry in an environment that is different from the Drafting environment (symbols, background color, for example). These commands allow you to modify and perform various operations on 2D geometry.
Modify Elements Coordinates Use the Line Definition dialog box to modify element coordinates. Create a corner: Create a rounded corner (arc tangent to two curves) between two lines using trimming operation. Create a chamfer: Create a chamfer between two lines using trimming operation. Trim elements: Trim a line or a circle (either one element or all the elements). Break elements: Break any type of curves. Create symmetrical elements: Repeat existing elements using a line, a construction line or an axis. Translate elements: Perform a translation on 2D elements by defining the duplicate mode and then selecting the element to be duplicated. Rotate elements: Rotate elements by defining the duplicate mode and then selecting the element to be duplicated.
Scale elements: Resize a profile to the dimension you specify. Offset elements: Duplicate a line, arc or circle type element.
Properties
Properties
This section discusses how to quickly access and edit information on 2D geometry, dress-up elements, annotations and dimensions in a single dialog box, provided you use the Edit>properties contextual command. The data you can access (tabs) depends on the element you select. Note that clicking the More switch gives you access to more tabs. The tasks described in this section are listed below.
Edit view properties Access and, if needed, edit view properties. Edit 2D geometry feature properties: Access and, if needed, edit information on 2D geometry features (name and stamp). Edit 2D element graphic properties: Access and, if needed, edit graphic properties. Edit pattern properties: Access and, if needed, edit pattern properties. Edit annotation font properties: Access and, if needed, edit annotation font properties. Edit text properties: Access and, if needed, modify text color, position and/or orientation. Edit dimension text properties: Access and, if needed, edit dimension text properties. Edit dimension value properties: Access and, if needed, edit dimension value properties. Edit dimension tolerance properties: Access and, if needed, edit dimension tolerance properties.
Properties
Edit dimension extension line properties: Access and, if needed, edit dimension extension line properties. Edit dimension line properties: Access and, if needed, edit information on dimension line properties. Edit 2D component instance properties: Access and, if needed, edit 2D component instance properties.
Editing View Properties

This task explains how to edit view properties. Open the PointSketch.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click the front view and select properties. Choose the View tab. You can notice that are number of options are disabled, as they apply to generative views only. 2. Choose your options.
Visualization and behavior

q q q
Display view frame: shows/hides the view frame, Lock view: locks the view so that it cannot be modified anymore. Visual clipping: lets you reframe a view so as to display only part of it.
Scale and Orientation

q q
Angle: defines the angle between the view and the sheet, Scale: defines the scale of the view.
View Name
Allows you to modify the name of the view (or of the 2D component when pertinent), and to enter a prefix, an ID or a suffix. Among other things, you can create a formula for the view name.
Properties available on Generative Views

The properties described below apply to generative views only. They will be active in a Generative Drafting context.
Dress-up
Specifies the dress-up elements that should be displayed in the view: q Hidden lines
q q q q q
Center line 3D spec 3D Colors Axis Thread Fillets: you can choose to view Boundaries, Symbolic, Original Edges, Projected Original Edges.
Boundaries: thin lines, representing the mathematical limits of the fillets. Boundaries will not be projected if they correspond to two faces which are continuous in curvature. They will be projected only if they correspond to a smooth edge which is situated between two faces whose curvature radii vary. This mode will be used automatically to represent a connection between two faces which are not joined by a fillet, no matter what option you select.
Symbolic Original edges, projected in a direction that is normal to each corresponding surface.
Approximated Original Edges Original edges, at the intersection of the two surfaces joined by the fillet.
Projected Original Edges Original edges, projected on fillet surfaces in the direction of the view projection.
This projection mode is equivalent to the CATIA V4 fillet projection mode.
3D Points: projects points from 3D (no construction elements). You can choose from the following options: 3D symbol inheritance: keeps the symbol from the 3D. Symbol: displays the symbol you choose from the drop-down list.
3D Wireframe: displays both the wireframe and the geometry on generated views. You can choose whether projected 3D wireframe can be hidden or is always visible: Can be hidden: in some cases, depending on the projection angle, part or all of 3D wireframe will possibly be hidden. Is always visible: 3D wireframe will be visible in all cases, independently of the projection angle.
Note that if you delete generated center lines, threads or axis lines, you will NOT be able to generate them again (by updating the drawing), even if you select the appropriate dress-up options in the Properties dialog box. It is impossible to restore generated center lines, threads or axis lines that have been deleted.
Generation Mode
q
Only generate parts larger than: specifies that you only want to generate parts which are larger than the size indicated (in millimeters) in the appropriate field. Enable occlusion culling: saves memory when generating exact views from an assembly (or a part or product) which is loaded in Visualization mode (i.e. when the Work with the cache system option is active). This will load only the parts which will be seen in the resulting view (instead of loading all of them, which is the case by default), which optimizes memory consumption and CPU usage.

q
View generation mode: lets you change how the view is generated. For more information on the various view generation modes, refer to View Generation Settings in the Customizing chapter. r Exact view: turns the view into a exact view (the geometry becomes available).
r
CGR: turns the view into a CGR view (only the external appearance of the component is used and displayed; the geometry is not available). Approximate: turns the view into an approximate view. Although approximate views are not as high in precision and quality as exact views, this generation mode dramatically reduces memory consumption. Performances may also be improved, depending on how you fine-tune precision. Therefore, the approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data. Raster: turns the view into an image view. You can configure a number of options such as the level of detail or the type of image to generate (shading, shading with edges, etc.).
If you select a mix of exact, CGR, approximate and/or raster views, the options will be disabled. To activate these options, make sure you select views which are using the same generation mode.
Generative view style
The Generative view style area shows the generative view style which is applied to the view. If you have modified the values of the properties defined in the selected generative view style by editing some dress-up properties, for example, you can use the Reset to style values button to reset these values to the original style values. (To let you know when properties have been changed compared to the original generative style, an asterisk is displayed in front of them.)
The Generative view style properties are only available on generative views, when generative view style functionalities are activated (i.e. when the Prevent generative view style creation option is de-selected in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab).
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Editing 2D Geometry Feature Properties

This task shows you how to access and, if needed, edit information on 2D geometry features (name and stamp). Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Select a 2D element on the CATDrawing you opened. 2. Select the Edit->Properties command and click the Feature Properties tab. You can also right click the 2D element and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu.
3. If needed, click the More switch. 4. Enter a new name for the element in the field. The information displayed concerns the creation of the elements. 5. Click the Graphic Tab, Lines and Curves option, Pickable option and Layers options are available. For settings, see Editing Element Graphic Properties.
5. Click OK.
Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit graphic properties. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. 1. Select a 2D element on the CATDrawing you opened. 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Graphic tab. You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu. 3. If needed, click the More switch. 4. If needed, modify the available options:
Fill: r you can color the selected element and set the filling transparency. Edges: r it allows you to define edges colors, thickness and the type of line (dotted,
dashed, etc.), see Graphic Properties Toolbar.

q
Lines and Curves: r it allows you to define lines and curves colors, thickness and the type of line (dotted, dashed, etc.), see Graphic Properties Toolbar. Show, Pick and Layers: r you can choose if the element will be shown or not (check/uncheck Shown option)
r
you can activate or deactivate Pickable mode, if you uncheck it geometry will not be selectable anymore, see Pick/No Pick mode. you can choose a layer for the selected geometry.
5. Click OK. For more information on graphic properties, please refer to Infrastructure User's guide.
Pick/No Pick mode

When you create elements using the No Pick mode (Pickable option unchecked), q If you want to make one or several elements pickable back again, perform as follows: 1. Select Edit -> Search from the menu bar and select the element(s) to be modified from the Search dialog box. 2. Select Edit -> Properties option from the menu bar and check the Pickable option from the Properties dialog box.
q
If you want to make all the elements on a sheet or in a view pickable back again, perform as follows: 1. Click the sheet or the view(s) to be applied the Pick mode from the specification tree. 2. Select the Force Pick Mode option from the contextual menu.
Graphic Properties Toolbar

You can also modify the graphic properties using the Graphic Properties toolbar.
The Graphic Properties toolbar allows modifying the following graphical options: q the line color
q q
the line type the line weight copying objects (Copy Object Format icon the pattern (Pattern Chooser option ) This option displays the Pattern dialog box: )
Care when you assign graphical attributes to a line (for example, make it thick and red). When you turn this red thick line into a construction line (from the contextual menu: Object.Line -> Definition..., Construction line option in the Line Definition dialog box), the line will become a dotted gray line. Even though you then decide to make it a standard line back again (by un-checking the Construction line option), the line will have lost its "red" and "thickness" attributes and will be assigned its original attributes.
Editing Pattern Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit pattern properties. Patterns are used for area fills or, in a Generative Drafting context, when cutting through material in section views/cuts or breakout views, for example.
Open the GenDrafting_Edit_Pattern_Properties.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the pattern be modified. For the purpose of our scenario, select the hatching pattern in the Section view.
2. Select Edit-> Properties. You can also right-click the pattern and then select Properties from the displayed contextual menu. 3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Pattern tab.
4. If you want to define your own pattern, choose a pattern type from the Type dropdown list. The types available depend on the standard used by the drawing. Or if you want to choose from the various patterns available, click the [...] button. This will display the pattern chooser, from which you can make your selection. 5. Select your options as required.
The options available depend on the type of pattern you selected, as well as on the standard used by the drawing. Hatching q Number of hatchings: Defines the number of different hatchings to use in this pattern. A tab will be created for each hatching, to let you define each one individually. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard.
q q q q
Angle: For each hatching this pattern, specifies the angle value in degrees. Pitch: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the pitch in millimeters. Offset: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the offset in millimeters. Color: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the color. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. Linetype: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the linetype. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. Thickness: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the linetype thickness. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. Preview: Lets you preview the resulting hatching pattern.
Dotting q Pitch: Specifies the dotting pitch in millimeters.

q q q
Color: Specifies the dotting color. Zigzag: Specifies whether dotting should zigzag. Preview: Lets you preview the resulting dotting pattern.
Coloring q Color: Specifies the color.

q
Preview: Lets you preview the resulting coloring pattern.
Image q Browse button: Lets you select the image to use for this pattern. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. You can only use the images defined by the administrator. These images are available from the pattern chooser (click the [...] button).
q q q
Angle: Specifies the angle value in degrees. Scale: Specifies the scale. Preview: Lets you preview the original image (not the result after modifying the angle and scale).
When editing the properties of a pattern associated with a part material, the software offers its own selection of patterns, and not the patterns defined in the standard.
6. Click OK.
Graphic Properties Toolbar

You can also modify pattern properties using the Pattern icon Properties toolbar. on the Graphic
This option displays the Pattern dialog box:
Editing Annotation Font Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit annotation font properties. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a free text, for example. 1. Double-click the text to switch it to edit mode. 2. Select the whole text (you can also select only part of the text) and then select the Edit-> Properties command. You can also right-click on the selected text and then choose Properties from the contextual menu. 3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Font tab. The associated panel is displayed.
Font, Style, Size, Underline and Color: choose the font, size, style and color of the text, and underline it. Attributes: draw a line through (Strikethrough) or above (Overline) the selected text, and make it superscript or subscript.
You can either underline or overline a text, but you cannot do both. Character: r Ratio: modify character size.
r r r
Slant: modify character slant (for italic text, slant=15 deg). Spacing: change the spacing between characters. Pitch: set a fixed or a variable pitch. As an example, create the free text "Tools" and apply the font ROM1.
Fixed Pitch
Variable Pitch
The Slant and Pitch options are available only for stroke fonts. Clicking the More button will display extra options, if any are available. 4. Modify the available options as required. 5. Click OK. For more information on font properties, please refer to the Infrastructure User's guide.
Changing Character Ratio and Spacing

In this task, you will learn how to change the character ratio and spacing of a portion of text, but it is also possible to change these for a whole text. Create a free text. 1. Double-click the text to switch it to edit mode.
2. Select a portion of text and right-click it.
3. Click Properties in the menu that appears. The Properties dialog box appears. 4. Click the Font tab. 5. In the Character area, increase or decrease the value in the Ratio field to change the character ratio.
5. Modify the value in the Spacing field to change the character spacing.
6. Click OK to validate your changes. The text is updated.
Making Text Superscript or Subscript

In this task, you will learn how to make a text superscript, how to make a text subscript, and how to specify their position. Create a free text.
1. Double-click the text to switch it to edit mode. 2. Type a text, "subscript" for example, after the text you created previously.
3. Select the piece of text you just typed and right-click it.
4. Click Properties in the menu that appears. The Properties dialog box appears. 5. Click the Font tab. 6. In the Attributes area, select the Subscript check box.
7. Click OK to validate your changes. The selected text is made subscript. 8. Now type another text, "superscript" for example, after the existing text. For the moment, the new text takes on the properties of the subscript text in front of it.
9. Select the piece of text you just typed and right-click it.
10. Repeat steps 4 and 5. 11. In the Attributes area, select the Superscript check box (instead of Subscript) and click OK. The selected text is made superscript. 12. For the purpose of this exercise, you will now align the subscript and superscript texts and set their offset and size. To do this, select the whole text and right-click it.
The offset defines the vertical position of the superscript or subscript text from the baseline of the text. The size defines the height of the superscript or subscript text. Both values are expressed as a percentage of the font size.
13. Click Properties in the menu that appears. 14. In the Properties dialog box, click the Text tab. 15. In the Options area, select the Back Field check box to align the texts.
16. Increase or decrease the values for the superscript and subscript texts in the Offset and Size fields to set the offset and size. 17. Click OK to validate. The subscript and superscript texts are now aligned and set as defined.
This functionality does not always work when the text is wrapped.
Editing Text Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, modify text color, position and/or orientation. You will also learn how to specify the text display mode. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create an annotation such as a free text, for example.
1. Select the annotation you just created. (For the purpose of this exercise, you select a free text, but you could also select any other type of annotation.) 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command. You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual menu. 3. Click the Text tab. The associated panel is displayed.
Frame: you can choose a frame type for the selected text that is to say rectangle, triangle, circle, etc. You can specify the color, line thickness and line type for the frame in the associated fields. Position: r Anchor Point: you can change the text position in relation to the anchor point.
r r r
Justification: you can specify a justification for the text: left, center or right. X, Y: you can modify anchor point coordinates. Anchor Mode: it allows you to position the anchor line to the character Top and Bottom or to the character Cap or Base.
Line Spacing Mode: you can choose the spacing mode between to line of characters. As an example, create the following free text:
Now, select base to cap option in the combo box. The spacing between the two lines will be between the base of first line characters and cap of second line characters:
Line spacing: you can increase or decrease the spacing between two lines of characters. Word wrap: allows you to wrap the text in a width you specify.
When you create a free text, the anchor point is the point you click in free space to define a location for the free text.
q
Orientation: specify a text orientation. r Reference: choose Sheet to use the sheet as the reference for the text orientation, or View / 2D Component to use the view or 2D component as the reference for the text orientation.
r
Orientation: the text is oriented according to the chosen reference; choose Horizontal to position it horizontally, Vertical to position it vertically or Fixed Angle to position it using a fixed angle. Angle: if you choose Fixed Angle for Orientation, you can define the orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Mirroring: specify whether you want to apply a mirroring to the selected text, and what kind of mirroring, or if the text should flip automatically in such a way that it will always be in a readable position.
Options: r Display Units: in a text containing parameters with units, displays these units.
r
Apply scale: applies the scale of the view or of the 2D reference component to the display of the text.
If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the Apply Scale property and the Create with a constant size setting (in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab): the size of both the 2D component and its text will then be independent from the view scale.
r r
Back Field: aligns superscript and subscript texts above one another. Blank Background: specifies that the text background should be blanked when the text is displayed over a pattern or over a picture. Superscript: increase or decrease the values for the superscript texts in the Offset and Size fields to set the offset and size. Subscript: increase or decrease the values for the subscript texts in the Offset and Size fields to set the offset and size. Display: specifies a display mode for the text.
4. Click the More switch button to check if extra options are available. 5. Modify the available options as required. 6. Click OK.
Specifying the Text Display Mode

In this task, you will learn how to specify the display mode for the text. For the purpose of this exercise, you will use a text with a leader and a frame, but this feature is also available with text only, as well as with dimension texts. Create a text with a leader and a frame.
1. Select the text and right-click it. 2. Click Properties in the menu that appears. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Text tab. 4. In the Options area, choose the display mode you want for your text from the Display list. You have the following options:
Show Value: displays the text, and (when applicable) its leader and its frame. This option is selected by default.
Show Box: replaces the text and (when applicable) its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader.
Hide Value: hides the text and (when applicable) its frame but (when applicable) displays its leader.
5. Click OK to validate. The text is now displayed using the mode you set.
If you select Hide Value as the display mode for a text with no leader, the text will not be visible at all on your drawing. You can find all hidden texts in a drawing using advanced Search options. To do this, choose Edit -> Search, click the Advanced tab. Select Drafting from the Workbench list, Text from the Type list, Display from the Attributes list. In the dialog box that appears, select = and Hide Value and then click OK. Click the Search button. All hidden texts are listed.
In the case of dimensions, the display modes are as shown below: q Show Value: displays the dimension and its leader. This option is selected by default.
Show Box: replaces the dimension by a rectangular box and displays its leader.
Hide Value: hides the dimension but displays its leader.
Editing Dimension Text Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension text properties. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select a dimension (whatever the type) on the CATDrawing you opened. 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Dimension Texts tab. You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu. 3. If needed, click the More switch. 4. If needed, modify the available options.
Prefix - Suffix: you can insert either a symbol or a text before the dimension text or a text after the dimension text.
You can not insert a prefix and a suffix. If you want to remove the symbol before the dimension text, select this symbol:
q
Associated Texts: you can insert texts before, after, below and above the main and the dual value.
Dimension texts positioning:
Dimension score options: you can choose to score only the value, all dimension texts or not to score (for Main Value and/or Dual Value). Dimension frame options: you can choose to include in the frame Value+tolerance +texts or Value+tolerance or Value for Main Value, Dual Value or both.
5. Click OK.
Editing Dimension Value Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension value properties. Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select a dimension (whatever the type) on the CATDrawing you opened. 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Value tab. You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu. 3. If needed, click the More switch. 4. If needed, modify the available options.
Dimension Type: check Driving if you want projected dimensions to drive geometry. If you want to key in a value for the driving dimension, you must close Properties dialog box, double-click the dimension in the drawing, check Drive geometry and key in a value. Value Orientation: you can choose q the value orientation reference (Screen, View or Dimension Line),
q q q q
the value orientation (Parallel, Perpendicular or Fixed Angle), the orientation angle if Fixed Angle is selected in orientation, the value position (Auto, Inside or Outside), the value offset in relation to the dimension line.
Dual Value: you can show dual value checking Show dual value option and choose its location. Format: you can set Main value and Dual value format. q Description: select a type of format.
q q q
Display: choose to display one, two or three factors. Format: choose fractional or decimal format. Precision: select the value precision.
For chamfer, you can set Description, Display and Format in chamfer tab. Fake Dimension: check this option to display fake dimensions, you can choose to display numerical or alphanumerical fake dimensions. Text limitation: eight characters. If you need to insert a text containing more than eight characters: q leave the dimension text blank (for this, you can create a blank fake dimension),
q
create an associated text.
5. Click OK.
Editing Dimension Tolerance Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension tolerance properties. There are different types of tolerances:
q
Numerical tolerances Alphanumerical tolerances
Combined tolerances (an alphanumerical value and two numerical values): ISOCOMB tolerance.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select the diameter dimension. 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Tolerance tab. You can also right-click the dimension and then select the Properties command from the displayed contextual menu. 3. You can associate a tolerance to the selected dimension. In this example, choose ISOALPH1 in the Main Value field. The First value field is enabled and displays an alphanumerical value. The corresponding numerical equivalents are displayed in the Upper value and Lower value fields. (These equivalents are defined by standards.)
4. Assign the desired tolerance to this dimension by selecting another alphanumerical value. In this example, select H9 in the First value field. The corresponding numerical numerical equivalents are automatically displayed.
5. In some cases, you may wish to display another tolerance. In this case, select a tolerance type in the Dual Value field. If you choose the same tolerance type for main and for dual value, then the values for this tolerance will also be the same.
6. Click OK. For dimensions with alphanumerical tolerances, you can display the corresponding numerical equivalents in the drawing, simply by placing the cursor over the dimension value in the drawing. The numerical equivalents are displayed in a tooltip.
Editing Dimension Extension Line Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension extension line properties. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select the dimension you created (whatever the type). 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command. You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual menu. 3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Extension Line tab. The associated panel is displayed.
q q q
Color: choose a color for the extension line. Thickness: specify the thickness of the extension line. Display first extension line: check to display or uncheck to hide the first extension line, when applicable. Display second extension line: check to display or uncheck to hide the second extension line, when applicable. Slant: set the slant angle for the extension line. This angle is contained between 90 degrees and -90 degrees excluded, the default angle being 0 degree.
This functionality works only on linear dimension line and the line linking extension line anchor points (blanking excluded) has to be parallel to the dimension line, as shown below.
Extremities: it allows you to increase or decrease extension line Overrun and Blanking.
Overrun is the overrun minimum value. As an example, for a cumulated dimension (for ISO Standard):
You can increase the overrun size
You cannot decrease it below the minimum value
To set extension line length and text position for cumulated dimensions, use the CUMLExtMode dimension parameter in the standards.
Funnel: to insert a funnel, you must check this option. You can configure the funnel: r the Height,
r r r
the Angle, the Width, the funnel mode: external or internal
External Funnel Mode

q
Internal Funnel Mode
the Funnel side allows you to apply funnel only on one extension line or both of them.
You cannot create interruptions on funneled dimension lines. 4. Modify the available options as required. 5. Click OK.
Editing Dimension Line Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension line properties. Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example. 1. Select the dimension you just created (whatever the type). 2. Select the Edit-> Properties command. You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual menu. 3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Dimension Line tab. The associated panel is displayed. Not all fields are active: their activation depends on your choice of options.
Representation Specify how you want the dimension line represented: Regular, Two Parts, Leader one Part, Leader two Parts. Color Choose a color for the dimension line. Thickness Specify the thickness of the dimension line. Second part If you chose Two parts or Leader two Parts for the representation, you need to provide information about the second leader part: q the Reference for positioning the second part of the dimension line,
q
the Orientation for the secondary part of the dimension line in relation to its reference, the Angle for the secondary part of the dimension line in relation to its reference (if you selected Dimension Line in the Orientation field and Fixed Angle in the Reference field).
Extension Choose an extension type for your dimension line. Leader Angle Specify the angle you want for the extension line. Symbols Choose the properties you want to apply to Symbol 1, Symbol 2 (you may need to check this box to specify you want to the dimension to display two symbols), and Leader Symbol (if you chose to represent the dimension line with a leader). q Shape: you can choose the dimension line shape (arrow, circle, plus, etc.).
q q q
Color: you can choose the symbols color. Thickness: you can define the symbol thickness. Reversal: set the position of the symbols (inside or outside) in relation to the extension line.
In the case of two-symbols dimensions, you can specify a different position for each symbol (i.e. symbol 1 inside and symbol 2 outside, or vice-versa). You can also this interactively using the Ctrl key. You can apply different kinds of modifications between arrow symbol 1 and symbol 2 on the condition the drawing was created from version 5 release 5 on. Foreshortened For radius dimensions, you can activate the Foreshortened option.
It allows you to transform a radius dimension line into a foreshortened radius dimension line. You can then choose from the following options: q Text position: specify whether the text should be positioned on the long segment or on the short segment of the dimension.
q
Orientation: define the orientation of the text associated to the dimension line (parallel or convergent). Angle: specify the angle value. Ratio: specify the ratio for the short segment and the long segment of the foreshortened dimension. Point scale: specify the point scale value. Unfix extremity position: check this box to unfix the extremity point of the foreshortened dimension line. You will then be able to move the extremity point using a yellow manipulator.
q q
For foreshortened radius dimensions, you can define the appearance of the extremity point by making sure the Symbol 2 box in the Symbols area is checked, and then choosing the appropriate options.
Clicking the More button will display extra options, if any are available.
4. Modify the available options as required. For example, from the Representation drop-down list, choose Leader two Parts.
5. In the Leader Angle field, specify the angle you want between the two parts of the leader.
This angle is applied to the first segment:
You can also drive the second segment from the options in the Second Part area: it can be horizontal, vertical, parallel, perpendicular, fixed angle with screen, view, or dimension horizontal and vertical. 6. Change the Leader symbol in Symbols-> Shape. Choose Double Filled Arrow, for example.
7. Transform this two parts leader into a one part leader: from the Representation drop-down list, choose Leader one Part.
8. Click OK.
Editing 2D Component Instance Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit information on instantiated 2D component properties. Open the Position_Component03.CATDrawing document. 1. Right-click on the Instance to access the contextual menu. 2. Select Properties command and click the 2D Component tab. You can modify the 2D component instance position and orientation:
You can also select the instance and go to Edit -> Properties command and click the 2D Component tab. q Location: It allows you to access to the instance location and the origin of the 2D component it was instantiated from.
q
Position and orientation: you can modify detail instantiated 2D component coordinates, angle with horizontal reference axis and scale.
3. Click OK.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Images
Images
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you add images to Drafting sheets as well as edit them. Insert images Insert raster or vector images in a drawing. Edit images Edit raster images using the raster editor, or view information about vector images. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Inserting Images (Raster or Vector)

This functionality allows you to insert images on every operating system. It is useful for V4 Drawings translation. In this task, we will see how to insert raster (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.tif, etc.) or vector images (*.cgm. *.gl, *.gl2) as native V5 Drafting elements. The scenario below provides an example using a raster image, but the procedure is the same for vector images.
Define a new sheet and a view. Insert a frame title block, choose the Drawing_Titleblock_Samples1. Save the logo.tif document on your computer (to do this, right-click on "logo.tif" and choose Save Target As in the contextual menu).
1. Select the Insert -> Picture command.
A dialog box appears, allowing you to browse your disk. 2. Select the file "logo.gif" you have previously imported. The image is imported in your drawing. 3. Click on the image to select it. Scaling manipulators appear. Drag one of the
manipulators to decrease the picture size.
You get this:
The image is a native V5 Drafting element, it is positioned by default at the origin of the view. The anchor point of the picture corresponds to its lower left-hand corner.
q
In the Properties dialog box available from the image's contextual menu, on the Picture tab, check the Lock aspect ratio option to make sure images will keep their ratio aspect. If the previous option is unchecked, use the Ctrl key to keep the picture ratio aspect. Use the Shift key to snap to the grid.
q q
4. Drag the image to the required position.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Editing Raster Images

In this task, you will learn how to edit raster images (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.tif, etc.) inserted in a drawing. Save the logo.tif document on your computer (to do this, right-click on "logo.tif" and choose Save Target As in the contextual menu) and insert it in your drawing. 1. Double-click on the raster image. The Image Editor dialog box is displayed.
2. Edit the image as wanted. For more information on how to edit images, refer to Editing Images in the Album in the Infrastructure User's Guide. 3. When you are done, click OK. The image is updated in the drawing.
Viewing information about vector images

You cannot edit vector images (*.cgm. *.gl, *.gl2) inserted in a drawing, but you can, however, view information about them. To do this, simply double-click on a vector image in a drawing. This will display the Image information dialog box. To exit the dialog box when you are done reviewing the image-related information, click OK.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Data Exchange
Data Exchange
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you export and import different types of files.
Note that these tasks, which deal with data exchange, are actually documented in the Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide.
DXF/DWG: Import Import or insert the 2D geometric data contained in a DXF or DWG file into a CATDrawing document. DXF/DWG: Export Export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a DXF file. DXF/DWG: Report File Learn more about the report file. DXF/DWG: Trouble Shooting Learn how to troubleshoot DXF/DWG import and export. DXF/DWG: Best Practices Learn best practices for DXF/DWG import and export. DXF/DWG: FAQ Get answers to Frequently Asked Questions about DXF/DWG import and export. DXF/DWG: VBScript Macros Learn about DXF/DWG import and export macros. CGM: Insertion Insert a CGM file into a CATDrawing document. CGM: Export Export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a CGM file. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
DXF/DWG: Import
Importing a DXF/DWG file into a CATDrawing

This task lets you quickly see how to import or to insert the 2D geometric data contained in a DXF file into a CATDrawing document. Once imported, the data can be handled and edited just as if they had been created in a Drafting session using 2D geometry creation commands. The table entitled What about the elements you import ? provides information on the entities you can import. You can find further information in the Advanced Tasks: q Trouble Shooting,
q
Best Practices, FAQ, VBScript Macros
and in the Customizing DXF/DWG Settings chapter. Statistics about each import operation can be found in the report file created. Open your session (Open your CATDrawing document if you want to insert a DXF file.). 1. To import an existing DXF/DWG file, select the File-> Open items. The File Selection dialog box is displayed: 2. Select the.dxf/.dwg extension from the field called Files of type. All .dxf/.dwg files contained in the selected directory are now displayed. 1. To insert a DXF/DWG file in an existing CATDrawing document, select the Tools -> Import External Format. The File Selection dialog box is displayed:
3. Click the .dxf/.dwg file of your choice. For example, click the draw1.dxf file. 4. Click Open.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugbt0301.htm (1 of 6)10/19/2004 4:14:55 PM
DXF/DWG: Import
In import mode, a CATDrawing file is created which contains all the geometry included in the DXF/DWG file. This .CATDrawing file becomes the current document.
In insertion mode, the geometry of the DXF/DWG file is created in a new view of the current sheet.
Import of multiple viewports and layouts

The default behavior has been improved for better results. If the model is referenced, at least partially, by one or several viewports, the model is not created in a sheet of its own. Only layouts are created. They will contain eventual viewports. CATIA does not create empty viewports or layouts.
Drafting Standard
q q
In insertion mode, the Standard of the current Drawing is inherited. In import mode, the Drawing is created automatically with the current Standard proposed at the creation of a New Drawing. If you wish to import a DXF/DWG file directly into a given Drawing Standard, create a New Drawing with this Standard before opening the DXF/DWG file. In all cases, you can switch to another Standard after the conversion.
Customization
Import of a DXF/DWG file can be improved by customization: DXF/DWG specific import settings are: q Import With Unit A DXF/DWG file does not contain its units. You must enter the unit used for the creation of the file to import it at the correct scale. See also Trouble Shooting.
q
Papers Spaces and Model Space Mappings (line type, text font, color/thickness) The lists of attributes are not the same in V5 and AutoCAD. Mapping options are used to come as close as possible to the AutoCAD attributes, or to switch them to V5 attributes.
DXF Dimensions Import Configuration The definitions of dimensions are not the same in V5 and AutoCAD. This option is used to give priority either to the graphic closeness or to the re-usability in V5.
DXF/DWG: Import
Report File
After the recovery of DXF/DWG files, the system generates:
q
a report file (name_of_file.rpt) where you can find references about the quality of the transfer
This file is created in a location referenced by

q
the CATUserSettingPath USERPROFILE variable on NT. Its default value is Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\Dassault Systemes \CATReport on NT (user being you logon id) the HOME variable on UNIX. Its default value is $HOME/CATReport on UNIX.
Always check the report file after a conversion ! Some problems may have occurred without been visually highlighted.
What About The Elements You Import ?

Version 5 supports DXF/DWG formats version 12,13, 14 and Autocad2000.
To make sure the elements you need to handle in your session are those you expected, here is a list presenting the DXF/DWG data supported when imported into a CATDrawing file.
DXF/DWG element
DXF/DWG sub-type
V5 element
Notes
Geometry point line ray xline circle arc ellipse polyline/2D polyline/ lightweight polyline non adjustable width, made of line segments Point Line None None Circle Arc Ellipse Polyline Not editable in V5
DXF/DWG: Import
non adjustable width, made of line and arc segments adjustable width fit curve mline spline 3D face 3D solid
segments and arc with no structure
Structure is lost
Filled area (pattern) Polyline Lines NURBS none none Annotations
Structure is lost
Structure and closing attributes are lost Not editable in V5
text mtext
Text Text Changing fonts, changing attributes and line break are not taken into account
Arc aligned text rtext dimensions aligned, linear and rotated, radius and diameter, angular, ordinate (x or y)
none none According to option: dimension or details or geometry+texts See dimensions In a few "dimensions" cases, the text of the dimension can be a text with an associative link In all "dimensions" cases, the geometry support is in No Show
leader
Line + text
DXF Leaders are imported as simple lines. The arrow head and the line under the text are lost
tolerance hatch non-associative
none Filled area (pattern)
DXF/DWG: Import
associative
Filled area (pattern)
The contour of the hatch is created in the No Show and the associativity is created with this hidden contour.
solid block attribute
Filled area (colored) Text Structures
block
Detail
The details are created in a new Detail Sheet named "Imported Details". If the insert is defined with different scales, on x-axis and y-axis, no detail instance is created but only the geometry is transferred.
insert (Block Reference)
Ditto
group
none
The structure of the group is lost whereas its contents is transferred see above see above
viewport Layout (paper space) OLE frame proxy region
View Sheet none none none Attributes
color Line weight line type point markers
Color Line weight Line type Point type
see mapping see mapping see mapping Markers may be different since V5 and AutoCAD do not have the same markers.
DXF/DWG: Import
layer
Layer
Invisible layers are gathered in a filter named Invisible Imported Layers. Visible layers are gathered in a filter named Visible Imported Layers.
font Pattern BYBlock attribute
Font Pattern Attribute
see mapping Automatic mapping The value of the attribute of the block is set to a default value
BYLAYER attribute
Attribute
The value of the attribute of the layer is applied to each element imported
[ Up ] [ Next ]
DXF/DWG: Best Practices
DXF/DWG: Best Practices

Import
Quality of conversion
Always check the report file after a conversion ! Some problems may have occurred without been visually highlighted.
When importing a DXF/DWG file, the display of small entities may depend on zoom factor. To see the complete Drawing regardless of their size: 1. Go to the Tools->Options->General->Display->Performance tab. 2. Switch the value of Level of detail/static to zero. All geometries become visible. For more information, see Performance.
Export
None [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugat0302.htm10/19/2004 4:15:59 PM
DXF/DWG: FAQ
DXF/DWG: FAQ
Import
q q
Question: How are Real dimensions dealt with?

r r
Answer: The semantic import option manages all kind of dimensions except: ordinate dimensions, rotated dimensions with a fixed angles other than horizontal or vertical.
q q
Question: There is some inconsistency between graphic and semantic import: Answer:There may be an inconsistency between the results of dimensions imported with the semantic preserving option and with the graphic preserving option. This is generally due to an inconsistency in the DXF/DWG file itself (the aspect is different in AutoCAD14 and AutoCAD2000). This happens with files that have not been generated with AutoCAD. Usually, the graphic mode should be used, but only the author of the file can confirm it. Question: The R of a radius dimension is a conglomerate of a P with a small \: Answer:The DXF model is probably the result of a graphic export. In this case, texts are no real texts but geometry. Question: There is a problem of alignment of DIMtext to DIMline: Answer:This occurs while opening a DXF file created with ANSI standard using an ISO standard (or vice-versa). Since V5R8-SP2, the current Standard of creation of a New Drawing is taken into account when opening a DXF file with semantic dimensions. So it is possible to by-pass this problem. Since V5R9, texts of dimensions without overloaded text and without tolerance are imported directly as DIMtext instead of texts with positional link, avoiding thus the problem of positioning.
q q
q q
By-pass:
1. Create a New Drawing (menu File/New...). A dialod box appears to choose the standard. If the proposed standard is the one you required, cancel the command: the current standard is already set to the proper value. 2. Otherwise, if you require another standard, select it and click OK. A new drawing is created with this standard. Close this Drawing: the new current standard is memorized. 3. Then open a DXF/DWG file: the current standard will be taken into account.
q q
Question: Hatches: The result of import is a geometry instead of a filled area: Answer:The original DXF/DWG file does not contain real hatches but geometry (or old R12 hatches, i.e. blocks). Real hatches are mapped automatically.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugat0303.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 4:16:07 PM
DXF/DWG: FAQ
q q
Question: Fonts: Problems with , , ... characters:

r
Answer: Use the settings to map AutoCAD and the fonts you use.
True Type fonts on NT provide the same fonts in your system and AutoCAD.
q q
Question: Fonts:Texts are larger than their frame: Answer: a scale factor is available in the font mapping. Question: The entities visible are not those expected: Answer: All DXF/DWG invisible layers are gathered in a CATIA V5 filter named Invisible Imported Layers. All DXF/DWG visible layers are gathered in a CATIA V5 filter named Visible Imported Layers. If the expected entities are not visible, activate the Visible Imported Layers filter, or if too many entities are visible, activate the Invisible Imported Layers filter.
q q q q
Export
None
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugat0303.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 4:16:07 PM
CGM: Insertion
Inserting a CGM file into a CATDrawing

This task will show you how to insert a cgm file into a CATDrawing document. Open your session. Open your CATDrawing document 1. Select the Tools-> Import External Format item. The Import dialog box is displayed: 2. Select the .cgm extension from the field called Files of type.
3. Click the CGM file of your choice. 4. Click Open.
If you use the command File -> Open (you must select the .cgm extension from the field called Files of type), you only browse the CGM files.
CGM: Insertion
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Print
Print
The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to print one or more sheets inserted in your document. See Printing documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide for classic printing.
Print a document quickly Quickly print a given sheet. Print a document after modifying current display settings Modify the settings of a document you will then print. Print using a clipping operator Print using a clipping operator with scaling support. Lets you print only a part of a drawing. [ Back ] [ Up ]
Printing a Document Quickly

This task will show you how to quickly print a given sheet. When printing a sheet, the current filter and layers (those used for screen display) are taken into account. For more details on layers and filters, see Infrastructure User's Guide. Open a CATDrawing document. Create a circle, a line and a profile on this document.
1. Select File -> Print Preview from the menu bar. The Print Preview dialog box is displayed.
2. Press OK. 3. Select File -> Print from the menu bar. The Print dialog box displays. 4. Click the required options from the box. 5. Press OK.
You may print either all or given sheets (the sheet selected or a given number of existing sheets). You may also print the views currently displayed on your screen (Current display option).
You may also choose the number of copies you need to print. Fitting choice provides the following options:
q
: Assigns the best orientation to the views to be printed. : Prints keeping the printer options. : Clips the drawing representation to the sheet format.
For details on Options, see Infrastructure User's guide Version 5.
By default the sheet to be printed will Fit to Printer Format. The printer default format will be used whatever the sheet format. Let's say the printer format is Portrait. If you check the options as described below, the sheet will be previewed and printed as follows.
Best Orientation/Fit to printer format/Clip to the sheet format
Fit to printer format/Clip to the sheet format
Clip to the sheet format
Best orientation/Clip to the sheet format
Let's start from a new drawing:
Best Orientation/Fit to printer format/Clip to the sheet format
Best Orientation/Fit to printer format
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Printing a Document After Modifying Current Display Settings

This task shows how to modify the settings of a document you will then print. Create views on different sheets with the Landscape orientation. 1. Select File -> Print from the menu bar. The Print dialog box is displayed. 2. Click the required Printer options from the dialog box. 3. Activate the Current display option. 4. Click the Options option from the box.
5. If needed, select the Color tab.
6. If needed, select the Banner tab.
7. If needed, select the Various tab. 8. Click OK.
9. Click the Settings option from the Print dialog box. The Layout dialog box is displayed. 10. De-activate the Fit in Page option. 11. For example, click the center switch for positioning the sheet at the center of the previewed layout. 12. Press OK.
13. Select the Print Preview option from the Print dialog box. The Print Preview dialog box is displayed. 14. Press OK. The Print dialog box is displayed. 15. Press OK to launch the printing operation.
Printing using a Clipping Operator

This task will show you how to print using a clipping operator with scaling support. Open the Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document. 1. Select File -> Print 2. In the Print Dialog Box, choose Selection in Print Area. It activate the select mode button and allows you to select the area to print.
3. Click on the select mode button Print Area.
and drag the cursor on the drawing to define the
4. Click ok to print the area.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Advanced Tasks
Advanced Tasks
Advanced tasks deal with using Knowledgeware tools in the Interactive Drafting workbench. The information you will find in this section is listed below: Deactivating Annotations Deactivating Table Rows Adding Attribute Links to Text Setting Relations Between Dimensional Constraints Text Templates
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugat0000.htm10/19/2004 4:17:48 PM
Deactivating Annotations
This task explains how to deactivate/activate annotations using Knowledgeware tools. This feature enables you to specify whether an annotation should be active or not, using what is known as an Activity parameter. Deactivated annotations are not taken into account anymore. Deactivating dimensions, for example, enables you to avoid problems when some dimensions cannot be computed anymore (e.g. when geometry has been deleted). In this scenario, you will see how to deactivate dimensions, but you can also deactivate texts, balloons, welding symbols and geometrical tolerances. For more information on using Knowledgeware capabilities, refer to the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. Open the Deactivating_annotations.CATDrawing document. It contains three views, each of which shows a number of dimensions.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugat0101.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 4:18:08 PM
1. Click the Design Table icon box is displayed.
in the Knowledge toolbar. The Creation of a Design Table dialog
2. If needed, replace the default name and comment for the design table. 3. Check the Create a design table with current parameter values option. 4. Check the Horizontal orientation option.
5. Click OK. The Select parameters to insert dialog box is displayed. 6. In the Parameters to insert list, you can notice that there are Activity parameters for a number of annotations (dimensions and texts, in this specific case). For the purpose of this scenario, select all of the Activity parameters for dimensions: the Sheet.1 \Front view\DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activity, Sheet.1\Top view\DrwDressUp.1 \Dimension.#\Activity and Sheet.1\Left view\DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activity items. Then, click the right arrow to add these items to the Inserted parameters list.
7. Click OK. A Save As dialog box is displayed. 8. Specify a path and filename for the design table to be created. Click OK in the file selection dialog box. The design table feature is added to the specification tree and a dialog box displays the newly created design table. This design table contains only one configuration, on line 1. By default, all dimensions are active (their Activity parameters are set to "true").
9. Click the Edit table... button to start an Excel application (under Windows NT) or open the text editor (under Unix). 10. In column C, set each item to "false". 11. In column D, set each Sheet.1\Front view\DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activity item to Sheet.1\Top view\DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activityand Sheet.1\Left view \DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activity item to "true". This will enable you to deactivate some of the dimensions while keeping other dimensions active.
12. Save your Excel or .txt file and close your application. An information message is displayed to let you know that the design table was updated; click Close. The design table now contains 3 configurations. 13. You can now select another configuration in the Design table dialog box. Select line 3, for instance, and click Apply. You can notice that the dimensions in the front view are deactivated, while the dimensions in the other views remain active.
14. Click OK to exit the dialog box and add the design table to the document.
The only way you can display deactivated annotations is by reactivating them through Knowledgeware (i.e. by setting their Activity parameter to "true"). You can also deactivate/activate annotations using formulas. For more information about formulas, refer to the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. You can also see Deactivating Table Rows in this User's Guide for a scenario on using formulas to deactivate rows in a table.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Deactivating Table Rows

This task explains how to deactivate/activate (i.e. hide or display) table rows using Knowledgeware tools. This feature enables you to specify whether a row should be active or not, using what is known as an Activity parameter. For more information on using Knowledgeware capabilities, refer to the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.
Open the Gear-Reducer-with-BOM.CATDrawing document. It contains three tables (actually, three bills of material).
1. Select the table called "Bill of Material: GEAR REDUCER".
2. Click the Formula icon in the Knowledge toolbar. The Formulas:Table.1 dialog box is displayed. It displays the formula parameters and the Activity parameters corresponding to the selected table (Table.1). 3. In the parameters list, select the first Activity parameter, i.e. the Sheet.1\Isometric view \DrwDressUp.1\Table.1\Text.1\Activity item. 4. In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, change the parameter value to "false".
5. Repeat this operation for the second Activity parameter in the list, i.e. the Sheet.1\Isometric view\DrwDressUp.1\Table.1\Text.6\Activity item. 6. Click Apply. The table is updated: its title row and header row are hidden.
7. Using the same method, reset the Activity parameters you just modified to their original value "true", in order to display the table title row and header row again.
8. Now, set the Sheet.1\Isometric view\DrwDressUp.1\Table.1\Text.21\Activity item to "false", and click Apply. The table is updated and the corresponding row is hidden.
9. Click OK to exit the dialog box and validate your changes.
The only way you can display deactivated rows is by reactivating them through Knowledgeware (i. e. by setting their Activity parameters to "true"). You can also deactivate/activate rows using design tables. For more information about design tables, refer to the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. You can also see Deactivating Annotations in this User's Guide for a scenario on using design tables to deactivate annotations.
Adding Attribute Links to Text

This task shows you how to add one or more attribute links to text. In a first example, we will create an attribute link between a hole on the 3D part and the corresponding text in a CATDrawing view. In a second example, we will assign an attribute an attribute link to a view.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document and the GenDrafting_part_02. CATDrawing document.
1. Double-click the text to which you want to add a link.
2. Right-click on the text in the drawing and select the Attribute Link option from the contextual menu.
3. Select the object which you want the text to be linked to, from the specification tree (either from the 3D or from the CATDrawing document).
For example, select Hole 2 from the CATPart specification tree.
The Attribute Link Panel dialog box appears:
4. Select the "Part1\PartBody\Hole.2\Diameter displayed.
8.5mm" attribute from the list
The 8.5mm attribute automatically appears both in the Text Editor dialog box and on the CATDrawing.
5. Modify the diameter of Hole 2 on the CATPart. For example, modify the hole diameter into 13.5mm.
This modification is automatically updated on both the views generated on the CATDrawing and the linked text attribute inserted inside the text, on the condition you select automatic update mode in the Options dialog box (Tools->Options>Mechanical Design-> Part Design options, General tab).
At this step, you can perform a query on the link (s) you just created. For this, click the view and select the Query Objects Links option from the contextual menu.
The Query Link Panel appears which displays a list with the existing links.
Of course, you can only modify the text that is not text attribute type. To modify the text attribute, you need to isolate this text. For this: 6. Right-click the text attribute. 7. Select the Isolate Text option from the contextual menu.
Open the GenDrafting_part_02.CATDrawing document.
Create the formula:
1. Click the Formula icon
from the Standard toolbar.
The Formulas: Drawing dialog box appears:
2. Create a parameter called NameOfUser.

Define the Text Attribute:
3. Click the Text icon
from the Annotations toolbar and click in the free space.
4. Right-click the empty text and select the Attribute Link option from the contextual menu.
5. Select the object which you want the text to be linked to, from the specification tree. For example, select the CATDrawing document (very top of the specification tree).
Modify the Text Attribute:
The attribute appears on the drawing:
6. Modify the parameter by clicking the Formula icon double-clicking the parameter and editing it.
from the Standard toolbar,
7. Enter the new value for the username attribute. For example, NewNameOfUser.
8. Click OK.
The linked attribute now appears. In other words, it is automatically updated.
Setting Relations Between Dimensional Constraints

This task shows you how to set constraints between dimension using formulas. As a result, if you modify one of these dimensions (the driving dimension), all the other dimensions as well as the geometry will be modified accordingly. Open the Brackets_views04.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Formula icon from the Standard toolbar.
The Formulas dialog box appears.
You will now select, one after the other, the dimensions to be constrained and then enter in the dialog box the formulas to be used.
2. Select a first dimension (1). 3. Press the Add Formula switch in the Formulas dialog box. The Formula Editor dialog box appears.
4. Select a second dimension (3) and add "/4". Then, click OK (Formula Editor dialog box). 5. Select a first dimension (2).
6. Press the Add Formula switch in the Formulas dialog box. The Formula Editor dialog box appears.
7. Select a second dimension (3) and add "*3 /4". Then, click OK (Formula Editor dialog box).
10. Select a second dimension (1) and then, click OK (Formula Editor dialog box).
13. Select a second dimension (2) and then, click OK (Formula Editor dialog box). 14. Click OK ( Formulas dialog box). Note that the specification tree is modified accordingly.
15. Double-click the dimension to be set as driving dimension (3). The Dimension Value dialog box appear.
16. If needed, activate the Drive geometry option. 17. Enter 100mm as dimension new length and press OK. All the dimensions which you previously constrained using formulas are automatically updated.
Text Templates
Text Templates
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you define and store text templates to be used when creating texts associated to features. Text templates rely on attributes defined in the 3D for these features.
Create text templates Define text templates associated to feature attributes defined in the 3D. Store text templates in a catalog Store in a catalog previously-defined text templates. Annotate drawings using text templates Use text templates stored in a catalog to annotate drawings.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugdr_C2/cfyugtexttemplate00.htm10/19/2004 4:18:56 PM
Creating Text Templates

This task will show you how to create text templates. Before you begin, you need to make sure that the package corresponding to the type of object for which you want to create a template is correctly loaded. For the purpose of this scenario, you will load the Product package. Go to Tools -> Options -> General -> Parameters and Measure and click on the Language tab. Check Load extended language libraries and uncheck All packages. From the Available Packages list, select ProductPackage and click on the right arrow to add it to the Packages to load list. Click OK, and then exit and re-start the software. Create a new drawing. 1. Click the Text icon from the Annotations toolbar.
2. Click anywhere in the drawing. A green frame appears, as well as the Text Editor dialog box. 3. In the Text Editor dialog box, type Part number:. 4. Without closing the Text Editor dialog box, right-click the frame and select Insert link template from the contextual menu which is displayed.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugdr_C2/cfyugtexttemplate01.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 4:19:10 PM
5. In the Insert Link Template dialog box which is displayed, select the ProductPackage dictionary, the Product type and the PartNumber attribute, and click Insert.
6. Back in the Text Editor dialog box, press the Enter key and type Revision:. 7. Back in the Insert Link Template dialog box, select the Revision attribute (leave the other fields as is), click Insert and then Close. 8. Click OK in the Text Editor dialog box. The text template is now created.
9. Make sure the text template is selected and click the Frame icon Text Properties toolbar. 10. From the Frames sub-menu, choose the Scored Rectangle frame
in the
11. Right-click the text template, and select Add Leader from the contextual menu. 12. Click in the drawing to end the leader creation. The text template is now set.
13. Right-click the text template, and select Properties from the contextual menu. 14. Click the Feature Properties tab in the Properties dialog box which is displayed. 15. In the Feature Name field, type Part number & Revision and click OK. You will use this feature name to identify this text template in the future. 16. Create another text by repeating steps 1 to 3, this time typing Part name: in the Text Editor dialog box. 17. Repeat steps 4 and 5, this time selecting the Name attribute in the Insert Link Template dialog box. 18. Click Close in the Insert Link Template dialog box and then OK in the Text Editor dialog box. The text template is now created. 19. Make sure the text template is selected and in the Graphic Properties toolbar, choose green from the Color list. The text template is now set.
20. Repeat steps 13 to 15, this time typing Part name in the Feature Name field. You will use this feature name to identify this text template in the future. 21. Select File -> Save As and save the drawing as a .CATDrawing document. Now that your text templates are defined, you need to store them in a catalog.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Storing Text Templates in a Catalog

This task will show you how to store text templates in a catalog. For more information on catalogs, refer to the Using Catalogs chapter in the Infrastructure User's Guide. Open the TextTemplates.CATDrawing document.
1. Select File -> New. 2. In the New dialog box, select CatalogDocument from the list of types and click OK. The Catalog Editor workbench is launched and a new catalog is created. 3. In the left-hand pane, double-click Chapter.1 to activate it. 4. Select Insert -> Add Family.... The Component Family Definition dialog box is displayed. 5. Type Text templates in the Name field. 6. Make sure Standard is selected in the Type field, and click OK. The family is created.
7. For more convenience, select Window -> Tile Horizontally to display your Catalog Editor and Drafting windows at once. 8. In the Drafting window, select one of the text templates, e.g. Part number & Revision. 9. In the left-hand pane of the Catalog Editor window, double-click Text templates to activate it. 10. Select Insert -> Add Component.... The Description Definition dialog box is displayed. 11. On the Reference tab, click the Select external feature button. The dialog box is updated with information about the selected text template, i.e. Part number & Revision.
12. Click OK. The selected text template is listed on the Reference tab, in the right-hand pane of the Catalog Editor window. 13. Go back to the Drafting window and select the other text templates, e.g. Part name. 14. Return to the Catalog Editor window and repeat steps 10 and 11. The dialog box is now updated with information about the Part name text template. 15. Click OK. Both selected text templates are now listed on the Reference tab, in the right-hand pane of the Catalog Editor window.
16. Select File -> Save As and save the catalog as a .catalog document.
Annotating Drawings Using Text Templates

This task will show you how to annotate drawings using text templates stored in a catalog. Before you begin, you need to make sure that the package corresponding to the type of object for which you want to create a template is correctly loaded. For the purpose of this scenario, you will load the Product package. Go to Tools -> Options -> General -> Parameters and Measure and click on the Language tab. Check Load extended language libraries and uncheck All packages. From the Available Packages list, select ProductPackage and click on the right arrow to add it to the Packages to load list. Click OK, and then exit and re-start the software. Open the GEAR-REDUCER.CATDrawing document. 1. Click the Text Template Placement icon from the Annotations toolbar.
2. In the Place Text Template dialog box, browse to select the TextTemplates.catalog document. This document is located in your documentation installation folder (by default, this folder is C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\XXXdoc\online\), in cfysa_C2 \samples\Drafting. Leave the Place Text Template dialog box open to perform the next steps. 3. On any view, select the part that you want to annotate, making sure that you click where you want the anchor point of the annotation to be located. Note that the name of a part is displayed as a help as you fly the cursor over it.
The Place Text Template dialog box now lists all the templates available in the selected catalog and which can be applied to the selected object.
4. In the Place Text Template dialog box, select the text template that you want to apply, Part number & Revision for example. The annotation is created at the point you clicked when selecting the part to annotate, and contains information retrieved from the 3D part. Note that this annotation is associative to the 3D part. 5. If you want, select the other text template (Part name). Note that this annotation will also be created at the point you clicked, so it will overlap the first annotation. For better results, you will have to move it afterwards. 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for other parts that you want to annotate. Note that the last template you selected in the Place Text Template dialog box remains active when annotating other parts. You can de-activate it by clicking the Clear selection button.
7. When you're done, click Close to close the Place Text Template dialog box. You can also multi-select the parts that you want to annotate (using the Ctrl key) prior to clicking the Text Template Placement icon.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Administration Tasks
Administration Tasks
In the Interactive Drafting workbench, administration tasks deals with the administration of standards. These tasks must be performed by an administrator. Administrators can manage and customize standards such as ISO, JIS, ANSI, ASME, etc. or company standards. The Standards Editor let administrators set the standards used for dress-up, dimensions, annotations, etc. as well as set the styles that will be used as defaults for element properties in the Interactive Drafting workbench. Before You Begin Administering Standards and Generative View Styles Upgrading Standard Files from Releases up to V5 R9 Setting Standard Parameters and Styles
The format of the standard file has been changed from V5 R9 onwards . If you were using a customized CATDrwStandard file on a release up to V5 R8, you need to upgrade the standard file to the new XML format.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugsa0000.htm10/19/2004 4:20:35 PM
Before You Begin
Before You Begin

About Drafting Standards
When users modify the properties of an element in the Interactive Drafting workbench, the modifications are only applied to the selected element, in the current drawing. Standard files let administrators set the properties of an element so that they will be applied to all elements of the same type in a drawing, as well as in all drawings which use a given standard. A standard file is an XML file which makes it possible to customize globally, for a CATDrawing, the appearance and behavior of drafting elements. With standard files, administrators can:
set standard styles that will be used as default values when creating new elements, i.e.: r define sheet styles
r r r r r
define geometry styles define annotation styles define dimension styles define dress-up and dress-up symbols styles define callout styles
set standard parameters, i.e.: r control the user interface, with general parameters to restrict the values of some element properties
r
customize dimensions customize annotations customize dress-up elements define new dimension tolerance formats define new dimension value formats control pre-defined formats for tolerance and dimension values control view generation parameters customize fixed-size frames customize line thickness
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugsa0100.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 4:21:33 PM
Before You Begin

r
customize patterns
Once defined, a format is applied to elements as a property.
The format of the standard file has been changed from V5 R9 onwards. If you were using a customized CATDrwStandard file on a previous release (up to V5 R8), you need to upgrade the standard file to the new XML format.
Management of Drafting Standards

Standalone drawings
When users create a CATDrawing document (File -> New), they specify the standard that will be associated with this document. The values of the parameters in the specified standard file are then copied into the CATDrawing document. Each drawing contains a copy of the standard and is therefore standalone. This makes it possible for users, projects, or companies to exchange CATDrawing documents without needing to send the standard file along.
Administrator-controlled access and modification

The administrator defines and controls the location of the standard files as well as the ability to define new standards, or to modify existing standards. For example, the administrator can define a single standard, and prevent users from modifying it.
Four standard files available by default

By default, 4 standard files are delivered, one for each of the international standards available when creating a new CATDrawing file. These files are located in install_root/resources/standard/drafting.
q q q q
ISO.xml ANSI.xml JIS.xml ASME.xml
Administrators can add as many standard files as needed. Refer to Administering Standards for more information.
Before You Begin
Editing the standard file

The standard files can be edited using an interactive editor. This editor provides an easy-to-use graphic interface to let administrators customize the parameters included in the standard files. For information on how to customize these parameters, refer to Setting Standard Parameters. The interactive editor is available in Tools -> Standards. (It is the same editor with which you can customize generative view styles). For more information on how to use this editor, refer to the Customizing Standards chapter in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
Make sure you use the Standards editor available in Tools -> Standards when modifying and customizing the XML standard files. Using other editors (such as text editors) may alter the consistency of the standard file, and may make the standards XML files unusable.
Switching to another standard

When several standards are defined, users can switch a drawing to another standard. Refer to Switching to Another Standard.
Updating the standard of a drawing

When a standard file is modified, users need to explicitly update the drawings which use this standard. Refer to Updating the Standard of a Drawing. [ Up ] [ Next ]
Administering Standards and Generative View Styles

This task documents the administration of both standards (Interactive Drafting workbench) and generative view styles (Generative Drafting workbench), as the procedure is basically the same whether you are administering standards or generative view styles. When applicable, differences will be notified. The examples provided in this task specifically deal with the administration of standard files. For more information on customizing and administering generative view styles, refer to the Administration Tasks chapter in the Generative Drafting User's Guide.
Location of standard or generative view style files

The location of standard files or generative view style files is defined by two environment variables which can be set during installation or modified afterwards: Variable name CATCollectionStandard Description Path and name of the directory (or directories) which contains: q the drafting sub-directories (which themselves contain the customized drafting standards). It is in these drafting sub-directories that you should add the drafting standards customized for a company, project or user.
q
the generativeparameters sub-directories (which themselves contain the customized generative view styles). It is in these generativeparameters sub-directories that you should add the generative view styles customized for a company, project or user.
CATDefaultCollectionStandard Path and name of the directory (or directories) which contains: q the drafting sub-directories (which themselves contain the predefined drafting standards delivered by Dassault Systemes).
q
the generativeparameters sub-directories (which themselves contain the predefined generative view styles delivered by Dassault Systemes).
The default location for this directory (set during the installation process) is the installation directory install_root\resources\standard.
Setting the location of standard files

Refer to the Administration Tasks chapter in the Generative Drafting User's Guide for specific information on how to set the location of generative view style files. There are two possibilities:
q
If you want to place all customized drafting standards in a custom directory, named mydirectory for example, you need to proceed as follows: 1. Create a directory named as you like (mydirectory, for example). 2. Create a sub-directory under this directory, which needs to be named drafting. 3. Place the XML files containing your customized drafting standards in mydirectory\drafting.
If you have not yet customized your XML standard files, then proceed as follows: 1. Create a directory named as you like (mydirectory, for example). 2. Create a sub-directory under this directory, which needs to be named drafting. 3. Set the CATCollectionStandard variable to mydirectory. After you have customized the XML standard files, the standard editor will then save them in mydirectory\drafting.

q
If the CATDefaultCollectionStandard and the CATCollectionStandard variables both contain an identically-named standard, it is always the standard found in CATCollectionStandard which will be used. If two directories referenced by the CATCollectionStandard and/or CATDefaultCollectionStandard variables contain identically-named standard files, it is always the standard in the directory listed first which will be used.
Customizing and defining standards or generative view styles

To edit and save standard files or generative view style files in Tools -> Standards, you must be running the V5 session in administrator mode (-admin). The recommended method for customizing standard files or generative view style files is the following: 1. You need to work in administrator mode. To do this, proceed as follows: a. Set up the CATReferenceSettingPath variable. b. Start a V5 session using the -admin option. For more information, refer to the Managing Environments chapter in the Infrastructure Installation Guide. 2. Set up the CATCollectionStandard environment variable as explained above. If none of the conditions are respected, a warning message will appear to let you know that you will neither be able to modify nor save the XML files. 3. Modify the Drafting standards or the generative view styles as appropriate. 4. Use the Save As or the OK button to store your modifications. 5. To exit, use the Cancel button. Once the standard files or the generative view style files have been customized and saved, they can be used in a V5 session in normal mode.
Availability of standard switch and update

Note: The information provided below does not apply to generative view styles. Using the settings available in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration, administrators can forbid or allow users to: q switch a drawing to another standard (via File -> Page Setup),
q
update the standard used by a drawing (via File -> Page Setup).
Moreover, administrators can lock these settings so that other users running a session with the same environment inherit those settings and cannot change them. This feature is described in the Locking Settings section, in the Infrastructure Installation User's Guide.
Upgrading Standard Files from Previous Releases

Depending on your needs, you can: q Upgrade CATDrwStandard files (i.e. standard files customized in releases up to and including V5R8) to the current level for XML standard files
q
Upgrade XML standard files from previous releases (i.e. XML standard files customized in releases starting from V5R9) to the current level for XML standard files
Upgrading CATDrwStandard Files to the Current XML Standard Files

Up to and including V5R8, the standard file defining standard XXX was a file named XXX.CATDrwStandard, located in install_root/reffiles/Drafting. In V5R9, the format of the standard file was changed to XML. The standard file defining standard XXX is now a file named XXX.xml, located in install_root/resources/ standard/drafting. If you have customized or defined a CATDrwStandard file, and wish to re-use this customization in the current release, you need to convert your CATDrwStandard file into a XML file. There are 2 ways of doing this:
Manual upgrade
If the degree of customization of the standard file is small, you can start from one of the 4 pre-defined standard files (ISO, ANSI, JIS or ASME), and modify it using the standards editor (Tools -> Standards). You will need to modify the parameter values, and add the styles that you had defined in the CATDrwStandard file.
Automatic upgrade
A batch utility is provided in order to automatically generate the XXX.xml file starting from a XXX.CATDrwStandard file. All the customization done on the CATDrwStandard file will be reproduced in the XML file, and all styles defined in CATDrwStandard file will be added. The utility will also add to the XML file the new standard parameters (with default values), as well as the new pre-defined styles. q If you want to convert a single CATDrwStandard to the current XML format, use: CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE XXX [dir]
q
If you want to convert all CATDrwStandard files to the current XML format, use:
CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE_ALL [dir] For more information on using these commands on Windows and on Unix, see below.
The tasks below will show you how to use the standard automatic upgrade tool on Windows and on Unix.
Using the standard automatic upgrade tool on Windows

1. Open an MS-DOS Window. 2. Change to the folder in which you installed the product. The default folder is C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B09\intel_a\code\bin 3. You have two options:
q
To generate XML files for all the CATDrwStandard files located in reffiles \Drafting, enter this command: CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE_ALL [dir] where [dir] is an optional directory in which to write the resulting XML files. Local directory is the default.
To generate the XML file corresponding to one single standard, enter this command: CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE XXX [dir] where XXX is the name of the standard you want to convert (ISO, ANSI...) and [dir] is an optional directory in which to write the resulting XML file. Local directory is the default.
Using the standard automatic upgrade tool on UNIX

1. Open a shell command window. 2. Change to the directory in which you installed the product. The default directory is /usr/DassaultSystemes/B09/OS_a/code/command/ where OS_a is:
q
aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a
3. You have two options:

q
To generate XML files for all the CATDrwStandard files located in reffiles \Drafting, enter this command: ./catstart -run "CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE_ALL [dir]" where [dir] is an optional directory in which to write the resulting XML files. Local directory is the default.
To generate the XML file corresponding to one single standard, enter this command: ./catstart -run "CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE XXX [dir]" where XXX is the name of the standard you want to convert (ISO, ANSI...) and [dir] is an optional directory in which to write the resulting XML files. Local directory is the default.
Upgrading XML Standard Files from Previous Releases to the Current Level
The XML standard file has evolved in each release since V5R9. New standard parameters have been added, some have been modified, and new functionalities (such as styles) have been introduced. If you have customized or defined an XML standard file in a previous release (i.e. a release starting from V5R9), and wish to re-use this customization in the current level, you need to upgrade your XML file. There are 2 ways of doing this:
Manual upgrade
If the degree of customization of the standard file is small, you can start from one of the 4 pre-defined standard files (ISO, ANSI, JIS or ASME), and modify it using the standards editor (Tools -> Standards). You will need to modify the parameter values and customize new parameters and/or styles.
Automatic upgrade
A batch utility is provided in order to automatically generate the current XML file starting from an XML file from a previous release. All the customization done on the starting file will be reproduced in the upgraded XML file. The utility will also add the new parameters and styles introduced in the current release (with default values) in the XML file. q If you want to upgrade a single XML file to the current version, use: CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE XXX [dir]
q
If you want to upgrade all XML files to the current version, use: CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE_ALL [dir]
For more information on using these commands on Windows and on Unix, see below.
The tasks below will show you how to use the standard automatic upgrade tool on Windows and on Unix.
Using the standard automatic upgrade tool on Windows

1. Open an MS-DOS Window. 2. Change to the folder in which you installed the product. The default folder is C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B09\intel_a\code\bin 3. You have two options:
q
To upgrade standard files for all the XML files located in install_root \resources\standard\drafting, enter this command: CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE_ALL [dir] where [dir] is an optional directory in which to write the resulting XML files. Local directory is the default.
To upgrade the XML file corresponding to one single standard, enter this command: CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE XXX [dir] where XXX is the name of the standard you want to convert (ISO, ANSI, MY_ISO...) and [dir] is an optional directory in which to write the resulting XML file. Local directory is the default.
The batch will first search the standard file in the directory defined by the exported variable CATCollectionStandard (e.g. set CATCollectionStandard=e:\tmp), and then, if not found, in the following directory: install_root\resources\standard\drafting.
Using the standard automatic upgrade tool on UNIX

1. Open a shell command window. 2. Change to the directory in which you installed the product. The default directory is /usr/DassaultSystemes/B09/OS_a/code/command/ where OS_a is:
q
aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a
3. You have two options:

q
To upgrade standard files for all the XML files located in install_root \resources\standard\drafting, enter this command: ./catstart -run "CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE_ALL [dir]" where [dir] is an optional directory in which to write the resulting XML files. Local directory is the default.
To upgrade the XML file corresponding to one single standard, enter this command: ./catstart -run "CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE XXX [dir]" where XXX is the name of the standard you want to convert (ISO, ANSI...) and [dir] is an optional directory in which to write the resulting XML files. Local directory is the default.
The batch will first search the standard file in the directory defined by the exported variable CATCollectionStandard (e.g. export CATCollectionStandard=d/tmp), and then, if not found, in the following directory: install_root\resources\standard\drafting.
Setting Standard Parameters and Styles
Setting Standard Parameters and Styles

The Interactive Drafting workbench lets administrators set and create standard parameters and standard styles. Before you begin You should be familiar with important concepts: structure of the standards, how to customize standard parameters and styles, how to define new standard formats and styles, general syntax for the standard editor values. Setting Standard Parameters Set standard parameters and create standard formats. Setting Standard Styles Set standard styles that will be used as default values when creating new elements. [ Back ] [ Up ]
Before You Begin
Before You Begin

Structure of the Standard
Standards are defined by the administrator. A drafting standard file is structured as a tree, as it appears in the Standards Editor (available via Tools -> Standards). It contains several main sections, each dealing with a specific aspect of drafting customization:
q
Styles General parameters Dress-up parameters Dimension parameters r Company-defined dimension tolerance formats
r
Company-defined dimension value display formats Pre-defined formats for tolerance and dimension values
Annotation parameters Company-defined view generation Company-defined frame formats Company-defined line thickness Company-defined patterns Company-defined linetypes
Before You Begin
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Setting Standard Parameters

The Interactive Drafting workbench lets administrators set standard parameters and create standard formats. About Standard parameters Learn more about the management of standard parameters. General parameters Customize the parameters that let you control and restrict the values that are available for some element properties. Dress-up parameters Customize the parameters that deal with the appearance of dress-up elements, such as markup arrows. Dimension parameters Customize the parameters that deal with the appearance of annotation and dimension elements. Dimension Tolerance Formats Customize the dimension tolerance formats, which are user-defined formats to be applied to dimension tolerances. Dimension Value Formats Customize the dimension value formats, which are user-defined formats to be applied to dimension values. Pre-defined Formats for Tolerance and Dimension Values Customize the pre-defined formats for tolerance and dimension values. Pre-defined Styles Definitions Customize the pre-defined non-modifiable styles and their definition, which you can use as a reference when defining new formats. Annotation Parameters Customize the parameters that deal with the position of text leaders. Frame Definition Parameters Define customizable fixed-size frames. A frame is a property which can be applied to texts as well as certain types of annotations and dress up elements.
View Generation Definition Define view generation, i.e. customize settings that should be applied when generating views. Line Thickness Definition Define line thickness. Line thickness is a property which can be applied to, and drives the representation of, almost all elements in a drawing, such as lines, curves, dimension lines, etc. Linetype Definition Define linetypes. Linetypes can be applied to, and drive the representation of, almost all elements in a drawing, such as lines, curves, dimension lines, etc. Pattern Definition Define patterns. Patterns are used for area fills or when generating section views/cuts or breakout views.
About Standard Parameters

Customizing Standard Parameters
In this scenario, administrators will learn how to customize standard parameters using an example. This scenario provides an example of dimension customization, but the procedure is the same when customizing other standard parameters (dimensions, annotations, dress-up elements, etc.) The procedure differs when customizing styles. For more information, refer to About Styles.
With the pre-defined ISO standard, a radius dimension extension lines reaches the center of the circle. You will modify the extension line so that it does not reach the center of the circle.
Select Tools -> Standards to launch the standards editor. Choose the Drafting category, and then open the ISO.xml file from the drop-down list. 1. Select the Dimension node in the editor. 2. Modify the Dimension.DIMLRadiusExtReachCenter parameter value from 2 to 1. 3. Set the Dimension.DIMLRadiusExtLength parameter value to 2. 4. Click OK to save your modifications and exit the standards editor. 5. Create an ISO drawing using the File - > New command. 6. Create a circle, and add a radius dimension to it. The dimension extension line does not reach the center, as it would have with the pre-defined ISO standard.
Defining a New Format

In this scenario, administrators will learn how to create a new format using an example.
This scenario shows how to create a dimension tolerance format as an example, but the procedure is the same for other formats (dimensions values, line thicknesses, etc.). Specific differences are indicated in the course of this scenario.
You want to create this new dimension tolerance format, with superimposed tolerance values and parenthesis as separators.
Select Tools -> Standards to launch the standards editor. Choose the Drafting category, and then open the ISO.xml file from the drop-down list. 1. Select the Tolerance Formats node in the editor.
2. Click on the Add Instance button. A format called TOLXXX is created. 3. Rename this format TOL_USER. 4. Customize the values as follows:
q q
Make sure you set every parameter. You must use the symbol used by the computer system to set a parameter to a real value ("," or "."). Note: you can use a fraction to set a parameter.
5. Click OK to save the ISO.xml file and exit the standards editor. 6. Create a new ISO drawing. The new tolerance style will appear in the tolerance combo box.
General Syntax for the Standard Editor Values

Fractions and operations
The standards editor can handle basic numerical operations to help you enter the values for the parameters. You can enter your value as a set of operations, and let the program compute the result when you validate the field. For example, for each parameter of the "real" type, you can specify the value using a fraction: NDFact_1 = 1/60. You can also use units or trigonometric functions in your operations: NDSepPos_1 = 1 in + 1 mm + cos(0.12)
Special characters
For each parameter of the "string" type, you can enter special characters using the following keywords: q [DEGREE] will be displayed as
q q
[MINUTE] will be displayed as ' [SECOND] will be displayed as "
A special character can be used alone or combined with other characters (the special character only counts as 1 character): NDSepar_1 , [DEGREE] or NDSepar_1 , " in [DEGREE]"
[ Up ] [ Next ]
General Parameters
General Parameters
The general parameters are located in the General node of the standard file. They let you control and restrict the values that are available for some element properties, by controlling the values in the Properties toolbar or in the element properties. Changing these values will not have an impact on already existing elements, since they control the user interface and not directly the drafting elements. Parameter Parameter Name Value Description List of tolerance style names. Only the listed styles will be displayed and available to users through the Dimension Properties toolbar or via Edit -> Properties.
List of Tolerance styles allowed on dimensions
(list of strings) AllowedToleranceFormats empty list = all defined tolerance styles are available
General Parameters
Default Tolerance style for dimensions
(string) DefaultToleranceFormat blank = no tolerance
Tolerance style which will be pre-selected in the Dimension Properties toolbar.
List of Value Display style names. Only the listed styles will be available to users through the Dimension Properties toolbar or via Edit -> Properties.
List of Value Display styles allowed on dimensions
(list of strings) AllowedNumericalFormats empty list = all Value Display styles are available
Default Value Display style for length, DefaultNumericalFormatLength distance , radius and diameter dimensions
Value Display style which will be preselected in the Dimension Properties toolbar. (string)
General Parameters
Default Value Display DefaultNumericalFormatAngle style for angle dimensions
(string)
Value Display style which will be preselected in the Dimension Properties toolbar. List of font names. Only the listed fonts will be available to users in the text Text Properties toolbar or via Edit -> Properties.
List of allowed text fonts
AllowedTextFonts
(strings: list of font names, spelled exactly as they appear in the Text Properties toolbar or in Edit -> Properties) blank = all installed fonts will be available
Default text font
DefaultTextFont
(string: font Text font name which will be pre-selected name in the Text Properties toolbar. spelled exactly as it appears in the Text Properties toolbar or in Edit -> Properties)
General Parameters
List of font sizes in mm. Only the listed sizes will be available to users in the Text Properties toolbar or via Edit -> Properties.
List of allowed text font sizes
AllowedTextFontSizes
(list of values in mm)
Text font size which will be pre-selected in the Text Properties toolbar. Default text font DefaultTextFontSize (value in mm)
Dress-Up parameters
Dress-Up parameters
The dress-up parameters are located in the DressUp node of the standard file. They deal with the appearance of dress-up elements, such as markup arrows and threads.
Symbols
Parameter Parameter Name Length Arrow size and angle Angle (degrees) Value (mm) Description
Length Closed arrow size and angle Angle
(mm)
(degrees)
Length Filled arrow size and angle Angle
(mm)
(degrees)
Length Symetric arrow size and angle
(mm)
Dress-Up parameters
Angle
(degrees)
Slash size
Length
(mm)
Circle size
Diameter
(mm)
Filled circle size
Diameter
(mm)
Symetric (crossed) circle size
Diameter
(mm)
Dress-Up parameters
Crossed circle size
Diameter
(mm)
Triangle size
Length
(mm)
Filled triangle size
Length
(mm)
Plus size
Length
(mm)
Cross size
Length
(mm)
Dress-Up parameters
Length Double arrow size, angle Angle
(mm)
(degrees)
Wave arrow size
Diameter
(mm)
Thread
Parameter Parameter Name Value Description
Circle
Thread representation
ThreadRepresentation
ArcCircle
Dimension Parameters
The dimension parameters are located in the Dimension node of the standard file. They deal with the appearance of annotation and dimension elements. These parameters are global, which means that changing their value will have an impact on all elements in the drawing.
This section lists all the parameters which were contained in CATDrwStandard files up to V5 R9.
Dimension and Annotation Parameters

Parameter International standard Parameter Name ParentStandard Value Description Each user-defined standard is [ISO/ANSI/ based on one of 3 international standards: ISO, ANSI, JIS. This JIS] sets some basic parameters. [Yes/No] DIMLRadiusIntReachCenter Yes = till center No = till value
Extension of dimension line on radius dimensions (value inside circle)
[Yes/No] Extension of dimension line on radius dimensions (value outside circle) Yes = till DIMLRadiusExtReachCenter center No = constant overrun DIMLRadiusExtLength Extension of dimension line on one-symbol diameter dimensions (value inside circle) (mm) [Yes/No] DIMLDiameterIntReachCenter Yes = till center No = till value (mm)
DIMLDiameterIntOverrun
Extension of dimension line on one-symbol diameter dimensions (value outside circle)
[Yes/No] Yes = till DIMLDiameterExtReachCenter center No = constant overrun DIMLDiameterExtLength DIMLNoFlippedOverrun (mm) (mm) [Yes/No] DIMLShowNoReverse Yes = displayed No = not displayed (mm) [Yes/No] DIMLShowReverse Yes = displayed No = not displayed [2/3] -
Dimension line display and extent (for nonflipped symbols)
DIMLFlippedOverrun Dimension line display and extent (for flipped symbols)
DEPRECATED
DIMTYPos
Vertical value
DIMTxtJustif
2 = center 3= bottom
DIMLUnderLine
The dimension line may either 2 = Length have a given length, or relative to automatically adjust to reach the dimension value. value 1= Constant length
[2/1]
Dimension line length for onesymbol dimensions (distance and angle)

if DIMLUnderLine=2 DIMLtail
(mm)
if DIMLUnderLine=1 DIMLConstantLength
(mm)
Dimension line gap around unframed value
DIMLTextGap
(mm)
Dimension line gap around framed value
(mm) DIMLFrameGap
Symbol reversal limit
SYMBReverselimit
(mm)
SCORLeftTail Size of dimension value underlining SCORRightTail SCORVertSpace (mm)
Multitolerance with associative numerical value
DIMTolMultiAuto
Specifies whether the numerical definition of a multi-tolerance is associative to the dimension value No = not associative (in which case it is automatically updated when the dimension value Yes = associative is changed).
[No/Yes]
Dimension and Leader Symbols

Parameter Parameter Name SYMBArrowSide Arrow size and angle (symbol type #1) SYMBArrowAngle (degrees) Value (mm) Description
SYMBClosedArrowSide Closed arrow size and angle (symbol type #2) SYMBClosedArrowAngle
(mm)
(degrees)
SYMBFilledArrowSide Filled arrow size and angle (symbol type #3) SYMBFilledArrowAngle
(mm)
(degrees)
SYMBSymetricArrowSide Symetric arrow size and angle (symbol type #4)
(mm)
SYMBSymetricArrowAngle (degrees)
Slash size (aymbol type #5)
SYMBSlashLength
(mm)
Circle size (symbol type #6)
SYMBCircleDiameter
(mm)
Filled circle size (symbol type #7)
SYMBFilledCircleDiameter
(mm)
Scored circle size (symbol type #8)
SYMBSymetricCircleDiameter
(mm)
Crossed circle size (symbol type #9)
SYMBCrossCircleDiameter
(mm)
Triangle size (symbol type #10)
SYMBTriangleSide
(mm)
Filled triangle size (symbol type #11)
SYMBFilledTriangleSide
(mm)
Plus size (symbol type #12)
SYMBPlusHeight
(mm)
Cross size (symbol type #13)
SYMBCrossSide
(mm)
Chamfer Dimension Parameters

Chamfer dimension mode
CHFMeasureMode
[1/2/3/ 4] 1= distance 2 = dist x dist 3 = dist x angle 4 = angle x dist
NOT IMPLEMENTED (It is managed for each dimension via Edit - > Properties)
Chamfer dimension representation (separate parameter depending on the CHFMeasureMode parameter value)
if CHFMeasureMode=1 CHFRepModeDist [1/2/3] 1=1 if CHFMeasureMode=2 symbol - 1 CHFRepModeDistDist part 2=1 if CHFMeasureMode=3 symbol - 2 CHFRepModeDistAngle parts 3=2 if CHFMeasureMode=4 symbols CHFRepModeAngleDist
NOT IMPLEMENTED (It is managed for each dimension via Edit - > Properties)
Chamfer separator font height
CHFSepHeight
(mm)
Chamfer Value Framing
CHFFrameGroup
[1/2] 1= separately 2 = as a whole
Half Dimensions
HLFIntOverrunMode
[1/2/3] 1 = till Axis 2 = under value 3 = over axis
Half dimension dimension line extent (if the value is inside)
if HLFIntOverrunMode=3 HLFIntOverrun
(mm)
[1/2] Half-dimension dimension line extent (if the value is outside) HLFExtOverrunMode 1 = till axis 2 = constant overrun (mm) NOT IMPLEMENTED
if HLFextOverrunMode=2 HLFExtOverrun
NOT IMPLEMENTED
Dimension Associated Texts

Parameter Parameter Name Value 7 = top ASTBeforePosReference 8 = center 9 = bottom Description reference for positioning
Point to be used on the associated text as a reference for positioning
1 = top ASTAfterPosReference 2 = center 3 = bottom 1 = top ASTInsertPosReference 2 = center 3 = bottom 1 = left ASTUpperPosReference 4 = center 7 = rigth 3 = left ASTLowerPosReference 6 = center 9 = right for Before/After/Insert texts
Horizontal and vertical offsets for positioning
ASTBeforeXDist ASTBeforeYDist ASTAfterXDist ASTAfterYDist ASTInsertXDist ASTInsertYDist ASTUpperXDist ASTUpperYDist ASTLowerXDist ASTLowerYDist
for Upper/Lower texts
(mm)
Annotations
[ No / Yes ] No = 0 to 360 degrees Yes = -90 to 90 degrees
Text angle
TXTAngleAllowed
TXTLeaderLeftTail (side of leader) TXTLeaderRightTail (side opposite to leader) TXTLeaderVertSpace Text leaders size (roughness symbols only)
(mm)
TXTLeaderGap
(mm)
Text thickness (for compatibility with V4) Warning: does not work on bold text (set at 0,7 mm), on complex text and roughness annotations.
TXTThickness
(mm)
Datum feature leader representation mode TXTDatumMode (ANSI parent standard only)
[1/2] 1 = Normal 2 = Flag
Fake dimensions
[1/2/4] FAKIdentifyMode
NOT IMPLEMENTED
1 = underline (It is managed for each dimension via Edit 2 = parenthesis - > Properties) 4 = none
Fake dimension value display
If FAKIdentifyMode=1 FAKUnderlineTail FAKVerticalOffset
(mm)
Dual Dimensions
Dual dimension separator height, for side-by-side dual display mode
DUASideSepHeight
(mm)
DUAAboveOffset DUAAboveSpace
(mm) [1/2/ 3]
DUAPosReference Dual dimension display, for values above-one-another display mode
1 = top 2 = center 3 = bottom [1/2/ 3]
DUAJustification
1 = left 2 = center 3 = right
Cumulate Dimensions (Ordinate Dimensions): General Parameters Table 1

Cumulate dimensions sign display
[1/3] 1 = no sign CUMLSignDisplay 3 = positive sign on all values
[ 0 / ... / 13 ] 0 = none CUMLOriginSymbol 1-13 = refer to "dimension line symbols" table Origin symbol shape and size sign
CUMLSymbolScale
(real)
Display of origin zero
[ Yes / No ] CUMLZeroDisplay Yes = display No = no display
Extension line display
[ Yes / No ] CUMLExtLDisplay Yes = display No = no display
Value orientation reference
[1/2] CUMLTxtReference 1 = dimension line 2 = extension line
Value orientation
CUMLTxtOrient
[1/2/3] 1 = Parallel to Reference (specified by CUMLTxtReference) 2 = Perpendicular to Reference (specified by CUMLTxtReference)) 3 = Angle to reference
Value orientation Angle (if CUMLTxtOrient=3)
CUMLTxtAngle
(degrees)
Cumulate Dimensions: Parameters applying only if value orientation reference is "Dimension Line" (CUMLTxtReference = 1) Table 2
[ 2/3/ 4 ] 2= Dimension Line to origin 3= CUMLDimLinMode Length is relative to value text 4= Length is constant
Dimension line length mode
CUMLTxtVJusti Value vertical positioning
[1/2] 1 = Edge 2= Center
CUMLTxtDecalY
(mm)
If Dimension Line goes to origin
[1/2] 1 = Edge CUMLTxtVJusti1 2= Center
Value horizontal (CUMLDimLinMode positioning = 2)
[1/2/ 3] 1= Extension line CUMLExtLTxtRef 2 = Dim line center 3 = Origin
CUMLDimLTxtVPos
(mm)
Dimension Line Overrun
CUMLDimLinTail
(mm)
If Dimension Line is relative to value (CUMLDimLinMode = 3) Value horizontal positioning
[1/2] 1 = Edge CUMLTxtVJusti1 2= Center
CUMLDimLTxtVPos
(mm)
Dimension Line Length
CUMLExtLLength
(mm)
[1/2] 1 = Edge CUMLTxtVJusti1 2= Center If Dimension Line has a constant length (CUMLDimLDisplay = 4) Value horizontal positioning
[1/2/ 3] 1= Extension line CUMLExtLTxtRef 2 = Dim line center 3 = Origin
CUMLDimLTxtVPos
(mm)
Cumulate Dimensions: Parameters applying only if the value orientation reference is "Extension Line" (CUMLTxtReference = 2) Table 3
Dimension line representation
[1/2/ 4] 1 = no display CUMLDimLDisplay 2 = full display 4 = partial length
Dimension Line Length if Dimension Line has a partial length (CUMLDimLDisplay=4)
CUMLDimLLength
(mm)
Extension line length mode
[3/4] 3= relative to CUMLExtLMode text box 4= constant
Extension line overrun
CUMLExtLOver
(mm)
[1/2] CUMLTxtVJusti2 1 = Edge 2 = Center Value vertical positioning
If extension line is relative to value text (CUMLExtLMode = 3)
CUMLExtLTxtVPos
(mm)
[1/2] CUMLTxtHJusti 1 = Edge 2 = Center Value horizontal positioning
CUMLExtLTxtHPos
(mm)
Extension line length
CUMLExtLLength
(mm)
[1/2] CUMLTxtVJusti2 1 = Edge 2 = Center
Value vertical positioning If extension line is constant (CUMLExtLMode
[1/2/ 3] 1= Dimension line 2 = Middle of extension line CUMLExtLTxtRef 3 = Extension line end point (opposite to dimension
= 4)
line)
CUMLExtLTxtVPos
(mm)
[1/2] CUMLTxtHJusti 1 = Edge 2 = Center Value horizontal positioning
CUMLExtLTxtHPos
(mm)
Curvilinear Length Symbol
Option Display Symbol Height Spacing Underline value Length
Description Specifies whether the curvilinear length symbol should be displayed. Indicates the height (in mm) of the curvilinear length symbol. Indicates the spacing (in mm) between the curvilinear length symbol and the dimension value. Specifies whether the dimension value should be underlined. Indicates the length (in mm) of the curvilinear length symbol.
Minimum Length Minimum Length
Indicates the minimum length (in mm) of the curvilinear length symbol. Indicates the maximum length (in mm) of the curvilinear length symbol.
Intersection Point
Option Description Specifies whether the intersection point should be printed. If you leave this option unchecked, then the intersection point will be a construction point and its style will be the default construction point style as defined Print intersection points in the Styles > Point > Default section of the standard. If you check this option, then the intersection point will not be a construction point and its style can be chosen among the various point styles defined in the Styles > Point section of the standard. Indicates the style that should be used to represent the point (as Point style defined in the Styles > Point section of the standard). Show construction lines Specifies whether construction lines should be displayed. Specifies whether construction lines should be printed. This option is Print construction lines available when the Show construction lines option is checked. Specifies the style that should be used to represent the construction Line style line (as defined in the LineTypes section of the standard).
Dimension Tolerance Formats

Format Definitions
This section deals with dimension tolerance descriptions, which are user-defined formats to be applied to dimension tolerances. To create a new tolerance format, you must use the Standards editor. Select the Tolerance Format type in the standards editor, and then click the Add Instance button to add a new instance of a format. This will create a sample format definition that you will then customize to suit your needs, by modifying one or several values of the parameters defining the format. Once defined, a format can be applied to dimensions just as any dimension attribute, either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Dimension Properties toolbar.

These parameters are located in the Tolerance formats node of the standard file. The tolerance format parameters drive the representation of a dimension tolerance, and include parameters such as: q Type of tolerance (numerical/alphanumerical)
q q q q q
Separator between values position relatively to dimension value font size for tolerance trailing zeros display for numerical type and so forth. Value (8 char string) Description User-defined name that will be used as the description identifier.
Parameter Parameter Name Tolerance Format TolName Name
Tolerance Format Type
Toltype
[1/2/3/4/5/ 6/7] 1 = Numerical side by side 2 = Numerical super-imposed 3 = Resolved Numerical side by side 4 = Resolved numerical superimposed 5 =Alphanumerical Single Value 6= Alphanumerical side by side 7= Alphanumerical super-imposed
Separators for superimposed tolerances After
Before TolSepar_1
TolSepar_2
[0...18 ] separator number as described in the Separator Character Table
Separators for side-by- Between side TolSepTo_2 tolerances After TolSepTo_3
Before TolSepTo_1
[0...18 ] separator number as described in the Separator Character Table
Fraction line on superimposed tolerances
TolFractLine
[2/1] 2= Fraction line 1= No fraction line
Separator Character Size (Ratio between Separator Character and Value Text font sizes) Tolerance Size (Ratio between Tolerance Text and Value Text font sizes)
TolSymbolH
(real) = separator height / value height (=B/A)
TolScale
(real) = tolerance height / value height (=C/A)
Tolerance Position Anchor Point (for offset computing)
TolPtOnValue
[7/8/9] 7 =Top 8 = Middle 9 = Bottom [1/2/3] 1 =Top 2 = Middle 3 = Bottom
TolAnchorPt
Offset between dimension value and tolerance
TolExtX (mm) TolExtY
Offset between the 2 tolerance values
TolIntX (mm) TolIntY
Display of tolerance trailing zeros
TolTrailing
[0/1/2] 0 = Display (number of digits specified in the value precision) 1 = No Display 2 = Same "display" mode as the dimension value
Display of identical Tolerance Values ( for numerical tolerances only)
TolMergeSame
[1/2] 1 = Display common value 2 = Display separate values
Display of null Tolerance Values ( for numerical tolerances only)
TolShowNull
[1/2/3] 1 = Display null value with sign 2 = Display null value without sign 3 = No Display of null value
Separator Character Table

This table lists the characters that can be used as separators before, between or after the tolerance values.
Separators
Symbol # Character 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (none) / : ( ) " , < > X * . ; + [ ] _ (space)
Dimension Value Formats

Format Definitions
This section deals with dimension value descriptions, which are user-defined formats to be applied to dimension values. To create a new dimension value display format, you must use the Standards editor. Select the Value Formats type in the standards editor, and then click the Add Instance button to add a new instance of a format. This will create a sample format definition that you will then customize to suit your needs, by modifying one or several values of the parameters defining the format. Once defined, a format can be applied to dimensions just as any dimension attribute, either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Dimension Properties toolbar.
Dimension Value Display Formats

These parameters are located in the Value Formats node of the standard file. The dimension value display style parameters drive the representation of a dimension value, and include parameters such as: q multiplying factor
q q q q q
separators for thousands position relatively to dimension line display of fractional values trailing zeros display and so forth. Parameter Name NDName Description User-defined name that will be (8 char string) used as the description identifier Value
Parameter Value Format Name
Value Magnitude (type)
NDType
Value Units
NDUnit
[1/2] 1 = length (for length/ distance/ radius/ diameter dimensions) 2 = Angle (angle dimensions) [1/2/3/ 4/5] 1 = mm 2 = inch 3 = radian 4 = degree 5 = grade
Unit used to display the dimension value
The dimension measured value is multiplied by this factor prior to being displayed. Global Multiplying Factor For example, to display a distance in kilometers with units set to mm (NDUnit=1), use: NDGlobFact = 0.000001
NDGlobFact
(real)
Display of separator for Thousands NDExise Separator Characters for Decimal and Thousands Decimal Separator NDSepNum Thousands Separator NDSep1000
[1 / 2] 1 = No display of separator 2 = Display of separator [0...18 ] separator number as described in the Separator Character Table
Display of Trailing Zeros
NDFinZer
[1 / 2] 1 = No display of trailing zeros 2 = Display of trailing zeros (number of digits specified in the value precision)
Fractional Rest Justification
NDAlignFrac
Not yet implemented
Fractional Rest Display Mode
NDTypFrac
[1 / 2] 1 = Side by side 2 = Superimposed
Fractional Rest Height Ratio
NDResScl
(real) = Unit height / value height (=B/A)
Fractional Rest Positioning Offsets (the horizontal offset also applies to decimal rests)
NDRestX
NDRestY
(real) This value is a ratio to the character height
Offset between Fractional Rest Numerator and Denominator
NDOperY
(real) This value is a ratio to the character height
Position of Last Term Unit
NDSepDen
[1 / 2] 1 = Before fractional rest 2 = After fractional rest
Number of Terms in the Value
NDFact
[ 1...3 ]
Definition of each of the value terms

A value can be made of up to three terms plus a rest. All of the following parameters, suffixed by the term number, apply to each of the possible 3 terms. The numbering of the terms goes from right to left, #1 being the right-most term.
Parameter
Parameter Name
Value
Description
Display of Null Terms
NDNulFac_1
[1 / 2] 1 = No display of zeros 2 = Display of zeros
Display of Leading Zeros in Last Factor
NDNulFac_2
DEPRECATED
NDNulFac_3
Display of Null Terms
NDNulOther
The term measured value is multiplied by this factor prior to being displayed (the global multiplying factor is also used). All 3 values must have increasing and distinct values. Term Multiplying Factor NDFact_1 NDFact_2 NDFact_3 ( real ) Example: to display a value with a term in centimeters and a term in millimeters, with NDUnit=mm and NDGlobFact=1, set NDFact_1 = 1 NDFact_2 = 10
Term Unit Suffix
NDSepar_1 NDSepar_2 NDSepar_3
(16 char string)
Term Unit Height Ratio
NDSepScl_1 NDSepScl_2 NDSepScl_3
(real) = Unit height / value height (=B/A)
Term Vertical Positioning Offset (relatively to the left-most term)
NDValPos_1 NDValPos_2 NDValPos_3
(mm)
Term Unit Vertical Positioning Offset (relatively to its term)
NDSepPos_1 NDSepPos_2 NDSepPos_3
(mm)
Pre-defined Formats for Tolerance and Dimension Values

Some basic formats are provided by default for dimension tolerance and value display. Some of these pre-defined formats can be modified while others cannot. All pre-defined formats can be de-activated (i.e. taken out of the list of available styles).
Modifiable formats
They appear in the default standard files provided by Dassault Systemes, just as any company defined style would appear. They can be modified or deleted using the Standards Editor, or de-activated (i.e. taken out of the list of available styles) using the Allowed* parameters described in the General Parameters section. For Tolerance styles TOL_RES1 For Value Display styles micron mm cm m km in ftinch grade
Non-modifiable formats
They are not defined in the standard file, but in the code itself. They cannot be modified, but can be de-activated (i.e. taken out of the list of available styles) using the Allowed* parameters described in the General Parameters section. All styles provided up to V5R8 are of this type. For Tolerance styles TOL_NUM2 ANS_NUM2 DIN_NUM2 SGL_NUM2 INC_NUM2 TOL_RES2 TOL_ALP1 TOL_ALP2 TOL_ALP3 TOL_0.7 TOL_1.0 ISONUM ISOALPH1
For Value Display styles NUM.DIMM NUM,DIMM NUM.DINC NUM.DIMP ANS.DIMM DISTMM DISTINCH FEET-INC NUM.ADMS NUM,ADMS INC.ADMS NUM.ARAD ANGLEDEC
ISOALPH2 CPL_FLA1 CPL_FLA3 CPL_50A1 CPL_50A3 CPL_75A1 CPL_75A3
ANGLEDMS
The following tables list these non-modifiable styles, along with an example of the result when applied on a dimension. The right-most column contains a link to the style definition, from which you can derive new formats, simply by copying all or part of their definition.
Tolerance Formats
Name Display Description Link to the style definition
TOL_NUM2
Numerical superimposed (small)
Click here
ANS_NUM2
Numerical superimposed with trailing zeros (large)
Click here
DIN_NUM2
Click here
SGL_NUM2
Numerical superimposed with trailing zeros and parentheses (small)
Click here
INC_NUM2
Numerical superimposed (large)
Click here
TOL_RES2
Numerical resolved
Click here
TOL_ALP1
Alphanumerical single value (large)
Click here
TOL_ALP2
Alphanumerical double value sideby-side (large)
Click here
TOL_ALP3
Alphanumerical double value superimposed (small)
Click here
TOL_0.7
Click here
TOL_1.0
Click here
ISONUM
Numerical superimposed with trailing zeros and parentheses (large)
Click here
ISOALPH1
Click here
ISOALPH2
Click here
CPL_FLA1
Click here
CPL_FLA3
Alphanumerical double value superimposed (large)
Click here
CPL_50A1
Alphanumerical single value (small)
Click here
CPL_50A3
Click here
CPL_75A1
Alphanumerical single value (medium)
Click here
CPL_75A3
Alphanumerical double value superimposed (medium)
Click here
Value Display Formats

Name Display Description Link to the style definition
NUM.DIMM
Millimeters with dot
Click here
NUM,DIMM
Millimeters with comma
Click here
NUM.DINC
inches with trailing zeros
Click here
NUM.DIMP
inches with unit display
Click here
ANS.DIMM
Millimeters with trailing zeros
Click here
DISTMM
Millimeters with dot
Click here
DISTINC
inches with unit display
Click here
FEET-INC
feet and inch with unit display
Click here
NUM.ADMS
Degrees/minutes/ seconds with dot
Click here
NUM,ADMS
Degrees/minutes/ seconds with comma
Click here
INC.ADMS
Degrees/minutes/ seconds with dot and trailing zeros
Click here
NUM.ARAD
radians
Click here
ANGLEDEC
Degrees with decimal format
Click here
ANGLEDMS
Degrees/minutes/ seconds with dot
Click here
Pre-defined Styles Definition

This section lists pre-defined non-modifiable styles along with their definition. You can use these styles as a reference when defining new formats, simply by copying all or part of their definition.
TolName= TOL_NUM2 TolType= 2 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 2 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 8 TolAnchorPt= 2 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.6 TolExtX= 0.6 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 1 TolShowNull= 2 TolScale= 0.7
TolName= ANS_NUM2 TolType= 2 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 8 TolAnchorPt= 2 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.6 TolExtX= 0.6 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 1
TolShowNull= 2 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= DIN_NUM2 TolType= 2 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 2 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 8 TolAnchorPt= 2 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.6 TolExtX= 0.6 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 1 TolShowNull= 3 TolScale= 0.7
TolName= SGL_NUM2 TolType= 2 TolSepar_1= 3 TolSepar_2= 4 TolSymbolH= 2.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 8 TolAnchorPt= 2 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.6 TolExtX= 0.6 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 1 TolShowNull= 2 TolScale= 0.7
TolName= INC_NUM2
TolType= 2 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 2 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 8 TolAnchorPt= 2 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.6 TolExtX= 0.6 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 1 TolShowNull= 1 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= TOL_RES2 TolType= 4 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 2 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.6 TolExtX= 0.0 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 1 TolShowNull= 2 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= TOL_ALP1 TolType= 5 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 0 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.0 TolExtX= 0.6 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= TOL_ALP2 TolType= 6 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 1 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 0 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.6 TolIntY= 0.0 TolExtX= 0.6 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= TOL_ALP3 TolType= 7 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 8
TolAnchorPt= 2 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.6 TolExtX= 0.6 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 0.7
TolName= TOL_0.7 TolType= 2 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 2 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.250000 TolExtX= 0.5 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 1 TolShowNull= 3 TolScale= 0.715000
TolName= TOL_1.0 TolType= 2 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 2 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.5 TolExtX= 0.5 TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 1 TolShowNull= 2 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= ISONUM TolType= 2 TolSepar_1= 3 TolSepar_2= 4 TolSymbolH= 2.5 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.5 TolExtX= -0.5 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 2 TolShowNull= 2 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= ISOALPH1 TolType= 5 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 0 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.5 TolExtX= 0.5 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= ISOALPH2 TolType= 7 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.250000 TolExtX= 0.5 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 0.715000
TolName= CPL_FLA1 TolType= 5 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 25.4 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 0 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.0 TolExtX= 0.285714 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= CPL_FLA3 TolType= 7 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 8 TolAnchorPt= 2 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.5 TolExtX= 0.285714 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 1.0
TolName= CPL_50A1 TolType= 5 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 25.4 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 0 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.0 TolExtX= 0.214286 TolExtY= 0.250000 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 0.5
TolName= CPL_50A3 TolType= 7 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 1.0 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 8 TolAnchorPt= 2 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.250000 TolExtX= 0.214286 TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 0.5
TolName= CPL_75A1 TolType= 5 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 25.4 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 0 TolPtOnValue= 9 TolAnchorPt= 3 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.0 TolExtX= 0.250000 TolExtY= 0.125000 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 0.750000
TolName= CPL_75A3 TolType= 7 TolSepar_1= 0 TolSepar_2= 0 TolSymbolH= 25.4 TolSepTo_1= 0 TolSepTo_2= 0 TolSepTo_3= 0 TolTrailing= 0 TolFractLine= 1 TolPtOnValue= 8 TolAnchorPt= 2 TolIntX= 0.0 TolIntY= 0.375000 TolExtX= 0.250000
TolExtY= 0.0 TolMergeSame= 0 TolShowNull= 0 TolScale= 0.750000
NDName= NUM.DIMM NDType= 1 NDUnit= 1 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 1 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0 NDFact_2= 0.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= NDSepar_2= NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 0.0 NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 1 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM,DIMM NDType= 1 NDUnit= 1 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 1 NDNulFac_2= 2

NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0 NDFact_2= 0.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= NDSepar_2= NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 0.0 NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 6 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 1 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM.DINC NDType= 1 NDUnit= 2 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 1 NDNulFac_2= 1 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0 NDFact_2= 0.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= NDSepar_2= NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 0.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 2 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 2 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 1 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM.DIMP NDType= 1 NDUnit= 2 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 1 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0 NDFact_2= 12.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= " NDSepar_2= ' NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 1.0 NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.2 NDSepPos_2= 0.2 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 2 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 2
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= ANS.DIMM NDType= 1 NDUnit= 1 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 1 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0 NDFact_2= 0.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= NDSepar_2= NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 0.0 NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 2 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 2 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 1 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= DISTMM NDType= 1 NDUnit= 1 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 2 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 0.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= NDSepar_2= NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 0.0 NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 1 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= DISTINC NDType= 1 NDUnit= 2 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 1 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0 NDFact_2= 0.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= " NDSepar_2= NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 0.0 NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 1 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= FEET-INC NDType= 1 NDUnit= 2 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 1 NDNulFac_2= 1 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0 NDFact_2= 12.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= " NDSepar_2= ' NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 1.0 NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 1 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 2 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM.ADMS NDType= 2 NDUnit= 4 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 2 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1/3600 NDFact_2= 1/60 NDFact_3= 1.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= " NDSepar_2= ' NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 1.0 NDSepScl_3= 1.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.2 NDSepPos_2= 0.2 NDSepPos_3= 0.2 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 3 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM,ADMS NDType= 2 NDUnit= 4 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 1 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1/3600 NDFact_2= 1/60 NDFact_3= 1.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= " NDSepar_2= ' NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 1.0 NDSepScl_3= 1.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.2 NDSepPos_2= 0.2 NDSepPos_3= 0.2 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 6 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 3 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= INC.ADMS NDType= 2 NDUnit= 4 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 1 NDNulFac_2= 1 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1/3600 NDFact_2= 1/60 NDFact_3= 1.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= " NDSepar_2= ' NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 1.0 NDSepScl_3= 1.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.2 NDSepPos_2= 0.2 NDSepPos_3= 0.2 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 2
NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 2 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 3 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM.ARAD NDType= 2 NDUnit= 3 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 2 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0 NDFact_2= 0.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= NDSepar_2= NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 0.0 NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 1 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= ANGLEDEC NDType= 2
NDUnit= 4 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 2 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1.0 NDFact_2= 0.0 NDFact_3= 0.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= NDSepar_2= NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 0.0 NDSepScl_3= 0.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 1 NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= ANGLEDMS NDType= 2 NDUnit= 4 NDGlobFact= 1.0 NDNulFac_1= 2 NDNulFac_2= 2 NDExise= 1 NDSep1000= 0 NDFact_1= 1/3600 NDFact_2= 1/60 NDFact_3= 1.0 NDValPos_1= 0.0 NDValPos_2= 0.0 NDValPos_3= 0.0 NDSepar_1= "
NDSepar_2= ' NDSepar_3= NDSepScl_1= 1.0 NDSepScl_2= 1.0 NDSepScl_3= 1.0 NDSepPos_1= 0.0 NDSepPos_2= 0.0 NDSepPos_3= 0.0 NDRestY= 0.0 NDFinZer= 1 NDSepNum= 11 NDTypFrac= 2 NDSepDen= 2 NDOperY= 0.5 NDNulOther= 1 NDResScl= 1.0 NDFact= 3 NDRestX= 0.5
Annotation Parameters
The annotation parameters are located in the Annotation node of the standard editor. They deal with the position of text leaders.
These parameters depend on a given parent standard.
Annotation Texts
Parameter Parent standard Parameter Name Value Description
Horizontal offset between the text and the leader extremity
ANSI only
Text > LeaderGap (mm)
Vertical offset between the bottom of the text and the horizontal part of the leader
ISO and JIS only
Text > (mm) LeaderVertSpace
Roughness Symbols
Parent Parameter standard Parameter Name Value Description
Specifies whether a given field should be displayed (Authorized) or hidden (Not authorized) in the Roughness Symbol dialog box Layout of the All Roughness > roughness standards Layout symbol
Authorized / Not authorized
Horizontal offset between the roughness and the leader extremity
ANSI only
Roughness > LeaderGap
(mm)
Vertical offset between the bottom of ISO and Roughness > the roughness JIS only LeaderVertSpace and the horizontal part of the leader
(mm)
Frame Definition
Frame Definition
This section deals with fixed-size frame definition. A frame is a property which can be applied to texts as well as certain types of annotations and dress up elements.
Defining Frames
Fixed-size frame definitions are located in the Frame node of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards. They specify the geometrical definition of fixed-size frames (as opposed to variable-size frame). Frame definitions available in the Standards editor are pre-defined, and their number is fixed. You cannot add additional instances of frame definitions. You can customize these definitions to suit your needs, by modifying one or several values of the parameters defining the style. Once defined, a fixed-size frame can be applied to any element which supports it, either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Text Properties toolbar. The fixed-size frame definitions include the following parameters:
q q q q q q q q q
Name: identifies the frame - DO NOT EDIT Type: defines the geometrical type of the frame - DO NOT EDIT Behavior - DO NOT EDIT Length Height Radius Offset Vertical Margin - NOT YET IMPLEMENTED Horizontal Margin - NOT YET IMPLEMENTED
The Name, Type and Behavior parameters MUST NOT BE EDITED, and are listed for information and compliance purposes only. The Vertical Margin and Horizontal Margin parameters are not implemented yet, and are listed for compliance purposes only. For each frame definition, all parameters are listed. However, depending on the frame type, not all parameters are used to define the frame, but only some of them.
Frame Definition
Parameter
Length Height Radius Offset
Description
Rectangle
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Frame Definition
Square
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Circle
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
ScoredCircle
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Diamond
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Triangle
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Frame Definition
RightFlag
Yes
Yes
N/A
Yes
LeftFlag
Yes
Yes
N/A
Yes
BothFlag
Yes
Yes
N/A
Yes
Oblong
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Ellipse
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Frame Definition
RightOblong
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
LeftOblong
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Sticking
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Set
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Fixed support
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Frame Definition
Nota
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
SymPart
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
SymSet
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
ScoredRectangle
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Parallelogram
Yes
Yes
N/A
Yes
Frame Definition
View Generation Definition

This section deals with view generation definition. This lets you customize settings that should be applied when generating views in a Generative Drafting context.
Defining View Generation Parameters

The view generation definition parameters are located in the View -> Generation node of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards. There are two parameters: q ThicknessIndex: this parameter lets you customize the line thickness for geometry which is automatically generated in views (this includes all geometry except fillet edges). Specify the number of the line thickness definition parameter, as specified in the Line Thickness node of the Standards editor. For more information, refer to Line Thickness Definition.
MaterialCutPattern: this parameter is used when generating views from parts which use a material to which a specific pattern is associated. r Select Material to use the pattern associated to a given material (instead of the patterns defined in the standards), even if this pattern is not defined in the standards.
r
Select Standard to use standard patterns only, instead of the pattern associated to a given material.
Line Thickness Definition

This section deals with line thickness definition. Line thickness is a property which can be applied to, and drives the representation of, almost all elements in a drawing, such as lines, curves, dimension lines, etc. (Line thickness cannot be applied to fonts and points).
In releases up to V5 R9 SP2, line thickness used to be defined in Tools -> Options > General -> Display -> Thickness & Font for the Drafting workbench as well as for other workbenches. For Drafting, line thickness is now defined in standards. Therefore, line thickness in drawings does not depend on the options defined in Tools -> Options, but on what is defined in the standards. When opening a drawing created with releases up to V5 R9 SP2 (i.e. a drawing which does not contain its own line thickness parameters), the line thickness options defined in Tools -> Options will be used. You can upgrade a CATDrawing document to this new standard format at any time, by performing the following operations in File -> Page Setup: - changing the standard to another standard (ISO -> ANSI for instance) - updating the current standard to the new format.
Defining Line Thickness

Line thickness definitions are located in the Line Thickness node of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards. There are 55 line thickness definitions in the Standards editor. You cannot add additional instances of line thickness definitions. Out of these 55 definitions, q line thickness definitions ranging from 1 to 8 are pre-defined with different parameters for each, and available.
q
line thickness definitions ranging from 9 to 55 are pre-defined with the same parameters for all, and unavailable.
You can customize these definitions to suit your needs, by modifying one or several values of the parameters defining the style. Once defined, a thickness can be applied to any element which supports it, either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Graphic Properties toolbar.
Parameter Availability
Description Indicates whether this definition is available for users to choose from: 1 = available 0 = unavailable. Specifies the size in pixels, with a maximum of 16; reflects the result displayed on screen. Specifies the size in millimeters; corresponds to the printed version.
Pixels mm
The Availability parameter specifies whether or not a given line thickness should be available in the thickness list for users to choose from, when creating or editing elements. Users will only be able to assign "available" line thickness definitions to these elements. However, existing element properties in drawings will not be affected: if an existing element is assigned a line thickness which is flagged as "unavailable" in the Standards editor, then this line thickness will be used for this element but it will not be available in the thickness list, so that users cannot apply it to other elements.
Linetype Definition
Linetype Definition
This section deals with linetype definition. Linetypes can be applied to, and drive the representation of, almost all elements in a drawing, such as lines, curves, dimension lines, etc. (Linetypes cannot be applied to fonts and points).
In releases before V5 R11, linetypes used to be defined in Tools -> Options -> General -> Display -> Linetype for the Drafting workbench as well as for other workbenches. For Drafting, linetypes are now defined in standards. Therefore, linetypes in drawings do not depend on the options defined in Tools -> Options, but on what is defined in the standards. When opening a drawing created with releases before V5 R11 (i.e. a drawing which does not contain its own linetype parameters), the linetype options defined in Tools -> Options will be used. You can upgrade a CATDrawing document to this new standard format at any time, by performing the following operations in File -> Page Setup: - changing the standard to another standard (ISO -> ANSI for instance) - updating the current standard to the new format.
Defining Linetypes
Linetype definitions are located in the LineTypes node of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards. Linetypes can either be mono-dimensional, i.e. defined by a sequence of non-continuous segments, or bi-dimensional, i.e. defined by a polyline. Once defined, a linetype can be applied to any element which supports it, either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Graphic Properties toolbar. There are 63 linetype definitions in the Standards editor. You cannot add additional instances of linetype definitions. Out of these 63 definitions, q linetype definitions ranging from 1 to 8 are pre-defined with different parameters for each and cannot be customized.
q
linetype definitions ranging from 9 to 19 are pre-defined with different parameters for each and can be customized. linetype definitions ranging from 20 to 63 are not pre-defined and can be customized.
You can customize the definitions of linetypes ranging from 9 to 63. To do this, proceed as follows: 1. Click on the LineTypes node of the Standards editor.
Linetype Definition
2. In the right-hand panel, double-click on the linetype you want to define. The Linetype editor appears for you to set the linetype properties. For more information on using the Linetype Editor, refer to Linetype in the Infrastructure User's Guide. 3. For each linetype definition, you can also specify whether or not a given linetype should be available in the linetypes list for users to choose from. In the right-hand panel, double-click on the number of the linetype you want to make unavailable. Perform the same operation to make an unavailable linetype available.
Users will only be able to assign "available" linetype definitions when creating or editing elements. However, existing element properties in drawings will not be affected: if an existing element is assigned a linetype which is flagged as "unavailable" in the Standards editor, then this linetype will be used for this element but it will not be available in the linetypes list, so that users cannot apply it to other elements.
Pattern Definition
Pattern Definition
This section deals with pattern definition. Patterns are used for area fills or in a Generative Drafting context when cutting through material in section views/cuts or breakout views, for example.
Defining Patterns
Pattern definitions are located in the Patterns node of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards. There are a number of pre-defined pattern definitions available in the Standards editor. You can customize these definitions to suit your needs, by modifying one or several values of the parameters defining the pattern. You can also add additional instances of pattern definitions. To create a new pattern definition, you must use the Standards editor. Select the Patterns type in the standards editor, and then click the Add Instance button to add a new pattern instance. This will create a sample pattern definition that you will then customize to suit your needs, by modifying one or several values of the parameters defining the pattern. Once defined or customized, a pattern can be applied to area fills (either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Graphic Properties toolbar), or it can be used when cutting through material in generative section views/cuts or breakout views, for example.
General remarks about patterns

q
If no pattern is defined in the standard XML file (i.e. if all instances of pattern definitions are removed from the standards editor), the software will automatically use its own selection of patterns. In this case, you will be able to edit all the properties of these patterns via Edit -> Properties or the Graphic Properties toolbar. You need to define at least one pattern for each type of pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring, image) if you want this specific pattern type to be available from Edit -> Properties or from the Graphic Properties toolbar. If you modify the standard of a drawing which already includes patterns (in area fills, sections or breakouts, for example), existing patterns will not changed, even when updating the drawing. However, if you create new area fills or if you create section views/cuts or breakout views from new parts in this drawing, the newlydefined patterns will be used. Some parts may use a material for which a specific pattern is associated. In this case, you can either choose to use the pattern associated to this material (instead of the patterns defined in the standards) even if this pattern is not defined in the
Pattern Definition
standards, or you can choose to use standard patterns only, instead of the pattern associated to this material. Refer to View Generation Definition for more information.
q
When editing the properties of a pattern associated with a part material (via Edit -> Properties or the Graphic Properties toolbar), the software offers its own selection of patterns, and not the patterns defined in the standard XML file.
Specific remarks about Image patterns

q
It is recommended that you place images that you want to use for the Image pattern in either one (or in both) of the directories set by the following variables: - CATStartupPath (images used by materials) - CATGraphicPath (images and icons). Make sure you do not remove the files which are present in these directories when placing your images there. For more information on the CATStartupPath and on the CATGraphicPath variables, refer to the Infrastructure Installation Guide. Make sure that images referenced in the standard XML file are present on the computer of each user who will use this standard. Once an Image pattern is used in a drawing, the corresponding file is embedded inside it. You do not need to export the image files used in a given drawing. Images used as patterns must be bitmap images (not vector).
Parameter
Parameter Name
Description Specifies whether users can modify all or only some pattern properties via Edit -> Properties. If Yes, all pattern properties can be modified in the Properties dialog box. If No: only some pattern properties will be available from the Properties dialog box, namely: - Hatching: users can only modify the angle, the pitch and the offset, and choose a new pattern. - Dotting: users can modify all properties. - Coloring: users can modify all properties. - Image: users can only use the images defined in the standards. They can modify the image angle and scale. Specifies preferred angle values that will be used when creating section views/cuts or breakout views. These values will be available via Edit -> Properties. Specifies the name of this pattern. Shows the current pattern type, in this case, hatching.
EditAvailability EditAvailability
AngleList
Angle Name Type
Pattern Definition
hatching
dotting
coloring
image
Defines the number of different hatchings to use Number of Hatching in this pattern. A tab will be created for each hatching, to let you define each one individually. For each hatching used in this pattern, specifies Angle the angle value in degrees. For each hatching used in this pattern, specifies Pitch the pitch in millimeters. For each hatching used in this pattern, specifies Offset the offset in millimeters. For each hatching used in this pattern, specifies Color the color. For each hatching used in this pattern, specifies Linetype the linetype. For each hatching used in this pattern, specifies Thickness the linetype thickness. Preview Lets you preview the resulting hatching pattern. Name Specifies the name of this pattern. Shows the current pattern type, in this case, Type dotting. Pitch Specifies the dotting pitch in millimeters. Color Specifies the dotting color. Zigzag Specifies whether dotting should zigzag. Preview Lets you preview the resulting dotting pattern. Name Specifies the name of this pattern. Shows the current pattern type, in this case, Type coloring. Color Specifies the color. Preview Lets you preview the resulting coloring pattern. Name Specifies the name of this pattern. Shows the current pattern type, in this case, Type image. Lets you select the image to use for this pattern. Refer to Specific remarks about Image patterns Browse button for more information. Angle Specifies the angle value in degrees. Scale Specifies the scale. Lets you preview the original image (not the Preview result after modifying the angle and scale).
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Setting Standard Styles
Setting Standard Styles

The Interactive Drafting workbench lets administrators set standard styles that will be used as default values when creating new elements. About styles Learn more about style management. Sheet styles Define the style(s) that will be used by default when creating sheets. Geometry styles Define the style(s) that will be used by default when creating geometry. Annotation styles Define the style(s) that will be used by default when creating annotations. Dimension styles Define the style(s) that will be used by default when creating dimensions. Dress-up and dress-up symbols styles Define the style(s) that will be used by default when using dress-up elements or dressup symbols. View callout styles Define the style(s) that will be used by default when using callouts. [ Back ] [ Up ]
About Styles
About Styles
Setting default values for elements using styles
Styles enable administrators to set the default values that will be applied to all properties of such elements as sheets, geometry, annotations, dimensions, dress-up and dress-up symbols, callouts, etc. The default values are defined and stored in the standard XML file, where a set of new parameters are defined, one parameter for each element property whose default value can be set. Default values are applied to elements as they are created. After creation, the user can modify element values as required. Modifying default values in the standard itself does NOT modify all the elements which have been created, but will only have an impact on the next elements to be created.
Styles replace the former management of default values (which was performed using the Set as Default / Use Default functionalities), for drawings: q created with version V5 R11 and later
q
created with versions up to V5 R10, whose standard has been updated in V5 R11
For drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 and NOT updated, default values still use the Set as Default / Use Default functionalities. For more information, refer to Setting Properties As Default and Using Properties Set as Default.
About Styles
Defining default values

The default values for all element properties are stored in a specific Styles section of the standard XML file, and are defined by the administrator. Styles are defined for all Drafting element types. By default, one style named Default is predefined in the standard files for each type of element. In this Default style, all element properties are pre-defined, enabling the administrator to set the value for this property. This Default style cannot be renamed. You can create your own styles (based on existing styles), as well as delete styles (providing there remains at least one style for each type of element).
Using default values

When creating a Drafting element, default values are automatically used. So, when users select a command that creates a specific type of element, the Style toolbar displays the current style for this type: q If only one style is defined for this type of element, then this style is displayed in the toolbar.
q
If several styles are defined for this type of element, then a style is defined as the current style and is displayed in the toolbar. Users can use the toolbar to select another style of the same type before creating the element.
The toolbar reflects the value of the style, but users can always modify the value of specific elements.
Re-applying a style to an object

About Styles
When a Drafting element is selected, the Styles toolbar displays the list of the styles that can be applied to it. If the user selects one of these, this style is re-applied to the element. This enables users to reset to its default values an element whose properties have been modified.
Customizing Styles
In this scenario, administrators will learn how to customize styles. This scenario provides an example of style customization. The procedure differs when customizing standard parameters (dimensions, annotations, dress-up elements, etc.). For more information, refer to About Standard Parameters. Note that a new style is always based on an existing style.
You want to create a new text style that you will use for adding notes. You want to use the Verdana font, and you want a frame around the text. You then want to delete the Default style.
Select Tools -> Standards to launch the standards editor. Choose the Drafting category, and then open the ISO.xml file from the drop-down list. 1. Expand the Styles node in the editor. 2. Select the Text node. 3. Click on the Create style button in the right-hand pane. The Create style dialog box is displayed. 4. Type the name of the new style in the appropriate field.
About Styles
The Duplicated from list is used when several styles exist for a given type of element to specify which existing style the new style should be based on. In our example, only the Default style exists. Therefore, the new style will be created based on this Default style. 5. Click OK. A new style called Note is added under the Text node in the editor.
6. Expand the Note node in the editor, and then select the Name node. 7. Type Verdana in the Name field in the right-hand pane.
About Styles
8. Expand the Text node in the editor, and then select the Frame node. 9. Choose Rectangle from the Frame drop-down list in the right-hand pane.
10. Click OK to save your modifications and exit the standards editor. 11. Now, start creating a new text in a sheet. In the Style toolbar, you can notice that two styles are now available: Default and Note.
11. Choose the Note style, click on the sheet to indicate where you want to position the note, type your note in the text editor and then click OK. The note is creating using the values you specified.
12. You will now delete the Default style. To do this, launch the standards editor again. 13. Expand the Styles node and then select the Text node. 14. Click on the Delete style button in the right-hand pane. The Delete style dialog box is displayed.
About Styles
15. Select Default as the style that you want to delete, and click OK. The Default style is deleted from the Text node in the editor.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Sheet Styles
Sheet Styles
This section deals with sheet styles. These let you define the default values that will be used when creating sheets.
Defining Sheet Styles

Sheet styles are located in the Styles -> Sheet node of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards. By default, a sheet style called Default is available. Style Parameter Name Description Real number that specifies the global scale that should be applied to the sheet. For example, if you want a global scale of 1:2, you should enter 0.5 and if you want a global scale of 1:1, you should enter 1. Specifies whether projection views should be created using the first angle standard, or the third angle standard. Choose a projection method from the list.
GlobalScale Sheet ProjectionMethod
Geometry Styles
Geometry Styles
This section deals with geometry styles. These let you define the default values that will be used when creating geometry.
Defining Geometry Styles

Geometry styles are located in the following nodes of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards: q Styles -> ConstructionPoint
q q q
Styles -> ConstructionCurve Styles -> Point Styles -> Curve
By default, a style called Default is available for each geometry style.
Style
Parameter Name Color
Description Specifies the color that should be used to represent construction points. Specifies the type (e.g., cross, dot, etc.) that should be used to represent construction points.
ConstructionPoint PointType
Color
Specifies the color that should be used to represent construction curves. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent construction curves.
LineType
ConstructionCurve
Geometry Styles
Thickness
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent construction curves. Specifies the color that should be used to represent control points in construction curves.
ControlPoints > Color
Specifies the type (e.g., cross, dot, etc.) that should be used to ControlPoints > PointType represent control points in construction curves.
Color Point PointType
Specifies the color that should be used to represent points. Specifies the type (e.g., cross, dot, etc.) that should be used to represent points.
Color
Specifies the color that should be used to represent curves. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent curves. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent curves. Specifies the color that should be used to represent control points in curves.
LineType
Curve
Thickness
ControlPoints > Color
Specifies the type (e.g., cross, ControlPoints > PointType dot, etc.) that should be used to represent control points in curves.
Geometry Styles
Annotation Styles
Annotation Styles
This section deals with annotation styles. These let you define the default values that will be used when creating annotations.
Defining Annotation Styles

Annotation styles are located in the following nodes of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards: q Styles -> Text
q q q q q q q
Styles -> Table Styles -> DatumFeature Styles -> DatumTarget Styles -> Tolerance Styles -> Balloon Styles -> RoughnessSymbol Styles -> WeldingSymbol
Text Styles
Parameter Name Font > Name Description Specifies the name of the font that should be used for texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for texts. Indicates whether or not texts should be underlined.
Font > Bold Font > Italic Font > Size Font > Underline
Annotation Styles
Font > Color Font > Ratio Font > Slant Font > Spacing Font > Pitch Font > Strikethrough Font > Overline
Specifies the color that should be used to display texts. Specifies the ratio that should be used to display texts. Specifies the slant that should be used to display texts. Specifies the spacing that should be used to display texts. Specifies the pitch (fixed or variable) that should be used to display texts. Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for texts. Indicates whether or not texts should be overlined. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used to represent texts. Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard. Specifies the text position in relation to the anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.). Specifies the text position in relation to the anchor line (e.g., top or bottom, cap or base, etc.). Specifies the spacing that should be used between two lines of text. Specifies the spacing mode between two lines of text (e.g., bottom to top, base to cap, etc.). Specifies a justification for the text. Specifies a width to wrap the text.
Text > Frame
Text > AnchorPoint Text > AnchorLine Text > LineSpacing Text > LineSpacingMode Text > Justification Text > WordWrap
Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D Text > OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the text orientation. Text > Angle Text > Mirroring Text > Backfield Specifies the text orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Specifies whether a symmetry, and which one, should be applied to the text. Specifies whether or not superscript and subscript texts should be aligned above one another.
Annotation Styles
Text > SuperscriptOffset Text > SuperscriptSize Text > SubscriptOffset Text > SubscriptSize Text > DisplayUnit Text > ApplyScale
Specifies the offset value (as a percentage of the font height) for superscript texts. Specifies the size (as a percentage of the font height) of superscript texts. Specifies the offset value (as a percentage of the font height) for subscript texts. Specifies the size (as a percentage of the font height) of subscript texts. Specifies whether or not texts should be displayed. Specifies whether or not the scale of the view or of the 2D reference component scale should be applied to the display of the text. Indicates whether or not blanking should be used. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent text frames and leaders. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent text frames and leaders. Specifies the color that should be used to represent text frames and leaders. Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that should be used for text leaders. Specifies the length of the first leader segment (i.e. the segment which is located before the first leader breakpoint).
Text > Blanking
Graphic > Thickness
Graphic > Linetype
Graphic > Color Leader > Symbol
Leader > Delta
Annotation Styles
Specifies the leader position in relation to the anchor point of the text frame. When the Leader > StandardBehavior parameter is set to Yes: - 0 positions the leader automatically on the closest anchor point. - 1 positions the leader on the left-hand anchor point. - 2 positions the leader on the right-hand anchor point. Leader > AnchorPoint When the Leader > StandardBehavior parameter is set to No: - 0 positions the leader automatically on the closest anchor point. - 1 to 8 position the leader on a specific anchor point. Open the TextLeaderAnchorPoints.CATDrawing document to know the value you should assign to the Leader > AnchorPoint parameter, depending on where you want to position the leader in relation to the anchor point, and on the type of frame used. Leader > StandardBehavior Specifies whether or not the position of text leaders can be different than left or right.
Table Styles
Parameter Name Cells > Font > Name Description Specifies the name of the font that should be used for text in table cells. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not texts in table cells should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not texts in table cells should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for texts in table cells.
Cells > Font > Bold Cells > Font > Italic Cells > Font > Size
Annotation Styles
Cells > Font > Underline Cells > Font > Color Cells > Font > Ratio Cells > Font > Slant Cells > Font > Spacing Cells > Font > Pitch Cells > Font > Strikethrough Cells > Font > Overline Cells > LineSpacing Cells > LineSpacingMode
Indicates whether or not texts in table cells should be underlined. Specifies the color that should be used to display texts in table cells. Specifies the ratio that should be used to display texts in table cells. Specifies the slant that should be used to display texts in table cells. Specifies the spacing that should be used to display texts in table cells. Specifies the pitch (fixed or variable) that should be used to display texts in table cells. Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for texts in table cells. Indicates whether or not texts in table cells should be overlined. Specifies the spacing that should be used between two lines of text in table cells. Specifies the spacing mode between two lines of text in table cells (e.g., bottom to top, base to cap, etc.). Specifies whether or not superscript and subscript texts in table cells should be aligned above one another. Specifies the offset value (as a percentage of the font height) for superscript texts in table cells . Specifies the size of superscript texts (as a percentage of the font height) in table cells . Specifies the offset value for subscript texts (as a percentage of the font height) in table cells . Specifies the size of subscript texts (as a percentage of the font height) in table cells. Specifies whether or not texts in table cells should be displayed. Specifies the horizontal alignment for the contents of table cells.
Cells > Backfield
Cells > SuperscriptOffset Cells > SuperscriptSize Cells > SubscriptOffset Cells > SubscriptSize Cells > DisplayUnit Cells > HorizontalAlignment
Annotation Styles
Cells > VerticalAlignment Cells > HorizontalMargin Cells > VerticalMargin AnchorPoint
Specifies the vertical alignment for the contents of table cells. Specifies the horizontal space between the contents and the inside border of a cell. Specifies the vertical space between the contents and the inside border of a cell. Specifies the position of the table in relation to the anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.). Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D component should be used as the reference for the orientation of the table. Specifies the orientation angle of the table according to the chosen reference. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent table frames and leaders. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent table frames and leaders. Specifies the color that should be used to represent table frames and leaders. Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that should be used for table leaders. Specifies the value of the delta that should be applied between a table and its leader. Indicates whether or not blanking should be used.
OrientationReference
Angle
Graphic > Thickness
Graphic > Linetype
Graphic > Color Leader > Symbol Leader > Delta Blanking
Annotation Styles
DatumFeature Styles
Parameter Name Description
Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the orientation of datum features. Angle AnchorPoint Specifies the orientation angle of datum features according to the chosen reference. Specifies the position of datum features in relation to the anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.). Choose the display mode you want for the datum feature: - Show value: displays the datum feature, its leader and its frame. - Show box: replaces the datum feature and its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader. - Hide value: hides the datum feature and its frame but displays its leader. Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that should be used for datum feature leaders. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for datum feature texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not datum feature texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not datum feature texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for datum feature texts. Specifies the color that should be used to represent datum feature frames, leaders and texts.
Display
Leader > Symbol
Font > Name
Font > Bold Font > Italic Font > Size Graphic > Color
Annotation Styles
DatumTarget Styles
Parameter Name Diameter Description Indicates whether or not the surface is plane on a disk.
Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the orientation of datum targets. Angle AnchorPoint Specifies the orientation angle of datum targets according to the chosen reference. Specifies the position of datum targets in relation to the anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.). Choose the display mode you want for the datum target: - Show value: displays the datum target, its leader and its frame. - Show box: replaces the datum target and its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader. - Hide value: hides the datum target and its frame but displays its leader. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for datum target texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not datum target texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not datum target texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for datum target texts. Specifies the color that should be used to represent datum target frames, leaders and texts.
Display
Font > Name
Annotation Styles
Tolerance Styles
Parameter Name Type Value UpperText LowerText Font > Name Description Specifies the tolerance type (e.g. straightness, circularity, etc.) Specifies the tolerance value. Specifies the tolerance upper text. Specifies the tolerance lower text. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for tolerances. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not tolerances should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not tolerances should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for tolerances. Specifies the ratio that should be used to display tolerances. Specifies the spacing that should be used to display tolerances. Specifies the tolerance text position in relation to the anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.).
Font > Bold Font > Italic Font > Size Font > Ratio Font > Spacing Text > AnchorPoint
Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D Text > OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the tolerance text orientation. Text > Angle Text > Blanking Specifies the tolerance text orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Indicates whether or not blanking should be used.
Annotation Styles
Graphic > Thickness
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent text frames and leaders. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent tolerance frames and leaders. Specifies the color that should be used to represent tolerance frames and leaders. Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that should be used for tolerance leaders. Specifies the value of the delta that should be applied between a tolerance and its leader. Specifies the leader position in relation to the anchor point of the tolerance frame. - 0 positions the leader automatically on the closest anchor point. - 1 positions the leader on the middle-left anchor point. - 2 positions the leader on the middle-right anchor point.
Graphic > Linetype
Graphic > Color Leader > Symbol Leader > Delta
Leader > AnchorPoint
Balloon Styles
Parameter Name Font > Name Description Specifies the name of the font that should be used for balloons. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not balloons should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not balloons should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for balloons. Indicates whether or not balloon fonts should be underlined. Specifies the ratio that should be used to display balloons.
Font > Bold Font > Italic Font > Size Font > Underline Font > Ratio
Annotation Styles
Font > Slant Font > Spacing Font > Pitch Font > Strikethrough Font > Overline
Specifies the slant that should be used to display balloons. Specifies the spacing that should be used to display balloons. Specifies the pitch (fixed or variable) that should be used to display balloons. Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used in balloons. Indicates whether or not overline should be used in balloons. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used to represent balloons. Note that fixedsize frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard. Specifies the balloon position in relation to the anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.). Specifies the balloon position in relation to the anchor line (e.g., top or bottom, cap or base, etc.).
Text > Frame
Text > AnchorPoint Text > AnchorLine
Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D Text > OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the balloon orientation. Text > Angle Text > Mirroring Specifies the balloon orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Specifies whether a symmetry, and which one, should be applied to the balloon. Specifies whether or not the scale of the view or of the 2D reference component scale should be applied to the display of the balloon. Choose the display mode you want for the balloon: - Show value: displays the balloon, its leader and its frame. - Show box: replaces the balloon and its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader. - Hide value: hides the balloon and its frame but displays its leader.
Text > ApplyScale
Text > Display
Annotation Styles
Text > Blanking
Indicates whether or not blanking should be used. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent balloon frames and leaders. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent balloon frames and leaders. Specifies the color that should be used to represent balloon frames, leaders and texts. Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that should be used for balloon leaders.
Graphic > Thickness
Graphic > Linetype
RoughnessSymbol Styles
Parameter Name Values > Type Values > Mode Values > SpecificationLine Values > AllAround Values > FirstRequirement Description Specifies the roughness symbol type (e.g. basic, machining required, machining prohibited) Specifies the roughness surface pattern (e.g. M, C, orthogonal, etc.) Indicates whether or not the specification line should be displayed. Indicates whether or not an all-around symbol should be added. Specifies the first requirement.
Values > SecondRequirement Specifies the second requirement. Values > OtherRequirement Values > ProductionMethod Values > MachiningAllowance Values > CutOff Values > Max Specifies another requirement. Specifies the production method. Specifies the machining allowance. Specifies the cutoff value. Specifies the maximum value.
Annotation Styles
Values > Min Text > AnchorPoint
Specifies the minimum value. Specifies the position of roughness symbol texts in relation to the anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.). Specifies the position of roughness symbol texts in relation to the anchor line (e.g., top or bottom, cap or base, etc.). Indicates whether or not blanking should be used. Specifies the color that should be used to represent roughness symbols. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent roughness symbol leaders. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent roughness symbol leaders. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for roughness symbols. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not roughness symbol fonts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not roughness symbol fonts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for roughness symbols. Specifies the ratio that should be used to display roughness symbols. Specifies the spacing that should be used to display roughness symbols. Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that should be used for roughness symbol leaders. Specifies the value of the delta that should be applied between a roughness symbol and its leader.
Text > AnchorLine Text > Blanking Graphic > Color
Graphic > Linetype
Graphic > Thickness
Font > Name
Font > Bold Font > Italic Font > Size Font > Ratio Font > Spacing Leader > Symbol Leader > Delta
Annotation Styles
Leader > AnchorPoint
Specifies the leader position in relation to the anchor point of the roughness symbol. - 0 positions the leader automatically on the closest anchor point. - 1 positions the leader on the middle-left anchor point. - 2 positions the leader on the middle-right anchor point.
WeldingSymbol Styles
Parameter Name Length1 Size1 WeldingType1 SurfaceShape1 FinishingMethod1 Length2 Size2 WeldingType2 SurfaceShape2 FinishingMethod2 Reference FieldWeld AllAround Description Specifies the length of the first welding symbol. Specifies the size of the first welding symbol. Specifies the type (e.g. SquareWelding, UGrooveWelding, etc.) of the first welding symbol. Specifies the surface shape (e.g. flat, convex, etc.) of the first welding symbol. Specifies the finishing method (e.g. grinding, hammering, etc.) of the first welding symbol. Specifies the length of the second welding symbol. Specifies the size of the second welding symbol. Specifies the type (e.g. SquareWelding, UGrooveWelding, etc.) of the second welding symbol. Specifies the surface shape (e.g. flat, convex, etc.) of the second welding symbol. Specifies the finishing method (e.g. grinding, hammering, etc.) of the second welding symbol. Specifies the reference of the welding symbol. Indicates whether or not a field weld should be added. Indicates whether or not a weld-all-around symbol should be added.
Annotation Styles
ReferenceLine
Indicates whether the reference line should be up or down. This parameter works only for the ISO standard. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used to represent welding symbols. Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard.
Text > Frame
Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D Text > OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the welding symbol orientation. Text > Angle Specifies the welding symbol orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for welding symbols. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not welding symbols should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not welding symbols should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for welding symbols. Specifies the ratio that should be used to display welding symbols. Specifies the spacing that should be used to display welding symbols. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent welding symbol frames and leaders. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent welding symbol frames and leaders. Specifies the color that should be used to represent welding symbol frames and leaders. Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that should be used for welding symbol leaders.
Font > Name
Font > Bold Font > Italic Font > Size Font > Ratio Font > Spacing
Graphic > Thickness
Graphic > Linetype
Annotation Styles
Dimension Styles
Dimension Styles
This section deals with dimension styles. These let you define the default values that will be used when creating different types of dimensions.
Defining Dimension Styles

Dimension styles are located in the following nodes of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards: q Styles -> DistanceLengthDimension
q q q q q
Styles -> AngleDimension Styles -> RadiusDimension Styles -> DiameterDimension Styles -> ChamferDimension Styles -> CoordinateDimension
DistanceLengthDimension Styles
Parameter Name Description Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D component should be used as the reference for the distance length dimension value orientation. Specifies the distance length dimension value orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Specifies the distance length dimension value position. Specifies the horizontal offset value for distance length dimension values.
Value > OrientationReference
Value > Angle
Value > Position
Value > OffsetX
Dimension Styles
Value > OffsetY
Specifies the vertical offset value for distance length dimension values. Choose the display mode you want for the distance length dimension: - Show value: displays the dimension, its leader and its frame. - Show box: replaces the dimension and its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader. - Hide value: hides the dimension and its frame but displays its leader. Indicates whether or not distance length dimensions should be driving dimensions. Specifies whether there will be a dual value display for the distance length dimension, and, if any, what kind (e.g. fractional, side-byside, etc.). Specifies the name of the main value display format. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the main value. Specifies whether the precision mode for the main value will be decimal or fractional. Specifies the precision for the main value. Specifies the name of the dual value display format, if any. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the dual value, if any.
Value > Display
Driving
DualValueDisplay
ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Name ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > DisplayedFactorNumber ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > PrecisionMode ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Precision ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Name ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > DisplayedFactorNumber
Dimension Styles
ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > PrecisionMode ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Precision
Specifies whether the precision mode for the dual value (if any) will be decimal or fractional. Specifies the precision for the dual value, if any. Indicates whether distance length dimensions will be fake dimensions, and, if yes, of what type (e.g. numerical or alphanumerical). Specifies the fake main value for distance length dimensions. Specifies the fake dual value for distance length dimensions. Specifies the tolerance main value format for distance length dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the tolerance dual value format for distance length dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance dual value.
Fake > Mode
Fake > MainValue Fake > DualValue
Tolerance > MainValue > Format
Tolerance > MainValue > AlphanumericalValue1
Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalLower Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalUpper
Tolerance > DualValue > Format
Tolerance > DualValue > AlphanumericalValue1
Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalLower
Dimension Styles
Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalUpper
Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance dual value. Specifies how the dimension line should be represented (e.g. regular, one-part leader, etc.) Specifies the color that should be used to display dimension lines. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent dimension lines. In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the Reference for positioning the second part of the dimension line. In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the angle for the second part of the dimension line in relation to its reference. Specifies the angle for the dimension line leader. Indicates whether or not the dimension line should reach the center. Specifies the type of the first symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for distance length dimensions. Specifies the color of the first symbol. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the first symbol.
DimensionLine > Representation
DimensionLine > Color
DimensionLine > Thickness
DimensionLine > SecondPartReference
DimensionLine > SecondPartAngle
DimensionLine > LeaderAngle
DimensionLine > TillCenter
Symbols > Symbol1 > Type
Symbols > Symbol1 > Color
Symbols > Symbol1 > Thickness
Dimension Styles
Specifies the type of the second symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for distance length dimensions. Specifies the color of the second symbol. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the second symbol. Specifies the symbol mode (e.g. inside, outside, etc.). Specifies the color of the distance length dimension extension line. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the distance length dimension extension line. Specifies the slant angle for the extension line. This angle is contained between 90 degrees and -90 degrees excluded, the default angle being 0 degree. Indicates whether or not the left extension line should be hidden. Specifies the overrun for the left extension line. Specifies the blanking for the left extension line. Indicates whether or not the right extension line should be hidden. Specifies the overrun for the right extension line. Specifies the blanking for the right extension line.
Symbols > SymbolMode ExtensionLine > Color
ExtensionLine > Thickness
ExtensionLine > SlantAngle
ExtensionLine > Left > Hide ExtensionLine > Left > Overrun ExtensionLine > Left > Blanking ExtensionLine > Right > Hide ExtensionLine > Right > Overrun ExtensionLine > Right > Blanking
Dimension Styles
ExtensionLine > Funnel > Display ExtensionLine > Funnel > Height ExtensionLine > Funnel > Width ExtensionLine > Funnel > Angle ExtensionLine > Funnel > Mode
Indicates whether or not the extension line should be displayed as a funnel. Specifies the funnel height. Specifies the funnel width. Specifies the funnel angle. Specifies the funnel mode (external or internal). Specifies whether the funnel should be applied on the left or bottom, on the right or top, or on both sides. Specifies the prefix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the suffix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed after the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed above the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed after the dual value of the associated text.
ExtensionLine > Funnel > Side
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Prefix AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Suffix
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Before
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > After
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Upper
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Lower
AssociatedTexts > DualValue > Before
AssociatedTexts > DualValue > After
Dimension Styles
AssociatedTexts > DualValue > Upper
Specifies the text that should be displayed above the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the dual value of the associated text. Specifies whether the frame subpart should display the value, the value and tolerance, etc. Specifies whether the framed group should display the main value, the dual value, both values separately, etc. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used for distance length dimensions. Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard. Specifies the main value scoring. Specifies the dual value scoring. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for distance length dimension texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not distance length dimension texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not distance length dimension texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for distance length dimension texts.
AssociatedTexts > DualValue > Lower
Framing > FramedSubpart
Framing > FramedGroup
Framing > Frame
Framing > MainValueScoring Framing > DualValueScoring
Font > Name
Font > Bold
Font > Italic
Font > Size
Dimension Styles
Font > Color
Specifies the color that should be used to display distance length dimension texts. Indicates whether or not distance length dimension texts should be underlined (in this case, overline cannot be applied). Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for distance length dimension texts. Indicates whether or not distance length dimension texts should be overlined (in this case, underline cannot be applied).
Font > Underline
Font > Strikethrough
Font > Overline
AngleDimension Styles
Parameter Name Description Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D component should be used as the reference for the angle dimension value orientation. Specifies the angle dimension value orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Specifies the angle dimension value position. Specifies the horizontal offset value for angle dimension values. Specifies the vertical offset value for angle dimension values.
Value > Angle
Value > Position Value > OffsetX Value > OffsetY
Dimension Styles
Value > Display
Choose the display mode you want for the angle dimension: - Show value: displays the dimension, its leader and its frame. - Show box: replaces the dimension and its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader. - Hide value: hides the dimension and its frame but displays its leader. Indicates whether or not angle dimensions should be driving dimensions. Specifies whether there will be a dual value display for the angle dimension, and, if any, what kind (e.g. fractional, side-by-side, etc.). Specifies the name of the main value display format. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the main value. Specifies whether the precision mode for the main value will be decimal or fractional. Specifies the precision for the main value. Specifies the name of the dual value display format, if any. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the dual value, if any. Specifies whether the precision mode for the dual value (if any) will be decimal or fractional. Specifies the precision for the dual value, if any.
Driving
DualValueDisplay
ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Name ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > DisplayedFactorNumber ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > PrecisionMode ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Precision ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Name ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > DisplayedFactorNumber ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > PrecisionMode ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Precision
Dimension Styles
Fake > Mode
Indicates whether angle dimensions will be fake dimensions, and, if yes, of what type (e.g. numerical or alphanumerical). Specifies the fake main value for angle dimensions. Specifies the fake dual value for angle dimensions. Specifies the tolerance main value format for angle dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the tolerance dual value format for angle dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance dual value. Specifies how the dimension line should be represented (e.g. regular, one-part leader, etc.) Specifies the color that should be used to display dimension lines.
Fake > MainValue Fake > DualValue Tolerance > MainValue > Format Tolerance > MainValue > AlphanumericalValue1
Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalLower Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalUpper Tolerance > DualValue > Format Tolerance > DualValue > AlphanumericalValue1
Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalLower Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalUpper
Dimension Styles
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent dimension lines. In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the Reference for positioning the second part of the dimension line. In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the angle for the second part of the dimension line in relation to its reference. Specifies the angle for the dimension line leader. Indicates whether or not the dimension line should reach the center. Specifies the type of the first symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for angle dimensions. Specifies the color of the first symbol. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the first symbol. Specifies the type of the second symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for angle dimensions. Specifies the color of the second symbol.
Dimension Styles
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the second symbol. Specifies the symbol mode (e.g. inside, outside, etc.). Specifies the color of the angle dimension extension line. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the angle dimension extension line. Specifies the slant angle for the extension line. This angle is contained between 90 degrees and -90 degrees excluded, the default angle being 0 degree. Indicates whether or not the left extension line should be hidden. Specifies the overrun for the left extension line. Specifies the blanking for the left extension line. Indicates whether or not the right extension line should be hidden. Specifies the overrun for the right extension line. Specifies the blanking for the right extension line. Indicates whether or not the extension line should be displayed as a funnel. Specifies the funnel height. Specifies the funnel width. Specifies the funnel angle.
Symbols > SymbolMode ExtensionLine > Color
ExtensionLine > Funnel > Display ExtensionLine > Funnel > Height ExtensionLine > Funnel > Width ExtensionLine > Funnel > Angle
Dimension Styles
ExtensionLine > Funnel > Mode
Specifies the funnel mode (external or internal). Specifies whether the funnel should be applied on the left or bottom, on the right or top, or on both sides. Specifies the prefix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the suffix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed after the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed above the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed after the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed above the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the dual value of the associated text. Specifies whether the frame subpart should display the value, the value and tolerance, etc.
Dimension Styles
Specifies whether the framed group should display the main value, the dual value, both values separately, etc. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used for angle dimensions. Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard. Specifies the main value scoring. Specifies the dual value scoring. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for angle dimension texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not angle dimension texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not angle dimension texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for angle dimension texts. Specifies the color that should be used to display angle dimension texts. Indicates whether or not angle dimension texts should be underlined (in this case, overline cannot be applied). Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for angle dimension texts.
Framing > Frame
Font > Name
Font > Bold
Font > Italic
Font > Size
Font > Color
Font > Underline
Dimension Styles
Font > Overline
Indicates whether or not angle dimension texts should be overlined (in this case, underline cannot be applied).
RadiusDimension Styles
Parameter Name Description Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D component should be used as the reference for the radius dimension value orientation. Specifies the radius dimension value orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Specifies the radius dimension value position. Specifies the horizontal offset value for radius dimension values. Specifies the vertical offset value for radius dimension values. Choose the display mode you want for the radius dimension: - Show value: displays the dimension, its leader and its frame. - Show box: replaces the dimension and its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader. - Hide value: hides the dimension and its frame but displays its leader.
Value > Angle
Value > Position Value > OffsetX Value > OffsetY
Value > Display
Dimension Styles
Driving
Indicates whether or not radius dimensions should be driving dimensions. Specifies whether there will be a dual value display for the radius dimension, and, if any, what kind (e.g. fractional, side-by-side, etc.). Specifies the name of the main value display format. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the main value. Specifies whether the precision mode for the main value will be decimal or fractional. Specifies the precision for the main value. Specifies the name of the dual value display format, if any. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the dual value, if any. Specifies whether the precision mode for the dual value (if any) will be decimal or fractional. Specifies the precision for the dual value, if any. Indicates whether radius dimensions will be fake dimensions, and, if yes, of what type (e.g. numerical or alphanumerical). Specifies the fake main value for radius dimensions. Specifies the fake dual value for radius dimensions.
DualValueDisplay
ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Name ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > DisplayedFactorNumber ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > PrecisionMode ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Precision ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Name ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > DisplayedFactorNumber ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > PrecisionMode ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Precision
Fake > Mode
Fake > MainValue Fake > DualValue
Dimension Styles
Tolerance > MainValue > Format Tolerance > MainValue > AlphanumericalValue1
Specifies the tolerance main value format for radius dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the tolerance dual value format for radius dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance dual value. Specifies how the dimension line should be represented (e.g. regular, one-part leader, etc.) Specifies the color that should be used to display dimension lines. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent dimension lines. In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the Reference for positioning the second part of the dimension line.
Dimension Styles
In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the angle for the second part of the dimension line in relation to its reference. Specifies the angle for the dimension line leader. Indicates whether or not the dimension line should reach the center. Specifies the type of the first symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for radius dimensions. Specifies the color of the first symbol. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the first symbol. Specifies the type of the second symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for radius dimensions. Specifies the color of the second symbol. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the second symbol. Specifies the symbol mode (e.g. inside, outside, etc.). Indicates whether or not the radius dimension should be foreshortened.
Symbols > SymbolMode
Foreshortened > IsForeshortened
Dimension Styles
Foreshortened > ValuePosition
Specifies whether the foreshortened dimension value should be positioned on the long segment or on the short segment. Specifies whether the foreshortened dimension orientation should be parallel or convergent. Specifies the foreshortened dimension angle. Specifies the foreshortened dimension ratio. Specifies the scale that should be used for the foreshortened dimension symbol. Indicates whether or not the foreshortened dimension end point can be moved. Specifies the color of the radius dimension extension line. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the radius dimension extension line. Specifies the slant angle for the extension line. This angle is contained between 90 degrees and -90 degrees excluded, the default angle being 0 degree. Indicates whether or not the left extension line should be hidden. Specifies the overrun for the left extension line. Specifies the blanking for the left extension line. Indicates whether or not the right extension line should be hidden.
Foreshortened > Orientation
Foreshortened > Angle Foreshortened > Ratio
Foreshortened > SymbolScale
Foreshortened > MoveEndPoint
ExtensionLine > Color
ExtensionLine > Left > Hide ExtensionLine > Left > Overrun ExtensionLine > Left > Blanking ExtensionLine > Right > Hide
Dimension Styles
ExtensionLine > Right > Overrun ExtensionLine > Right > Blanking
Specifies the overrun for the right extension line. Specifies the blanking for the right extension line. Indicates whether or not the extension line should be displayed as a funnel. Specifies the funnel height. Specifies the funnel width. Specifies the funnel angle. Specifies the funnel mode (external or internal). Specifies whether the funnel should be applied on the left or bottom, on the right or top, or on both sides. Specifies the prefix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the suffix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed after the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed above the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the dual value of the associated text.
Dimension Styles
Specifies the text that should be displayed after the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed above the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the dual value of the associated text. Specifies whether the frame subpart should display the value, the value and tolerance, etc. Specifies whether the framed group should display the main value, the dual value, both values separately, etc. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used for radius dimensions. Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard. Specifies the main value scoring. Specifies the dual value scoring. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for radius dimension texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not radius dimension texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not radius dimension texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for radius dimension texts.
Framing > Frame
Font > Name
Font > Bold
Font > Italic
Font > Size
Dimension Styles
Font > Color
Specifies the color that should be used to display radius dimension texts. Indicates whether or not radius dimension texts should be underlined (in this case, overline cannot be applied). Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for radius dimension texts. Indicates whether or not radius dimension texts should be overlined (in this case, underline cannot be applied).
Font > Underline
Font > Overline
DiameterDimension Styles
Parameter Name Description Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D component should be used as the reference for the diameter dimension value orientation. Specifies the diameter dimension value orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Specifies the diameter dimension value position. Specifies the horizontal offset value for diameter dimension values. Specifies the vertical offset value for diameter dimension values.
Value > Angle
Value > Position
Value > OffsetX
Value > OffsetY
Dimension Styles
Value > Display
Choose the display mode you want for the diameter dimension: - Show value: displays the dimension, its leader and its frame. - Show box: replaces the dimension and its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader. - Hide value: hides the dimension and its frame but displays its leader. Indicates whether or not diameter dimensions should be driving dimensions. Specifies whether there will be a dual value display for the diameter dimension, and, if any, what kind (e.g. fractional, side-byside, etc.). Specifies the name of the main value display format. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the main value. Specifies whether the precision mode for the main value will be decimal or fractional. Specifies the precision for the main value. Specifies the name of the dual value display format, if any. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the dual value, if any. Specifies whether the precision mode for the dual value (if any) will be decimal or fractional.
Driving
DualValueDisplay
ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Name ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > DisplayedFactorNumber ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > PrecisionMode ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Precision ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Name ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > DisplayedFactorNumber ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > PrecisionMode
Dimension Styles
ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Precision
Specifies the precision for the dual value, if any. Indicates whether diameter dimensions will be fake dimensions, and, if yes, of what type (e.g. numerical or alphanumerical). Specifies the fake main value for diameter dimensions. Specifies the fake dual value for diameter dimensions. Specifies the tolerance main value format for diameter dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the tolerance dual value format for diameter dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance dual value. Specifies how the dimension line should be represented (e.g. regular, one-part leader, etc.)
Fake > Mode
Fake > MainValue Fake > DualValue Tolerance > MainValue > Format Tolerance > MainValue > AlphanumericalValue1
Dimension Styles
Specifies the color that should be used to display dimension lines. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent dimension lines. In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the Reference for positioning the second part of the dimension line. In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the angle for the second part of the dimension line in relation to its reference. Specifies the angle for the dimension line leader. Indicates whether or not the dimension line should reach the center. Specifies the type of the first symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for diameter dimensions. Specifies the color of the first symbol. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the first symbol. Specifies the type of the second symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for diameter dimensions. Specifies the color of the second symbol.
Dimension Styles
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the second symbol. Specifies the color of the diameter dimension extension line. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the diameter dimension extension line. Specifies the slant angle for the extension line. This angle is contained between 90 degrees and -90 degrees excluded, the default angle being 0 degree. Indicates whether or not the left extension line should be hidden. Specifies the overrun for the left extension line. Specifies the blanking for the left extension line. Indicates whether or not the right extension line should be hidden. Specifies the overrun for the right extension line. Specifies the blanking for the right extension line. Indicates whether or not the extension line should be displayed as a funnel. Specifies the funnel height. Specifies the funnel width. Specifies the funnel angle. Specifies the funnel mode (external or internal).
Dimension Styles
Specifies whether the funnel should be applied on the left or bottom, on the right or top, or on both sides. Specifies the prefix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the suffix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed after the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed above the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed after the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed above the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the dual value of the associated text. Specifies whether the frame subpart should display the value, the value and tolerance, etc.
Dimension Styles
Specifies whether the framed group should display the main value, the dual value, both values separately, etc. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used for diameter dimensions. Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard. Specifies the main value scoring. Specifies the dual value scoring. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for diameter dimension texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not diameter dimension texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not diameter dimension texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for diameter dimension texts. Specifies the color that should be used to display diameter dimension texts. Indicates whether or not diameter dimension texts should be underlined (in this case, overline cannot be applied). Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for diameter dimension texts.
Framing > Frame
Font > Name
Font > Bold
Font > Italic
Font > Size
Font > Color
Font > Underline
Dimension Styles
Font > Overline
Indicates whether or not diameter dimension texts should be overlined (in this case, underline cannot be applied). Indicates whether or not diameter dimensions should be displayed as one-symbol dimensions (as opposed to two-symbols).
OneSymbolDiameter
ChamferDimension Styles
Parameter Name Description Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D component should be used as the reference for the chamfer dimension value orientation. Specifies the chamfer dimension value orientation angle according to the chosen reference. Specifies the chamfer dimension value position. Specifies the horizontal offset value for chamfer dimension values. Specifies the vertical offset value for chamfer dimension values.
Value > Angle
Value > Position
Value > OffsetX
Value > OffsetY
Dimension Styles
Value > Display
Choose the display mode you want for the chamfer dimension: - Show value: displays the dimension, its leader and its frame. - Show box: replaces the dimension and its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader. - Hide value: hides the dimension and its frame but displays its leader. Indicates whether or not chamfer dimensions should be driving dimensions. Specifies whether there will be a dual value display for the chamfer dimension, and, if any, what kind (e.g. fractional, side-by-side, etc.). Specifies the name of the main value display format. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the main value. Specifies whether the precision mode for the main value will be decimal or fractional. Specifies the precision for the main value. Specifies the name of the dual value display format, if any. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the dual value, if any.
Driving
DualValueDisplay
ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Name ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > DisplayedFactorNumber
ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > PrecisionMode
ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Precision
ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Name
ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > DisplayedFactorNumber
Dimension Styles
ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > PrecisionMode
Specifies whether the precision mode for the dual value (if any) will be decimal or fractional. Specifies the precision for the dual value, if any. Indicates whether chamfer dimensions will be fake dimensions, and, if yes, of what type (e.g. numerical or alphanumerical). Specifies the fake main value for chamfer dimensions. Specifies the fake dual value for chamfer dimensions. Specifies the tolerance main value format for chamfer dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance main value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance main value. Specifies the tolerance dual value format for chamfer dimensions. Specifies the first alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value.
ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Precision
Fake > Mode
Fake > MainValue
Fake > DualValue
Tolerance > MainValue > Format
Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalLower
Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalUpper
Tolerance > DualValue > Format
Dimension Styles
Specifies the second alphanumerical value for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the lower numerical for the tolerance dual value. Specifies the upper numerical for the tolerance dual value. Specifies how the dimension line should be represented (e.g. regular, one-part leader, etc.) Specifies the color that should be used to display dimension lines. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent dimension lines. In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the Reference for positioning the second part of the dimension line. In the case of Two parts or Leader two parts for the representation, specifies the angle for the second part of the dimension line in relation to its reference. Specifies the angle for the dimension line leader. Indicates whether or not the dimension line should reach the center.
Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalLower
Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalUpper
Dimension Styles
Specifies the type of the first symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for chamfer dimensions. Specifies the color of the first symbol. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the first symbol. Specifies the type of the second symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle, etc.) that should be used for chamfer dimensions. Specifies the color of the second symbol. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the second symbol. Specifies the color of the chamfer dimension extension line. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) of the chamfer dimension extension line. Specifies the slant angle for the extension line. This angle is contained between 90 degrees and -90 degrees excluded, the default angle being 0 degree.
Dimension Styles
ExtensionLine > Left > Hide
Indicates whether or not the left extension line should be hidden. Specifies the overrun for the left extension line. Specifies the blanking for the left extension line. Indicates whether or not the right extension line should be hidden. Specifies the overrun for the right extension line. Specifies the blanking for the right extension line. Indicates whether or not the extension line should be displayed as a funnel. Specifies the funnel height. Specifies the funnel width. Specifies the funnel angle. Specifies the funnel mode (external or internal). Specifies whether the funnel should be applied on the left or bottom, on the right or top, or on both sides. Specifies the prefix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the suffix for the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the main value of the associated text.
ExtensionLine > Left > Overrun ExtensionLine > Left > Blanking
ExtensionLine > Right > Hide
ExtensionLine > Right > Overrun ExtensionLine > Right > Blanking
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Prefix
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Suffix
Dimension Styles
Specifies the text that should be displayed after the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed above the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the main value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed before the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed after the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed above the dual value of the associated text. Specifies the text that should be displayed below the dual value of the associated text. Specifies whether the frame subpart should display the value, the value and tolerance, etc. Specifies whether the framed group should display the main value, the dual value, both values separately, etc.
Dimension Styles
Framing > Frame
Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixedsize square, etc.) that should be used for chamfer dimensions. Note that fixedsize frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard. Specifies the main value scoring. Specifies the dual value scoring. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for chamfer dimension texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not chamfer dimension texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not chamfer dimension texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for chamfer dimension texts. Specifies the color that should be used to display chamfer dimension texts. Indicates whether or not chamfer dimension texts should be underlined (in this case, overline cannot be applied). Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for chamfer dimension texts.
Font > Name
Font > Bold
Font > Italic
Font > Size
Font > Color
Font > Underline
Dimension Styles
Font > Overline
Indicates whether or not chamfer dimension texts should be overlined (in this case, underline cannot be applied). Specifies whether chamfer dimensions should be displayed with one extension line or with two extension lines. Specifies the value format for the chamfer dimension (e. g. length/length, angle/ length, etc.) Specifies the name of the secondary value display format for the main value. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the main value. Specifies the name of the secondary value display format for the dual value. Specifies the number of the displayed factor for the dual value.
Chamfer > DisplayType
Chamfer > ValueFormat
Chamfer > SecondaryValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Name Chamfer > SecondaryValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > DisplayedFactorNumber Chamfer > SecondaryValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Name Chamfer > SecondaryValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > DisplayedFactorNumber
CoordinateDimension Styles
Parameter Name Description
Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the coordinate dimension orientation. Angle Specifies the coordinate dimension orientation angle according to the chosen reference.
Dimension Styles
AnchorPoint
Specifies the coordinate dimension position in relation to the anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.). Choose the display mode you want for the coordinate dimension: - Show value: displays the dimension, its leader and its frame. - Show box: replaces the dimension and its frame by a rectangular box and displays its leader. - Hide value: hides the dimension and its frame but displays its leader. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for coordinate dimension texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default font will be used. Indicates whether or not coordinate dimension texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not coordinate dimension texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for coordinate dimension texts. Specifies the color that should be used to represent coordinate dimension texts frames and leaders. [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Display
Font > Name
Dress-up and Dress-up Symbols Styles

This section deals with dress-up and dress-up symbols styles. These let you define the default values that will be used when applying dress-up to elements.
Defining Dress-up and Dress-up Symbols Styles

Dress-up and dress-up symbols styles are located in the following nodes of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards: q Styles -> AreaFill
q q q q
Styles -> AxisLine Styles -> CenterLine Styles -> Thread Styles -> Arrow
By default, a style called Default is available for each dress-up/dress-up symbol style.
Style AreaFill
Parameter Name Pattern
Description Specifies the name of the pattern (as defined in the Patterns node of the current standard) that should be used for area fills.
Graphic > Color
Specifies the color that should be used to represent axis lines. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent axis lines.
Graphic > LineType
AxisLine
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in Graphic > Thickness the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent axis lines. Indicates whether or not the overrun between the element and its axis line is computed automatically. When set to Yes, this parameter overrides any value set for OverRunLength.
OverRunAuto
OverRunLength
When OverRunAuto is set to No, specifies the length of the overrun between the element and its axis line.
Graphic > Color
Specifies the color that should be used to represent center lines. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent center lines.
Graphic > LineType
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in Graphic > Thickness the LineThickness node of the current standard) CenterLine that should be used to represent center lines. Indicates whether or not the overrun between the element and its center line is computed automatically. When set to Yes, this parameter overrides any value set for OverRunLength. When OverRunAuto is set to No, specifies the length of the overrun between the element and its center line.
OverRunAuto
OverRunLength
Graphic > Color
Specifies the color that should be used to represent threads. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent threads.
Graphic > LineType
Thread
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in Graphic > Thickness the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent threads. Indicates whether or not the overrun between the element and its thread is computed automatically. When set to Yes, this parameter overrides any value set for OverRunLength. When OverRunAuto is set to No, specifies the length of the overrun between the element and its thread.
OverRunAuto
OverRunLength
Graphic > Color
Specifies the color that should be used to represent arrows. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent arrows.
Graphic > LineType
Arrow
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in Graphic > Thickness the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent arrows. HeadSymbol TailSymbol Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that should be used for arrow heads. Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that should be used for arrow tails.
View Callout Styles
View Callout Styles

This section deals with view callout styles. These let you define the default values that will be used for projection, section or detail view callouts.
Defining View Callout Styles

View callout styles are located in the following nodes of the Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards: q Styles -> ProjectionCallout
q q
Styles -> SectionCallout Styles -> DetailCallout
By default, a style called Default is available for each view callout style.
ProjectionCallout Styles
Parameter Name ViewScaleDependant Description Indicates whether or not projection view callouts should be dependent on the view scale. Indicates the type of callout (e.g., lines and arrows, lines, corners and arrows, etc.) that should be used to represent section view callouts. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent projection view callout profiles. Available values range from 1 to 7. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent projection view callout profiles. Available values range from 1 to 8.
Type
Profile > LineType
Profile > Thickness
View Callout Styles
Corners > Thickness
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent projection view callout corners. Available values range from 1 to 8. Specifies the length of projection view callout corners. Available values range from 10E-3 to 10E3mm. Indicates whether callout arrows are attached by the head or the tail of projection view callout arrows. Specifies the length of projection view callout arrows. Available values range from 10E-3 to 10E3mm. Specifies the angle used for projection view callout arrow heads. Available values range from 1 to 7. Available values range from 5 to 175. Specifies the type used for projection view callout arrow heads (e.g. filled arrow, blanked arrow, closed arrow or simple arrow). Specifies the length of projection view callout arrow heads. Available values range from 10E-3 to 10E3mm. Specifies the color that should be used to display projection view callouts. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for projection view callouts. Indicates whether or not projection view callouts texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not projection view callouts texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for projection view callouts texts. Indicates whether or not projection view callouts texts should be underlined. Specifies the color that should be used to display projection view callouts texts. Specifies the ratio that should be used to display projection view callouts texts.
Corners > Length Attachment Arrows > Length
Arrows > Head > Angle
Arrows > Head > Type
Arrows > Head > Length Color Text > Font > Name Text > Font > Bold Text > Font > Italic Text > Font > Size Text > Font > Underline Text > Font > Color Text > Font > Ratio
View Callout Styles
Text > Font > Slant Text > Font > Spacing Text > Font > Pitch Text > Font > Strikethrough Text > Font > Overline
Specifies the slant that should be used to display projection view callouts texts. Specifies the spacing that should be used to display projection view callouts texts. Specifies the pitch (fixed or variable) that should be used to display projection view callouts texts. Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for projection view callouts texts. Indicates whether or not projection view callouts texts should be overlined. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used to represent projection view callouts. Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard.
Text > Frame
SectionCallout Styles
Parameter Name ViewScaleDependant Description Indicates whether or not section view callouts should be dependent on the view scale. Indicates the type of callout (e.g., lines and arrows, lines, corners and arrows, etc.) that should be used to represent section view callouts. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent section view callout profiles. Available values range from 1 to 7. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent section view callout profiles. Available values range from 1 to 8.
Type
Profile > LineType
Profile > Thickness
View Callout Styles
Corners > Thickness
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent section view callout corners. Available values range from 1 to 8. Specifies the length of section view callout corners. Available values range from 10E-3 to 10E3mm. Indicates whether callout arrows are attached by the head or the tail of section view callout arrows. Specifies the length of section view callout arrows. Available values range from 10E-3 to 10E3mm. Specifies the angle used for section view callout arrow heads. Available values range from 5 to 175. Specifies the type used for section view callout arrow heads (e.g. filled arrow, blanked arrow, closed arrow or simple arrow). Specifies the length of section view callout arrow heads. Available values range from 10E-3 to 10E3mm. Specifies the color that should be used to display section view callouts. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for section view callouts. Indicates whether or not section view callouts texts should be displayed in bold. Indicates whether or not section view callouts texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for section view callouts texts. Indicates whether or not section view callouts texts should be underlined. Specifies the color that should be used to display section view callouts texts. Specifies the ratio that should be used to display section view callouts texts. Specifies the slant that should be used to display section view callouts texts.
Corners > Length Attachment Arrows > Length Arrows > Head > Angle
Arrows > Head > Type
Arrows > Head > Length Color Text > Font > Name Text > Font > Bold Text > Font > Italic Text > Font > Size Text > Font > Underline Text > Font > Color Text > Font > Ratio Text > Font > Slant
View Callout Styles
Text > Font > Spacing Text > Font > Pitch Text > Font > Strikethrough Text > Font > Overline
Specifies the spacing that should be used to display section view callouts texts. Specifies the pitch (fixed or variable) that should be used to display section view callouts texts. Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for section view callouts texts. Indicates whether or not section view callouts texts should be overlined. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used to represent section view callouts. Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard.
Text > Frame
DetailCallout Styles
Parameter Name Type Description Indicates the type of callout (e.g., leader text, circle, etc.) that should be used to represent detail view callouts. Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be used to represent detail view callouts. Available values range from 1 to 7. Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the LineThickness node of the current standard) that should be used to represent detail view callouts. Available values range from 1 to 8. Specifies the name of the font that should be used for detail view callouts. Indicates whether or not detail view callouts texts should be displayed in bold.
LineType
Thickness
Text > Font > Name Text > Font > Bold
View Callout Styles
Text > Font > Italic Text > Font > Size Text > Font > Underline Text > Font > Color Text > Font > Ratio Text > Font > Slant Text > Font > Spacing Text > Font > Pitch Text > Font > Strikethrough Text > Font > Overline
Indicates whether or not detail view callouts texts should be displayed in italic. Indicates the font size that should be used for detail view callouts texts. Indicates whether or not detail view callouts texts should be underlined. Specifies the color that should be used to display detail view callouts texts. Specifies the ratio that should be used to display detail view callouts texts. Specifies the slant that should be used to display detail view callouts texts. Specifies the spacing that should be used to display detail view callouts texts. Specifies the pitch (fixed or variable) that should be used to display detail view callouts texts. Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used for detail view callouts texts. Indicates whether or not detail view callouts texts should be overlined. Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square, fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that should be used to represent detail view callouts. Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of the current standard.
Text > Frame
[ Back ] [ Up ]
This section contains the list of the icons and menus which are specific to Interactive Drafting workbench. You may read these pages whenever you need to know greater details on these commands documented in other parts of the guide.
Command Board Interactive Drafting Menu Bar Interactive Drafting Toolbars
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugwd0000.htm10/19/2004 4:43:14 PM
Command Board
Command (and Option) Board

General
Grid Snap to Point Detected Constraints Analysis Display Mode Show Constraints Filter Generated Elements
Projected/Forced/True Length Dimension
Drawing
Sheets
New Sheet 2D Component Frame Creation New View Instantiate 2D Component
Views
Multiple View Projection Define the view plane
Dimensioning
Dimensions Dimension Edition
Tolerancing
Command Board
Dimensions Cumulated Dimensions Stacked Dimensions Length/Distance Dimensions
Create Interruption(s) Remove Interruption(s) Re-route Dimension
Datum Feature Geometrical Tolerances
Angle Dimensions
Technological Feature Dimensioning

Technological Feature Dimensions Length Technological Feature Dimensions Angle Technological Feature Dimensions Radius Technological Feature Dimensions Diameter Technological Feature Dimensions
Radius Dimensions Diameter Dimensions Chamfer Dimensions Thread Dimension Coordinate Dimensions Hole Dimension Table Points Coordinates Table
Annotations
Texts
Text Text with Leader Text Replicate Balloon Datum Target Text Template Placement Table
Symbols
Roughness Symbol Welding Symbol Geometry Weld
Command Board
Dress-up Elements
Axis and Threads
Center Line (No Reference) Center Line (Reference) Axis Line Thread (No Reference) Thread (Reference) Axis Line and Center Line
2D Component
Re-use a component from a catalog
Sketched Geometry
Points Points Using Coordinates Equidistant Points Create a point using intersection Create a point using projection Lines Create an infinite line Create a bi-tangent line Create a bisecting line Circles Three Point Circle Circles Using Coordinates Create a tri-tangent circle Arcs Splines Connect Parabola by Focus Hyperbola by Focus Conic Profiles Rectangles Oriented rectangles Parallelograms Hexagons Elongated Hole Curved Elongated Hole Keyhole Profiles
Command Board
Three point arc Three point arc starting with limits Ellipses
Operations on Sketched Geometry

Corners (Trim Both Elem.) Corners (Trim One Elem.) Corners (Trim No Elem.) Symmetrical Elements Translate Elements Rotate Elements Scale Elements Offset Elements Chamfer (Trim Both Elem.) Chamfer (Trim One Elem.) Chamfer (Trim No Elem.) Trim Both Elem. Trim One Elem. Trim (Quick Trim) Break Elements Trim (Close Elem.) Complement
Constraints
Quick dimensional/geometrical constraints Constraints (Dialog Box) Contact Constraint
Graphic Properties
q q q
line color line type line weight
Copy Object Format Pattern
Command Board
Line Type
one part dimension
Tolerance description Unit Precision
q q
two part dimension
two part leader
Text Properties
Font Name
Font Size Superscript Subscript Left Justification Center Justification Right Justification Frame Insert Symbol
Bold Italic Underline Strike-thru Over-line Anchor point
Command Board
Style
Style [ Up ] [ Next ]
Interactive Drafting Menu Bar

This chapter describes the various menus, submenus and items specific to the Interactive Drafting workbench. General menu commands are described in the Infrastructure User's Guide. Start File Edit View Insert Tools Windows Help
File
Save the document to the required format, customize the sheet and print it after modifying the settings if needed. Refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide. For... New See... Entering the Interactive Drafting workbench
Page Setup
Modifying a Sheet
Print
Printing
Edit
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugwd0100.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 4:44:27 PM
Manipulate selected objects. Also refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide. For... See...
Background
Creating a Frame Title Block
Insert
Insert various types of elements. For... Views... Drawing Dimensioning... See... Views Sheets Dimensions
Annotations... Dress Up... Geometry creation Geometry modification Picture
Annotations Dress-Up Elements 2D Geometry 2D Geometry Operations Images
Tools
Set user preferences. Also refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide. For... See...
Visualization Filters
Infrastructure User's Guide
Options
Customization
Standards
Standards Administration
Positioning
Lining up Dimensions
Multi View (2.5D)
Views
Reset All Defaults
Setting Properties as Default
Import External Format File Export and Import
Interactive Drafting Toolbars
Interactive Drafting Toolbars

This section describes the various icons of the Interactive Drafting workbench. The toolbars are located on each side of the workbench in the default set-up, except for the Tools palette which appears only when specific tools are available for a given command.
Toolbar Geometry Creation Geometry Modification Annotations Dress-Up Dimensioning Drawing Tools Tools Palette Properties Text Properties Graphic Properties Dimension Properties Style Create geometry
Purpose Transform existing 2D elements and add constraints to elements on the drawing Add annotations to existing views by creating them Add dress-up elements on the drawing Create all types of dimensions needed for your drawing Create sheets, views, 2D components and frame title blocks Activate display and positioning tools Use specific options or value fields available for a given command Modify the text properties Modify the graphic properties of all kind of features Modify the dimensions properties Set the style that will be used to create a new object
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Geometry Creation
Geometry Creation
See Points See Points using Coordinates See Equidistant Points See Intersection Points See Projection Points See Lines See Infinite Lines See Bi-Tangent Lines See Bisecting Lines See Lines Normal to Curves See Circles See Three Point Circle See Circles Using Coordinates See Tri-Tangent Circle See Arcs See Three Point Arc
See Three Point Arc with Limits See Ellipses See Profiles See Rectangles See Oriented rectangles See Parallelograms See Hexagons See Elongated Holes See Cylindrical Elongated Holes See Keyhole Profiles See Splines See Connect See Parabola by Focus See Hyperbola by Focus See Conic
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Geometry Modification
See Modifying a Corner See Modifying a Chamfer See Trimming Elements See Breaking Elements See Breaking and Trimming Elements See Closing Elements
See Creating Symmetrical Elements See Translating Elements See Rotating Elements See Scaling Elements See Offsetting Elements See Creating Quick Dimensional/ Geometrical Constraints See Creating Constraints using a Dialog Box See Creating Contact Constraints
See Complementing an Arc (Circle or Ellipse)
Annotations
Annotations
See Creating Text See Creating Text with Leader See Replicating a Text See Creating a Balloon See Creating a Datum Target See Annotate Drawings using Text Templates See Creating a Roughness Symbol See Creating a Welding Symbol See Creating a Geometry Weld See Creating/Modifying a Table [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Dress-Up
Dress-Up
See Creating a Center Line and Modifying a Center line See Creating a Center Line and Modifying a Center line See Creating a Thread See Creating a Thread See Creating an Axis Line See Creating an Area-Fill See Creating an Arrow
Dimensioning
Dimensioning
See Creating a Dimension See Creating a Cumulated Dimension See Creating a Stacked Dimension See Creating Explicit Dimensions See Creating Explicit Dimensions See Creating Explicit Dimensions See Creating Explicit Dimensions See Creating a Chamfer Dimension See Creating Associative Thread Dimensions See Creating a Coordinate Dimension See Creating a Hole Dimension Table See Creating a Points Coordinates Table
Dimensioning
See Creating Dimensions for Technological Features See Creating Dimensions for Technological Features See Creating Dimensions for Technological Features See Creating Dimensions for Technological Features See Creating Dimensions for Technological Features See Re-routing Dimensions See Interrupting Extension Lines See Interrupting Extension Lines See Creating a Geometrical Tolerance See Creating a Datum Feature [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Text Properties
Text Properties
See Setting Text Properties
Graphic Properties
Graphic Properties
See Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties
See Before You Begin (Dimensions)
Tools
Tools
See Using Tools See Using Tools See Using Tools See Constraints See Constraints See Using Tools
Style
Style
This toolbar varies depending on whether the drawing was created with versions up to V5 R10 or was created/updated with version V5 R11 and later.
Drawings created/updated with version V5 R11 and later

This toolbar is available with drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, or with drawings created with older versions and whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. These drawings use the styles which are defined in the standard used by the drawing. Standards are managed by the administrator. See Using Standard-Defined Styles
Drawings created with versions up to V5 R10

This toolbar is only available with drawings created with versions up to V5 R10. See Using Default Values
Drawing
Drawing
See Defining a Sheet See Creating a 2D Component See Creating Views See Re-Using a 2D Component See Creating a Frame Title Block
Tools Palette
Tools Palette
The options or fields available in the Tools Palette depend on the selected command. Only a few examples are provided here.
See Using Tools
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Customizing for Drafting
Customizing for Drafting

These sections explain how to customize settings for Drafting. Customizing for Interactive Drafting Customizing for Generative Drafting
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudr0000.htm10/19/2004 4:51:55 PM
General Settings
General Settings
This task shows you how to set general settings to be used in the Interactive Drafting workbench. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the General tab. It contains several categories of options: q Ruler
q
Grid Rotation Colors Tree View Axis
Ruler
Show ruler Check this option to display the ruler in your sheet. It means you visualize the cursor coordinates as you are drawing.
Grid
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudr0002.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 4:52:08 PM
General Settings
Display Check this option to display the grid in your session. You will note that this capability is also available via the Drafting Options toolbar. Snap to point You need to check this option if the geometry needs to begin or end on the points of the grid. Allow Distortions Check this option to apply different graduations and spacing between H and V. H; V; Primary spacing; Graduations To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the H and V fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid.
Rotation
Rotation Snap Angle Specify the angle that should be used when rotating text elements (text, frame, or leader) using snapping. In other words, this option defines the snapping value used when rotating an element using the Select or Rotate commands. Automatic Snapping This option automatically uses snapping when rotating an element.
General Settings
Colors
You can customize given options for modifying the drawing background color. You can do this at any time.
Sheet background Choose the color that will be used for the sheet background. Detail background Choose the color that will be used for the background of 2D components. Graduated color If you want the sheet background and/or the detail (i.e. 2D component) background to be graduated, check the associated box. For example, if you customize the color type as shown below:
General Settings
Tree
You can choose whether or not parameters and relations should be displayed in the specification tree.
Display parameters Check this option to display in the specification tree the formula parameters used in the drawing. Display relations Check this option to display in the specification tree the relation parameters used in the drawing.
View axis
General Settings
Display in the current view Check this box if you want the view axis to be displayed when you activate a view. Zoomable Check this box if you want to be able to zoom view axes (as you can do with geometry). Reference size Enter the size that you want to use as a reference to display view axes size. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
View and Sheet Layout Settings

You can customize given options when creating views or when adding sheets. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Layout tab. It contains the following sets of options: q View Creation
q
New Sheet Background View Section / Projection Callout
View creation
View name Check this box if you want the view name to be created automatically when creating views. Scaling factor Check this box if you want the scaling factor to be created automatically when creating views. View frame Check this box if you want the view frame to be created automatically
when creating views. Propagation of broken and breakout specifications Check this box if you want broken and breakout specifications to be reproduced. Auxiliary and section views orientation according to profile You can decide if auxiliary and section views will be oriented according to the profile. In this case, the X axis will be parallel to the profile.
New sheet
Copy background view Check this box if you want a background view to be copied into newly created sheets. Source sheet Specify whether you want the source sheet for the background view to be the first sheet of the current drawing, or a sheet from another drawing by selecting the appropriate option.
Background view
Directory for frame and title block You can specify the path to the directory containing the frame and title block macros.
Section/Projection Callout
Size not dependent on view scale Check this option if you do not want the size of projection and section callout elements to be dependent on the view scale. This option will apply to newly created callouts, i.e. selecting this option will not have any impact on new callouts. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.
View Generation Settings

You can customize given options for controlling geometry and dress-up behavior when generating views, as well as view generation.
1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the View tab. It contains several categories of options: q Geometry generation / Dress-up
q
View generation
Geometry generation / Dress-up
This category of options lets you specify what kind of geometry and dress-up elements you want to generate when generating views. Generate axis Select to generate axis lines. Generate threads Select this option to generate threads. Generate center lines Select this option to generate center lines. Generate hidden lines Select this option to generate hidden lines. Generate fillets Select this option to generate fillets. Additionally, click the Configure button to configure fillets generation. You can choose to generate either of the following types of fillets: Boundaries Thin lines, representing the mathematical limits of the fillets. Boundaries will not be projected if they correspond to two faces which are continuous in curvature. They will be projected only if they correspond to a smooth edge which is situated between two faces whose curvature radii vary. This mode will be used automatically to represent a connection between two faces which are not joined by a fillet, no matter what option you select.
Symbolic Original edges, projected in a direction that is normal to each corresponding surface.
Approximated Original Edges Original edges, at the intersection of the two surfaces joined by the fillet.
Projected Original Edges Original edges, projected on fillet surfaces in the direction of the view projection.
This projection mode is equivalent to the CATIA V4 fillet projection mode. Inherit 3D colors Select this option if you want the colors of a part to be automatically generated onto the views. In the case of parts whose color is white, the views generated with this option selected will be white, and will therefore not be properly displayed.
Project 3D Wireframe Select this option to visualize both the wireframe and the geometry on generated views. Additionally, click the Configure button to configure the 3D wireframe projection mode. You can choose whether projected 3D wireframe can be hidden (in some cases, depending on the projection angle, part or all of 3D wireframe will possibly be hidden) or is always visible (3D wireframe will be visible in all cases, independently of the projection angle).
Project 3D Points Select this option to project points from 3D (no construction element). Additionally, click the Configure button to select the type of points visualized in the projected drawing. In the 3D Point Projection dialog box, you can choose between keeping the symbols that are used in the 3D or using a new symbol.
Apply 3D specification Select this option to specify that, in an assembly, given parts will or will not be sectioned into section views or breakout views (Generative Drafting workbench). For this, you select one view, then the Edit -> Properties command from the menu bar from the Assembly Design workbench (Mechanical tab, Drafting properties options) and either activate or deactivate the Not cut in section views options.
View Linetype Click the Configure button to configure linetypes for specific types of views: section view, detail view, broken view, breakout view, skin section view (in the case of wireframes and surfaces). In the Linetype and Thickness dialog box, select the line type and the thickness you want for each type of view, from the associated fields. Click Close when you are done.
If you choose the zigzag linetype (linetype #8), note that this linetype is just a graphical dress-up of the view. This means that if one line is relimited on the breakout line, then it will be relimited on the theoretical line as shown here, and not on the visualized zigzag line.
View generation
View generation mode From this list, select how you want to generate views. Exact view Generates exact views from the Design mode, i.e. views for which the geometry is available. The exact generation mode will be the best option in most cases: q This is the fastest generation mode.
q q
All types of views can be generated using this option. All functionalities (dress-up, dimensions, annotations, etc.) are available.
However, there are a few cases in which choosing the exact generation mode will not be appropriate: q In the case of sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data, generating exact views may consume too much memory.
q
Polyhedral elements (such as dittos, surfaces, etc.) from V4 .model documents are not supported.
CGR Generates views using the CGR format (CATIA Graphical Representation). CGR corresponds to a data format containing a graphical representation of the geometry only, which is available with the Visualization mode (as opposed to the exact geometry, which is available with the Design mode). With CGR, only the external appearance of the component is used and displayed; the geometry is not available. The corresponding .cgr file, if it exists, is inserted from the cache system. CGR views are not as high in quality as exact views, but they consume much less memory during the generation. This may be useful when dealing with sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data. However, this generation mode is rather slow. For more information about the advantages and restrictions associated with the CGR generation mode, see Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate modes below.
Approximate You can now generate views in Approximate mode. Although Approximate views are not as high in precision and quality as exact views, this generation mode dramatically reduces memory consumption. Performances may also be improved, depending on how you fine-tune precision. Therefore, the Approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data. The Approximate mode offers about the same advantages and restrictions than the CGR generation mode (see above). However, there are some differences: q Approximate consumes even less memory than CGR.
q
Approximate is faster than CGR, but performances largely depend on fine-tuning. Approximate provides more approximate results than CGR, but these results largely depend on how you fine-tune precision.
You can fine-tune the generation options according to your needs. Click the Configure button. In the dialog box, move the cursor to set the precision (i.e. the level of detail) with respect to the performances (i.e. generation time). The higher the precision, the lower the performances, and vice-versa. In any case, memory consumption will not be impacted. Click Close when you are done. For more information about the advantages and restrictions associated with the Approximate generation mode, see Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate modes just below. Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate Using CGR or Approximate to generate views offers the following advantages: q Optimize memory consumption when generating and handling projection views for large products or assemblies.
q
Generate views from third-party data (such as MultiCAD), as well as from polyhedral elements (such as dittos, surfaces, etc.) in V4 .model documents.
However, the CGR or Approximate generation mode involves a number of restrictions: q You cannot generate section views, section cuts, detail views, detail view profile, breakout views, unfolded views and views from 3D.

q
You cannot project 3D elements such as wireframe, points, etc. on CGR or Approximate views. CGR or Approximate views cannot contain dress-up elements (axis, center lines, threads). Auxiliary view profiles, annotations, dimensions, etc. are not associative on CGR or Approximate views. CGR or Approximate views being only a graphical representation of the geometry, only line segments are generated in such views. As dimensions are not associative, the only elements that can be dimensioned are these line segments. As a result, it is impossible to create certain types of radius or diameter dimensions in such views; to put it simply, you cannot create radius and diameter dimensions on elements other than these line segments.
As a consequence of these restrictions, selecting either the CGR or the Approximate option disables a number of other options on the View and on the Generation tab. Raster Generates views as images. This enables you to quickly generate overall views for large products or assemblies, regardless of drawing quality. Such views are associative to the 3D geometry and can be updated when the part or product changes. Raster views offer a number of restrictions: q You cannot generate the following types of views using this option: view from 3D, section views, section cuts, detail views, breakout views, unfolded views.
q
Raster views cannot contain dress-up elements (axis, center lines, threads). Creating dimensions is impossible. Generally speaking, all commands requiring the selection of geometry are not available. Raster views cannot be edited (you can work around this by isolating the view: double-clicking the image will then launch an image editor).
q q
As a consequence of these restrictions, selecting this option disables a number of other options on the View and on the Generation tab.
To optimize disk space and memory consumption, it is recommended that you do not select the Inherit 3D colors option when generating views as images. Click the Configure button to configure the raster mode options. From the Mode list, select the mode that you want to use: Dynamic Hidden Line Removal, Shading, Shading with edges. These modes are equivalent to the 3D rendering styles. For more information, refer to Using Rendering Styles in the Infrastructure User's Guide. Now, set the level of detail (i.e. the definition, in dpi) that will respectively be used to visualize and to print the drawing. You can choose between three pre-defined modes (Low quality, Normal quality and High quality) and a custom mode (Customize). If you choose to customize the definition yourself, set the dpi for visualization and for print in the appropriate fields. Click Close when you are done.
The level of detail applies to the scale of the view. In some cases (when the view would print with a considerable height or width), there may be too many pixels to generate the view. In this case, the view will be displayed as a red cross-mark. If this happens, try to reduce the scale of the view and/or the level of detail. If you want the colors of a part to be used when generating Raster views using the Shading or Shading with edges mode, remember to select the Inherit 3D Colors option. Otherwise, the view will be generated using shades of grey.
To further improve performance when generating Raster or CGR views, we recommend you work in Visualization mode: to do this, in the Options dialog box, go to Infrastructure -> Product Structure -> Cache Management tab and select Work with the cache system. (For more information, see Customizing Cache Settings in the Infrastructure User's Guide and Visualization mode in the Product Structure User's Guide.)
Exact preview for view generation Make sure this option is selected if you want an exact preview when generating views. As a result, the part or product will be loaded in Design mode when previewing the view to generate, even if you are working in Visualization mode. Deselect this option to get a quick preview of the 3D document when generating views. In this case, a part or product open in Visualization mode will not be loaded in Design mode for the preview, which optimizes memory consumption.
Only generate parts larger than To specify that you only want to generate parts which are larger than a certain size, select this option and indicate the appropriate size by providing a value in millimeters in the appropriate field.
Enable occlusion culling Select this option if you want to save memory when generating exact views from an assembly which is loaded in Visualization mode (i.e. when the Work with the cache system option is active). This will load only the parts which will be seen in the resulting view (instead of loading all of them, which is the case by default), which optimizes memory consumption and CPU usage. To ensure the efficiency of this option, make sure that the Exact preview for view generation option is not selected. In the case of an assembly which is loaded in Design mode, or in the case of a part, the Enable occlusion culling option will help increase performance by reducing CPU usage.
Keep the following restrictions in mind when selecting the Enable occlusion culling option: q The Project 3D points option will be disabled.
q
The only option available for Project 3D wireframe is Can be hidden. If you choose to project 3D wireframe, you will need to make sure that your wireframe elements have been taken into account when the CGR data was created: this is the case if you activated the Save lineic elements in cache option from Tools -> Options -> General -> Display -> Performances before the creation of CGR data (i.e. before you launched the part or product in Visualization mode). If not, you need to activate the Save lineic elements in cache option and then recreate the CGR data. To do this: 1. Close all open parts and products and exit the application. 2. Delete your CGR data from the cache. (The cache location is specified in Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure -> Cache Management tab, Path to the local cache field.) 3. Re-open the product in Visualization mode.
4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.
These options are also available in the Properties dialog box for each view: from the contextual menu, click Properties, click the View tab and then select the desired options.
Generation
Generation
You can customize given options for controlling dimension and balloon generation in generative views. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Generation tab. It contains several categories of options: q Dimension generation
q
Balloon generation
Dimension generation
Generated dimensions are positioned according to the most representative views. In other words, a dimension will appear on a view so that it does not need to be created on another view. The dimensions are generated on the views on the condition the settings were previously switched to the dimension generation option. Generate dimensions when updating the sheet Check this option to generate dimensions automatically each time you update the sheet. Filters before generation
Generation
Check this option to display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before generation. This enables you to specify what type of dimensions you want to generate. Also, in assembly or product views, this lets you indicate what parts you want to generate dimensions for. Automatic positioning after generation Check this option if you want the dimensions to be automatically positioned after generation. Allow automatic transfer between views Check this option if you want dimensions to be automatically transferred to the most appropriate view when regenerating dimensions. Analysis after generation Check this option to display the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box after generation. Generate dimensions from parts included in assembly views Check this option to extract 3D part constraints (on top of assembly constraints) when generating product dimensions. This option is particularly useful if you want to generate dimensions for all parts included in assembly or product views, without displaying the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before dimension generation. Note that if you display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before generating dimensions, you will need to indicate what parts you want to generate dimensions for (whether this option is selected or not). Delay between generations for step-by-step mode Specify the delay between each dimension generation when generating dimensions step by step.
Balloon generation
Generation
Creation of a balloon for each instance of a product If you select this option, a balloon will be generated for each instance of a component: therefore, if a component is used two times within a product, then the balloon will be generated twice. If you leave this box unselected, a single balloon will be generated for all instances of the same component, when a component is used several times within a part or product. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.
Geometry Creation Settings
Geometry Creation
You can customize given options when creating 2D geometry, either or not using autodetection (or SmartPick), or still adding constraints to this geometry. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Geometry tab. It contains several categories of options: q Geometry
q
Constraints creation Constraints Display Colors
Geometry
Create circle and ellipse centers You can decide whether or not you want to create centers when creating circles or ellipses. By default, this option is activated. Just uncheck it if you do not need to create circle and ellipse centers. Allow direct manipulation Select this option to be able to move geometry using the mouse. When moving geometry, you can move either the minimum number of elements, the maximum number of elements, or still the minimum number by modifying the shape of elements, if needed. Click the Solving mode... button to configure manipulation.
The dialog box that appears offers the following options as regards the solving mode: Solving mode for moving elements Standard mode You move as many elements as possible and also respect existing constraints. Minimum move You move as few elements as possible and also respect existing constraints. Relaxation You move elements by re-distributing them over the sketch, globally speaking. This method solves element moving by minimizing energy cost. Drag elements end points included Furthermore, you can choose to drag elements along with their end points by checking this box.
Show H and V fields in the Tools Palette You can show the H and V fields in the Tools Palette when creating 2D geometry or when offsetting elements. Leaving the option unchecked enables you to directly enter the value corresponding to the type of element you are creating: for example, the length when creating a line, the radius when creating a circle or the offset value when offsetting elements. When a command (such as the Point creation command) does not have any parameters other than H and V, then these two fields will remain in the Tools Palette, whether you select this option or not.
Create end points when duplicating generated geometry When duplicating geometry that was generated from the 3D, you can choose to create end points for these geometrical elements.
Constraints creation
Create detected and feature-based constraints Select this option if you want to create the geometrical or dimensional constraints detected by the SmartPick tool. If all of the detection options are unchecked, the Create detected and feature-based constraints option is not available. If this detection option is unchecked, the Create detected constraints option will be inactive by default in the Tools toolbar. You will be able to activate it at any time. SmartPick... (switch button) As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of
several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired detections by clicking the SmartPick... button.
The SmartPick dialog box provides these options: q Support lines and circles
q q q
Alignment Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency Horizontality and verticality
Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when sketching. Disabling SmartPick completely (i.e. unchecking all options in the SmartPick dialog box) is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable SmartPick to concentrate only on the geometry.
Constraints Display
Display constraints Check this option to visualize the logical constraints specific to the elements. Note that if the Display constraints option is unchecked, the other options in this category are not available. Reference size Specify the size that will be used as a reference to display constraints symbols. Changing this reference size will modify the size of all constraints representations. Constraints color Choose the color that will be used to display constraints. Constraints types... (switch button) Click this button to define which types of constraints you will visualize as you create the geometry.
The Constraints types dialog box provides these options: q Horizontal

q q q q q q q
Vertical Parallelism Perpendicularity Concentricity Coincidence Tangency Symmetry
Uncheck the types of constraints you do not want to visualize as you create the geometry.
Colors
Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond to colors illustrating: q Graphical properties Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools->Options dialog box. OR
q
Constraint diagnosis Colors that represent constraint diagnoses are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnoses. As a result, as soon as the diagnosis is solved, the element is assigned the color as defined in the Tools->Options dialog box.
Visualization of diagnosis Select this option if you want over-constrained, inconsistent, notchanged or iso-constrained elements to be identified using specific colors. Then, click the Colors... button to configure these colors.
In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements: Over-constrained elements The dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied to the geometry. Inconsistent elements At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when elements are under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to a solution. Not-changed elements Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated. Iso-constrained elements All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its geometrical support. Other color of the elements Click the Colors... button to configure the colors of other elements.
In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements: Isolated elements Use-edge (projection, intersection, etc.) that does not depend on the 3D anymore. Protected elements Non-modifiable elements. Construction elements A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch. This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives. SmartPick Colors used for SmartPick assistant elements and symbols. When opening a drawing, colors are not recomputed. Colors will not be displayed until you create another element or move the geometry.
Dimension Creation
Dimension Creation
You can customize given options when creating or re-positioning dimensions. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Dimension tab. It contains several categories of options: q Dimension Creation
q
Move Line-Up Analysis Display Mode
Dimension Creation
Dimension Creation
Dimension following the mouse (ctrl toggles) You can decide that the dimension line is positioned according to the cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process. Constant offset between dimension line and geometry The distance between the created dimension and the geometry remains the same when you move the geometry. Default dimension line/geometry distance If you position the dimension according to the cursor, you can define the value at which the dimension is created. If you create associativity between the dimension and the geometry, you can define the value at which the dimension will remain positioned. Associativity on 3D If you click the switch button, the Dimensions associativity on 3D dialog box appears. A link can be applied between a dimension and the 3D part. As a result, when you update the drawing, the dimension is automatically recomputed. If you do not check this option, when you perform the update, you need to re-create the dimension afterwards.
Create driving dimensions The dimensions you will create will drive the geometry.
Dimension Creation
A new field will appear in the Tools Palette during the creation process, allowing you to enter the driving dimension value.
Detect chamfer Automatically detects chamfers so that you can create chamfer dimensions in a single click. As chamfer detection may slow performance down, you may want to deactivate this option for large products or assemblies. By default, create dimensions on circle's Specify whether the dimension you will create between a circle and another element should be on the circle center or on the circle edge.
Move
Activate Snapping (shift toggles) Select to activate the snapping option. Click the Configure button. In the dialog box, specify whether the dimension should be snapped on the grid, or whether the dimension value should be located at its default position between symbols (it will work only if the cursor is between the symbols), or both.
Dimension Creation
Pressing the Shift key allows you to temporarily deactivate or activate this mode. Move only selected sub-part Activate this option if you want to move only a dimension sub-part (text, line, etc.).
Line-Up
You can organize dimensions into a system with a linear offset. The offset will align the dimensions to each other as well as the smallest dimension to the reference element. Default offset to reference This allows you to set the offset between the smallest dimension and the reference element. Default offset between dimensions This allows you to set the offset between dimensions.
Dimension Creation
Align stacked dimension values Lets you align all the values of a group of stacked dimensions on the value of the smallest dimension of the group. Align cumulated dimension values Lets you align all the values of a group of cumulated dimensions on the value of the smallest dimension of the group. Automatically add a funnel Whenever the value of a cumulated dimension requires a funnel to be displayed correctly, lets you have one added automatically.
Analysis Display Mode
Activate analysis display mode Colors can be customized with this option. To activate this mode, select this option and then click the Types and colors button. The Types and colors of dimensions dialog box lets you assign the desired color(s) to the selected dimension types. You will then be able to visualize the different types of dimensions using their assigned colors.
Dimension Creation
Manipulators Settings
Manipulators
These options apply to the Interactive Drafting workbench only. You can decide that you will visualize given manipulators whenever creating or modifying dimensions. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Manipulators tab. It contains several categories of options: q Manipulators
q
Dimension Manipulators
Manipulators
These settings can be used for any type of manipulator (texts, leaders, center lines, dimensions and so forth). Reference size Specify the reference size that should be used for manipulators. In the case of texts, for example, this reference size corresponds to the diameter of the rotation manipulators.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudri0006.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 4:57:28 PM
Zoomable Check this box if you want to make manipulators zoomable.
Dimension Manipulators
These settings let you define which manipulators you will visualize and therefore use when creating and/or modifying dimensions:
Modify overrun If you drag select one overrun manipulator, both overrun extension lines are modified. To modify only the selected overrun extension line, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears. Modify blanking If you drag select one blanking manipulator, both blanking are modified. To modify only the selected blanking, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears. Insert text before Allow inserting a text before, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears. Insert text after Allows inserting a text after, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears. Move value Allows moving the dimension value and only it. Move dimension line Allows moving the dimension line and only it by dragging to the new location. Move dimension line secondary part Allows moving the dimension line secondary part and only it by dragging to the new location. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.
Annotation and Dress-up Settings
Annotation and Dress-up

You can customize given options that will be used when creating annotations. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Annotation and Dress-Up tab. It contains the following sets of options: q Annotation Creation
q
Move 2D Component Creation Balloon Creation
Annotation Creation
In order for these options to be taken into account, the Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles) box must be checked. Note that the option selected in the Activate snapping dialog box will be taken into account. See the Move section. Create text along reference Select this option if you want to create annotation texts along a reference direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a text, the text will be oriented parallel to the line. Text Select this option if you want to create the extremity of text leaders
normal to a reference direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a text with leader, the leader will be normal to the line. Geometrical tolerance Select this option if you want to create the extremity of geometrical tolerance leaders normal to a reference direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a geometrical tolerance, the leader will be normal to the line.
Move
Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles) Select this option to activate snapping. Click the Configure button. In the dialog box that appears, specify whether you want the annotation to be snapped on the grid, according to the orientation, or both. This will apply to the annotations selected in the Annotation Creation area. To deactivate snapping when creating or moving annotations, press the Shift key.
2D Component Creation
Create with a constant size Select this option if you want all 2D component instances to have the same size when you create them, no matter what the view scale is. This lets you create 2D component instances whose size is independent from the view scale so that they always look the same. You can use them as symbols, for example. If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the Create with a constant size setting and the Apply Scale property for the text (in Edit -> Properties): the size of both the 2D component and its text will then be independent from the view scale.
Balloon Creation
3D associativity You can specify what kind of balloons you want to create (using the Balloon command from the Annotation toolbar) or to generate (using the Generate Balloons command from the Generation toolbar). First, select the 3D associativity box to indicate that you want to associate balloons with information from the 3D. Then, select from the list the kind of balloons you want to create or generate: the numbering of parts within an assembly (default option), the instance name or the part number. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.
Administration
Administration Settings
You can customize settings for the management of drawings. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Administration tab. It contains the following sets of options: q Drawing management
q
Style Generative view style Dress-up
Drawing management
Prevent File>New Check this box to make it impossible to create drawings using the File > New command. All drawings will be created using the File -> New From... command instead. Prevent switch of standard Check this box to make it impossible to change standards, i.e. to use a standard other than the one currently defined in the Page Setup dialog box. Prevent update of standard
Administration
Check this box to make it impossible to update standards for the current document in the Page Setup dialog box. Prevent background view access Check this box to make it impossible to access the background view.
Style
Use style values to create new objects Check this box if you want dialog boxes, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette to be pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor) when creating new annotations. In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be disabled during the creation of the annotation. If you leave this box unchecked, annotation dialog boxes, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be pre-filled with the last entered values (except for Texts, Texts with leader, Balloons and Datum features). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be active during the creation of the annotation. If you check this box, you will be able to reset the current style values in dialog boxes at any time using the Reset button.
Administration
Create new sheet from This setting lets you specify if the properties used for creating new sheets should be those defined in the standards or those defined in the first sheet in a drawing. These properties are the scale and the projection method (first or third angle). Select Style if you want the sheet to use the style defined in the standards (in Tools -> Standards -> Drafting -> [StandardName] > Styles -> Sheet). Select First sheet if you want the sheet to use the properties defined in the first sheet in a drawing. For example, you can use this option if you use an existing drawing to create a new one (i.e. when you want the new drawing to have the same properties as the existing drawing). Lock "User Default" Style Check this box to make it compulsory to use User Defaults (i.e., userdefined values set as default). The Styles drop-down list will be set to Only User Defaults and will be inactive so that Original Defaults or User Defaults cannot be selected. This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. Prevent "Set As Default" and "Reset All Defaults" Check this box to use the current defaults and to make it impossible to create, change and reset user defaults (i.e. user-defined values). This disables the Set as Default and the Reset All Defaults commands. This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later.
Generative view style
Administration
Prevent generative view style creation Check this box if you do not want to use generative view styles when creating views. In this case, you will not be able to select a generative view style after having selected a view creation command, which means that the Generative View Style toolbar will not be displayed. (In the case of advanced front views, it is the Generative view style list in the View Parameters dialog box which will not be displayed).
Dress-up
Prevent dimensions from driving 3D constraints Check this box to make it impossible to modify a 3D constraint via a 2D dimension that was generated from it. 4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.
Toolbars
Customizing Toolbars
You can customize the appearance of some fields in the following properties toolbars: Styles, Graphic Properties, Text Properties, Dimension Properties.
1. Right-click the toolbar field you want to customize. A contextual menu is displayed. 2. If necessary, scroll down this contextual menu to display the toolbar customization options.
The customization options that you can apply to the selected field are displayed.
The options available depend on the selected field. For more information on what options will be available for each field, see the table below. 3. Click the option you want. Depending on the option you selected, the corresponding dialog box appears. 4. Enter the appropriate value in the dialog box.
Toolbars
Set text width: sets the width used to display the field in the toolbar, in number of characters to be displayed (based on 'W'). Set list width: sets the width used to display the drop-down list, in number of characters to be displayed (based on 'W'). Set list height: sets the height used to display the list, in number of lines to be displayed (up and down arrows will make it possible to scroll within the list). Icons display: defines whether icons should be displayed in this field, or only in the list, when the list is collapsed. Precision: sets the precision used to display a numerical value in this field, in number of digits after the separator.
5. Click OK to validate.
The table below indicates which fields you can customize in each toolbar, along with what you can customize for each field. Set text width Style toolbar Set list width Set list height Icons display Set precision
Style
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Text Properties toolbar Font Name Font Size Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
Dimension Properties toolbar Tolerance Description Tolerance Numerical Display Description Precision Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes
Graphic Properties toolbar Color Thickness Yes Yes No No No Yes No No No No
Toolbars
Linetype Point type
Yes Yes
No No
Yes Yes
No No
No No
Glossary
Glossary
Numerics
2D component An instance of a 2D element that is stored on a detail sheet. Also called ditto.
A
absolute position active view angle dimension area fill A sheet coordinates. A view in which all the modifications will be performed. For instance, all the 2D geometry and dressup elements that will be added to the draft views to be created. A dimension applied to one or two linear elements or to circular elements. A closed area on which you will then apply graphical dressup element called hatching pattern.
B
background sheet blanking A sheet dedicated to frames and title blocks. A blank added between the dimensioned element on the view and one extremity on the extension line.
C
chained dimension A dimension presentation mode made of a system. A bevelled corner between any types of curves: lines, splines, arcs chamfer and so forth. chamfer dimension A dimension applied to a chamfer. An arc tangent between lines, arcs, circles and any types of curves corner (consecutive or that intersect).
D
datum feature datum target An element defining a contacting surface on a part. An element defining a contacting surface on a part and represented by spherical or pointed locating pins.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driuggl.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 4:59:08 PM
Glossary
detail sheet
A sheet that is used as an intermediate catalog for positioning 2D geometry elements that will be instantiated afterwards. diameter dimensionA dimension representing either a radius or a diameter. distance dimension A dimension representing the dimension between two elements be they linear or circular type. An instance of a 2D element that is stored on a detail sheet. Also ditto called 2D component. document A common unit of data (typically a file) used in user tasks and exchanged between users. When saved on disk, a document is given a unique filename by which it can be retrieved. The root feature. Sheets are aggregated in the drawing. Views are drawing aggregated in the sheets. drawing repository A drawing document containing 2D re-usable components. dress-up A graphical attribute of a 2D element.
F
funnel A representation of the dimensions which allows inserting the dimension value between the dimension symbols.
O
object overrun In the Drafting workbench, there are two kinds of object: activated and selected. The view frame of an activated object is displayed in red. A part of a dimension corresponding to the extended extension line.
P
part A 3D entity obtained by combining different features in the Part Design workbench.
R
radius dimension A dimension applied to a circle, semi-circle or arc of a circle. roughness symbol A symbol that is used for defining a surface.
S
sheet standard A set of views. Several sheets may be created in the Drafting workbench. An international convention that is supported in the Drafting workbench: ANSI, ISO and JIS.
Glossary
T
template text template third angle title block In the Drafting workbench, an object that is included in the document (for example, the title block). Text templates rely on attributes defined in the 3D for technological features. They can be used when creating texts associated to such features. A projection method that allows projecting views from a part according to ISO/ANSI international standards. A frame which contains the title.
V
view frame A square or rectangular frame that contains the geometry and dimensions of the view.
W
welding symbol A symbol that is used for representing welds.
Index
Index
Numerics
2D component creation (annotation and dress-up settings) 2D components creating creating catalogs editing instance properties exploding exposing from a catalog re-using re-using from a catalog 2D geometry, editing feature properties 3D elements intersecting projecting 3D silhouette edges creating projecting
A
adding leaders to annotations administering standard parameters styles administration settings advanced search analysis display mode (dimension settings) analyzing
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugix.htm (1 of 28)10/19/2004 4:59:34 PM
Index
geometry sketch angle dimensions, creating annotating drawings using text templates annotation creation (annotation and dress-up settings) annotation settings annotations activating/deactivating adding leaders editing properties handling leaders modifying positioning overview positioning leader breakpoints querying links standard parameters styles text templates, creating text templates, using Annotations toolbar Approximate views arc, creating area fills arrows associated text, creating associative balloons, creating associative thread dimensions, creating attributes adding links to text replicating for texts Autocad2000 autodetection axis lines
Index
creating creating with center lines axis, creating
B
background view (view and sheet layout settings) balloon creation (annotation and dress-up settings) balloon generation (generation settings) balloons creating creating associative balloons modifying Best Practices DXF/DWG Small Entities STEP Quality of Conversion bisecting line, creating blanking in dimensions, modifying breaking breaking elements
C
catalogs creating exposing 2D components from re-using 2D components from catalogs, storing text templates in CATAnnDefaultStyleMigration CATAnnStandardTools center lines creating with axis lines creating with no reference
Index
creating with reference modifying CGM Export cgm extension CGR views chamfer detecting dimensions, creating with both elements trimmed with no element trimmed with one element trimmed Choice of Standard DXF/DWG circle using coordinates, creating circle, creating closing elements CMG insert colors (geometry creation settings) command 1 Symbol 3D Silhouette Edges Add an Interruption Analysis Display Mode Arc Area Fill Arrow Attribute link Axis Axis Line Axis Line and Center Line Balloon
Index
Bisecting Line Break Center Line Center Line with Reference Chamfer Dimensions Circle Circle Using Coordinates Close Conic Connect (with a spline) Connect (with an arc) Constraint with Dialog Box Construction/Standard Element Coordinate Dimension Coordinate Dimension Table Copy Copy Object Format Create Constraints Create Detected Constraints Create Interruption(s) Cumulated Dimensions Datum Feature Datum Target Delete Dimension Ellipse Equidistant Points Explode 2D Component Expose 2D Component Extend to Center Filter Generated Elements Force Dimension on Element
Index
Force Horizontal Dimension in View Force Vertical Dimension in View Frame Frame Creation Geometrical Constraint Geometrical Tolerance Grid Half Dimension Hide Folding Lines Hole Dimension Table Hyperbola by Focus Infinite Line Intersect 3D Elements Intersection Point Isolate Isolate Text Line Line Normal to Curve Line-Up Mirror Multiple View Projection New New Detail Sheet New View Output Feature Page Setup Parabola by Focus Paste Point Point Using Coordinates Position and Orientation Profile
Index
Project 3D Elements Projected Dimension Projection Point Query Object Links Quick Trim Radius Center Rectangle Remove Interruption(s) Remove One Interruption Re-route Dimension Reset All Defaults Reset with Standard Properties Roughness Symbol Search Set as Default Show Constraints Show Folding Lines Snap to Point Spline Stacked Dimensions Swap to Radius Symbol Shape Symmetrical Extension Symmetry Table Text Text Properties Text Template Placement Text with Leader Thread Thread Dimension Thread with Reference
Index
Three Point Arc Three Point Circle Three Points Arc Using Limits Translation Trim Trim All Elements Trim First Element Trim No Element Tri-Tangent Circle Update View Plane Definition Weld conic curves creating connecting curves with a spline with an arc constraints creating between 2D and generated elements creating quickly creating via a dialog box creating via smartpick setting relations between dimensional constraints constraints creation (geometry creation settings) constraints display (geometry creation settings) Constraints toolbar constraints, driving via dimensions construction element, creating coordinate dimension table coordinate dimensions, creating and modifying copying elements geometrical tolerances
Index
graphic properties copying/pasting elements corner with both elements trimmed with construction lines trimmed with no element trimmed with one element trimmed with standard lines trimmed creating 2D components a point using projection a point using projection along a direction an arc angle dimensions area fills arrows associated text associative balloons on views from products associative thread dimensions axis axis and center lines axis lines balloons bisecting line center lines with no reference center lines with reference chamfer dimensions chamfer with both elements trimmed chamfer with no element trimmed chamfer with one element trimmed circle circle using coordinates component catalogs
Index
conic curves constraints between 2D and generated elements constraints via a dialog box constraints via smartpick coordinate dimensions corner with both elements trimmed corner with no element trimmed corner with one element trimmed cumulated dimensions curvilinear length dimensions datum features datum targets dimensions dimensions along a reference direction dimensions between element and view axis dimensions between intersection points drawings driving dimensions ellipses equidistant points explicit dimensions frames and title blocks free text geometrical tolerances half dimensions holes dimensions table hyperbola by focus infinite line mirrored elements multiple view projection output features overall curve dimensions
Index
points coordinates table quick constraints radius curvature dimensions roughness symbols spline offset stacked dimensions styles tables technological feature dimensions text frames text templates text with a leader threads with no reference threads with reference three point circle views views using folding lines welding symbols welds cumulated dimensions, creating curves connecting with a spline connecting with an arc curvilinear length dimensions, creating customizing administration settings annotation and dress-up settings dimension creation settings general settings generation settings geometry creation settings manipulators settings standard parameters
Index
styles toolbars view and sheet layout settings view generation settings
D
data exchange datum features creating modifying datum targets creating modifying deactivating annotations table rows default properties, setting default values dimension dress-up geometry sheet view callout defining sheets standard formats deleting sheets styles Design mode using detecting chamfer dimension creation (dimension settings)
Index
dimension creation settings dimension generation (generation settings) dimension manipulators (manipulators settings) Dimension Properties toolbar Dimensioning toolbar dimensions along a reference direction angle dimensions associative thread dimensions between element and view axis between intersection points chamfer dimensions coordinate dimensions creating cumulated dimensions curvilinear length dimensions dimension extension line properties dimension line properties dimension text properties dimension tolerance properties editing dimension value properties explicit dimensions half dimensions holes dimensions table lining up (free space) lining up (reference) modifying blanking modifying dimension line location modifying dimension type modifying overrun modifying text before/after modifying value text position
Index
overall curve dimensions pre-defined value formats in standards radius curvature dimensions re-routing searching dimension status setting relations between dimensional constraints specifying value position stacked dimensions standard parameters styles technological feature dimensions tolerance formats in standards value formats in standards drawing management (administration settings) Drawing toolbar drawings creating migrating pre-R11 drawings to use styles dress-up settings standard parameters styles dress-up (administration settings) dress-up generation (view generation settings) Dress-Up toolbar driving dimensions, creating DWG Import DXF/DWG Choice of Standard Export Export unit Export VBScript Macros
Index
Extension Import Import of multiple viewports and layouts Import VBScript Macros Imported Elements Multi-sheet export Report File Trouble Shooting What about the elements you export DXF/DWG CATIA V4 Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG File Size Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG Kanji or unicode characters Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG Small Entities Best Practices DXF/DWG VBScript Macros utility
E
editing annotation leaders dimension value properties images elements trimming elements, closing ellipse, creating equidistant points, creating exact views explicit dimensions, creating exploding 2D components
Index
Export CGM DXF/DWG Export unit DXF/DWG Export VBScript Macros DXF/DWG exposing 2D components from a catalog Extension DXF/DWG extension cgm extension lines, interrupting
F
file, export and import finding text frames creating for text standard parameters frames and title blocks creating frames and title blocks, creating free text
G
general parameters standards general settings generation settings generative view style (administration settings)
Index
geometrical tolerances copying creating modifying geometry analyzing diagnosis geometry (geometry creation settings) geometry creation settings Geometry Creation toolbar geometry generation (view generation settings) Geometry Modification toolbar geometry styles geometry welds, creating graphic properties copying editing Graphic Properties toolbar grid
H
half dimension, creating handling annotation leaders hexagon holes dimensions table, creating hyperbola by focus, creating
I
images editing inserting
Index
overview Import DWG DXF/DWG Import of multiple viewports and layouts DXF/DWG Import VBScript Macros DXF/DWG Imported Elements DXF/DWG importing tables infinite line, creating insert CMG inserting images views in tables interrupting extension lines intersecting 3D elements intersections, isolating isolating intersections projections
K
Knowledgeware activating/deactivating annotations activating/deactivating table rows
L
leaders adding to annotations
Index
handling positioning breakpoints line thickness, standard parameters lines normal to curves, creating lines, creating linetypes, standard parameters line-up (dimension settings) lining up dimensions free space reference
M
managing standards manipulators (manipulators settings) manipulators settings menu bar migrating pre-R11 to drawings using standard-defined styles mirrored element, creating modifying annotation positioning balloons center lines coordinate dimensions datum features datum targets dimension line location dimension text before/after dimension type dimensions overrun and blanking geometrical tolerances sheets
Index
tables move (annotation and dress-up settings) move (dimension settings) multiple view projection creating multiple view projection, creating Multi-sheet export DXF/DWG
N
new sheet (view and sheet layout settings)
O
objects, querying links occlusion culling offsetting operations on profiles, performing orientation of text output features, creating overall curve dimensions, creating overrun in dimensions, modifying
P
parabola by focus, creating patterns editing properties standard parameters point using intersection, creating points coordinates table
Index
points using coordinates, creating points, creating positioning dimension value text leader breakpoints printing after modifying current display settings overview quickly using clipping operator profile creating projections, isolating properties 2D component instance properties 2D element graphic properties 2D geometry feature properties annotation font properties dimension extension line properties dimension line properties dimension text properties dimension tolerance properties dimension value properties pattern properties text properties properties set as default, using
Q
querying object links quick constraints quickly analyzing, geometry
Index
R
radius curvature dimensions, creating raster images, inserting raster views rectangle, creating reframing views Relimitations toolbar replacing text Report File DXF/DWG re-routing dimensions re-using 2D components 2D components from a catalog roughness symbols, creating rows, activating/deactivating in tables ruler (general settings)
S
search (advanced) section/projection callout (view and sheet layout settings) setting default properties settings administration annotation and dress-up dimension creation general generation geometry creation manipulators
Index
view and sheet layout view generation sheet layout settings sheet styles sheets defining deleting modifying simple profiles, sketching sketch analyzing sketching, simple profiles smartpick smartpick, using smartpicking specifying dimension value position spline creating spline offset creating splitting tables stacked dimensions, creating standard element standards annotation parameters annotation styles concepts customizing parameters defining formats dimension parameters dimension styles dimension tolerance formats dimension value formats
Index
dimension value formats (pre-defined ) dress-up parameters dress-up styles frame parameters general parameters geometry styles line thickness parameters linetypes parameters overview pattern parameters pre-defined styles sheet styles structure switching standards syntax for standard editor values tolerance formats (pre-defined ) updating in drawings upgrading view callout styles view generation STEP Quality of Conversion Best Practices storing text templates in a catalog style (administration settings) Style toolbar styles annotations creating deleting dimension dress-up geometry migrating pre-R11 drawings to use styles
Index
overview sheet using view callout switching drawing standards symmetrical elements applying constraints moving symmetrical extension, creating
T
tables activating/deactivating rows creating creating points coordinates table importing inserting views in modifying splitting technological feature dimensions text adding attribute links to associated text creating frames creating free text creating text with a leader editing properties finding and replacing making an existing text associative replicating text and attribute specifying orientation text before/after dimension value, modifying
Index
Text Properties toolbar text templates annotating drawings with creating storing in a catalog threads creating with no reference creating with reference three point circle, creating three points arc using limits, creating three points arc, creating tolerances, pre-defined formats in standards toolbars Annotations Constraints customizing Dimension Properties Dimensioning Drawing Dress-Up Geometry Creation Geometry Modification Graphic Properties Relimitations Style Text Properties Tools Tools Palette Transformations Tools Palette toolbar Tools toolbar tools, using Transformations toolbar
Index
translating elements trimming elements trimming tri-tangent circle, creating Trouble Shooting DXF/DWG DXF/DWG CATIA V4 DXF/DWG File Size DXF/DWG Kanji or unicode characters
U
updating standards upgrading standards using properties set as default styles using smartpick utility CATAnnDefaultStyleMigration CATAnnStandardTools DXF/DWG VBScript Macros
V
vector images, inserting view axis (general settings) view callout styles view creation (view and sheet layout settings) view generation settings standards
Index
view generation (view generation settings) view layout settings view plane defining views creating creating using folding lines defining view plane generating Approximate views generating CGR views generating exact views generating raster views inserting in tables reframing Visual clipping Visualization mode improving performance saving memory
W
welding symbols, creating welds, creating What about the elements you export DXF/DWG
Y
yellow, colors

!!!catia V5R12 Mechanical Design Solutions 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

!!!catia V5R12 Mechanical Design Solutions 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

!!!catia V5R12 Mechanical Design Solutions 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part Design

Dassault Systmes. 1994-2003 All rights reserved.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/prtugCATIAfrs.htm (4 of 5)10/18/2004 7:42:43 PM

Manipulators View/Annotation Plane Glossary Index

Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/prtugCATIAfrs.htm (5 of 5)10/18/2004 7:42:43 PM

Using This Guide Where to Find More Information Conventions

Using This Guide

Using This Guide

Where to Find More Information

Where to Find More Information

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/icons_C2/conventions.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 7:43:22 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/icons_C2/conventions.htm (2 of 3)10/18/2004 7:43:22 PM

"Methodology". "Glossary". "Index".

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/icons_C2/conventions.htm (3 of 3)10/18/2004 7:43:22 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwn.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:43:40 PM

Now, let's get to sketching the profile!

Entering the Part Design Workbench

Entering the Part Design Workbench

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs02.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:07 PM

Entering the Part Design Workbench

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs02.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:07 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs04.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:22 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs04.htm (2 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:22 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs04.htm (3 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:22 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs05.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:39 PM

5. Click OK. The part is drafted:

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs05.htm (2 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:39 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs05.htm (3 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:39 PM

1. Click the Edge Fillet icon

Select the edge to be filleted, that is, to be rounded.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs06.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:48 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs06.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:48 PM

Editing the Pad

Editing the Pad

4. Now select Part Body.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs07.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:54 PM

Editing the Pad

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs07.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:54 PM

Mirroring the Part

Mirroring the Part

2. Click the Mirror icon

The name of this face appears in the Mirroring element field.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs08.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:45:00 PM

Mirroring the Part

For more about mirror, please refer to Mirror.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs08.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:45:00 PM

Sketching a Circle from a Face

Sketching a Circle from a Face

use this circle in order to create a pocket

1. Select the upper face to define the working plane.

2. Click the Sketcher icon

to enter the Sketcher workbench. to create a basic circle.

3. Once in the Sketcher workbench, click this Circle icon

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs09.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:45:08 PM

Sketching a Circle from a Face

6. Click the Exit Sketcher icon

to return to the 3D world. This is your part: